JP2023182790A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To develop a model capable of achieving further innovative game property, in a game machine adopting a concept for creating a game progress state advantageous to a player.SOLUTION: In a game machine, after displaying, on a liquid crystal, a result for showing hitting of a jackpot, a movable object for performance is moved, to thereby enable a player to recognize hitting of a jackpot, and when power discontinuity occurs while the movable object for performance is moved, motion check of the movable object for performance is performed after recovery from the power discontinuity. and motion before the power discontinuity is not executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 243

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a reel-type gaming machine (slot machine), one game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of gaming medals, and multiple symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. The reels in multiple rows are rotated, and as a result of stopping the reels using the reel stopping device (stop button) to stop the rotation, a predetermined symbol appears on the active line. (for example, winning combinations such as "777"), a special gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of small winning combinations, etc. is higher than in the normal state) has a higher profit state for the player than the normal gaming state. ) is common. Here, in a reel-type gaming machine, when images, etc. for presentation to increase the interest of the game are displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal display in synchronization with the rotating and stopping operations of the reels. It is designed so that when you operate the spinning drum stop device etc., you can enjoy predicting the result of the game by comparing the symbols displayed on the spinning drum with the presentation images displayed on the display. There are many things. Additionally, many gaming machines are configured so that if any abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, an error may occur that stops the progress of the game. In addition, in recent pachinko gaming machines, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is performed when a game ball enters the starting hole on the game board (playing area), and if you win the jackpot lottery, you will win the jackpot ( Pachinko gaming machines are the mainstream, in which the player enters a special game mode, opens a big prize opening provided on the game board, and can win a large amount of prize balls. The pachinko gaming machine configured in this manner includes a probability-changing gaming state that increases the probability of winning in the jackpot drawing, and a time-saving gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot drawing. There are also gaming machines that increase the interest of the game by creating game progress states that are advantageous to the player based on these game states.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2001-347000

However, since many such gaming machines have existed in the past, there is a problem in that it is desired to develop a model that can realize even more innovative gaming features.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
A production display section that can display production;
Equipped with movable parts for performance,
has a first performance displayed on the performance display section,
While the first performance is being executed, the player is configured to be able to execute a result-suggesting performance that notifies the player that there is a high possibility that an advantageous result will be given;
During execution of the first performance, the movable object for performance may move in a predetermined movement pattern after the result suggestion performance is executed;
When the power is restored from a power outage, the movable parts for performance are configured to operate according to the operation check pattern.
If a power outage occurs while the movable part for performance is operating in the predetermined movement pattern, the movable part for performance is configured to operate in the operation check pattern after the power is restored, and the movable part for performance is configured to operate in the operation check pattern. This gaming machine is characterized in that the operation related to the predetermined operation pattern is not executed even after the operation of the check pattern is completed.

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize even more novel gameplay in a gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the drum-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list of symbol combinations 1 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the drum-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and bonus appearance rates in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of unrecoverable error processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of internal lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of condition device number management processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel drive control process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram regarding the rotating operation of the reels in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of the push order display in the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the sub-side power-off processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of performance-related determination processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a process for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of AT performance determination processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the process of determining whether or not to allow revival on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of specialization precursor processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the additional special processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of an advantageous BB internal process when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first reel stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the second reel stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the performance-related determination process when the third drum is stopped on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third drum stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of menu screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to the standby screen in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 61 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 63 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 3 is a front view schematically showing the relative positions of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 3 is a side sectional view schematically showing the relative position of the reel and the hopper. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the hopper. FIG. 3 is a front view schematically showing the relative positions of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the arrangement of a medal auxiliary tank HS and a fullness detection electrode DE. It is a schematic diagram showing the size and position of a full detection electrode and screw BS. It is a figure showing the composition of a reel band. It is a figure showing the composition of a reel band. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of freeze execution determination processing at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of freeze execution determination processing at the time of stop on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an image diagram of AT start performance execution in the reel type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 is an example of a status-based notification mode that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 79 is an example of a configuration related to payout that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 80 shows an example 1 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 81 is a second example of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 82 is a third example of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 83 shows an example 4 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 84 shows an example 1 of the operation when operating the payment button, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 85 shows an example 2 of the effect when operating the payment button, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 86 is a third example of the effect when operating the payment button, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 87 shows an example 4 of the effect when operating the settlement button, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 88(a) is a timing chart showing a first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88(b) is a timing chart showing a second aspect of the timing of power supply and power-off of the gaming machine. 3 is a timing chart showing an aspect of the invention. FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89(b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. 3 is a table showing the relationship between power supply state and situation. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process in which the number of credits is added, a process in which game medals are paid out, and a process in which a game medium awarding sound is output. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 95 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 96 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 97 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the start timing of the third push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 100 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including audio when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including audio when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 105 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 106 is an image diagram of the end timing of the third push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 107 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when a push order replay game combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 108 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation when a push order replay game combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 109 is an image diagram of reel stop control in the AT state and changes in the display mode of the push order navigation that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first input sensor and the second input sensor, which is applicable to the drum-type game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of game progress control processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of medal insertion error processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between the detection of game medals by the first input sensor and the second input sensor on the main control board side and the credit addition process, which can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. be. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of error detection by the shoot sensor on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first input sensor, the second input sensor, and the chute sensor, which can be applied to the drum-type game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal return member applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal return member applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals flowing down a medal return member, which is applicable to the drum-type game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a trajectory diagram of game medals paid out to the medal receiving port, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven, which is applicable to the drum type game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is an image diagram of the rotation mode of the disk from the start of driving the hopper motor to the stop of driving the hopper motor, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 shows a main control board in a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during payment processing, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a first pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the sub-control board side. FIG. 123 shows a main control board in a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during payment processing, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a second pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the sub-control board side. FIG. 124 shows the main control board when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes unavailable during the wait period, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a pattern diagram which showed the audio output process by the side of a sub-control board based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 125 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a first pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the main control board side of the device. FIG. 126 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a second pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on control commands transmitted from the main control board side. FIG. 127 is a table regarding the numbers applicable to this example. FIG. 128 is a front view of a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 129 is a front view of a main control board housed in a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 130 is a perspective view and a side view of a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 131 is a structural pattern diagram of a gate portion included in a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an image diagram of the interior of the medal selector when a game medal is inserted, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 133 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the gaming medal credit addition processing that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the gaming medal credit addition processing that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is an image diagram of the inside of the chute main body when game medals are inserted, which is applicable to the drum-type game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 136 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 137 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment and the counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter. FIG. 138 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 139 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the game medal payout number counting process that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a rear view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the prize ball payout unit of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an operational view of the prize ball payout unit of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of NMI interrupt processing (during power outage) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an image diagram of the prize ball payout command and payout related information on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 152 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 153 is a flowchart of ball entry detection processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 154 is a flowchart of a ball entering auxiliary game start opening detection process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a flowchart of the first (second) big winning opening ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a flowchart of the general winning hole entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of ejected ball detection processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a flowchart of a ball entering the out hole detection process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart of electric accessory drive determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 170 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a flowchart of firing control signal output processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 174 is an example of an external terminal transmission content determination table in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 175 is a flowchart of the payout control board side main processing on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a flowchart of error control processing when an abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 177 is a flowchart of error control processing when abnormality is detected in the payout motor operation on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 178 is a flowchart of error control processing when a payout abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 179 is a flowchart of error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 180 is a flowchart of error control processing when a payout motor abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 181 is a flowchart of error control processing when a payout stop abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 182 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information transmission/reception process (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of prize ball payout start/motor drive start) on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 184 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive/at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 185 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 186 is a flowchart of motor error processing on the payout control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 187 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 188 is a flowchart of instruction image display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 189 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 190 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 191 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 192 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 193 is a flowchart of special game effect display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 194 is an example of a right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 195 is a front view and a perspective view of the structure of the big prize opening in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 196 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 197 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 198 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 199 is a flowchart of distributed game execution processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 201 is a performance content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 202 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 203 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the 10th embodiment. FIG. 204 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the 10th embodiment. FIG. 205 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 206 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the 10th embodiment. FIG. 207 is a flowchart of the end demonstration time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 208 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the 10th embodiment. FIG. 209 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating an opening pattern of the big prize opening on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 212 is a flowchart of start demonstration time control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification example from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 213 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 214 is a flowchart of the start demonstration performance execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 215 is an operational diagram of the power-off processing in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment and the counting process of the total discharged game balls in the total discharge confirmation sensor of game balls. FIG. 216 is an operational diagram of the power-off processing in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment and the counting process of the total discharged game balls in the total discharge confirmation sensor of game balls. FIG. 217 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends after the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. be. FIG. 218 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. It is. FIG. 219 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. It is. FIG. 220 is a display example of a performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 221 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 222 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 223 is a flowchart of a ratio calculation process in the second ROM/RAM area that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 224 is a flowchart of ratio display processing in the second ROM/RAM area applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) (variation 1) on the main control board side that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 226 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (variation 2) on the main control board side that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 227 is a test display example of the performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 228 is a test display example of the performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 229 shows a configuration related to stopping and automatic settlement in the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 230 is an image diagram of each mode transition in the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 231 is an image diagram of in-mode item selection in the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 232 is an image diagram when there is a notification in the reel type gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 233 is an image diagram of an effect method in which a movable accessory operates to indicate a win before a win is indicated by the effects and decorative patterns displayed on the effect display device in a Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 234 is an image diagram of an effect method in which a win is also indicated by the movement of a movable accessory after a win is indicated by an effect displayed on an effect display device in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 235 shows a performance that indicates a win by moving the movable accessory when the first decorative pattern becomes a specific mode after displaying a win in the performance displayed on the performance display device in a pachinko gaming machine. It is an image diagram about the method. FIG. 236 shows a performance in which a movable accessory moves before a win is indicated by a performance displayed on a performance display device in a pachinko gaming machine, and a first decorative pattern is displayed in a specific manner to indicate a win. It is an image diagram about the method. FIG. 237 is an image diagram of an effect method in which a plurality of types of movable accessories operate to indicate a win before a win is indicated by the effect displayed on the effect display device in a Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 238 is an image diagram of a performance method in which a performance other than a win is generated by operating one type of movable accessory at a predetermined timing in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 239 is an image diagram of an effect method in which a hit is indicated by the effect displayed on the effect display device in a Pachinko gaming machine, and then a plurality of types of movable accessories are operated to indicate a win. FIG. 240 is an image diagram showing the difference between the operation pattern of the movable accessory at the time of winning and the operation check pattern of the movable accessory at the time of power-off recovery in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 241 is an image diagram 2 showing the difference between the operation pattern of the movable accessory at the time of winning and the operation check pattern of the movable accessory at the time of power-off recovery in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 242 is an image diagram showing the operation check of the movable accessory in the Pachinko game machine when the power is cut off during the operation of the movable accessory and the power is restored. FIG. 243 is an image diagram showing the operation check of the movable accessory in the Pachinko game machine when the power is cut off during the operation of the movable accessory and the power is restored. FIG. 244 is an image diagram of the operation of the movable accessory in the reel-type gaming machine and the performance by the performance display device. FIG. 245 is a timing chart related to the operation timing of the movable accessory applicable to the gaming machine according to this example.

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be explained. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery using an electronic computer, sometimes referred to as a lottery) to determine the content of a game in a reel-type gaming machine, and includes random numbers in a narrow sense. It also includes pseudo-random numbers (for example, the random numbers are hard random numbers, the built-in random numbers generated by the main control chip including the CPU, and the pseudo-random numbers are soft random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of games, specifically "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, replay roles) for transitioning to special games, etc. can be mentioned. "CPU" has the same meaning as is well known in the industry, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, etc. "Power outage" refers to when the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a certain level, regardless of whether the power switch installed on the gaming machine is operated or not. This also includes interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power outage. "ROM" has the same meaning as what is well known in the industry, and it physically holds information (for example, if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied, it is "1", If the device configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM has the same meaning as what is well known in the industry, and stores information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, it will be "1" if it is charged, and "1" if it is not stored). (Note that it is generally configured such that backup power is supplied to some or all of the data held in the RAM in the event of a power outage). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which game medals are easy to obtain and is advantageous for the player (so-called jackpot games, bonus games, type 1 BB, type 2 BB, etc.). ), a re-gaming probability variable gaming state (RT state) in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value, and a winning combination. The order in which the reels are stopped to win a prize, an AT (assist time) state that can notify the stop position, an ART (assist replay time) state that is a combination of the RT state and the AT state, and the like. In addition, even in the normal game state, there are RT state, AT state, high probability normal game state, low probability normal game state, etc. (referred to as lottery state in this example), which have different lottery probabilities for transitioning to the ART state. ). In addition, there is no problem even if the gaming states are combined {Furthermore, these gaming states and functions (for example, the lottery to transition to the AT state, the output of notification instructions related to the order in which the reels stop, etc.) control the progress of the game. There is no problem even if everything is mounted on the main control board. In addition, in this example, the AT-related state and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the AT-related state as "normal gaming state," but the RT state and the AT-related state are The states related to ART may be collectively referred to as the "normal gaming state" or the like. The "winning combination" is the type of conditional device (or conditional device number) that is won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to AT that can execute the push order navigation described later, and even in a game where the condition device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order is won. , if the state related to AT is such that push-order navigation can be performed, the system is configured to be in a "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as the "number of executable notification games" and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "Number of executable notification games" is 1 or more (this may include the game that is "0"), the push order navigation described later may be executed. In addition, the "number of playable information games" includes the difference number of game media obtained based on the winning of a small role (mainly the push order bell role) (the number of pieces that are paid out minus the number of pieces inserted), The number of winnings of the winning position may be used. Further, the "special notification state" is the state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to AT, and in this example, is referred to as the "additional special state". Further, the "specific condition" is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and for example, one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, etc., are the specific conditions. "Type 1 special accessory" is a predetermined accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols for each specified number of winnings, or increases the probability that a conditional device for each specified number of winnings will operate. This is a bonus that can be activated when a bonus is received and can continue to operate until a result of no more than 12 games is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as an RB (Regular Bonus). "Class 1 special accessory continuous activation device" is a device that can operate the 1st class special accessory continuously, and it activates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when a predetermined case occurs. The operation ends at the end of the game, and is sometimes referred to as BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. "Second-class special accessory" is an accessory that activates a conditional device related to winning regardless of the result of the winning lottery, and is activated in predetermined cases to obtain the result of one game. The operation is terminated when the bonus is exceeded, and is sometimes referred to as CB (Challenge Bonus). "Second-class special accessory continuous activation device" is a device that can operate the second-class special accessory continuously, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when a predetermined case occurs. It is sometimes called MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. "Ordinary accessories" are accessories that increase the number of combinations of symbols related to winnings for each specified number, or increase the probability that a conditional device related to winnings for each specified number will operate. This is a bonus that is activated when a combination is displayed and ends when a result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as an SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when the first type BB combination wins, it is regarded as JACIN, and the player is always in RB while the first type BB is being executed. Furthermore, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed during the execution of the first type BB. In addition, an "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state where retraction control that can be performed after a stop operation is not performed, and the reel is stopped at the closest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation was accepted. This is the reel. The "all CB type" is a configuration in which CB is always in progress when performing the second type BB. The “CB transition lottery type” is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

Note that this embodiment is just an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off flags, the name of the means responsible for processing each step, etc. The present invention is not limited to the following embodiments. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be construed as being applied to specific things, and may be combined in any manner. For example, modifications of one embodiment should be understood as modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that combinations of one variation with another variation are also described.

(This embodiment)
Here, before explaining each component, the characteristics (outline) of the reel-type gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be explained. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the reel-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the structure). The reel-type gaming machine P mainly consists of a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet, a base), a reel unit installed inside the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPUMC is mounted) and a sub-control board S (a board on which a sub-control chip SC including a CPUSC is mounted). These will be explained in order below.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for inputting game media, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the gaming state visible, there are a reel window D160, a number of inputs indicator light D210, a start lamp D180, a replay lamp D290, a possible input lamp D300, a special gaming status display device D250, and a number of credits. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, etc. are attached. In addition, there is a medal slot D170 and a bet button D220 as a mechanism for inserting game media and inputting the number of bets (number of bets), and a settlement machine as a mechanism for making it possible to pay out the inserted game media. A button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as mechanisms for operating the reels. Note that the reel-type gaming machine in this embodiment is equipped with a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub-input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. It is equipped with an operation console that protrudes from the side. Each element will be explained in detail below.

<Mechanism for making the gaming status visible>
Next, the main parts of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be explained. The reel window D160 is a transparent member made of synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. In addition, the number of inputs indicator light D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs of the same number as the number of medals currently bet (injecting the game medals necessary to start a game) are lit. It is configured like this. Specifically, the input number indicator D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps): a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and indicates that only one game medal has been bet. In this case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: goes off, and the 3-bet lamp D213: goes off, and when the number of game medals bet is 2, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, and the 2-bet lamp D212 goes off. : lit, 3 bet lamp D213: turned off, and if there are 3 game medals bet, 1 bet lamp D211: lit, 2 bet lamp D212: lit, 3 bet lamp D213: lit (re-game) This does not apply to the next game where the display is stopped (details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is composed of an LED, and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off in certain cases. Further, the replay lamp D290 is constituted by an LED, and is configured to be turned on when the replay is displayed as stopped, and turned off when the next game for which the replay is displayed as stopped is completed. In addition, the insertion enable lamp D300 lights up (or may blink) when the insertion of game medals into the medal slot D170 is valid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is valid, and the insertion of game medals is activated. It is configured to turn off when the bet button D220 is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game status display device D250 is constituted by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts during the special game. It should be noted that the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of payouts will be displayed on the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display section), which will be described later. By displaying this, the player can recognize the total number of payouts made during the special game, and the game machine can be made user-friendly. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured with a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine as medals held by the player. The payout number display device (press order display device) D270 is configured with a 7-segment display, and displays the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button A conditional device in which the winning combination can differ depending on the stopping order of D43 (this is a so-called pressing order combination (also referred to as a pressing order combination), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is different. is generally structured so that the profit rate given to the player (number of coins paid out, subsequent RT status, etc.) can vary. It is configured to be able to notify the stop order (this notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (press order display device) D270 is configured to be able to display two things: the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that provides the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of this display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 controls the game according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as the first information display section) among the AT-related states (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games in which the player can stay in an AT-related state that is advantageous to the player and will be guaranteed if the game progresses (in this example, it may also be referred to as a push-order navigation state or an information game, and the details will be described later). It is configured like this. Note that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a case, the effect display device S40 can be configured to display the number of games that can remain in the AT state, so that the player can The game machine can recognize the number of games for which the advantageous AT-related state is guaranteed, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine. Note that the payout number display device (press order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push order display device.

In addition, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of an LED, and is configured to turn on when it is an "advantageous section" and turn off when it is not an "advantageous section" (as for the timing of turning on and turning off the light, (described later). Here, in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example, like the conventional reel-type gaming machine, game medals are easily acquired and a special gaming state (a so-called jackpot game, a bonus game BB, type 1 BB, type 2 BB, etc.), the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than in the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value. a re-gaming probability variable gaming state (RT state), an AT (assist time) state that can notify the stopping order and stop position of the reels for winning the winning combination, and a state in which the RT state and the AT state are different from each other. A composite ART (assisted replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "gaming states", one of the three "gaming sections": "normal section", "standby section", and "advantageous section" can be set. In this example, a "standby section" is not set, but either a "normal section" or an "advantageous section" is set. Among these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "gaming sections." For example, the "gaming state" is in the AT state or the ART state. It is associated with an “advantageous section”. That is, when the "gaming state" is in the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, but as will be described later, the setting control of the "gaming section" is also the setting control of the "gaming state". Similarly, since this is done on the main control board side that controls the game progress, whether or not the game progress situation is relatively advantageous for the player can be determined by the lighting/extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. This can be conveyed to the players without any falsehoods or falsehoods. As will be explained later, if the "advantageous section" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit for the number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal section" will be forcibly set. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (the information for maintaining the state during AT is cleared and initialized), changing the "gaming section" that is set will also affect the transition of the "gaming state". As a result, it is possible to automatically prevent the gambling nature from increasing significantly due to "gaming states" such as the AT state and the ART state, which have a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As mentioned above, if the "advantageous section" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the conditions for ending the "advantageous section" are not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the drum-type gaming machine according to this example is "the push that allows you to obtain the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts among the small winning combinations that make up the pushing order winning combination (the winning combination with pressing order)". Execute the order navigation once (for example, if there are 7, 3, and 1 small roles as the minor roles that make up the push order role, the push order navigation that allows you to obtain the 7 pieces with the highest number of paid out pieces) If there is a push order combination in which you can get 7 or 1 card depending on the order you press, and a push order combination in which you can get 3 cards depending on the order you press, the push order navigation that allows you to get 3 cards is referred to here. (Does not apply to the push order navigation)" or "Win any of BB, RB, MB" and "Any ending condition (not winning the 40G1 set loop lottery (AT), fixed 32G The completion condition is to satisfy the "progress (fake signs)" or "advantageous section 1500G". In addition, in the case of a specification in which there is no push order Bell combination (for example, there is a push order for replay to transition to RT state, but there is no minor combination in which the number of coins paid out varies depending on the push order), The condition for ending the advantageous section of ``one press order navigation that allows you to obtain the small winning combination with the largest number of paid out pieces'' is excluded. In addition, in this embodiment, since the small roles that make up the push order combination include small roles that correspond to 11-card roles and small roles that correspond to 1-card roles, "Execution of the push order navigation that allows you to get a small winning combination once" refers to notifying you of the pushing order that allows you to get 11 medals (11 winning combinations).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, the main parts of the mechanism for making it possible to input game media will be explained. The medal slot D170 is a slot for game medals, and the game medals inserted into the slot in a state where medals can be accepted are guided into the inside of the gaming machine. Further, inside the gaming machine, there are provided sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, including an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s, which are used to detect the insertion of medals into the gaming machine. When it is determined that the game medals have been inserted normally, the inserted medals can be detected as betted medals. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to allow the player to bet stored medals (credit medals) by operating the bet button D220. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and by operation, it becomes possible to refund the stored medals (credit medals) and/or bet medals to the player. There is. Note that the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to be able to start the operation of the reels by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and is configured to be able to sequentially stop the operation of the reels by operating each stop button. has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be explained with reference to the perspective view of FIG. 2 showing the internal structure of the reel-type gaming machine P with the front door DU opened. On the front door DU, as a mechanism to increase the interest of the game, there is a performance display device S40 for displaying performances such as preview performances and background performances, and a game effect lamp D26 (non-functional) that can be lit in various lighting modes. ), door board D for signal relay, medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, middle panel (middle decorative panel), which is a member made of synthetic resin, etc. , an upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, a movable accessory YK used as a preview effect, etc. are provided. In addition, in this example, the movable accessory YK is provided above the effect display device SG (the initial position is the upper part of the effect display device SG), so it is illustrated with a dotted line. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part of the back side of the front door DU so that a display section that displays effects etc. can be viewed through a see-through area formed on the upper panel. In addition, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the reel-type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have decorative lamps on the right side and the left side, respectively, with the lower panel D140 in between. A unit D150 is provided, and LED lamp units S10 are provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit). ). Further, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back side of the front door DU, and this door board D is provided with input signals such as the stop button D40, the start lever D50, and the payment button D60. It has the function of a relay board which directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M, which will be described later. In addition, corresponding to the medal slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door board D on the back side of the front door DU, and is capable of detecting medals inserted from the medal slot D170 and easily detecting the medals. It has a function of conducting proper authentication, guiding proper medals to a hopper H40 described later, and returning improper medals to a medal receiving tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door board D. The middle panel is a portion above the operation console and below the top panel D130, and is a panel portion including the above-mentioned reel window. In addition, the sub-input button SB and cross key SB2 attached to the console D190 described above are used to perform operations on the menu screen described later and button-pressing effects on the sub-control board S side (repeatedly-pressing the sub-input button SB). This is a member used for the progress of mini-games (for example, the performance of success or failure of entering the "AT state"), etc. The front door DU of the reel-type gaming machine P includes a medal receiving tray D230 for receiving game medals (or sometimes simply referred to as medals) released from the ejection port D240, and a medal tray D230 that can detect the open/closed state of the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and by inserting a key (door key) that matches the shape of the keyhole D260 into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}, It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the door key is configured to be able to be released from an error state (door opening error, etc.) by inserting it into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. There is. Further, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 lights up (or blinks). ), it is possible to make the player perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is valid. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60 is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and indicates to the player that the operation of the stop button D40 is valid by the presence or absence and/or color of the stop button lamp S60 being lit (or blinking). can be perceived. Note that since the configuration is such that only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 lights up in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is disabled. , when the middle stop button D42 is enabled and the right stop button D43 is enabled, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is lit, and the right stop button D42 is turned off. The three stop button lamps S60 are configured to be lit in different ways, such as when the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43 is lit. In addition, by changing the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (it may be made different such as lighting/blinking, or may be made different such as slow blinking/high speed blinking), the push order navigation is executed. In the game, the player may be configured to easily identify the stop button that should be operated at the moment. For example, if all the reels are spinning, the correct pressing order is "left → middle → right" ( If you win the push order bell that has the maximum number of coins paid out, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button will blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button will blink. When the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reels, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off, and the button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button is turned off. The stop button lamp may be configured to blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be lit in blue.

Next, the back box (also referred to as a cabinet or base) and each device installed in the back box will be explained. A reel unit is attached to approximately the center of the back box so that a part of the reel unit is visible through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (such as a stepping motor) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel part is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of patterns are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel part (on the reel band MO). Based on the operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, the reel unit is configured to be able to rotate and stop the respective reel units. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and when the LEDs are turned on, the outer periphery of the reel The outer periphery of the reel section is configured so that it can be visually recognized as if it were illuminated by the light that has passed through it. Further, above the reel M50, a rotating drum board K, which will be described later, is stored for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53).

Further, above the reels M50, a main control board M, which will be described later and controls the entire game, is stored, and on the left side of the reels M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, is stored therein, and which controls various effects performed using the above. The main control board M includes a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset switch that can change setting values, cancel errors, etc. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting/reset button M30 are not shown, but they may be provided at an appropriate position on the main control board M (i.e., if the front door DU is not opened). (If not, it is sufficient if it is located in a location that is difficult to access manually).

Below the reel M50, there is provided a hopper H40 where the inserted game medals are collected, a medal payout device H that pays out the game medals, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire reel type game machine P. E is stored. The game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are dispensed from the discharge port D240. Further, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the drum-type gaming machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (sometimes referred to as the power supply unit E). Note that details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 inside the reel-type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an input reception sensor D10s that serves as a path for game medals inserted from the medal input port D170 near the door board D, and below the input reception sensor D10s, the game medals are transferred to a discharge port D240. A coin shooter D90 and the like are provided for guiding the coin. The input reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medals input from the medal slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and only accepting game medals that conform to the standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals do not conform based on this function. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been removed are configured to be returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. When the player inserts game medals before operating the start lever D50 (while inserting game medals is valid), the game medals are sorted by the input acceptance sensor D10s, and only those that meet the specifications are selected. Medals that are thrown into the hopper H40 and do not meet the specifications are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, if a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of game medals is not valid), the inserted game medal is passes through the coin shooter D90 and is returned to the discharge port D240. Furthermore, inside the input reception sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path), there is provided a sensor related to medal input, which will be described in detail later. and a second input sensor D30s, and the signal thereof is supplied to a main control board M, which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to medal insertion will be explained in detail. The game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The input reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when a game medal passes, two protruding mechanisms are pressed down and turned on, allowing the game medal to pass through the passage normally. . In addition, with this configuration, if a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not meet the standards, for example, one that is smaller in diameter than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms will be pressed down. Not done. Since such medals cannot maintain an upright state, they cannot pass through the passage (the medals fall down) and are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured so that it can be determined that there is an error (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) if the input reception sensor D10s continues to be on for a predetermined period of time or more. .

When the game medal passes through the blocker D100 normally, it passes through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s immediately after passing. These input sensors (first input sensor D20s and second input sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (arranged adjacently at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of game medals), and each sensor is turned on.・Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition order of the on/off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on/off time. It is composed of

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be explained in detail using the front view and top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. 4. The medal payout device H is operated when the settlement button is operated in a state where credits (gaming medals electronically stored inside the gaming machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start a game) are present. It will be activated when game medals are paid out due to winning or winning. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release biasing means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the release port D240. The dispensing sensor (the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on/off status of each sensor (the on/off status of the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s) It is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the order in which the combination of off and on transitions, etc.) and the time during which the switch is on and off. More specifically, for example, when the game medals normally pass through the game medal outlet H60, the discharge biasing means H70 changes from the state where the first payout sensor H10s=off and the second payout sensor H20s=off to the state where the second payout sensor H20s=off. 1 payout sensor H10s=off・2nd payout sensor H20s=off→first payout sensor H10s=on・2nd payout sensor H20s=off→first payout sensor H10s=on・2nd payout sensor H20s=on→first payout The sensor state transition is sensor H10s=off, second dispensing sensor H20s=on→first dispensing sensor H10s=off, second dispensing sensor H20s=off, so if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , an example of configuring it to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the reel-type gaming machine in this embodiment. In the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specified number (the maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) is 3, and the number of pieces on the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 is all 20 pieces. , the valid line on which winning is determined is one line: "left reel M51 upper row, middle reel M52 middle row, right reel M53 lower row." The maximum number of coins to be paid out is 11, and the minimum number of coins to be paid out is 1 (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of coins to be paid out will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (draw-in priority order) is "Re-gaming role → Small role (Bell, Watermelon, etc.) → Bonus". For example, if a re-gaming role and a bonus are realized at the same time, , symbol combinations that will be replayable combinations are stopped and displayed, and bonuses cannot be won. In addition, if Bell and Watermelon are established, if you press the stop button at a position where both can be drawn (within 4 frames from the winning stop position), priority will be given to the small role with the highest number of payouts. It is configured to be retractable. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel may be changed (for example, to 21 frames) or the configuration of effective lines may be changed (for example, 5 lines with 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if you change the line to one line (left reel M51 lower row, middle reel M52 middle row, right reel M53 upper row). In addition, in particular, as a pull-in control when a pressing order minor winning combination that gives different benefits to the player depending on the pressing order is won, a minor winning that will pay out a large number of coins if operated in a predetermined correct pressing order. (number of sheets priority control), and if the incorrect press order is different from the correct press order, it can be stopped and displayed (within 4 frames from the stop operation). Control (number priority control) is performed to draw in symbols that increase the probability of winning (out of a plurality of possible winning symbol combinations, the probability of winning is the highest) among the arranged symbols.

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the reel type gaming machine in this embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of symbols on the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 is 20 (numbers 0 to 19), and the symbols are "Black Seven", "White Seven", " There are 10 types: "Sheep", "Blank", "Bell", "Replay A", "Replay B", "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B", and "Cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute a winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes a winning combination that includes "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B, Replay A, Blank" is replay 02. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem in increasing, decreasing, or changing the types of symbols.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device, and as will be described later, any of the symbol combinations may be selected depending on the stopping order and stopping position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. The system is configured such that one symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (the one line mentioned above). Furthermore, even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the active line, from the player's point of view, the configuration is such that it is easy for the same type of symbols to be aligned in a row on lines other than the active line (in the case of watermelon, it is arranged in the middle row). It is structured so that three watermelon symbols line up in a straight line somewhere on the reels, such as in a horizontal line). In addition, in this embodiment, by combining symbols that form the first type BB combination (this is an accessory continuous activation device related to the so-called first type special accessory, hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as the BB combination), "Sheep, Sheep, Sheep" which is the first type BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A and ends when more than 264 pieces are paid out), and type 1 BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B and payout of 132 pieces) "Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven" which will end if the payout exceeds 132 pieces), and "White Seven, White Seven, It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In addition, in this embodiment, if the first type BB winning combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), during the execution of the BB, in all games during the BB, one The system is configured to refer to a lottery table and draw winning combinations (small prizes, replayed prizes) other than the prize money (a method that does not change the table to be referred to when drawing prizes during one BB run (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first type BB winning combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table referred to when drawing the winning combination can be changed during execution of one BB. Furthermore, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination corresponding to numbers 14 to 16 that results in replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the system is configured to shift to RT0 (for details on the RT state, (described later). Note that since "RT0" is a more disadvantageous RT state for the player than "RT1," the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" is sometimes referred to as a fall. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes replay 05 corresponding to number 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the number 18 is When the symbol combination that becomes the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, "White Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, if the push order bell, which is a condition device for "Win-A1" to "Win-A6" (described later), is won, if the reels are stopped in the push order that is most advantageous for the player, numbers 21 to 27 The symbol combinations corresponding to "Win 01" to "Win 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out. However, if the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order that is most advantageous for the player, , symbol combinations "Win 08" to "Win 11" corresponding to numbers 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the same figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell -- Bell" corresponding to number 23 is the active line of left reel M51 and right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained no matter which symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in this embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as the winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as the winning number hereinafter. In this embodiment, re-gaming combinations are provided from re-gaming-A to re-gaming-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the stopping order and position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 are Accordingly, the replay combinations to be stopped and displayed can be different. Here, in this embodiment, as shown in the "condition device" item in the rightmost column, a plurality of It is configured so that various types of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and among the plurality of types of condition devices, the condition devices that have the same winning number are grouped together, and the third column from the right is "Condition device (name)". It is illustrated in the item. Specifically, for example, in "Re-gaming - A" which is the condition device corresponding to winning number 1, "Re-gaming 01'', ``Replay 02'', and ``Replay 03'', three types of condition devices are configured so that they can be stopped and displayed. Note that the "condition device (name)" may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a conditional device related to replaying such as "Replay 01" may be referred to as a replaying combination, and a conditional device such as "Win 01" in which game medals are paid out upon winning may be referred to as a minor winning combination. A conditional device, such as "Type 1 BB-A", which is stopped and displayed to start a BB, is sometimes referred to as a BB combination. In addition, if winning numbers 21-23 and 25-27 are won, the BB role and the minor role will be won at the same time, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the won minor role will stop. If you operate the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 at a position where they can be displayed, the symbols corresponding to the BB role will not be stopped and displayed, but the symbols corresponding to the minor role will be stopped and displayed, while the symbols corresponding to the minor role will be stopped and displayed. If you operate the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be pulled in), the symbol corresponding to the small role does not stop and display, but the symbol corresponding to the BB role is configured to stop displaying. Specifically, for example, if you win "1st type BB-B + prize-winning-C" which is the condition device of winning number 21, you will receive a cherry which is "prize 12" or "prize 13" and "1st type BB -B" and the black seven can be displayed in a stopped state. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) at the first stop, symbol numbers 0 to 4 are displayed in the upper row of left reel M51 (see Figure 6). If the left stop button D41 is operated at the timing when the reel (refer to the reel arrangement of ``Win 12'' is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53. (2) If the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located in the upper row of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "Win 13" will be displayed in the upper row of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to is stopped, and "Win 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop position of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) If you operate the left stop button D41 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located in the upper row of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “1” will appear in the upper row of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" will stop. (3-2) If you operate the middle stop button D42 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle row of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, “1” will appear in the middle row of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" stops, and then, at the third stop, operate the right stop button D43 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the bottom of the right reel M53. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" will stop at the bottom of the right reel M53, and the BB combination will be stopped and displayed. (3-3) If you operate the middle stop button D42 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" will appear in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the conditional devices will be stopped and displayed.

Next, in the "Role" item, the role of the "condition device (name)" is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to winning number 1 is displayed in the order in which the stop button is pressed. Regardless, it is a condition device related to re-gaming in which re-gaming combinations that do not change to RT state are stopped and displayed, and "reverse push white 7 set replay" corresponding to winning number 2 is a condition device related to re-gaming where the re-gaming combination that does not change to RT state is stopped and displayed. This is a condition device related to re-gaming in which re-gaming combinations whose state does not change are displayed in a stopped state. The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2 on the middle reel M52, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 on the left reel M51, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 on the left reel M51 stop at the operation timing when they are located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "white sevens" are stopped and displayed at the bottom of the right reel M53, middle reel M52, and left reel M51, and from the player's perspective, it is configured so that the white sevens appear to be lined up in the bottom row. There is. In addition, in the game where you won Replay-B and won the AT add-on lottery, you could win the AT add-on lottery by executing a direction (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "white seven" by pushing backwards. The player is configured to be able to notify the player of this fact. "Sequential press black 7 set replay" corresponding to winning number 3 is a condition device related to replay in which replay combinations whose RT state does not change are stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. (stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 on the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 on the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" will be displayed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. are displayed in a stopped state, and from the player's perspective, it appears as if the black sevens are lined up in the lower row. In addition, in the game where you won the replay-C and won the AT additional lottery, you could win the AT additional lottery by executing a production (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "black seven" in order. The player is configured to be able to notify the player of this fact.

In addition, "RT maintenance RP1** (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel should be left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button should be operated) This is a conditional device in which the replay combinations that are stopped and displayed may be different depending on whether the replay combination is stopped or displayed, and if the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not change to replay 01, replay 02, or replay 03. is displayed in a stopped state, and when the first stopped reel is set to the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, a re-game 04 in which the RT state can change from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP*1* (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel should be left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button should be pressed) This is a conditional device in which the re-gaming combinations that are stopped and displayed can be different depending on whether the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed, and when the first stopping reel is the middle reel M52, re-gaming 03 whose RT state does not change is stopped and displayed, and the first When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, re-game 04 in which the RT state can change from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP**1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel should be left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button should be pressed) This is a conditional device in which the re-game winning combinations that are stopped and displayed may be different depending on whether the re-playing combination is stopped and displayed.If the first stopping reel is the right reel M53, re-playing 01 or re-playing 03 where the RT state does not change will be stopped and displayed. When the first stop reel is set to the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, re-game 04 in which the RT state can change from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination can be different depending on which of the six choices the reel stop order is made. For example, if it is "Left reel M51:1, Middle reel M52:2, Right reel M53:3" and it is "123", it will stop in the pressing order of "Left reel M51 → Middle reel M52 → Right reel M53". For example, in the case of "Winning A-1" (winning number 7), if you stop in the order of "123" = "Left → Middle → Right" (correct answer in the order of presses), the maximum number of coins earned is The symbol combination that results in "winning 01" that allows you to win 11 game medals will be stopped and displayed. Note that "123" in "Press order bell 123" indicates the push order (reel stop order) that can obtain the maximum number of coins for that winning number. In addition, if the reels are stopped in a push order other than the order in which the maximum number of coins can be obtained, that is, if the push order is not correct, one coin will be paid out. Then, in the AT-related state such as "AT in progress", you can navigate the push order of the replaying combinations and the push order of the bell (display the push order that gives the highest profit on the push order display device D270), and select "Normal gaming state". It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit rates for players who do not navigate the push order for AT-related states such as ``. Note that the state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to winning number 13 allows you to obtain the maximum number of 11 game medals even if any of winning numbers 04 to 07 stops, that is, the maximum profit is achieved regardless of the order in which you press them. This is a conditional device that can be obtained, and is sometimes referred to as a bell that can be pressed in any order. In addition, "Watermelon A", which corresponds to winning number 15, is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can easily line up in parallel lines. For example, the winning number 60 in FIG. 14, three watermelons A line up in the middle row of each reel. In addition, "Watermelon B", which corresponds to winning number 16, is configured so that it is easy to line up three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) in a diagonal line; for example, the winning number 66 in FIG. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B in the upper row of the left reel M51, watermelon B in the middle row of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A in the lower row of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium-weak rare small winning combination (diagonal bell alignment)", which corresponds to winning number 17, is a conditional device in which 3 bells can be aligned on the active line, and the details will be described later, but the win is won during the BB. This is a conditional device by which an AT additional lottery is executed. In addition, the "BB medium strong rare small win (all V-shaped bells)" corresponding to winning number 18 is a conditional device in which bells can be stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the upper row of the right reel M53. Although the details will be described later, this is a conditional device in which an AT additional lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

Next, in the item "Bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned for each winning number. In this embodiment, the winning number that does not include a bonus (BB role) will have the bonus winning information as 0, and the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) will be the winning number that includes type 1 BB-A (19). 1, bonus winning information for winning numbers (20 to 23) that include type 1 BB-B, 2, bonus winning information for winning numbers (24 to 27) that include type 1 BB-C, and 3 It is said that By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB has been established or not and which BB combination has been won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item "Winning/re-gaming winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned for each winning number. In this embodiment, winning numbers that do not include a replay win or a small win (winning number 0 corresponding to a loss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to a bonus) are set to have winning/replay winning information of 0. , 1 to 18 winning/replay winning information is distributed for each condition device for winning numbers that include replay winnings or small winnings. By storing the winning/re-gaming winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which re-gaming combination or minor winning combination has been won. The details of winning/replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item "Performance Group Number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the sub control board S side is configured to be able to determine the effect to be executed. Note that the details of the performance group number will be described later.

Next, in the "ball group number" field, numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the ball output group number, and uses the stored ball output group number when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery) to execute lottery processing related to AT. The program can reduce the data capacity. Incidentally, even if the condition device with the ball group number 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery will not be executed. On the other hand, if a conditional device with a payout group number other than 0 wins, an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery can be executed. The details of the ball group number will be described later. Furthermore, even if a conditional device with a ball group number of 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery may be executed. In such a case, the ball group number is 0. It is preferable to configure the system so that if the AT lottery or AT additional lottery is executed after a device with a condition of 0 is won, the lottery result is always a loss (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 shows the lottery probability when the winning numbers (also referred to as condition device numbers, winning roles) and bonuses (also referred to as BB, BB role) regarding the small role and replay role in this embodiment are determined by the role lottery means. This is a list showing the winning rate (also referred to as winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of winning numbers is illustrated.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1", and "RT2" when the BB is not activated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of winning combinations (in particular, replayed combinations) can vary depending on the RT state, The occurrence rate is higher in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "Re-gaming 04" (so-called falling re-gaming combination, which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6, and the symbol corresponding to the re-gaming combination in the situation where it is "RT1" and the bonus has not been won) When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" from now on) is mainly won in "RT1", and almost never appears in "RT0". In addition, in "RT2", "re-game 04" which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "re-play 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. In addition, when "Re-gaming 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it has shifted to "RT0", that is, the falling effect which is the effect notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40 ``Unfortunate'') is executed, and when ``Re-game 04'' is stopped and displayed at ``RT0'', the falling effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, even though "Re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, the falling effect is not executed, so it can be recognized that the BB has been won, which increases the interest of the game. You can increase your sexuality. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the sound effect output when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed and the replay combination other than "Replay 04" (for example, "Replay The sound effect that is output when "01") is stopped and displayed may be configured to be different, and by such a configuration, the player can recognize that "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases where there is an AT-related state in which push-order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state", sometimes referred to as a non-AT gaming state), and an AT-related state where push-order navigation can occur (for example, "normal gaming state", sometimes referred to as a non-AT gaming state). The player may stay in "RT1" in both the "AT in progress state" (sometimes referred to as the "AT gaming state") and the "AT playing state". At this time, when a winning number that has the possibility of transitioning (falling) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect will be played that indicates that the RT state may fall when in a non-AT gaming state. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the gaming state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, when in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and when the replay winning combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed) It may also be configured to notify the order navigation. This allows the player to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is announced, being careful not to fall out of the RT state. In addition, "Re-gaming 05" which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 2 or 3 (re-gaming combination which can notify you that you have won the AT additional lottery when it is stopped and displayed in AT state) is mainly "RT1". It appears in this state, and almost never appears in other RT states. Incidentally, the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combinations that become the re-gaming combinations will be described later. Furthermore, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 are configured to execute a push order navigation that informs the player of the most advantageous reel stop order. . Note that there is no problem in changing the lottery probability as appropriate. Moreover, in this embodiment, the bonus is configured to overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with a portion of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which a bonus and a small win overlap.

In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not activated, the BB winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single winning number that does not overlap with the minor winning numbers) If the BB role is won (sometimes referred to as a single BB role or a single BB role), the new winning of the BB role will be invalidated, and only the winning of the minor role will be valid. Specifically, for example, if you are "RT2" and have won (carried over) the 1st type BB-A, and you win the ``1st type BB-C'' with winning number 24, , Type 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 will be invalidated. In other words, the situation is similar to the case where the winning number 0 "loses" and wins. In addition, the 1st type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be won. In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not activated, the small winning numbers 21-23 and winning numbers 25-27 and the BB winning numbers are different. In the event that a duplicate condition device is won, the new winning of the BB winning combination will be invalidated and only the winning of the minor winning combination will be valid. Specifically, for example, if you are "RT2" and have won (carried over) 1st type BB-A, you win ``1st type BB-B + prize-C'' with winning number 21. In this case, the first type BB-B related to the winning number 21 will be invalidated, and only the winning prize-C will be valid. In other words, the situation is similar to the case where winning number 14 "Win-C" is won. In addition, the 1st type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be won. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to small winnings, and may overlap with a part of the replay winning combination. For example, some of the replay winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus winning combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device that includes the RT transition replay (a re-gaming role that can change the RT state), the bonus can be won even when the conditional device that includes the RT transition replay is won. Even if there is a possibility that the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, making it possible to give players expectations. In addition, when configured in this way, the RT state is controlled so as not to shift even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, even though the player should have transitioned to an RT state (shifted to an RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), the replay probability has not become low (he frequently wins replays), etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning a bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" when the BB is activated will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, during BB operation, winning number 13 "common bell", winning number 17 "BB medium-weak rare small combination (all diagonal bells)", winning number 18 "BB medium-strong rare small combination" It is structured so that three small winning combinations can be won, ``(V-shaped bells aligned)'', and ``BB medium-weak rare small winnings (diagonal bell alignment)'' during the operation of the BB won in the ``AT state''. Or, if the player wins the "BB medium-strong rare small win (all V-shaped bells)", an AT additional lottery is executed (details will be described later).

In addition, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the small role appearance rate when the setting value is 1, and for the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT status. , as shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (in this example, six levels). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is 3204. is 4504, and the configuration is such that the higher the setting value, the higher the appearance rate. With this configuration, for example, if a player plays a game while counting the number of times a common bell appears (number of wins), the common bell will be won frequently, and the number of times the common bell will be won will increase. It is possible to proceed with the game while having expectations that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball payout rate. Note that the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the setting value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, AT additional lottery, and high probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, will not be executed. It is configured so as not to affect the state transition lottery (also referred to as the AT-related lottery).

The middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when the push order navigation is available. In the same figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as in the "AT state", the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out based on winning minor roles, also called the expected number of gaming media obtained in one game) and the expected increase/decrease value of medals per game ( This is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a 3-bet bet.If it is larger than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase, while if it is smaller than 1, the expected value The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). The average number of payouts per game is calculated as follows: "Total number of replay winning combinations (total number of winning numbers 1 to 6) x number of payouts for replaying winning combinations (3) + minor winning combination (11) The sum of the numbers placed (minor role appearance rate) for the winning combination (sum of the numbers placed for winning numbers 7 to 16) x the number of payouts in the small role (11-card role) (11 pieces) / the sum of all the numbers placed (65536) )" can be calculated as follows. Further, the expected increase/decrease value of medals per game can be calculated as follows: "Average number of payouts per game/Number of medals inserted per game (3)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of gaming media inserted when playing one game) is 3, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, an increase or decrease in medals per game is expected. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, "RT1" has the relatively largest expected value of medal increase/decrease per game. Note that the numerical values in the figure do not take into account increases or decreases in medals due to bonuses. That is, if the game is played in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as a case of operation in an optimal operation mode or a case of operation in an advantageous operation mode), the number of medals will increase in "RT1". In addition, in "RT0" and "RT2", although not shown, in a situation where push order navigation is not occurring, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game is a value smaller than 1, and the medal will continue to decrease. In addition, in this embodiment, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game is larger than 1 when push order navigation is available in "RT0" or "RT2", but this is not limited to this. ” or “RT2”, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game when push order navigation is available may be configured to be smaller than 1. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes a replaying role is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3 coins) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but when calculating the expected value of medal increase/decrease in this embodiment, The calculation is based on the assumption that 3 coins will be paid out. Note that one game may be referred to as one game.

In addition, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0", and 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1". When is "RT2", it is 3.67137146. In addition, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0", and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1". is 1.223790487 when it is "RT2", and when the push order navigation is available, the RT state "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. Note that the numerical value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small roles and replay roles mentioned above are just examples. (expected medal increase/decrease value) may be configured to be less than 1. By configuring it like this, in a situation where the push order navigation occurs and in the case of "RT2" (when BB is internally established), if the bonuses are not arranged in a game where the bonuses can be arranged. Also, the number of medals you have will gradually decrease, and if you are in a situation where push order navigation occurs and you are in "RT2" (when BB is internally established), you may intentionally play games where you can collect bonuses. By not arranging bonuses, you can prevent strategies that increase the number of medals you have. Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of losing in "RT2" to be higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations (Win-A1 to Winning-I) in "RT2". It is preferable to set the winning probability of the re-gaming combination so that it is designed so that the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is designed to be high. (It is preferable to design it so that it does not become too much.) In addition, in this example of "RT2", the total winning probability of all small winning combinations is 18784/65536, the total winning probability of all replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is: 34251/65536 (see Figure 11), and is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning by adding up all the small winnings.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-A is assigned the same number 40 for all settings 1 to 6. Further, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-C is assigned the same number 160 for all settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is 160 for setting 1, 180 for setting 2, 200 for setting 3, and 200 for setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is assigned a different number depending on the setting value. In this way, 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C are BBs with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C are sometimes referred to as BB with no setting difference or bonus with no setting difference). The first type BB-B functions as a BB with a setting difference (the first type BB-B is sometimes referred to as a BB with a setting difference or a bonus with a setting difference). Furthermore, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-A, Type 1 BB-B, and Type 1 BB-C is uniform regardless of the RT status (between "RT0" and "RT1"). Note that the appearance rate of type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C (total) is the same regardless of the setting value, but the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B (total) differs depending on the setting value. Note that the total appearance rate as the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is the same even if the setting values are different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to differ depending on the setting value, and in this way Even when configured, the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference.

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the reel-type gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12. First, the drum-type game machine according to the present embodiment has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a drum board K, a power supply board E, a relay board IN, A setting key switch M20, a setting/reset button M30, etc. are connected so as to be able to exchange data. In addition, the solid line part in the figure shows the movement related to data exchange, and the broken line part in the figure shows the power supply route. Note that the power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN or the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, main game section) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game played in the rotary gaming machine P. The main control board M is equipped with a main control chip C, and the main control chip C is connected to a CPU 100 (sometimes also referred to as CPUMC), a built-in ROMC 110, a built-in RAMC 120, etc. so that data can be exchanged with each other via a bus. It has been installed. Then, the main control board M receives a signal etc. indicating that the start lever D50 etc. has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and then sends the sub control board S, the door board D, and the rotation drum board. The operations of these various boards are controlled by outputting control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S (for example, by outputting control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S is able to execute the push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board (sometimes referred to as sub-control means, sub-board, sub-control means, sub-board, sub-gaming section) S is also equipped with a sub-control chip SC, similar to the main control board M described above. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPUSC 100, ROM, RAM, etc., and is configured to be connected to each other via a bus so that data can be exchanged. In addition, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, a performance display device S40, a rotating drum backlight (back lamp, rotating drum back lamp ) S30 etc. are connected. Here, the reel backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the symbols drawn on the surfaces of the reels from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M, and outputs drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, speakers S20, performance display device S40, drum backlight S30, etc. is being performed. In addition, in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the player can move the nine ranges of the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left reel, the upper, middle, and lower rows of the middle reel, and the upper, middle, and lower rows of the right reel. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the drum backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. For example, the player can identify that the upper row of the left reel is lit by lighting up the LED corresponding to the upper row of the left reel and turning off all other LEDs. Furthermore, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, the player can inform the player that the predetermined symbol combination has been stopped and displayed by changing the lighting mode of the reel backlight S30. The device is configured to be able to perform a backlight effect (sometimes referred to as a backlight effect) as suggested by the following.

The door board D includes the aforementioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, a stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and a start button for starting the rotation of the reel M50. A lever D50, a settlement button D60 for dispensing stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals to end the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying game status (not shown, but as described above) The input number indicator D210, the start lamp D180, the replay lamp D290, the input ready lamp D300, the special game status display device D250, the payout number display device (press order display device) D270, the credit number display device D200, the advantageous section A collection of display devices such as a display YH, etc.), a door switch D80 for determining whether the front door is open or closed, canceling an error, or changing a setting value, a game medal (or , and other foreign matter) to the discharge port D240. Further, this door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so as to be able to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, stop button D40, payment button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU is operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal that the input reception sensor D10s detects passage of a game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, connected to the drum board K are a drum motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a drum sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like. The reel board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 using the reel sensor K20. There is. Furthermore, in the reel type gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used as the reel motor K10. Note that the step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. In addition, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols of approximately uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is is set to 24 steps (=480/20). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per round of the reels are changed.

The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action of releasing. The medal dispensing device H includes a first dispensing sensor H10s and a second dispensing sensor H20s that determine whether or not medals are normally dispensed and measure the number of dispensed game medals, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

The power consumed by these various control boards and boards is supplied from a power supply board E (a board that controls whether or not power is supplied by a power switch E10). In FIG. 12, the manner in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by broken arrows. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied to the main control board M and the sub-control board S from the power supply board E, and the various boards (door board D, drum board K, relay board IN) are Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and after converting this power into a DC voltage of a specified voltage, it is supplied to each control board and board.

In addition, the main control board M includes a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset key switch that can change setting values, cancel errors, etc. Button M30 is connected. The main control board M also includes a reel control means that controls the rotation and stop of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and an "AT in progress state" which is a state related to AT that is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means that executes an AT transition lottery for transitioning to AT, and an AT additional lottery that increases the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT state". It has an AT add-on lottery means for executing.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in this embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (represented by rectangles), judgments (represented by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals indicating start, end, return, etc. (represented by rounded rectangles). ing. In addition, when the details of a processing step are illustrated in another flowchart, those that refer to the other flowchart are illustrated as subroutines (illustrated by a rectangle with double lines on the left and right). . At the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( The configuration is such that no subroutines (subroutines that are not normally used) are left behind, and processes related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed are prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing that is executed for the first time in the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the reel-type gaming machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, in step 1000, after turning on the power of the reel-type gaming machine P, in step 1002, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started). (Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in subsequent processing, when a timer interrupt is started, a flowchart related to timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings), etc. as function settings for the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPU 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area) (checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held) and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPU 100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 is off.

If Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processed flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAM (in step 1006). check results) to determine whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPU 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the power-off processing (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the RAM area and determines whether the data related to the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the restored stack pointer.

If the answer is No in step 1016, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

Further, in the case of No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, to be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area ). Next, in step 1300, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processed flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAM (step 1028). 1006), it is determined whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM, and sets ( For example, it is set in a register area), and the process moves to step 1034. The range that is not included in the RAM initialization range is not limited to only the storage area that stores setting values (setting value data), but also includes the total cumulative number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section + The number of games (normal section), the result of calculating the stay ratio in the "advantageous section", etc. are also outside the range of RAM initialization. With this configuration, it becomes possible to calculate and display the ratio of players staying in the "advantageous section" (advantageous section ratio) in the game. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (eg, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, the following is repeated at 5-second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → character ratio per 6000 games → cumulative successive character ratio → cumulative character ratio" Is displayed. In addition, the continuous accessory ratio is "the number of payouts when RB is operating / the total number of payouts", and the accessory ratio is "the number of payouts when RB, CB, or SB is operating". /total number of payouts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range that includes a storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in a register area) and proceed to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable to configure the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M so that it does not become the value at which the special game is executed. (This is to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed in the event that the process for determining whether to execute the special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of program processing). Although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the bytes storing information related to the random numbers are It is preferable to configure the system so that only information related to the random number is stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored). (To prevent information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes it with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is not within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). Note that if the setting values (setting value data) are managed as 1 to 6, it is necessary to initialize the RAM and return the setting value to ``1'' when it becomes ``0''. Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) as 0 to 5, the setting value (setting value data) correction process (step 1106 and The process in step 1108) can be made unnecessary, making it possible to shorten the processing time and reduce the processing capacity. If Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the setting value (setting value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the value that is most disadvantageous to the player), and proceeds to step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process moves to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is in operation (for example, "88" that lights up all segments). Then, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the setting value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 to move to. Incidentally, as described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Because of this configuration, for example, when a part of the 7-segment LED is malfunctioning (some segments cannot be lit), incorrect information may be reported when announcing the press order. could be. In order to prevent such a situation, by having all 7 segments on the payout number display device D270 light up to "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7 segments are out of order, and to notify the player of any inconvenience. It is possible to prevent the giving of benefits, etc. In addition, as a configuration related to the display of setting values (setting value data), a RAM memory for setting value display stores data obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) in the storage area for storing setting values. It may have a storage area and display the setting value by referring to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process is executed to transmit a command indicating that the sub control board S is transitioning to the setting change mode.

Next, in step 1112, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting/reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. If Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPU 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data). , the set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process moves to step 1116. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1112, the process moves to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process moves to step 1112, and the processing from step 1112 to step 1116 is looped. If Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process in step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and turns on the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process moves to step 1200, the game progress control process. Although not shown, after the process of step 1120 is executed, a process is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode is to be terminated.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of unrecoverable error processing related to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in other flowcharts). First, in step 1302, the CPU 100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (from then on, the flowchart related to timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether output to each output port has been completed. If Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and The process repeats execution, and when the power supply voltage decreases, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (In other words, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts a return). Note that if No in step 1310, the process moves to step 1306. Note that the processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is the processing for clearing the output to the LED/motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information regarding the error and the game progress status at the time of the error occurrence are sent to the hall computer). ).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes it with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, the winning line, etc.). Note that step 1203 includes data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} ("0" for clearing the RAM address). It also includes processing to set data) in RAM. Incidentally, the condition device number, performance group number, instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, but may be configured to be overwritten with the selected number when the next game is executed. Next, in step 1204, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, "RT0", etc.) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the RT state set in step 1204. Note that the process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. Further, in step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when transmitting the RT state to the sub-side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the RT state may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming section is an "advantageous section". Next, in step 1206, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (steps 1420 and 1429 in FIG. 21, step 1435 in FIG. 22, (Set the state regarding the AT determined in steps 1439, 1443, and steps 1444-3 and 1444-4 in FIG. 23). Next, in step 1207, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the state regarding the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state regarding the AT may be executed in steps 1416 and 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 in FIG. 23. Further, when transmitting the status regarding the AT to the sub-side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the configuration may be such that the status regarding the AT is transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming section is an "advantageous section". Next, in step 1208, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the game period (for example, "advantageous period", etc.) in the game (the game period determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal payout device H is not full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) that stores medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two fullness detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can penetrate into the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. Judgment is made based on whether the current is conductive or non-conductive (if the current is conductive through the medal, it is determined that the medal is full). If Yes in step 1209, the process moves to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag in step 1210 (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to "on"). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error using a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal full error has been canceled (for example, if the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting, and if the setting/ It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF), and The process moves to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process moves to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPU 100 of the main control board M permits acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation will be automatically executed in the next game of the replayed combination), and performs the next process (step 1220). processing). Here, in step 1218, a process of turning on the blocker D100 (a process of forming a medal flow path) is performed. Specifically, when a replay combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on, provided that the current number of credits (credits) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current number of stored credits (credits) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if the re-gaming combination was not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if a re-gaming combination is established, if the stored number (credits) has not reached a predetermined value, game medals can be inserted, such as "RT1" etc. When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the probability of winning a replay combination is higher than in the RT state, or when a replay combination is difficult to tell from the outside as a replay combination (a replay disguised as a small win). Even if a symbol combination (bell-bell-bell or a cherry stopped on the left reel) stops on the invalid line, the player can play the game in good rhythm (without feeling strange).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not game medals have not been bet or saved (credits do not exist). If Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU 100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, the condition is satisfied when the door switch D80 and setting key switch M20 are all turned on). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the setting display LED (although not shown, it may be a payout number display device D270, a credit number display device D200, or an input number display light D210). The value is displayed (transferring to the setting confirmation mode), and the process moves to step 1221 on the condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. Furthermore, when the transition conditions for the setting change mode are met, a process is performed to send a command to the sub-control board S side to indicate that the setting change mode is to be started, and when the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met, the setting change mode is started. Processing is being executed to send a command to indicate termination. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, it is not possible to input medals). It has two input sensors for detection, and when the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). If Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s is off). After the sensor D30s is turned on, when the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned off, it is determined that one accepted game medal has passed through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been received. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the number of credits is the maximum number (50 in this example) and the number of bets is the maximum number (3 in this example). If it is determined as Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which no medal flow path is formed). Note that if No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process moves to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payment button D60 has been operated. If Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. If Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and Execute the payout of one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in this embodiment, the CPU It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that a payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If YES in step 1236, the process moves to step 1247. Here, although it is not specified on the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay combination, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the process in step 1234). . Specifically, whether the situation in which it is determined that no medals have been paid out continues for a predetermined period of time even though the hopper drive signal is being sent to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating) Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether the setting/reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF), and steps 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process moves to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s are off (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being put out has been completed). If Yes in step 1247, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag in step 1248, and proceeds to step 1233. Note that if No in step 1241 or step 1247, the process moves to step 1236.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the start lever D50 is valid (for example, a specified number of game medals have been inserted to start the game, etc.). ), and it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. If Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains a random number and turns off the blocker D100, and then moves to the next process (the process in step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area) in step 1256. Next, in step 1300, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. Note that if No in step 1251, the process moves to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding AT is a state in which an AT additional lottery is possible. Here, in this example, the states related to AT that can execute the AT add-on lottery are "AT in progress state", "add-on specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the AT counter value may be greater than 0, but the AT add-on lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from daringly not aligning the BB symbol combinations in the "advantageous BB internal medium game" from becoming more advantageous to the player. It should be noted that it may be configured so that the AT add-on lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and in such a configuration, the player can win the AT add-on lottery in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". It may be configured such that the player is not notified immediately, but is then notified that he has won the AT addition lottery at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games is added.

If Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1259, the process also moves to step 1400. In this process of adding up the number of games, it is possible to execute the lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the setting value (using the same lottery table It is preferable to carry out a lottery. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes AT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes condition device number management processing, which will be described later.

Here, the states related to AT in this example will be listed and explained in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram in FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired) and the bonus combination has not been won. Note that the "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state" and is therefore sometimes referred to as a "normal state." (2) "Normal BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB combination has been won in the "low probability state", the BB combination has not been won, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) "Normal BB state" means when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in a situation where the BB combination has been won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery has not been won. Alternatively, it is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal medium game". (4) “High probability state” is a state in which the player has not won the AT lottery (has not acquired the right to move to the “AT middle state”) and has not won the bonus role. , is a state in which it is easier to win AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". Furthermore, as will be described later, in the case of a new transition to the "high probability state", the configuration is such that the transition to the "low probability state" does not occur until the number of high secured obstacle games has elapsed (5) "AT in progress state" " is a state in which AT (press order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if you win the continuation lottery described later, a predetermined value will be set in the AT counter and the "AT in progress state" will continue (6) "Specialization precursor state". is a state in which the player has acquired the right to move to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than the "AT in progress state". (7) "Additional specialized state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than "AT state". (8) "Advantageous BB internal medium game" means winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT medium state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state where it has not won a prize. (9) "Waiting BB internal game" is a state where the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role has not won. . (10) “Advantageous BB state” means that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is won when the BB role is won in the “high probability state”, “AT medium state”, “specialization precursor state”, or “additional specialization state”. When it is stopped and displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal game", the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", and , when the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal medium game" It is a state that is executed at times. (12) The “resurrection possibility state” is a state related to the AT that is entered when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the player does not win the continuous lottery to be described later. In the "resurrection possibility state", a revival lottery, which will be described later, is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT state" (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the resurrection lottery is not played. If you win, you will move to a "low probability state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts rotating all reels, which will be described later, and moves to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M issues a pull-in point creation request (a request is made to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order (as appropriate depending on the stop position of the other reels) is determined. If Yes in step 1261-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point in step 1262, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the process moves to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal medium game", in the game where the press order bell was won, the stop button was not stopped in the correct press order that would result in a payout of 11 coins (for example, in the case of winning - A1, Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (the reels are stopped in the wrong order), the symbol combination that will result in a payout of 11 pieces will be created by the reel stop control. It is designed to win prizes. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a check to see if the reel stop is accepted. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process moves to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. If Yes in step 1267, the CPU 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data in step 1268. Next, in step 1269, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed combination of symbols is normal (if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal). ). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal in step 1269 is made by determining whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, and the winning combination is determined. In a game where the stop button is operated in an operation mode that allows the winning combination to win, the position of the reels that actually stopped was not normal (the winning combination determined by an internal lottery becomes possible). Even if the winning combination is not visually displayed as stopped by the player, if the reel stop control is successfully executed by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medals based on the winning combination will be displayed. The payout is configured to be executed. If YES in step 1269, the process moves to step 1274. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process moves to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a payout process for game medals based on winnings. Next, in step 1275, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a win that pays out game medals {if the game medals acquired by winning exceed the maximum number of credits (50 in this example) In this case, the game medals are paid out. If Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes the payout of one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). In this case, it is determined that a payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If YES in step 1277, the process moves to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the process in step 1276). . If YES in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays a medal empty error display using the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether the setting/reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF), and steps 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process moves to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s are off (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being put out has been completed). If Yes in step 1286, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag in step 1288, and proceeds to step 1290. Note that if No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process moves to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning prize (winning prize determined as Yes in step 1275) has been completed. If YES in step 1290, the process moves to step 3400. Note that if No in step 1286, the process moves to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process moves to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process moves to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes remaining game number management processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an RT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes AT state start control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, changing the game state, etc.), and moves to the next process (the process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of internal lottery execution processing related to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery, in which winning numbers and numbers for comparison with acquired random numbers are stored). Then, the process moves to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains the winning number associated with the set internal lottery table address. Note that winning/replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a small role are won at the same time, or a bonus and a replay role are won at the same time, both the winning/replay winning information and the bonus winning information will be calculated based on the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers that have the same payout group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and is the number of consecutive winning numbers that are stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. remembered. For example, ball payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers 4 to 12, and three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6, which are replayable combinations in the push order, have the same number. As for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which are push order bell combinations, the above numbers are the same, so the number of repetitions related to the push order replay winning combination is 3, and the push order bell The number of repetitions related to the winning combination is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when winning numbers 4 to 6, which are push order replay roles, and the lottery table used when winning numbers 7 to 12, which are push order bell roles, are obtained are a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains setting value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery was won (whether or not the obtained random number existed in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, so the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1259) without executing determination (lottery) regarding the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. If Yes in step 3618, the process moves to step 3610, and the processes from step 3610 to step 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates it to the address related to the next ball group number), moves to step 3604, and returns to step 3604. Execute the following processing. Note that specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT-related state is "AT in progress", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game is the winning number that can add up the number of remaining AT games in the AT state. In this example, it is determined whether the ball group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the replay-B, re-game-C, winning-D. If YES in step 1504, the process moves to step 1514. In addition, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, if the state related to AT is an advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game concerned is the BB medium bonus (" In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add up to the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). Determine. If Yes in step 1512, the process moves to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process moves to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT is the "additional specialization state". If Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game is a specialization bonus role (in the "addition specialization state", the number of remaining AT games can be added and In the "AT state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a winning group number related to re-play - A, re-play - D1 to D3, winning - A1 to A6) (in this example, 2, 13). If YES in step 1508, the process moves to step 1514. Note that if No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process moves to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the lottery table for the number of additional games upon winning and determines the number of AT additional games based on the ball group number related to the game (for example, In the lottery table shown, the latched random number value is determined based on which range it falls within.) Note that determining the number of AT add-on games is also referred to as executing an AT add-on lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a command (a command to the sub-control board S side) related to the determined number of AT additional games, and the sub-control board S receives the command. It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games are added, and the process moves to step 1518. Note that AT-related drawings (AT drawings, AT additional drawings) can also be executed in the case of ball playing group numbers 7 to 11, which are ball group numbers related to winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) that include bonuses. .

Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games upon winning. If the bonus combination is won in the AT state, specialization precursor state, specialization specialization state, or advantageous BB state), based on the ball payout group number related to the game, The number of AT add-on games is determined by lottery from 0 to 300, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Note that if "0" is determined, the number of AT remaining games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as not winning the AT additional lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when winning the additional combination at the time of winning is as shown in the figure, and the specific calculation method is that the winning combination is Watermelon A. In this case, {Number of settings (600) x Number of AT additional games (0) + Number of settings (100) x Number of AT additional games (10) + Number of settings (300) x Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of settings ( 24)×Number of AT add-on games (100)}/total number of set numbers (1024)=12.1 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is replay-B or replay-C, {set number (500) x number of AT add-on games (0) + set number (200) x number of AT add-on games (50) + Calculate as follows: Placement number (300) x Number of AT additional games (100) + Placement number (24) x Number of AT addition games (300)}/Total number of placements (1024) = 46.1 (games) be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is Re-Play-A or Re-Play-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, {Number of Places (300) x Number of AT Addition Games (10) + Number of Places (600) It can be calculated as follows: Number of AT add-on games (30) + number of entries (124) x number of AT addition games (50)}/Total number of additions (1024) = 26.61 (games). In addition, if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games will be added only if the state related to AT is "addition special state". It has become.

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare combination, {number of entries (800) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of entries (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of entries (100) )×Number of AT additional games (30)+Number of entries (24)×Number of AT additional games (100)}/Total number of additional entries (1024)=6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium strong rare combination, {Number of placements (300) x Number of AT additional games (0) + Number of placements (300) x Number of AT addition games (30) + Number of placements (400) )×Number of AT additional games (50)+Number of entries (24)×Number of AT additional games (300)}/Total number of additional entries (1024)=35.4 (games).

In addition, in this embodiment, when an AT add-on lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT add-on games is configured to vary depending on the type of winning combination, but depending on the setting value, the average value of the number of AT add-on games may be different. The average values are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when configuring to execute an AT additional lottery based on the winning number, for example, when executing the same process as an AT additional lottery with winning numbers 7 and 8, the winning number is 7. However, by configuring to perform the AT additional lottery based on the winning group number as in this embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 can be determined. When performing the same process as an AT add-on lottery with and, the process related to the AT add-on lottery for both winning number 7 and winning number 8 can be executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. will be possible.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPU 100 of the main control board M may make a judgment based on the winning number (or winning/replay winning information, ball group number, etc.) related to the game. ) is a winning number related to replay-B (reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which white seven can line up in a straight line on the invalid line by stopping with a reverse push). If Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there was an additional AT game number due to replay B. In other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning replay B is determined. Determine whether it is not 0. If Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and a reverse push ("right → middle → left") to the invalid line. (to execute an effect instructing the player to line up the white sevens), and the process moves to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, other than a reverse push ("right → center → left") (This will instruct the pressing order and execute an effect to prevent white sevens from being aligned on the invalid line), and the process moves to step 1526. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1518, the process moves to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number (or winning/replay winning information, or ball group number, etc.) related to the game is the replay-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a sequential push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black 7 can line up in a straight line with the invalid line by stopping with the sequential push. If Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there was an additional AT game number due to replay-C, in other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning replay-C. Determine whether it is not 0. If Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a sequential push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and presses in the order ("left → middle → right") to line up the invalid line. 1400) is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a sequential push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, other than sequential push ("left → middle → right") (This will instruct the pressing order and execute an effect that prevents black sevens from being aligned on the invalid line), and moves on to the next process (the process of step 1400). Note that even in the case of No in step 1526, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). In this embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are sent to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands to prevent the sub-press. Although the control board S side is configured to be able to execute effects related to the push order navigation, the present invention is not limited to this, and when winning the AT additional lottery, it is possible to display the fact that the AT additional lottery has been won and the number of AT additional games. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the process of step 1517) is sent to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side selects the push order navigation. It may also be configured to determine the execution timing and performance mode of the performance related to the performance. As an example, in a game in which replay B is a winning game, the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game with an additional number of AT games), and selects an effect mode that instructs a reverse push. Alternatively, in the game in which the sub-control board S side receives the command, the effect instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions (for example, a specific replay combination (e.g., replay) It may be configured to execute an effect that instructs the pressing order in which a set of 7 is possible on the invalid line in a game that satisfies the condition (game-B or C) won. Or, in a game in which replay B is a winning game and the sub-control board S side receives the above command (a game with an additional number of AT games), the effect that instructs the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (continuous performances may be performed at the same time, in which case, the final game of the continuous performance) is satisfied, the AT game number additional performance (displayed on the performance display device S40) This is an effect in which the display related to the number of remaining AT games increases, for example, "+30G" may be executed.In addition, in this example, the effect display device S40 also displays an increase in the number of AT remaining games. The display is configured to display such a display, and the display and the number of AT remaining games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In the game in which B won and the sub-control board S side received the above command (a game with an additional number of AT games), the performance that instructs a reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. An example of a case where an AT game number addition effect is executed in a game that is executed is when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) to encourage winning of a bonus is executed on the sub-control board S side (within the bonus In this case, the winning probability of replay-B is low (including 0%), so if the pressing order in which a set of 7 is possible is announced, the player will realize that the bonus has not been won). An example is when the board S side is executing a special performance.In addition, the sub control board S side determines that the main control board M side has won the AT add-on lottery and the number of AT remaining games has been added. The information includes: (1) Information regarding the number of AT remaining games is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side after the AT additional lottery.Then, on the sub-control board S side, information regarding the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is transmitted. (2) Calculate the difference between the information about the number of AT additional games and the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time, and grasp the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery. A command related to the number of AT add-on games received is sent to the sub-control board S side.In addition, if the AT add-on lottery is not won, a command related to the fact that the AT add-on lottery was not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. It may be configured such that when the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side determines the performance mode of the performance related to the push order navigation. In the winning game, in which the command was received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games was not increased), press the middle button (operate the middle stop button as the first stop, and press the middle stop button as the first stop). It may also be configured to select and execute a performance mode that instructs the user to press the order of avoidance. Although the AT additional lottery was executed on the main control board M side, the information on which the sub control board S side determines that there was no addition of the number of remaining AT games includes (1) information regarding the number of remaining AT games; After the AT addition lottery, it is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, the sub-control board S side calculates the difference between the information about the number of AT remaining games sent last time and the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time, and grasps the number of AT extra games won in the AT extra lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time from the information about the number of AT remaining games sent last time is 1, it is determined that the AT additional lottery was not won), (2) Main control board A command regarding the fact that the number of AT add-on games is 0 as a result of the AT add-on lottery on the M side is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first page) of AT state transition control processing related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a state regarding the AT that can execute the AT lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the only state regarding AT that can execute AT lottery is "high probability state", and by winning BB in "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game" After that, when the BB role wins, the state shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. The value 50 times will be set. Incidentally, even if the player wins the BB in the "low probability state", the game moves to the "normal BB internal game" and does not shift to the "AT state" thereafter. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that when a BB is won in the "normal gaming state", the AT lottery can be won using the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if you win BB in the "normal gaming state" and win the AT lottery triggered by the BB role, you will be transferred to the "advantageous BB internal game" and then win the BB. By aligning them, you will move to an "advantageous BB state". In addition, in the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal gaming state" and the BBs are not lined up, the gaming section may be set as the "advantageous section" or may be set as the "standby section". If Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is the AT lottery winning combination (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB winning combination with no setting difference). Species BB-C). In addition, in this embodiment, the winning numbers of BB with no setting difference alone (winning numbers 19, 24) and the winning numbers of BB with no setting difference and the same small role (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27) Both are AT lottery roles. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to "advantageous BB internal medium game", and proceeds to step 1410. Furthermore, if No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process moves to step 1410. Note that in this embodiment, the AT winning rate (can win or not) in the AT lottery is configured to differ when the AT-related states are different; however, when the AT-related states are the same, Even if the setting values are different, the AT winning rate for the AT lottery is the same (if you win BB in the "high probability state", you will always win AT regardless of the setting value = then " (transfers to "AT in progress state").

Next, in step 1410, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding AT for the next game or later has not been determined. If Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a "low probability state". If Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is a state promotion win (a small number that can move from a "low probability state" to a "high probability state" by winning). It is determined whether the winning hand is a winning combination (in this example, a cherry). If Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPU 100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and there is no problem in changing it as long as it does not differ depending on the setting value). A high probability state transition lottery is executed. Next, in step 1418, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. If YES in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onwards to be the "high probability state", and proceeds to step 1430.

Further, if No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a "high probability state". If Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the high guarantee fault counter KHc is 1 (this is the final high guarantee fault game, and it is the 10th game after entering the "high probability state"). ). If Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state related to AT is a "high probability state", the game section is an "advantageous section", and when the game section is an "advantageous section", the pressing order The configuration is such that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the navigation is executed one or more times or the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) (i.e., Even if you win the low probability state transition lottery, if the low probability transition conditions are not met because the push order navigation has not been executed at least once, etc., the "high probability state" is configured not to end. ). In addition, if the BB role is won during the "advantageous section" and you execute BB, you can play the "advantageous section" at any timing even if you have not executed the push order navigation even once during the "advantageous section". It may be configured such that it can be terminated. If YES in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT in the next game and subsequent games to be a "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low probability transition condition is satisfied by executing the push order navigation once. In addition, as the push order winnings (winning numbers that win different prizes depending on the order in which the reels stop, and the player's profit rate differs), there are two types of winning numbers: a winning number with a maximum payout of 8 coins and a winning number with a maximum payout of 11 coins. In this case, the low probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation for a winning combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 pieces has been executed once. Note that the process also moves to step 1430 in the case of No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428. In this way, in this embodiment, when a new transition is made to the "high probability state", 10 games, which are high probability probability games, are set to the high probability probability counter KHc, and the counter value is kept at 0 until the counter value becomes 0. is configured so as not to transition to a "low probability state". Note that such a lottery method is just an example; for example, the lottery for transitioning to a low probability state is not executed for 10 games after transitioning to a "high probability state" (staying in a "high probability state" is guaranteed). ), it may be configured to perform a lottery to shift from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" at a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in every game after the 10 games have passed. Note that the AT lottery winnings (low-probability AT lottery winnings, high-probability AT lottery winnings) and status promotion winning combinations have the same probability of winning for all set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT-related state is "AT in progress" or not. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in this embodiment, when the AT-related state is "AT in progress" and the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, Watermelon B You can acquire the right to transition to the "additional specialization state" with a probability of 1/2 of winning the "specialization precursor state", but if the AT-related state is "AT in progress" , the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if you win Watermelon B, there will be a lottery (specialized (also referred to as a state transition lottery) is not executed, and the state is configured not to shift to the "specialization precursor state" or the "additional specialization state." However, this is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, there will be a lottery where you can win Watermelon B and gain the right to transition to the "additional specialization state" (also known as the specialization state transition lottery). It is also possible to configure the system so that it is possible to execute ``additional specialization state'' by winning watermelon B in a situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less. If a person wins a lottery to obtain a lottery, the configuration may be such that the state can be (transferred to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" from the next game in which the lottery is won, or the AT counter value It may be configured so that it can become (transfer to) a "precursor state of specialization" or "additional specialization state" when it reaches a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), and the game that won the lottery may It may be configured such that after a predetermined number of games have been played, the game can enter (or transition to) a "precursor specialization state" or an "additional specialization state." In addition, when transitioning to the "additional specialization state", it is not necessarily necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state"; for example, the configuration is such that it is possible to directly transition from the "AT in progress state" to the "additional specialization state". You may. If Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a specialization transition role (a small number that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transition to an "additional specialization state"). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is Watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a specialized state transition lottery in which the lottery has a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2) of winning. Next, in step 1434, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. If YES in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT in the next game and subsequent games to be the "specialization precursor state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, it is the final AT game) in step 1436. judge. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery in which the lottery is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 2/3). Next, in step 1438, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and moves to step 1444-1 (defines the conditions for AT state transition. To satisfy this requirement, the AT initial number of games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT in the next game and subsequent games to be the "resurrection possibility state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434, or step 1436, the process moves to step 1444-1. As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set in the AT counter M60 again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not considered, the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. Note that the execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the last AT game, but for example, the first AT game (the first game in which the AT state is newly entered, or after the initial value is set to the AT counter M60). The continuous lottery may be executed in the first game). With such a configuration, it has already been determined in the "AT in progress" whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue). , the performance during AT can be made different depending on whether you have won the continuous lottery or not. For example, if you have won the continuous lottery, the counter value of the AT counter M60 It is possible to change the BGM (playing a song, etc.) in a situation where is 1 or more (during AT execution), or to perform an effect that makes it certain that the player has won the continuous lottery.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a state for displaying whether or not it is possible to recover. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is a resurrection role (by winning in the “resurrection possibility state”), the CPU 100 of the main control board M It is determined whether the winning combination is a winning combination that can transition to the "AT state" (in other words, a winning combination that can bring back AT). Here, in this embodiment, the resurrection role is a role that includes any of Watermelon A, Watermelon B, Cherry, and a bonus role (only the BB role without setting difference, not including the BB role with setting difference). , and when the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection hand, it is called winning the resurrection lottery. If Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and proceeds to step 1445. Here, in order to satisfy the conditions for enabling transition to the AT state, the AT initial number of games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to be a "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1445. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1441-1, the process moves to step 1445. In this way, in the present embodiment, even if it is the final AT game and the player is not selected for the continuation lottery, the system transitions to the "resurrection possibility state" and is revived in the "resurrection possibility state". If the player wins the lottery, the game is configured to shift to the "AT state" from the next game. In addition, although the "Restoration possibility state" is set to "Advantageous section", AT-related lottery (AT additional lottery, continuation lottery, etc.) in "AT status" is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. The manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "restoration possibility state".

Next, in step 1445, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding AT for the next game or later has not been determined. If Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the transition conditions for the state related to AT are satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. (It is satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursory games, are played in the state). If Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onward, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. If you have completed the number of portent games in the "precursor state", it will be determined as the "additional specialization state"). Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process moves to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a high guarantee fault counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub side, the current high guarantee fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed). A command related to the remaining number of games played) is set, and the process moves to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding AT from the next game onward is determined to be "advantageous BB internal medium game". If Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc to zero, and performs the next process (
The process moves to step 1450 (processing in step 1450). Note that even in the case of No in step 1499-1, the process moves to the next process (processing in step 1450).

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if you win the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) in the "low probability state", you will win the AT transfer lottery. On the other hand, if you win the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) in the "high probability state", you will win the AT transition lottery (then the state will not change to the "AT state"). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery winning combination, and the states related to AT, which is an “advantageous section”, are “high probability state A” and “high probability state A”. If the condition device A is won in "high probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device is selected in "high probability state B". It may be configured such that if A is won, the AT transition lottery is won at 1/2. In addition, if you win the AT transition lottery, the AT-related state will transition to the "AT preparation state" which is a preparatory state until the transition to the "AT in progress state", and then the predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation state") will be entered. It may be configured such that when the condition (10 games have elapsed since the transition to the "AT state") is satisfied, the transition is made to the "AT in progress state."

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming section is an "advantageous section". If Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPU 100 of the main control board M issues a command related to winning/replay winning information (a command on the sub control board S side, for example, a winning/replay winning information related to the game). commands related to information). Next, in step 1454, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the conditional device for the game is a combination with a pressing order (a conditional device in which winning combinations differ depending on the pressing order; for example, winning-A1, etc.). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the instruction number (also referred to as the push order number) during the game based on the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). Note that the instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, it is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub-control board S (details will be described later). Further, by receiving the instruction number, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Note that the instruction number is configured to be determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number). In addition, when executing the push order guessing game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) exclusively for the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). (See Figure 34 for image). Next, in step 1466, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In addition, in this example, displaying the stopping order of the reels with the highest profit to the player on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is referred to as displaying the push order navigation, displaying the push order navigation display, etc. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number, and for example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is configured to be displayed as "=1" on the push order display device D270. The system is configured so that "=1" is displayed both in the case of a push-order bell and in the case of a push-order replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a case where the push order navigation of "Left → Middle → Right" is displayed on the push order display device D270 in a game related to the push order bell, and in a game related to the push order replay, " The display mode may be different depending on when the push order navigation of "Left→Middle→Right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of display modes of the press order navigation displayed on the press order display device D270 may be configured to be the same as the number of types of winning/replay winning information.

Further, if No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs mask processing on the winning/replay winning information of the game, and transfers the masked information to a predetermined address in the RAM. to be memorized. Here, if winning/re-play winning information related to the game is sent to the sub-control board S side, and if the winning/re-play winning information is recognized due to fraudulent acts, the high profits related to the game will be lost. This means that the pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, after masking the winning/replay winning information related to the game (processing to make winning/replay winning information (particularly information related to the pressing order) confidential), the sub control board S By configuring the system to send the data to the user, the system is configured so that high-profit press orders cannot be recognized. In addition, as a method of mask processing in this embodiment, a plurality of winning/replay winning information (winning/replay winning information having a similar role is preferable; for example, the RT state changes depending on the order of pressing. Multiple pieces of winning/re-play winning information in which symbol combinations that become re-gaming roles can be stopped and displayed) are set as one performance group number (for example, winning/re-play winning information 4 to 6 are set to performance group 4), and the performance is The configuration is such that the group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the winning/re-play winning information (in this example, 0 to 18) that has been provided, a new winning/re-play after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. In addition, even in such cases, multiple winning/re-play winning information such as performance group number among existing winning/re-play winning information can be treated as one winning/re-play winning information after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the system so that game winning information is provided (for example, the winning/replay winning information 4 to 6 is combined with the winning/replay winning information 19 (newly provided winning/replay winning information) which is the winning/replay winning information after mask processing.・Re-play winning information), etc.). Furthermore, if it is determined that the game is a game that notifies operation information (push order navigation) based on the state of AT on the main control board M, winning/replay winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S, In a game that does not notify operation information, the performance group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the production group number after performing the mask processing (for example, sets it in the register area), and steps 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (the sub side can recognize whether or not the bonus has been won) (for example, (set in the register area) and move on to the next process (the process of step 1550). Note that this embodiment is configured to derive winning/replay winning information and bonus winning information from the winning number, but the deriving method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the same figure, as a display example of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT status", (1) If a falling re-gaming combination is included -> Press when the falling re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed. It is structured as follows: (2) For Bell (1-card hand/11-card hand), the push order that yields the largest number of coins is the navigation, etc. As described above, in this embodiment, when the game section is an "advantageous section", the sub-control board S side displays the winning/re-play winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous pressing order for the player). On the other hand, when the game section is a "normal section", the sub control board S The system is configured so that the production group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the player. In other words, in the "advantageous section", the winning/re-playing winning information related to the game, including the winning/re-playing winning information where the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the order of presses, is directly sent to the sub-control board S. On the other hand, in game sections that are not "advantageous sections," winning/replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and winnings/replay winnings and replays where the game results and the player's profits differ depending on the order of presses are not transmitted. In the case of winning information, it is configured to transmit to the sub-control board S side a performance group number in which information related to the pressing order is hidden.

In addition, in cases such as when the game section is not an "advantageous section", mask processing is performed when transmitting winning/replay winning information determined by the main control board M to the sub-control board S to determine the performance group number. Then, the production group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the performance group number refers to the winning/replay winning information, and the winning/replay winning information related to winning roles that play a similar role (for example, replaying roles that include falling replaying roles, push order bells, etc.) are grouped and assigned numbers. The configuration is configured such that the winning/replay winning information related to the game is subjected to mask processing {processing to make winning/replay winning information (particularly information related to the pressing order) confidential) before being transmitted to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which information related to winning/replay winning information is recognized due to fraudulent acts, and the pressing order (reel stop order) that results in a high profit related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0 or not. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is the time (in this example, 4.1 seconds) that should be ensured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). This is a timer that measures the If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the stopped reels and the request to create a draw point for the finished game. Next, in step 1560, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request during standby for the start of reel rotation for the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command for the game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1260). In other words, the processing in steps 1562 and 1564 makes it possible to send a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reels will start rotating.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming section is an "advantageous section". Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the gaming sections, and is a gaming situation that is advantageous for the player, such as when the AT-related state is "AT in progress". This is a game section that is easy to set. If Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays a counter YKc-1 for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section (which is a decrement counter and is initially set to 1500, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section"). The counter value (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in a period that is an "advantageous section") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding AT is the "AT in progress state". If YES in step 3408, the CPU 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value in step 3410. Next, in step 3412, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to AT is a high probability state. If Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPU 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1700). Note that even in the case of No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1700). As described above, in this embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push order navigation is "AT in progress", the AT counter value is decremented every game, but "advantageous BB state", " In the case of "advantageous BB internal medium game", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is configured not to be subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, if the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the transition is made from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is entered while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured so that it can transition (transition) from "state" → "specialization precursor state" → "additional specialization state". Incidentally, even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible to prevent the AT counter value from being decremented by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. It may be controlled. For example, if a game is executed and a bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". , or store "30+α" which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained from the AT add-on lottery related to the game, but when the start lever D50 is operated, it is displayed on the effect display device S40. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained from the AT additional lottery (in addition, "α" obtained from the additional AT lottery is , "α" in a specific game after the game (games that meet the predetermined conditions at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the bonus game ends) without being notified in the game. may be notified). Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the performance display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and a performance suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. The AT remaining number of games can be configured to be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, even if the player wins a bonus in a state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as in the "AT state", it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing that the bonus has been won. That is, after a winning number including a bonus combination is determined, a continuous performance over a plurality of games that stimulates whether or not a bonus has been won can be executed using the performance display device S40 or the like, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, after the bonus game ends, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", or if the result of the AT add-on lottery is won and the result of the add-on is announced, it is a value of "30" or more. can be controlled to display. In addition, if a game is executed and a bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1," the bonus will be displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games will be "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous performance over multiple games will be performed to incite whether or not you have won the bonus, and the AT counter value will be "1". , a winning number (or winning/replay winning information, or ball group number) that allows a game to be executed and an AT additional lottery to be executed when the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1" is won and the AT additional lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes "0". Further, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the probability of executing the continuous performance may be set lower (including 0%) than when the AT remaining number of games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the conditions for enabling transition to the RT state are satisfied in the game. Here, in this embodiment, the conditions for enabling transition to the RT state are execution of RAM clearing (RAM initialization), stop display of replay (in this example, stop display of replay 04), winning/starting of BB.・It is structured so that it can be satisfied upon completion. If YES in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition to the RT state and determines the RT state from the next game onwards based on the satisfied conditions for transition to the RT state (RT state transition in FIG. 28). (see figure), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1750). Note that even in the case of No in step 1702, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1750). In this embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all the reels have stopped, but when transitioning to "RT1", the transition timing may be when the lever is turned on. The timing of transitioning the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are four RT states: "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure, the RT state can be changed. will be transferred. As a specific example of transition of the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when re-gaming 04 is displayed as stopped, the state shifts to "RT0". Specifically, when replay 04 is displayed as stopped, if you win "Replay D1" in a situation where the RT status is "RT1" and operate the left stop button as the first stop. , regames 01 to 03 are displayed as stopped, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if you win "Regame-D1" in a situation where the RT status is "RT1" and you operate the middle stop button or right stop button as the first stop, replay 04 will be stopped and displayed. , the RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

Also, if the RT status is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the winning game (the conditional device related to type 1 BB-A, B, and C is activated). ) and the RT state shifts to "RT2". Furthermore, if you win the BB combination in "RT2" (type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the game shifts to "type 1 BB-A, B, C." Further, when BB ends at "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (operation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C ends), the process shifts to "RT1". In addition, if the state related to AT is "low probability state" and the BB is won, and the BB ends, the RT state will shift to "RT1" which is high profit for the player, but the state related to AT Since the state is such that the push order navigation does not occur, when you win "Re-game - D1 to D3", the incorrect press order (the first stop is the left button, middle button, right button), One of the three choices is the correct pressing order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are incorrect and the replay 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping the regame 04, the regame 04 is displayed as stopped, and the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" occurs. Also, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", you will win BB, and if BB ends, you will be in RT state. will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the AT-related state is a state in which push order navigation occurs, and even when "Re-game - D1 to D3" is won, the player will not be able to re-play 04. Since the button does not stop and display the correct answer in the pressing order, it is possible to maintain "RT1".

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state shift enable condition is satisfied in the game. Conditions for transitioning to AT state include, for example, (1) when BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state" ends, (2) when winning the continuation lottery, (3) when winning the revival lottery. Satisfied if If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPU 100 of the main control board M, triggered by the new transition to the "AT precursor state", determines the number of AT initial games (in this example, 50, and "AT in progress"). The number of games whose subtraction is started after the transition to the "state") is set in the AT counter M60, and the process moves to step 1756. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1752, the process moves to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is not a high probability state. If YES in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT of the next game is a high probability state. If Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the number of high guaranteed failure games (10 in this example) in the high guaranteed failure counter, and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 3500). Transition. Note that even in the case of No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500). In addition, after winning BB in the "high probability state" and moving to "advantageous BB internal medium game", by winning BB, it will move to "advantageous BB state", and in the "advantageous BB state", AT game If the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter will exceed 50 when the BB ends and the transition from the "advantageous BB state" to the "AT in progress state" occurs. Specifically, if the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then shifts to the "AT in progress state", the AT counter will be set to 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30). become. At this time, if an effect is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", at the start of the "AT state", the player is informed that the initial number of AT games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify the player, but as another notification method, instead of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is set at the beginning of the "AT state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT state" or a state where the number of AT remaining games on the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method may also be considered in which a notification effect is performed. By doing this, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to increase interest in an additional performance that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation may occur). In this example, the AT initial number of games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process for setting the AT initial number of games is not limited to that of this example. , the AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process in step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the initial number of AT games) is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game after the BB ends (the state related to AT becomes "AT in progress state"). (Subtraction does not start during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in a storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT medium state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state" ”, “Advantageous BB internal game”, “Advantageous BB state”, and “Resurrection possibility state”. The state will change. For example, if you win watermelon B in the "AT state" and win a specialization state transition lottery where you win at 1/2, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". Furthermore, if 10 games have elapsed (played) since the transition to the "specialization precursor state", the system is configured to transition to the "additional specialization state". In addition, as for the game section, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", and "normal BB state" are set in the "normal section", and the "high probability state" and "AT in progress" are set in the "normal section". The seven AT-related states of "state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", "advantageous BB state", and "resurrection possibility state" are now "advantageous section" Set. In other words, even if the state related to the seven ATs that constitute the "advantageous section" has been transitioned, if 1,500 games have passed without setting it to the "normal section", the "advantageous section" will be forcibly ended. It is set to "normal section". In addition, if the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed when the push order navigation is displayed in the "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", However, the gaming state is maintained.

As described above, in the case of the "AT state", if the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery has not been won, the state becomes the "restoration possibility state". If you win the resurrection lottery in the ``resurrection possibility state'', you can return to the ``AT state'' again. On the other hand, if the player does not win the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", the state shifts to the "low probability state" and changes from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section".

When you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the "high probability state", the BB with no setting difference activates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" ”. Also, if you win a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) in the "AT state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the " Shifts to "AT in progress state". In addition, when you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the ``resurrection possibility state'', BB with no setting difference activates, and the ``advantageous BB state'' ends. will also transition to the "AT state" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, if you win the BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) in the ``resurrection possibility state'', the BB with setting difference activates, and the ``advantageous BB state'' ends, the BB with setting difference will stand alone. If the winning number (winning number 20) is related to the BB role of If it is a winning number that overlaps with the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the "AT state" after the BB ends (because the rare winning combination will be used as an opportunity to win the revival lottery).

Also, if you win the BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) in the "advantageous section" and in the "high probability state", the BB with setting difference activates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, Transition to "high probability state".

In addition, the states related to AT that transition after the end of the "advantageous BB state" are as follows: For both BB (with BB and BB with no setting difference), the state transitions to the state related to AT at the time of BB winning among the "AT state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", and during non-AT ( After the winning BB with no setting difference in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT in progress state". Furthermore, after the winning BB with setting difference is completed during non-AT ("high probability state"), the state shifts to "high probability state".

Note that the state related to AT is not limited to that of this embodiment, and for example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or "high probability state", and the AT lottery is executed. It may be configured such that the player enters the "precursor state" by winning a game, and then shifts to the "AT state" after 16 to 32 games have passed, and in such a case, if the predetermined condition device is met. If you win, an AT lottery will be executed, and if you do not win the AT lottery, you will enter a "fake precursor state", and after 16 to 32 games, you will enter a "low probability state" or a "high probability state". It may be configured to do so. In addition, a "standby section" that is different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as a game section. For example, if the AT lottery is executed by winning a "cherry", the BB If "BB+Cherry" with duplicate cherries is won and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until "BB" of "BB+Cherry" is won is a "standby section". You can. In this way, by providing a "waiting period", there are cases where a player wins BB in a "low probability state" and does not win the AT lottery, and a case where a player wins a BB in a "low probability state" and is AT lottery. In the case of winning the lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH is off during the period until the BB symbol combination is completed (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), so if you win the AT lottery. It is possible to incite the player as to whether or not there is a player. In addition, if a BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB, and in such a case, during the BB As the BB that won in the "addition specialization state", execute an AT additional lottery that is different from the BB that won in the "AT state" (for example, win the AT additional lottery than the BB that won in the "AT state") It may be configured such that it is easy to play, and the number of games per AT game addition is relatively large. In addition, if a BB is won in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB, and in such a case, during the BB It may be configured such that the AT additional lottery is executed in the same way as for the winning BB in the “add-on specialization state”.

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in this embodiment, there is a game section as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section includes a "normal section" where the profit is relatively low for the player, and a "normal section" where the profit is relatively high for the player. It has two gaming sections: an "advantageous section" which is a profitable section. To explain the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a "normal section." If Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game period for the next game and subsequent games to be the game period corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and moves to step 3528. do. On the other hand, if No in step 3508, in other words, if the game period is the "advantageous period", then in step 3514, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the advantageous period remaining games counter YKc-1 is 0. In other words, it is determined whether the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. If Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears all information related to AT (thereby, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of games staying in the "specialization precursor state" (things also become 0). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition for an "advantageous section" other than when the counter value of the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1 becomes 0; for example, when the AT counter value becomes 0. or when push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process moves to step 3515. As described above, in this embodiment, when the "advantageous section" ends and the next game is set to the "normal section", information related to AT (the number of continuous AT games, the number of remaining AT games, etc.) (information related to) is cleared, the conditions for becoming an "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. The AT-related information cleared by the process of step 3515 (the process at the end of the advantageous section) includes the counter value of the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the gaming state, and the like. In addition, this information will also be cleared by clearing the RAM when changing the settings, but depending on the RAM clearing when changing the settings, "condition device related to accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and "RT status" , information related to the "number of stored coins", etc. are also cleared, but depending on the process in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), the "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT status" , information related to "number of stored coins" etc. is not cleared. In this way, the RAM clear range at the time of setting change and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, when executing the process of step 3515) are different. Note that the configuration may be such that the "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or the "RT state" is maintained by clearing the RAM when changing the settings. Further, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" consecutive, clearing can be done by a simple process of specifying the first address to be cleared and the range of addresses to be cleared at the time of clearing processing. Furthermore, when the "advantageous section" ends, a command to the effect that the "advantageous section" has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the gaming history, such as the fact that it was in an "advantageous section" and information on how many games were played in the "AT state". ing. However, if you clear the RAM when changing the settings, the game history on the sub-control board S side, such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and information on how many games were played in the "AT state" will also be deleted.

In addition, if the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 becomes 0, (1) if the current state regarding AT is "high probability state"; (2) If the current state regarding AT is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the state regarding AT will be "low probability state" in the next game. (3) If the current AT-related state is "Advantageous BB state," the AT-related state will become "Normal BB state" in the next game. (4) Current If the AT-related state is "AT in progress", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", or "resurrection possibility state", then in the next game the AT-related state will be "low probability state". state" (because information related to the AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the game period after the next game to the "normal period". Next, in step 3517, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the "advantageous section" has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. Although the configuration is such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off when the "advantageous section" ends and the "normal section" is set, the detailed timing of turning off the light is not limited to the timing of this embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off when game medals related to a game which ends the "advantageous section" and enters the "normal section" are inserted. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 that enables the next game to be started is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the game period after the next game to be an "advantageous period", and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, it is decided that the CPU 100 of the main control board M will be newly set to an "advantageous section" in the next game (it has been decided to be set from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1293). Note that even in the case of No in step 3528, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1293). In this embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed. The timing is from the start lever operation timing in the game before the new "advantageous section" (game in the "normal section") to the timing when game medals can be inserted in the game in the new "advantageous section" (new "advantageous section" game). If the game before entering the "advantageous section" was a game related to replaying, set the period as appropriate until the start lever operation becomes effective in the game that becomes the new "advantageous section". Good too.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in this embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is thereafter executed for a predetermined period of time (T in this example, for example, about 2 ms). The program is configured to be executed periodically with a period of

First, in step 1602, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPU 100, checking the input port of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process, which will be described later. On the other hand, if YES in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software) in step 1606. Next, in step 1608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the payment button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, and first input sensor. D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (In other words, the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T. ).

Next, in step 1610, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on/off the door switch flag and setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. switching (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU will be in the open state without being affected by noise) ). Next, in step 6100, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs a reel drive control process (a process related to controlling the drive of the reel M50) for all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0 or not. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that even if the answer in step 1612 is No, the process moves to step 1614. Note that if the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of medals error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether flags related to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, etc. are all off). If Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error-undetected command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that no error has been detected) (for example, a register (set within the area), and the process moves to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that an error has been detected) (for example, (set in the register area), and the process moves to step 1622. In step 1620, the configuration is such that information regarding the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the error state (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), or when the error is not detected, the It is not necessary to perform the information setting process (step 1618 may not be necessary). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from a state where the first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as a second error (for example, a paid-out medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPU 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control commands will be sent). Here, the commands sent to the sub-control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (sent when the stop button is operated as the first stop) Commands related to the second reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), Commands related to the third reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the third stop) (sent immediately after operation), commands related to the stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), commands related to stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), winning/return Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever), commands related to RT status (sent when all reels are Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels stop and when the next game starts); High security failure counter value command (sent immediately after operating the start lever), command related to the number of remaining AT games (from when all reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after operating the start lever) (transmitted), commands related to the game section (transmitted from the time all reels stop until the next game starts), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Although not shown, the information related to the error outputted by the external signal includes a door opening error, a loading abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a loading reception sensor retention error, and the like. Note that the door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the input reception sensor retention error occurs when the input reception sensor detects that game medals are retained. is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPU 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, lights up a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and A predetermined segment of the segment is lit (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (updating processing of random numbers managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is not set) Determine. If YES in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt termination processing in step 1638, and moves to the next processing (the processing in step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned unrecoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating drum drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 in FIG. 32 in this embodiment. Note that in this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it should be noted that processes corresponding to each of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 are executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6102, the process also moves to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing when the reel rotation start standby state ends and the execution of reel acceleration processing starts, for example, in step 1260 of FIG. 18). It is determined whether the processing execution timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6108. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel acceleration processing, and proceeds to step 6112. Note that if the reels are stopped, the reels will start rotating through this process. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6106, the process moves to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel acceleration state. If Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes all interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35, which will be described later). Determine whether the timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel constant speed maintenance processing, and proceeds to step 6120. It should be noted that if the result in step 6112 or step 6114 is No, the process also moves to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a constant reel speed state. If Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel sensor is connected to the reel (corresponding to the process of this subroutine) after the reel is in a constant speed state (after executing the process of step 6116). It is determined whether the index provided on the reel) is detected. Although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side of the reel, and is used to detect whether the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated once, etc. Each index is then detected by a reel sensor. The reel sensor signal is electrically connected to the main control board M. When the reel sensor detects (cuts) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is configured to detect that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotational speed of the reel has become constant, and the process moves to step 6130. On the other hand, if No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) has elapsed since the reel drive state became the reel constant speed state. Determine whether or not. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotational speed of the reel has become constant, and the process moves to step 6130. In this way, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotational speed is normally constant by having the reel sensor detect the index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times (the configuration is such that 400 steps can be rotated by 400 interrupt processing), and when the reel rotation speed is constant, This is longer than the time it takes for the reel to make one rotation (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the time value for executing interrupt processing 336 times). With this configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor (distance from when the reel rotates until the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel drive state becomes constant speed state is determined. However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured so that it can be done.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6126. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel reacceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. In this way, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, , the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that even in the case of No in step 6120, the process moves to step 6130. Note that the reel re-acceleration processing does not have to be the same as the reel acceleration processing described above, and the reel re-acceleration processing and reel acceleration processing can be used to perform interrupt processing for each combination of excitation phases of the stepping motor and for each combination of excitation phases. The number of executions may be made different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 in FIG. 32 in this embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the reel deceleration standby state start timing (this is the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends; for example, when the stop button is operated, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is reached). ) is reached. If Yes in step 6130, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel deceleration standby state in step 6132, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6130, the process moves to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration standby state. If Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts decelerating the reel (reel deceleration process) in step 6138. Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the process of step 6142. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process moves to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration state. If Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1612). Note that even in the case of No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1612).

Next, the rotating operation of the reel M50 of the reel type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail using FIG. 35. The reel-type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotational speed of the reels reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (the reel When the driving state becomes a reel constant speed state, a reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotational speed may not actually reach the constant speed). When any stop button is operated, stop control is performed for the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor) having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3. Rotation is controlled by phase excitation. That is, by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited), the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction. In the figure, the "phase to be excited" column indicates which phase among Φ0 to Φ3 is to be excited (details will be described later).

In addition, as shown in the "Reel rotation speed image" at the top of the figure, the driving states from when the stepping motor starts rotating until it stops are divided into six, and the stepping motor is controlled according to the drive pattern corresponding to each driving state. Drive control. Here, the drive states include "reel stop state", "reel rotation start standby state", "reel acceleration state", "reel constant speed state", "reel deceleration standby state", and "reel deceleration state". In addition, in the "Reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases in the upward direction, and the horizontal axis is the time, and the time is illustrated so that time passes in the right direction. There is. In addition, the example shown in the figure is an example of a case where no reel rotation failure occurs, and this applies only if reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or losing synchronization. (The case where reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

"Reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the "reel stop state", the reel is in a stationary state, and all four phases of the stepping motor are activated. is not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the start lever D50 being operated at timing (1) in the figure. . Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from when the start lever D50 is operated until the stepping motor acceleration process (reel acceleration process) is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state." For example, the time from when the reel drive state became "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is measured, and the start lever D50 for the current game is operated before the minimum playing time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed. If it is, it will be in a "wait state to start reel rotation".

Next, at timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated from a stationary state to reach a constant speed. In this example, the acceleration state ends when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times ("100+60+30+15+8+4+2+1=220", see the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the bottom left of the figure) (the reel drive state is changed to "reel constant speed"). is configured to update the status). Next, the reel rotational speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends by executing one more timer interrupt process. Note that at this timing, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state". Next, at timing (4) in the figure, after the reel drive state is updated from "reel rotation start standby state" to "reel acceleration state", the timer interrupt process has been executed 220 times, and the reel drive state is updated. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". In this way, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process. The combination of excited phases "φ3, φ0" is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, similar to the "reel constant speed state" where interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of excited phases. (If no abnormal rotation of the reel occurs). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration process until the reel rotational speed reaches a constant speed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a "step motor excitation image". In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state" and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel constant speed state" are illustrated. First, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel acceleration state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower left of the figure. Note that the "phase to be excited" is a combination of phases to be excited, and the "number of times of interrupt execution" indicates the number of times that an interrupt process is executed to be excited by the combination of phases to be excited. In this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the step motor is excited for 220 timer interrupt processes, and (KA) interrupt process is executed 100 times at "φ0" → ( KB) Interrupt processing is performed 60 times with "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing is performed 30 times with "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing is performed 15 times with "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" ” interrupt processing 8 times → (KF) “φ2, φ3” interrupt processing 4 times → (KG) “φ3” interrupt processing 2 times → (KH) “φ3, φ0” interrupt processing The interrupt processing is executed once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of executions of the interrupt processing is just an example, and there is no problem in changing it). In this way, in this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the configuration is such that the number of times the interrupt process is executed for one combination of excited phases is gradually reduced.

Next, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in constant speed state (when executing reel constant speed maintenance processing), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) "φ0" → (TB) "φ0, φ1" Interrupt processing once → (TC) Interrupt processing once on “φ1” → (TD) Interrupt processing once on “φ1, φ2” → (TE) Interrupt processing once on “φ2” → (TF) Interrupt processing is performed once on "φ2, φ3" → (TG) Interrupt processing is performed once on "φ3" → (TH) Interrupt processing is performed once on "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0" → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" →..., repeating (TA) to (TG) one interrupt processing at a time. The motor is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). In this way, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the number of times that the interrupt process is executed for one excitation phase combination is all one time.

Next, in a situation where the reel drive state is "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the diagram, and the reel drive state changes to "reel deceleration standby state". ” will be updated. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the rotational speed of the reel is constant (the combination of excitation phases is switched for each interrupt processing), and the "reel deceleration standby state" ” indicates the state from when the stop button is operated by the player until the start of stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, the reels are slipping in proportion to the number of slipping frames). . The period of this driving state is determined based on the timing of operation of the stop button.

Next, at timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and deceleration of the reel is started. When the reel drive state is updated from "reel deceleration standby state" to "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor will continue to be excited for a predetermined period of time in order to stop the rotation of the reel. Perform four-phase excitation to excite everything. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined period of time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel comes to a stop.

As described above, in the reel gaming machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state changes to the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally performed while the reel acceleration process is being executed. In addition, whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (or whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is determined by the process in step 6124 (when the reel drive state changes to the reel constant speed state). However, in the process of step 6124, the reel sensor does not detect the index, so the reel is not at a constant speed (determination is made after a predetermined period of time has passed since the update). If it is determined that the reel acceleration process has occurred, the reel acceleration process is executed again, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring the system so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the , if the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can reach a constant speed through the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel acceleration processing is finished, the reel drive state changes to the reel constant speed state. If the reel sensor detects the index before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the index was updated, the reel constant speed maintenance process will be executed without executing the re-acceleration process. A situation in which the player cannot proceed with the game (the stop button cannot be operated) can be made less likely to occur. In addition, by configuring the reel acceleration process so that the process for determining whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed is not executed, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reels. Furthermore, because of this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs while the reel-type gaming machine according to this example is executing reel acceleration processing, the following actions will occur. becomes.

<Effect 1>
The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → the execution of the reel acceleration process is completed → the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → the reel constant The reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the speed maintenance process → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel re-acceleration process is executed The reel is configured to operate as described above.
In addition, reel rotation failure means that the rotation of the reel is obstructed by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), or the reel is not accelerated due to loss of synchronization, etc. This refers to the case where the process was not executed normally. In this way, by configuring the reel reacceleration process to be executed even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can be smoothly played.

<Effect 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel acceleration processing is continued and executed → Reel acceleration processing ends → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect reel rotation failure → Execute reel re-acceleration process The system is configured to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the game can be smoothly played by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when the reel rotation failure is subsequently detected. will be possible. In addition, as described above, even if a rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process will continue to be executed, and the same interrupt as when the rotation failure has not occurred will be issued. When the reel acceleration process has been executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration process ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the reel rotation speed to easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of execution of the reel acceleration process. can.

<Effect 3>
The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → the power is cut off during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the power is recovered from the power cut → the reel acceleration process continues to be executed Execute reel acceleration processing for processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel drive Update the state to constant reel speed → Execute constant reel speed maintenance process → Detect reel rotation failure → Execute reel acceleration process The system is configured to operate as described above. In this way, even if the power-off process is executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process will continue after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state will be updated to the reel constant speed state for a predetermined period of time. By executing the reel re-acceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index within the time limit, the game can be smoothly played. In addition, if the power-off process is executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process will be continued after the power is restored, and the reel will be reeled within a predetermined time after the reel drive status is updated to the reel constant speed status. The reel re-acceleration process is configured not to be executed when the sensor detects the index, and this configuration prevents a situation where the player is unable to proceed with the game (inability to operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration process. can be made less likely to occur. Note that the power-off processing may be referred to as power-off processing.

<<Operation after final stop button operation>>
In the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated, the final reel (the reel that is rotating to the end, also referred to as the third reel) stops, and the winning combination is Although the system is configured such that the payout of game medals can be executed when a symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the following configuration may be used as an effect regarding the payout of game medals.

<Effect 1>
The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop is performed as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the button → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Third stop button ) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → A power outage occurs → The third reel moves (rotates) to the stop display position → Power outage is detected → Execute power outage processing → Power is restored → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be stopped and displayed → processing related to payout of game medals may be executed. With this configuration, in a game where a player wins a small prize, such as the aforementioned common bell, which can be won regardless of the timing of the stop button operation, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. Even if a power outage occurs due to a power outage at the gaming parlor immediately after the power outage occurs, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding pieces is the maximum), the relevant power outage will occur before the power outage is detected. It can be configured so that the movement (rotation) to the scheduled stop position is completed. In addition, if the symbol combinations that make up the winning combination (for example, the common bell) are stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Effect 2>
The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop is performed as the stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Third stop button ) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The reel's winning combination from the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (this is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, For example, in a game where the winning combination of bells is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of bells is not displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the gaming machine responds to the player's operation of the stop button. When the internal processing successfully executes the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination) -> Execute the process related to the payout of game medals It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the reels as seen from the player, , when a winning combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medals can be paid out, and the system is configured so that no disadvantage is likely to occur to the player. can do. Note that the timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from when the second reel stops displaying until the processing related to the payout of game medals is executed, and as a result, the reel rotation failure occurs at the second reel. This is applicable to all cases where the reel corresponding to the three stops cannot be stopped at the expected stop position (it is also applicable to the effects related to reel rotation failure, as exemplified below). In addition, in the above-mentioned effect 2, the effect in a game in which a winning combination is won is exemplified. In other words, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following effects will occur (if other effects do not cause rotation failure or power outage, the system is configured so that the same effect will occur) good).
The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop is performed as the stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Third stop button ) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. In the judgment process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the process related to the payout of game medals is executed. Furthermore, as a winning combination in the above-mentioned or later-described operation, the symbol combination is determined to be normal at the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game. It may be a winning combination (for example, a common bell) that allows you to win regardless of the timing, or a winning combination that may or may not win depending on the timing of pressing the stop button in the winning game (for example, Watermelon A, Watermelon B, Cherry) may also be used. In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, if the reel rotation failure or power outage does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( In the case where a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as a flashing effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined gaming state is In a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination does not stop displaying. It may be configured to perform a lamp effect. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the case is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to defective reel rotation. It may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the expected stop position due to poor reel rotation (the same applies to other actions as well). applicable).

<Effect 3>
The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop is performed as the stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and the stable supply of power to the gaming machine stops → The second reel stops. Operate the third stop button as a stop operation for the 3 reels (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → 3rd reel plays the game From the player's perspective, the symbol combination cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reel is not stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269. (This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed. For example, in a game where the Bell winning combination is won, the reel corresponds to the Bell winning combination, which is the winning combination from the player's perspective. (If the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination was not stopped and displayed, but the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button successfully executed the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the bell winning combination) → Execution of processing related to payout of game medals may be configured to operate as described above. Furthermore, the timing at which a power outage is detected, the timing at which the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power outage, the timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and the timing at which the power is restored are as follows. , the timing is not limited to the above timing, but the timing of detecting a power outage during the period from when the second reel stops displaying until the processing related to payout of game medals is executed, or when a power outage occurs and the power to the gaming machine is It suffices if there is a timing at which the supply stops, a timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and a timing at which the power is restored. This is applicable to all cases in which the vehicle cannot stop at the scheduled stop position (the same applies to the actions including power cut-off as exemplified below). With this configuration, a power outage occurred immediately (or immediately after) after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reels could not be stopped and displayed from the player's perspective. In this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is pressed at the timing when a winning combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation has been accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been successfully executed, the game medals will be paid out after the power is restored. (This includes not only the payout from the outlet, but also the increase in the display (number of credits) on the credit number display device), and the structure is such that it is unlikely to cause any disadvantage to the player. Can be done. Note that the timing at which the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power outage may be referred to as the timing at which the power outage occurs. In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, if the reel rotation failure or power outage does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( In the case where a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as a flashing effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined gaming state is Even if a power outage occurs in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination It may be configured to perform a performance. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the case is not limited to this. It may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage (applicable to other actions as well). ). Note that in this example, "the supply of power to the gaming machine has stopped" and "the stable supply of power to the gaming machine has stopped" does not mean that the power supplied to the gaming machine is 0, but rather that the power supply to the gaming machine has stopped. This may also be the case when the power supplied to the game machine becomes less than the power supplied during operation of the game machine due to a power outage or the like, or when the supply of power to the game machine is cut off.

<Effect 4>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 3rd reel stops and displays 3rd stop button (3rd stop button) (receives operation) → Updates the reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → From the player's perspective, the reel becomes a winning combination Although the corresponding symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (this is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed, for example , in a game that resulted in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss did not stop displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the symbol combination corresponding to the loss was displayed due to processing within the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the combination is normally executed) → the payout of game medals is not executed. It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels correspond to the winning combination. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is successfully executed, game medals will be issued even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that no payout is performed, and thus the game machine can be made fair, and it can be made a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. Note that the above effect 4 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game where the bell is not won (a game where the replay winning combination is won, a game where the watermelon is won, etc.), the reel rotation failure may occur. It should be noted that this can also be applied when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In addition, in such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to the rotation failure, but in the determination process of step 1269, Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the configuration is such that a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Effect 5>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The power supply is interrupted and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The 3rd reel is stopped by the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reel is displayed in a stopped state, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal (stopped) This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the button operation has been successfully completed. For example, in a game that resulted in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss did not stop and display on the reels from the player's perspective. , when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is successfully executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → Power is restored → Game medal payout is not executed. It may be configured to function as follows. By configuring this way, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the winning combinations from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is successfully executed, game medals will be issued even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that no payout is performed, and thus the game machine can be made fair, and it can be made a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. Note that the above effect 5 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game where the bell is not won (a game where the replay winning combination is won, a game where the watermelon is won, etc.), the reel rotation failure may occur. It should be noted that this can also be applied when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In addition, in such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to the rotation failure, but in the determination process of step 1269, Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the configuration is such that a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Effect 6>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 3rd reel stops and displays 3rd stop button (3rd stop button) (receives operation) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Bonus winning ( For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is displayed in a stopped state, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal (determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed). For example, in a game in which the player did not win the bonus role and the game ended in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the player presses the stop button. (If the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is successfully executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation) → The bonus does not start and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to function as follows. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the bonus role from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is executed normally, the bonus will be played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that it does not start, thereby making it a fair gaming machine, and also making it possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 6 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game in which the bonus role is not won (not in the bonus), and the bonus role is not won (the re-playing role is won). It should be noted that the present invention can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs in a game in which a watermelon is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the above-mentioned effect 6, the effect in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is exemplified. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following effects occur (this can also be applied to other effects when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur).
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed stopped on the reel from the player's perspective, and in step 1269 In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal.→The bonus is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the bonus combination is won or during the bonus, the following effects occur.
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the determination process of step 1269 For example, the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In addition, in the above example, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. , execution or non-execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Effect 7>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The power supply is interrupted and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The 3rd reel is stopped by the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, BB role) is displayed on the reels, but the symbol combination is normal in the judgment process of step 1269. (This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed. For example, in a game where the player has not won the bonus role and has lost, The symbol combination that corresponds to the bonus combination was stopped and displayed on the reels when I looked at it, but the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination that corresponds to the loss was successfully performed by the processing inside the gaming machine that corresponds to the player's operation of the stop button. If executed)→power return→bonus does not start, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the bonus winning combination is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the internal processing of the gaming machine results in a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is successfully executed, the game will not be played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that the bonus of medals is not started, and it is possible to make the game machine fair and not to cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 6 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game in which the bonus role is not won (not in the bonus), and the bonus role is not won (the re-playing role is won). It should be noted that the present invention can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs in a game in which a watermelon is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the above-mentioned effect 6, the effect in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is exemplified. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following actions will occur (this can also be applied to other actions if no rotation failure or power outage occurs).
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed stopped on the reel from the player's perspective, and in step 1269 In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal.→The bonus is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power supply has not been cut off during the game in which the bonus combination has been won or during the bonus, the following effects will occur.
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the determination process of step 1269 For example, the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In addition, in the above example, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. , execution or non-execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Effect 8>
The reels start rotating as a game executed during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player Not possible → Although the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, BB role) is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 → The bonus starts, In addition, it may be configured to operate as described above, in which the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus is won or a game where a bonus combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role will be displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is not being stopped and displayed. The system can also be configured to start the bonus and execute a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which is a significant problem for players whose bonus is prevented from starting due to poor reel rotation when the bonus should have started. The system can be configured so as not to cause any disadvantages, and the player can proceed with the game without feeling any discomfort by freezing the start of the bonus in the same way as if the reel rotation failure had not occurred. Become.

<Effect 9>
The reels start rotating as a game executed during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Play the game due to a power outage Power supply to the machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Power outage detected → Power off Execute processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not displayed on the reel as seen from the player. However, in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination may be determined to be normal → the power is restored → the bonus starts, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus is won or a game where a bonus combination is won, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. , Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is moved at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the bonus combination is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not being stopped and displayed. However, the bonus can be configured to start the bonus and execute a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which can be a significant problem for players where a power outage prevents the bonus from starting in a situation where the bonus should have started. It is possible to configure the system so as not to cause any disadvantages, and the player can proceed with the game without feeling any discomfort by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus, in the same way as if the reel rotation failure had not occurred. Become.

<Effect 10>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 3rd reel stops and displays 3rd stop button (3rd stop button) (receives operation) → Updates the reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The reel is replayed from the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to is displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (this is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed, For example, in a game that resulted in a loss, the symbol combination that corresponds to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the loss is handled by processing within the gaming machine that corresponds to the player's operation of the stop button. (If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combinations is executed normally) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-gaming combination will not be made and the re-gaming lamp D290 will not light up again. may be configured. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reel does not appear as a replayable winning combination. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the internal processing of the gaming machine results in a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed. An automatic bet will not be made, and the replay lamp D290 will not be lit again. In addition, in effect 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination to which the RT state will change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state is displayed in a stopped state from the player's perspective, the gaming machine When the internal processing results in a loss and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for stopping and displaying is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the re-gaming role will change is stopped and displayed) ). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 10 is not limited to losing only, but is applied, for example, in a game where the replay combination has not been won, a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Please add what you can do. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following effects occur (this can also be applied to other effects when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur).
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, and the symbol combination is changed in the determination process of step 1269. The combination is determined to be normal, and the automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again.
Furthermore, automatic bet means that the specified number (for example, 3) of game medals that were bet on in the game where the replay combination was won will be pressed by the bet button (max bet button) when the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Bets are automatically placed without any operation or insertion of game medals from the medal slot.
On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the replay combination has been won, the following effects will occur.
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 The symbol combination is determined to be normal → automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up anew (if you won the replay combination in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 lights up) )
The following effects can be exemplified.

<Effect 11>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The power supply is interrupted and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The 3rd reel is stopped by the player It is not possible to move (rotate) to the expected stopping position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the reel in a stopped state, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 ( This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed. For example, in a game that resulted in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. (If the game machine successfully executes the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss due to the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → Power is restored → Stop display of the re-gaming combination It may also be configured so that the corresponding automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the re-game winning combination is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be moved at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the winning combination is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination will be stopped and displayed. Also, no automatic bet will be made and the replay lamp D290 will not be lit again. In addition, in effect 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination to which the RT state will change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state is displayed in a stopped state from the player's perspective, the gaming machine When the internal processing results in a loss and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for stopping and displaying is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the re-gaming role will change is stopped and displayed) ). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 11 is not limited to losing only, but can be applied, for example, in a game where the replay combination has not been won, when a power outage occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Let me add what you can do. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following actions will occur (this can also be applied to other actions if no rotation failure or power outage occurs).
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, and the symbol combination is changed in the determination process of step 1269. The combination is determined to be normal -> the automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again. On the other hand, if a power outage does not occur in a game in which a replay combination has been won, the following effects will occur. The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 The symbol combination is determined to be normal → automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up again (if you won the replay combination in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 lights up) )
The following effects can be exemplified.

<Effect 12>
The reels start rotating as a winning game for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception becomes valid → First stop as stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Third stop button ) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Replay the reel from the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269.→An automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replaying combination is made, and the replaying lamp D290 is turned on. It may be configured to function as described above when the light is newly lit. With this configuration, in a game where the winning combination result is a replay, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel will be replayed from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not displayed in a stopped state, each reel (left reel , middle reel, right reel), and if the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the replayed role is successfully executed, the replayed role is supported. An automatic bet is made even if the symbol combination to be played is not stopped and displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and since the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combinations are not displayed in a stopped state, replays cannot be played even if the reels are visually checked. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually confirming whether or not an automatic bet has been made and whether the replay lamp D290 is lit. In addition, in action 12, if a re-gaming combination has been won that would cause the RT state to change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination will be stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will be shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 13>
The reels start rotating as a winning game for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception becomes valid → First stop as stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → 1st reel stops display → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel displays stop → Power cut occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → 3rd reel Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → Third reel is activated by player It is not possible to move (rotate) to the expected stop position when viewed from the player → Although the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not displayed on the reel in a stopped state from the player's perspective, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269. →Power return→Automatic bet corresponding to stop display of re-gaming combination is made, and re-gaming lamp D290 is newly lit.It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is a replay, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the replay is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed in a stopped state, each reel (left If the stop button operation corresponding to the reel, middle reel, right reel is accepted, and the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the replayed role is executed normally, the replayed role is An automatic bet is made even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and since the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combinations are not displayed in a stopped state, replays cannot be played even if the reels are visually checked. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually confirming whether or not an automatic bet has been made and whether the replay lamp D290 is lit. In addition, in action 13, if a re-gaming combination is won that will cause the RT state to change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination will be stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will be shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which problems are unlikely to occur in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 14>
The reels start rotating as a game in which the player wins a role in which the RT state changes (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted. Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel Operate the third stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player. (Rotation) not possible → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed in a stopped state, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal → RT state transitions As described above It may be configured to work. By configuring this way, in a game in which an RT transition combination has been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels will display symbols corresponding to the RT transition combination. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT transition combination has been won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel , right reel), and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is successfully executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. Even if it is not displayed in a stopped state, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to players, and it is also possible to proceed with the game according to the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine inherently has, thereby improving the performance of the gaming parlor. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. Note that the RT transition combination is a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in a predetermined RT state, thereby transitioning to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state. The difference may be whether or not it becomes true. That is, in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition role, but in RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be an RT transition role, and in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition role. However, in RT state B, there may be cases where the prescribed winning combination A is not won.

<Effect 15>
The reels start rotating as a game in which the player wins a role in which the RT state changes (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted. Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → detects power outage → Execute power-off processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not displayed stopped from the player's perspective, but step 1269 In the determination process, the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored, or the RT state may shift before the power is restored)
It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring this way, in a game in which an RT transition combination has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the RT transition combination from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT transition combination has been won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel) is If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel (reel, right reel) is accepted, and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is successfully executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is The RT state will shift even if the combination is not displayed in a stopped state. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to players, and it is also possible to proceed with the game according to the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine inherently has, thereby improving the performance of the gaming parlor. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 16>
The reels start rotating in a game in which the RT state transition role (sometimes referred to as the RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is pressed. Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → 3rd Operate the third stop button to stop the reels (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel is at the expected stop position from the player's perspective cannot be moved (rotated) until → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed in a stopped state, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal → The RT state does not transition It may be configured to function as follows. With this configuration, in a game where the RT transition combination has not been won, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels will not correspond to the RT transition combination. Even if the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, the player can operate the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination that causes the RT state to shift (falls) due to a reel rotation failure appears to be stopped, the RT state will not shift, causing unintended inconvenience to the player. To provide a game machine that does not generate profits, allows the game to proceed along the transition of the game state inherent in the game machine, and allows the manager of a game parlor to operate the game machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 17>
The reels start rotating in a game in which the RT state transition role (sometimes referred to as the RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is pressed. Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Power off occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power off Detected → Execute power-off processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed stopped from the player's perspective, In the determination processing in step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal.→RT state does not shift.It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the RT transition winning combination has not been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels are changed to the RT transition winning combination from the player's perspective. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, the player can operate the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination that causes the RT state to shift (falls) due to a reel rotation failure appears to be stopped, the RT state will not shift, causing unintended inconvenience to the player. To provide a game machine that does not generate profits, allows the game to proceed along the transition of the game state inherent in the game machine, and allows the manager of a game parlor to operate the game machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 18>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Game From the perspective of the user, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped state on the active line on the first and second reels → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the user (if the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination on the first reel and the second reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line) → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect when reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will be stopped and displayed on the active line on the second reel → Tenpai sound will be output from the speaker,
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the second reel → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above.
By configuring this way, in a game where the winning combination result is a loss, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol will be changed to the first stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at the second stop, the tenpai sound is not output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be at the tenpai position when the bonus symbol is stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example. Therefore, even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly sense that the reel rotation failure has occurred based on the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that make up the bonus symbol are changed to the first stop and second stop button. Even if the bonus symbol does not reach full stop, in other words, the bonus symbol does not reach tenpai, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to reach tenpai if the bonus symbol stops at the scheduled stop position in this example. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker.

<Effect 19>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect power outage → Process in case of power outage Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → Power supply Recovery → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker,
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect power outage → Process in case of power outage Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective ( When the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will be stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels) → Power is restored → Tenpai sound will be output from the speaker It may be configured to function as described above. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will be stopped and displayed on the active line on the second reel → Tenpai sound will be output from the speaker,
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the second reel → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. Note that the timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off has occurred.
By configuring this way, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol is the first one. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the bonus symbol is stopped at the scheduled stopping position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tenpai. Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that make up the bonus symbol are changed to the first stop and second stop button. Even if it did not stop as a stop, in other words, the bonus symbol did not reach tenpai, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to become tenpai. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) The reel rotation failure may occur immediately after the reel rotation occurs.

<Effect 20>
The reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → The first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as seen from the player Unable to move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker.
The reels start rotating when the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as seen from the player Unable to move (rotate) → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels (when the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first reel and the second reel)→The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker.It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect when reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows.
The reels start rotating when the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Game From the perspective of the user, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped state on the active line on the first and second reels → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → The first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Game It may be configured so that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the first reel and the second reel when seen by the user → the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. In addition, the bonus confirmation ten-pai sound is the ten-pai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed (ten-pai) on the active line, and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss and the bonus is not in progress, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbols forming the bonus symbol Even if the combination stops as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol reaches tenpai, if the combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to become tenpai. Since the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output, even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred due to the output from the speaker. can do.
Similarly, in a game where the winning combination result is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during a bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is not configured. Even if the symbol combination does not stop as the first stop and second stop, in other words, the bonus symbol does not reach tenpai, if the symbol combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbol is expected to become tenpai. In this case, the bonus confirmation tenpai sound will be output, and even if the reel's apparent stopping position is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player will be able to hear the output from the speaker. You can quickly detect what is going on. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) The reel rotation failure may occur immediately after the reel rotation occurs.

<Effect 21>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect power outage → Process in case of power outage Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → Power supply Recovery → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker,
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect power outage → Process in case of power outage Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective ( When the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will be stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels) → Power is restored → Tenpai sound will be output from the speaker It may be configured to function as described above. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will be stopped and displayed on the active line on the second reel → Tenpai sound will be output from the speaker,
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the second reel → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. Note that the timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off has occurred.
By configuring this way, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol is the first one. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the bonus symbol is stopped at the scheduled stopping position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tenpai. Even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly sense through the output from the speaker that an abnormality has occurred in the reels due to the power outage. Can be done. Similarly, in a game where the winning lottery result was a loss, a power outage occurred immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that constitute the bonus symbol were changed to the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol did not reach tenpai, if the bonus symbol was scheduled to become tenpai when it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output. Therefore, even if the apparent stopping position of the reels is not normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reels due to the power outage through the output from the speaker. can. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) (The power-off process may be executed immediately after the power-off process is executed.)

<Effect 22>
The reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → The first reel As a stop operation, operate the first stop button → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → As a stop operation for the second reel, operate the second stop button → Turn off the power Detection → Execute power-off processing → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The bonus combination corresponds to the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker.
The reels start rotating when the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first reel As a stop operation, operate the first stop button → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → As a stop operation for the second reel, operate the second stop button → Turn off the power Detection → Execute power-off processing → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The bonus combination corresponds to the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination does not stop and display (If the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels) → Bonus confirmed from the speaker It may be configured to function as described above in which the tenpai sound is output. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
The reels start rotating when the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Game From the perspective of the user, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped state on the active line on the first and second reels → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → The first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Game It may be configured so that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the first reel and the second reel when seen by the user → the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. In addition, the bonus confirmation ten-pai sound is the ten-pai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed (ten-pai) on the active line, and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss and the bonus is not in progress, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is created. Even if the symbol combination stops as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol becomes tenpai, if the symbol combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to become tenpai. will not output the bonus confirmation tenpai sound, and even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the player will be able to hear the output from the speaker indicating that there is an abnormality in the reels due to the power outage. can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game where the winning combination result is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during a bonus, the power-off process occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbols are not displayed. Even if the constituent symbol combinations do not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, the bonus symbols do not reach tenpai, if they stop at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbols will become tenpai. If it was scheduled, the bonus confirmation tenpai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stopping position of the reels is not normal due to a power outage, the output from the speaker will alert the player to the possibility that the reels are abnormal due to a power outage. It is possible to quickly detect that something is occurring. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) (The power-off process may be executed immediately after the power-off process is executed.)

<Effect 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player Not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up.
The reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player It may be configured to work as described above, in which the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is stopped and displayed and the max bet lamp is lit. In addition, the effect when reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows.
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp does not light up.
The reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay It may be configured so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop and display → the max bet lamp lights up.
By configuring this way, in a game where you win a replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay does not stop and display. Similarly to the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay are stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp does not light up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is not valid. In addition, in a game where you have not won a replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination that corresponds to the replay is stopped and displayed, the replay is also possible. As in the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the game are not displayed in a stopped state, the max bet lamp lights up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is valid.

<Effect 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Play the game due to a power outage Power supply to the machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Power outage detected → Power off When processing is executed → the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → the max bet lamp does not light up.
The reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Play the game due to a power outage Power supply to the machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Power outage detected → Power off Execute processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp lights up. It works as above. It may be configured to do so. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp does not light up.
The reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay It may be configured so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop and display → the max bet lamp lights up.
By configuring this way, in a game in which a replay has been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed. Similarly to the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay are stopped and displayed, the player can quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is not valid because the max bet lamp does not light up. In addition, in a game that has not been won for replay, if the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not displayed in a stopped state, the max bet lamp lights up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is valid.

<Effect 25>
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination is won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by the player being awarded gaming medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel is stopped by operating the first stop button → First reel stops Display → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination does not stop and display → The bonus ends, It may also be configured to function as described above in which the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. In addition, the effect when reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows.
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination is won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by the player being awarded gaming medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel is stopped by operating the first stop button → First reel stops Display → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination is stopped and displayed → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to function as described above.
With this configuration, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after winning a winning combination in the final bonus game and accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop and display. Even in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, when the bonus ends, the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, so that the player can immediately know that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a game machine that can sense the progress of the game and does not make people feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

<Effect 26>
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination is won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by the player being awarded gaming medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel is stopped by operating the first stop button → First reel stops Display → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Press the third stop button to stop the third reel (Accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player ( Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination is won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by the player being awarded gaming medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel is stopped by operating the first stop button → First reel stops Display → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination is stopped and displayed → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to function as described above.
With this configuration, immediately after winning the winning combination in the final bonus game and accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, the power-off process is executed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, allowing the player to know that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be detected quickly and that does not make people feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

Furthermore, from the configuration related to the reel acceleration process in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example described above, the execution period of the reel acceleration process when no defective rotation of the reel occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process = A
If a rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the execution period of the reel acceleration process until the rotation failure occurs = B
Execution period of the reel acceleration process after the rotation failure occurs when the rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process=C
If
A=B+C
It is configured so that
Also,
Number of executions of interrupt processing for reel acceleration processing when no defective drum rotation occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = D
When a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing, the number of times the reel acceleration processing interrupt processing is executed until the reel rotation failure occurs = E
When a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing, the number of times the reel acceleration processing interrupt processing is executed after the reel rotation failure occurs = F
If
D=E+F
It is configured so that

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of power-off processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processing completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and calculates error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, The lower 1 byte of the checksum or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and instruction number indicated by the executed push order navigation (information related to the push order; in this example, the main control board M determines it and sends it to the sub control board S) This is a table showing the correspondence. For example, when the pressing order is "middle→right→left", the instruction number is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, when the push order is "left → middle → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A1"), the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40 The image shown is shown in the figure. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example has a 7-segment display system and also serves as a payout number display device. Further, when the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the press order display device D270. Here, when executing the push order navigation, if the display on the push order display device D270 is displayed as a 2-digit number, the display on the push order display device D270 may be the number of medals to be paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display or not. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 displays "=" in the left digit, such as "=1". By configuring this, when the display on the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the display on the push order display device D270 is "=" on the left side and a number on the right side. If there is, it is configured to be able to determine that it is a push order navigation display, so as to prevent the player from misperceiving it. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the "advantageous section" is lit. At the same time, a display of "40 games remaining" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT state") is displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, the right side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3"). There is. In addition, since the current game section is an "advantageous section," the advantageous section display YH lights up, and a display of "25 games remaining" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. is displayed. Furthermore, among the conditional devices in which the winnings that are stopped and displayed differ depending on the reel stop order, there are conditional devices that involve payout of medals, such as a bell, and replayable combinations that have the push order (depending on the reel stop order). Among the condition devices with different combinations to be stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the condition device related to the replay combination may be different, and the push order display device D270
The display method is not limited to 7 segments; for example, an LED display may be used to provide instructions by lighting a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number. good. Note that an advantageous section display YH may be provided at the lower right portion of the credit number display device D200. In this case, the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably turned on until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player stops playing, he or she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to see if there are any medals left. If there are medals remaining, the payment button D60 is operated. In other words, by lighting up the payment button D60 before it becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the user from accidentally quitting the game even though it is an "advantageous period" from the next game. be able to.

Furthermore, the notification mode of the game section on the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and a section display similar to the advantageous section display YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section display In such a configuration, when the left section indicator lights up, it will notify that the current gaming section is the "normal section", and on the other hand, the right section When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an "advantageous section." In addition, "normal sections" and "advantageous sections" are distinguished by the color and lighting mode of the section indicator (for example, "normal sections" are marked "green" and "advantageous sections" are marked "red"). Alternatively, the light may be turned on during the "normal section" and "flashing" during the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is configured to change depending on "BB internal game during AT", "BB state during AT", "AT precursor state", "state during AT", etc. in the "advantageous section". You can. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the fact that the current gaming section is a "standby section" can be recognized separately from the "normal section" and the "advantageous section." However, the distinction between the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" will be made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, so that the player can recognize whether the current gaming section is the "advantageous section" or not. It is preferable to make it easier.

Furthermore, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 that indicates the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. (In a state where the profit is relatively low for the player, a disadvantage to the player such as the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" being subtracted is not notified) may be adopted. However, even with this configuration, it is preferable to turn on the section indicator to inform the player that the game is in the "advantageous section." At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator is configured to be controlled by the main control board M and that the section indicator is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control processing executed on the sub control board S side will be explained with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initializing the CPU and RAM and calculating a checksum.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the checksum value calculated at power-on matches the checksum value calculated and stored at power-off. If Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process in step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the 1-command process to be described later. It is determined whether the state has been recovered from the state in which the power supply was interrupted, that is, whether the state has been completely recovered.

If Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that a complete recovery has occurred, then in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows interrupts and is executed when the power is turned off. Return processing to 1 command processing.

On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the judgment process in step 2008 that the two checksum values do not match, in step 2014 CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute. Note that after executing the process in step 2014, or in the case of No in step 2010, the process shifts to sub-main loop process.

<Submain loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts operating the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S allows an interrupt. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing, which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined period of time, for example 16 ms, has elapsed, and if it is determined that it has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the process.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process that is started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If YES in step 2204, the process moves to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation results, the address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether 500 ms have elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is ended. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power has been restored. If Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of instantaneous power outages. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts operating the watchdog timer and returns to the process that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one-command processing that is called and executed in the process of step 2250 in FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is time to operate the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the timing to operate the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the production-related determination process when operating the start lever, which will be described later. do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start lever operation process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the timing to operate the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the timing to accept the first reel stop. If No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the process when the first reel stop is accepted, which will be described later. Then, the process moves to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. . If No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the second reel stop acceptance process, which will be described later. Then, the process moves to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. . If No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls a subroutine for the third reel stop effect related determination process, which will be described later. and execute it. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a third drum stop acceptance process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2266, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. . If Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a process (not shown) at the time of stop display symbol, and in step 7100 to move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately moves to step 7000.

Next, in step 7000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a movable accessory control process. In the movable accessory control process, it is determined whether or not it is the movable timing for the movable accessory YK, and if it is the movable timing, the movable accessory YK is moved according to a predetermined pattern (movable pattern, operation check pattern, etc.). Make it moveable. If it is not the movable timing, the process moves to the next process (step 7100).

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a menu screen display control process to be described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a standby screen display control process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing a process for determining performance related to start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 in FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is a "high probability state." If Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the number of high-security failure games remaining at the moment (high-probability state How many more games are guaranteed? Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for deciding whether or not to execute a battle effect, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it has been determined that a battle effect will be executed in the game. If Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is configured based on the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the game, the AT-related state of the next game, and the current number of high secured obstacle games. Based on this, a stay stage transition lottery (a lottery to decide whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed with reference to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). Note that even in the case of No in step 3006, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is a "low probability state". If Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the stay stage determination table (see FIG. ), a stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to AT of the game is "AT in progress". In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of an AT performance determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the "resurrection possibility state". In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a restoration propriety effect determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the preview presentation and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. It is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). It should be noted that the stay stage is an effect mainly consisting of a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured such that one of the stay stages is always set. Note that if the stay stage is different, the tendencies of various effects such as background effects, preview effects, etc. will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a process for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect, which is called and executed in the process of step 3050 in FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of high-security obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. If Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to execute a battle performance execution lottery (battle performance (win)) that has a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2) of winning. (lottery) will be held. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the battle effect execution possibility lottery executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be a battle effect (win), and moves to the next process (the process in step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and moves to the next process (the process in step 3006). Here, the battle performance is a continuous performance that is performed over multiple games, and by winning the battle performance, that is, by executing the battle performance (victory), you can win the BB role and enter the AT lottery. It is structured so that it is certain that you have won. The configuration regarding battle production is not limited to this, but if the player wins the BB role even if he or she does not win the AT lottery (after the BB ends, the player will move to a "low probability state" or "high probability state") ) may be configured to perform a battle performance (victory).

Further, in the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are Winning-C (Cherry), Winning-D (Watermelon A), and Winning-E (Watermelon B), and these are the winning hands that can overlap with the BB winning combination. It has become. That is, the player has a sense of expectation that the rare winning combination has been won at the same time as the BB winning combination because the rare winning combination is stopped and displayed.If Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is , a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a fake battle performance (a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a battle performance (defeat)) with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is a lower probability than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ). Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the fake battle effect execution possibility lottery executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect of the game to be a battle effect (defeat), and moves to the next process (the process of step 3006). Further, in the case of No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and performs the next process (the process in step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be performed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high-guarantee obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when it is 4 or more, it is possible to execute a continuous performance such as a battle performance over multiple games, while the number of high-guarantee obstacle games is a predetermined number or more. If the number is less than a number, for example, if it is less than 4, the system is configured so that continuous effects such as battle effects will not be executed, so even if the continuous effect is in the middle of execution, it will go to the "low probability state" The battle production can be performed only if it is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from going out due to the transition (setting the "normal section") and ensure that the advantageous section indicator YH remains lit until the battle production ends. By implementing this, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine without damaging the player's expectation of winning the BB.

In addition, when winning a rare role, the system is configured so that continuous effects such as battle effects (defeat) can be performed, so the frequency of battle effects can be guaranteed and the game can always be played with a sense of anticipation. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. Note that only a portion of the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is extracted. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is a table used when the game is in a "low probability state" and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. There are three types of tables: a table, and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less.

The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "low probability state" shows the relationship between the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the next game, the stay stage of the current corpse game, and the corresponding set number. stipulated. If it is in a "low probability state", the current stay stage consists of two types of production stages: a desert stage and a town stage, and the transition stages are a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", and "high probability state".

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game moves to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", a number from 0 to 979 is assigned as the number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, if the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number to be set when transitioning from the desert stage to the town stage in the game is 980 ~ 999 has been assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to shift to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the town stage to the desert stage in that game is 0~ 19 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game moves to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", a number from 20 to 999 is assigned as the number if the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

Furthermore, if the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", a number from 0 to 249 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", a number from 250 to 499 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. If the current stage of stay is the desert stage and the next game is to shift to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers for shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in that game. If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", 750 to 999 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", a number from 0 to 249 is assigned as a number when the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained. If the current stage of stay is the town stage and the next game is to shift to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 is assigned as the number for shifting from the town stage to the conference room stage in that game. If the current stage of stay is the town stage and the next game is to transition to the "high probability state", a number from 750 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the town stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the current skeleton game, and the number of placements is specified. has been done. The current stay stage and transition stage consist of four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 are assigned as numbers. 880 to 929 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. If the current stage of stay is the desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the conference room stage, numbers 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers. 960 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the cave stage.

0 to 879 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. If the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as numbers. 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the conference room stage. 960 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the cave stage.

The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the game shifts from the conference room stage to the town stage, 50 to 99 are assigned as numbers. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as numbers. If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the game shifts from the conference room stage to the cave stage, 950 to 999 are assigned as numbers.

If the current stage of stay is a cave stage and the game changes from the cave stage to the desert stage, 0 to 49 are assigned as numbers. If the current stage of stay is the cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the town stage, 50 to 99 are assigned as numbers. 100 to 199 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the conference room stage. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, a number from 200 to 999 is assigned.

The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less contains the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the next game, and the stay stage of the current corpse game. , the relationship with the position number is specified. The current stay stage and transition stage are comprised of four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "low probability state".

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number from 0 to 979 is assigned as the number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the desert stage to the town stage in the game is 980 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a town stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the town stage to the desert stage in that game is 0 to 19. Assigned. If the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number between 20 and 999 is assigned as the number if the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set is 0 to 0 when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. 29 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game is 30 ~ 59 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", the number to be set is 60 to 999 if the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number 0 to 29 is set when moving from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the cave stage to the town stage in that game is 30 to 59. Assigned. If the current stay stage is the cave stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set is 60 to 99 when moving from the cave stage to the conference room stage in that game. is assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number from 100 to 999 is assigned as the number if the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to shift to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 500 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained.

If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to the "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a cave stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to transition to a low probability state, a number from 500 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the cave stage to the town stage in the game.

In this way, when the state is in the "low probability state", two stages, the desert stage or the city stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when the state is in the "high probability state", four stages can be selected: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous section," while two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section," and two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section." The stay stage 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". With this configuration, even in the "normal section" where there is no hope of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a stay stage that can be a stay stage in the "advantageous section", the player will not get bored even in the "normal section". You can advance the game machine. In addition, when transitioning from a "high probability state" to a "low probability state", that is, when changing from an "advantageous section" to a "normal section", the "normal section" is selected at the "advantageous section" stage. By selecting the performance stage in advance, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", and it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation and continue playing the game.

Note that some of the production stages selected in the "normal section" overlap with the production stages selected in the "advantageous section" (some production stages that can be selected in the "normal section" but are not selected in the "advantageous section") may have).

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less, and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is changed. If the number of games decreases (less than 3 games), avoid moving to a highly anticipated stay stage that is an "advantageous section" than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage). By configuring this, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disappointed due to being in a "normal section" with a small number of games even though they have moved to a stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are arranged in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, and conference room stage" from the "advantageous section" with low expectations (hard to be selected in the "advantageous section").

The structure of the stay stage is not limited to the one in this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is the expectation level of the "advantageous section", the expectation level of winning the AT lottery, and the expectation level of winning the BB. It may be configured to indicate the level of expectation. As an example, the stay stage can be changed in a game where the BB role or the rare role is won (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and when the AT lottery is not executed after winning a single rare role). ), the level of expectation of winning the AT lottery is configured to differ depending on the stage of stay to which the player has transitioned, and the level of expectation is arranged in the order of ``desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage'' in descending order of level of expectation. Alternatively, the level of expectation for winning the BB role may be different depending on the stage of stay, and the level of expectation for winning the BB role may be arranged in descending order of ``Desert Stage, City Stage, Cave Stage, and Conference Room Stage.'' Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is certain that the BB internal lottery has been won or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an AT effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3100 in FIG. 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less. If YES in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the final AT game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. If Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs AT continuation of the production related to the game (success) (AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60, in other words Then, there is a production that notifies that the state related to AT in the next game will be "AT in progress") or a production that encourages AT continuation (failure) (it is certain that AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). Instead, it is determined that the next game's AT-related state will be an "AT in progress state" or a "resurrection possibility state", and the process moves to step 3126. Here, if the continuation lottery is won, the AT continuation provocation performance (success) versus the AT continuation provocation performance (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4:1. That is, in this embodiment, even if the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous incitement effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, the AT continuous promotion effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, the AT continuous promotion effect (failure) may be executed. In the next game, a revival effect (success) will be executed, and the player is configured to feel as if he has won the revival lottery (in reality, he has won the continuation lottery, and the main control board M The control on the side is the same as when the AT continuation incitement effect (success) is executed). By configuring this way, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "resurrection availability state" {2320/65536 lottery wins in one game (in case of setting 1)}, but it is possible to win the continuation performance. By configuring the system so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even when the resurrection effect is executed, it is possible to increase the rate of execution of the resurrection effect (success) when the resurrection effect is executed, and the player can expect more from the resurrection effect. It can enhance the feeling.

If the result in step 3106 is No, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect of the game to be an AT continuation promotion effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. If the result in step 3104 is No, in step 3112 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect of the game to be the AT final effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not this is the next game in which the AT continuation promotion effect (failure) was executed. If Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the effect related to the game as a revival effect (success) (same as the revival effect (success) executed in the "revival possibility effect state"). In this process, it is determined that the effect is the effect that the "AT state" has continued, and the process moves to step 3126. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3114, the process moves to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added to the game. If Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an additional effect related to the game (an effect notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, "+50 GET", etc.) ) and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the performance related to the game to be a performance during AT (a performance executed during AT such as "AT state"), and performs the next process ( The process moves to step 2300 (processing in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine illustrating a process for determining whether or not a revival is possible, which is called and executed in the process of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S restores the performance related to the game (successfully) (the same performance mode as the performance executed in step 3116 described above), This is a performance that notifies you that you have won the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", and in the next game, it will transition to the "AT state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60). It is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the performance related to the game to a revival performance (failed) (in the "resurrection possibility state", the CPUSC did not win the revival lottery) This is an effect that notifies the user that the game will move to a "low probability state" in the next game), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300).

In addition, as mentioned above, the "resurrection possibility state" is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuation lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game of the "AT middle state") which is the "advantageous section". Even if there is no return, the "advantageous section" is configured to be extended in the next game, which is the "resurrection possibility state", so the player should check whether the advantageous section indicator YH is lit or not. If only this is done, it will be difficult to determine whether or not the resurrection performance will be successful, and attention will be paid to the result of the resurrection performance. Furthermore, as described above, the manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "restoration possibility effect state". In other words, the manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed will be different between the next game in which the player wins the continuous lottery in which a revival effect (success) is executed and the game in which he wins in the revival lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. .

In the present embodiment, the system is configured such that in the next game after the AT state ends, a transition is made to a "resurrection possibility presentation state" for one game, and a resurrection lottery is executed in the "resurrection possibility presentation state". By doing so, both the execution game of the revival effect (success) and the execution game of the revival effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to light up, the effect of the revival effect is Although it has been prevented from being possible to determine whether or not AT ends without checking the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) The AT-related state is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, the revival flag is turned on in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, and the resurrection flag is turned on in the game before the revival lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode regarding AT is obtained.
(2) It is configured so that the revival lottery is not executed, and the control on the main control board M side is configured so that whether or not the "AT state" ends is determined solely by whether or not the player wins the continuation lottery, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the final AT game (one game before the final AT game, the first game of the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival effect (success) and a revival effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. Examples of productions include "The game before the final AT game: Production to incite AT continuation (successful) → Final game at AT: Production to indicate that the next set of AT will start", "The game before the final AT game: Production to incite AT continuation" Production (continues to next game) → AT final game: AT continuation promotion production (success)", "Previous game of AT final game: AT continuation promotion production (failure) → AT final game: revival production (success)", "AT It may be configured such that the previous game before the final game: AT continuation promotion effect (failure) → AT final game: revival effect (failure), etc. are executed. That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuation lottery is won. It may also be configured to perform an AT continuation promotion effect or a revival effect.
(3) In a game where a resurrection effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and from that predetermined timing, the resurrection effect (success) is announced. In other words, it may be configured to notify the player that AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is as follows:
(1) This is the bet button operation timing (gaming medal insertion timing) related to the game where the revival effect (success) is executed, and it can be executed if the successive lottery is won.
(2) This is the start lever operation timing for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect that has the same effect as the resurrection effect (defeat) will not be executed;
(3) The timing of pressing the stop button that becomes the first stop for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing that the first stop is turned on),
(4) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button which is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing of first stop turning on → off),
(5) Timing of pressing the stop button which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the second stop is turned on);
(6) Timing when the stop button is pressed and released after pressing the stop button, which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the second stop turns from on to off);
(7) Timing of pressing the stop button which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing of turning on the third stop),
(8) Timing when the stop button is pressed and released after pressing the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the third stop turns from on to off);
etc., or
(9) bet button operation timing (gaming medal insertion timing) for the game following the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed;
(10) Start lever operation timing for the next game after the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed;
etc. In addition, if the configuration is such that the timing is determined by lottery among the various timings as in (1) to (10) above, after the timing when the stop button that is the first stop is pressed, , even if the player has not won either the continuation lottery or the revival lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH continues to light up, so the player presses the stop button which is the third stop, and then presses the stop button. The player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the player releases the key or the start lever operation timing for the next game after the game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a process when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2300 in FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT-related state is the AT-in-progress state. If Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the AT-related state is in the AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-progress process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , to proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2302, in other words, if the AT-related state is not the AT-in-progress state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT-related state is a specialization precursor state or not. Determine whether If Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the AT-related state is a specialization precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out specialization precursor processing when operating the start lever, which will be described later. The process is executed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state related to AT is "additional specialization state". ”. If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to AT is "additional specialization state", then in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs additional specialization processing when operating the start lever, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "additional specialization state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal It is determined whether or not it is a game. If Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the subroutine of advantageous BB internal medium processing when the start lever is operated. is called and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2308 CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is "RT1" or not. Determine. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board It is determined whether the state is related to an AT that does not occur and is a "low probability state," "normal BB internal medium game," "normal BB state," etc.). If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state regarding the AT is without push order navigation, then in step 2312 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Note that, as described above, the configuration is not such that it is possible to execute effects related to the push order navigation when the sub-control board S side receives a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command. If you win the AT add-on lottery, the main control board M side sends a command to the sub-control board S to the effect that you have won the AT-add lottery and the number of AT add-on games, and the sub-control board S receives the command. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the sub-control board S side determines the performance execution timing and performance mode related to the push order navigation.

If Yes in step 2312, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the image to be avoided as a press order navigation display to the first number display mode group. is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). In this way, in this embodiment, when the number of games passes and the AT counter value becomes 0 from the "RT1" and "AT in progress state", the state shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". In this case (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if you win the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 match replay, the number of AT games will not be added, so white 7 or black 7 It is configured so that the order of presses that is not in a straight line is navigated. In addition, if the AT counter value becomes 0 after the number of games has passed from the state of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the state shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", the state is still in the "advantageous section". '', the push order navigation can be generated in a game where the push order bell is won, but the push order navigation may not be generated in a game where the push order replay is won.

In the case of No in step 2308, in the case of No in step 2310, in the case of No in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the effect image and the background image based on the state related to AT in step 2316, and then displays the (step 2110).

<Processing during AT when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 in FIG.

Next, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the conditional device related to the game, in step 2354, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2356, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the presentation group number in the same manner as in a state related to an AT where press order navigation is not executed, and uses the presentation group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to grasp that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order. For example, the push order navigation display when executing the push order bell and the push order navigation display when replaying the push order are placed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers, and the display color for the numbers is the same). ) can be applied when configured to be displayed. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the press order navigation display when the press order navigation is executed, and a press order bell is displayed. It may be configured to display different performance images when executing the push order navigation and when executing the push order navigation related to the push order replay.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

If Yes in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell, then in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays 6 choices of push order bells as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the pressing orders is displayed in the first number display mode group on the effect display device S40. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning Prize - A1, the number indicating the push order corresponding to "Left → Middle → Right", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, is surrounded by a circle. Display in display mode.

Next, if No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, then in step 2362, CPUSC of the sub control board S indicates that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. Determine whether or not. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, then in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, this is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push-order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. If Yes in step 2366, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment in the first numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of steps 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above, and then, in step 2370, displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less. If Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of AT remaining games is 3 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode to be described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2376 is Yes, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2378 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid the occurrence as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a number display mode group.

If the result in step 2376 is No, or if the process in step 2378 is executed, in step 2380 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2380 is Yes, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid the occurrence as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a number display mode group.

If the result in step 2380 is No, or if the process in step 2382 has been executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the process to proceed to the next process (the process in step 2110).

If No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, then in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode A (display mode described above). (display mode more conspicuous than B) on the effect display device S40. Here, if there are four or more games, display mode A is displayed, and if there are three games or less, display mode B is displayed.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a forward push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2386 is Yes, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S supports "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed as an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40.

If the result in step 2386 is No, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If Yes in step 2390, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S supports "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed as an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines No in step 2390, or if the process in step 2392 is executed, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110). In this way, when the number of AT remaining games is small, in other words, when the AT remaining number of games is displayed in display mode B, which is more conspicuous than display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect that displays "Aim for 7!" with an arrow image is not executed, and the white seven and black seven are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line.The middle reel, which is the push order, is moved to the first stop reel. It was configured to execute push-order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small, when the number of AT remaining games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player that the number of AT remaining games is small. In this case, the display of the arrow image or the message "Aim for 7!" can be configured so as not to obstruct the visibility of the display of the number of AT remaining games in display mode B. Similarly, continuous effects (for example, , battle effects), the configuration is configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" are not displayed while the battle effects are being executed, so as not to impede the visibility of the battle effects. be able to. Moreover, by configuring in this way, even if the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" is displayed to be terminated, the battle effect during the battle effect is displayed. If a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the “AT status” is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of forward press black 7 replay or reverse press white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added in the game where the AT addition lottery was won. First, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Specialized precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation specialization precursor process that is called and executed in the process of step 2400 in FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2404, confirms winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2406, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the effect group number in the same way as in a state related to an AT where push order navigation is not executed, and uses the effect group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

If Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell, then in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays 6 choices of push order bells as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the pressing orders is displayed in the second number display mode group on the effect display device S40. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A2, the number indicating the push order corresponding to "Left → Right → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, is surrounded by stars. Display in display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups.For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers indicating the pressing order. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay Determine whether or not. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, then in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a second number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, this is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, press order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push-order replay, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the push-in-order instruction command has been received or not. to judge. If Yes in step 2416, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. If Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as the avoidance command. If Yes in step 2424, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding the establishment in the second numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing in steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, in step 2428, the background image during AT is displayed as an effect. In step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in display mode A on the effect display device S40, and the process moves to the next process (processing in step 2110).

<Additional special processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 in FIG.

Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2454, confirms winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2456, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the presentation group number in the same manner as in a state related to an AT where press order navigation is not executed, and uses the presentation group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to grasp that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A4, the numbers that indicate the push order that corresponds to "Right → Left → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are surrounded by stars. Display in the specified display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups.For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers indicating the pressing order. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the press order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462, CPUSC of the sub control board S is set as the condition device of the game. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push-order replay, then in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push-order replay as a push-order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, press order information is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push-order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the push-order instruction command. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2466, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40. That is, since the pressing order is sequential, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, and from left to right. The pressing order can be suggested by an image of an arrow pointing toward .

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. Determine whether If Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, right stop button D43, middle stop button D42, and left stop button D41, and from right to left. The pressing order can be suggested by an image of an arrow pointing toward .

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. If Yes in step 2474, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment in the first numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the avoidance command collectively refers to both the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether a forward press avoidance command is received or a reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when a sequential press avoidance command is received, in order to avoid sequential presses "left → middle → right", the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40, and Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a press order navigation display.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes in steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476 described above, or in the case of No in 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs an effect display of the background image during AT in step 2480. In step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode A, and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing the internal process of the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 in FIG.

Next, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2704, confirms the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2706, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the presentation group number in the same manner as in a state related to an AT where press order navigation is not executed, and uses the presentation group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to grasp that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal medium game. If Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2710, CPUSC of the sub-control board S The condition device determines whether the bell is a pressing order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A4, the numbers that indicate the push order that corresponds to "Right → Left → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are surrounded by stars. Display in the specified display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups.For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers indicating the pressing order. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a press order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set as the condition device of the game. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, then in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, press order information is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a press order replay, in step 2718, CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command regarding 7 replays. Determine whether or not. Here, the forward press instruction command, reverse press instruction command, forward press avoidance command, and reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replay is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to avoid the occurrence of the first number as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode groups.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or if No in step 2718, in step 2722, the CPUSC displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40. In step S2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has passed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is , it is announced that BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when receiving the first cylinder stoppage>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine illustrating the first drum stop reception process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Determine whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is a stop button operation based on the correct press order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is set in the press order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, CPUSC of the sub control board S is It is determined whether the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, the 7 replay is a general term for the forward press black 7 set replay and the reverse press white 7 set replay. In the case of Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation in a dark color (it continues to be displayed in a dark color during the game), and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110). Migrate.

If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, then in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays and the push order fails. The effect is executed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when receiving the second cylinder stoppage>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing the second drum stop reception process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the conditional device related to the game is a push order bell, then in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a stop button based on the correct push order as a second stop. Determine whether or not there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, if there is a stop button operation based on the correct press order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is The display related to the 2-stop is erased, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays all the press order navigation displays. It is erased, a press order failure effect is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately , to proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Process related to production when the 3rd barrel stops>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the third drum stop performance related determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3200 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won. If Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB winning combination is won, in step 3204 CPUSC of the sub control board It is determined whether or not it is a BB role. If Yes in step 3204, in other words, if it is a BB role won during non-AT, then in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during non-AT, Based on the related state and the BB role, a BB start performance (a performance executed when the BB role is won) is determined and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

Next, if No in step 3204, in other words, the winning BB role during AT (“AT in progress state”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization preparation state”, or “resurrection possibility state”) If so, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start performance determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start performance based on the AT-related state and BB role of the game, and executes the next BB start performance. The process proceeds to step 2600.

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the performance based on the performance executed in the game, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown on the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start performance determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to AT, the type of BB start performance, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There are two types of states regarding AT: "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game." There are three types of BB start performances: normal performance, high expectation performance, and premiere performance. Furthermore, depending on the type of BB start performance for a BB won during non-AT, the level of expectation for transitioning to the "AT state" after the BB ends is different, and the level of expectation for the transition to the "AT state" is different from the one with the lowest level of expectation to the "normal performance". → Highly anticipated production → Premier production.”

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is normal BB internal medium game, the probability that the BB start performance will be the normal performance is 179/256. . When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a high expectation performance is 77. /256. If the BB role is BB with setting differences (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT status of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be the premium performance is 0/256. It is.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be the normal performance is 179/256 It is. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a high expectation performance is 77. /256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be the premier performance is 0/256 It is.

If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C), and the state related to AT of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect will be the normal effect. The probability is 179/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the AT-related state of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation level effect. The probability of this is 77/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the premier performance. The probability is 0/256.

If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the normal performance. The probability is 67/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation level effect. The probability of this is 157/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the premium performance. The probability is 32/256.

In the "normal section", even if you win BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) or BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium performance will not be affected. is never selected, and the normal performance is set to be more likely to be selected than the high expectation performance.

Even if it is an advantageous section, if you win BB with setting differences (Type 1 BB-B), the premium presentation will not be selected, and there is a possibility that the regular presentation will be selected over the high expectation presentation. It is destined to rise.

If it is an "advantageous section" and you win BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C), there is a possibility that the premium performance will be selected. With this configuration, it is certain that by selecting the premier performance and winning the BB with no setting difference, the transition to the "AT state" will occur after the BB with no setting difference ends. can be shown to the player. In addition, if you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C), which is an "advantageous section", there is a higher possibility that the high expectation performance will be selected than the normal performance. (The probability that the normal performance will be selected is low). By doing so, the player can guess whether or not the AT will start after the BB ends by checking the BB start effect, and can feel a sense of anticipation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start performance related to the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) that won in the "Normal BB internal medium game" and the BB without the setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) that won in the "Normal BB internal medium game" The distribution is the same as the distribution of BB start effects related to Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). However, this is not limited to this, and the distribution of BB start effects related to BBs with different settings (Type 1 BB-B) won in the "regular BB internal medium game" and the "regular BB internal medium game" The distribution of the BB start effects for winning BBs with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) may be different, and by configuring this way, the BB start effect for BBs with a setting difference may be distributed differently. The distribution can be configured to be different depending on whether it is a performance or a BB start performance related to a BB with no setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There is one type of state regarding AT: "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are two types of BB start effects: effects that can be added on and effects that cannot be added on. The add-on possible performance is a performance that suggests that an AT add-on lottery may be executed during the execution of the BB, and the add-on impossible performance is a performance that suggests that the AT add-on lottery may not be executed during the execution of the BB. As for the BB that is won during AT, there is no factor as to whether or not it will win the AT lottery, and whether or not the AT additional lottery will be executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, during AT, game medals can be obtained even in BB with a setting difference in which the AT additional lottery is not executed, and after the BB ends, the AT is advantageous to the player, so that the BB that is executed is the AT additional lottery. It is configured to clearly notify whether or not it will be executed. Specific examples will be described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be an additional performance is 0/ 256, and no additional effects are executed. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a non-additional performance is 256/ 256, and the no-addition effect is always executed. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is an add-on effect. The probability of this is 256/256, and the add-on effect will definitely be executed. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a non-addition effect. The probability that this will happen is 0/256, and the effect that cannot be added on will not be executed.

<Processing at the time of reception of 3rd cylinder stoppage>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the third drum stop reception process that is called and executed in the process of step 2600 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the conditional device related to the game is a press order bell, then in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the stop button based on the correct press order as the third stop. Determine whether or not there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the press order success effect. "GET!" is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board !” is not displayed.

In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push order navigation is not displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or in step 2608 or 2610 If the process is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT additional games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M sends a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates the difference from the previously received command indicating the number of remaining AT games. It may be configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of AT games, and to display the number of AT games.

Next, if Yes in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, then in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the AT additional game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, if No in step 2612, in other words, if the command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, then in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs AT addition on the effect display device S40. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. In addition, the number of AT add-on games can be notified as follows: (1) All of the number of add-on games will be announced in the relevant game, (2) A portion of the number of add-on games will be announced in the relevant game, and the remaining number of games will be announced after the relevant game. (3) The number of add-on games is not announced for the game, and the number of add-on games is not announced for the game after the game (for example, when winning 7 replays, when winning a common bell (when winning a combination that does not normally have an add-on), or when playing multiple games. After executing a game (continuous performance), a game where the number of remaining games on the performance display device S40 becomes "0", or operation of the bet button D220 for the next game after the game where the number of remaining games becomes "0", operation of the start lever D50. ) can be used to notify.

In addition, if you win the common bell in the "add-on special state", the number of AT add-on games will not be displayed even if you stop it according to the push order navigation (the AT add-on lottery is not performed for the common bell). do not have).

By configuring as described above, according to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH lights up in the "advantageous section", a period that is advantageous for the player can be determined. can be configured to be able to appropriately notify. In addition, by providing a "resurrection availability state", when a continuation performance is won and the revival performance (success) is subsequently executed, the state regarding the AT of the game in which the resurrection performance (success) is executed is Since it is in the "AT state", the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, and on the other hand, even if the continuation performance is not won and the revival performance (failure) is executed afterwards, the revival performance (failure) will be executed. By setting the state related to the AT of the game to be a "resurrection possibility state" and the state related to the AT to be an "advantageous section," the advantageous section indicator YH will light up. By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the resurrection effect is successful or unsuccessful by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in a game in which the resurrection effect is executed. In a gaming machine that is configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to ensure a highly entertaining gaming machine.

In addition, in this example, if you win the BB combination in the "high probability state", you can win the AT lottery, and after the end of the BB, you can shift to the "AT in progress state". The configuration related to this is not limited to the one in this example. For example, it is configured so that a rare hand such as cherry can win the AT lottery (it can be won even if it is not a BB role), and if the player wins the AT lottery, It may be configured such that the state related to AT is shifted to the "AT precursor state", and by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state", the state is shifted to the "AT in progress state".

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of menu screen display control processing according to the subroutine of step 7100 in FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is hidden on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub-input button SB, etc., and allows the player to select from a plurality of items to check various settings and information regarding the gaming machine. There is a screen that allows you to An example of how to select and decide on an item is to operate the cross key SB2 (which has four buttons: an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button) to move the cursor to the desired item. By operating the sub-input button SB, the currently selected item (the cursor is on it) is determined, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. Furthermore, the menu screen may have multiple display modes; for example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. All screens are referred to as menu screens even if there are differences between them.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
Examples of selectable items on the menu screen are listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: The player may be configured to be able to adjust the volume output from the game machine. For example, after displaying a screen that corresponds to volume adjustment, operating the right button of cross key SB2 will output the volume. It may be configured such that the volume increases and when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the output volume decreases.
(2) Light intensity adjustment: The player may be able to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50). For example, after displaying the screen that corresponds to light intensity adjustment, operating the upper button of four-way controller SB2 will make the light intensity (brightness) stronger (brighter), and operating the lower button of four-way controller SB2 will decrease the light intensity (brightness). (dark).
(3) Character customization: You can now select and change the characters that appear during the game (main character, push order navigation voice, opponent characters, characters that support game progress that are always displayed on the production display device S40, etc.) After displaying a screen corresponding to character customization, the user moves the cursor to the desired character using the cross key SB2 and selects the character by operating the sub-input button SB.
(4) Reel array table: The reel array may be configured to be displayable on a screen corresponding to the reel array table.
(5) Payout table: The payout table (a list of symbol combinations constituting re-games and winning combinations when stopped and displayed) may be configured to be displayable on the screen corresponding to the payout table. In the case where the payout table is divided into multiple screens and displayed, the screen of the payout table may be switched by using the left and right buttons of the cross key SB2, for example.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed in step 7104. Here, the state in which the menu screen can be displayed means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen (the menu screen may be configured to be displayed over time) is performed, such as operating the sub-input button SB. As a specific example, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) Game end timing (timing when the third stop button is turned on → off, display judgment timing, payout completion timing based on winnings, setting or sending a command related to the game end to the sub-control board S side as the game end process The game does not proceed (no new bet operation, no new automatic bet operation based on the replay stop display, new start The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without any operation of the lever, no new start of rotation of the reels, etc. (Until then, operate the sub input button SB. (The menu screen does not appear even if you do so.) Note that the bet operation includes both a case where a bet is made by operating the bet button D220 and a case where a bet is made by inserting game medals into the medal slot D170 (an automatic bet based on a stop display for replaying). may also be included in the bet operation).
(2-1) It may be configured such that the menu screen is not enabled to be displayed during the execution of the game (when game medals are bet, during a wait period until the start of reel rotation, and while the reels are rotating).
(2-2) It may be configured such that the menu screen can be displayed while the game is being played (game medals are being bet, etc.).
(3) While a predetermined performance is being executed (during a performance that notifies you of whether or not you have won a bonus, while performing a continuous performance that is executed over multiple games, a performance that notifies you of whether you have won the AT game number addition lottery) , etc.) may be configured so that the menu screen is not displayable.
(4) It may be configured such that the menu screen is not enabled to be displayed while the replay combination is stopped and displayed.
In addition, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, when the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is turned off. The display may be configured to blink.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 7104, in step 7106 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. Note that in this example, the operation for displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB, but even if the operation for displaying the menu screen is changed, it may be configured to have multiple operations for displaying the menu screen. . In the case of Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to a standby screen to be described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is counting time). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time to transition from the menu screen to the standby screen, which will be described later). The timer is started by setting a predetermined time B (in this example, 300 seconds, which is longer than a predetermined time A, which will be described later). Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer counting flag (a flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is counting time), and performs the next process (the process of step 7200). to move to.

Further, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen termination condition is satisfied. The menu screen termination condition is a condition for terminating the display of the menu screen, in other words, switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and is a specific example that is satisfied. It may be configured as follows.
(1) It may be configured such that the condition is satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new start of rotation of the reels.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen continues to be displayed, the time limit may be satisfied when a predetermined time (in this example, predetermined time B, 300 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display of the menu screen.
(3) It may be configured to be satisfied by selecting and determining a predetermined item on the menu screen and performing a predetermined operation on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item, for example, when the cursor is placed on the volume adjustment item. By adjusting the volume and operating the sub input button SB, a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment will be displayed. After adjusting the desired volume by operating the cross key SB2, select by operating the sub input button SB again. The volume is set to the medium volume, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes referred to as the normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 7114, in step 7116 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed on the effect display device S40. For example, if the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB while the main character is walking in the forest, then once the menu screen has finished displaying, A screen in which the main character is walking through the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 7200).

Further, if No in step 7114, in step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. If Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the menu standby timer to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example), and moves to the next process (the process in step 7200). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 7200). As described above, in this embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set for a predetermined time B (in this example, 300 In other words, the time taken until the standby screen is displayed is reset from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers for displaying the standby screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to use only one timer for displaying the standby screen. may be configured for use. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer for displaying the standby screen, and the system waits for the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the above-mentioned standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer. It may also be configured to be set on a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned on → off, a predetermined time A (180 seconds) is set in the standby timer, and then, when the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the sub input button SB is operated. The configuration may be such that when the menu screen is started to be displayed, a predetermined time B (300 seconds) is set in the standby timer.

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing according to the subroutine of step 7200 in FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen is hidden. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period of time (the game is not in progress), and is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG, and is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG. A moving image related to the story is played repeatedly, a message saying "saving power" is displayed, and a logo mark related to the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, while the condition for displaying the menu screen described above requires an operation by the player, the configuration is such that no operation by the player is required as a condition for displaying the standby screen.

If Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer counting flag (a flag that turns on when the standby timer is counting, which will be described later) is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button changes from on to off is the timing at which the game ends. If Yes in step 7206, in step 7208 CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. A predetermined time A (in this example, 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above) is set to the predetermined time B, and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7212. In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for executing the processing of steps 7208 and 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached, but in addition to this, the sub input button SB may be operated on the menu screen. Accordingly, the condition may be that the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed has been displayed (the display of the menu screen has ended).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the timer value of the standby timer has become zero. In the case of Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7224. Note that even if the answer in step 7206 is No, the process moves to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu standby timer counting flag is on. If YES in step 7224, in step 7226 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). Note that even in the case of No in step 7224 or step 7226, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2110).

Further, if No in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer counting flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing termination condition is satisfied. do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition that causes the standby timer to stop counting and clear the timer value of the standby timer to zero, and that there is a new bet operation or a new start lever operation. In addition, the condition for ending the standby timer is that the reels start rotating anew. If Yes in step 7238, the process moves to step 7212; on the other hand, if No in step 7238, the process moves to step 7216.

Further, if No in step 7202, in step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen termination condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen, and in this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new reel rotation. Started, etc. are the conditions for ending the standby screen. Note that it may be configured to be able to transition from the standby screen to the menu screen (displaying the menu screen); for example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB while the standby screen is being displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image that was displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). For example, if a screen in which the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, and the standby screen is displayed because the main character has not progressed in game A for a predetermined period of time, the main character can restart the main character by executing a bet operation. A screen showing him walking through the forest will be displayed.

Next, FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to the standby screen according to this embodiment. First, in case (a), the menu screen is displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated in the menu screen displayable state. Thereafter, while the menu screen is being displayed, five minutes (predetermined time B, which is 300 seconds) elapse without any operation of the sub-input button SB or the bet button D220, and a standby screen is displayed. Next, in case (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and when the player stops the third stop button, all the reels stop, and the player stops the reels by pressing the third stop button. Three minutes (predetermined time A, 180 seconds) have elapsed since the timing of release, and the sub-input button SB or bet button D220 has not been operated during that time, so a standby screen is displayed. In this way, in this example, a predetermined time B has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, and a predetermined time A has elapsed since the game ended (after the third stop button was turned from on to off). It is configured such that a standby screen can be displayed at , and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<<Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example>>
Here, the configuration regarding the menu screen and standby screen applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of this embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all the embodiments described above, and there is no problem in appropriately combining one or more of them.

<Standby timer timing to start>
The timing to set the initial value to the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed and start timing is as follows: (1) As a final stop operation, press the third stop button (stop corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) (2) Start timing from the execution timing of display judgment, (3) Start timing from the payout completion timing based on winnings, (4) Game As a termination process, timing is started from the timing when a command related to the end of the game is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side. (5) It is configured to start timing from the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the command related to the end of the game. You may. Further, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in a standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Menu standby timer timing to start>
The configuration is such that timing is set to an initial value in the menu standby timer that measures the time until the menu screen is displayed, and timing is started from the timing when the sub input button SB is operated to display the menu screen. You may. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in a menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. Note that the predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A (the timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) set in the standby timer described above.

<Configuration related to sub input buttons>
In a situation where the menu standby timer is counting, the menu standby timer may be configured to be reset to its initial value, for example, by operating the sub input button SB or cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. Accordingly, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) which is an initial value may be set in the menu standby timer. As an example, when the menu screen starts to be displayed, the menu standby timer is set to 300 seconds and time measurement starts, and after 100 seconds, under the situation where the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds, the cross key SB2 is pressed. The configuration may be such that the menu standby timer is reset to 300 seconds upon operation. In addition, the menu screen is configured to start displaying by operating the sub-input button SB, and while the menu screen is being displayed (by operating the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 after starting to display the menu screen) The screen to which the menu has transitioned may also be used as a menu screen). By operating the sub-input button SB or the cross-key SB2 on the transition destination screen (which may also be a menu screen), The menu wait timer may be configured to be able to reset its initial value.

<Configuration regarding stop button>
In a situation where the standby timer is counting, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation, and then do not perform a bet operation. The standby timer may be configured not to reset its initial value even if the stop buttons (left stop button, middle stop button, and right stop button) are operated under certain circumstances. As an example, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, the standby timer is set to 180 seconds, and the timer starts counting. After that, in a situation where no bet operation is performed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, even if the stop button is operated, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset and the timer value is set to 100 seconds. It may be configured so that it remains as it is.

<Configuration related to bet operations>
In a situation where the standby timer is counting, if you turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation, and then execute a bet operation ( When a bet is made by operating the bet button D220 or when a bet is made by inserting game medals into the medal slot D170, the standby timer stops counting and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in a situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), and then execute the bet operation. , the standby screen may not be displayed over time if no other operations are performed. In addition, when configured in this way, the standby screen will not be displayed due to the passage of time from the bet operation, but the volume of the sound being output will change when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has passed since the bet operation. It may also be configured to make 0 or small. With this configuration, when the remaining game medals are less than the specified number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, by operating the bet button), When the player finishes playing the game, or when the player ends the game with less than the specified number of game medals remaining in the credit (no bets are placed), the bet button is pressed when the staff at the game parlor cleans the game machine. Even if a bet is placed by operating the button, the sound will no longer be output at an unintended volume. In addition, even if the third stop button is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and no bet operation is performed after that, the timing of turning off the third stop button (which may also be the timing when the reels stop) The volume of the sound being output may be set to 0 or reduced when the specific time (100 seconds) or the predetermined time A (180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Standby screen display conditions>
The standby screen may be displayed on condition that the timer value of a decrement timer (in this example, a standby timer or a menu standby timer) related to the display of the standby screen changes from "1 to 0". With this configuration, when a bet operation is executed or when some abnormality occurs in timer measurement, the timer value reaches ``0'' without going through ``1'', such as ``20 → 0''. Even if the timer value is reset to zero (zero cleared), the standby screen will not be displayed, and unintended display of the standby screen can be prevented. (It may be configured to display a standby screen if the A flag for displaying a standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Configuration related to payment button>
In a situation where the standby timer is counting, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and after that there are 1 or more credits. In such a situation, if you operate the settlement button to perform credit settlement, after a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of the operation of the settlement button, or when the credit settlement is completed (the last game medal is It may also be configured to display a standby screen at the timing when the device is returned to the discharge port D240.

<Configuration related to setting key switch>
As a final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), turn it off, and then turn the setting key switch from off to on while the power is on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing. Also, as a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button that corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end), then open the front door while the power is on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the setting key switch was turned from off to on and the front door was then closed.

Also, as a final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (the stop button that corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end), turn it off, and then turn the setting key switch off → on while the power is on. In this case, the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the setting key switch was turned on->off. Also, as a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button that corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end), then open the front door while the power is on. When the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON, the standby screen is displayed after a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the front door was closed after turning the setting key switch from ON to OFF. It may be configured as follows. Note that "turning on the stop button" in this example means accepting an operation of the stop button in a situation where the operation of the stop button is valid.

<Configuration when a certain error occurs>
As a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has rotated to the end), and then turn it off if a predetermined error occurs regarding the main control board M side (for example, if the game medal is not connected to the medal selector DS). The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the predetermined error is canceled.

<Configuration related to front door>
As a final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) and then turn it off to start the standby timer, then open the front door and enter the open state. The standby timer may be configured to continue counting even when the standby timer is maintained. Also, as a final stop operation, by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), the standby timer starts counting, and then the front door is opened, Thereafter, the standby timer may be configured to continue counting even when the front door is closed.

<Configuration 1 during AT>
In a situation where AT is not in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "normal gaming state"), turn on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation, and then turn it off. If a predetermined period of time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the timing of the change, the standby screen can be displayed, while in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), the final stop operation cannot be performed. The system is configured so that the standby screen will not be displayed if a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off. You may. Similarly, the standby screen may be configured not to be displayed even when a predetermined period of time A has elapsed from the end of the final stop operation, even during execution of a continuous performance, execution of a bonus, or during ART. In addition, in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), the third stop button (corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end) is used as the final stop operation in a game where the push order navigation is executed. If a predetermined period of time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the timing when the stop button (stop button) was turned on and then turned off, the standby screen is not displayed. In a certain situation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation in a game where the push order navigation was not executed for a predetermined period of time. The configuration may be such that a standby screen can be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Configuration 2 during AT>
When the menu screen is displayed by operating a sub-input button, etc. in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the AT-related state is "AT in progress"), (1) a predetermined period of time B (for example, 300 seconds) must elapse. (2) After a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed, the normal screen during AT (the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed) is returned to. You can.

<Configuration 3 during AT>
In a situation where AT is not in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "normal gaming state"), turn on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation, and then turn it off. The system is configured to display a standby screen when a predetermined period of time A (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the game was set. When the menu screen is displayed and a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display of the menu screen, the standby screen can be displayed. ), the menu screen is displayed, and if a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the menu screen started displaying, the normal screen during AT (the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed) ). That is, when comparing the time values, it may be configured such that "predetermined time A=predetermined time B<predetermined time C". Note that the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same time value, and it is sufficient that the predetermined time C is the longest time.

<Other configuration 1>
The menu screen may be displayed by inserting game medals from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. Note that the menu screen displayed by inserting game medals from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (2) ) A screen that is displayed by performing a predetermined operation (selecting and deciding a predetermined item) from the menu screen that is displayed by operating the sub-input button, (3) A screen that is displayed by operating the sub-input button The screen may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. In addition, even if you insert game medals from the medal slot D170 while the menu screen is displayed by inserting game medals from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen continues to be displayed. If a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while a menu screen displayed by operating an input button is displayed, the screen may be returned to the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed. Also, if you insert game medals from the medal slot D170 and place a bet while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen will be displayed, and if you operate the bet button and bet while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen will be displayed before the menu screen is displayed. It may be configured such that a screen (normal screen displayed during gaming if a standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) is displayed. Also, if you insert game medals from the medal slot D170 and place a bet while the standby screen is displayed, a menu screen will be displayed, and the standby screen will be displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is 3, which is the specified number. In the above situation, when you operate a bet button (for example, a max bet button that allows you to bet 3 coins with one operation) to bet, the screen that was displayed before the menu screen (the standby screen appears immediately after the power is turned on) , the normal screen that is displayed during the game) will be displayed, and if the standby screen is being displayed and the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of 3, press the bet button. (For example, a max bet button that allows you to bet three coins with one operation) may be operated to make a bet, and a menu screen may be displayed.

<Other configuration 2>
It has multiple display modes for the standby screen, and satisfies certain conditions (for example, the predetermined condition may be that by entering a password on the menu screen, the game history from the previous game is inherited and played). If not, a video that introduces the story is displayed as a standby screen, but if a predetermined condition is met, a video that introduces a character may be displayed as a standby screen. . In addition, the story introduction and character introduction may be displayed as a standby screen in both cases where the predetermined conditions are not satisfied and cases where the predetermined conditions are satisfied, but whether the predetermined conditions are satisfied or not. The frequency of displaying either the story introduction or the character introduction may be different depending on whether the story introduction or the character introduction is displayed.

<Other change examples>
In addition, in this example, there is a first BB combination in which a first BB is executed by winning a prize, and a second BB combination in which a second BB, which is lower in profit for the player than the first BB, is executed by winning a prize. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be won repeatedly (a combination of "first BB+second BB" is provided). With such a configuration, if "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the high-profit 1st BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB is finished, the The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be displayed in a stopped state (the fact that the second BB has been won is carried forward even during the execution of the first BB). In addition, if you win "1st BB + 2nd BB", by executing the high-profit 1st BB first, for example, you can win "1st BB + 2nd BB" in a situation where the closing time of the game hall is approaching. In this case, the low-profit 2nd BB is executed first, and the gaming hall closes during the execution of the 2nd BB, and the game has to end without being able to execute the high-profit 1st BB. can be prevented.

After the operation of the 1st BB is completed, the winning of the 2nd BB may be announced immediately, or it may be announced after a delay (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notification), and a configuration is adopted in which this is hidden. In this case, the winning probability of the replay may be increased during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Furthermore, when the item is hidden, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive winning chance time!!") . In such a configuration, if there is no provision for the case where the 2nd BB does not win after the end of the 1st BB, it becomes certain that the effect occurs = the 2nd BB wins, so only the 1st BB wins. However, even after the operation of the first BB is completed, it is preferable to perform a performance that suggests the possibility of winning the second BB (the performance mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above). (For example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive winnings chance time!!"). Furthermore, even if you win only the 1st BB and after the operation of the 1st BB is finished, you win the 1st BB again, the system is configured so that the execution of the performance indicating the possibility of winning the 2nd BB is not stopped. It's okay. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the winning of the 2nd BB is falsely announced, and then the winning of the 1st BB is announced (for example, display of "BB success chance time!!"→display of "Unfortunate"→display of "1st BB"). 1BB winning!!” etc.) Furthermore, if you win twice during AT and the second BB is hidden after the first BB has finished operating, the effect display device S40 returns to AT after AT preparation etc. However, the internal reduction of the number of remaining games may be continued and suspended. Incidentally, if the first BB and the second BB are won twice, the number of coins paid out from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In addition, in this example,
(1) If the 1st BB and the small winning combination A are won twice, the 1st BB is prioritized and stopped.
(2) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are won twice, the small winning combination B is prioritized and stopped.
That is, there may be provided a small role for which the stop control is given priority over the BB role, and a small role for which the stop control is given priority for the BB role.
(3) In the case where the 1st BB and the minor role A are won twice, when the minor role A wins, or some symbols of the symbol combination corresponding to the minor role A (for example, at the first stop, the first 2) is stopped, a notification corresponding to the small winning combination A (a notification that allows the small winning combination A to win) is made.
In other words, the one that would normally notify the 1st BB winning combination, which would normally have priority over the small winning combination A, is replaced by the result of the first stopping or the second stopping (the stopping mode after the execution of the first stopping or the second stopping). Accordingly, when the first BB combination cannot be won (the small combination A can be won) regardless of where the third stop is stopped, a notification corresponding to the small combination A is made. Further, when a small winning combination A is won as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small winning combination A is made. With this configuration, it is possible to execute notifications that are most advantageous to the player according to various game situations that change during the game, and also to make it possible to perform notifications that are most advantageous to the player according to the various game situations that change during the game, and also to match the actual notifications with the contents notified by the effect display device S40 etc. It is possible to prevent winning combinations from being inconsistent.
(4) If the first BB and the small winning combination B are won in duplicate, a notification corresponding to the small winning combination B is made during all the reel rotations.

Further, it may be configured to have a display device (7 segments, etc.) that is controlled by the main control board M and displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradictory effect that does not correspond to the symbols (or symbol combinations) that are stopped and displayed. For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the active line, an effect that is likely to be output when a watermelon is won (for example, a lamp lights up in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack capable of outputting (but not inputting) from the sub-control board S side may be provided, and the structure may have the following characteristics.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from multiple levels using the sub-input button on the gaming machine.
(2) Even when playing a game using the earphone jack, if an error occurs, the error notification sound is output from the game machine at a predetermined volume (for example, an error notification sound is output from the speaker installed in the game machine). ).
(3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

Further, during the AT state or during the BB execution, the game machine may be configured to output the effect sound even when playing the game using the earphone jack. Further, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even if the earphones are removed, the volume for when the earphone jack is used may not be immediately cleared (set to the initial value). For example, if no operation is performed for 10 minutes, all volumes may be cleared (to initial values). However, if the earphones are still inserted, the volume for when using the earphone jack does not need to be cleared (to the initial value). It is preferable to install the earphone jack in a location that does not interfere with the game (for example, in a location where the earphone cord will not get tangled around the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever when earphones are inserted into the earphone jack). ).

In addition, in this example,
(1) The probability of winning a re-gaming combination can be changed after the BB ends if more than a certain number of coins are acquired during the BB execution, and after the BB ends if less than a certain number of coins are acquired. may be configured.
(2) There may be a plurality of RT states to which the system transitions when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the probability of winning a re-gaming combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after "RT1" ends, or may be configured to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state).
(3) When a predetermined winning combination is won, the RT state is transferred. In other words, the transition to RT state is 1 with winning.
Instead of a one-to-one correspondence, the transition is made with a constant probability regardless of the condition device or winnings (for example, an RT transition lottery is executed with a constant probability every game).
(4) Equipped with a 0-card RT transition, making it possible to win a 0-card winning combination multiple times, and to make it possible to win a 0-card winning combination twice. In other words, a 0-card winning combination is created, which is a winning combination in which one or more cards do not win, no matter what order the button is pressed or at what position the stop operation is performed. It may be possible to make it possible to win a 0-card hand and a 7-card hand, or a 0-card hand A and a 0-card hand B. In addition, when a 0-card combination is won twice, it may be configured such that either a 0-card combination that is transferred to RT or a 0-card combination that is not transferred to RT is won depending on the order of pressing. It is also possible to win the 0-card role and the BB role multiple times, and give priority to the 0-card role to win the prize.

In addition, as in this example, there are 6 choices for the pressing order of the bell ("Left → Middle → Right", "Left → Right → Middle", "Middle → Left → Right", "Middle → Right → Left", There are 6 choices: "Right → Left → Middle" and "Right → Middle → Left"), and the push order for replay is 3 choices (first stop is left, middle, right). In this case, as the push order display on the push order display device D270, the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay are different, in other words, the push order navigation display with 6 options is displayed. The display and the three-choice push order navigation display may be configured to be different. As an example, the press order display for the 6 options is "=1" for "left → middle → right", "=2" for "left → right → middle", and "=2" for "center → left → "=3" for "right", "=4" for "center → right → left", "=5" for "right → left → center", "=5" for "right → center → left" In this case, it is displayed as "=6", and as the press order display for the three options, "=7" is displayed when the first stop is on the left, and "=8" is displayed when the first stop is on the middle. , if the first stop is on the right, "=9" may be displayed.

Note that this example may be configured as follows.
(1) The number of AT played games, which is the number of games played consecutively in the "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", is configured to be displayable on the production display device, If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the state shifts from "AT in progress" to "normal gaming state," and then wins the AT lottery again within a specific game and shifts to "AT in progress," the previous AT While the number of played games is taken over and added up, the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1,500 games), and after the "AT state" changes to the "normal gaming state", the game is played again within a specific game. When the AT lottery is won and the state shifts to the "AT in progress" state, the previous number of AT games is not inherited, and the number of AT games is newly counted from 0 games.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reels start rotating, a display prompting you to stop the reels will be displayed on the effect display device S40 (for example, "Stop the reels"). (2-1) If you do not press the stop button for a predetermined period of time after the reels start rotating in a game where push order navigation is displayed (2-1) The display areas of the push order navigation display and the display prompting to stop the reels on the display device S40 do not overlap (2-2) The display prompting to stop the reels is not displayed.
(3) If you turn the power on in a game where push order navigation is occurring, the reels will rotate at a constant speed before the stop button becomes effective. The push order navigation (the display on the push order display device D270 and/or the display on the effect display device S40) is re-displayed at the timing of .
(4) The frequency with which push order navigation occurs in a game where a common bell is won is different between a state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT, or a state related to an AT where push order navigation may occur. The frequency with which push order navigation occurs in a game in which a common bell is won is different between a state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT that is a state related to an AT where push order navigation can occur.
(5) If the RT state has the highest winning probability for replaying (in this example, "RT1"), the percentage of games in which push order navigation occurs is higher than the percentage of games in which push order navigation does not occur. expensive. For example, the total winning probability of the bell role and the replay role is 1/2 or more. With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting bored during AT.
It may be configured as described above.

Here, the features of the above-mentioned game section will be explained in detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) Conditions where a player's profit rate differs depending on the order in which they are pressed Commands (signals) related to the device are not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) It is possible to perform a lottery to move to the "advantageous section" except during the internal winning of BB and during the execution of BB.

≪Waiting section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) Conditions where a player's profit rate differs depending on the order in which they are pressed Commands (signals) related to the device are not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for transition to the "advantageous section" is not executed.
(5) After BB wins a prize in the "standby state", the next game will be in the "advantageous section".

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) A push order navigation may be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) A push order navigation may be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) Conditions where a player's profit rate varies depending on the order in which they are pressed A command (signal) related to the device can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery that changes the performance of the "advantageous section" (for example, a transition from a "high probability state" to an "AT middle state" as a state related to AT), a lottery for increasing the number of AT games, etc. may be performed.
(5) During the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) When the counter value of the number of games remaining in an advantageous section counter YKc-1 becomes 0, if the BB or push order navigation is not executed at least once in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is basically However, as an exception, if the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500), the BB and push order navigation will be played once in the "advantageous section". The configuration is such that the "advantageous section" can end even if the "advantageous section" is not executed.
(7) Measurement of the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1 is performed in all games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the counter value is added every game even during BB execution).

Here, the feature points related to the selection lottery for the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) The presence or absence of setting in the "advantageous section" is determined based on the result of the prize lottery, and the presence or absence of setting in the "advantageous section" is not determined based on the progress of the number of games.
(2) If a conditional device with different lottery probabilities depending on the set value is established, the lottery setting for the “advantageous section” will not be executed if the conditional device is satisfied.
(3) In the case where a certain conditional device is established and a lottery setting for the "advantageous section" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different.
(4) The performance of the "advantageous section" does not differ depending on the setting value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, setting 1 shifts to "high probability state", setting 6 shifts to "AT state", etc., there is no difference depending on the setting value).
(5) Setting in the "advantageous section" If you win the lottery, you will basically be in the "advantageous section" from the next game (setting in the "advantageous section" with the BB combination established in the "normal section") If you win the lottery, you can be placed in the "standby section" for the next game).

Here, the characteristic points related to the change in the performance of the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) A lottery that changes the performance of the "advantageous section" with reference to the set value is not executed (a common condition for all set values may be that a predetermined number of games have elapsed and a predetermined condition device is satisfied) . (2) If a conditional device with different lottery probabilities depending on the set value is established, a lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed when the conditional device is satisfied. Lotteries for adding on the number of AT games are also not executed.
(3) If BB has been internally won, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" will not be executed. Lotteries for adding on the number of AT games are also not performed.
(4) During a BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the setting value, the performance of the "advantageous section" will be changed during the BB execution. is not executed. Lotteries for adding on the number of AT games are also not performed.
(5) During a BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, the performance of the "advantageous section" is changed during the BB execution. can be executed. A lottery for adding on the number of AT games may also be performed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the reel type gaming machine according to this example. Further, the following configurations may be applied alone, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<<Point 1>>
(1) A ``fake high probability state'' is configured as a state related to an AT that is in an ``advantageous section'' but is more difficult to win the AT lottery than a ``high probability state.''
(2) The continuous performance consists of at least the number of consecutive games of a predetermined number of G or more.
(3) If there is a regular role that does not win the AT lottery 100% and a special role that wins the AT lottery 100%, and a continuous performance is executed using the regular role as an opportunity, and the player does not win the AT lottery. In this case, if a special role is won during the continuous performance, a performance is performed to notify that the AT lottery has been won even during the continuous performance (the continuous performance is replaced).
(4) The more games remaining with high guaranteed obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous performance with high expectation level (expectation level of bonus winning, expectation level of AT lottery winning), and the remaining games with high guaranteed obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous performance with low expectations.
(5) The smaller the number of remaining games in the number of high-guaranteed obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a one-game complete performance with a high expectation level (expectation level of bonus winning, expectation level of AT lottery winning).
(6) If the remaining number of high guaranteed obstacle games is less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), consecutive performances that result in a loss will not be executed, but consecutive performances that will result in a win (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) will not be executed. can be executed. In other words, if the number of remaining games in the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), a one-game completion effect can be performed in both cases of loss and win, but continuous effects can be performed in both cases of loss and win. It can only be performed if
(7) If the ceiling G number (1500 games) in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (4 games), the continuous performance will not be executed.
(8) The tendency to select performances is different depending on whether the ceiling G number in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value or greater than a predetermined value (frequency of occurrence of continuous performances, degree of expectation of jackpot for a predetermined performance, etc.).
(9) If a new transition to the "advantageous section" occurs during a series of losing performances (for example, a losing performance) in the "normal section",
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production in the "advantageous section" transition game, "When you turn around, there's a character and there's a line that suggests a step change", etc.). The rate at which a performance is rewritten in the middle of a continuous performance (defeat) is higher than the rate at which a performance is rewritten in the middle of a continuous performance (victory).
(9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous performance to the end. When the transition to the "advantageous section" occurs during the execution of a continuous performance, the rate at which the sub control board S side in the game notifies the transition, and when the continuous performance is not executed, the rate at which the transition is notified in the game The rate at which the control board S side notifies that the transition has been made is different.

<<Point 2>>
(1) The stay stage (referred to as stage A group) that can be set in the "normal section" is configured to be selectable by the player. For example, it can be selected by operating a sub-input button.
(2) Stay stage A group 1: The lottery result of whether or not it will be an “advantageous section” will be announced in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game.
Stay stage A group 2: The lottery result of whether or not it will be an "advantageous section" will be announced later at the end of the game (or when betting on the next game (or when operating the start lever when the replay stop is displayed).
(3) If the state changes from an "advantageous section" and a stay stage other than the stay stage A group to a "normal section," select a stay stage from the stay stage A group. When the state changes from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the performance group A to the "normal section", the stay stage is maintained.
(4) The AT expectation level when the advantageous section indicator is off and the stay stage A group is different from the AT expectation level when the advantageous section indicator is off and the stay stage is other than A group. For example, from the lowest AT expectation level, "Advantageous section indicator is off and stay stage A group -> Advantageous section indicator is lit and stay stage A group -> Advantageous section indicator is lit and stay stage other than A group"
(5) The transition of the stay stage (stay stage A group → stay stage B group) is triggered by the game performance (including 1G complete performance and continuous performance) that changes from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section". The rate at which this occurs is different from the rate at which a shift in stay stage occurs triggered by a game performance that changes from an "advantageous section" to a "normal section."

<<Point 3>>
(1) The higher the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the remaining number of games with high guaranteed obstacles), the higher the expectation level (the expectation level of winning the AT lottery, the expectation level of winning the bonus). The higher the probability of choosing the stay stage, and the lower the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games of the high guaranteed number of obstacles), the higher the expectation (the expectation of winning the AT lottery, the higher the probability of winning the bonus). The probability of choosing a stay stage with a high expectation level is high.
(2) When the number of remaining guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" is less than a predetermined value (four games or less), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect in which the stay stage shifts.
(3) If a production with high expectations is selected in a situation where you are not staying at a stay stage with high expectations (expectations of winning the AT lottery, expectations of winning a bonus), the expectations (Expectation level of winning the AT lottery, expectation level of winning the bonus) (Expectation level of winning the bonus, expectation level of winning the bonus) are high.

<<Point 4>>
(1) If you win BB in the “resurrection possibility state”,
(1-1) AT additional lottery may be executed during BB, or may not be executed. (1-2) After the BB ends, the state may be shifted to the "AT state" or may not be shifted.
(1-3) AT additional lottery may be executed during BB, or may not be executed. (1-4) When transitioning to the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be subtracted by one game in the "resurrection possibility state".
(2) The AT additional lottery may or may not be executed in the "resurrection availability state". If you execute the AT additional lottery,
(3) If you win the reverse push white 7-match replay or the forward push black 7-match replay in the "resurrection possibility state", an avoidance navigation will occur, and at the timing after the revival performance (success) is executed. Notify the number of additional games.
(4) If you win a winning combination that can move to the "advantageous section" in the "resurrection possibility state", the advantageous section indicator will turn off at the start of the next game, while the "resurrection possibility state" If you win a combination that can move to an "advantageous section" in the next game when you do not win the revival lottery in , the advantageous section indicator can light up at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of a specification in which the AT additional lottery is not performed even though it is an advantageous section in the ``resurrection possibility state'',
(5-1) Even if you win a role (for example, Watermelon A) that allows you to perform an AT additional lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", the number of AT games will not be added, but the 1G will perform a resurrection performance (success). If a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) that can be added on is won in (“AT state”), the number of AT games can be added on.
(6) If you plan to execute "Battle Effect 3G + Revival Effect (Failure) 1G" as the final stage of AT, the bonus will be given if you win the bonus in the revival effect execution game and the resurrection effect (success) is executed. The number of AT games will not be added during the bonus, but the number of AT games will be added during the bonus if you win the bonus in the battle performance execution game (any 3G) and the resurrection performance (success) is executed. It is possible. Furthermore, the performance trends during the bonus may be different.

<<Point 5>>
(1) When there are gaming state A and gaming state B as states related to AT which is an "advantageous section",
(1-1) The expectation of winning the AT add-on lottery is "gaming state A > advantageous state B" (playing state A is relatively easier to add the number of AT games than playing state B, or AT adding games a lot).
(1-2) The number of additions that can be added when winning combination X in gaming state A is different from the number of additions that can be added when winning combination Y in gaming state A.
(1-3) The number of additions that can be added when winning combination X in gaming state B is the same as the number of additions that can be added when winning combination Y in gaming state B.

<<Point 6>>
(1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display can be changed to when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to before the third stop (C). to make a difference.
(1-1) The display modes of the fall avoidance suggestion display are arranged in the order of "A<B<C" from least noticeable to the player.
(2) When the state changes from "AT in progress" and "RT1" to "low probability state" and "RT1" where AT has ended, if you win the push order combination, press on the push order display device. The order navigation is displayed, but the push order navigation is not displayed on the production display device (it is displayed as "???").
(3) In a game in which a falling avoidance suggestion display is displayed, if a prize of 18 (falling combination) is won at the third stop, the display is maintained in the same display mode as after the second stop. .
(4) If the start lever is operated when the start lever is recovered from a power outage and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device has not been completed, the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is completed. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed with the sound from the speaker (for example, "Left!").
(5) Even if the player is in a state related to an AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as an "additional special state", if a falling winning combination is won, a falling avoidance suggestion performance is displayed with priority.
(6) Even if a falling winning combination wins in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is maintained.
(7) In the case where the falling combination is configured to be a push order combination (the order in which it is pressed determines whether or not to display it in a stopped manner), if a push order combination that is not a fall combination (such as a push order bell, etc.) is won and the push order If the navigation is executed and it is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation, the display on the effect display device may go dark, but if the winning combination is won, it is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation. In this case, the display of the effect display device does not darken (or the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect does not darken).

<<Point 7>>
(1) A case where the configuration is configured to shift to "RT3" and "AT preparation state" after the BB related to the BB with setting difference ends (same as the first modification example from the present embodiment).
(1-1) Win the AT additional lottery by winning a winning combination with a high probability in "RT3" (you may win 100% or you may win with a predetermined probability).
(1-2) The RT state to which the BB transitions after the end of the BB is different depending on the type of BB combination, and the execution mode of the AT add-on lottery (the role that performs the add-on lottery, the The lottery winning probability and the number of AT add-on games) are made different.
(1-3) Bonus A → RT1 → Promotion Replay A → RT3 (high replay probability), Bonus B → RT2 → Promotion Replay B → RT3, and the bonus is added by Promotion Replay A and Promotion Replay B. The winning rate or average number of additional games is different.
(1-4) If bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2, and there are promotion replay A and promotion replay B, the winning probability of promotion replay A and promotion replay B is differ.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1, bonus B → RT2, and are configured so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probabilities of promotion replay and fall replay are different between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) After the completion of BB with setting difference, it shifts to a dedicated RT state ("RT3" and "AT preparation state"), and then shifts to "additional specialization state" with promotion replay as a trigger.

<<Point 8>>
(1) It has Type 1 BB-B1 and Type 1 BB-B2, and after Type 1 BB-B1 ends, it transitions to "RT3", and after Type 1 BB-B2 ends, it transitions to "RT4". If configured like this.
(1-1) "RT3" and "RT4" are different in the execution mode of the AT add-on lottery (the role for executing the add-on lottery, the winning probability of the add-on lottery, the number of AT add-on games).
(1-2) The BB start performance related to type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start performance related to type 1 BB-B2 have different performance trends (the selection rates of BB start performances with high expectations are different). (2) When the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed before the re-game 06 in the "AT preparation state" and "RT3", the state shifts to "RT4" and the treasure box loss effect is not executed. In "RT4", a re-gaming combination promoted to "RT3" is won. Further, when the game changes from "RT4" to "RT3", the treasure box opening additional effect will not be performed even if subsequent replays - E1 to E3 are won.
(3) There are multiple types of BB roles, and even if a BB role is won, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually distinguish which BB role has won, and after the BB ends depending on the type of BB. The RT state of the game system is made different, and the execution mode of the AT add-on lottery when winning the promoted re-gaming combination is different depending on the RT state. In such a configuration, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during BB will be different depending on the type of BB (such as acquiring a gold treasure chest, acquiring a silver treasure chest, acquiring a bronze treasure chest, etc.). (The number distribution is different).

<<Point 9>>
(1) Proportion of BB start performance related to BB with setting difference won during AT and start performance related to BB without setting difference won during AT, and setting difference won during non-AT. The rate of the same performance mode is different between the BB start performance related to BB and the start performance related to BB with no setting difference won during non-AT.

<<Point 10>>
(1) The probability that a production that suggests the set value will be selected when winning the BB with a setting difference in the "advantageous section" is higher than the probability that the effect that suggests the setting value will be selected when winning the BB with no setting difference in the "normal section" The probability that the performance will be selected is higher.
(2) For BBs that are won during non-AT, different BB start performances are selected depending on the setting difference, but for BBs that are won during AT, the same BB start performance is selected regardless of the setting difference.
(3) Proportion that the BB start performance is the same between BB with setting difference won during AT and BB without setting difference winning during AT, and BB with setting difference won during non-AT and non-AT The rate at which the BB start performance has the same performance mode is different between the winning BB with no setting difference and the BB with no setting difference.

<<Point 11>>
(1) If you win "No setting difference role (a role where the winning rate does not differ depending on the setting value) + BB", select "Advantage zone indicator lighting + Effect B" which can be executed when winning the "No setting difference role". The probability of selecting ``advantageous section indicator off + production A'', which can be executed when winning a ``rotation with a setting difference (the winning probability differs depending on the setting value)'', is higher than the probability of selecting ``rare "Yaku + BB time" is a production that encourages the winning of BB (for example, a battle production) rather than a production that encourages a transition to a high probability state (for example, a production that moves to a stay stage where you can stay in a high probability state). easier to implement}.
(2) When a predetermined winning combination (for example, cherry) is won, the system is configured so that it will shift to a high probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of high guaranteed obstacle games will be changed to 50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10%. →50G", and if 3G is selected, the battle is defeated, and in other cases, the battle is won. Furthermore, the degree of expectation regarding the length of the number of high-probability games (20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who won the battle. In addition, in the case of the above example, at the 20th G with a high degree of certainty, an effect is executed to incite whether or not to continue (it is an effect to incite whether it will be 20 games or 50 games, and if it is successful, it is certain that it will be 50 games). .

<<Point 12>>
(1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal section," and the probability of occurrence of the freeze effect differs depending on the setting value.
(1-1) In the "advantageous section", the predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) A predetermined freeze effect is more easily executed in the "normal section" than in the "advantageous section." (1-3) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with different settings.
(1-4) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with different settings. (1-5) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the event of a loss.

<<<Configuration applicable to this example>>>
The configuration applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the embodiments described above, and one configuration described in detail below may be applied, or multiple configurations detailed below may be applied. Let me add some things you can do.

<<Memory map configuration>>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, a partial configuration of the memory map in the RAM (sometimes referred to as the first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The areas shown in the figure include, from the upper address, (1) "setting value data": an area for data related to the number that manages the setting stage, (2) "external signal system data": an area for external signal output. Area for storing related information, (3) "RAM checksum data": Data used in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, and is calculated from the data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off. (4) "Control command buffer": Sub An area for storing command information to be sent to the control board side. (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer": Information used when recovering from a power failure, and is stored in the current stack pointer at the time of a power failure. (6) "Unused area": An area for storing areas that are not used for games, (7) "Evacuation data" Areas are used in the order of ``1 to saved data 8'': RAM, where data to be saved by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, etc. is most likely to be written according to the design. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power outage) occurs, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer will be moved to a higher address than "7FF8H". A situation may arise in which the stack pointer points to the address of In this case, there is a possibility that the saved data will be stored beyond the area of "saved data 1 to saved data 8" that has been secured in advance as an area for data to be saved. In consideration of such a situation, the address that the stack pointer may point to in the event of the above-mentioned unexpected problem (address close to "7FF8H") is set to data that does not affect the progress of the game (has little impact). data). Specifically, by providing an address for storing "set value data" at an address that is at least one address free from "saved data 1 to saved data 8" that have been reserved as areas for data to be saved in advance, the game To provide a game machine that does not cause any disadvantage not only to players but also to game parlors. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that will not be used while the game is in progress after power-off recovery, and (4) "control command buffer" , even if commands cannot be sent to the sub-control board S side, the progress of the game is unlikely to be affected, and (3) "RAM checksum data" cannot be used in situations where the game is in progress after the power is restored. Since (2) "external signal data" is data to be sent to the hall computer, it is data that has little effect on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "setting value data" is data related to setting values that affect the outcome of the game, so if the setting value is changed to a lower value, for example, it will cause a significant disadvantage to the player. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a high value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will occur to the gaming parlor. As mentioned above, (1) "setting value data" is important data for the normal progression of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the same figure, (1) "setting value data" is the highest data (data stored at the highest address). In other words, the addresses between (1) "setting value data" and (7) "saved data 1 to 8" contain (2) "external signal data" and (3) "RAM checksum data."", (4) "control command buffer," (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer," and (6) "unused area." With this configuration, even if a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to RAM exceeds the design, it is possible to have RAM that is not used for gaming. Accordingly, it is possible to configure the gaming machine so that abnormal conditions are unlikely to occur. In addition, (2) "external signal data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "unused area" There is no problem even if you change the order of the addresses that store the five data. For example, you can store them in the order of "(3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)" starting from the upper address. Alternatively, the data may be stored in the order of "(6)→(5)→(3)→(2)→(4)" from the upper address. Furthermore, (6) the configuration may be such that no "unused area" is provided. Note that the data stored in the RAM area in (2) to (5) above does not make it impossible to insert game medals even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed. (No errors occur that would make it impossible to input the data).

Note that the area for storing "setting value data" shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59, may be configured to store the following data.
(A) Total score data: An area for storing data regarding the number of game values, which plays the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed type reel-type game machine that does not use actual game medals. When storing score data in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes)
(B) Minimum gaming time: Data for counting the minimum gaming time for one game (subtracting the counter value for each interrupt process) (minimum gaming time for one game is 4.1 seconds)
(C) Counter for number of coins acquired when BB is activated: Counter for determining whether the conditions (number of coins paid out) for ending BB are satisfied (counter corresponding to the value that gives the player gaming value) (subtract the value)
(D) Counter for the number of coins earned when MB is activated: A counter for determining whether the conditions for ending MB (number of coins paid out) have been satisfied (a counter corresponding to the value that gives the player a gaming value) (subtract the value)
It should be noted that the configuration may be such that a plurality of the above (A) to (D) and "setting value data" can be stored (stored at different addresses), or it may be configured such that only one of them can be stored. good. In addition, if the configuration is such that multiple pieces of data can be stored, each of the multiple pieces of data is stored at a higher address than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (an area for storing is provided). It is preferable to configure it so that. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players or gaming parlors. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power outage) occurred. Although there is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates an address higher than "7FF8H" in some cases, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players or gaming parlors.

<<Effects related to the replay stop display>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the operation in a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, will be described in detail. Note that the configuration exemplified below exemplifies a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even while the re-game stop display is being displayed.

First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. After that, at the timing (5) in the diagram, an automatic bet operation related to the re-game that is stopped and displayed (when the re-game is displayed as stopped, a bet is made even without inserting game medals or operating the bet button), the 2 bet lamp is displayed. D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up as an automatic bet operation related to the replay that is displayed as stopped, and the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 At approximately the same time, the start lamp D180 and the input ready lamp D300 light up (the input ready lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

Here, the feature points of the action in the figure will be explained in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game for which the replay is displayed as being stopped are configured to light up at substantially the same timing. When the input ready lamp D300 is lit after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert game medals, the player recognizes that the player cannot insert game medals by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is lit first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the input ready lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by lighting the input ready lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 at almost the same time as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's judgment regarding the insertion of game medals and the operation of the start lever D50, and to avoid the possibility of incorrect game medals being turned on. It is possible to prevent the input and the operation of the start lever D50.

<Configuration 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the replay is displayed as stopped until the end of the next game in which the replay is displayed as stopped. With this configuration, it is easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is also possible to quickly notify the player that the replay win has been won, so that the progress of the game can be monitored. It can be made smoother.

<Configuration 3>
The re-game lamp D290 is lit at a timing before the start lamp D180 is lit based on the display that the re-game is stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and then by lighting the start lamp D180, it becomes possible to operate the start lever D50 due to the replay win. By notifying the player of the situation, the player can easily grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 4>
The lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the display that the replay has been stopped occurs at a timing earlier than the lighting of the input possible lamp D300. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay has been won, and then the insertion possible lamp D300 is turned on to notify that the game medals can be inserted. This makes it easier to understand the game situation.

<Configuration 5>
The re-game lamp D290 is lit at a timing earlier than the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit based on the display that the re-game has been stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, thereby making it possible to smoothly proceed with the game.

<Configuration 6>
The replay lamp D290 is lit at a timing earlier than the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit based on the display that the replay has been stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<Configuration 7>
The 2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which replaying has been stopped are lit after the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. (What are the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213? (They do not light up at almost the same time). With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay winning, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<Configuration 8>
The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same timing after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped. If multiple lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming status, so by turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213 almost simultaneously, the player can You will be able to quickly grasp the game status.

<Configuration 9>
The lighting timing of the re-gaming lamp D290 based on the indication that the re-gaming has stopped is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<Configuration 10>
The lighting timing of the re-gaming lamp D290 based on the display that the re-gaming is stopped is earlier than the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, thereby making it possible to smoothly proceed with the game.

<Configuration 11>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 for the next game in which the replay is displayed to be stopped are lit at substantially the same timing. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is valid, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<<Other effects 1>>
Here, an effect different from the configuration shown in FIG. 60 in a winning replay game applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below as Other Effect 1.

<Configuration 12>
The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 may be configured to be always lit from the timing of a bet operation related to the game in which the replay is displayed as stopped until the end of the next game in which the replay is displayed as stopped. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is possible to quickly notify the player that the replay win has been won, so that the game progress can be facilitated.

<Configuration 13>
The lighting timing of the re-gaming lamp D290 based on the indication that the re-gaming is stopped and the turning-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped may be configured to be substantially the same. We would like to inform the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2 bet lamp D212) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming status, so we will temporarily turn off the 2 bet lamp D212. By doing so, the game status can be grasped smoothly, and furthermore, the timing of lighting up the 2-bet lamp D212 related to the next game in which the replaying lamp D290 is displayed as being stopped (this may also be the timing of lighting up the ready-to-enter lamp D300). By turning on the light earlier than the above, it is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert game medals.

<Configuration 14>
The lighting timing of the re-gaming lamp D290 based on the indication that the re-gaming is stopped and the turning-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped may be configured to be substantially the same. We would like to notify the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3 bet lamp D213) is kept lit, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming status, so we will temporarily turn off the 2 bet lamp D212. By doing so, the game status can be grasped smoothly, and furthermore, the timing at which the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit for the next game in which the replaying lamp D290 is displayed as being stopped (this may also be the timing at which the input ready lamp D300 is lit) By turning on the light earlier than the above, it is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert game medals.

<Configuration 15>
If you win a replay in a certain game and also win a replay in the next game of the certain game, the replay lamp D290 lights up based on the display that the replay for the certain game is stopped. From then on, the replay lamp D290 may be configured to continue to be lit until the completion of successive games of the certain game. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 continuously, the player can be promptly notified of the winning of the replay, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<Configuration 16>
Triggered by the third stop operation (or replay symbol stop display), various lamps such as replay lamp D290, 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, 1 bet lamp D211, start lamp D180, and input ready lamp D300 are activated. control may be performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a notification using the lamp according to the timing of the progress of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Configuration 17>
The replay lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the input possible lamp D300 may be turned on at substantially the same timing. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is turned on based on the stop display of the replay.

<Configuration 18>
Based on the indication that the replay has stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, 2-bet lamp D212, and 1-bet lamp D211 go out almost simultaneously, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, 2-bet lamp D212, and 1-bet lamp D211 turn off. They may be configured to light up substantially at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals that will be automatically bet when winning the replay is three.

<Configuration 19>
Based on the indication that the replay has stopped, the 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, and 1 bet lamp D211 go out almost simultaneously, and then the 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, and 1 bet lamp D211 turn off again. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the input ready lamp D300 may be configured to light up substantially at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals that will be automatically bet in the event of a winning replay is 3, and it is also possible to clearly notify that the lamp is lit based on the stop display for replay. can be notified.

<<Other effects 2>>
Here, further details will be given below as Other Effects 2 using FIGS. 61 to 63 to describe effects different from the configuration of FIG. Describe.

<Operation diagram 2 regarding display of replay stop>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the functions applicable to the drum-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. At approximately the same time, the replay lamp D290 is turned on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at approximately the same timing. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled, and the start lamp D180 and the start lamp are turned on. The possible lamps D300 are lit at approximately the same time. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Function diagram 3 regarding replay stop display>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. . Thereafter, at timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-enter lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operation diagram 4 regarding the display of replay stop>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and The input ready lamp D300 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operation diagram 5 regarding the display of replay stop>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. . After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet ramp D211, the 2-bet ramp D212, and the 3-bet ramp D213 are activated. The lights go out almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the replay lamp D290 are turned on almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the ready-to-enter lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously.

<Operation diagram 6 regarding the display of replay stop>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp lights up almost at the same time as the replay lamp D290. D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. Thereafter, at timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-enter lamp D300 light up substantially simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operation diagram 7 regarding the display of replay stop>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. . After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290 is activated. The start lamp D180 and the ready-to-load lamp D300 light up at approximately the same time. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operation diagram 8 regarding display of replay stop>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. . After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet ramp D211, the 2-bet ramp D212, and the 3-bet ramp D213 are activated. The lights go out almost simultaneously. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the replay lamp D290, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the input ready lamp D300. and lights up almost at the same time.

<Operation diagram 9 regarding the replay stop display>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. . Thereafter, at timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. Thereafter, at timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-enter lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operation diagram 10 regarding the display of replay stop>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the diagram. . Thereafter, at timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-load lamp D300 light up substantially simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

Note that among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, those having the same configurations as configurations 1 to 19 described above can produce effects similar to those of configurations 1 to 19 described above.

In addition, as mentioned above, the stop display timing of the re-gaming symbol, the operation timing of the stop button, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the re-gaming lamp D290, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, the illuminating/extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212, 1 It should be noted that there is no problem in combining any of the configurations (timings) regarding the lighting/extinguishing timing of the bet lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the input ready lamp D300.

In addition, although the above example illustrates a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even while the replay stop display is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. configuration (applicable to all configurations described above). In such a configuration, the input ready lamp D300 remains off during the period when the replay is displayed as being stopped.

In addition, the above-mentioned "almost simultaneously" is sufficient as long as the player can visually recognize that it is simultaneously, for example, processing (turning on/off timing) that is executed within a period of executing interrupt processing 10 times. There is no problem even if it is almost the same time.

<<Configuration regarding bet button lamp>>
The configuration regarding the bet button lamp S50 in the drum-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

The main control board M executes processing to enable the bet button D220 from disabled, and then the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to light up the bet button lamp S50 (main control (The board M may be configured to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the bet button D220 has been activated.) After that, the sub-control board S transmits the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control board M. It may be configured to execute processing for lighting the bet button lamp S50 upon receiving a command for lighting the bet button lamp S50. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 is managed to turn on and off on the sub control board S side, but the bet button D220 is enabled depending on the gaming situation on the main control board M side. This allows the bet button lamp S50 to be reliably lit, and even if the player visually checks the lighting of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether the bet (bet button D220) is valid, the main control board M side It can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation.

<<Configuration related to stop button lamp>>
The configuration regarding the stop button lamp S60 in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

The main control board M executes processing to enable the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) from disabled, and then the main control board M A command is sent to the S side to light up the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button for which the enabling process has been executed) {the main control board M sends the stop button lamp S60 to the sub control board S side D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) may be configured to send a command to the effect that it is enabled}, and then the sub control board S sends a command to the main control board It may be configured such that upon receiving a command sent from M to light up the stop button lamp S60, a process for lighting up the stop button lamp S60 is executed. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 is managed to turn on and off on the sub control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective depending on the gaming situation on the main control board M side. , the stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on, and the player can visually confirm the lighting of the stop button lamp S60 and press the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43). It is possible to configure the system so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation on the main control board M side even if it is determined whether the system is valid or not.

<<Configuration regarding reel unit RU applicable to this example>>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel-type gaming machine according to this example includes each reel M50 (M51, M52, and M53) rotatably via a reel unit RU. Note that FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the reel type gaming machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably accommodates all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape and is formed with an opening RU10. The three reels M51, M52, and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols on the three reels M51, M52, and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. Although details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to a reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top portion RU20 and a bottom portion RU30 with an opening RU10 in between. By placing the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the pedestal portion BU, which will be described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal portion BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three, through holes RU40 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU. There is. The three through holes RU40 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<<Pedestal part BU>>
The pedestal portion BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate-like shape. The ends of the pedestal part BU are attached to the left side, right side, back, etc. of the back box with screws (not shown), and the pedestal part BU is fixed to the back box. The base part BU is attached to the back box so as to extend in the horizontal direction. As described above, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
A plurality of, for example, three, screw holes BU10 are formed in the front end of the base portion BU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the pedestal portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

Note that the numbers and positions of the through holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 only need to correspond to each other and be arranged along the horizontal direction, and it is sufficient that the reel unit RU can be stably placed on the base portion BU. Further, the configuration may be such that only the reel unit RU is attached to the pedestal part BU using the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal part BU, or the reel unit RU can be attached to the pedestal part BU using the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal part BU. It may be configured such that both the RU and one reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53) are attached to the base part BU.

<<How to fix reel unit RU>>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal part BU, and the reel is placed so that each through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the screw hole BU10 of the corresponding pedestal part BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 through the through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position on the base part BU. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be removably attached to the base portion BU.

In addition to the case where the reel unit RU is attached using a threading member such as a screw or bolt in addition to the screw BS, the reel unit RU may be detachably attached using a member such as a detachable rivet, for example, a push rivet. It is only necessary that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal part BU using an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

In addition, in this example, a configuration in which the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal part BU is illustrated, but the configuration is not limited to this. A through hole RU40 is provided in the upper part of the reel unit RU, and a through hole RU40 is provided in the upper part of the reel unit RU, and the inside of the casing is inserted with a screw BS. The reel unit RU may be configured to be fixed (fixed in a hanging manner), or may be configured such that through holes RU40 are provided on both side surfaces of the reel unit RU and the reel unit RU is fixed inside the housing with screws BS. In addition, even in such a configuration, the configuration regarding the position of the screw BS and the dropping position of the screw BS (for example, the configuration regarding the screw BS located at the position closest to the location where the front door DU opens and closes) will be explained in detail below. ) is applicable.

<<Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS>>
FIG. 66(a) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the right side of the rear surface, and FIG. 66(b) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the left side of the rear surface. Note that FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b) also include arrows indicating movement of the screw BS, which will be described later. Arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66(a) and (b) for both positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 (sometimes referred to as the main tank member) is a funnel-shaped tank made of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged in a circumferential manner, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. Ru. The opening H30 is formed to open upward. The medals inserted from the aforementioned medal input port D170 are introduced into the inside of the hopper H40 via the opening H30. Note that the hopper H40 may be composed of a plurality of members, and the plurality of members may be collectively referred to as the hopper H40, a main tank member, a main tank unit, etc.

Furthermore, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom H52, a right sloped part H54, and a left sloped part H56. The right side inclined part H54 is arranged on the right side of the hopper H40, and game medals introduced into the right side of the hopper H40 are guided by their own weight toward a hopper bottom part H52, which will be described later. The left inclined portion H56 is arranged on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides the medals introduced into the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is arranged to cover approximately the upper left half of the disk H50, which will be described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being stacked and unable to fall at the hopper bottom H52, and to smoothly guide the game medals toward the hopper bottom H52.

By providing the right side slope part H54, the left side slope part H56, and the covering part H57, any game medals introduced into the inside of the hopper H40 through the opening part H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom part H52. The medals guided by the right side slope part H54, the left side slope part H56, and the covering part H57 are stored in the hopper bottom part H52. In this way, the right side slope part H54, the left side slope part H56, and the covering part H57 function as a storage slope part for storing game medals inside the hopper H40.

A disk H50 as a rotating body is arranged at the hopper bottom H52. The disk H50 is rotationally driven by the above-mentioned hopper motor H80, and the rotation of the disk H50 causes the game medals to be ejected from the game medal outlet H60. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide part H62>
A discharge guide portion H62 is formed inside the front side wall H42 along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and has an inclined surface H64 formed at an angle. When the hopper H40 is placed in the back box, the right side of the slope H64 is located lower than the left side of the slope H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, but is formed to widen slightly as it goes downward (from the left side to the right side).

As the game medals are stored in the hopper H40, the discharge guide section H62 guides the game medals at the top of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS and stores them in the hopper H40 before the game medals overflow from the hopper H40. This is a member to reduce the number of medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the slope H64, and the game medals guided by the slope H64 are discharged into the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge slope portion that discharges game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As mentioned above, the right side slope part H54, the left side slope part H56, and the covering part H57 function as a storage slope part for storing game medals inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide part H62 functions as a storage slope part for storing game medals inside the hopper H40. It functions as a discharging inclined part for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined part H54 and the left inclined part H56.

Further, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medals from the left side toward the right side. That is, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have an inclination downward to the right. The final target of the left inclined part H56 and the covering part H57 is the hopper bottom H52, and the final target of the discharge guide part H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of game medals can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

A protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 is provided in the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. The protruding wall H58 can prevent medals placed on the slope H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially quadrangular prism shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the top, and the medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored inside the medal auxiliary tank HS. Note that the detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<<Falling off of screw BS of reel unit RU>>
In the reel-type gaming machine, a front door DU is attached to the back box so that it can be opened and closed (the front door DU and the back box are sometimes collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (the left side seen from the player) as the center of rotation. Therefore, the right side of the front door DU (the right side as seen from the player) has the largest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, a shock is generated due to contact or collision with the back box and is propagated to the back box. Since the impact occurs on the right side of the reel-type game machine, the impact on the right side of the reel-type game machine is the largest, and the impact tends to gradually weaken on the left side of the reel-type game machine.

As described above, the reel unit RU is removably attached to the pedestal part BU with the screw BS. The screws BS are screwed into screw holes BU10 of the pedestal part BU at three locations: left, center, and right, and the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is subjected to the largest impact. Therefore, the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most likely to loosen due to impact, and when the screw screw is released, the right screw BS will fall off and fall. Further, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subjected to impact, and there is a possibility that the impact loosens and falls off. It should be noted that although it is assumed that the left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 will reduce the impact to some extent, it is naturally possible that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of impact propagation, usage time, etc.

<<Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1)>>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged at the lower part of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below at least the right side screw BS among the three screws BS described above.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The fallen right screw BS reaches the slope H64, rolls on the slope H64 while being guided by the slope H64 by its own weight, and moves along the slope H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right side screw BS falls off due to impact, it can be ejected from the hopper H40, the fallen screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is It is possible to prevent the rotation of the disk H50 from being disturbed or damage the disk H50, and to stably operate the hopper H40.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, only the right side screw BS was targeted, but the hopper H40 is arranged so that all three left side screws BS, center screw BS, and right side screw BS are located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. and the reel unit RU may be positioned. No matter which screw BS falls off, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. In addition, in this example, the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal part BU is illustrated, but the screw is not limited to this, and the front door DU is likely to receive impact due to contact or collision with the rear box. It may also be configured such that members such as screws attached to the right side (the right side as viewed from the player) are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when they fall off.

<<Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2)>>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, among the three screws BS mentioned above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the center screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right side screw BS. Note that in FIG. 67, the same components as those in FIG. 64 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to impact, it freely falls downward (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS as it is (without contacting the inclined surface H64).

When the central screw BS falls off due to impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by its own weight, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

This prevents the fallen right side screw BS and the center screw BS from entering the hopper H40, prevents the fallen screw BS from interfering with the rotational movement of the disk H50, or damaging the disk H50, and prevents the hopper H40 from entering the hopper H40. It can operate stably.

In the above example, the right side screw BS and the center screw BS were targeted, but the hopper H40 and reel unit RU are positioned so that the left side screw BS is also located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. Good too. No matter which screw BS falls off, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As described above, it is preferable to form a protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has fallen off and rested on the slope H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is greater than or equal to the height at which the screw BS bounces when it falls onto the inclined surface H64. The screw BS can be prevented from falling to the hopper bottom H52, and the screw BS can be prevented from interfering with the operation of the disk H50 or causing it to malfunction.

In this way, even if the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibrations caused by opening and closing the front door DU, the detached screw BS will not enter the hopper H40 and the medal auxiliary By configuring the screw BS to fall into the tank HS, the manager of the game hall can easily recover the screw BS that has been removed.

<<Hopper H400>>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right side screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall H48 when viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. By configuring the fallen right side screw BS to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40, it can be used in common with the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64.

On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right (right side wall H480) may be used. The hopper H400 has a bottom opening H410 formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480, and when the right side screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400 and is further passed through the bottom opening H410 into the medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this way, by passing through the bottom opening H410, the fallen right side screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without intruding into the hopper H40.

<<Extension part RU50>>
In the example described above, when the screw BS falls off, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS below. On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 65, an extending portion EN may be provided at the lower part of the reel unit RU or the base portion BU. By providing the extending portion EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it does not fall immediately, but can be guided by the extending portion EN and then dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this way, the extending portion EN allows the position where the screw BS is attached to match the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and the degree of freedom in the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged can be increased.

<<Composition of medal auxiliary tank HS>>
<Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode>
As shown in FIG. 68, the medal auxiliary tank HS has at least two through holes HS20 for fullness detection electrodes formed on the back side surface. Moreover, two fullness detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided at the lower part of the back surface of the back box. The two fullness detection electrodes DE have an elongated shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to protrude toward the front. The two fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed to correspond to the two fullness detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is placed at the bottom of the back box, the two fullness detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL of the stored game medals (see FIG. 69(c)) gradually rises and approaches the two fullness detection electrodes DE. Note that FIG. 69(c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost portion UL shown in FIG. 69(c) is a line (for example, an envelope line) connecting the contours of the game medals located in the uppermost portion UL of the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. (For simplicity, the uppermost portion UL is shown as a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE, and the two full detection electrodes DE are electrically connected through the plurality of medals, a voltage is generated between the two full detection electrodes DE. An electrical circuit is formed. By forming the electric circuit, the continuity detection board CC outputs a signal indicating that there is continuity between the two full detection electrodes DE. By doing so, it is configured such that a medal full error can be detected when game medals are stored up to the positions of the two full detection electrodes DE.

Note that the number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, but may be three or more. For example, if three full detection electrodes are provided, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, one new full detection electrode is provided below the two full detection electrodes, and one new full detection electrode is It can be configured such that a medal full error can be detected by electrical connection between the full detection electrode and one of the two full detection electrodes described above, and by such a configuration, the medal supplement Even when the game medals are not stored evenly in the tank HS (for example, when the game medals are stored biased toward the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), a medal full error can be detected.

<<Material of screw BS and material of medal>>
The material of the screw BS is magnetically attachable and electrically conductive. For example, it is made of steel. Furthermore, the material of the medal is non-magnetic and conductive. For example, it is made of plated brass or stainless steel. With this configuration, even if the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<<Relationship between the total length BL of the screw BS and the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE>>
The aforementioned left side screw BS, center screw BS, and right side screw BS are used to attach the reel unit RU to the base portion BU. FIG. 69(b) is a front view showing the entire screw BS. This screw BS is one whose total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69(b)) is shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69(a)). Total length BL<distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing this, even if the screw BS (for example, the right side screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it will be shorter than between the full detection electrodes DE, so two screws BS alone There is no electrical conduction with the two full detection electrodes DE (the screw BS is not caught by the two full detection electrodes DE). Note that the total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. Further, FIG. 69(a) is a plan view of the back side portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS, showing a state in which the full detection electrode DE protrudes into the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Relationship between the length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS and the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE>>
The radial length HR of the bearing surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69(b)) is shorter than the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69(a)). Length HR<diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). By doing this, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS will not be caught on one of the fullness detection electrodes DE, and the screw Even if the BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be removed immediately, and the screw BS alone will not become electrically conductive by chance.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69(c), one of the two full sensing electrodes DE (for example, the right full sensing electrode DE in FIG. 69(c)) is already stored. When in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the screw BS temporarily contacts the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the left full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69(c)). Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS will not be hooked to the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately detached from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69(c)). , a conductive circuit is not formed through the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

In this example, we have explained the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that stores all three reels, but even if it is a separate unit that stores each of the three reels separately, the screw BS The screw BS is detachably attached to the pedestal part BU, and there is a possibility that the screw BS will come off as well. Therefore, configurations such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and screw BS can be similarly adopted.

<<Reel band configuration>>
FIG. 70(a) is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70(b) is a perspective view showing the reel band MO in a curved state. FIG. 70(c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the cut M59 of the reel band MO. FIG. 70(d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the "white seven" symbol. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and the BB starts when "white seven, white seven, white seven" is stopped and displayed on the active line. The reel band MO has a thin plate-like elongated shape (band-like shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO has flexibility and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and the pattern can be illuminated from the back with the light emitted from the rotating drum backlight.

The reel band MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved to face each other and attached to the reel frame MW, thereby forming an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW mainly consists of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of resin such as plastic to reduce weight. The two frames are arranged parallel to each other and their centers are located on the same rotation axis. Furthermore, the interval between the two frames is arranged to be approximately the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames.

<Overlapping portion M58 and cut M59>
The length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps (overlapping part M58) near the first end M55 and the second end M57. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55.

As shown in FIG. 70(c), the reel band MO is pasted above the second end M57, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55. In addition, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when starting to attach the reel band MO, start attaching it to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then attach the reel frame MW to the reel frame MW. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel band MO is pasted along the entire circumference of the reel frame MW from the second end M57 toward the first end M55, and finally, The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the second end M57, and the pasting is completed up to the first end M55. If the reel strip MO is pasted in this order, the first end M55 will be pasted in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the reel M50, and the first end M55 will be pasted on top of the reel strip MO. The portions M55 are in an overlapping state.

On the other hand, start pasting the reel strip MO onto the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then, while gradually rotating the reel frame MW in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50, attach the reel strip MO to the first end M55. Paste it along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 to the second end M57, and finally paste the reel band MO above the first end M55 and paste it up to the second end M57. It ends. If the reel strip MO is pasted in this order, the second end M57 will end in the same direction as the rotational direction of the reel M50, and the second end M57 will be pasted on top of the reel strip MO. M57 will be in an overlapping state.

Here, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then the second end M57 is finished in the same direction as the rotational direction of the reel M50, and the second end M57 is attached to the reel frame MW on the reel strip MO. In the case where the second ends M57 overlap, when the reel M50 rotates during a game, air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (air resistance is large). , air tends to enter between the second end M57 and the reel band MO below the second end M57, and the reel band MO near the second end M57 tends to gradually peel off.

On the other hand, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is finished being attached in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the reel M50, and the reel strip MO is attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57. In the case where the first end M55 overlaps the top, when the reel M50 rotates when playing the game, the second end M57 overlaps the reel strip MO described above. Compared to this, air is less likely to come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is small), and air is less likely to enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below it. The reel band MO near the first end M55 becomes difficult to peel off.

From the above, when attaching the reel strip MO to the reel frame MW, start attaching the reel strip MO to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then attach the reel strip MO to the reel frame MW in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end M55 overlaps the reel band MO after the pasting is completed in this direction.

<Various errors>
In this way, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, an overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end M55 and the second end M57, and the overlapped portion M58 is formed between the first end M55 or the second end M57. A cut M59 is formed by either end of the end portion M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is made of resin such as plastic, errors may occur during molding. Furthermore, when assembling the reel frame MW, it may be deformed and errors may occur. Furthermore, since the reel band MO has flexibility, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO may be attached with distortion or the like, or the size of the reel frame MW ( In some cases, the outer circumference) may be installed slightly different from the designed value. When a large pattern (for example, "White Seven") is configured to be located on the reel strip MO below the superimposed portion M58, due to these various errors, the attachment position of the reel strip MO may not be as desired. When the reel band MO on the upper side of the superimposed portion M58 overlaps with the large symbol, the large symbol may be covered by the upper reel band MO.

Also, depending on the gaming state, the player may hit the bonus symbol, and if the bonus symbol is placed near the cut M59, the player may hit the bonus symbol. , when the bonus symbols are stopped, the cut M59 may also be visible when viewing the bonus symbols. If the various errors described above occur, it is assumed that the player will be able to visually recognize not only the symbols but also the deviation of the cut M59 and the positional deviation of the symbols. When the bonus symbols are stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, the player will be happy to pay attention to the bonus symbol because it is a symbol combination that will bring a high profit to the player. If you visually recognize a shift in the position of the symbol, there is a possibility that the joy of seeing the symbol combination that becomes the bonus symbol stopped and displayed may decrease.

<In the case of bonus symbols>
In order to prevent this, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol, such as a bonus symbol, is placed at the position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, if the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (bonus symbol, etc.) with the longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, then the length in the longitudinal direction is longer than LL. A shorter pattern (longitudinal length SL) is arranged at a position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the design with a short length in the longitudinal direction at the position closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57, even if various errors occur, these The symbols can be placed at a position apart from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Furthermore, even if the various errors described above occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the cut M59 or the positional deviation of the symbols. In addition, in the same figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell pattern (a pattern that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a bell) and the length in the longitudinal direction of a cherry symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry) are shown. Although shown as the same SL, if it is shorter than LL, which is the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven), the longitudinal length of the bell symbol and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol may be different. There is no problem. In addition, the symbols placed near the cut M59 are not limited to only the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may not be bonus symbols, such as replay symbols (symbols that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to replay). Alternatively, a watermelon pattern (a pattern that can form a pattern combination corresponding to a watermelon) may be arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59. In addition, in this example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol located near the cut M59 (for example, the bell symbol) are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the lateral direction may be longer than the length of the symbol located near the cut M59 (for example, the bell symbol) in the lateral direction.

In the example described above, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol with the longest length in the longitudinal direction (such as a bonus symbol) is LL, and the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL is SL. The arrangement of the symbols was determined by comparing the length of the symbol in the transversal direction (perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) as LT, and the short dimension of the symbol whose length in the transversal direction is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of the differences between the part of the symbol that protrudes most upwardly along the longitudinal direction and the part of the symbol that protrudes most protrusively downwardly. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the transversal direction are the lengths of the differences between the part of the symbol that protrudes most upwardly and the part of the symbol that protrudes most downwardly along the transversal direction.

<In the case of small role symbols>
Furthermore, in addition to bonus symbols, there are symbols such as watermelon symbols and cherry symbols that may not be stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the timing of the operation of the stop button even if they have been won, in other words, they are placed further away than the maximum number of sliding symbols. A symbol that has at least one spot (sometimes referred to as a symbol that corresponds to a rare role, a symbol that can be missed, etc.) is also a symbol that is targeted for attention, and is a symbol that players are trying to visually recognize. It is. In addition, in games where a player wins a rare role, the winning of the rare role may not be announced before operating the stop button, and even in such cases, the player wants to win the rare role, so The stop button is often operated at the timing (operation mode) of the stop button when it is easy to obtain a winning combination (highest profit for the player). Furthermore, there are gaming machines that have a large number of winning combinations that pay out one less coin if a prize is won, and in such cases, the operation timing of the stop button (operation The stop button is often operated in the mode). Note that operating the stop button at the timing (manipulation mode) of the stop button that provides the highest profit for the player is sometimes referred to as an optimal gaming method.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when playing a game using the optimal gaming method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the active lines are the upper left reel, the upper middle reel, and the upper right reel (straight line in the upper row), the middle row of the left reel, the middle row of the middle reel, and the middle row of the right reel (straight line in the middle row). Left reel lower row, middle reel lower row, right reel lower row (lower straight line), left reel upper row, middle reel middle row, right reel lower row (lower right reel), left reel lower row, middle reel middle row, right reel upper row (right reel upper row) ) and 5 lines, and the prescribed number is 3. In addition, there are watermelon and cherry roles as rare roles, and when the watermelon role wins, "Watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" will stop and display on the active line in a straight line, and when the cherry role wins, the characters will stop and display in a straight line. is configured such that "cherry-any-any" (any indicates that any symbol can be used) is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the active line. Furthermore, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are rare combinations, the symbols have at least one location where they are placed apart from each other by a distance greater than the maximum number of sliding pieces.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO. In addition, in the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located at positions away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. It is located in When a player wins a rare combination, they often operate the stop button aiming at a position on the reels where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare combination and where it is easy to win the rare combination. When a certain watermelon combination or cherry combination is won, by playing the game using the above-mentioned optimal gaming method, it is possible to win the rare combination. Specifically, the operation timing of the stop button that allows you to win the rare combination is to stop during three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located on the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located on the lower row. By operating the button, it is possible to win a prize regardless of whether the watermelon prize or the cherry prize is won. When the stop button is operated at such operation timing (optimal gaming method), the range of 9 frames from the cherry symbol on the top row to the watermelon symbol on the bottom row is the range that can be stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure. As shown in FIG. (There is no cut M59 near the symbol placed two frames above the watermelon, and there is no cut M59 near the symbol placed two frames below the cherry), and the gap of the cut M59 is It is possible to prevent the player from visually perceiving the deviation of the position of the symbols or the position of the symbols.

As shown in the figure, symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reels where it is easy to win the rare combination are placed near the first end M55 and the second end M57. By configuring so that the first end M55 and the second end M57 are not located at a position on the reel that is frequently stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the first end M55 and the second end M57 from being located at a position where the reel is frequently stopped and displayed. Even if a deviation occurs, the configuration can be such that the deviation of the cut M59 and the deviation of the position of the symbols are difficult for the player to visually recognize.

In this example, the number of steps for one rotation of the reels is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336 ÷ 20 = 16 with a remainder of 16, the 20 pieces (symbols) are divided into 16 pieces (symbols) with 17 steps and 4 pieces (symbols) with 16 steps. The reels are made up of. In addition, it is better to configure the cut M59 so that it is not visible to the player as much as possible for better appearance, so the pieces (symbols) adjacent to the cut M59 should have 16 steps, which has a relatively small number of steps. is suitable.

The configuration of the reel-type gaming machine in this example eliminates the need for inserting and paying out physical game medals used in general reel-type gaming machines, and instead uses pseudo game media converted into data. It may also be configured such that the game can be progressed. In addition, when configured in this way, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the reel-type gaming machine can be increased to the extent that there is no need to insert or pay out physical game medals (for example, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the reel-type gaming machine can be improved). (The front door and back box are integrated, so the gap where foreign objects are inserted is sealed), reducing the risk of unauthorized game medals being used, It can also be configured to improve security against fraudulent acts such as (so-called cheating) (sometimes referred to as an enclosed reel-type gaming machine). It should be noted that the configuration of the enclosed drum type game machine is applicable to any of the embodiments (or configurations) described above. Incidentally, the configuration may be such that the credit and credit number display device D200 is not provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) are summarized as one total score, and the main control board M, payout control The board H (also referred to as a gaming value control board or gaming value control means) or another board may perform the process of increasing or decreasing the total score or the process of displaying the total score.

In addition, it corresponds to the physical game medals used in general drum-type game machines, and has "scores" as a pseudo game medium used for playing games in enclosed drum-type game machines. may be configured. Note that "scores" may also be referred to as "score information," "points," "points information," "gaming value," or "gaming value information." Physically real game medals can be directly held and handled by the player. On the other hand, in an enclosed drum type game machine, the player can play the game without directly handling physical game medals. The points are not actual game medals, but pseudo game media converted into data so that the CPU of the main control board or the like can perform arithmetic processing. Further, "credit" is a score that is temporarily stored in a bettable state or a settleable state among scores, and is data mainly managed by the main control board M. Further, the "total score" refers to all the scores that can be input into the enclosed drum type game machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general drum-type game machine that uses physical game medals. In addition, when applying the configuration of the enclosed drum type gaming machine to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as "gaming medals" in this specification may be replaced with "scores", "score information", " There is no problem in treating it as "points held", "points information", "gaming value", "playing value information", etc., and as appropriate, "scores", "score information", "points held", "points information", etc. , "gaming value", and "gaming value information". Note that it is not necessary to have "credits". Further, there is no problem in replacing the credit number display device with a total score display device.

(Second embodiment)
Note that this embodiment is configured to have an AT-in-progress state as a state related to AT that is advantageous to the player, and in the AT-in-progress state (so-called AT), by executing the push order navigation, the player is in a state advantageous to the player. However, the configuration of a gaming machine capable of executing AT is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, a configuration of a reel-type gaming machine that can perform AT, which is different from the configuration of this embodiment, is defined as a second embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment in the figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second), that is, after executing the conditional device number management process described above in step 1450, step 4100 (second) is performed. In 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

Further, after executing the above-described AT state start control process in step 1750, in step 4200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a freeze execution determination process at the time of stop, which will be described later, and then proceeds to step 3500. Transition. The details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, freezing occurs when the reels start rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reels stop (when the last reel stops, when the third reel stops). (The reels do not start rotating for a predetermined period of time, or a bet operation related to the next game cannot be executed for a predetermined period of time) may occur.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation, which is related to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the state related to AT has newly become "AT in progress" from the game. Here, "newly in the AT state" refers to the case where the AT-related state becomes "AT in progress" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as the first AT win). As an example, (1) Winning BB in "high probability state" → Transition to "advantageous BB internal medium state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, and transition to "advantageous BB state" → BB is (2) If you win a cherry in the "high probability state", you will win the AT lottery at 1/2, and after winning the AT lottery, you will enter the premonitory state { This is a state related to AT that creates a sense of expectation in the player regarding whether or not he or she has won the AT lottery, and even if the player does not win the AT lottery related to winning the cherry, the same state as the "premonitory state" will occur. In the case where the system is configured to have a "fake precursor state" which is a production mode (background production, etc.), the cherry is won in the "high probability state" and the cherry is won based on the winning of the cherry. A game state transition such as winning the AT lottery will result in a transition to the "precursor state" → a predetermined number of games that are the end condition for the "precursor state" has been played, and a new transition to the "AT in progress state" will be changed to a "new This corresponds to ``The machine entered the AT mode.'' On the other hand, an example of a case that does not correspond to "Newly AT state" is as follows: (1) Staying in "AT state" → "AT continuous battle state" because the AT counter value has become 0 { Transition to the state where there is a possibility of transitioning to the "AT state" again (playing consecutive games) → Transition to the "AT state" again, (2) Winning BB in the "AT state" → " Game state transitions such as transition to "advantageous BB internal medium state" → BB symbols (bonus symbols) are stopped and displayed and transition to "advantageous BB state" → BB ends and transition to "AT state" again are "new". This does not apply to ``The machine entered the AT mode.''

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if Yes in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that, when turned on, causes freeze to be executed at the start of reel rotation) in step 4104. ) on. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives this command, the CPUMC of the main control board M , the AT start effect will be executed), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1550). Note that even in the case of No in step 4102, the process moves to the next process (processing in step 1550). Note that the freeze illustrated in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem in configuring the system to have various types of freeze (execution conditions and execution times).

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second). That is, in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the AT start freeze execution flag. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag in step 1570 (second). Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the freeze execution timer (which is a decrement timer, and sets the freeze execution time and the "AT The freeze execution time at the start (in this example, it is 5 seconds) is set to the timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT in progress state" ends, and the new "AT in progress state" is set. In this case, the timer is set and the timer is started, and the process moves to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become zero. If YES in step 1574 (second), the process moves to step 1552. On the other hand, if No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the start of the "AT state" has elapsed. Incidentally, even if the answer in step 1568 (second) is No, the process moves to step 1552.

In this way, the second embodiment is configured to execute a freeze (sometimes referred to as a freeze at the start of AT) when the "AT state" is newly started, and the details will be described later. However, while the freeze is being executed, the AT start effect will be executed on the sub control board S side. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the start of AT is set to 5 seconds, but there is no problem in changing the execution time, and it is preferable to set it in accordance with the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the configuration is such that the freeze execution time at the start of AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT. has been done. In this way, by making the freeze execution time at the start of AT relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be an advantageous situation for players in the future, we will be able to increase the interest of players by increasing their desire to play. It can be made into an expensive gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the freeze-at-stop execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) in FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The AT counter value has newly become 0" refers to the case where the AT counter value changes from "1 to 0" in a situation where the AT counter value is decreasing, such as "AT in progress". Cases where the AT counter value is always 0, such as a situation where the AT-related state is "normal gaming state", are not included.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 4202, the process moves to step 4206. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the advantageous section remaining games counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The counter value for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section has newly become 0" means that in a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous section counter value is decreasing, such as in the "AT state", the value of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section counter value has become 0. This is a case where the number of games changes from "1 to 0", and does not include a case where the advantageous section remaining game counter value is always 0, such as a situation where the AT-related state is "normal gaming state". If YES in step 4204, the process moves to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses a freeze execution timer (which is a decrement timer, and the execution time of the freeze to be executed when the new "AT state" is entered) and the "AT state". The freeze execution time at the end (in this example, it is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time that is executed when the "AT state" ends) is set to (execution time) and starts the timer. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends an AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives this command, the CPUMC of the main control board M , the AT end effect will be executed), and the process moves to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the freeze execution timer is 0 or not. If Yes in step 4210, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500). On the other hand, if No in step 4210, the process in step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the "AT state" has elapsed. Note that in the case of No in step 4204, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 76 is an image diagram of AT start effect execution in the second embodiment. In the same figure, an example of a case where a power outage does not occur during execution of the AT start effect and a case where a power outage occurs will be described in detail.

First, with reference to (a) in the figure, a case will be described in detail in which the power is not cut off during the execution of the AT start effect. First, when the start lever D50 for a game in which the AT-related state is newly changed to "AT in progress state" is operated (game start conditions are met), the AT start effect is started and a freeze is executed. be done. In addition, as a performance mode of the AT start performance, "Warp execution!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for one second (during execution of the AT start performance, a background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is always executed). . In this example, the AT start effect and freeze execution time is 5 seconds. After that, one second has passed since the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp execution!" is erased on the effect display device S40. Incidentally, the state in which only the background effect exclusive to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of freeze execution, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for 1 second as a performance mode of the AT start performance. Thereafter, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of freeze execution, the freeze execution ends, the AT start performance ends, and the reels start rotating. In addition, when the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of "AT50G START!!" on the effect display device S40 is erased, and the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed in the AT state. The scene will switch to a possible background effect. In addition, when the above-mentioned push order navigation is executed in the first game in the AT state, (1) Freeze starts → freeze ends after 5 seconds → reels start rotating and the effect is displayed. The press order navigation is displayed on the display device S40, (2) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reels start rotating → Reel drive state changes to reel constant speed state, and effect display device S40 It is also possible to display the navigation in the order of pressing. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation start timing is later than before due to freeze execution, the player will not be able to accidentally operate the stop button that corresponds to a different press order from the correct press order. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Next, with reference to (b) in the figure, a case in which a power failure occurs during execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 for a game in which the AT-related state is newly changed to "AT in progress state" is operated (game start conditions are met), the AT start effect is started and a freeze is executed. be done. In addition, as a performance mode of the AT start performance, "Warp execution!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for one second (during execution of the AT start performance, a background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and freeze is 5 seconds (excluding the time during power-off). After that, one second has passed since the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp execution!" is erased on the effect display device S40. Incidentally, the state in which only the background effect exclusive to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, two seconds after the start of freeze execution, a power outage occurs (for example, a power outage occurs at the gaming parlor). After that, when the power is restored, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze continues to be executed. After that, when the total time from the start of Freeze execution, excluding the time when the power is turned off, reaches 5 seconds, the execution of Freeze ends, the AT start effect ends, and the reels start rotating. It happens. In this way, in this example, if a power outage occurs while the freeze is being executed (while the AT start effect is being executed) and then the power is restored from the power outage, the freeze execution time will be the same as the state before the power outage. This will continue to be carried out. As an example, if the freeze execution time is 5 seconds, and a power outage occurs 1 second after the freeze execution starts, the freeze will be executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the freeze execution time will be 5 seconds. If the power is cut off 3 seconds after the start, freezing will be executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

In addition, the execution time of the AT start effect is the same as the execution time of freeze, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start effect and then the power is restored from the power outage, the execution time of the AT start effect will be the same as the execution time of the freeze. The execution will continue from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the presentation mode of the AT start effect will be different depending on whether a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or when a power outage does not occur. If a power outage has not occurred, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 at the timing when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the execution of the AT start performance, while the AT start performance is being executed. If a power outage occurs, regardless of the timing of the power outage, "AT50G START!!" will be displayed on the effect display device S40 after recovery from the power outage. Note that the display "AT50G START!!" may be referred to as the AT start game number display. In addition, in the figure, the number of games at the start of AT is shown to notify that the number of remaining AT games at the start of AT (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games, but the display format is The present invention is not limited to this, but for example, in a case where a lottery for increasing the number of AT games can be executed in an "advantageous BB state" executed immediately before transitioning to the AT state, AT in the "advantageous BB state" The number of AT remaining games obtained by adding the number of AT remaining games obtained by winning the number of games addition lottery to the initial number of AT games of 50 games is configured to be displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of games at the start of AT. Good too. For example, if 30 remaining AT games are obtained through the AT game number addition lottery in the "advantageous BB state", "AT80G START!!" is displayed as the number of games at the start of AT. You can. In addition, in the figure, only the AT start performance is illustrated, but similarly, the AT end performance is different in the case where a power outage occurs while the AT end performance is being executed, and when a power outage occurs. (For example, if a power failure does not occur during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET〇〇" will be displayed two seconds after the start of the AT end effect.) On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET" will be displayed after the power outage returns, regardless of the timing of the power outage.) In addition, this is a performance that is displayed while the AT start performance or AT end performance is being executed, and if a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start performance or AT end performance, the performance is immediately displayed after the power is restored. If so, the present invention is not limited to displaying the number of games at the start of AT, but there is no problem as long as the display is visible to the player and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

By configuring as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is configured to be able to execute freezing when newly transitioning to the AT state and when the AT state ends. The AT start performance is executed during freeze execution when the AT status is newly entered, and the AT end performance is executed during freeze execution when the AT status ends. In a case configured in this way, if a power outage occurs while the AT start effect or AT end effect is being executed, after the power outage is restored, the information that is scheduled to be displayed from the predetermined timing in the AT start effect or AT end effect will be displayed. By configuring the display so that it is displayed immediately after the power is restored, even if an unintentional power outage (for example, a power outage at a gaming facility) occurs during a freeze, game information such as the number of remaining AT games will be displayed. By configuring the system to immediately display information necessary for the player to grasp the game situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot grasp the game situation.

In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the AT state is newly entered and when the AT state ends, but the execution mode of the freeze is not limited to this. , may be configured to be executed at the start of the BB, at the end of the BB, etc., or may be configured to be executed based on the winning conditional device or the gaming state in which the player is staying.

Furthermore, from the configuration regarding freezing in the reel-type gaming machine according to the above-mentioned example,
Freeze execution period if no power outage occurs during freeze execution = A
If a power outage occurs during freeze execution, the freeze execution period until the power outage occurs = B
If a power outage occurs during freeze execution, the freeze execution period after the power outage occurs = C
If
A=B+C
It is configured so that

Incidentally, when the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the reel acceleration process described above will be executed.

<<<<Configuration 2 applicable to this example>>>>
The configuration applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the embodiments described above, and one configuration described in detail below may be applied, or multiple configurations detailed below may be applied. Let me add some things you can do.

<<<Lamp unit configuration>>>
First, using FIGS. 77 and 78, the configuration regarding lighting of the lamp unit (general term for decorative lamp unit D150 and LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail.

Note that the LED of the lamp unit in this example is a full-color LED (can be lit in a plurality of lighting colors), and is configured such that the lighting color can be set for each LED by lighting control by the sub-control board S. Further, the lamp unit is configured to light up based on a lighting pattern (details will be described later) possessed by the gaming machine, and the lighting pattern may be set for each LED, or multiple LEDs may be set in one. It may be set as one group for the one group.

Further, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication may be used to control the lighting of the lamp unit (LED). I2C communication is a method in which a master IC sends lighting patterns corresponding to each slave IC to multiple slave ICs, and each slave IC sends back an ACK signal (acknowledge signal) when receiving data. Since the slave ICs are connected to each other, data (lighting patterns) are transmitted in order starting from the master IC, and each slave IC acquires the data corresponding to each slave IC and returns an ACK signal. With this configuration, it becomes possible to perform high-speed communication.

FIG. 77 is an image of the lamp unit lighting configuration. In the same figure, the configuration regarding lighting of the lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. Note that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the items shown in the column of element 1 are not limited to only eight items from "red" to "no color". First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements, element 1 to element 6, as elements related to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 has 8 lighting colors: "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red + green", "blue + green", "blue + white", and "no color". The element 1 has different types of lighting colors. The lamp unit according to this example is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lighting color is "red", it means that all the LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is "red + blue". ” indicates that out of N LEDs, which is the total number of LEDs, M LEDs light up in red and L LEDs light up in blue (N=M+L). . Note that the combination of the order of the LEDs that light up in red and the LEDs that light up in blue may be one or more than one (if multiple combinations are provided, the lighting color may be " (You may provide multiple lighting colors, such as ``Red + Blue 1'' and ``Red + Blue 2''). Moreover, "no color" indicates that the light is off (not lit), and is the lighting color that is selected when the light is always off. As mentioned above, the number of items composing elements 1 to 6 in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and element 1 includes three or more colors such as "red + blue + green". There is no problem in configuring it to have a combination of lighting colors.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time, which includes "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "no lighting". Element 2 has seven types of lighting times. Note that "Always" is a lighting time selected when the light is always on, and "No lighting" is a lighting time that is selected when the light is always off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 is the lights-off time, which includes "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 seconds", "3 seconds", "always", and "never turn off". Element 3 includes seven types of light-off times. Note that "Always" is a lighting time selected when the light is always off, and "Never lights off" is a lighting time that is selected when the light is always off.

<Element 4>
Element 4 is a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is made up of a combination of element 2, lighting time, and element 3, lights out time, and is "0.1 seconds on → 0.1 seconds". "Lights off for 0.1 seconds → lights off for 0.3 seconds", "Lights for 0.2 seconds → lights off for 0.3 seconds", "Lights for 1 second → lights off for 0.1 seconds", "Lights for 3 seconds → lights off". Element 4 includes seven types of lighting time patterns: "3 seconds off", "always on", and "always off". As an example of a lighting time pattern, in the case of "light on for 0.1 seconds → light off for 0.1 seconds", the lighting time of "0.1 seconds" which is element 2 and the light off of "0.1 seconds" which is element 3. It is made up of a combination of time. In addition, "always on" is a lighting time pattern that is selected when the light is always on, and is configured by combining element 2, "always" lighting time, and element 3, "no lights off" off time. has been done. In addition, "always off" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lights are always off, and is configured by combining element 2, "no lighting" lighting time, and element 3, "always" off time. has been done.

<Element 5>
Element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4. In other words, the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color which is element 1, the lighting time which is element 2, and the lighting time which is element 3. In addition, in the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting elements are shown as lighting element contents, and the identification elements distributed for each lighting element content are shown as lighting element types. As a lighting element,
Lighting element type a: "Red lighting for 0.1 seconds → Lights off for 0.1 seconds"
Lighting element type b: "Blue lighting for 0.1 seconds → Lights off for 0.1 seconds"
Lighting element type c: "Red lighting for 0.1 seconds → Lights off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type d: "Red + blue lighting for 0.1 seconds → lights off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type e: "Red + Blue lighting for 0.2 seconds → Lights off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type f: "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type g: "White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds"
Lighting element type h: "1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type i: "3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type j: "3 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type k: "Always lit in red"
Lighting element type l: "Always lit in blue"
Lighting element type m: "Constantly lit in green"
Lighting element type n: "Constant white lighting"
Lighting element type o: "Always lit in red + green"
Lighting element type p: "Always lit in blue + green"
Lighting element type q: "Constant blue + white lighting"
Lighting element type r: "Always off (no color)"
It has 18 types of lighting elements as elements 5. As an example of a lighting element, in the case of "red light on for 0.1 seconds → light off for 0.1 seconds", element 1 "red" and element 4 "light on for 0.1 seconds → light off for 0.1 seconds" It is configured by combining a lighting time pattern (as described above, a lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time and a light-off time). Further, "always lit in red + green" is configured by combining element 1 "red + green" and element 4 "always lit". Moreover, "always off (no color)" is configured by combining element 1 "no color" and element 4 "always off".

<Element 6>
Element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by combining one or more lighting elements that are element 5. In addition, in the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting pattern are shown as lighting pattern contents, and the identification elements distributed for each lighting pattern content are shown as lighting pattern types. The lighting pattern is
Pattern 1: “a→a→a→a”
Pattern 2: “b→b→b→b”
Pattern 3: “a→b→a→b”
Pattern 4: “a→a→g→g”
Pattern 5: “g→f→j”
Pattern 6: “i→h→b”
Pattern 7: “g→f→b”
Pattern 8: “i→j→g”
Pattern 9: “g→g→g”
Pattern 10: "k"
Pattern 11: "l"
Pattern 12: "m"
Pattern 13: "n"
Pattern 14: "o"
Pattern 15: "p" Pattern 16: "q"
Pattern 17: “r”
It has 17 types of lighting patterns as elements 6. As an example of a lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: "a→a→a→a", element 5 "red lighting for 0.1 seconds→light off for 0.1 seconds" is repeated four times. In addition, in the case of pattern 8 "i → j → g", after executing lighting element type i: "green lighting for 3 seconds → lights off for 0.3 seconds", lighting element type j: "blue lighting + green lighting for 3 seconds → 0 .3 seconds off" and lighting element type g: "1 second white lighting→0.1 second off". Incidentally, the lighting patterns may be further combined to light the lamp unit as in pattern 1 → pattern 4, or as in pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 →... Pattern 1→Pattern 4" may be repeatedly turned on until the lighting termination condition is satisfied. Note that the lighting termination condition may be configured to be satisfied when the gaming situation changes such as cancellation of a predetermined error, or may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to this example is configured to be lit by a combination of lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of element 6 is configured by a combination of the lighting elements of element 5. The lighting element is configured by a combination of the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4, and the lighting time pattern of element 4 is configured by the combination of the lighting time of element 2 and the lighting time of element 3. has been done.

Although the configuration related to lighting of the lamp unit has been described in detail as being composed of elements 1 to 6, it is not limited to this, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased, or elements 1 to 6 may be used. You may change the contents of (for example, set element 1 to lighting brightness).

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a status-based notification mode. In the figure, a lighting pattern of the lamp unit (also referred to as a lamp unit lighting pattern) and a lighting mode of the reel back lamp S30 (also referred to as a back lamp lighting mode) that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this example are shown. An example of a configuration for each game situation regarding the sound output from the speaker S20 (sometimes referred to as speaker sound) will be described in detail. Note that each item illustrated in the same figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, and the BB type (the conditions related to BB) The lighting pattern may be different depending on the type of device) and the gaming state in which the BB was won, or the lighting mode (lighting cycle) that combines multiple lighting patterns may be repeatedly executed in one BB until the BB ends. Please note that it may be configured to do so. Further, regarding the error, although a medal empty error is illustrated as an example, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be made different depending on the type of error. In addition, in all configurations 1 to 6, during normal gaming (no error is occurring, the power is not immediately turned on, the standby screen is not displayed, the setting confirmation mode is not set, and the setting change mode is not set). The lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in the situation where the bonus is not being executed is pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, pattern 17. or a combination of one or more. Note that since the game is configured to have various game states such as a low probability state and an AT state during the normal game, the lighting patterns of the lamp units that can be selected may be different depending on the game state. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. Note that the time of power-on refers to a situation from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed (immediately after the power is turned on).

<<Configuration 1>>
<Medal empty error occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with relatively low light intensity (light intensity smaller than normal light intensity) Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during the medal empty error until the error is cleared (Repeat play)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Outputs a special sound for a specified period of time when the power is turned on <While the standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (constantly lit in green)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during settings confirmation mode <during settings change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (repeat "1 second white light on → 0.1 second off" three times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB in progress>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white on → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 second blue + green light on → 0.3 second off" → "0.1 second blue light on → 0.1 second (lights out)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during BB execution (plays repeatedly)
It is configured as above. Note that the performance executed when the power is turned on may be configured to be different depending on the performance that was being executed before the power outage occurred or the gaming state before the power outage occurred.

As in configuration 1, only different lighting patterns of the lamp unit are selected during an error such as when an empty medal error occurs and during normal gaming, and the lighting color constituting the lighting pattern is By configuring the system so that red is used when an empty medal error occurs, but not during normal play (configuring so that a predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs), players and administrators can , it is possible to easily distinguish between cases where an error has occurred and cases where no error has occurred, and the business of the game parlor and the progress of games can be made smoother. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit immediately after turning on the power and during normal gaming, players and administrators can easily distinguish between immediately after turning on the power and during normal gaming. This makes it possible to smoothen the operation of the game hall and the progress of games. In addition, the player can play the game stress-free without being mistaken for thinking that an error has occurred even during normal gaming, and the administrator can clearly identify the gaming machine in which the error has occurred. becomes. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit when displaying the standby screen and during normal gaming, players and administrators can easily distinguish between displaying the standby screen and during normal gaming. This allows for smooth operation of the game parlor and smooth progress of games. Further, while the standby screen is displayed, power consumption due to the use of flashy lighting patterns can be suppressed even though the player is not playing the game. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the setting confirmation mode and normal gaming, players and administrators can easily switch between the setting confirmation mode and normal gaming. This allows for smooth operation of the game parlor and smooth progress of games. In addition, the administrator can immediately identify unintended setting confirmation modes, and can also detect unintended setting confirmation modes even if the administrator forgets to turn off the setting key switch. can do. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns between the settings change mode and normal games, players and administrators can easily switch between settings change mode and normal games. This allows for smooth operation of the game parlor and smooth progress of games. Further, it is possible to immediately determine a setting change mode that is not intended by the administrator, and it is possible to quickly determine a setting change mode that is not intended by the administrator. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit during BB execution and during normal gaming (in a state where BB is not executed), players and administrators can It is possible to easily determine whether the game is in progress (a state in which BB is not being executed), and the player or administrator can clearly determine the gaming situation.

In addition, as mentioned above, there are differences between when an error related to the lamp unit occurs and during normal gaming, differences between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal gaming, differences between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal gaming, and settings. The differences between the confirmation mode and normal gaming, the differences between setting change mode and normal gaming, and the differences between BB execution and normal gaming include lighting colors (elements) that are not used during normal gaming. 1), may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during normal gaming, or may be configured to have a lighting time (element 3) that is not used during normal gaming. It may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during a normal game, or it may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during a normal game. , it may be configured to have a lighting pattern (element 6) that is not used during the normal game.

<<Configuration 2>>
<Medal empty error occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during the medal empty error until the error is cleared (plays repeatedly)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <While displaying the standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up in a special pattern while the standby screen is displayed (flashing)
Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white on → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 second blue + green light on → 0.3 second off" → "0.1 second blue light on → 0.1 second (lights out)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during BB execution (plays repeatedly)
It is configured as above.

<<Configuration 3>>
<Medal empty error occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeat "0.1 second red light → 0.1 second off" 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during the medal empty error until the error is cleared (plays repeatedly)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <While displaying the standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white on → 0.1 second off” → “0.2 second blue + green on → 0.3 second off” → “3 second green on → 0.3 second off”) )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("Green lighting for 3 seconds → Lights off for 0.3 seconds" → "Blue + white lighting for 1 second → Lights off for 0.1 seconds" → "Blue lighting for 0.1 seconds → Lights off for 0.1 seconds" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during BB execution (plays repeatedly)
It is configured as above.

<<Configuration 4>>
<Medal empty error occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always lit in red + green)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during the medal empty error until the error is cleared (plays repeatedly)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <While displaying the standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Lights in blue for 0.1 seconds → Turns off for 0.1 seconds" → "Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → 0.1 seconds" (Turn off the light → turn on blue for 0.1 seconds → turn off the light for 0.1 seconds) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Lights in blue for 0.1 seconds → Turns off for 0.1 seconds" → "Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → 0.1 seconds" Lights off” → “Blue lights on for 0.1 seconds → Lights off for 0.1 seconds”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("Green lighting for 3 seconds → Lights off for 0.3 seconds" → "Blue + White lighting for 1 second → Lights off for 0.1 seconds" → "Blue lighting for 0.1 seconds → Lights off for 0.1 seconds" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during BB execution (plays repeatedly)
It is configured as above. In addition, the warning sound output from the speaker when a medal empty error occurs is the same warning sound as the warning sound output from the speaker during setting confirmation mode and setting change mode, and separately from the warning sound, when a medal empty error occurs. During the setup mode, the speaker outputs the message "Medal empty error has occurred." During the settings confirmation mode, the speaker outputs "Settings confirmation mode in progress." During the settings change mode, the speaker outputs "In settings change mode." It may be configured to output "This is" from the speaker. Note that for errors other than the medal empty error, a warning sound and a voice saying "〇〇 error is occurring" may be similarly output from the speaker.

<<Configuration 5>>
<Medal empty error occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during the medal empty error until the error is cleared (plays repeatedly)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: On → Off (lights up during normal gaming)
Speaker sound: No output <while displaying standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during settings confirmation mode <during settings change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Exclusive sound during setting change mode <BB in progress>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white on → 0.1 second off” → “0.2 second blue + green on → 0.3 second off” → “3 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 seconds (lights out)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during BB execution (plays repeatedly)
It is configured as above.

<<Configuration 6>>
<Medal empty error occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeat "0.1 second red light → 0.1 second off" 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during the medal empty error until the error is cleared (plays repeatedly)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <While displaying the standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds” → “Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → Turns off for 0.1 seconds” → “Lights in white for 1 second → Turns off for 0.1 seconds”) → "White light on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 second")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during settings confirmation mode <during settings change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds” → “Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → Turns off for 0.1 seconds” → “Lights in white for 1 second → Turns off for 0.1 seconds”) → "White light on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 second")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Exclusive sound during setting change mode <BB in progress>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white on → 0.1 second off” → “0.2 second blue + green on → 0.3 second off” → “3 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 seconds (lights out)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during BB execution (plays repeatedly)
It is configured as above.

In addition, in the same figure, six types of configurations, configurations 1 to 6, are illustrated, but these configurations are just examples, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, back lamp lighting mode, and sound output from the speakers for each gaming situation are shown as examples. may be combined from each configuration or may be changed in any way. In addition, regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, we will discuss the differences between the lamp unit when an error occurs and during normal gaming, the differences between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal gaming, and the differences between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal gaming. Differences, differences between setting confirmation mode and normal gaming, differences between setting change mode and normal gaming, differences between BB execution and normal gaming, are the elements 1 to 6 mentioned above. (See FIG. 77) It is preferable to configure such that one that is not selected during the normal game is selected.

In addition, in the same figure, only the medal empty error is illustrated as an error, but the error is not limited to this, and display judgment errors and door opening errors are also considered when an error occurs and during normal play related to the lamp unit. Differences between immediately after turning on the power and during normal gaming; Differences between displaying the standby screen and during normal gaming; Differences between setting confirmation mode and normal gaming; Differences between setting change mode and normal gaming The difference between the BB execution and the normal game is that any of the elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) mentioned above, which are not selected during the normal game, is selected. Depending on the type of error occurring, for example, one of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different depending on the medal empty error and the display judgment error. Any of the aforementioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different.

Furthermore, when the replay combination is stopped and displayed, the lighting mode of the lamp unit may be configured to inform the player that the symbol combination related to the replay combination has been stopped and displayed. In the game executed in the gaming state, the lamp unit is configured to light up when a replay combination is won and the symbol combination related to the replay combination is stopped and displayed, and any one of elements 1 to 6 is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the regaming role is stopped and displayed without winning the regaming role. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can clearly recognize that he has won the replay combination.

<<<Configuration regarding front door opening and dispensing>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a configuration regarding payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, "normal" shown in the same figure means, for example, when the prize winning-B (common bell) is won in the "low probability state" and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, prize winning 04) is stopped and displayed. This shows a case where 11 game medals are paid out. Also, for "Payout occurs before the door is opened" and "Payout occurs after the door is opened", if the prize-B (common bell) is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, prize 04) is stopped and displayed. is exemplified. In addition, in the same figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example) is explained in detail.

<<Configuration 1>>
<For normal payouts>
A case in which normal payout in configuration 1 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button indicates that the third stop button is pressed). (sometimes referred to as turning on), the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed (when the player releases their finger from the third stop button, etc., the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed. The state in which the third stop button is not pressed is sometimes referred to as the third stop button turning from on to off), game medals corresponding to winning prize 04 are paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is emitted from the speaker S20. Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined period of time.

<If the payout is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where payout is executed before the door is opened in configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is turned off from ON, and the game medals corresponding to the win 04 are paid out, and the speaker S20 starts outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals. After that, the front door DU is opened while the payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is being output, and the front door open notification sound (in the figure Sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the output of the dispensing sound, the output of the dispensing sound ends, and at the same time, the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the front door DU remains open, that is, the front door open notification sound starts to be output when the front door DU is opened, and then continues to be output even if the front door DU remains open. The output is configured to end when a specific period of time has elapsed since the opening. With this configuration, when the administrator opens the front door DU to confirm or change settings, the front door open notification sound will continue to be output until the confirmation or change of settings is completed. This allows you to check and change settings without stress. Although the figure shows that the output of the front door opening sound ends at the same time as the output of the dispensing sound ends, the output of the front door opening sound is not limited to this. There is no problem even if the end timing is different from the end timing.

<If the payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where payout is executed after the door is opened in configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, while the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is open. Ru. That is, the front door opening notification sound is configured to be output when the front door DU is opened, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off. After that, while the front door DU is open and the front door open notification sound is being output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medals corresponding to winning number 04 are paid out, and from the speaker S20. A payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals starts to be output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. Thereafter, a specific time has elapsed since the front door DU was opened, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. Thereafter, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of outputting the dispensing sound, and the outputting of the dispensing sound ends.

As in configuration 1, by configuring the system so that game medals can be paid out regardless of whether the front door DU is opened, it is possible for the game hall manager to forget to close the front door DU when replenishing the game machine with game medals. Even in the case where the game medal is closed (not tightly closed), the game medals can be paid out normally and the player can be configured to avoid any disadvantage. In addition, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound to be able to be output simultaneously, the situation of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. In the case of the above-described configuration 1, it is preferable to use an output mode (timbre, pitch, tempo, etc.) that makes it easy to distinguish between the front door opening notification sound and the dispensing sound.

<<Configuration 2>>
<For normal payouts>
The case where normal payout in configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button indicates that the third stop button is pressed). (sometimes referred to as turning on), the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed (when the player releases their finger from the third stop button, etc., the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed. The state in which the third stop button is not pressed is sometimes referred to as the third stop button turning from on to off), game medals corresponding to winning prize 04 are paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is emitted from the speaker S20. Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined period of time.

<If the payout is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where payout is executed before the door is opened in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is turned off from ON, and the game medals corresponding to the winning prize 04 are paid out, and the speaker S20 starts outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals. After that, while the payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is being output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door open notification sound (in the figure At the same time as the sound A) is output, the output of the payout sound ends. Thereafter, a specific time has elapsed since the front door DU was opened, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. Note that the predetermined period of time during which the dispensing sound is output ends while the front door opening notification sound is being output.

<If the payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where payout is executed after the door is opened in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, while the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is open. Ru. That is, the front door opening notification sound is configured to be output when the front door DU is opened, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off. After that, while the front door DU is open and the front door open notification sound is being output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medals corresponding to winning prize 04 are paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. Thereafter, in a situation where the payout of game medals is being executed, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound is finished, and the payout sound corresponding to the winning prize 04 is output. Thereafter, a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the payout of the game medals corresponding to winning prize 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

As in configuration 2, by configuring the payout of game medals to be executable regardless of whether the front door DU is opened, it is possible for the game hall manager to forget to close the front door DU when replenishing the game machine with game medals. Even in the case where the game medal is closed (not tightly closed), the game medals can be paid out normally and the player can be configured to avoid any disadvantage. In addition, by configuring the system so that the front door open notification sound and the payout sound are not output at the same time, it is possible to prevent situations where it becomes difficult to judge the status of the gaming machine due to the mixing of the tones of the front door open notification sound and the payout sound. can do. In configuration 2, the output sound is output even while the front door open notification sound is being output, and the volume of the output sound is relatively small compared to the volume of the front door open notification sound (even if the volume is 0). (including).

<<Other configurations>>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even when the front door DU is open, it is possible to insert game medals, operate the max bet button (bet button D220 in this example), and bet button lamp S50 (also known as the max bet lamp). It may also be configured such that the lighting of the input ready lamp (sometimes referred to as the ``bet'' lamp) or the bet lamp (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp) is effective. That is, when a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on), and the insertion is valid (credits increase or the game medal is It may also be configured such that the bet is placed. In such a configuration, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a bet sound (or medal insertion sound) corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) (the front door DU Even if the button is not open, the bet sound corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output, and the sound corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output. It may be configured such that the bet sound made by the player is not outputted.

<<<Configuration regarding power outage and payout>>>
The following is an example of the effect that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this example, when the power is turned off while the third stop is pressed when winning a small winning combination. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below are applicable to all embodiments according to this example. Note that the configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a case where game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, the effect by blinking the rotating drum backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Configuration 1>
In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the 3rd stop button (turn it on) to win the small prize → Power outage occurs while holding down the 3rd stop button. (When a power outage occurs in the gaming hall, etc.) → The power is restored while holding down the third stop button → The power is restored and the game medals corresponding to the small role are paid out. It's okay.

In addition, if the game progresses in a situation where no power outage occurs and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the small role, it is possible to perform a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, as in configuration 1 described above, the power is restored while the third stop button is pressed, and the payout of game medals based on the winning of the small role is executed. In this case, it may be configured such that the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination is not executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination is not output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored from the power cut.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off while the player presses the third stop button and the power is immediately restored, game medals can be paid out based on winnings of small winnings. This allows players to avoid any disadvantages. Note that even if any of the predetermined operation members controlled by the main control board M side (for example, the start lever, all stop buttons, bet button (max bet button), settlement button, etc.) is operated, other predetermined operation members If the operating member is not operated, it may be configured such that game medals can be paid out based on winnings. For example, when recovering from a power failure, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the system is configured so that game medals based on winnings are not paid out. Good too. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, (1) After that, by releasing the third stop button or releasing the start lever (the operating member that is turned on among the operating members controlled by the main control board M side (2) After that, by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (the main control board M side It may also be configured such that when all the operating members to be controlled are turned off), the payout of game medals based on winnings is executed.

Examples of situations in which the above-mentioned power outage occurs are: the power switch is turned from on to off, the cable that supplies power is disconnected, a power outage occurs at the game center, the cable that supplies power is pulled out of the socket, etc., and in any case, it is applicable to the above-mentioned configuration.

<Configuration 2>
In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small prize → open the front door DU while holding down the third stop button. (Opening the front door DU will cause a door open error) and the power will be cut off (turning off the power switch, etc.) → Press and hold the third stop button and restore the power (turning the power switch on) ) → Hold down the third stop button and close the front door DU to cancel the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in a predetermined direction) → The door opening error will be canceled and , it may be configured so that the above-described effect is achieved, in which the game medals corresponding to the small winning combination are paid out.

In addition, if the game is progressing in a situation where no power outage has occurred and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the small role, it is possible to perform a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, as in configuration 2 described above, the door opening error is canceled while the third stop button is pressed, and the payout of game medals based on the winning of the small role is released. When executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by suddenly performing the back lamp effect and outputting the payout sound after the door opening error is cleared.

<Configuration 3>
In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the 3rd stop button (turn it on) to win the small prize → Power outage occurs while holding down the 3rd stop button. (Power outage occurs in the game center, etc.) → Release your finger from the third stop button (turn the third stop button from on to off) → Power is restored → Power is restored and game medals corresponding to the above-mentioned small roles are paid out. It may be configured as above in which the above is executed.

In addition, if the game is progressing in a situation where no power outage has occurred and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the small role, it is possible to perform a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role, In addition, while it is possible to output the payout sound based on the winning of the small role, as in configuration 3 above, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after releasing the third stop button. In this case, when the payout of game medals based on the winning of the small role is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role is not output. good. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is turned off and restored.

In addition, when configured as in the above configuration 1, configuration 2, or configuration 3, as a process after power-off recovery, it is determined whether the third stop button is pressed (whether it is on or not). Before executing the process (the process executed in the game progress control process), it may be configured to execute the game medal payout process (the process executed in the game progress control process) based on winnings. Also, as mentioned above, in a situation where the symbol combination that results in a small winning combination is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off while the third stop button is held down, and then the power is turned off while the third stop button is held down. , The payout of game medals based on winnings may be executed by releasing the third stop button after that, and in such a case, the output of a payout sound and a back lamp effect corresponding to the payout may be performed. may be configured so that it is not executed (if the payout of game medals based on winning is executed without power interruption, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed).

<<<Configuration regarding setting confirmation mode and payout>>>
The effect applicable to the gaming machine according to this example when the setting key switch is turned on while holding down the third stop when winning a small winning combination will be exemplified below. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below are applicable to all embodiments according to this example. Note that the configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a case where game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. In addition, the configuration detailed below applies when the reels are stopped, the power is turned on, and the main control board side of the start lever, all stop buttons, bet buttons (max bet button), settlement button, etc. When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON in a situation where the various operating members controlled by the This example shows the case where In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is in progress, or may be configured not to be notified.

<Configuration 1>
In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small prize → Open the front door DU while holding down the third stop button. (Opening the front door DU will cause a door open error) and turn on the setting key switch (does not shift to setting confirmation mode) → Close the front door DU while holding down the third stop button. The configuration as described above may be adopted in which the door opening error is canceled (for example, by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 and twisting it in a predetermined direction) and then the setting confirmation mode is not entered even if the third stop button is released.

In addition, if configured in this way, it is possible to place a bet while the setting key switch remains on, and the reels can start rotating by operating the start lever while a bet is placed, and the reels can start rotating by operating the start lever while the setting key switch is turned on. It may be configured such that the reels can be stopped (the game can proceed) by operating the reels. Also, if the setting key switch is left on after that, it may be configured such that bets cannot be placed (input of game medals is also not possible), or bets can be placed but the reels do not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. You may. In other words, the configuration may be such that the game cannot be played while the setting key switch remains on. It should be noted that in such a configuration, a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is not displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, if the front door DU is opened while the setting key switch is still on (after the effect as in configuration 1 above) and the replay symbols are not displayed in a stopped state, the mode will shift to the setting confirmation mode. Alternatively, when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the replay symbols are stopped and displayed, the configuration may be configured so that the mode does not shift to the setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, when the front door DU is opened and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display that the mode is the setting confirmation mode.

<<<Configuration regarding lighting of max bet lamp>>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, the operation regarding lighting of the max bet lamp (also referred to as bet button lamp S50) applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. Note that the configuration exemplified below exemplifies a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even while the re-game stop display is being displayed. The max bet lamp is controlled by the sub control board S side or the main control board M side, which is provided inside or near the max bet button, and notifies that the operation of the max bet button is valid. It's a lamp. In the same figure, when the max bet lamp is lit (or flashing), it is ON, when the max bet lamp is off, it is OFF, when the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, it is ON, and when 1 bet is lit, it is OFF. OFF when the lamp D211 is off, ON when the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, OFF when the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is on, The 3-bed lamp D213 is turned off as OFF, the start lamp D180 is lit (or flashing) as ON, and the start lamp D180 is turned off as OFF. In addition, in the figure, when game medals are inserted one by one from the medal slot D170 (the game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 are detected by an input reception sensor D10s, a first input sensor D20s, a second input sensor D30s, etc.) The sensor detects game medals one by one), but as a bet button, it is different from the max bet button, and it is possible to bet one game medal with one operation (off → on). A 1-bet button or a 2-bet button that allows you to bet two game medals with one operation (off → on) may be provided, and when configured in this way, one bet button can be inserted into the medal slot D170. Even if the same effect as when inserting a game medal (detection of one game medal by the insert reception sensor D10s, first insert sensor D20s, or second insert sensor D30s) is applied to one press of the 1 bet button, there is no problem. do not have.

<<Configuration 1>>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

As in configuration 1, by configuring the max bet lamp to turn off and turn on every time one gaming medal is inserted, the maximum bet lamp can be set to Since the operation of the bet button is disabled, by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the max bet button is valid. In addition, by accurately reporting the period during which the max bet button is valid, the player can understand the period during which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the insertion of game medals is invalid. It is possible to prevent a situation where the game medals are not properly inserted due to the game medals being inserted during the invalid period, and it is possible to realize a game progressing at a good tempo.

Furthermore, as in configuration 1, by configuring the 3 bet lamp D213 to turn on after the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out, when the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit, Since the max bet lamp is off, the player can clearly recognize that the prescribed number of three game medals has been bet.

<<Configuration 2>>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and the start lamp D180 is lit. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 2, the max bet lamp is configured to turn off after the third game medal is inserted and the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up.In other words, the 3 bet lamp D213 is configured so that the player presses the max bet button. By configuring the light to turn on as soon as possible after the player's operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation. It is possible to prevent situations in which players are distrustful of the performance or behavior of a gaming machine due to slow operation or by inserting gaming medals into the machine.

<<Configuration 3>>
Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp goes out, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up.

As in configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3 bet lamp D213 turns off, the start lamp D180 is turned on at approximately the same time, so that the next game can be started. It is possible to quickly notify the player that the game is ready to start, which makes the game progress smoothly, and also prevents the player from inserting extra game medals or affecting the performance of the game machine due to slow operation. It is possible to prevent situations in which people feel distrustful of their behavior.

<<Configuration 4>>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

<<Configuration 5>>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is flashing, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is on and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and the start lamp D180 is lit. Thereafter, the max bet lamp turns off before the timing when the max bet lamp turns on and off (in the middle of lighting) when the max bet lamp blinks. In addition, in the figure, the third game medal is inserted while the max bet lamp is lit and the max bet lamp is blinking, repeatedly turning on and then off. The max bet lamp turns on and then turns off at the timing when the second gaming medal is inserted, but if the third gaming medal is inserted while the max bet lamp is blinking and is off. In this case, the max bet lamp remains off after the third game medal is inserted.

Even in the case where the 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, and 3-bet lamp D213 are all turned on when no bet is made, as in configuration 5, the number of game medals inserted (the first, By changing the lighting/extinguishing combinations of the start lamp D180, 2-bet lamp D212, and 3-bet lamp D213 depending on the second and third medals, the player can check the current gaming situation (how many game medals are there). This means that it is possible to understand whether the bet has been made or not.

<<Configuration 6>>
Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, and the start lamp D180 lights up at the timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (timing earlier than the lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in configuration 2). The 3 bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 6, the max bet lamp is configured to turn off after the third game medal is inserted and the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up. In other words, the 3 bet lamp D213 is configured so that the player presses the max bet button. By configuring the light to turn on as soon as possible after the player's operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation. It is possible to prevent situations in which players are distrustful of the performance or behavior of a gaming machine due to slow operation or by inserting gaming medals into the machine.

<<Configuration 7>>
Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. After that, the start lamp D180 lights up (starts blinking). Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp goes out, and the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up.

As in configuration 6, after the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on almost at the same time. In other words, the 3 bet lamp D213 is By configuring the light to turn on as soon as possible after the bet button is operated, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, making it possible to smooth the progress of the game and to It is possible to prevent a situation where a player inserts extra game medals or becomes distrustful of the performance and behavior of a game machine due to slow operation.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6, and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit, but any lighting mode may be used so that the player can recognize that the max bet button is valid. Alternatively, as in configuration 5, the configuration may be such that the max bet lamp is on and the max bet lamp is blinking. Also in configuration 5, the configuration may be such that the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit. Similarly, in configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is lit, but any lighting mode may be used as long as the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is valid. Similarly to configuration 7, the configuration may be such that the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is blinking. Also in configuration 7, the configuration may be such that the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is lit. Further, the max bet lamp may be configured to be controlled by the sub-control board S side, or may be configured to be controlled by the main control board M side.

<<<Configuration when operating the payment button>>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the operation when operating the settlement button D60, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, will be described in detail. The following configuration exemplifies a case where three game medals are bet on the gaming machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the same figure, the max bet lamp is lit (or flashing) as ON, the max bet lamp is off as OFF, the settlement button is newly detected as an ON operation, and the settlement button as ON. OFF when no operation is detected or no new operation of the settlement button is detected, ON when the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, OFF when the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, Turn ON when the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit, turn OFF when the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, turn ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and turn ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. OFF, ON when the start lamp D180 is lit (or blinking), OFF when the start lamp D180 is off, ON when the ready-to-load lamp D300 is lit (or blinking), ready-to-load lamp The figure shows that the D300 is turned off as OFF, and that the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 as OFF→ON→OFF. In addition, although the figure illustrates the case where game medals are inserted one by one from the medal slot D170, the bet button is different from the max bet button, and one operation (off → on) allows one coin to be inserted. A 1-bet button that allows you to bet a game medal or a 2-bet button that allows you to bet 2 game medals with a single operation (off → on) may be provided. There is no problem in applying the same effect as when inserting one game medal into D170 to pressing the 1 bet button once. In addition, the configuration illustrated below may be configured such that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even when the replay stop display is displayed, or the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled while the replay stop display is displayed. It may be configured such that the game medals that are held cannot be settled. In addition, as a condition for operating the settlement button D60 and paying out the betted game medals from the discharge port D240 (as a condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated), the settlement button has changed from "on to off". It may also be expressed as "on" or "on for 0.5 seconds or more".

<<Configuration 1>>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turns from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, 3-bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and ready-to-enter lamp D300 are activated. When the light goes out, the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout starts), and then the credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are used. Certain four game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, at the timing when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. In addition, in the figure, a case is illustrated in which the payment process can be executed by turning the payment button D60 from off to on in a situation where the operation of the payment button D60 is valid (during the validity period). The execution mode is not limited to this, for example, in a situation where the operation of the payment button D60 is valid (during the validity period), the payment button D60 turns from off to on, and continues to be on for a predetermined time or more (the payment button D60 (the same applies to FIGS. 85 to 87).

As in configuration 1, by configuring the game medals that have been bet on to be paid out (paid out) before the credits, the player can confirm that the credits have become 0 when finishing the game. Even if the player leaves his/her seat immediately, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to settle the game medals that have been bet. In particular, when ending a game when the number of credits is small, such as 1 or 2, there is a relatively high possibility that the player will end the game without acquiring enough game medals. It is also possible that people's attention is becoming distracted. Even in such cases, in order to prevent unintended disadvantages to players, the game medals that have been bet are settled (paid out) before the credits are paid out. Therefore, in configuration 1, before the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are , and the input ready lamp D300 are configured to turn off.

<<Configuration 2>>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (changed from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the max bet lamp lights up and the three bet game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240 ( (The payout will start). Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned off, and the enable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 goes out and the throwable lamp D300 turns on. In configuration 2, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medals are paid out, but credits are not paid out, and when the settlement button D60 is operated, By configuring the max bet lamp to be turned on before the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, 3 bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and input ready lamp D300 are turned off, the player may accidentally press the settlement button. If the player accidentally operates the max bet button, only the game medals that have been bet will be paid out, and the player will want to operate the max bet button again to bet credits. By configuring the system to notify the player, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<<Configuration 3>>
Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the payment button D60 is operated once (changed from off to on), and the start lamp D180 and the input ready lamp D300 are turned off at the timing when the payment process is started. The three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (the payout is started), and then the four game medals that are the credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are Game medals will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing when the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of 3-bet lamp D213→2-bet lamp D212→1-bet lamp D211. In addition, at the timing when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the input ready lamp D300 lights up.

<<Configuration 4>>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals are bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turns from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the start lamp D180 and the input ready lamp D300 go out, and the three bet game medals are placed in the ejection slot. It is paid out from D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 goes out, and the input ready lamp D300 turns on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 4, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the payment button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in configuration 4, the bet game medals are paid out but the credits are not paid out, and the max bet lamp is turned on at a later timing than the input ready lamp D300 is turned on. If the player wishes to change to a one-coin bet after placing a three-coin bet, the player operates the settlement button D60 once to settle the three betted gaming medals, and then transfers one gaming medal. Since the player must make a bet or operate the 1-bet button, in such a case, the game progress can be made smoother by lighting up the throwable lamp D300 before the max bet lamp.

<<Configuration 5>>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals are bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turns from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, 3 bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and ready-to-enter lamp D300 are activated. At the same time as the light goes out, the three bet game medals are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started). After that, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 5, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the payment button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<Configuration 6>>
Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, at the timing when the payment button D60 is pressed and the payment process is started, the input ready lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the start lamp D180 goes out. The three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (the payout is started), and then the four game medals that are the credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are Game medals will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing when the settlement button D60 is operated, the lights are turned off in the order of 3-bet lamp D213→2-bet lamp D212→1-bet lamp D211. In addition, after the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. Note that the max bet lamp remains off.

<<Configuration 7>>
Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process is started, the max bet lamp starts blinking and the start lamp D180 turns off. Thereafter, the insertable lamp D300 is turned off, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3-bed lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off. After that, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. Note that the max bet lamp remains off. In configuration 7, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the payment button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<Differences in operation depending on power-off timing>>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the main control board M and the sub-control board S depending on the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off. FIG. 88(a) is a timing chart showing a first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88(b) is a timing chart showing the first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off. 3 is a timing chart showing the second aspect.

The first mode is a mode in which power is cut off after execution of the main program of the main control board M or the subprogram of the sub-control board S is started. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which power is cut off before execution of the main program of the main control board or the subprogram of the sub-control board starts.

In this example, a power outage is a state in which the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, such as a state where the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, a state where the power cable is disconnected, a state where the power cable is disconnected, or a power outage. But that's fine. This also includes cases where the power supply is unintentionally cut off at a gaming facility. The timing at which a power outage occurs is the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine stops, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the timing when the power cable is disconnected. This is the timing when the power outage occurred. In addition, in this example, "occurrence of power outage" means that the power supply (power supply) to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detecting a power outage" means that the gaming machine detects the occurrence of a power outage. It is to detect.

In FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), ΔT1 is from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (sometimes referred to as an off level) after a power outage occurs. , ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the time from the timing when the power is cut off until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level. ΔT4 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub-control board S starts, and ΔT5 is the time until the main control board M reaches the supply level. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is activated. Here, the following relationships are established: ΔT5<ΔT1, ΔT2<ΔT3, ΔT5>ΔT3, and ΔT4<ΔT5.

<<<First aspect>>>
<<Changes in power supply status>>
At time t1, power supply to the gaming machine is started, and at time t3, power is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

<<Operation of main control board>>
<Power supply voltage supplied from power supply unit E to main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine starts from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from an off level (time t1) to a supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. Although the figure shows an example in which the time from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, this is not limited to this, and the main control board It may be configured such that the time from when power supply is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may vary (randomly). In addition, although the example shows a case where the time from when power supply starts to the sub-control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, this is not a limitation. It may be configured such that the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level varies (randomly). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) of the time from when power supply starts to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is the same as the time from when power supply starts to the sub control board. It is preferable that the configuration is such that it takes longer than the maximum value (maximum time) for the power supply voltage to reach the supply level.

Thereafter, a power outage occurs at time t3. Due to the occurrence of this power outage, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and from time t4 onwards, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4). becomes constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, and even if the power supply is cut off, the power supply unit E maintains a substantially constant power supply voltage for a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5). (maintenance level) (the power-off processing is executed in a situation where the voltage at the maintenance level is supplied). In this example, the time to maintain the maintenance level from the start of execution of the power-off processing (detecting the power-off) (the time from time t4 to time t5) is at least enough time to execute the timer interrupt processing 20 times. (The time required to call and execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) 20 times) is configured to ensure this. In addition, in the figure, the time from time t4 to time t5 is the time required to execute the timer interrupt process at least 20 times, but the time from time t3 to time t5, in other words, the time from time t3 to time t5, The configuration may be such that the time from when the power supply is cut off (power cutoff occurs) until the power cutoff process cannot be executed is at least enough time to execute the timer interrupt process 20 times.

Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5, and reaches the off level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed by the main control board starts at time ta, which is a time period from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant to ΔT5. By executing this main program, the main control board START (power-on) process shown in FIG. 13 described above is executed.

As described above, if the setting key switch is off in the judgment process of step 1014 in FIG. is started.

Further, in the judgment process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, if the setting key switch is on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Starting timer interrupt>
If the setting key switch is off, a timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and if the setting key switch is on, a timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1104 of FIG. . After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined period T. The period T in which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of occurrence of power outage>
When a power outage occurs and the voltage continues to drop to a certain level, the power supply unit E outputs a power outage detection signal. The main control board M has an input port into which a power-off detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when no power-off has occurred, and is a low-level signal when a power-off has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether a power outage has occurred depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high level signal or a low level signal.

In this example, the main control board M detects power outage in the determination process of step 1604 in FIG. 32. Specifically, in two consecutive timer interrupt processes, the main control board M determines that a power-off has occurred if the data read from the input port is a low-level signal both times.

In this way, in this example, the occurrence of power outage is detected by two consecutive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, if a power outage occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the processing in step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the processing in step 1104 in FIG. 14, the occurrence of the power outage can be detected. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, the occurrence of the power outage may not be detected.

In this way, if a power outage occurs after the main program has started executing, and a timer interrupt is activated by the process in step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process in step 1104 in FIG. , it is possible to detect that a power outage has occurred through interrupt processing. When it is detected that a power outage has occurred, a power outage process shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<<Operation of sub-control board>>
<Start subprogram>
The subprogram executed by the sub-control board S starts at time tb when ΔT4 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage became constant. By executing this subprogram, the subprogram start process shown in FIG. 38 described above is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 mentioned above, and by starting the sub-control board S before the main control board M, the sub-control board S can avoid missing commands sent from the main control board M. can be received. In addition, in the figure, the timing when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting power supply to the main control board M, and the timing when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting power supply to the sub control board S, are shown as the same time tb, but the time from when power supply starts to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and the time from when power supply starts to the sub control board S until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level are different. It may be configured such that the time required to reach the supply level is different, and even in such a configuration, the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the main program of the main control board M is started. It is preferable to configure the time to be longer than the time from the start of power supply to the sub-control board S until the sub-program of the sub-control board S starts, so that the power supply voltage on the main control board M side is The time from when the supply voltage reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started is the time from when the power supply voltage on the sub-control board S side reaches the supply level until the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started. It is preferable to configure the time period to be longer than the time period.

<<<Second aspect>>>
FIG. 88(b) is a timing chart showing a second aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off. The second mode is a mode in which the power is cut off before the main program executed by the main control board M starts execution. That is, this is a mode in which the power is cut off before the elapse of ΔT5 from the time t2 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level.

In this way, in the second aspect, the power outage occurs before the main program starts executing (before the timer interrupt starts), so the power outage occurs due to the main program. This cannot be detected, and the gaming machine stops due to the power cut (the supply voltage reaches a low level) without executing the power cut processing shown in FIG.

<<Operation of main control board>>
<Power supply voltage supplied from power supply unit E to main control board>
Power supply to the gaming machine starts from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from an off level (time t1) to a supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

Thereafter, a power outage occurs at time t13. Due to the occurrence of this power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and from time t14 onwards, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14). becomes constant. Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15 and reaches the off level at time t16. For the sake of explanation, the voltage level is assumed to be approximately constant at the maintenance level, but in reality, the voltage level continues to gradually decrease after a power outage occurs, dropping below the voltage level at which operation can be guaranteed (operation guaranteed voltage level), and then The voltage level becomes 0. In other words, in reality, the design is such that it takes 20 interrupts or more from when a power-off is detected to when the voltage drops below the guaranteed operation voltage level. Note that the design may be such that it takes 20 or more interrupts from when the power supply is cut off to when the voltage drops below the operation guaranteed voltage level.

In this way, in the second aspect, execution of the main program is started after a power-off occurs, but the timer interrupt is not activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is configured to be at an off level before the main control board M is turned off. Note that if a power outage occurs immediately before the main program starts (for example, when the main program starts up after one timer interrupt processing time has elapsed), the timer interrupt processing can be started, and the power is turned off. The process can be executed without any problems.

In addition, although the first aspect and the second aspect are illustrated in the figure, the configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to this example is as follows.
(1) Immediately after starting power supply to the main control board M (for example, after the timer interrupt processing has been executed once after starting power supply to the main control board M), a power failure occurs → The main program cannot be executed. Before starting, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes an off level (execution of the main program will not start).
(2) Start supplying power to the main control board M → Immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M reaches the supply level The power supply is turned off after the time required to execute the timer interrupt process once has elapsed since the timer interrupt processing is reached.→The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the main program execution starts. level (main program execution will not start)
It may be configured as described above.

<<<Relationship between setting key switch state and power supply state>>>
FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first aspect, and FIG. 89(b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second aspect. 3 is a table showing the relationship between power supply state and situation.

<<Relationship between the setting key switch state and power supply state in the first mode>>
<State 1>
First, in state 1 of FIG. 89(a), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being executed or a state in which a game can be executed, and the setting key switch is "off". and the "power supply status" is "on".

<State 2>
In state 2, the power is cut off while the setting key switch remains in the "off" position, and the "power supply state" becomes "off." At this time, the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state is saved in the storage area as a return address.

<State 3>
In state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
Next, in state 4, when power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "on" state, the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. As mentioned above, in the first mode, the power is cut off after the main program starts running, and the main program shown in FIG. A control board START (power-on) process can be executed.

In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is on, and the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. , transition from normal state to setting change mode. Note that in this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. In this way, if the setting key switch is set to ``on'' and the ``power supply status'' is set to ``on'', the system will move to setting change mode, and then the setting change switch or start lever will not be operated. This allows the setting values to be changed. Further, by transmitting a setting change start command to the sub control board S through the process of step 1622 in FIG. 32, it is possible for the sub control board S to notify that it is in the setting change mode.

<State 5>
Next, if the power is cut off while the setting change mode is in effect and the setting change device control process is being executed, the "power supply state" changes to "off". When a power outage occurs, the power outage process in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process (setting change mode) is changed to the return address by the process in step 1902. It is saved in the storage area as .

<State 6>
In state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is "off", and the process of step 1022 is executed. Through the process of step 1022, the process returns to the return address saved in the storage area in state 5, and execution starts from the process at the return address. As mentioned above, the return address saved in the storage area in state 5 is the address of the next process to be executed in the settings change device control process, and by returning, the settings change device control process is immediately executed. be done. In this way, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and when the power supply is turned off, turning on the setting key switch to turn on the power supply shifts to the setting change mode. This is the basic effect when transitioning to setting change mode, but also if you turn off the power supply during setting change mode, turn off the setting key switch, and then turn on the power supply. Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, it is configured to be in the setting change mode. By configuring this way, even if a power outage occurs during the setting change mode (for example, a power outage occurs at the gaming parlor), it is possible to return to the state before the power outage, and to prevent abnormalities in the gaming machine. It is possible to make it difficult for such movements to occur.

<<Relationship between the setting key switch state and power supply state in the second mode>>
<State 1>
In state 1 of FIG. 89(b), similarly to the first aspect, the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being executed or a state in which a game can be executed, and the setting key switch is ""Off" and "Power supply status" is "On".

<State 2>
In state 2, similarly to the first aspect, power is cut off while the setting key switch remains in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" becomes "off." At this time, the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state is saved in the storage area as a return address.

<State 3>
In state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
In state 4, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "on" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "on".

<State 5>
In state 5, the power is cut off while the setting key switch is in the "on" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second aspect, the power is cut off before the main program executed by the main control board M starts to be executed. Therefore, in the second aspect, the "power supply state" is once "on" (state 4), but immediately after the "power supply state" related to state 4 becomes "on" (for example, when the timer interrupt processing is (After the time for one execution has elapsed), the "power supply state" is switched to "off". In other words, before the main control board START (power on) process in FIG. (state 5). Therefore, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address saved in state 2 is saved as is in the storage area.

<State 6>
Next, in state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. Through the process of step 1022, the process returns to the return address saved in the storage area in state 2, and execution starts from the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in state 2 is the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state, and the next process to be executed in the normal state is executed. In this way, in the second aspect, even if the setting key switch is turned on and the power supply status is turned on, the main program of the main control board M is not executed. If the power supply is turned ``off'', the system is configured so that it will not enter setting change mode even if the setting key switch is turned ``off'' and then the power supply is turned ``on''. . By configuring as in the second aspect, if the power is cut off immediately after the gaming machine is powered on, if the gaming machine is shifted to the setting change mode, an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine. It is possible to configure the game machine so that it does not shift to the setting change mode even if the setting key switch is on, and it is possible to configure a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems.

<<<Control of awarding medals and control of output of payout sound>>
As described above, when winning a small winning combination (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), the player is given medals in the payout number corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

<<Medal award processing>>
The process of awarding medals includes a process of adding and awarding the number of credits, and a process of actually paying out game medals outside the gaming machine and awarding them.

<Addition process of number of credits>
When the current number of credits is less than the maximum stored number (for example, less than 50), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of paid out cards until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. This process of adding the number of credits is executed by the calculation process of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M.

<Game medal payout process>
When the current number of credits exceeds the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to dispense medals from the medal dispensing device H, thereby providing medals. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<<How medals are awarded>>
Depending on the current number of credits and the number of medals to be given, there are two modes: only adding the number of credits, only paying out game medals, and shifting from adding the number of credits to paying out game medals ( There are three types of modes: a mode in which both credit addition processing and medal payout processing are executed.

<Aspect of only adding the number of credits>
When the current number of credits is less than or equal to the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payout coins until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. If the maximum stored number is not reached even after adding up the number of paid-out medals, the process of awarding medals ends with only the process of adding the number of credits.

<Mode of transition from credit addition process to game medal payout process>
When the current number of credits is less than or equal to the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of paid-out coins until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. When the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals after subtracting the added amount of credits from the payout number from the medal payout device H. The sum of the added credits and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the number of payout medals corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

In this way, when shifting from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPU 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspect of only game medal payout processing>
If the current number of credits has already reached the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 and pays out game medals corresponding to the number of payouts from the medal payout device H.

<<Specific example>>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current number of credits is 47 and a payout number of 5 medals is to be given to a player, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M first reduces the number of credits by 1. Add one by one. Specifically, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device is 47 → 48 (first credit (time t1)) → 49 (second credit (time t2)) → 50 (third credit (time t2)) t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of stored credits (50 pieces) is reached, and the number of credits cannot be increased any further.

Next, the CPU 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts 3 coins for the added credit from the 5 coins to be paid out. The two medals are paid out from the medal payout device H.

In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been dispensed at time t7, and ends the dispensing process. .

＜＜Various hours＞＞
<Unit processing time for credit addition processing and unit processing time for game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition process by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, a unit processing time a is required to increase the number of credits from m to the number of credits m+1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2 - time t1 = a to increase the number of credits from 48 (first) to 49 (second), and the number of credits is 49 (second). It takes time t3-time t2=a to increase the number of credits from 50 (third credit). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is approximately constant.

Furthermore, in the process of paying out game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the n+1th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6-time t4=c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is approximately constant.

One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference in timing between two consecutive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing (time t1) of addition processing from 47 to 48 (first image) and the timing (time t2) of addition processing from 48 to 49 (second image). This is the difference between the timing (time t2) of addition processing from 48 to 49 (second image) and the timing (time t3) of addition processing from 49 to 50 (third image).

Moreover, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference in the timing of the start of two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the timing of starting processing for the fifth image (time t6) and the timing of starting the addition processing for the fourth image (time t4). In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be defined to have a constant cycle. Note that the following regulations and the configuration shown in FIG. 90 are all based on the situation that the game medals are sufficiently stored in the medal payout device H and the game medals are placed in all the grooves of the disk D50. The case where game medals are paid out is illustrated.

In addition, the timing of starting the payout process such as t4 and t6 is as follows:
(1) t4 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 turns from on to off as the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 turns from on to off when the fifth game medal is paid out. The timing is right to
(2) t4 is the timing when the second payout sensor H2 changes from off to on due to the payout of the fourth game medal, and t6 is the timing when the second payout sensor H2 changes from off to on due to the payout of the fifth game medal. The timing is right to
(3) t4 is the timing when the second payout sensor H2 turns from on to off when the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing when the second payout sensor H2 turns from on to off when the fifth game medal is paid out. The timing is right to
(4) t4 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 changes from off to on due to the payout of the fourth game medal, and t6 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 changes from off to on due to the payout of the fifth game medal. The timing is right to
(5) t4 is the timing when a part of the game medals that will be the 4th payout is paid out to the outside of the disk H50, and t5 is the timing when a part of the game medals that will be the 5th payout is paid out to the outside of the disk H50. The timing of the release
(6) t4 is the timing when all of the game medals that will be the 4th payout are paid out to the outside of the disk H50, and t5 is the timing when all of the game medals that are the 5th payout are paid out to the outside of the disk H50. The timing should be
(7) In the case where the payout process is configured to be executed every time one game medal is paid out, t4 is the start timing of the payout process for the fourth medal, and t6 is the start timing of the payout process for the fifth medal.
It may be configured as described above. Note that details of the first dispensing sensor H1 and the second dispensing sensor H2 will be described later. In addition, since the various time values and timings mentioned above are just design values, there may be slight deviations when the gaming machine is actually in operation. It should be noted that the comparison of time values, timing, etc. detailed in 2.1 is a comparison of design values. Additionally, it should be noted that no matter which of the above-mentioned configurations is adopted, the configuration can be made such that the comparison of time values described later is established.

<Switching time e from credit addition process to game medal payout process>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number, and if the entire number of payouts has not been given, the process switches to the process of paying out game medals. It takes a switching time e for the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to switch from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing.

＜＜Comparison of time＞＞

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a mentioned above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is the time determined by the calculation processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is the time required for the calculation processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. Consists of both. The unit processing time c can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By doing so, it is possible to accurately control the payout including the drive time of the medal payout device H.

Note that, as described above, by adjusting the time required to drive the medal dispensing device H, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a. By doing so, the payout process can be speeded up.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By increasing the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, and it is possible to smoothly switch from the calculation process of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to the drive of the hopper H40. .

Further, the switching time e can also be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, and by ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be started immediately. , it is possible to increase the consumption of game medals, increase the profit of the game parlor, and increase the operating efficiency of the game machine.

In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from a fixed cycle, and the feeling of exhilaration when the game medals start being paid out to the medal tray can be improved. A sense of anticipation can be given to the game.

It is also possible to make the switching time e match the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is made to match the unit processing time a, medals can be given to the player at a fixed cycle, and the process of adding the number of credits and the process of paying out game medals are equivalent medals. By showing this to the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

<<Output of game media added sound>>
The CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub control board S when starting credit addition processing (time t1). Upon receiving this payout start command, the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20.

Further, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub control board S when the payout of game medals ends (time t7). Upon receiving this payout end command, the sub control board S ends the output of the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20. As mentioned above, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and sends all of the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small role to the player. Determine whether it has been granted or not. When the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that all of the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small winning combination have been awarded, it finishes outputting the payout end command to the sub control board S, and outputs the payout end command from the speaker S20. End the output of the game media imparting sound. In addition, if the game media added sound is configured to repeatedly reproduce (output) a sound with a certain period, the game media added sound will be immediately outputted at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. The output may be configured to be terminated, or the output of the game medium imparting sound may be terminated at the timing when the cycle of the gaming medium imparting sound that is being outputted is completed at the timing when the sub control board S side receives the payout end command. It may be configured to do so.

The game medium imparted sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit imparted sound data at least once. The unit-applied sound data is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board S in advance. As shown in FIG. 90, the reproduction time of one unit imparted sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the unit imparted sound data from the RAM, and from the time it receives the payout start command to the payout end command. By repeatedly reproducing the unit imparted sound data a plurality of times until the game medium imparted sound is received, the game medium imparted sound is output from the speaker S20.

<First aspect>
The first mode of the game media imparting sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit imparting sound data is repeatedly reproduced every playback time d from the time when the payout start command is received. By playing in this manner, the game medium imparting sound is output at a constant cycle. As mentioned above, even when switching from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, the game media imparting sound is output at a constant cycle, so the player does not feel strange about the payout, and the credit It is possible to give the player a sense of security by showing the player that both the number addition process and the game medal payout process are of equal value.

<Second aspect>
In addition, the second mode of the game media granting sound shown in FIG. 90 is such that the unit granting sound data is played every playback time d from the time when the payout start command is received, and only for a time f after the credit number adding process is completed. In this mode, the unit-assigned sound data is played back, and then, at time t4, the playback of the unit-assigned sound data is started again at the start of the game medal payout process. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game media imparting sound is output at a timing different from the fixed cycle, so it is possible to give the game a sense of excitement and anticipation as the game medals begin to be paid out to the medal tray. .

Note that while the game medals are being paid out from the medal payout device H, if the game medals in the hopper H40 run out and a hopper error occurs (for example, if it is determined Yes in the process of step 1279), the secondary The control board S stops outputting the game medium imparting sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and the payout becomes possible, the main control board M sends a payout start command to the sub-control board S again, and the sub-control board S starts outputting the game media imparting sound. . Note that this is not limited to this, and even if a hopper error occurs, the game medium imparting sound will continue to be output, but the volume of the game medium imparting sound will be changed to the sound that indicates that a hopper error has occurred. When the hopper error is canceled, the sound output indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated, and the sound provided with the game medium is It may be configured to restore the volume to the original level.

<<<Layout of integrated circuit on board>>
FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M.

The main control board M has a substantially plate-shaped and rectangular printed circuit board MP. A CPU 100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, etc. are mainly mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and a circuit pattern mainly made of conductors is formed on the back side of the printed circuit board MP. The main control board M (printed board MP) consists of two longitudinal ends ML1 and ML2 parallel to each other and along the longitudinal direction, and two short ends MS1 and MS2 parallel to each other and along the transverse direction. It has a rectangular shape.

In this example, the main control board M is installed so as to stand up within the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is installed in an upright position, the long ends ML1 and ML2 are arranged along the horizontal direction, and the short ends MS1 and MS2 are arranged along the vertical direction. The longitudinal end ML1 is located on the upper side, and the longitudinal end ML2 is located on the lower side. Furthermore, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end MS1 is located to the left of the short end MS2, and the short end MS2 is located to the right of the short end MS1.

Hereinafter, the longitudinal end ML1 side will be referred to as the upper side, the longitudinal end ML2 side will be referred to as the lower side, the short end MS1 side will be referred to as the left side, and the short end MS2 side will be referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC 100 has an elongated shape, with a length in the longitudinal direction of CLL and a length in the transverse direction of CSL. The CPUC 100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connections are formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, in the work of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC 100 in an appropriate orientation in order to make the CPUC 100 perform the desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC 100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC 100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the CPUC 100 are formed on the main body of the CPUC 100.

In this example, the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 coincides with (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC 100 so that the first pin of the CPUC 100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC 100 is arranged in alignment with the orientation of the IC, which will be described later. When attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is possible to reduce errors caused by attaching the CPUC 100 in the wrong direction.

Further, generally, various text information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer's name are printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be spaced apart from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100. It is preferable that text information such as a model number and a manufacturer's name be easily visible when the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPU 100 so that the first pin of the CPU 100 is located on the lower left side, the CPU 100 can be arranged in an orientation where the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily recognized.

Note that when the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC100 increase in order counterclockwise from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has an elongated shape, with a length in the longitudinal direction of ILL and a length in the transverse direction of ISL. Similar to the CPUC 100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connections are formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, even in the work of attaching an IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in an appropriate orientation in order to make the IC perform the desired operation. Therefore, the first pin of the IC (1P shown in FIG. 91) is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the IC are formed on the main body of the IC.

In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the IC matches (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP such that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this way, by arranging the ICs so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, making it easier to attach the ICs to the printed circuit board MP. At the time of installation, it is possible to reduce mistakes such as attaching the IC in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, various types of character information (not shown), such as a model number and a manufacturer's name, are generally printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be spaced apart along the longitudinal direction of the IC from the first pin side. It is preferable that text information such as the model number and manufacturer's name of the IC be easily visible while the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As mentioned above, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC can be arranged in such a way that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily seen. You can also do it.

Note that when the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the IC increase in order counterclockwise from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connections with other electronic components are formed. The IC has an elongated shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the transverse direction is RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP to form electrical connections with other electronic components. The main control board M is connected to the sub-control board S etc. via a connector, and is capable of transmitting and receiving various signals.

<Interval between CPUC100 and IC>
As shown by the broken line in FIG. 91, only a resistor is placed inside a predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, and no IC is placed. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL of the CPUC 100 in the lateral direction. Various currents (such as currents that change over time, such as high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC can become a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. In this way, by not placing the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, the IC can be placed at a certain distance (for example, length CSL) from the CPUC 100, and the noise emitted from the IC can be reduced. , the operation of the CPUC 100 can be prevented from being affected.

Further, the predetermined length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC 100 may be at least the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction. Since current flows through the resistor, the resistor can become a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. Therefore, by not placing the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistor can be placed at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, length RLL), and the radiation from the resistor can be prevented. The generated heat can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC 100.

<Relationship between the height of CPUC100, the height of IC, and the height of other parts>
FIG. 92 is a side view showing the heights of various electronic components shown in FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPUC 100 is the highest, the height IHT of the IC is the next highest, and the height RHT of the resistor is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only components whose height is less than the height CHT of the CPUC100 are arranged inside a predetermined range CSR2 (sometimes referred to as a region CSR2) around the CPUC100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

An attachment tool (not shown) is used to attach the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP. The mounting tool is a tool that holds the CPUC 100 at the tip of the mounting tool and mounts it close to the printed circuit board MP. Since the structure is such that the CPUC 100 is held between the tips of the attachment tools, the tips of the attachment tools are arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is being held. For this reason, when installing the CPUC 100, the tip of the mounting tool must also be brought close to the printed circuit board MP, and space for the tip of the mounting tool must be created to prevent the tip of the mounting tool from interfering with other electronic components. It is necessary to secure it.

Therefore, only components whose height is less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 are arranged in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. By doing so, even when the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool will not interfere with other components. The region CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

It should be noted that only components with a height less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 are placed only in the area around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and in the area around the position on the printed circuit board MP where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. The configuration may be such that components having a height CHT or more of the CPUC 100 are attached to the outside, or the configuration may be such that all components attached to the printed circuit board MP are components less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100.

In this way, by arranging only the electronic components that are lower than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC 100, it is possible to secure a space where the tip of the mounting tool can be brought close. Even with the use of attachment tools, the CPUC 100 can be attached to the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

In the above example, the main control board M was explained as an example, but all the boards on which electronic components such as CPUs and ICs are mounted, such as the sub-control board S, the door board D, the drum board K, and the power supply board E, etc. It can be applied to

<<<Composition regarding AT lottery>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that the configuration illustrated in the figure is applicable to all of the configurations described above when configured to include an AT.

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is one in which an AT lottery is possible. Note that the figure does not include multiple gaming states with different probabilities of winning the AT lottery, such as a low probability state and a high probability state, but for example, one gaming state such as the high probability state in this embodiment. The system is configured so that the AT lottery can be executed only in . Further, as a difference from this embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed based on the winning of BB.

If Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets "2" as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type for identifying the probability of winning when executing the AT lottery, which is provided in order to reduce the amount of data required to execute the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device with no setting difference in lottery probability). In the modified example shown in the same figure, the condition devices for which there is no setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (may be all replay combinations or some replay combinations), The bell is pressed in order of pressing, and in this process, it is determined whether or not the condition device with no setting difference has been won. Although there is a setting difference between the lottery probabilities of losing and common bells (there is a setting difference), in this process, it is configured so that it is not determined whether or not the lottery probability of losing or winning the common bell is different. ing. Note that it is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type and the RAM area for storing the winning numbers and performance group numbers described above are different areas. With such a configuration, the area for storing winning numbers and the presentation group, which are areas in which information regarding conditional devices with setting differences in winning probabilities and information regarding conditional devices with no setting differences in winning probabilities are stored separately. An area for storing numbers, an area for storing AT lottery types, which is an area where information regarding conditional devices with a setting difference in winning probability and information regarding a conditional device with no setting difference in winning probability are stored without distinction. can be configured to avoid confusion.

If Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, and stores it in the predetermined RAM area (step 1401-2). The data is temporarily stored (will be overwritten) in the same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area, and the process moves to step 1401-5. Note that even if the answer is No in step 1401-3, the process moves to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right row of the figure will be described in detail. In this modification example, if you win a condition device with no setting difference in a situation where AT lottery can be executed, if you win Watermelon B, the AT lottery type is set to "0", and if you win Cherry, the AT lottery type will be set to "0". If you win Watermelon A, set "1" as the AT drawing type. If you win the replay, set "2" as the AT drawing type. If you win the push order bell, set "2" as the AT drawing type. It is configured to set "2" as the AT lottery type.

Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0", and 18/256 when the AT lottery type is "1". 256, and when the AT lottery type is "2", it is 1/256, and the order is "0 → 1 → 2" in descending order of the probability of winning the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. If Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT counter to a predetermined value (for example, 50) as the initial number of AT games. In this modified example, unlike the present embodiment, the AT state initial number of games is set in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and the AT initial number of games is not set in the AT state start control process. (If you win an additional AT game number, the AT game number may be added.) Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and moves to the next process (the process of step 1430). Note that even in the case of No in step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, the process moves to the next process (processing in step 1430).

In conventional gaming machines, the AT lottery includes a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination, and a lottery process that is executed when a condition device with no setting difference is won (a lottery process that refers to the winning combination). However, by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, The process of step 1401-2 corresponds to this), and the lottery process that is executed when a device with no setting difference is won (corresponds to the process of step 1401-4 in the figure). can be executed in one lottery process (corresponding to the process of step 1401-6 in the figure).

Although the configuration of a reel-type gaming machine has been illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, the above-mentioned configuration can be applied to various gaming machines such as a pachinko gaming machine, a junk ball gaming machine, an arranged ball, a gaming machine, and a casino machine. can.

Of the above-mentioned configurations, configurations related to settings such as setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, setting key switch, setting/reset button, etc. (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) also apply to pachinko gaming machines that have set values. Applicable.

<<<Configuration related to push order navigation applicable to gaming machine according to this example>>>
The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. Here, the execution mode of the push order navigation applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configuration detailed below is applicable to all embodiments.

Regarding the push order navigation in this example, the following configuration is referred to as the push order navigation.
(1) The display of the operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player on the press order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M is called press order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "=3", it is possible to instruct the pressing order of "middle→left→right". Further, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction or an instruction display, and a game in which the push order navigation is executed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game.
(2) Displaying on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S (an image suggesting an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player) is referred to as a push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "123", it is possible to instruct (suggest) the pressing order of "left→middle→right".
(3) Outputting a sound from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S that suggests an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by outputting "Left" when operating the start lever, it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.
(4) The fact that the reel window frame lamp D310 controlled by the sub-control board S lights up (blinks) to suggest an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player is called push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and left stop button lights up, indicating (suggesting) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. It is possible.
(5) The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub control board S Lighting (flashing) to indicate an advantageous stop button operation mode is called push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel lights up, thereby making it possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.

In the following, a push order navigation will be displayed for a game in which a push order combination (a role in which the number of coins paid out or the transition mode of the RT state may differ depending on the push order, such as a push order bell, a push order replay role, etc.) is determined as a winning combination. The timing at which the button starts and the timing at which the push order navigation ends will be explained. By determining the push order combination as the winning combination in the AT state, it is possible to execute a push order navigation that informs the player of the most advantageous stop button operation mode (reel stop order and stop button operation timing). It is configured like this.

<<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
<Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait>
First, when there is no wait, in other words, when the minimum game time has elapsed (the timer value of the minimum game interval timer M70 is 0), the push order when the start lever is operated to play the game. The execution mode of navigation will be explained below.

<Configuration 1>
First, the configuration of FIG. 94 will be explained. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed if the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start rotating (executed in step 1260 in FIG. 18). In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, immediately after executing the drum rotation process, "=3" is displayed as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the push order display device D270,
"=1": Specifies the pressing order of "Left → Middle → Right""=2": Specifies the pressing order of "Left → Right → Middle""=3": Specifies the pressing order of "Middle → Left → Right" Instruction "=4": Instructs the pressing order of "middle → right → left""=5": Instructs the pressing order of "right → left → middle""=6": Instructs the pressing order of "right → middle → left" The instructions are configured as shown.

Note that the display mode when executing the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is not limited to the display mode described above. For example, the right digit (lower digit) is displayed without displaying "=". Numbers may be displayed only on the right side digits (lower digits), or a display mode other than numbers corresponding to the stop button (or reels) may be displayed only on the right digits (lower digits). In addition, the digits on the right (lower digits) are displayed corresponding to the stop button (or reel) to be operated next time, and the digits on the left (higher digits) are configured to display the order of pressing for the entire game. Good too. In such a configuration, the digits on the right (lower digits) can change the display mode each time the stop button is operated, while the digits on the left (upper digits) remain the same regardless of the stop button operation. This is the display mode.

After "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40,
"123": Instructs the pressing order of "Left → Middle → Right""132": Instructs the pressing order of "Left → Right → Middle""213": Instructs the pressing order of "Middle → Left → Right""312" ”: Instructs the pressing order of “Middle → Right → Left” “231”: Instructs the pressing order of “Right → Left → Middle” “321”: Configures the pressing order of “Right → Middle → Left” as instructed has been done.

Note that the display mode when executing the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to the above-mentioned display mode, and may be a display mode other than arithmetic numerals, such as Chinese numerals. , images of characters other than numbers, images of symbols, etc. may be used. In addition to the display mode that corresponds to all stop buttons, for example, "1-
-" (push order navigation that notifies that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop) may be executed.

Note that "display" may mean that all elements to be displayed have completed displaying, or may mean that the elements to be displayed have started displaying. For example, displaying "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" has been displayed on the effect display device S40, or the display of "123" has started on the effect display device S40 ( This may also mean that an effect has occurred at the start of display, etc.). Similarly, "end of display" may mean that all elements whose display should end are no longer displayed, or may mean that a display transition has started to make the elements whose display should end no longer displayed. For example, ending the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" is no longer displayed on the effect display device S40, or it may mean that the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 ends. This may also mean that the section has started to be erased (for example, an effect at the end of display has occurred). Similarly, "clearing the display" may mean that all elements that should be cleared are no longer displayed, or it may be that a display transition has been started to make the elements that should be cleared no longer displayed. . For example, erasing the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" is no longer displayed on the effect display device S40, or may mean that the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 is erased. This may also mean that the section has started to be erased (for example, an effect when displaying is erased has occurred). Similarly, erasing the display of "1" on the effect display device S40 means that the effect display device It may be that "1" is no longer displayed in S40, or it may be that a part of the display of "1" has started to be erased on the effect display device S40 (for example, an effect when the display is erased has occurred).

After the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, the operation of the stop button becomes valid. Note that after the reel starts rotating, the reel drive state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state, and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. In the instruction game, the player operates the stop button after confirming the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 or the effect display device S40, so as shown in the figure, the stop button is not activated. By displaying the push order navigation in front of the player, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the stop button before confirming the push order (mistaking the push order).

Further, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is displayed (display starts) earlier than the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 will be explained. When "Win-A3" is determined as a winning combination, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information as a control command to the sub-control board as a timer interrupt process in step 1622. Send to S side. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command process of step 2250 based on the command related to winning/re-play winning information received from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M (as the command process, the CPUSC performs the push order navigation such as step 2360). (Executes push order navigation display processing for display).

Here, the process for displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side will be described in detail. First, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command related to winning/re-play winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the CPUSC of the sub-main board (sub-control board S) saves command data, performs command analysis processing, The process of sequentially transmitting commands related to the display mode of the push-order navigation from the performance control board (board inside the sub-control board S) is performed, and the display of the push-order navigation is performed after receiving commands related to winning/replay winning information. It takes about 16 ms to send the command according to the mode. In addition, the production control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. As an example, the command sent by the main control board M to the sub-control board S is a command related to winning/replay winning information, but this is just an example, and other commands such as commands related to production group numbers may also be used. It may be designed as appropriate depending on the execution timing of the desired effect.

In addition, when displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side, the push order display device D270 is configured to light up dynamically, so the timer interrupt processing If the period is 2 ms, the five 7-segment LED units are sequentially lit for each timer interrupt process, so it takes a maximum of about 10 ms to complete the lighting. With this configuration, the push order navigation is not displayed after the trigger for displaying the push order navigation (for example, operation of the start lever) occurs on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side. The timing to display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side is greater than the time until completion (for example, the reception of commands related to winning/replay winning information from the main control board M side) ) occurs until the display of the push order navigation is completed takes a longer time.

Here, a detailed explanation will be given using the process executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M as a period during which the display of the push order navigation in this example can be started. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPU 100 of the main control board M controls peripheral devices and the like to advance the game. Note that for the processing executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M in this example, only specific steps will be explained to simplify the explanation, but it should be noted that this is not limited to this. For example, if the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the start lever D50 has been operated in the determination process in step 1251, it executes a reel rotation start preparation process in step 1550. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing in step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether the reel acceleration state start timing in step 6106 has been reached. Then, in steps 6108 and 6110, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state, and the reel starts rotating. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 corresponds to a wait period until the start of reel rotation, for example, from the game start timing (reel rotation start timing) according to the minimum game interval timer M70 as a predetermined condition. This is a period that occurs because the time (in this example, 4.1 seconds) that should be guaranteed until the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing) is not fulfilled, and is also sometimes referred to as the minimum gaming time. Next, in step 6114, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the end timing of the reel acceleration state in step 6114 has been reached. Then, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state in steps 6116 and 6118, performs processing to maintain the reel constant speed state, and then enables the operation of the stop button. The process to In this example, any timing within the period in which the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the above processing, in other words, any timing from when the start lever operation is executed until the stop button operation becomes effective. The configuration may be such that the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) at the timing of .

In this way, the period from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated until the operation of the stop button becomes effective has been explained according to the process executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M. According to the process executed by the CPU 100, start lever operation → minimum gaming time elapse → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is valid (also referred to as reel stop button operation is valid). We will stipulate the period separately. For example, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is performed at the timing immediately after the reel rotation start process, and the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is performed during the reel acceleration state. There is.

In addition, in FIG. 94, the case where the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed in the reel acceleration state is illustrated, but the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S side, and then the sub-control board This means that S executes the drawing process and the push order navigation is displayed during the reel acceleration state, and the configuration for displaying the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side is configured as follows. Good too.
(1) Start lever operation → minimum gaming time elapses → main control board M executes reel rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → reel drive state is updated to acceleration state → main control board M presses order display device D270 Display the push order navigation with dynamic lighting → Main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to sub control board S → Sub control board S side receives commands related to winning/replay winning information → Triggered by the command, the sub-control board S side executes the drawing process and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state (2) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → The main control board M executes the reel rotation start processing and starts the reel rotation → the reel drive state is updated to the accelerated state → the main control board M displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 → main control The board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives a command related to winning/replay winning information → The main control board M is specified to the sub control board S side Send the command → The sub-control board S side receives the predetermined command → Triggered by the predetermined command, the sub-control board S side executes the drawing process and displays the push order navigation on the production display device S40 → The reel drive state Update to constant speed state (3) Start lever operation → Minimum gaming time elapses → Main control board M executes reel rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → Reel drive state is updated to acceleration state → Main control board M The push order navigation is displayed dynamically on the push order display device D270 → The main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S → The sub control board S side sends the winning/replay winning information Receives a command related to → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Triggered by the command, the sub-control board S executes drawing processing and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (4) Start lever operation → Minimum Game time elapses → Main control board M executes reel rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → Reel drive state is updated to accelerated state → Main control board M dynamically lights up the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 Display → Main control board M sends commands related to winning/re-play winning information to sub-control board S → Sub-control board S receives commands related to winning/re-play winning information → Main control board M sends sub-control Send a predetermined command to the board S side → Sub control board S side receives the predetermined command → Update the reel drive state to constant speed state → Triggered by the predetermined command, the sub control board S side executes drawing processing and produces The push order navigation may be displayed on the display device S40 and configured as described above. That is, the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side is determined by designing the time value from when the sub-control board S receives a predetermined command from the main control board M until it executes the drawing process. Alternatively, the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side may be determined by designing the timing at which the main control board M side sends a predetermined command to the sub-control board S side.

<Configuration 2>
Next, the configuration of FIG. 95 will be explained. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed if the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start spinning. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, the operation of the stop button becomes valid, a command is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and "213" is displayed as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. After "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, "=3" is displayed in dynamic lighting as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 95, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is performed at the timing after the reel rotation start process is executed, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is performed at the timing immediately before the operation of the reel stop button becomes effective. executed.

<Effect 1>
By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can be set during a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum play time elapsed → reel For example, by determining the period until the start of rotation → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → operation of the stop button becomes valid, press order navigation is started on both the press order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. To provide a user-friendly game machine that can surely prevent a situation in which a player cannot recognize a push order navigation no matter which display device he or she looks at due to a delay in the timing of the game, and does not cause any disadvantage to the player. Can be done.

<Effect 2>
Further, by configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, and the player is able to view the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, which reduces the burden of playing the game. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can reduce costs.

<Configuration 3>
In the AT state, when a push order combination (press order bell, push order replay combination, etc.) is determined as a winning combination, not only the effect display device S40 but also the effect display device S40 can be used as a presentation means for notifying the press order, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98, the pressing order is notified by a lamp (hereinafter referred to as a reel window frame lamp D310) provided on the middle panel (middle decorative panel) or by audio output from the speaker S20. Other configurations are also possible. In configuration 3, when an instruction game is executed, push order navigation can be executed using the reel window frame lamp D310. The reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (near the reels), and is composed of, for example, an LED like the start lamp D180. The lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound output from the speaker S20, etc. are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S similarly to the effect display device S40. In other words, when executing the push order navigation using these presentation means, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the steps based on the command received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, as in the case of the presentation display device S40. By executing command processing (herein referred to as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and audio output processing) in steps 2108 and 2250, it becomes possible to execute push order navigation. Note that the reel window frame lamp D310 is preferably provided at a position where the player can easily see the reel, so for example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is placed above or below the reel window D160 (from the player's perspective, the reel is visible). It is preferable to provide a space above or below the window D160 so as to correspond to each reel.

Configuration 3 will be explained using FIG. 97. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed if the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start spinning. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, immediately after executing the drum rotation start process, "=3" is dynamically displayed (starts to be displayed) as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. After "=3" is displayed as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) lights up (starts lighting) as a push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310. . Thereafter, "213" is displayed (display starts) as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 97, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device", and the display of the push order navigation starts when the reel window frame lamp D310 is lit. The timing is later than that of the push order display device D270 and earlier than that of the effect display device S40.

Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, saving the command data and performing command analysis processing sequentially, press the navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the lamp control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes about 16 ms from receiving a command related to winning/replay winning information to sending a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and sending a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation. Further, the production control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives the command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, immediately executes the lighting process (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process) Therefore, the main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and upon receiving the command, the sub-control board S side controls the production display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310. When executing the push order navigation, the reel window frame lamp D310 is configured to display the push order navigation (lit display) before the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation. Note that the commands transmitted from the main control board M are not limited to commands related to winning/replay winning information, but may also be commands related to performance group numbers, etc.

In this way, by configuring the display of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 (lit display) before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, simple notification can be provided to the player. This can be executed more quickly, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the player presses the button in the wrong order).

Note that the order in which the push order navigation is displayed may be configured to be "press order display device→effect display device→reel window frame lamp". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may be configured to send a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board after the sub main board sends a command related to the push order navigation to the production control board. A command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310. and may be different commands.

As mentioned above, we have explained the case where the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) is "Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed ( (display start) is not limited to this order. For example, as a modification of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), "reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device", "effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp", It may be configured such that "reel window frame lamp→effect display device→press order display device" or "effect display device→reel window frame lamp→press order display device". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board sends a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board and the effect control board, the main control board M dynamically displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (display start) by lighting, or a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310. The command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of may be a different command. In this way, depending on the timing when the sub-main board sends commands and the timing when the main control board M displays (starts displaying) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting,
(1) Execute the press order navigation using dynamic lighting on the press order display device D270 first (2) Execute the press order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310 first (3) Press order using the effect display device S40 It is possible to change the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display start), such as executing the navigation first.

<Effect>
In this way, in a situation where the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state). →By setting the period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid), for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to the lighting of the lamp ( In this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310) can be used to create a user-friendly gaming machine in which the player is unlikely to be unable to recognize the push order navigation (advantageous operation mode of the stop button). can be provided.

<Configuration 4>
Next, as configuration 4, a configuration will be described in which the push order navigation is notified by audio output from the speaker S20. Configuration 4 is configured to notify the pressing order by voice in the instruction game. For example, lines such as "It's on the left,""It's in the middle," and "It's on the right" are output as voices from the speaker, and the corresponding stop is announced. Executes push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be operated (stop button to be operated).

Configuration 4 will be explained using FIG. 98. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed if the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start spinning. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, immediately after executing the drum rotation start process, "=3" is dynamically displayed (starts to be displayed) as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. After "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "It's middle" is displayed as the push order navigation that outputs the sound from the speaker S20 (the first stop operation is to operate the middle stop button). A voice indicating that the Thereafter, "213" is displayed (display starts) as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "Push order display device → audio → effect display device", and the timing at which notification of the push order navigation by audio output starts is at the reel window frame. Similar to the lamp D310, the timing is later than that of the push order display device D270 and earlier than that of the effect display device S40.

Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, saving the command data and performing command analysis processing sequentially, press the navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the output mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the voice control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes approximately 16 ms from receiving a command related to winning/replay winning information to transmitting a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and sending a command related to the output mode of the push order navigation. In addition, the production control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the voice control board receives the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the command content, immediately executes the voice output process (the voice output process is executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). (possible), the main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S, upon receiving the command, uses the production display device S40 and the speaker S20. When executing the push order navigation, the speaker S20 is configured to output (audio output) the push order navigation before the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation. Note that the commands transmitted from the main control board M are not limited to commands related to winning/replay winning information, but may also be commands related to performance group numbers, etc.

In this way, by configuring the speaker S20 to output the push order navigation (audio output) before the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation, simple notification to the player can be performed more quickly. In addition, the player can recognize the pressing order by voice without looking at the effect display device S40, and can avoid situations where the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (pressing the button in the wrong order). It is possible to prevent this from happening.

As mentioned above, we explained the case where the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) is "Push order display device → audio → effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) The order in which they are performed is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts), it may be configured such that it is "push order display device→effect display device→audio". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board sends a command related to push-order navigation to the production control board, the sub-main board may be configured to send a command related to push-order navigation to the voice control board. Yes, the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the audio from the speaker S20. The command may be a different command.

Furthermore, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) is "Voice → Press order display device → Production display device", "Voice → Production display device → Press order display device", "Production display device → Voice → Press It is also possible to configure the display device as follows: "order display device", "effect display device→push order display device→sound", etc. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board sends a command related to the push order navigation to the audio control board and the production control board, the main control board M displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (display start) with dynamic lighting, or the push order in the command from the main control board M side and the audio from the speaker S20 that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. The command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the navigation may be a different command. In this way, depending on the timing when the sub-main board sends the command and the timing when the main control board M displays (starts displaying) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting,
(1) Execute the press order navigation using dynamic lighting on the press order display device D270 first (2) Execute the press order navigation using audio from the speaker S20 first (3) Press order using the effect display device S40 It is possible to change the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display start), such as executing the navigation first.

<Effect>
In this way, in a situation where the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start timing of the voice push order navigation can be changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button). For example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be performed by voice (in this example, from the speaker S20). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is unlikely that a player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation.

<<Execution mode of push order navigation when there is a wait>>
First, if there is a wait, in other words, the minimum game time has not elapsed (the timer value of the minimum game interval timer M70 is greater than 0), operate the start lever, and then play the game. The manner in which the press order navigation is executed will be described below.

<Configuration 1>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 99 will be explained. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

First, in a situation where the minimum gaming time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 in the timer interrupt process, and the push order display device D270 displays "=". Execute the process of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation of "3" with dynamic lighting. Thereafter, during the period before the minimum game time has elapsed, "213" is displayed (display starts) as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 99, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

<Configuration 2>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 100 will be explained. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in a timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting displaying) "213" as a press order navigation on the production display device S40 (the above-mentioned drawing process). After that, the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the reels start rotating by executing the reel rotation start process, and the main control board M controls the reels until the reel drive state becomes a constant speed state and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Before (immediately before the operation of the stop button becomes effective), a process is executed to dynamically display (start displaying) "=3" as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. In addition, here, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting displaying) "213" as a push order navigation on the performance display device S40 based on receiving the command related to the performance group number. The command that triggers the process of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, but may be executed at the timing of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The command to be transmitted from the main control board M as a trigger may be determined accordingly.

<Configuration 3>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 101 will be explained. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

In a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting displaying) "213" as a press order navigation on the production display device S40 (the above-mentioned drawing process). After that, the main control board M dynamically displays "=3" as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270 at the timing when the minimum gaming time has elapsed and the reels start rotating by executing the reel rotation start process. Executes the process of displaying (starting display) when lit. In FIG. 101, if the start lever is operated in a situation where it takes more than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is the time value for 5 timer interrupt processing) until the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device The push order navigation in S40 is displayed before the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In addition, if the start lever is operated in a situation where less than a predetermined time (for example, 10ms, which is the time value for 5 timer interrupt processing) remains until the minimum gaming time elapses, or if the minimum gaming time If the start lever is operated in a situation where the The trigger for displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side (for example, the main control board M Since the configuration is such that the time from the reception of commands related to winning/replay winning information from the side until the display of the push order navigation is completed is longer, the push order display device D270 The push order navigation is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

As mentioned above, an example of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (start of display) on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 has been explained, but when the push order navigation is displayed (start of display). This is not the only timing. For example, as a modified example of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) in FIG. The push order navigation is displayed (display starts) at the same time on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 during the period before the minimum game time elapses during which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts). Alternatively, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum playing time has elapsed, and after the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order navigation is displayed (displayed) on the effect display device S40. Furthermore, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the effect display device S40 during the period before the minimum playing time has elapsed, and after the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270. The display (start of display) of the push order navigation may be configured to be displayed (start of display) at different timings, such as before and after the minimum gaming time has elapsed.

<Effect>
In this way, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set during a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration It is determined by the state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid). With this configuration, it is possible to make the timing for displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation different between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. As an effect of differentiating the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40,
(1) When the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 The start lever is operated, and the main control board M displays the winning combination (here, the push order This is because it is possible to display (start displaying) the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 by timer interrupt processing (for example, about 2 ms) immediately after the production group number is determined based on the determination of the production group number based on the determination of the performance group number (to play the role of Bell). , it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly informs the player of information related to the push order navigation.
(2) When the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit like the effect display device S40, Information related to the current gaming status or winning combination is often configured to be suggested on the effect display device S40, so the player can proceed with the game while visually checking the effect display device S40. I'm going to go. By configuring the effect display device S40, which has a larger size (display area) than the push order display device D270 and is easier for the player to see, to immediately notify the player of information related to the push order navigation, the effect display Even if the push order navigation is newly executed while viewing the device S40, the push order navigation can be checked while viewing the effect display device S40, so each time the push order navigation is displayed, other It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can reduce the burden of playing games on players without forcing them to look at a display device.
Furthermore, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed and the player cannot recognize the push order navigation no matter which display device he or she looks at. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players.

Furthermore, by making the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, it is possible to avoid viewing the two display devices at the same time. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the playing burden on the player, in which the player can visually check the push order navigation on an individual display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. .

<Configuration 4>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 102 will be explained. Note that configuration 4 includes a reel window frame lamp D310. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum gaming time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S lights up (starts lighting) the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) as a push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310. Execute the processing to be performed. Thereafter, a process is executed to display (start displaying) "213" as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310 is a timing earlier than that of the effect display device S40. This is because, as described above, when the sub control board S receives a command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting process in the reel window frame lamp D310 is faster than the push order navigation. This is because it can be executed faster than the process of drawing on the effect display device S40. After that, the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the reels start rotating by executing the reel rotation start process, and then, before the stop button operation becomes effective, the press order display device D270 displays the press order navigation as " =3" by dynamic lighting (display start). In FIG. 102, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "reel window frame lamp → production display device → push order display device", and the display of the push order navigation starts when the reel window frame lamp D310 is lit. The timing is earlier than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Note that even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 102, if the start lever is operated just before the end of the period before the minimum gaming time has elapsed (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum gaming time has elapsed) (The main control board M has sent a command related to the production group number to the sub-control board S side), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device" or There is a case where it becomes "reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device". Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it takes about 32 ms to display "213" as the push order navigation (before the drawing process is executed). For example, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side) when the minimum gaming time is about 10ms remaining, the push order display The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display starts) after the push order navigation is displayed by D270 or the reel window frame lamp D310.

Also, in the reel window frame lamp D310, the start lever is operated (for example, when the main control board M is If a command related to the production group number is sent to the sub-control board S side, it takes time for the sub-control board S side to receive the command related to the production group number from the main control board M side, so the push button The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp may be displayed (display starts) after the push order navigation is displayed by the order display device D270.
As mentioned above, the timing at which the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is as follows: start lever operation → minimum playing time elapse → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state →As long as the operation of the stop button remains valid, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be determined as appropriate.

<Effect>
In this way, by configuring the display of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 (lit display) before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, simple notification can be provided to the player. This can be executed more quickly, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the player presses the button in the wrong order).

Furthermore, even in gaming machines that are not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, the push order navigation can be executed by lighting a lamp (in this example, lighting the reel window frame lamp D310). It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine in which it is unlikely that a player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation.

<Configuration 5>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 103 will be explained. In addition, in configuration 5, the push order navigation is executed by the voice output from the speaker S20 in the instruction game. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in timer interrupt processing during a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound from the speaker S20 saying "It's in the middle!" (the first stop operation is to press the middle stop button). Executes the process of outputting a voice (sound suggesting an operation). Thereafter, a process is executed to display (start displaying) "213" as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation using audio from the speaker S20 is started is a timing earlier than the timing at which the presentation display device S40 starts. This is because when the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the audio output process from the speaker S20 is the process of drawing the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. This is because it is executed faster. After that, after the minimum playing time has elapsed, the reels start rotating and the stop button operation becomes effective, and the main control board M Previously, a process is executed to dynamically display (start displaying) "=3" as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "audio → effect display device → push order display device", and the timing at which notification of the push order navigation by audio output starts is determined by the push order display. The timing is earlier than the device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Note that even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 103, if the start lever is operated just before the end of the period before the minimum gaming time has elapsed (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum gaming time has elapsed) If the main control board M has sent a command related to the production group number to the sub-control board S side, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "Push order display device → audio → production display device" or "audio → production display device". There is a case where it becomes "Press order display device → Effect display device". Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it takes about 32 ms to display "213" as the push order navigation (before the drawing process is executed). For example, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side) when the minimum gaming time is about 10ms remaining, the push order display The push order navigation may be displayed (started to be displayed) by the effect display device S40 after the push order navigation is displayed by D270 or the push order navigation is notified by voice.

Also, in the speaker S20, the start lever is operated just before the end of the period before the minimum gaming time has elapsed (for example, about 10ms remaining until the minimum gaming time elapses) (the main control board M is connected to the sub-control board (a command related to the effect group number is sent to the S side), it takes time for the sub control board S side to receive the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side, so the push order display device The push order navigation may be announced by voice from the speaker S20 after the push order navigation is displayed by D270.

As mentioned above, the timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the push order display device D270 is as follows: start lever operation → period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed → start of reel rotation → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → As long as the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be determined as appropriate.

<Effect>
In this way, when the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum playing time has not elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum gaming time elapsed → reel rotation start → For example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, The push order navigation can be executed in a simple notification mode of audio (in this example, the audio output from the speaker S20), and in a situation where the player is not looking at the effect display device S40 while focusing on the reels or the stop button. Even if the push-order navigation is executed, the player can recognize the push-order navigation by voice while keeping their eyes on the reels or the stop button. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine in which such problems are unlikely to occur.

Examples of the timing of displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the timing of displaying the push order navigation on the production display device S40 have been explained with respect to the case where there is a wait and the case where there is no wait, respectively. The timing at which the push order navigation is displayed on each display device is not limited to these. If the period is from the start of operation of the start lever D50 mentioned above, start lever operation → minimum playing time has elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is valid, press the order as appropriate. You can decide when to display the navigation. Furthermore, the display timing of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is preferably set to be narrower than the above-mentioned period. This is because it takes a predetermined time (for example, 32 ms or more) after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a predetermined command from the CPUC100 of the main control board M until the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. It is. Furthermore, the greater the number of drawing frames displayed on the effect display device S40, the more time will be required. The winning combination is determined after the start lever D50 is operated, but considering the time required from the time the winning combination is determined until the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 as described above, The timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the performance display device S40 is, for example, a period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed (if there is a wait) → start of reel rotation (if there is no wait) → reel acceleration. It is preferable to define the period as follows: state→reel constant speed state→period until operation of the stop button becomes effective. By determining in this way, the period until the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the push order display device D270 and the period until the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the effect display device S40 can be made different. Can be done. It is possible to appropriately determine the timing to start displaying the push order navigation on each display device within these periods.

For example, during the period from start lever operation → minimum playing time elapse → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation, press order display device D270, effect display device S40, audio, reel An example of the order in which the push order navigation on the window frame lamp D310 is notified is as follows:
(1) Press order display device → Effect display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (2) Press order display device → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (3) Press order display device → Audio → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Press order display device → audio → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (5) press order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → audio (6) press order display device → reel window Frame lamp → Audio → Production display device (7) Production display device → Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (8) Production display device → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (9) Production display device →Audio→Press order display device→Reel window frame lamp (10) Effect display device→Audio→Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device (11) Effect display device→Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device→Audio (12) ) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Press order display device (13) Audio → Press order display device → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp (14) Audio → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Production Display device (15) Audio → Production display device → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Audio → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device (17) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Press order Display device → Production display device (18) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Press order display device (19) Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Production display device → Audio (20) Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → audio → production display device (21) reel window frame lamp → production display device → press order display device → audio (22) reel window frame lamp → production display device → audio → press order display device (23) reel Window frame lamp → sound → push order display device → effect display device (24) reel window frame lamp → sound → effect display device → like push order display device, start lever operation → minimum playing time elapse → reel rotation start → It is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) during the period from reel acceleration state to reel constant speed state to activation of the stop button.

In addition, as one of the production means controlled by the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is controlled by the sub-control board S. It is also possible to add a push order navigation that lights up (blinks) to suggest a stop button operation mode advantageous to the player using the stop button lamp S60. When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in a timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S lights up (or blinks) a stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button that should perform the first stop operation. Execute the process to do so. An example of the order in which the press order navigation is displayed (display starts) with the addition of the press order navigation using the stop button D40 is as follows:
(25) Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) → Production display device (26) Press order display device → Audio → Stop button lamp (first stop button) Only the button lights up (flashing)) → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (27) Press order display device → Audio → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) and reel window frame lamp almost simultaneously → Production Although it is possible to configure it like a display device, the order here is an example and is not limited to this. For example, in (27) above, the reel window frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 are turned on (flashing) at the same timing, but it is also possible to configure the system so that the audio from the speaker S20 is output at the same time. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing (push order display device D270) related to the display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270) or the sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in any manner depending on the transmission timing of the command related to notification of the push order navigation of the window frame lamp D310, the sound from the speaker S20, and the stop button D40. In addition, when performing press order navigation using the stop button lamp S60, instead of lighting (blinking) the stop button lamps corresponding to all reels, only the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel for which the relevant stop operation is to be performed is turned on. It is preferable to control the display so that it lights up (blinks). For example, when executing the press order navigation of "213": "Middle → Left → Right" by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button D42 (lit) → operating the middle stop button D42 → middle stop Stop button lamp corresponding to button D42 (unlit) → Stop button lamp corresponding to left stop button D41 (lit) → Operate left stop button D41 → Stop button lamp corresponding to left stop button D41 (unlit) → Right stop button Stop button lamp corresponding to D43 (lit) → Operate right stop button D43 → Stop button lamp corresponding to right stop button D43 (unlit) Based on the progress of the game, the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel lights up. (flashing), configured to turn off.

In addition, although the case where the sub control board S controls the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is described above, Control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) may be configured to be executed by the main control board M. Hereinafter, the start timing of the push order navigation by controlling the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) on the main control board M will be explained.

When controlling the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M, a timer interrupt occurs after the start lever is operated and the production group number is determined based on the winning combination (in this case, the pressing order bell combination). Execute the process of lighting (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60 by processing (for example, in the first cycle from the determination of the production group number, it takes about 2 ms to process the lighting of the stop button lamp S60) It becomes possible to do so. With this configuration, an example of the order in which the press order navigation is displayed (display starts) in addition to the press order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 is described as follows.
(28) Press order display device → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (29) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) → Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (30) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) and press order display device almost simultaneously → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production Although it is possible to configure it like a display device, the order here is an example and is not limited to this. For example, in (28) to (30) above, the push order navigation based on the stop button lamp S60 controlled by the main control board M side is performed by the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side, and the sound from the speaker S20. , is started before the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310, but by changing the timing of executing the timer interrupt process for lighting (blinking) the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M side, After starting the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side (for example, the effect display device S40, the sound from the speaker, the reel window frame lamp D310), the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 may be started. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing related to the display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270, stop button lamp S60), or the execution timing of the timer interrupt process related to the display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270, stop button lamp S60) The order in which the press order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in any manner depending on the transmission timing of the command related to notification of the press order navigation (lamp D310, audio from the speaker S20).

<<Configuration related to ending display of push order navigation>>
Next, the end timing of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 will be explained. The timing at which the push-order navigation ends can be designed with some degree of freedom, as well as the timing at which the push-order navigation starts, depending on the period during which the player ends the game. An example of the period during which the player ends the game is the timing when the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated and all reels are completely stopped and a prize is won, the payout of game medals based on the winning is completed and the game ends.

The period for ending the display of the push order navigation is the period of "3rd stop button operation (pressed) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → payout based on winning completed" starting from the operation timing of the 3rd stop button. It is possible to specify any timing. In this example, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is different for each push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination). For example, the timing at which the push order display device D270 finishes displaying the push order navigation differs depending on whether the determined winning combination is a push order bell or a push order replaying combination.

In configurations 1 to 5 described below, in order to explain the end timing of the push order navigation, the first stop button and the second stop button are already pressed and the effect display device is It should be noted that the push order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button in S40 has also been completed.

<Configuration 1>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 104 will be explained. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, the display of the press order navigation on the press order display device D270 ends, and a press order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display starts). be done. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Here, the push order navigation disappearing effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display related to the end when the display of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device ends. In the figure, in a situation where "3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the production display device S40, the right stop button is operated and the sensor that detects the operation of the right stop button is turned on from off. is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, a command related to the detection is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command related to the detection. By executing the process of erasing the display of "3", a press order navigation disappearing effect that disappears after the display of "3" is transparent will be displayed.

Thereafter, in a situation where the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 has ended, the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). Here, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 are both terminated by "pressing the third stop button" (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off). However, in FIG. 104, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is earlier than the push order navigation of the effect display device S40. The display will be erased completely. This is the same as the start of the push order navigation, and even if the end timing of the push order navigation is set to "when the third stop button is pressed", the CPUSC of the sub control board S is unable to draw multiple frames. This can be said to be because the completion of the press order navigation of the effect display device S40 is delayed due to the processing of displaying the .

To explain in detail how the push order navigation ends, in the push order display device D270, the push order display device D270 turns on → lights out → lights out completes, and the push order navigation ends, and in the effect display device S40, The press order navigation ends by displaying the order navigation → starting displaying the press order navigation disappearing effect → ending displaying the press order navigation disappearing effect (deletion completion). In this example, the timing when the push order display device D270 starts turning off is referred to as the push order display device turning off, and the start of displaying the push order navigation disappearing effect is referred to as the display (display start) of the push order navigation disappearing effect. Note that the turning off of the push order display device may be replaced with the timing when the push order display device D270 completes turning off, and the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect may be replaced with the timing when the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends. The timing between turning off the push order display device and displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation disappearing effect may be as follows: the push order display device turns off → the press order navigation disappearing effect is displayed (display starts), or the press order disappearing effect is displayed. (Display start)→The push order display device may be turned off, or the push order display device may be turned off and the push order navigation disappearing effect displayed (display start) at the same time.

In addition, although the configuration in which the display of the push order navigation ends when the third stop button is operated has been described above, the timing when the third stop button is pressed refers to the timing when the third stop button is pressed (the operation of the third stop button is detected). This is the timing at which the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for the 3rd stop button is pressed from OFF to ON. The state in which the third stop button is released after the button is pressed (after detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side) , the timing at which the switch from on to off is detected (hereinafter also referred to as "when the third stop button is not pressed"), and the push order navigation ends for each of these states. It is also possible to configure the timing to be specified. For example, in the order of the timing when the push order navigation ends in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, in more detail,
(If the push order navigation does not end at the same time)
(1) By interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → press order display device turns off → sub control from the main control board M side Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → Sub-control board S side receives the command → Displays the press order navigation disappearing effect (starts displaying)
(2) Interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → press order display device turns off → interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has turned on from off → sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub Control board S side receives the command → Display of push order navigation disappearing effect (start of display)
(3) By interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → press order display device turns off → sub control from the main control board M side Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → Sub-control board S side receives the command → Displays the press order navigation disappearing effect (starts displaying)
(4) The interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the third stop button is transferred from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Sends a command related to detection of the stop button → Sub-control board S side receives the command → Displays press order disappearance effect (display start) → Push order display device turns off (5) The main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has changed from off to on → Sends a command related to the detection of the 3rd stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → Sub control board S side receives the command → Display of press order extinction effect (display start) → Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off by interrupt processing on the main control board M side → Push order display device lights out (6) Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off by interrupt processing on the main control board M side → From the main control board M side to the sub control board Sends the command related to the detection of the third stop button to the S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Displays the push order disappearing effect (display starts) → Turns off the push order display device (the push order navigation ends at the same time) case)
(7) The interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the third stop button is transferred from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Sends a command related to detection of the stop button → Sub-control board S side receives the command → Press-order disappearing effect is displayed (display starts) and the press-order display device turns off (8) By interrupt processing on the main control board M side, Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → sub control board It is possible for the S side to receive the command and specify that the press order display device is turned off at the same time as the press order disappearing effect is displayed (display start).

Additionally, the display mode of the push order navigation when the first stop button is pressed and the second stop button is pressed, for example, instead of when the third stop button is pressed, will be supplementarily explained. First, in the push order display device D270, after the lighting starts, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is changed from off to on (or from on to off) by interrupt processing on the main control board M side. The light will remain on until it detects that something has happened and turns off the light. On the other hand, in the effect display device S40, for example, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is changed from off to on (or from on to off) by pressing the first stop button (by interrupt processing on the main control board M side). Sends a command related to the detection of the first stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → The press order corresponding to the first stop button disappears Start changing the display mode of the effect display (display start) and the push order navigation (for example, display of "2") corresponding to the reel that should be stopped next (hereinafter referred to as "display mode of the second reel push order navigation") (also referred to as "change initiation"). The order in which these are executed is
(9) Display of the press order extinction effect corresponding to the first stop button (display start) → Start changing the display mode of the second reel press order navigation (10) Start changing the display mode of the second reel press order navigation → 1 Display of press order disappearance effect corresponding to stop button (display start)
It may be configured in either of the following ways. Similarly, when operating the second stop button,
(11) Display (start of display) of the press order disappearance effect (display format has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button → Start changing the display format of the third reel press order navigation (12) Third reel press order Start changing the navigation display mode → Display (start display) of the press order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button
It can be configured as follows.

<Configuration 2>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 105 will be explained. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, a press order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (starts to be displayed) on the effect display device S40. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). Thereafter, when the right stop button is released, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends.

<Configuration 3>
Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 106 will be explained. In FIG. 106, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is set to "3" instead of "=3". That is, the numerical value is displayed in the right digit of the push order display device D270 as a push order navigation, and the left digit is not displayed. Further, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display the push order navigation and the number of acquired tickets.

The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). When the stop button is pressed, the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the main control board M side controls the sub-control Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Displays the press order extinction effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the production display device S40 (starts displaying) be done. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the symbol combinations related to the push order bell (symbol combinations that result in a payout of 11 pieces) are stopped and displayed, and "0" is displayed on the push order display device D270. After that, when you release the right stop button, the payout for the symbol combination that is being stopped and displayed starts, and the press order display device D270 shows "1" → "2" → "3" → ... "10" → "11" ” The number of acquired coins will be displayed. After "11" is displayed on the press order display device D270 (after displaying the number of acquired coins), the display on the press order display device D270 is ended (hidden). In this way, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display both the push order navigation and the acquired number of coins display, and the display mode of the push order navigation display is changed to numerical values only in the lower digits of the push order display device D270. If the symbol combination for which game medals are paid out in the instructed game is displayed in a stopped state, the push order display device D270 displays both the push order navigation and the number of acquired medals. There is a risk that a user may misunderstand the push order navigation or the number of acquired tickets. Therefore, by configuring the system so that "0" is displayed between the end of the display of the push order navigation and the start of the display of the number of acquired coins, regardless of the number of payouts related to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed (for example, 1 (or 11 pieces), the player can recognize that the display of the number of won pieces has started. Note that the numerical value of "0" may be changed, and it is preferable that the display mode is different from the display mode that can be displayed as a push order navigation.

In addition, the end timing of the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 can be changed from "3rd stop button not pressed (after release)", that is, display of "3" (function of the push order display device) to display of "0". (Function of payout number display device), but it may also be, for example, the timing at which the display on the push order display device D270 completely disappears, ``payout based on winnings completed''. By setting the end timing of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 to "when the third stop button is pressed", the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is made earlier than the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. You can see that it will end.

As another example, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is configured as "13", "23", and "33" instead of "=3". The displayed push order navigation will be explained in detail. The left digits "1", "2", and "3" correspond to the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, respectively, and indicate the position of the reel where the stop operation should be performed. Yes (for example, "1" indicates that the reel on which the stop operation should be performed is the left reel M51, and "2" indicates that the reel on which the stop operation should be performed is the middle reel M52). The right digit "3" corresponds to the push order "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3") displayed on the effect display device S40, as in the previous configuration. It is something. With this configuration, the push order navigation will be displayed in the order of "23" → "13" → "33", and the stop button will be operated according to the push order. At this timing, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next reel stop operation is to be performed is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the display of the push order navigation ("33" in this example) corresponding to the final stop operation disappears, thereby ending the push order navigation by the push order display device D270.

<Effect>
In this way, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press) → third stop button not pressed → winning determination → winning For example, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the production display device S40 can be made different by determining the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. With this, it is possible to avoid the situation of having to visually check two display devices at the same time, and the player is able to visually check the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, which reduces the burden on the player when playing the game. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the

In addition, the trigger for ending the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 (the push order navigation display on the effect display device S40) is determined by interrupt processing on the main control board M side when a sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on. If it is specified that the game will turn off (release the stop button), the game will stop even if the player holds down the final stop button (third stop button) with high expectations for the outcome of the game. It can be configured so that the push order navigation does not end until the button is turned from on to off. Here, if the configuration is such that the push order navigation is deleted immediately after the stop button is turned from off to on, the expectation that the result of the game will not be advantageous to the player will be reduced. Since there is a possibility that the game will be lost, the push order navigation will not end until the stop button is turned from on to off, so that the result of the game will not be advantageous to the player. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of events that reduce expectations.

<Configuration 4>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 107 will be explained. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). When the stop button is pressed, the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the main control board M side controls the sub-control A command related to the detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display (start of display) of the press order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the production display device S40 At the same time, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends. In addition, in this game, the player wins the replay in the predetermined push order, and it is most advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (RT state with high replay winning probability) is possible to maintain) (for example, a case where "re-game-D2", which is a three-choice press-order re-game where the first stop is the highest profit, is won) is illustrated.

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the display of the press order navigation disappearing effect ends (the press order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). After that, release the right stop button (by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off) and the symbol combination related to replaying. is displayed in a stopped state, an automatic bet is executed, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. ).

<Configuration 5>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 108 will be explained. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). When the stop button is pressed, the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the main control board M side controls the sub-control A command related to the detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → The push order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display starts ) to be done. In addition, in this game, the player has won the replay in the predetermined push order, and it is most advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (RT state with high replay winning probability) is possible to maintain) (for example, a case where a player wins "Regame-D2", which is a 3-option press-order regame where the first stop is the highest profit).

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). After that, release the right stop button (by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off) and the symbol combination related to replaying is displayed in a stopped state, an automatic bet is executed, the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, and after the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends.

In this way, for example, in the case where configuration 1 in FIG. 104 and configuration 5 in FIG. To provide a game machine that allows even a player who cannot win a prize to determine which small winning combination has won based on the difference in the end timing of the push order navigation.

As described above, the end timing of the push order navigation when the push order combination is the push order bell or the push order replaying combination has been explained. In the effect display device S40, the timing at which the push order navigation ends has been described using only "when the third stop button is pressed" as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the period during which the game ends, the timing for ending the push order navigation can be arbitrarily determined if any of the following occurs: 3rd stop button operation (pressing) → 3rd stop button not pressing → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning. is possible. In addition, in the push order display device D270, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is different depending on whether the winning combination is a push order bell or when the winning combination is a push order replaying combination. ing. As an example when the winning combination is a push order replaying combination, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is set as "when the 1 bet lamp is lit", and the push order display can be performed by arbitrarily setting the lighting timing of the 1 bet lamp D211. The end timing of the push order navigation of the device D270 changes significantly. As an example, if the lighting timing of the 1 bet lamp D211 is the start of the next game, the end period of the push order navigation when the winning combination is the push order bell is "3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button operation (press) The timing is later than "stop button not pressed → winning determination → payout based on winning completed", and "3rd stop button operation (pressed) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determined → payout completed based on winning → 1 bet lamp" Also, if the lighting timing of the 1 bet lamp D211 is when the 3rd stop button is not pressed, then ``3rd stop button operation (pressing) → 3rd stop button not pressed → when 1 bet lamp is lit → winning Judgment→Completion of payout based on winnings", and the winning combination will be included within the end period of the push order navigation at the time of the push order bell.

Similar to the timing when the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the order of the timing at which the push order navigation ends is based on 3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → winning. An example of the order in which the push order navigation ends on the push order display device D270, production display device S40, audio, and reel window frame lamp D310 during the payout completion period is as follows:
(1) Press order display device → Effect display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (2) Press order display device → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (3) Press order display device → Audio → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Press order display device → audio → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (5) press order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → audio (6) press order display device → reel window Frame lamp → Audio → Production display device (7) Production display device → Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (8) Production display device → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (9) Production display device →Audio→Press order display device→Reel window frame lamp (10) Effect display device→Audio→Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device (11) Effect display device→Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device→Audio (12) ) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Press order display device (13) Audio → Press order display device → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp (14) Audio → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Production Display device (15) Audio → Production display device → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Audio → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device (17) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Press order Display device → Production display device (18) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Press order display device (19) Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Production display device → Audio (20) Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → audio → production display device (21) reel window frame lamp → production display device → press order display device → audio (22) reel window frame lamp → production display device → audio → press order display device (23) reel Window frame lamp → audio → press order display device → effect display device (24) reel window frame lamp → voice → effect display device → press order display device In this way, 3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button disabled It is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the push order navigation ends during the period of pressing → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning.

In addition, as one of the production means controlled by the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is controlled by the sub-control board S. An example of the order in which the push order navigation including the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 is completed will be described. The process until the end of the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 is as follows: The main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off. sends a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side in timer interrupt processing → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button Turn off the light (start turning off). In addition, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is turned off from on → the main control board M causes the sub control board S side to stop the first stop button in timer interrupt processing. Sends a command related to button operation → Sub-control board S receives the command → Turns off (starts turning off) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button, and also turns off the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the second stop button. The stop button lamp S60 is turned on (lighting starts).
(25) Press order display device → Production display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Stop button (third stop button lamp goes out)
(26) Press order display device → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Stop button (third stop button lamp goes out)
It is possible to configure as follows. The timing of ending the push order navigation by the stop button D40 is determined by the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the audio, and the reel window frame lamp D310, which executes the push order navigation by turning on or off the lamp. It may be placed before or after the window frame lamp D310. Furthermore, when operating the third stop button, the light may be turned off by pressing the third stop button, or may be turned off by not pressing the third stop button.

As described above, in this example, one game will proceed based on <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> and <<Configuration related to display end of push order navigation>>. . A specific example of the flow of one game from when the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) until the push order navigation ends is as follows:
1. Display of push order navigation (display start)
Start lever operation → Press order navigation display (display start) (Push order display device D270) → Press order navigation display (Display start) (Effect display device S40)
2. From the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation 2-1. Performance display device S40
Display of the press order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button (display start) → End of display of the press order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button → Change of display mode of the second reel press order navigation → Display (start of display) of the press order disappearance effect (display format has been changed) corresponding to the operation of the second stop button → End of display of the press order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the second stop button → Third reel Changing the display mode of the push order navigation 2-2. Press order display device D270
The push order display device D270 is in a lit state.
3. 3rd stop button operation - end of display of push order navigation 3rd stop button operation → push order display device lights out → display of push order navigation disappearing effect corresponding to operation of 3rd stop button (start of display) → 3rd stop button End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation In this way, the flow of one game progresses. Incidentally, the example described above is just one example, and for example, 1. The display of the push order navigation (display start) may be configured to include audio output from the reel window frame lamp D310 and the speaker S20, and the timing of the display (display start) of the push order navigation and the push order The order in which the navigation is displayed (display starts) is not limited to this. Also, 2. In the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation, the effect display device S40 displays (starts displaying) the press order extinction effect corresponding to each stop button, and changes the display mode of the press order navigation corresponding to the next reel. The order in which they are performed is not limited to this. Also, 3. From the third stop button operation to the end of the display of the push order navigation, the display end order of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the production display device S40 is not limited to this, and the timing at which the push order navigation ends is detailed. It is also possible to specify (further classification can be made by pressing the third stop button, not pressing the third stop button, etc.).

By configuring as in this example, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different. It is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to visually check the display devices at the same time, and the player can view the press order navigation on each display device at the timing when the press order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player while playing the game. The end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the display device D270 and the production display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning). period), for example, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices This is a user-friendly system that can reduce the burden on players by allowing them to visually confirm the end of the push-order navigation on their individual display devices at the same time the push-order navigation occurs. We can provide gaming machines.

<Display mode when pressing order is incorrect>
Here, we will explain in detail an example of the configuration of the display mode of the push order navigation when the game is executed in a different push order (or different operation timing) than the push order navigation in a game where the push order navigation is executed. Describe. Here, we will exemplify a case where the player wins the push order bell and a game is executed in which the correct push order is "left→middle→right."

In a situation where "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and "=1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the middle stop button is pressed as the first stop operation. (The correct press order corresponds to the left stop button) is operated, and as an interrupt process on the main control board M side, detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button has changed from off to on → main control Transmits a command related to the detection of the first stop button from the board M side to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → The sub-control board S side displays all "123" on the effect display device S40 Execute the process to delete.
It may be configured as described above. As mentioned above, in a game where the push order navigation is executed, if a stop button that is not in the correct push order is operated, on the sub control board S side, all reels (or stop buttons) While erasing the push order navigation corresponding to , the main control board M side is configured to maintain the display of the push order navigation. Note that the push order navigation on the main control board M side (the push order navigation using the push order display device D270) is performed during the third stop operation (for detecting the operation of the third stop button as an interrupt process on the main control board M side). The sensor is configured to be erased when it detects that the sensor has changed from on to off.

<<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>>
Next, a configuration related to reel stop control and push order navigation display control (effect display device S40) will be described. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

<Configuration 1>
First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, an instruction game related to the push order bell is executed in the AT state, and "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The middle stop button is pressed at the timing when the replay symbol No. 11 is located in the middle row of the middle reel, and the display corresponding to the push order navigation "1" on the middle reel changes to the push order navigation disappearing effect. Note that the middle reel stop button remains pressed. In addition, the middle reel is controlled to stop the symbols constituting the symbol combination that results in a payout of 11 pieces, which is the maximum number of pieces, when the middle reel is stopped in the correct pressing order. In this example, the number 15 bell is configured to stop at the middle stage (effective line) of the middle reel. In other words, when the middle stop button is operated at this timing, the slide of the maximum number of frames (4 frames in this example) is generated from Replay A of number 11, and the bell of number 15 is stopped and displayed on the winning line. Control is performed so that the

Here, the operation control of the stepping motor until the reel stops after the stop operation is performed will be explained based on FIG. 35. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. 35 <reel rotation speed image> transitions to the reel deceleration standby state (5). In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position where the stop operation was performed and the position of the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning condition device in the game is calculated, and the distance is calculated for a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms). By determining that it is possible to stop and display the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning condition device in the game concerned on the winning line, the symbol combination related to the condition device winning in the game concerned is formed. Rotation is continued so that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing when the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning condition device in the game approach the winning line, the reels are controlled to transition to the reel deceleration state (6) and to the reel stop state (7). do.

After that, as shown in the upper right corner of FIG. 109, on the effect display device S40, the press order navigation disappearing effect of the middle reel is erased (the display is finished), and the middle reel stops displaying the 15th bell on the winning line. Slip control is continued to prevent this. Note that the middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 109, the effect display device S40 changes the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed. The display mode that changes at this time may be any mode as long as the player can recognize the stop button to be operated (such as changing the numbers significantly, adding movement to the numbers, making the numbers shine, etc.) ). On the other hand, the middle reel continues to perform sliding control in order to stop and display the 15th bell on the winning line. Note that the middle reel stop button is being pressed. The timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel where the next stop operation is to be performed may be before the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (display ends), or before the push order navigation disappears (display ends). This may be done after the navigation disappearing effect is erased (display ends), or at the same time as the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (display ends).

Thereafter, after the middle stop button continues to be pressed for a predetermined period of time, the bell number 15 on the middle reel is stopped and displayed on the winning line. The predetermined time here is the time (for example, 190 ms) during which the maximum slip control of the middle reel is performed. In this example, when a stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation, the stop operation will be displayed before the reel on which the stop operation was performed is displayed as stopped (before the next stop button operation becomes effective). It is configured such that it is possible to delete the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the reel has been stopped and to change the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next.

Here, as an example that can be implemented in this example, we have explained the case where the stop operation is performed at the position where the maximum number of pieces slips. In the case where a stop operation is performed at a position, the timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed is after the reel is displayed as stopped. In addition, even if it is 0 frames, the display mode will be changed to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop button operation should be performed, before the next stop button operation becomes effective. It is designed to change. By configuring this way, even if there is a zero frame, the player must operate the stop button after recognizing the reel to be stopped next, which prevents the player from pressing the stop button in the wrong order. can be prevented. Also, it is better to change the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel where the next stop operation is to be performed as early as possible, and even in the case of 0 frames, the timing should be as early as possible. is suitable.

Further, in this example, the push order bell has been described as an example, but the present invention is applicable not only to the push order bell but also to all condition devices that generate push order navigation. Further, as a presentation means for notifying the pressing order, lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 or sound output from the speaker S20 may be used. For example, if a push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310 or the audio output from the speaker S20 is included, before changing the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel on the effect display device S40. to execute the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel (if it is a reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel will be lit; if it is audio, the lines corresponding to the next reel will be output as audio). It is possible to configure

In addition, in this example, as a configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>>, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 was explained as an example of the effect means for executing the press order navigation. For example, the configuration may include a reel window frame lamp D310, audio, and push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). good. The push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed by turning on (flashing) and turning off the reel window frame lamp, and the push order navigation using voice is "Left", "Right", "Middle" from the speaker S20. The press order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is executed by outputting the left stop button corresponding to the reel. This is executed by turning on (flashing) and turning off D41.

For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> includes a reel window frame lamp D310, audio, and a stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). ),
(1) Reel window frame lamp D310 (1-1) Turn off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (1-2) Turn on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (2) Audio (2-1) Output of audio corresponding to the reel where the stop operation is to be performed next (3) Stop button D40
(3-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (3-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (4) Effect display device S40
(4-1) Display the press order disappearance effect corresponding to the reel where the relevant stop operation was performed (display ends)
(4-2) Change in the display mode that highlights the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed It is possible to define a configuration related to the push order navigation for each production means as described above. The order in which these configurations (1-1) to (4-2) are executed may be determined in any manner. For example, the order of execution may be determined for each production means (for example, processing is performed in the order of reel window frame lamp → audio → stop button → production display device), or the order of execution may be determined for each reel. (For example, the processing is performed in the order of processing related to the reel on which the stop operation has been performed → processing related to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next), or it may be configured by combining these.

In addition, <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example will be explained using FIG. 109, and in FIG. 109, the case where the first stop operation is performed is explained as an example. However, the configuration to which this example can be applied is not limited to only the first stop operation. For example, the present invention is applicable even if the second stop operation is performed or the third stop operation is performed. In addition, at the time of the third stop operation, processing corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed (for example, a change to a "display mode that highlights the push order navigation" in the effect display device S40, a reel window frame lamp The process of "lighting up the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed" in D310 is not executed.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation and the reel corresponding to the stop button executes the stop control with the maximum number of frames sliding, the effect display device S40 The end of the press order navigation display corresponding to the stop button (from the start of display to the end of the disappearing effect), and the change in the display mode of the press order navigation display corresponding to the stop button that should be stopped next (start of highlighting) can be executed before the next stop button operation becomes effective, so it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the stop button before recognizing the stop button that should be operated next. .

<<<<Third Embodiment Medal addition process using input sensor>>>>
Next, as a third embodiment, the timing of processing for adding game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 as credits will be described (see FIG. 113). The game medals inserted from the medal slot D170 pass through the input acceptance sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path for the game medals, and meet predetermined passage conditions (the passing game medals satisfy the standards, (e.g., no error is determined), the game medals flow downward through a medal flow path DR in a medal selector DS without an error occurring. Further, a first input sensor D20s and a second input sensor D30s are provided further back than the input acceptance sensor D10s, and game medals that meet the dimensional standards and are accepted pass through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. When passing through, if it is determined that the coins have been inserted normally, the inserted game medals are detected as bet medals, and credits can be added. When the game medal passes, the insertion of the game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the signal (information on the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s was turned on, the first insertion sensor D20s Information on the time from when it turns on until it turns off, information on the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns on, information on the time from when the second input sensor D30s turns on until it turns off, etc.) It is designed to be supplied to the main control board M. Here, the timing at which credit addition can be performed can be determined by the on/off status of each of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s.

<<<Third Embodiment Timing chart of game medal detection by input sensor>>>
FIG. 110 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. For example, assume that the first input sensor D20s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 1 in the figure. Next, assume that the second input sensor D30s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings, etc. will be supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signals. Suppose then that the first input sensor D20s finishes detecting game medals (turns on→off) at timing 3 in the figure. Here, the time A from when the first input sensor D20s detects a game medal to when it finishes detecting the game medal is calculated by the main control board M, and A is within a predetermined range (in the third embodiment, If 4ms≦A<183ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. Further, the time B from when the second input sensor D30s detects a game medal until the first input sensor D20s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and B is within a predetermined range (2ms≦B< 115 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. After that, it is assumed that the second input sensor D30s finishes detecting game medals (turns on→off) at timing 4 in the figure. The time C from when the second input sensor D30s detects a game medal until the second input sensor D30s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and C is within a predetermined range (4ms≦C<183ms). If so, it is determined that the passage of game medals is normally detected. In this way, it is determined whether the game medals are normally passing through the medal selector DS at the timing when the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned on or off. Game medals inserted at any timing when D20s and second input sensor D30s are turned on or off are detected as betted medals, and credits are added.

<<<Third Embodiment: Example of medal addition process by input sensor>>>
<<Configuration 1>>
Next, in the third embodiment, an example of the timing at which an inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and credit addition is performed will be explained in detail. 111 and 112 are flowcharts reflecting the processing at the credit addition timing in the third embodiment in the game progress control processing related to the subroutine of step 1200. FIG. 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credit addition is performed when the insertion process is normally executed for the inserted game medals. Note that in the flowchart of FIG. 111, descriptions of the same contents as those in FIG. 17 will be omitted (from step 1220 to step 1225 and from step 1232 onwards). First, in FIG. 111, in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is off in step 1226-2 (fourth). (Image diagram in the upper middle part of FIG. 113: The first input sensor D20s is turned from off to on at the timing when the game medal approaches the first input sensor D20s). If Yes in step 1226-2 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is on in step 1226-3 (fourth). (Image diagram shown in the upper right corner of FIG. 113; the second input sensor D30s turns from off to on at the timing when the game medal approaches the second input sensor D30s). If Yes in step 1226-3 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on in step 1226-6 (fourth). (Image diagram shown in the lower left of FIG. 113; the first input sensor D20s turns from on to off at the timing when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first input sensor D20s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-6 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that one normal gaming medal has been inserted and starts the credit addition process in step 1226-8 (fourth). It will be done. Further, in step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off (image diagram shown in the lower middle row of FIG. 113). At the timing when the medal exceeds the detection range of the second input sensor D30s, the second input sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF). If Yes in step 1226-9 (fourth), it is determined that one normal gaming medal has been inserted, and for example, if the number of bets meets the specified number, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled. Processing such as setting is executed, and the process moves to step 1232.

<Effect 1>
In the third embodiment, an example has been described in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on. Conventionally, credit addition processing was executed at the timing when "the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off". However, by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. If this occurs, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that it is an error, and executes a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100). It is possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the credit addition process is not executed in time.

<Effect 2>
Also, since the credit addition process is not executed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s remains off and only the first input sensor D20s is turned on, the position closer to the medal input slot 170 than the second input sensor D30s is It is also possible to prevent the first input sensor D20s provided in the first input sensor D20s from being carried out, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud, and furthermore, a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<<Third Embodiment Subroutine due to input sensor error>>>
Further, if No in step 1226-3 (fourth), step 1226-6 (fourth), or step 1226-9 (fourth), step 1226-4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth) , Step 1226-10 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined medal insertion error occurrence condition is satisfied. Note that the medal insertion errors here include, for example, an input medal backflow error, an error in the number of input medals, an error in input medal retention, etc., and the on/off status (including time) of sensors such as the first input sensor and the second input sensor. Based on this, it is determined whether any error has occurred (occurrence conditions vary depending on the type of error). These errors are detected, for example, based on detection of on/off of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s in FIG. 110. If Yes in step 1226-4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth), or step 1226-10 (fourth), medal insertion error processing is executed in step 1226-5 (fourth). be done. FIG. 112 is a flowchart relating to a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, in step 1226-12 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is on, and in step 1226-13 (fourth), an error detection command is sent to the sub side. , and a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process moves to step 1226-14 (fourth). Note that in 1226-13 (fourth), information regarding the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-control board side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the error state (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), or when the error is not detected, the There is no need to perform information setting processing. Error processing will be executed depending on the type of error that occurs, but the error detection command may execute set processing only when any error occurs from a state where no error has occurred. , even if the set process is executed when the type of error changes from the state where the first error (for example, input medal retention error) has occurred to the second error (for example, payout medal retention error). good. In step 1226-14 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the currently occurring error has been resolved. If it is determined that the error has been cleared, the currently occurring error flag is turned off in step 1226-15, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of error detection based on the detection of game medals by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s has been described. It is also possible to detect errors based on the detection of game medals by the input reception sensor D10s provided nearby, and an example of error detection based on the detection of game medals by the input reception sensor D10s will be described below. .

<<<Third Embodiment Error Detection Based on Input Monitoring Counter>>>
<<Configuration 2>>
An insertion reception sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass. The input reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medals input from the medal slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and only accepting game medals that conform to the standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals do not conform based on this function. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been removed are configured to be returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that a suitable game medal has passed, the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned from off to on, and the signal thereof is supplied to the main control board M. When the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the input reception sensor D10s is turned on, the main control board M performs an addition process from 0 to 1 in a counter that counts the passage of game medals (hereinafter referred to as an input monitoring counter). Then, the main control board M monitors the input at the timing when the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS and the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off (corresponding to timing 4 in FIG. 110). The counter performs subtraction processing from 1 to 0. At this time, for example, if any problem occurs with the insertion of game medals during the period 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, the game medal counting process of the insertion monitoring counter will not be performed normally. . For example, if the second input sensor D30s does not turn off from on, the input monitoring counter does not subtract, and the input monitoring counter continues to increase, an input medal retention error can be detected. Furthermore, if a situation occurs in which the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off before the input reception sensor D10s, and the input monitoring counter becomes negative because the subtraction process of the input monitoring counter is performed first, It is possible to detect the backflow error of inserted medals.

<Effect>
In this way, by configuring so that an error determination can be made based on the detection of game medals by the three sensors: the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, and the input acceptance sensor D10s, the system is configured to perform error determination based on the detection of game medals by the three sensors: the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, and the input reception sensor D10s. Various errors can be reliably detected, a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud can be provided, and a gaming machine that is user-friendly can be provided.

<<<Third Embodiment Output of medal insertion sound>>>
In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound that is output after the inserted game medals are detected as bet medals will be explained in detail. In the third embodiment, an example has been described in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, but when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is turned on, An error may occur while the sensor D30s is on (for example, an error in inserted medal retention due to an abnormally long time when the second input sensor D30s is on). In the third embodiment, since the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, it is assumed that, for example, an error may occur after the credit addition process is executed. Ru. In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after the credit addition process and the error sound output from the speaker S20 when an error is detected by the second insertion sensor D30s will be explained in particular.

<<Configuration 3>>
First, at timing A, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. To explain in detail, according to the timing chart of FIG. 110, subtracting 115 ms, which is the upper limit of period B, from 183 ms, which is the upper limit of period C, gives 68 ms. In other words, during this period, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs the following steps: "Medal insertion reception → Set command related to medal insertion reception → Send command to sub control board side → Set error detection command (if there is an error)" By executing the process as described above, it becomes possible to output the medal insertion sound before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<Configuration 4>>
As a modification of the timing A, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs the following process: "Set command related to medal input reception → Execute credit addition process → Send command to sub-control board → Set error detection command (if there is an error)" You may do so.

<Effect>
By configuring this way, medal insertion can be accepted at the timing when "the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on". This process is executed, and the subsequent timer interrupt process causes the main control board M side to send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side to output a medal insertion sound. . On the other hand, if the above-mentioned situation of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and the inserted medal retention error occurs, the inserted medal In order to determine that a retention error has occurred (because the situation in which the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined period of time or more), the player outputs an error sound related to the input medal retention error. It is possible to confirm the sound of medals being inserted beforehand, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the player is worried that the game medals are not properly inserted due to the inserted medal retention error and that the player has lost money.

<<Configuration 5>>
Next, at timing B, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It is determined that there is a time of at least 67 ms after the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected in the second input sensor D30s, but during this period, the CPU 100 of the main control board M is intentionally , the configuration is such that commands related to acceptance of medal insertion are not sent to the sub-control board side. Thereafter, after setting an error detection command based on error detection by the second input sensor D30s, a command related to medal input reception is transmitted to the sub-control board side. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the credit addition process → detects the error flag → sets the error detection command → sends the error detection command to the sub-control board → sets the command related to medal insertion reception → sub-control By configuring to execute a process such as "Send command related to medal insertion reception to the board side", the medal insertion sound can be made later than the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It becomes possible to output. At this time, it is preferable to configure the timing for transmitting the command related to medal insertion reception to the sub side to be transmitted at a timer interrupt process different from that for transmitting the error detection command.

<<Configuration 6>>
As a modification of the timing B, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M detects an error flag → sets an error detection command → sends an error detection command to the sub-control board → sets a command related to medal input reception → executes credit addition processing → sub-control The process may be performed by "sending a command related to accepting medal insertion to the board side."

<Effect>
With this configuration, at the timing when "the first input sensor D20s is turned on and the second input sensor D30s is turned on → the first input sensor D20s is turned off and the second input sensor D30s is turned on", the inserted medal is first It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the situation in which the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or more), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. is transmitted, and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. Thereafter, after the process related to medal insertion reception is executed, a command related to medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and a medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. becomes. If the situation of "first input sensor D20s is off and second input sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, an input medal retention error will occur before the medal input sound is output. In order to determine that the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined period of time or more, the player detects an error related to the inserted medal retention error before outputting the medal insertion sound. The sound can be confirmed, and the player can quickly sense that the game medals have not been properly inserted.

<<Configuration 7>>
Next, at timing C, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, and is output after the error is cleared. It is determined that there is a time of at least 67 ms after the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected in the second input sensor D30s, but during this period, the CPU 100 of the main control board M is intentionally , the command related to medal input reception is not sent to the sub control board side, which is the same as the second timing, but furthermore, after the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the input error flag in step 1226-15. The system is configured to send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the credit addition process → detects the error flag → sets the error detection command → sends the error detection command to the sub-control board → (during this period, the error cancellation process is performed). ...→Set the error not detected command→Send the error not detected command to the sub control board side→Set the command related to medal input reception →Send the command related to medal input reception to the sub control board side" By configuring this to be executed, it becomes possible to output the medal insertion sound after the error is cleared.

<<Configuration 8>>
As a modification of the timing C, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M detects an error flag→sets an error detection command→sends an error detection command to the sub-control board→...(error cancellation processing during this period)...→no error detected Set the command → Send the error-undetected command to the sub-control board side → Set the command related to medal input reception → Execute credit addition process → Send the command related to medal input reception to the sub-control board side. Good too.

<Effect>
With this configuration, at the timing when "the first input sensor D20s is turned on and the second input sensor D30s is turned on → the first input sensor D20s is turned off and the second input sensor D30s is turned on", the inserted medal is first It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the situation in which the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or more), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. is transmitted, and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. After the error is resolved, an error no detection command is sent to the sub side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is ended. After the process related to medal insertion reception is executed, a command related to medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and a medal insertion sound is outputted on the sub control board S side. becomes. If the situation of "first input sensor D20s is off and second input sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, an input medal retention error will occur before the medal input sound is output. In order to resolve the error and terminate the output of the error sound, the player Since the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error can be confirmed before the medal insertion sound is output, and the medal insertion sound can be confirmed after the error is resolved, the player can play normally after the error is resolved. It is possible to recognize that game medals have been inserted.

<<<Third Embodiment Medal error detection using shoot sensor>>>
Next, as a third embodiment, error detection using the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. FIG. 114 shows the passage member (referred to as the chute body in the third embodiment) of the medals after passing through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s in the path of the game tokens in the medal selector DS. It is a diagram. In FIG. 114, a chute sensor D40s is provided below the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, and the chute sensor D40s is used for normal medal insertion like the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. In particular, the third embodiment is configured to be able to detect errors (for example, inserted medal retention error, inserted medal backflow error, etc.) that occur after the credit addition process has already been executed. ing.

Error detection by the shoot sensor D40s will be explained in detail. For example, consider a case where game medals accumulate further downstream of the chute sensor D40s in the chute body communicating with the hopper H40. The width of the game medal path inside the chute body is approximately the width of one game medal, and when one game medal stays in the game medal path inside the chute body, the game medals that pass through the path one after another after that. This results in an input medal retention error condition. In the third embodiment, the shoot sensor D40s detects a position corresponding to three game medals from the position where the game medals are accumulated, but the position where the shoot sensor D40s is provided is not limited to this.

The detection of game medals by the shoot sensor D40s is similar to the detection of game medals by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. When a game medal passes, it is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, and its signal (shoot sensor D40s information on the timing when the chute sensor D40s is turned on, information on the time from when the chute sensor D40s is turned on until it is turned off) are supplied to the main control board M. The main control board M determines whether game medals are normally inserted based on information related to the signal detected by the chute sensor D40s and further information related to the signal detected by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. It is determined that Specifically, the main control board M determines in advance the period from the timing when the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s starts detecting game medals to the timing when the shoot sensor D40s starts detecting game medals. A comparison is made with a predetermined period (the time that the shoot sensor D40s should detect, hereinafter also referred to as a theoretical period). For example, in the case of detecting the fourth game medal in FIG. 114, the fourth game medal is detected from the timing when the fourth game medal is detected by the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s. The period until it is detected by the shot sensor D40s is compared with the theoretical period, and if the difference between the periods exceeds the range where it is not detected as an error, an error (in the third embodiment, the shot sensor medal is detected) is detected. (retention error) will be detected. Note that the timing at which the first input sensor D20s detects game medals, the timing at which the second input sensor D30s starts detecting game medals, or the timing at which the first input sensor D20s finishes detecting game medals, and the second input sensor Any timing when the D30s finishes detecting game medals may be set as the start timing of the theoretical period.

<<Third Embodiment Timing chart of game medal detection by shoot sensor>>
FIG. 115 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s. For example, assume that the first input sensor D20s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 1 in the figure. Next, assume that the second input sensor D30s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings, etc. will be supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signals. After that, assume that the shoot sensor D40s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 3 in the figure. A period D from when the first input sensor D20s detects a game medal until the shoot sensor D40s starts detection, and a period from when the second input sensor D30s detects a game medal until the shoot sensor D40s starts detection E is calculated by the main control board M, and using these periods as a theoretical period, it is determined whether the game medals are normally passing through the chute body based on the detection by the chute sensor D40s. Also, by providing the chute sensor D40s, it is possible to detect errors that may occur after it is determined that the game medals have passed through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s normally.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, it is possible to detect some kind of error related to the passage of game medals near the shoot sensor D40s (shoot sensor medal retention error), and further notify the player that an error has occurred. becomes possible. In addition, since the normal passage of game medals by the chute sensor D40s is determined based on information related to the timing at which the detection of game medals by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s starts, the first input If the passage of game medals is not detected by the sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, but the passage of game medals is detected by the chute sensor D40s, that is, it is possible to reliably detect errors related to the backflow of inserted medals. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud, and in turn, a gaming machine that is user-friendly.

<<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>>
Next, as a fourth embodiment, an example of the mechanism of the medal return member D340 through which game medals pass when the game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230 or returned to the medal tray D230 will be explained. .

First, FIGS. 116 to 119 will be described for explaining in detail the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 (described later) is provided. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals that are paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, pass through the medal receiving opening D341 (described later), and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. FIG. 119 depicts the locus of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117.

<<<Fourth embodiment Front view of medal return member>>>
FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340 in the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, game medals that have not been added to bets or credits by the medal selector DS that detects medals inserted from the medal slot D170 and performs simple authentication (in a state where the blocker is off) When returning the game medals (which reached the blocker) to the medal receiving tray D230, the game medals pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the first flow path), and are also paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. The game medals are configured so that they pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as a second flow path) and are finally paid out to a medal receiving tray D230.

The medal return member D340 has a first channel through which inappropriate game medals detected by the medal selector DS are returned to the medal receiving tray D230, and a channel through which game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 pass. The game medals passing through the two channels pass through the medal return member D340 and merge when flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230. It is configured.

The second flow path in the medal return member D340 includes at least a medal receiving opening D341 that receives the game medals paid out from the hopper H40, and a medal falling surface D342 where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. It is configured to have. Further, a medal non-falling surface D343 located opposite to the medal falling surface D342, a wall surface provided with a medal receiving opening, and a medal falling surface D342 on which game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 fall. It is configured to have a space surrounded by , and is configured such that game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass through this space.

The medal receiving port D341 is configured to communicate with the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40. Further, since the medal receiving port D341 is open, the game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 can reliably pass through the medal receiving port D341. In particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving port D341 is referred to as an edge (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer periphery of the opening of the medal receiving port D341 is referred to as an edge). ). In the regulation of the length and distance related to the medal receiving opening D341, the starting point is any position corresponding to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the shape of the medal falling surface D342 is formed into a substantially square shape, and the medal non-falling surface D343 located opposite to the medal falling surface D342 is also formed into a substantially square shape. However, the shapes of the medal falling surface D342 and the medal non-falling surface D343 are not limited to this.

In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving opening D341 is provided in an inclined shape downward to the right, and game medals that collide with a collision part (not shown) provided in the front view direction in FIG. 116 fall. It is configured to be inclined substantially parallel to the medal falling surface D342. With this configuration, game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 and dropped onto the medal falling surface D342 slide down from the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and the game medals are reliably guided to the medal receiving tray D230. It becomes possible to do so. Note that the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal falling surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and may be configured such that both the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal falling surface D342 are not inclined. It should be noted that the inappropriate medals detected by the medal selector DS are configured to fall toward the medal receiving tray D230 from above when viewed from the player in a direction perpendicular to the above-mentioned inclination direction of the medal receiving opening D341. .

<<<Fourth Embodiment Side view of medal return member Locus diagram of game medal flow (perspective view)>>>
Next, dimensional regulations in the configuration of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 is provided. First, the thickness and diameter of the game medal are defined as a and b, respectively (see FIG. 116). In addition, it is preferable that a, which is the thickness of the game medal, is approximately 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and b, which is the diameter of the game medal, is preferably approximately 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm. be.

Next, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 where the game medals fall after being dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341 is determined by c, which is perpendicular to the medal non-falling surface D343. The longest distance from the medal non-falling surface D343 to the edge of the medal receiving port in the direction d is the longest distance from the medal receiving port D341 to the edge of the opening of the medal receiving port D341. In the fourth embodiment, the length (in the height direction of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341, which has a substantially rectangular shape) is e, and the maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving opening D341 is The length is defined as f. In the fourth embodiment, predetermined conditions are provided for the dimensions defined in this way. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions:
c≧a...Formula (1)
b>d...Formula (2)
f≧2b...Formula (3)
b>e...Formula (4)
In the fourth embodiment, the game medals can be either 25Φ size or 30Φ size.

First, by satisfying formulas (1) and (3), it is possible to configure the system to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding. The distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving opening 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the gaming medal, and the gaming medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H are not allowed to flow from the medal receiving opening D341 to the collision part. Since there is a sufficient distance before the collision occurs, the game medals will fall freely due to the weight of the game medals, and if the game medals that collided with the collision part fall onto the medal falling surface D342 (the game medals are lying down). In this state), since the game medals to be next paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are out of the area through which they pass, a collision can be prevented.

Next, by satisfying formula (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 (regardless of whether the game medal is lying down or standing) and the subsequent It is possible to configure the system so that the second game medal that is paid out does not collide with the second game medal, and the game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 does not block the medal receiving opening D341. It is.

Next, by satisfying formula (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and one medal that collided with the collision part It is possible to configure the system to prevent the situation in which the eye game medals bounce back to the medal receiving opening D341.

By specifying the dimensions in the configuration of the medal return member D340 as shown in formulas (1) to (4), the game medals can be smoothly paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, and the game medals can be smoothly delivered. It becomes possible to guide the user to the receiving tray D230. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving opening D341, and flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, as an effect of specifying the dimensions of formulas (1) to (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game medal paid out thereafter. It is possible to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with medals, and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 do not block the medal receiving opening D341.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 117, in this example, a protruding edge is provided on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341 on the outside side of the medal return member D340; It may be configured such that a protruding edge is provided on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H to flow back into the medal receiving opening D341 after colliding with the collision part.

<<<Fourth Embodiment Trajectory diagram of falling game medals (side view)>>>
In FIG. 118, the trajectory of game medals dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving opening D341, and flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 depicts the locus of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117. First, as shown in the upper left diagram, the first game medal is ejected from the medal receiving opening D341. Next, as shown in the upper right diagram, the second game medal is ejected from the medal receiving port D341 in the same way as the first game medal, and the first game medal is placed in the front view direction in FIG. collides with a collision part (not shown) that is The interval from when the first game medal is discharged from the medal receiving opening D341 until when the second game medal is discharged can be determined by the rotational speed of the disk H50 of the medal payout device H. The rotation speed can be set arbitrarily, but as shown in the upper right diagram of the fourth embodiment, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the second game medal is The second game medal will be paid out from the payout device H, but the timing at which the second game medal will be paid out from the medal payout device H is (1) approximately at the same time as the first game medal collides with the collision part; 2) The timing may be before (immediately before) the first game medal collides with the collision part, (3) The timing may be after the first game medal collides with the collision part. The distance f (see FIG. 117) may be adjusted in accordance with the timing at which the desired game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H. Regarding (2) above, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H and passes through the medal receiving opening D341, the game medal advances in the horizontal direction by more than the diameter of the game medal (above b) ( It is preferable to set the timing after the firing. In addition, the more time has elapsed since the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H since the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H, the more the number of game medals increases. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the first game medal and the second game medal will collide. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is too long, the interval between the payout times of game medals becomes too long, and the tempo at which game medals are paid out becomes too long. It gets worse. Furthermore, since the internal size (depth) of the gaming machine casing is limited, the f (maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving opening D341) is also predetermined. It is difficult to guarantee distances longer than that. For the above reasons, it is most preferable to set the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H to be the timing immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision part. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal after colliding with the collision portion. It should be noted that it is desirable to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with each other even when the third and subsequent game medals are paid out. It is preferable to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with each other. Note that even if the medals do not collide with each other in the first and second payouts, but do collide with each other in the second and third payouts, they are paid out into the return member D340. It is possible to create an effect that game medals are not easily jammed. This means that in a gaming machine, paying out two coins occurs more frequently than paying out three coins. Further, the collision portion may be configured to be protected by, for example, metal in order to increase the durability of the medal return member D340 against collisions of game medals.

Next, as shown in the lower left row, the first game medal collides with the collision part and then falls onto the medal falling surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal and heads toward the collision part in the same way as the first game medal. At this time, by being configured as shown in equation (1), it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding. Next, as shown in the lower right row, the first game medal that has fallen onto the medal falling surface D342 is tilted in the direction of inclination of the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and falls from the medal falling surface D342 to the medal receiving tray D230. is induced. After colliding with the collision part, the second game medal falls onto the medal falling surface D342 in the same way as the first game medal. At this time, since the first game medal is configured to be inclined by gravity in the direction of inclination of the medal falling surface D342, the first game medal and the second game medal may collide with each other. It is possible to prevent backflow of medals that collided with the collision part and bounced back into the opening of the medal receiving port D341.

<<Effect 1>>
The second game medal is released from the medal receiving opening D341 toward the collision part, and the first game medal collides with the collision part and then falls onto the medal falling surface D342. At this time, it is configured to satisfy formulas (1) and (3), in other words, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving opening 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the game medal. In addition, since the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H have a sufficient distance from the medal receiving opening D341 until they collide with the collision part, the weight of the game medals causes them to fall freely. , when the game medals that collided with the collision part fall onto the medal falling surface D342 (the game medals are lying down), the game medals that are next paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall out of the area through which they pass. This means that collisions can be prevented.

<<Effect 2>>
For example, by being configured as in formulas (2) and (4), it is possible to prevent the backflow of medals that collide with the collision part and bounce back into the opening of the medal receiving port D341. can be provided.

<<Effect 3>>
For example, by being configured as shown in equation (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and one of the medals that collided with the collision part It is possible to provide a game machine that can prevent the situation in which the second game medal bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341.

<<Effect 4>>
The first game medal that fell onto the medal falling surface D342 falls from the medal falling surface D342 and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230, and the second game medal falls as shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. As shown in the figure, the medal falls on the medal falling surface D342 at approximately the same position as the position where the first game medal fell. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are not paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 due to accumulation in the vicinity of the medal receiving opening D341. We can provide gaming machines.

<<Effect 5>>
To provide a game machine that can prevent damage and deterioration of a medal return member D340 because it has a shock-absorbing material that softens the impact at the collision part where game medals that are paid out with speed from a medal payout device H collide. can do.

<<Effect 6>>
Once the game medals put out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 collide with the collision part and lose the initial momentum of the payout, the game medals collide with each other (the game medals returned from the medal selector DS and the hopper H40 Collisions with game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H or collisions between game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 occur, and the game medals flow into the non-rhythmic medal tray D230. It is possible to prevent this from happening and provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

The collision part with which the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide may be a part of the front door DU, a part of the medal return member D340, or only the collision part may be separated. It may be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a body member.

In addition, in this example, the collision portion where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide has a plane shape that is approximately perpendicular to the medal falling surface D342. It is sufficient that the game medals collide with each other and the collided game medals flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, the medal falling surface D342 has a curved shape and plays the same role as the collision part. Alternatively, any surface or portion of the medal return member D340 may be curved to play the same role as the collision part. Further, as described above, only the collision portion may be configured to be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a separate member, and the collision portion may be configured to have a curved shape.

<<<<Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Payout Device>>>>
<<<Fifth Embodiment Timing chart of drive control of medal payout device>>>
Next, drive control of the medal payout device H will be described as a fifth embodiment. First, the operation control of the medal payout device H will be explained using FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a timing chart related to the detection of the hopper motor H80 that is driven when game medals are paid out from the medal payout device H, the first payout sensor H1, and the second payout sensor H2. The details of the first dispensing sensor H1 and the second dispensing sensor H2 will be described later, but for convenience of explanation, the first dispensing sensor H10s in FIG. 4 → the second dispensing sensor H2, the second dispensing sensor H2 in FIG. Sensor H20s → first payout sensor H1, and in the initial position where game medals are not being paid out (initial position when the disc is not rotating), the first payout sensor H1: on, and the second payout sensor H2: off. It has become. First, in the hopper motor H80, it is assumed that the hopper drive flag is in an on state when the hopper motor H80 is being driven. When the game medals are paid out by the medal payout device H, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation shaft H50a, and the game medals in the medal payout device H are released by the release biasing means H70. The game medals are paid out by displacing and flowing down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. In the fifth embodiment, the first dispensing sensor H1 and the second dispensing sensor H2 are detected to be on or off, for example, based on the displacement of the discharge urging means H70. Specifically, at timing 1 in the figure, the first payout sensor H1 is turned on when the release biasing means H70 is not displaced to the position where game medals are paid out (referred to as the initial position in the fifth embodiment). A signal indicating this state is transmitted to the main control board M. Then, the discharging biasing means H70 starts to be displaced to the position where the game medals are paid out, and as the discharging biasing means H70 starts to move from the initial position, the main control controls the signal indicating that the first dispensing sensor H1 is in the OFF state. It is transmitted to the board M (the first payout sensor H1 turns from on to off). At timing 2 in the figure, the discharge biasing means H70 is displaced to the position for dispensing game medals (referred to as the dispensing position in the fifth embodiment), thereby providing a signal indicating that the second dispensing sensor H2 is in the on state. is transmitted to the main control board M (the second dispensing sensor H2 is turned from off to on). Then, at timing 3 in the figure, the payout of the game medals is completed, and the release biasing means H70 starts to move back to the initial position, thereby controlling the main control of the signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the OFF state. It is transmitted to the board M (the second dispensing sensor H2 turns from on to off). Then, at timing 4 in the figure, the discharge biasing means H70 is again displaced to the initial position, thereby transmitting a signal indicating that the first dispensing sensor H1 is in the on state to the main control board M (first dispensing sensor H1 goes from off to on). In the fifth embodiment, for example, the period from timing 1 to timing 2 is a predetermined range A (A<26ms), and the period from timing 2 to timing 3 is a predetermined range B (9ms≦ B<60ms), and by detecting that the period from timing 3 to timing 4 is within the predetermined range C (9ms≦C<60), it is determined that the medal dispensing device H is functioning normally. It is determined that game medals will be paid out.

<<<Fifth Embodiment Medal Payout of the Medal Payout Device ~ Stopping the Medal Payout Device>>>
＜＜Configuration＞＞
Next, a series of steps from the start of medal payout by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment to the stop of the medal payout device H will be described using FIG. 121. First, referring to FIG. 121, in order to briefly explain the series of steps from the payout of game medals to the stoppage of the medal payout device H in the fifth embodiment, unnecessary medals are added to the configuration of the fifth embodiment. The structure related to the dispensing device H is eliminated as much as possible. FIG. 121 is a front view of the disc H50 that is rotated when paying out game medals.

In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disk H50 has a plurality of circular cavities larger in size than the game medals, and the disk H50 is configured to cover and overlap the game medals, and the game medals are moved under the disk H50 by the rotation of the disk H50. By moving, game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240. First, in the upper left diagram, the hopper motor H80 is not driven, and the first dispensing sensor H1 is in an on state. In the fifth embodiment, this state is defined as the initial position of the discharge biasing means H70, and for clarity of explanation, an initial position (disc H50) before rotation of the disc H50 is provided on the outer periphery of the disc H50. do. This initial position (disc H50) is displaced in the rotational direction of the disc H50 every time a game medal is paid out. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, and further explanation will be given from the timing of paying out the fourth game medal.

In the upper diagram of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate at a constant speed, and the release biasing means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, it can be seen that the initial position (disc H50) has been rotated by an angle A from the position where the third game medal was paid out. That is, when the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, the disk H50 rotates by the angle A before the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the dispensing position. Furthermore, the disk H50 does not rotate until the ejection biasing means H70 is displaced from the dispensing position to the initial position.

Next, in the lower left part of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate at a constant speed, and the release biasing means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, after dispensing the fourth game medal, the discharge biasing means H70 is displaced from the dispensing position to the initial position, but since the disk H50 is not rotating during this time, the fourth game medal It can be seen that the fourth game medal is rotated by an angle A from the position where it was paid out, in the same way as when it was paid out.

Then, as shown in the lower right row, after the fifth game medal is paid out, the drive of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, and the payout of the game medals is completed. After turning off the drive of the hopper motor H80, the rotation of the disk H50 stops, but the initial position (disk H50) is a position shifted by an angle B in the rotational direction from the position where the fifth game medal was paid out. Stop. The reason for this configuration is that, especially when dispensing the first game medal, the hopper motor H80 does not reach a constant speed state immediately from the start of driving, but takes a predetermined time to reach a constant speed state. It takes. In other words, if the release biasing means H70 is in the initial position when dispensing the first game medal (hopper motor H80 is in an accelerated state to constant speed state), then the second and subsequent game medals (hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state) Compared to the case where game medals are paid out, there is a delay due to the fact that the hopper motor H80 is in an accelerated state.

Here, the process from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out will be explained in detail. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the hopper motor H80 changes from a stopped state to an accelerated state and then to a constant speed state. Here, the rotational speed in a constant speed state is assumed to be A (m/t). The acceleration state is a state in which acceleration processing is performed from speed 0 to constant speed A, and the average rotational speed in the period from speed 0 to constant speed state (period of acceleration state) is expressed as B (m/t ), then B<A. Therefore, the average rotational speed C (m/t) from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out satisfies B<C<A.

Next, the process from when the first game medal is paid out to when the second game medal is paid out will be explained in detail. Since the hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state when the first game medal is paid out, it is in a constant speed state from the time the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. It will remain as it is. Therefore, the average rotational speed from when the first game medal is paid out until when the second game medal is paid out is A.

As mentioned above, the average rotational speed C from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is higher than the average rotation speed C from when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. Since the average rotational speed A until the medals are paid out is faster, the distance that the disk H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out, and the first game medal are If the distance that the disk H50 rotates from the time a medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out is the same distance, the distance from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped to when the first game medal is played is the same. The time required until the medals are paid out is longer than the time required from the time the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 121, in this example, after the last game medal (the fifth game medal in the figure) is paid out in the game medal payout process, the disk H50 is held at a predetermined angle ( In the fifth embodiment, the rotation direction is shifted by an angle B) and then stopped (rotation distance becomes longer). With this configuration, the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out can be reduced to two times after the first game medal is paid out. The distance that the disc H50 rotates until the second game medal is paid out (the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the time the second game medal is paid out until the third game medal is paid out, etc. is also the same distance) ), the time required from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out can be made shorter than the time required from when the first game medal is paid out to when the second game medal is paid out. This makes it possible to approximate (approximate) the time required for the medals to be paid out, and by paying out the game medals at a good tempo, the player can play the game without feeling any discomfort.

The width of the deviation in the rotational direction (angle B) when the disk H50 stops after the hopper motor H80 is driven depends on the period from the acceleration state to the constant speed state due to the drive of the hopper motor H80. During this period, by considering the difference between the rotation width of the hopper motor H80 in the accelerated state and the rotation width of the hopper motor H80 in the constant speed state, the ejection urging means H70 is activated to release the disk H50 after the hopper motor H80 is driven. It is determined how far the rotational direction should be shifted from the initial position before stopping. The difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in an accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in a constant speed state corresponds from a position corresponding to the initial position of the discharge urging means H70 of the hopper motor H80 to a dispensing position of the discharge urging means H70. It is preferable that the angle B is sufficiently smaller than the angle A because it is sufficiently smaller than the width to the position. It should be noted that even if there is a deviation in the rotational direction by angle B, the system is configured so that the detection of game medals by the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 is not affected, and the timing chart in FIG. Based on this, game medals are detected.

＜＜Effect＞＞
With this configuration, when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, a player who receives a payout of game medals can receive the payout of game medals at approximately constant intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. For example, by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, (1) game medals do not collide with each other, and (2) game medals do not jam due to collisions with each other. This allows the game to proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, by configuring the disc H50 to shift by a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) in the rotational direction and stop after the last game medal is paid out, unauthorized instruments can be removed from the discharge port D240. It is possible to prevent a situation where game medals are illegally obtained due to intrusion.

<<<<Sixth Embodiment Control when communication between main control board and sub-control board is disabled>>>>
Next, as a sixth embodiment, processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible will be described. The case where communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible is especially assuming that various commands set from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side cannot be sent. There is. For example, in the game progress control process shown in FIG. 16, the main control board M sends various commands related to the game to the sub-control board based on the progress of the game, etc. As a process related to the subroutine, various commands are periodically sent from the main control board side to the sub control board side at a predetermined time period (T in this example, but the time is set to about 2 ms, for example). is configured to send. The sub-control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and execute effects based on the commands. The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and although the sub control board S can receive commands from the main control board M, it is possible to receive commands from the main control board side. It is configured so that it is impossible to send commands to. The gaming machine has a main control board M and a sub-control board S each having programs related to execution processing (the program held by the main control board M is called a main-side program, and the program held by the sub-control board S is called a sub-side program). For example, the sub-control board S has a sub-side program configured to execute a performance using reception of a predetermined command from the main control board M as a trigger. In other words, under a situation where commands cannot be received from the main control board M, the sub control board S is unable to execute the processing configured in the sub-side program. A situation where the sub control board S cannot receive commands from the main control board M may occur, for example, due to poor contact of a harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S. There may be a problem. However, even if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible, it is configured so that the main side program of the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, can be executed. The game itself related to the main program is configured to be executable even if communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible. In addition, if communication is restored between the main control board M and sub-control board S from a situation where communication is disabled between the main control board M and the sub-control board S, the progress status of the program on the main side will be changed. Based on this, a command related to processing after communication is restored is sent from the main control board side to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to processing after communication is restored from the main control board M. Execute processing based on. In the following, using FIGS. 122 to 126, when communication with the sub control board S becomes impossible while executing various commands on the main control board M, the main control board M and the sub control board An example of processing performed by the control board S will be described as a sixth embodiment.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payment-related processing When commands and channels are one-to-one >>>
FIG. 122 shows a chronological flow of processing as an example of processing when communication between main control board M and sub-control board S becomes impossible during execution of processing related to payment. First, it is assumed that the number of games is a predetermined number of games, starting from the Nth game, and processing is performed over the N+1 game. In the sixth embodiment, as a process performed by the main control board M, in particular, a command based on the progress of the game is sent to the sub-control board S, and as a process performed by the sub-control board S, commands are received from the main control board M. One set of processing (one order in the sixth embodiment) is the execution of effects based on the commands. Note that the sub-control board S does not execute the effects based on all the commands received from the main control board M, and may execute the effects based on the received commands or may not execute the effects. be. For example, in FIGS. 122 to 126, the sub control board S executes an effect in response to each command sent by the main control board M, but when executing an effect based on the reception of each command, Please note that in some cases, the performance may not be executed. In a situation where one or more credits exist, when the payment button is operated to perform credit payment, the speaker S20 outputs a payment sound corresponding to the payment of game medals from the speaker S20. However, it is assumed that the audio channel that outputs the sound during payment is a channel that corresponds only to the sound during payment. For example, the sub-control board S executes the performance based on commands received from the main control board M. In particular, when executing a process of outputting audio from the speaker S20, The command is associated with the audio channel of the speaker S20. In other words, audio is output from the speaker S20 from the audio channel corresponding to the received command. Note that the command and the audio channel do not need to have a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, a plurality of commands (for example, a command related to starting payment, a plurality of commands related to detection of a predetermined error, etc.) may be associated with one audio channel. With this configuration, even if the number of commands related to audio output increases, it is possible to configure the system to output audio without increasing the number of channels.

<<Configuration 1>>
FIG. 122 will be described in detail. First, as processing order 1, the main control board M sends a command based on the start of payment to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that payment is being made from the speaker S20.
In <<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of processing related to payment, when the command and channel are one-to-one>>, the sound that outputs the sound during payment is It is assumed that the channel supports only the command related to the start of payment, and does not support other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound that the payment is being made, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. At this time, for example, communication may be disconnected due to poor connection of the harness etc. that electrically connects the main control board M and sub-control board S, etc. The cases where communication is disconnected are not limited to this. Any situation may be applicable as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound during payment, the main control board M executes payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed. By making this determination, a command related to the completion of payment is sent to the sub-control board, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during payment. Execute the process to end.

As order 2, the main control board M sends a command related to the completion of payment to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M does not complete the payment. It is not possible to send a command related to the termination to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment. Note that while the main control board M executes the payment process based on the detection of the operation of the payment button and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, but the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is progressing.

The main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and after the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub-control board S has not been able to receive the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the processing related to payment has been completed, and plays the Nth game. Sets commands for next processing.

As order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub control board S by determining that the Nth game has started and game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, and also outputs a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M. Since the message cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting medal insertion has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation, and receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As step 5, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and receives the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In order 6, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now able to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel (the first reel is the reel on which the player first performs the stop operation among the plurality of reels) is received, the main control board M controls the first reel. A command related to accepting a stop operation is transmitted to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As order 7, by determining that the second reel stop operation (the second reel is the reel on which the player performs the second reel stop operation among the plurality of reels), the main control board M transmits a command related to accepting the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to accepting the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the second reel stop operation, and at the same time outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As order 8, by determining that the stop operation of the third reel (the third reel is the reel on which the player performs the stop operation third among the plurality of reels), the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, the command related to stopping the stop display symbol that is sent immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the display symbol is taken as an example. Based on the command from the control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a voice command that determines the winning combination (for example, the push-order bell combination) in which game medals are paid out in the Nth game, and performs a reel stop operation. A command related to the case where the symbol combination related to the winning condition device is stopped and displayed (in the sixth embodiment, it is referred to as a "winning command") etc. is transmitted (as a command for the next processing of the N game). It is also possible to configure

In order 9, by determining that all the reels have been stopped, the main control board M transmits a command related to stopping the stop display symbols to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while receiving the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to stopping the stop display symbols has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive data from the main control board M because the communication between the two parties is temporarily cut off. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command related to the completion of payment, and during the period from the game medal insertion in the Nth game until the stop operation of all reels is performed, The system is configured to continue outputting the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds to order 10 and order 11. As order 10, similar to order 1 for the Nth game, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of payment to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that payment is being made from the speaker S20. At this time, the sound during payment that is output from the speaker S20 will be output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the sound during payment that was output in the Nth game, as described above. In other words, by sending a command from the main control board M to the sub-control board S based on the detection of the operation of the payment button in the N+1st game, the sub-control board S receives the payment for the N+1st game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start, the output of the sound during payment is started, while the output of the sound is terminated during payment regarding the Nth game (As a process of the sub-control board S, Output of sound → Receive command related to start of payment for the N+1 game → End output of sound during payment for the N+1 game → Start output of sound during payment for the N+1 game).

In order 11, the main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed, and issues a command related to the completion of payment. Send to the sub control board side. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S executes a process of terminating the output of the sound during payment for the N+1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while a process that involves the output of audio is being executed, the player can output the audio. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is possible to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, instead of stopping the game due to an error, the system is configured to allow the game to proceed on the main control board M, so both machines can be operated without temporarily cutting off the power to the game machine to deal with the error. By restoring communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can terminate audio output while the game is progressing.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payment-related processing When the command and channel are not one-to-one >>>
<<Configuration 2>>
Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, as processing order 1, the main control board M sends a command based on the start of payment to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that payment is being made from the speaker S20.
In <<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of processing related to payment, when the command and channel are not one-to-one>>, the sound that outputs the sound during payment The channel is assumed to support not only commands based on the detection of operation of the checkout button, but also other commands (here, it is referred to as "error detection command based on detection of door open error flag"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound that the payment is being made, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound during payment, the main control board M executes payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed. By making this determination, a command related to the completion of payment is sent to the sub-control board, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during payment. Execute the process to end.

As order 2, the main control board M sends a command related to the completion of payment to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M does not complete the payment. It is not possible to send a command related to the termination to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment. Note that while the main control board M executes the payment process based on the detection of the operation of the payment button and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Although communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is progressing.

The main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and after the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub-control board S has not been able to receive the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the processing related to payment has been completed, and plays the Nth game. Sets commands related to next processing.

As order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S by determining that the Nth game has started and game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. Based on receiving the command related to acceptance of medal insertion from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to medal insertion, and also outputs a command related to completion of payment from the main control board M. Since the message cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting medal insertion has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation, and receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As step 5, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and receives the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In order 6, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now able to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to termination cannot be received, the output of the sound during checkout is not ended and the output of the sound during inspection continues. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 7, by determining that the second reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to accepting the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the second reel stop operation, and at the same time outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 8, by determining that the third reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to accepting the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, the command related to stopping the stop display symbol that is sent immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the display symbol is taken as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command to output audio based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next processing of the Nth game).

In order 9, by determining that all the reels have been stopped, the main control board M transmits a command related to stopping the stop display symbols to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while receiving the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to stopping the stop display symbols has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive data from the main control board M because the communication between the two parties is temporarily cut off. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command related to the completion of payment, and during the period from the game medal insertion in the Nth game until the stop operation of all reels is performed, The system is configured to continue outputting the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment.

Next, as the N+1 game, the process proceeds to order 10. Assume that in order 10, a predetermined error has occurred. The error at this time will be explained using a door opening error as an example, but the content of the error is not limited to this, and it can be any error such as a loading error, a dispensing error, a loading reception sensor retention error, etc. good. When the main control board M determines that a door opening error has occurred, particularly because the front door DU is open, it sends an error detection command to the sub control board S by detecting the door opening error flag. The sub control board S performs processing to output a door open error notification sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving the error detection command by detecting the door open error flag. Note that here, as described above, the command based on the detection of the payment button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door open error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. In other words, the sub-control board S receives an error detection command by detecting the door open error flag in the N+1 game while the output of the sound during payment continues from the N-th game. It is configured to end the output of the sound during payment and start outputting the door open error notification sound in the N+1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while a process that involves the output of audio is being executed, the player can output the audio. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is possible to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
Furthermore, when an error occurs, by associating the audio channel output from the speaker S20 with multiple commands such as commands related to error detection, the error notification sound can be reliably output and the player can be informed of the error. To provide a user-friendly game machine that can reliably notify what is occurring and can terminate audio output while the game is progressing by restoring communication between the two sides. Can be done.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during the period when the minimum gaming time has not elapsed When the command and channel are one-to-one>>>
<<Configuration 3>>
Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. In particular, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible during a period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed from when the start lever D50 is operated to when the reels start rotating. The flow of processing in this case will be explained. First, as processing order 1, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect (herein referred to as a wait sound) related to the start lever operation from the speaker S20.
<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during a period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed When the command and channel are one-to-one>>, a wait sound is output. The audio channel supports only commands related to start lever operation, and does not support other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the wait sound, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. At this time, for example, communication may be disconnected due to poor connection of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and sub-control board S, etc. The cases where communication is disconnected are not limited to this. Any situation may be applicable as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the wait sound, the main control board M has started a state in which it is ready to start rotating the reels based on the start lever operation (here, a state in which the reels are ready to start rotating) has started. By determining that the reel rotation start standby state is started, the sub control board S sends a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, and by receiving the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, the sub control board S starts the wait state. The device is configured to execute processing for terminating sound output.

As order 2, the main control board M sends a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M cannot send a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, it continues outputting the wait sound without ending the output of the wait sound. Note that while the main control board M is executing processing related to starting the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state. However, the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is progressing.

After the main control board M completes the processing related to starting the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, but the main control board M has finished the process related to starting the reel rotation start standby state. Then, a command related to the next process of the Nth game is set.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and also outputs a sound effect related to the start of a standby state for starting reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In order 4, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now able to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to starting the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As order 5, by determining that the second reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, and at the same time outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to starting the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 6, by determining that the third reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the third reel stop operation based on receiving a command related to accepting the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, and at the same time outputs a sound effect related to accepting the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to starting the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, the command related to stopping the stop display symbol that is sent immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the display symbol is taken as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command to output audio based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next processing of the Nth game).

In order 7, by determining that all reels have been stopped, the main control board M transmits a command related to stopping the stop display symbols to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to stopping the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while receiving a command from the main control board M to start the standby state for starting reel rotation. Since it cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to stopping the stop display symbols has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive data from the main control board M because the communication between the two parties is temporarily cut off. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state, and is a command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation, from the time when game medals are inserted in the Nth game until the stop operation of all reels is performed. During the period, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds to order 8 and order 9. In order 8, by determining that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of medal insertion from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, and also causes the main control board M to start rotating the reels for the Nth game. Since the command related to starting the standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting medal insertion has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on receiving a command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation. At this time, the wait sound output from the speaker S20 will be output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the wait sound output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state for the N+1 game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S can control the reel rotation for the N+1 game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start of the start standby state, the output of the wait sound related to the Nth game is started, while the output of the wait sound related to the Nth game is finished (as a process of the sub control board S, the output of the wait sound related to the Nth game is → Receive command to start reel rotation start standby state for N+1 game → End output of wait sound for N+ game → Start output of wait sound for N+1 game).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while a process that involves the output of audio is being executed, the player can output the audio. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is possible to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, instead of stopping the game due to an error, the system is configured to allow the game to proceed on the main control board M, so both machines can be operated without temporarily cutting off the power to the game machine to deal with the error. By restoring communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can terminate audio output while the game is progressing.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during the execution of payout processing When the command and channel are not one-to-one >>>
<<Configuration 4>>
Next, FIG. 125 will be described in detail. In particular, the flow of processing will be described when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible while game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40. First, as processing order 1, when a winning combination for which game medals are paid out in the Nth game (for example, a push order bell combination, etc.) is won and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the hopper H40. A command related to the start of medal payout is sent to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the payout of game medals (herein referred to as medal payout sound) from the speaker S20.
In <<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payout process, when the command and channel are not one-to-one>>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is It is assumed that not only commands related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 but also other commands are supported (herein, "commands related to start lever operation"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the winning, and the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning is paid out from the hopper H40. By determining that the game medals have been paid out from the hopper H40, a command related to the end of the payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, and by the sub-control board S receiving the command related to the end of the payout of medals from the hopper H40, It is configured to execute a process of terminating the output of the medal payout sound.

As order 2, a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M is sent to the hopper H40. It is not possible to send a command related to the end of medal payout to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. It should be noted that while the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the winning, and finishes determining whether the game medals should be paid out from the hopper H40 due to the winning, the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out for the winning. The processing performed by the control board M is progressing.

The main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the winning, and after determining that the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning has been paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M and the sub-control Restore communication with the board S. At this time, the sub-control board S has not been able to receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the main control board M, but the main control board M has paid out from the hopper H40 the number of gaming medals to be paid out due to the winning. Therefore, the processing for the Nth game is completed, and the command related to the N+1th game is set.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds to order 3 and order 4. In order 3, by determining that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, and at the same time, the main control board M finishes dispensing medals for the Nth game. Since the command related to this cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to medal insertion reception has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on receiving a command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation. Here, as described above, the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. In other words, while the output of the medal payout sound continues from the Nth game, the sub-control board S receives a command related to the start of the standby state for starting reel rotation in the N+1st game, thereby issuing medals in the Nth game. It is configured to end the output of the sound and start outputting the wait sound in the N+1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while a process that involves the output of audio is being executed, the player can output the audio. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is possible to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, by associating multiple commands such as commands related to the progress of the game, communication between both parties can be restored, making it possible to end audio output while the game is progressing.This is a user-friendly game. machine can be provided.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payout process When commands and channels are one-to-one>>><<Configuration 5>>
Next, FIG. 126 will be described in detail. In particular, the main control board M and the sub-control board S during a predetermined period (here, until the reels start rotating (acceleration processing is performed)) from when game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40. The flow of processing when communication becomes impossible will be explained. First, as processing order 1, when a winning combination for which game medals are paid out in the Nth game (for example, a push order bell combination, etc.) is won and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the hopper H40. A command related to the start of medal payout is sent to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40.
In <<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during the execution of the payout process When the command and channel are one-to-one>>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is Only the command related to the start of medal payout is supported, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the winning, and the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning is paid out from the hopper H40. By determining that the game medals have been paid out from the hopper H40, a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40. The system is configured to execute processing for terminating the output of the medal payout sound.

As order 2, a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M A command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 cannot be sent to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. It should be noted that while the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out in connection with the winning, and while the determination of whether the game medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning are to be paid out from the hopper H40 is completed, the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, The processing performed by the control board M is progressing.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds from order 3 to order 10. As order 3, by determining that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M sends a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S, but the main control board M and the sub-control board Since the communication with S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot send to the sub control board S a command related to accepting medal insertion. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, it is unable to output the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, but it does not finish outputting the medal payout sound. Continue outputting the medal payout sound. In other words, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S is in a state where it cannot receive commands related to the end of medal payout and commands related to acceptance of medal input from the hopper H40. Therefore, the state in which only the medal payout sound is output continues.

As order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S, but the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is Since the main control board M is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot send a command related to start lever operation to the sub control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, so it cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation, and at the same time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M. Continue outputting the payout sound. In other words, since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S is unable to send commands related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, commands related to receiving medal input, and commands related to the start lever operation. Since such a command cannot be received, only the medal payout sound continues to be output.

As order 5, the main control board M sends a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot send a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation from the main control board M, and therefore cannot output the wait sound. Continue outputting. In other words, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S is unable to send commands related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, commands related to medal input reception, and commands related to start lever operation. Since the command and the command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state cannot be received, the state in which only the medal payout sound is output continues.

After the main control board M determines that the reel rotation start standby state has started, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to medal input reception, a command related to the start lever operation, and a command related to the start of the standby state for starting reel rotation. However, the main control board M determines that the reels are ready to start rotating based on the start lever operation, and sets a command for the next process of the N+1 game.

In step 6, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reels have started rotating by operating the start lever. Based on receiving the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and also outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to the start of the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since such a command cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing of the N+1 game.

In order 7, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now able to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from , the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 8, by determining that the second reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from , the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 9, by determining that the third reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to accepting the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from , the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game. For the sake of brevity, the next process for the N+1 game is a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40, but during this time, the command sent by the main control board M to the sub-control board S is as follows: For example, it is also possible to configure the system to transmit a command related to stopping the stop display symbol or a command related to winning a prize.

As order 10, when it is determined that a winning combination (for example, a push order bell combination, etc.) in which game medals are paid out in the N+1 game is won, and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the system from the hopper H40. A command related to the start of paying out game medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. At this time, the medal payout sound output from the speaker S20 will be output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the medal payout sound output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in the N+1st game from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S transmits the command to the hopper H40 in the N+1st game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start of medal payout from H40, the output of the medal payout sound is started, while the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game is finished (as a process of the sub control board S, the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game is Output of medal payout sound → Receive command to start medal payout from hopper H40 for N+1 game → End output of medal payout sound for N+game → Start output of medal payout sound for N+1 game Become).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while a process that involves the output of audio is being executed, the player can output the audio. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is possible to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, instead of stopping the game due to an error, the system is configured to allow the game to proceed on the main control board M, so both sides can be operated without temporarily cutting off the power to the game machine to deal with the error. By restoring communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can terminate audio output while the game is progressing.

<<Configuration related to numerals applicable to this example>>
Here, the configuration regarding the number of internal lottery numbers that can be applied to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the following configuration is applicable to all embodiments in this example.

First, using FIG. 127, the configuration related to the numerals applicable to this example will be described in detail.

<When BB is not activated>
The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has a type 1 BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and a type 2 BB (sometimes referred to as MB). The symbol combination that activates the BB is a winning combination that can be stopped and displayed, and is sometimes referred to as the 1st type BB combination). Seed BB + Cherry" (a conditional device that causes the first type BB combination and cherry to be won twice). In addition, as a role related to 2nd type BB (this is a role in which the symbol combination in which 2nd type BB is activated can be stopped and displayed after winning, and is sometimes referred to as 2nd type BB role), "2nd type BB alone" (2nd type BB alone) It has a condition device in which the BB combination is won alone) and a condition device in which the second type BB + cherry is won multiple times.

In addition, there are four types of winning combinations (combinations with symbol combinations that pay out game medals when stopped and displayed): Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, and Cherry. (10400/65536 won) is sometimes called the main minor prize.

``When BB is not in operation'' shown at the top of the figure is a table regarding the numbers set in a state in which type 1 BB and type 2 BB are not in operation (sometimes referred to as a normal gaming state, etc.). The "number of coins inserted" is the number of coins inserted when it is assumed that the game is executed with a bet of 3 coins in order to calculate various expected values described later, and is the number of coins inserted when the 1st type BB is in operation and the 2nd type BB is in operation. Although the number is 2, the "number of inputs" is 3. In addition, the "number of payouts" is the number of game medals that will be paid out when the "number of inputs" is 3. For example, in a game when type 1 BB is activated, a bet of 2 medals will result in a payout of 15 medals. However, since the "number of inputs" is assumed to be 3, the "number of payouts" is also "15 x 3 ÷ 2 = 22.5".

The "set number" is a set number determined by an internal lottery for each conditional device, and the denominator is 65536. Moreover, the "probability" is the probability that the conditional device is determined by internal lottery.

“Number of games” is the number of games required to calculate various expected values described below. For "Type 1 BB alone", "Type 1 BB + Cherry", "Type 2 BB alone", and "Type 2 BB + Cherry", in the game where you win Type 1 BB or Type 2 BB, you can win Type 1 BB or Type 2 BB. The "number of games" is 1 because this example shows a case where the symbol combinations related to are stopped and displayed. In addition, for "1 type BB total", after winning "1 type BB alone" or "1 type BB + cherry", the 1 type BB is executed after the symbol combination that will activate the 1 type BB stops displaying ( The "number of games" is 24 because this is an example of a case in which the game is completed. In addition, for "2 types of total", after winning "2 types of BB alone" or "2 types of BB + cherry", the 2 types of BB is executed after the symbol combination that will activate the 2 types of BB stops displaying ( The "number of games" is 8 because this is an example of a case in which the game is played.

The "expected number of coins inserted" is the expected value of the number of coins inserted per game in consideration of the probability determined by internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "number of coins inserted x probability x number of games." In addition, the "expected number of payouts" is the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game, taking into account the probability determined by internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "number of payouts x probability x number of games". There is.

Note that the configuration in the same figure may be applied to the case where the game is played as follows.

<Game method 1>
This is a gaming method in which the game is executed in a gaming method that provides the highest profit for the player, and in games where the player wins a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry, which is not a push-order combination such as a push-order bell, game medals are paid out. The game is executed in a stop operation mode (operation mode of the stop button, such as the order of pressing the stop buttons, the timing of the stop button operation, etc.) that causes a certain symbol combination to be stopped and displayed (to win a prize). In addition, in a game in which a player wins a push order combination such as a push order bell (although not shown in the figure, it may be configured to have a push order combination), the stop operation mode that results in the highest number of payouts is selected. and run the game.

<Game method 2>
In a game where you win a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry that is not a push order combination such as a push order bell, a stop operation mode (operation mode of the stop button) that stops displaying (wins) a symbol combination that pays out game medals. The game is executed according to the order in which the stop button is pressed, the timing of the stop button operation, etc. In addition, in games where you win a push order combination such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, it may be configured to have a push order combination), the game will be randomly selected regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is executed. The game is executed in a stop operation mode (randomize the order of pressing the stop buttons and the timing of the stop button operations). Note that "random" means, for example, when it comes to the order in which the stop button is pressed, all 6 kinds of press orders are selected at an equal rate, and when it comes to the stop timing, all 20 frames of stop operation timing are selected at an equal rate. It is to be.

“Inside Medium” is a game after winning either “1st type BB alone”, “1st type BB + cherry”, “2nd type BB alone”, “2nd type BB + cherry”, and 1st type BB Or a game in which the symbol combinations that activate the 2nd type BB and symbol combinations such as bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays do not stop and display (in situations where the winning of the 1st type BB or 2nd type BB is carried over) (games that did not win small roles or replays). In the same figure, at 290/65536, a game in which the winning of the 1st type BB or 2nd type BB was carried over and the small role or replay did not win was executed, and the "expected number of inputs" was approximately 0. .013275146, and the "expected number of payouts" is 0.

<Type 1 BB in operation>
"Type 1 BB in operation" shown in the second row from the top of the figure is a table regarding the number of settings when the type 1 BB is in operation. When the first type BB is in operation, the prescribed number is two, and the configuration is such that a bell, a watermelon, a symbol, or a cherry can be won without winning. Furthermore, the "number of payouts" for all of the bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries is 15, making it the most likely to be won (easily decided) for the bell. Further, one or more (or all) of the "placed numbers" for winning watermelon, symbols, and cherries may be configured to be the same as "when BB is not activated". As mentioned above, in games when Type 1 BB is in operation, a bet of 2 coins results in a payout of 15 coins in all games, so the expected number of payouts when the specified number of coins is 3 ("When BB is not activated") ``Number of payouts'' for ``1 type total'') is 22.5.

<Type 2 BB in operation>
"Type 2 BB in operation" shown at the bottom of the figure is a table regarding the number of positions when the type 2 BB is in operation. When the 2nd type BB is in operation, the specified number is 2, and when the game is executed in the specified stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in the pressing order of "Left → Middle → Right") , is configured so that only the symbol combinations related to the bell are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the "number of payouts" when the symbol combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed is 15. As mentioned above, in games when the 2-type BB is in operation, a bet of 2 coins results in a payout of 15 coins in all games, so the expected number of payouts when the specified number of coins is 3 ("When the BB is not activated") ``Number of payouts'' for ``Total of 2 types'') is 22.5.

<BB not working>
The "BB non-operating time" will be explained in detail again. "No replay" means four types of winning combinations: Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, and Cherry. "Replay included" means five types of winning combinations: Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, Cherry, and Replay. It shows. The "winning OUT" in "no replay" is the sum of the expected payout numbers of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, and is approximately 1.237258911. In addition, the "winning and winning ball rate" in "no replay" is calculated as "the sum of the expected value of the number of payouts (win OUT)" and "the sum of the expected value of the number of balls thrown in for bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries". It is the value obtained by multiplying the divided value by 100, that is, the ball payout rate that is the sum of the winning combinations, and is approximately 222.8%.

The "winning OUT" in "re-game included" is the sum of the expected number of payouts for bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and re-games, and is approximately 1.649246216. Although the game medals are not actually paid out even if the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed, if the game is executed with a bet of 3 coins and the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed, Since an automatic bet for three coins is executed, the "number of payouts" related to the replay is three. In addition, the "winning and winning ball rate" in "re-game included" is the sum of "the expected value of the number of payouts (win OUT)" and "the sum of the expected value of the number of balls put in for bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and re-plays." It is the value obtained by multiplying the value divided by "value" by 100, that is, the ball payout rate that is the sum of winning combinations and replays, and is approximately 170.5%.

The "1 type total ball rate" is the value obtained by dividing the expected value of the number of payouts for the "1 type total" by the expected value of the number of balls put in, multiplied by 100, and is 750.0%. Further, the "total ball rate of 2 types" is the value obtained by dividing the expected value of the number of payouts of the ``total of 2 types'' by the expected value of the number of balls put in, multiplied by 100, and is 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values>
Here, when comparing the above-mentioned values, the relationships are as follows.
(1) “Expected number of payouts” for “2 types combined” < “Expected number of payouts” for “No replay” (Win OUT)
(2) “Expected number of payouts” for “2 types combined” < “Expected number of payouts” for “replay included” (Win OUT)
(3) Expected value of number of payouts for “2 types combined” < “Expected number of payouts of main minor role”
(4) “Expected number of inputs” of “Internal Medium” < “Expected number of inputs” of main minor role
(5) “Expected number of inputs” for “Internal Medium” < “Expected number of inputs for replay”

In addition, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can earn is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the system is configured so that the 1st type BB cannot be won while the 2nd type BB is activated. As a result, there is a concern that players' expectations for the game will fade. Therefore, as mentioned in (1) above, by designing so that the "expected number of payouts" for "two types combined" is less than the "expected number of payouts" for "no replays", it is possible to It is possible to make the "expected number of payouts" of small roles higher than that, and even when the 2-type BB is in operation, it is not during BB operation (bonus is in operation) but when BB is not in operation (bonus is not in operation). This makes it easier for the player to feel the situation, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special situation.

In addition, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can earn is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the system is configured so that the 1st type BB cannot be won while the 2nd type BB is activated. As a result, there is a concern that players' expectations for the game will fade. Therefore, as mentioned in (2) above, by designing so that the "expected number of payouts" for "two types combined" is less than the "expected number of payouts" for "replay included", it is possible to It is possible to make the "expected number of payouts" of small roles higher than that, and even when the 2-type BB is in operation, it is not during BB operation (bonus is in operation) but when BB is not in operation (bonus is not in operation). This makes it easier for the player to feel the situation, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special situation.

In addition, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can earn is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the system is configured so that the 1st type BB cannot be won while the 2nd type BB is activated. As a result, there is a concern that players' expectations for the game will fade. Therefore, as mentioned in (3) above, by designing the "expected number of payouts" of "2 types total" < "expected number of payouts" of the main small role, the main small role The "expected number of payouts" of the winning combination can be increased, and even when the 2nd type BB is in operation, it is possible to make it possible to make the BB inactive (bonus inactive) instead of BB in action (bonus in action). It becomes easier for the player to feel the situation, and the player can play the game without being conscious of the special state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine having one or more of the above configurations (1) to (3), when the 2nd type BB is in operation, the prescribed number is 2 coins, the average number of coins paid out per game is 2 coins, etc. It may be configured to lower the ball output rate (total ball rate of the two types) during the two type BB operation. With such a configuration, the effects of having the configurations (1) to (3) described above are further enhanced.

In addition, if a player with low skill, such as a player who is unable to hit the target, plays in "Inside Medium", the symbol combinations related to the winning 1st type BB or 2nd type BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill is lowered. There is a concern that low-level players will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, as mentioned in (4) above, by designing the "expected number of inputs" of "internal medium" < "expected number of inputs of the main minor role", even in "internal medium", the main minor role It is possible to increase the ratio of games in which a bell is won, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which disadvantages are unlikely to occur even when a player with low skill plays the game.

In addition, if a player with low skill, such as a player who is unable to hit the target, plays in "Inside Medium", the symbol combinations related to the winning 1st type BB or 2nd type BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill is lowered. There is a concern that low-level players will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, as in (5) above, by designing so that the "expected number of inputs" of "internal medium" < the "expected value of the number of inputs" of "replay", even in "internal medium" It is possible to increase the ratio of games in which a player wins, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which disadvantages are unlikely to occur even when a player with low skill plays the game.

<<<Seventh Embodiment Gate Technology>>>
Next, as a seventh embodiment, a gate mechanism included in a main board case M40 that stores a main control board M installed inside a gaming machine (casing) will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the entrance portion into which the resin material (plastic) flows when molding the main board case M40 is referred to as a gate.

<<Main board case molding>>
As described above, the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment is made of resin material (plastic). The main board case M40 is formed by injecting resin material (plastic) from a gate into a metal mold (hereinafter referred to as a mold) to form a specific shape, and then performing a cooling and solidification process. It is common that the product is molded using an injection molding method. The main board case M40 can be molded not only by injection molding, but also by, for example, sandwiching a cylindrical plastic hollow body between molds, blowing air into the mold to make it adhere to the wall of the mold, and then going through a cooling and solidifying process. Any molding method may be used as long as the resin material (plastic) is poured into the molded product through a gate, such as a blow molding method to obtain a molded product. After the resin material (plastic) is injected, the gate is cut, and the cut area will have a slight depression compared to a flat surface without the gate.

<<Gate method>>
When a resin material (plastic) is injected through a gate using an injection molding method, various restrictions are placed on the gate. Here, examples of constraints include the inflow speed of the resin material (plastic), the temperature of the resin material (plastic), and the size and shape of the gate portion M80. In other words, by determining the optimal conditions (inflow speed, temperature, gate size and shape) according to the size of the main board case M40 that is the object of molding, and going through the molding process according to those conditions, high-quality molding can be achieved. This means that you can obtain goods.

Methods for injection injection of resin materials (plastic) can be roughly divided into restriction gates, which limit the inflow of resin materials (plastic) by minimizing the size of the gate, and methods that restrict the inflow of resin materials (plastic) directly without going through a gate. There is an unrestricted gate for pouring plastic). In the various case members used in gaming machines, it is possible to reduce the size of the gate to some extent from the perspective of size, etc., and limiting gates are sometimes used in consideration of the aesthetic appearance of the finished product. However, in the seventh embodiment, as long as the main board case M40 has a gate, there is no problem in any method for injecting the resin material (plastic).

<<Gate type>>
When injecting resin material (plastic) from a restriction gate, there are various types of gates with various characteristics. Examples include the side gate type, which injects resin material (plastic) from a gate placed on the side of the molded product, the pin gate type, which molds multiple molded products from one mold, and the pin gate type, which is placed in a tunnel shape in the mold. There are submarine gate types in which resin material (plastic) is injected through a sealed gate. The main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment may be formed using any of these gate types.

The main board case M40 described as the seventh embodiment is molded as described above, and the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

<<Configuration of main board case M40>>
First, the configuration of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a front view of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment. As described above, the main board case M40 is molded from resin material (plastic) as a raw material. The surface of the main board case M40 (for example, the front surface that is visible to players and game hall managers when the front door DU is opened) is a sticker that includes, for example, the model information of the game machine, etc. In addition to parts such as type stickers, seal members (not shown) containing information related to the game machine, such as caulking recording paper to record the security measures taken at the production factory, etc., are affixed. It also has a gate portion M80 that includes a gate mark (state after cutting the gate) where a resin material (plastic) is injected. Note that the shape of the surface of the main board case M40 in FIG. 128 is an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, the shape may be square, rectangular, or trapezoidal.

<<Accommodation diagram of main control board M>>
Next, FIG. 129 is a front view of the main control board M accommodated in the main board case M40. In addition, when housing the main control board M in the main board case M40, the main control board M is stored so as to be sandwiched between the main board case M40 and other case members (not shown), and the main board case M40 and other case members Generally, the main control board M is fixed inside the main board case M40 by integrating the case member with screws.

The main control board M includes a microprocessor CPUMC as an IC element with a CPU function, other IC elements IC01 to IC05 without a CPU function, resistors R1 to R6, capacitors C01 to C02, and a connector CN01. ~CN04 are implemented. Further, the main control board M is provided with a setting display LEDM 90 capable of displaying setting values, a performance display device SH in which four-digit segments (to be described later) are formed in a horizontal row, and the like. Note that other electronic components such as diodes and LEDs may also be mounted on the main control board M, but illustration thereof is omitted.

<<Gate arrangement of main board case M40>>
The main board case M40 is arranged to cover the main control board M (the dotted line in FIG. 129 corresponds to the main board case M40), and since the main board case M40 is made of plastic, the main board case M40 is It is configured so that components mounted on the main control board M can be visually recognized through the main control board M.

As described above, the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment is configured to have the gate portion M80 on its surface. It is preferable that these gate portions M80 are arranged at positions where they do not particularly obstruct the visibility of the members arranged on the main control board M. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, the main board case M40 is placed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the type seal, performance display device SH, setting display LED M90, etc. that can be confirmed by the amusement park administrator or the National Police Agency. An example of this pattern is More specifically, the configuration is such that the gate part M80 is not arranged at a position where the model sticker, performance display device SH, and setting display LEDM90 are projected onto the main board case M40 in a direction perpendicular to the main control board M. has been done.

<Effect>
By arranging the gate part M80 in this way, the gate part M80 obstructs visibility when the player's administrator checks information related to the gaming machine from the performance display device SH or the setting display LEDM90. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Further, by configuring the gate portion M80 so that it is not placed in a position overlapping with various seal members such as a type seal, it is possible to make the seal member difficult to peel off.

Further, it is preferable that the gate part M80 is not arranged at the position where the CPUMC is projected onto the main board case M40 in the vertical direction with respect to the main control board M (the gate part M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). be. Although the details will be described later, in the main board case M40, the gate part M80 is a fragile part, so there is a possibility that a so-called tampering action may be performed on the main control board M inside the main board case M40 through the gate part M80. There is a possibility that it will be damaged. Therefore, the CPUMC should be configured so that the gate part M80 is not arranged at the position projected onto the main board case M40 in the vertical direction with respect to the main control board M (the gate part M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). As a result, it has a main control chip C that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and a built-in ROMC 110 that stores programs related to the operation control of the gaming machine, so that the gate section M80 can be kept away from the CPUMC that affects the outcome of the game. This makes it possible to prevent so-called fraudulent activities such as program tampering through the gate section M80.

Further, when current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) arranged on the main control board M, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such an IC element is installed near the CPUMC, there is a risk that the noise generated from the IC element may have a negative effect on the operation of the CPUMC. It is preferable not to place it near.

In the seventh embodiment, no IC element is placed near the CPUMC on the main control board M. Specifically, in any IC element, within the vicinity of the CPUMC (in this case, from the outer periphery of the CPUMC package body to W1, which is the length of the short side of the upper surface of the rectangular package body) (dotted line in FIG. Note that W1 has a length equal to or longer than the length of one resistor (R1 to R6) (the length when mounted).

In this manner, in the seventh embodiment, all of the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board M are arranged at a distance of W1 or more from the CPUMC. With this configuration, even if noise is generated from the IC element, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise will have an adverse effect on the operation of the CPUMC.

<<Structure of gate part M80>>
Next, the structure of the gate portion M80 in the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment and a side view of the main board case M40 viewed from the direction of the side surface A. As explained in FIG. 128, the main board case M40 has a gate part M80 on the surface (for example, the surface that can be seen by players, game hall managers, etc. when the front door DU is opened). , the gate portion M80 has a slight depression compared to a portion of the surface other than the gate portion M80.

In the side view of the main board case M40 in FIG. 130, the main board case A side (the above-mentioned surface) has a gate part M80, and the main board case B side does not have a gate part. Here, the A side of the main board case will be explained in detail. The main board case A surface is, for example, the surface close to the front door DU direction from the center of the short axis in the side view of the main board case M40 in FIG. 130, and the main board case B surface is based on the center of the short axis. This refers to the surface close to the main control board M direction. In other words, the main board case side A is the side closer to the front door DU, and similarly, the main board case B side can be said to be the side closer to the main control board M. In other words, the main control board M is provided on the side of the main board case B from the center of the short axis.

FIG. 131 shows details of the structure of the gate portion M80. Note that the detailed structure of the gate portion M80 included in the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment may be configured as described in detail below.

<<Structure pattern 1 of gate portion M80>>
First, as a structural pattern of the first gate portion M80, the main board case B surface is configured to be flat. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 131, the gate portion M80 is composed of one convex portion and two concave portions, and is a surface extending horizontally from the main board case A surface (portion other than the gate portion M80). On the other hand, it is a distance A from the tip of the convex portion and a distance B from the tip of the concave portion. At this time, it is preferable that the relationship between A and B is A<B. It should be noted that the one convex portion constituting the gate portion M80 is a gate mark after the gate has been cut. Alternatively, it may be designed so that A=0.

<Effect 1>
Since the convex part of the gate part M80 is separated by a distance A from the main board case A surface, for example, when a person removing the main board case M40 from a gaming machine, when the person checking the part holds the part related to the gate part M80. This makes it possible to prevent accidents such as slipping of the hand and dropping the main board case M40.

<Effect 2>
Further, since the recessed portion of the gate portion M80 is separated from the main board case A surface by the distance B, it becomes possible to smoothly inflow the resin molding (plastic) when molding the main board case M40.

<Effect 3>
In addition, since the main board case B surface directly under the gate part M80 on the main board case A surface is flat, when the main control board M is visually recognized through the main board case M40, the surface related to the gate part M80 Even when viewing from the main control board M, it is possible to visually recognize the main control board M without lowering visibility due to refraction of light.

<<Structure pattern 2 of gate portion M80>>
Next, the structural pattern of the second gate portion M80 is such that the main board case B is recessed (bulging out to the outside of the main board case M40). The gate part M80 in the lower part of the figure is composed of one convex part and two concave parts on the main board case A side, and the main board case A side (the part other than the gate part M80) is extended in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, it is similar to the first pattern that it is separated from the main board case surface A (flat surface) by a distance A from the tip of the convex portion and a distance B from the tip of the concave portion.

In addition, the main board case B side is concave, and the distance from the deepest part of the concave part (the part that bulges outward most) to the convex part on the main board case A side is C, and the main board case B side is concave. The distance from the tip of the recess on the case B surface to the horizontally extended surface of the main board case B surface (other than the gate part M80) is D, and in the relationship between C and D, D<C. It is preferable that a relationship is established. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, from the horizontally extended surface of the main board case A surface (portion other than the gate portion M80) to the horizontally extended surface of the main board case B surface (portion other than the gate portion M80). However, the distance is not limited to this. For example, from the horizontally extended surface of the main board case A side (the part other than the gate part M80) to the main board case B side (the part other than the gate part M80). ) to the horizontally extended plane, C' may be set as C<C', C>C', or C≈C'.

<Effect>
In this way, since the tip of the recess on the main board case B side is separated by the distance D from the horizontally extended surface of the main board case B side (portion other than the gate part M80), for example, the main board case A side It becomes possible to compensate for the decrease in member strength related to the gate portion M80. In other words, the gate portion M80 is recessed compared to a flat surface, and if a force that attempts to destroy the main board case M40 is applied, the gate portion M80 will be thinned by the distance of the recess (for example, the distance B of the structural pattern 1). Therefore, the main board case A surface (portion other than the gate portion M80) is configured to be prevented from being easily destroyed compared to a horizontally extended surface. In this way, the main board case B side is recessed by a predetermined distance even from the surface related to the gate part M80, so that the material strength is equivalent to that of the main board case A side other than the gate part M80. It is possible to keep it.

As above, in the seventh embodiment, the arrangement and configuration of the gate part M80 in the main board case M40 have been explained in detail. It is also possible to apply the present invention to other members), and it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the gate portion M80 in the main board case M40 described above.

<<<<Eighth embodiment Power cutoff and sensor detection>>>>
Next, as an eighth embodiment, sensors related to the detection of game medals installed inside the gaming machine (for example, input reception sensor D10s, first input sensor D20s, second input sensor D30s, chute sensor D40s, first payout sensor The sensor is off before the sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 (which targets the sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2) detects the passing of a game medal, or the sensor is turned off → on after detecting a notification of a game medal, and furthermore, the sensor is turned off and turned on after the game medal notification is detected. Power-off processing and processing related to detecting passage of game medals when a power-off occurs when medals pass through the detection area of the sensor and the sensor is in any state from on to off (eighth embodiment) Now, the game medal credit addition process related to the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, the counting process of the input monitoring counter related to the second input sensor D30s and the chute sensor D40s, the first payout sensor H1, the second payout sensor H1, and the second payout sensor H1. The relationship between the payout sensor H2 and the process of counting the number of game medals to be paid out will be explained.

<<<Relationship between power-off processing and gaming medal credit addition processing>>>
First, the game medals inserted from the medal slot D170 pass through the input acceptance sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path for the game medals (off → on → off), and the game medals are inserted into the medal slot without any error. It flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the selector DS.

The timing at which credits are added to game medals is as detailed in the third embodiment. For example, based on the description in step S1226-8, the first input sensor D20s changes from on to off, and the second input sensor D30s changes from on to off. When the state changes from off to on, the inserted game medals can be detected as bet medals and added to the credits; A game medal inserted at the timing when the second input sensor D30s is turned on or off may be detected as a bet medal, and may be added to the credit. In the eighth embodiment described in detail below, the timing at which credits are added to game medals is when the first input sensor D20s changes from on to off and the second input sensor D30s changes from off to on. configured to be possible. As mentioned above, in this example, "the occurrence of a power outage" means that the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detecting a power outage" means that the gaming machine detects a power outage. It is to detect the occurrence.

The time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by a program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the capacitor installed. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. Below, the parts expressed as time are this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the example range occurs as a comparison of time values, it will not deviate from the design value. It means that it is not. In addition, the same applies to times other than the time from when a power outage occurs to when a power outage is detected, and the various times exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H, etc. applicable to the configuration.

In order to define the relationship between power-off processing and game medal credit addition processing, the time from when a power-off occurs until the power-off is detected is T1, and the input reception sensor D10s is set from OFF → ON to the second input sensor. The time from D30s on to off is T2, and the time from first input sensor D20s off to on to second input sensor D30s on to on is T3. The relationship between T1, T2, and T3 that is applicable to this example will be described in detail below. Although details will be described later, it should be noted that the starting point of T2 is just an example.

<<Operation pattern 1 of power outage processing and game medal credit addition processing>>
FIG. 133 is an example of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the game medal credit addition processing reflected in accordance with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to input that this configuration has are an input reception sensor D10s, a first input sensor D20s, and a second input sensor D30s, and the state of detection of game medals by these sensors is illustrated. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (a1) to (a8), and as time passes, the timing changes from (a1) to (a8).

Under a situation where power is being supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the input acceptance sensor D10s changes from off to on at timing (a1). Furthermore, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off. Next, at timing (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (a3), a power outage occurs. Next, at timing (a4), the first input sensor D20s is turned from off to on.

Next, at the timing (a5), the second input sensor D30s turns from off to on (the first input sensor D20s remains on). Next, at timing (a6), the first input sensor D20s turns from on to off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and credit addition processing is executed. Next, at the timing (a7), the second input sensor D30s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (a8), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. That is, in the figure, even if the power is cut off after the game medal passes the input reception sensor D10s and the input reception sensor D10s turns from on to off, the second input sensor D30s is activated at the timing (a7). After turning from on to off, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes the power off process, so that the credit addition process can be executed normally. Note that in the eighth embodiment, the interrupt processing for detecting a power outage is configured to execute the power off processing in the same interrupt processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the processing using separate interrupts.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T1, T2, and T3 described above is T3<T1<T2. By setting T3<T1, the power-off process can be executed after the credit addition process is executed. Further, the relationship T1<T2 and T3<T2 can be said to be an obvious relationship based on the flow process of game medals.

<Effect>
In this way, even if the power is cut off while the game medals are flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after passing the input reception sensor D10s), the power is cut off after the credit addition process for the game medals is executed. By configuring to perform time processing, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted gaming medals, and even if the gaming medals are inserted into the gaming machine (not returned) because the blocker is on. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which no credits are added.

Note that the configuration regarding the power-on sensor and power-off may be configured as shown in (1-1) to (1-3) or (2-1) to (2-3) below.
(1-1) After the input reception sensor D10s goes from OFF to ON, the power is cut off (timing (a3) in FIG. 133).
(1-2) Before the first input sensor D20s changes from off to on, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes the power off process (timing between (a3) and (a4) in FIG. 133).
(1-3) By turning the blocker from on to off, game medals can be returned without executing credit addition processing.
(2-1) After the input reception sensor D10s goes from OFF to ON, the power is cut off (timing of (a3) in FIG. 133).
(2-2) The gaming machine detects a power outage and executes the power outage process before the second input sensor D30s changes from off to on (timing between (a4) and (a5) in FIG. 133).
(2-3) By turning the blocker from on to off, game medals can be returned without executing credit addition processing.

<<Operation pattern 2 of power outage processing and game medal credit addition processing>>
FIG. 134 is an example of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the game medal credit addition processing reflected in accordance with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to input that this configuration has are an input reception sensor D10s, a first input sensor D20s, and a second input sensor D30s, and the state of detection of game medals by these sensors is illustrated. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (b1) to (b8), and as time passes, the timing changes from (b1) to (b8).

In a situation where power is being supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned from off to on at the timing (b1). Furthermore, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off. Next, at the timing (b2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (b3), the first input sensor D20s is turned from off to on. Next, at timing (a4), a power outage occurs.

Next, at the timing (b5), the second input sensor D30s turns from off to on (the first input sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing (b6), the first input sensor D20s turns from on to off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing (b7), the second input sensor D30s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (a8), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. That is, in the same figure, even if the power is cut off after the game medal reaches the first input sensor D20s and the first input sensor D20s turns from off to on, the second input is performed at the timing (b7). After the sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF, the game machine detects a power outage and executes the power outage process, so that the credit addition process can be executed normally.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T1, T2, and T3 described above is T3<T1<T2. Note that the configuration may be such that T1<T3<T2 holds true. In any of the configurations, as shown in the figure, even if the power is cut off after the first input sensor D20s turns from off to on at timing (b3), the credit addition process ends. Power-off processing can be executed later.

<Effect>
In this way, even if a power outage occurs while the game medals are flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after the first input sensor D20s turns from OFF to ON), the credit addition process for the game medals is executed. By configuring the power-off process to be performed after the power is turned off, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals, and if the game medals are inserted into the game machine (returned) because the blocker is on. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added despite the fact that the player is not credited.

<<Modified example of operation pattern of power outage processing and game medal credit addition processing>>
Further, as a modification of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the game medal credit addition processing, for example, the power-off occurs at a time when the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is on. In this case, the power-off process is executed after the first input sensor D20s is turned off and the second input sensor D30s is turned off, that is, the power-off process is executed after the credit addition process is executed. may be configured.

<Effect>
Even if a power outage occurs while game medals are being inserted, the inserted game medals can be reliably added to the credits by performing power outage processing after the game medal credit addition process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added even though game medals are inserted into the gaming machine.

Further, as a modification of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the game medal credit addition processing, it is also possible to configure the power-off detection timing to be different. For example, the timing at which a power outage occurs is the same as <<operation pattern 1 of power outage processing and game medal credit addition processing>>, and the timing at which a power outage is detected is set to when the gaming medals pass the input reception sensor D10s. , and before reaching the first input sensor D20s, the processing flow is based on the timing of occurrence of various events based on pattern 1, and it is assumed that power is being supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on. Under certain circumstances, the input reception sensor D10s is turned from off to on at timing (a1). Furthermore, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off. Next, at timing (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (a3), a power outage occurs. Next, at timing (a4), the gaming machine detects a power outage, executes a power outage process, and then turns off the blocker. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off immediately after the inserted game medals pass the input acceptance sensor D10s, the power-off processing can be performed before the game medals reach the first input sensor D20s. Since the credit addition process is not executed and the blocker is turned off, game medals are returned from the return slot, making it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

<Effect>
In this way, by executing the power-off processing before the game medals reach the first input sensor D20s, if the credit addition process related to the inserted game medals is not executed due to a power-off, The system can be configured to return the game medals to the player, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player, where the game medals are inserted into the gaming machine but credits are not added. .

In the eighth embodiment, "the time from the input acceptance sensor D10s OFF→ON to the second input sensor D30s ON→OFF" is defined as T2, but it is not limited to this, The time from the timing when the game medals inserted through the medal slot are no longer visible to the player until the second input sensor D30s turns on and off may be set to T2, or the time when half of the game medals inserted through the medal slot are no longer visible to the player may be defined as T2. The time from when the second input sensor D30s is turned on to off may be set as T2, or the time from when some of the gaming medals inserted from the medal slot are no longer visible to the player may be set as T2. The "time from D30s on to off" may be set as T2.

<<<Relationship between power-off processing and counting processing by game medal input monitoring counter>>>
Next, the relationship with the timing related to the counting process by the game medal input monitoring counter will be explained as the timing when the game machine may be in a situation where power is not supplied due to the occurrence of a power outage. Referring to FIG. 135, in the path of the game medals in the medal selector DS, the medal flow path member (referred to as the chute body in the third embodiment) after passing through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. ). In FIG. 135, a chute sensor D40s is provided downstream of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. Similarly, this is a sensor that detects whether or not medals are being inserted normally, and in particular can detect errors that occur after the credit addition process has already been executed (e.g., inserted medal retention error, inserted medal backflow error, etc.) It is configured like this.

The timing at which the game medal insertion monitoring counter performs the counting process is as described in detail in the third embodiment. The monitoring counter performs addition processing from 0 to 1. Then, when the game medals flow down the path in the medal selector DS and, for example, the shoot sensor D40s is turned on from off, the input monitoring counter performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0. Note that the timing at which the game medal addition (subtraction) processing by the input monitoring counter is performed is not limited to this. As described below, for example, when the first input sensor changes from off to on, the input monitoring counter performs an addition process from 0 to 1, and at the timing when the chute sensor D40s changes from on to off. Any configuration may be used as long as it can monitor whether or not the game medals have passed normally, such as a configuration in which the input monitoring counter performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0. Furthermore, instead of counting game medals by the input monitoring counter in the order of addition→subtraction, it may be performed in the order of subtraction→addition (0→-1, then -1→0). Note that an example of a configuration in which it is determined that an error has occurred by the input monitoring counter is that an error has occurred when the counter value C of the input monitoring counter becomes "C<-3 or C<3". It may be configured to determine that there is.

In order to define the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting process by the game medal input monitoring counter, the time from when a power-off occurs until the power-off is detected is T4, from the second input sensor D30s on → off. The time from off to on of the shoot sensor D40s is defined as T5, and the relationship between T4 and T5 will be described in detail below. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage to the detection of a power outage can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by a program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the installed capacitor. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. Furthermore, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates significantly from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. The parts expressed as time below are this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range given as an example for comparing time values occurs, it will not deviate from the design value. There will be no. In addition, the same applies to times other than the time from when a power outage occurs to when a power outage is detected, and the various times exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H, etc. applicable to the configuration.

<<Operation pattern 1 of power-off processing and counting processing by game medal input monitoring counter>>
FIG. 136 is an example of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal input monitoring counter reflected in accordance with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to input shown in the figure are the second input sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether these sensors have detected passage of the game medal (ON or OFF). In addition, the input monitoring counter is configured to perform addition/subtraction processing at specified timings (in this operation pattern, the addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off), and the chute sensor The subtraction process is performed at the timing when the D40s is turned on from off). In addition, in this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (c1) to (c6), and as a process flow, in a situation where power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, (c1) ), the power supply is cut off (the timing of the various sensors at this time is that the first input sensor D20s is on, the second input sensor D30s is off, and the chute sensor D40s is off). Next, at timing (c2), the second input sensor D30s is turned from off to on. Next, at the timing (c3), the second input sensor D30s is turned from ON to OFF, and the addition process of game medals by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned from on to off at a timing between (c2) and (c3). Next, at timing (c4), the chute sensor D40s is turned from off to on, and the game medal subtraction process by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 1 to 0.

Next, at timing (c5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (c6), the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed. In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of a power outage are executed in the same interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the power-off processing using separate interrupt processing. In addition, in the same figure, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is subtracted at the timing (c4), but the input monitoring counter is subtracted at the timing (C5) (the timing when the chute sensor turns from on to off). It may be configured to perform subtraction processing of the counter value.

In this way, in the figure, even if the power is cut off at a timing before the game medals reach the second input sensor D30s, the power is turned off after the shoot sensor D40s is turned from ON to OFF at the timing (c5). Since the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes the power outage process, the credit addition process and the addition/subtraction process of the counter value of the input monitoring counter can be performed normally.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T4 and T5 described above is T4>T5. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off just before the addition process of the input monitoring counter is executed (the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is off), the input of game medals can be monitored. The power-off process can be configured to be executed after the addition process and the subtraction process by the counter are completed.

<Effect>
By performing power-off processing after the counting process (0 → 1 → 0) by the game medal input monitoring counter is executed, the game medal counting process by the input monitoring counter based on detection by various sensors can be executed normally. This makes it possible to normally detect errors and the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

<<Operation pattern 2 of power-off processing and counting processing by game medal input monitoring counter>>
FIG. 137 is an example of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal input monitoring counter reflected in accordance with the timing chart of each sensor. This action pattern is configured to differ from action pattern 1 in the timing at which power interruption is detected. The sensors here are the second input sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether these sensors have detected passage of the game medal (ON or OFF). In addition, addition/subtraction processing is performed at specified timings in the input monitoring counter (in this operation pattern, addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s changes from ON to OFF, and chute sensor D40s changes from OFF to ON). The subtraction process is performed at the timing when the In addition, in this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (d1) to (d5), and as a process flow, a power outage occurs at timing (d1) (the timing at various sensors at this time is (the first input sensor D20s is on, the second input sensor D30s is off, and the chute sensor D40s is off). Next, at timing (d2), the second input sensor D30s is turned from off to on. Next, at timing (d3), the second input sensor D30s is turned from on to off, and the addition process of game medals by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned from on to off at a timing between (d2) and (d3). Next, (d4) the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed. Next, at timing (d5), the game medals reach the shoot sensor D40s, but since the power-off process has been executed, the game medals are not detected by the shoot sensor D40s. In the example shown in the figure, a case is illustrated in which game medals pass through the blocker before the blocker is turned off.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of a power outage are executed in the same interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the power-off processing using separate interrupt processing.

In this way, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs before the gaming medals reach the second input sensor D30s, the gaming machine detects the power outage at the timing (d4) and shuts off the power. Since the time process is executed, the subtraction process of the input monitoring counter cannot be executed before the power-off process, but the credit addition process can be executed before the power-off process. In addition, the input monitoring counter is configured so that, for example, an error occurs when the counter value reaches 5 (even if the counter value deviates due to the insertion of one game medal, the error is not detected immediately). Therefore, even if there is a power outage such as a power outage while the amusement park is open, a single power outage will not be determined as an error related to the input monitoring counter, so credit addition processing will not be performed. If the game can be executed normally, it is possible to ensure the continuation of the normal game.

<<Operation pattern 3 of power-off processing and counting processing by game medal input monitoring counter>>
FIG. 138 is an example of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal input monitoring counter reflected in accordance with the timing chart of each sensor. In this operation pattern, the timing for detecting a power outage is different from <<operation pattern 1 of power outage processing and counting processing by the gaming medal insertion monitoring counter>>, and the timing for performing counting processing by the gaming medal insertion monitoring counter. <<Operation pattern 1 of power-off processing and counting processing by game medal input monitoring counter>> is configured to be the same. In addition, in this operation pattern, addition processing is performed by the game medal insertion monitoring counter at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s changes from on to off, and subtraction processing is performed at the timing when the shoot sensor D40s changes from off to on. The sensors here are a second input sensor D30s and a shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether these sensors have detected passage of game medals (ON or OFF). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (e1) to (e6), and as a process flow, the second input sensor D30s changes from off to on at timing (e1). Next, at timing (e2), the second input sensor D30s is turned from on to off, and the addition process of game medals by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned from on to off at a timing between (e2) and (e3). Next, power is cut off at timing (e3). Next, at timing (e4), the shoot sensor D40s is turned from off to on, and the game medal subtraction process by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 1 to 0. Next, at timing (e5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (e6), the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of a power outage are executed in the same interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the power-off processing using separate interrupt processing.

In this way, in the same figure, even if the power is cut off after the game medals have passed the second insertion sensor D30s and the credit addition process has been executed, the gaming machine will be turned off at the timing (e6). Since the power-off process is executed by detecting the power-off process, the power-off process can be executed after the addition and subtraction processes of the input monitoring counter are performed.

In addition, in the same figure, it is preferable that the relationship T4>T5 holds between the periods T4 and T5 mentioned above. Since the detection of a power outage is performed after the chute sensor D40s turns from ON to OFF, the period T4 from the occurrence of a power outage to the detection of a power outage is a period of time during which the input monitoring counter performs the counting process (addition and addition) of game medals. It is preferable that the period (e.g., period (e2) to (e4)) is longer than the period during which subtraction) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the power-off process can be performed after the game medal counting process by the input monitoring counter has been reliably executed.

With this configuration, by performing the power-off processing after the counting process by the game medal input monitoring counter has been executed, the game medal counting process by the input monitoring counter based on detection by various sensors can be performed normally. This makes it possible to reliably detect errors and the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

In FIGS. 136 to 138, the timing of the addition process of the input monitoring counter is the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off, and the timing of the subtraction process and the timing when the chute sensor D40s turns from off to on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured as follows, and there is no problem in combining the timing of the addition process and the timing of the subtraction process in any combination.
(A1) Timing of the addition process of the dosing monitoring counter: 1st dosing sensor D20s off → on (A2) Timing of adding process of the dosing monitoring counter: 1st dosing sensor D20s on → off (A3) Adding process of the dosing monitoring counter Timing: 2nd input sensor D30s OFF → ON (A4) Timing of addition process of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s ON → OFF (B1) Timing of subtraction process of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s OFF → ON (B2 ) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s on → off

In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 138, the configuration of the input monitoring counter related to the gaming machine having the shoot sensor D40s is described in detail, but the configuration of the input monitoring counter may be applied to the gaming machine having the input acceptance sensor D10s. In that case, the timing of addition and subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter may be configured as follows, and there is no problem in combining the timing of addition processing and the timing of subtraction processing in any way.
(C1) Timing of addition processing of the input monitoring counter: Insertion reception sensor D10s OFF → ON (C2) Timing of addition processing of input reception sensor D10s ON → OFF (D1) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s OFF → ON (D2) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s ON → OFF (D3) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s OFF → ON (D4 ) Timing of subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter: Second input sensor D30s on → off Also, as the game medal passes through the input acceptance sensor D10s, 1 is added to the counter value of the input monitoring counter, and then the blocker is turned off. If the game medal is returned due to the error, the counter value of the input monitoring counter will continue to be incremented by 1. Even in such a case, the gaming machine according to this example is configured to correct the counter value of the input monitoring counter to 0 by turning the blocker from off to on after that, so that the game machine is configured to correct the counter value of the input monitoring counter to 0. It is possible to configure the system so that an abnormality does not occur in the input monitoring counter determination process.

In addition, in this example, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is incremented by 1 and then subtracted by 1. However, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 and then added by 1 (the counter value changes from 0 to -1 to 0). ''), and any of the configurations described above can be applied to this configuration.

<<<Relationship between power outage processing and game medal payout number counting processing>>>
Next, the timing related to the process of counting the number of game medals to be paid out will be explained using FIG. 139 as a timing when the game machine may be in a situation where power is not supplied due to the occurrence of a power outage. The process of counting the number of game medals to be paid out is performed, for example, at timing 4 in FIG. 120. Specifically, the payout number counting process is performed at the timing when a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the on state is transmitted to the main control board M by displacing the release urging means H70 to the initial position again. is configured to take place. Note that the process of counting the number of paid-out coins is generally performed using an addition process in which normally paid-out game medals are added in the order of 0→1→2, etc., for example. Note that the payout count process is a process in which the game machine counts one (may be added to or subtracted from the counter value) when it is determined that one game medal has been paid out.

The time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by a program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the capacitor installed. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. The parts expressed as time below are this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range given as an example for comparing time values occurs, it will not deviate from the design value. There will be no. In addition, the same applies to times other than the time from when a power outage occurs to when a power outage is detected, and the various times exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H, etc. applicable to the configuration.

In addition, in the same figure and FIG. 120, the first dispensing sensor H10s in FIG. 4 is referred to as the second dispensing sensor H2, the second dispensing sensor H20s in FIG. In this case, the first dispensing sensor H1 is on and the second dispensing sensor H2 is off. That is, due to the displacement of the release biasing means H70,
First dispensing sensor H1 = on, second dispensing sensor H2 = off (initial position)
1st dispensing sensor H1=off, 2nd dispensing sensor H2=off, 1st dispensing sensor H1=off, 2nd dispensing sensor H2=on, 1st dispensing sensor H1=off, 2nd dispensing sensor H2=off, 1st dispensing sensor H1 = ON / 2nd dispensing sensor H2 = OFF (initial position)
This is the sensor state.

<<Operation pattern of power outage processing and game medal payout number counting processing>>
FIG. 139 is an example of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the processing of counting the number of paid out game medals reflected in accordance with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are a first dispensing sensor H1 and a second dispensing sensor H2. In addition, in this action pattern, the timing at which the power is cut off is
Operation pattern A: The first dispensing sensor H1 is on and the second dispensing sensor H2 is off. Operation pattern B: The first dispensing sensor H1 is on → off and the second dispensing sensor H2 is off when the power is cut off. The relationship between the process and the game medal payout number counting process will be explained.

<<Operation pattern A of processing when power is cut off and processing of counting the number of paid out game medals>>
First, as a process flow of action pattern A, first, after the discharging biasing means H70 starts displacing from the initial position, the power supply is cut off (the timing of the various sensors at this time is that the first dispensing sensor H1 is on and the second dispensing sensor H2 is off.). Thereafter, due to the displacement of the release biasing means H70,
1st dispensing sensor H1=off, 2nd dispensing sensor H2=off, 1st dispensing sensor H1=off, 2nd dispensing sensor H2=on, 1st dispensing sensor H1=off, 2nd dispensing sensor H2=off, 1st dispensing sensor H1 = ON / 2nd dispensing sensor H2 = OFF (initial position)
Then, the process of counting the number of coins to be paid out is executed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. Although the eighth embodiment is configured to detect a power outage and execute power off processing at the same interrupt interval, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform processing using separate interrupts.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs after the discharge biasing means H70 starts displacement from the initial position, the power outage process can be executed after the payout count process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unfair advantage, such as the number of game medals being paid out but not being counted.

<<Operation pattern B of processing when power is cut off and processing of counting the number of paid out game medals>>
First, as the processing flow of action pattern B, first, the discharge biasing means H70 starts displacing from the initial position,
First dispensing sensor H1 = on, second dispensing sensor H2 = off (initial position)
After the first dispensing sensor H1 is turned off and the second dispensing sensor H2 is turned off, the power is cut off. Thereafter, due to the displacement of the release biasing means H70,
1st dispensing sensor H1=off, 2nd dispensing sensor H2=on, 1st dispensing sensor H1=off, 2nd dispensing sensor H2=off, 1st dispensing sensor H1=on, 2nd dispensing sensor H2=off (initial position)
Then, the process of counting the number of coins to be paid out is executed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. Although the eighth embodiment is configured to detect a power outage and execute power off processing at the same interrupt interval, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform processing at the execution timing of separate interrupt processing.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs after the discharge biasing means H70 starts displacement from the initial position, the power outage process can be executed after the payout count process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the player obtains an unfair advantage, such as the number of game medals being paid out but not being counted.

Note that the execution timing (execution trigger) of the payout count process is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and is as follows: (1) First payout sensor H1 = off, second payout sensor H2 = off → first payout sensor H1 = off, Timing when the second dispensing sensor H2 = on (2) First dispensing sensor H1 = off, second dispensing sensor H2 = on → first dispensing sensor H1 = off, second dispensing sensor H2 = off It can also be timing.

<Relationship between power-off processing and processing related to sensor detection Application to pachinko gaming machines>
In the eighth embodiment, various sensors installed inside the reel-type gaming machine are in an off state before the passage of a game medal is detected, or after a notification of a game medal is detected, the sensor is off → For processing when the power is cut off and detecting the passing of game medals when the power is cut off in the on state, or even when the game medals pass through the detection area of the sensor and the sensor goes from on to off. Although the relationship with such processing has been described in detail, the relationship between the power-off processing and the processing related to the passage of gaming media (for example, game balls) is applicable not only to reel-type gaming machines, but also to pachinko gaming machines, janitors, etc. It can also be applied to ball game machines, gaming machines, etc. Therefore, a case in which the above-described configuration is applied to a Pachinko gaming machine will be described in detail below. The various sensors installed inside the pachinko game machine include, for example, a specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1, an ejected ball detection device 2224-2, and a total ejection confirmation sensor C90s, which will be described later. The process related to the detection of passing corresponds to, for example, the process of counting the total ejected game balls related to the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1, the ejected ball detection device 2224-2, and the total ejection confirmation sensor C90s, which will be described later.

First, the meaning of each term in the pachinko game machine applicable to this example will be explained. "Entering a ball" includes not only entering a prize where a prize ball is paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" where a prize ball is not paid out. "Identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and designs. Examples include those with shapes such as . In addition, in this specification, "identification information" may be referred to as main game design/special design (special design) or decorative design (design), but "special design (special design)" is the main control board This is identification information whose display is controlled on the side, and the "decorative design (design)" is identification information as a presentation displayed on the sub-control board side. "Identification information can be displayed" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emitted by a light emitting means (e.g. liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also differences in color), physical (For example, the symbols drawn on the reel strip are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). "Production" refers to display content that increases the interest of the game, such as changes and suspensions of identification information, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live-action, still images such as pictures, photographs, and characters, and still images of these. Combinations can be mentioned. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" mean, for example, in the configuration of a general big winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It becomes an easy state. In addition, for example, a state in which it protrudes from the game board (on the player's side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the advancing state) and a state in which it retracts into the game board (on the side opposite to the player's side) (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) In a configuration (so-called vero type attacker) in which the player can take the above-mentioned configuration, the advancing state = the winning state is easy, and the withdrawal state = the winning state is not easy. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (electronic computer lottery) to determine some kind of game content in pachinko gaming machines, and includes not only random numbers in a narrow sense but also pseudo-random numbers (for example, as a random number, a hard Random numbers, pseudo-random numbers (soft random numbers). For example, it determines the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically the "winning random number (random number for win/fail lottery)" related to the transition to the special game, and the fluctuation mode (or fluctuation time) of the identification symbol. ``Fluctuating pattern determining random number'' to determine the stopping pattern, ``symbol determining random number'' to determine the stopping pattern, and ``winning pattern determining random number'' to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, a probability variable game) after the special game. be able to. Note that when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the confirmed identification information, etc., it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers, and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Furthermore, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be expressed as a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the number of random numbers is displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, it is The random number obtained by the ball entering is called one random number (that is, in the above example, the bundle of random numbers of winning random number + fluctuation mode determining random number + symbol determining random number... is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, "gaming state" refers to, for example, a special gaming state in which the big prize opening can be in an open state, and a non-probability variable gaming state in which the lottery probability of transitioning to the special gaming state is a predetermined value. A variable probability game state with a high lottery probability to transition to a special game state, an auxiliary game state in which there is assistance for winning a prize in the starting slot that triggers a lottery to transition to a special game (so-called normal symbol time-saving state, for example, variable in the starting slot) If the member is attached, the opening period of the variable member is long, the probability of winning the variable member opening is high, the notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery is short, etc.), or any combination of one or more of the following. be. The "gaming area" is an area in which the game ball can roll, and is not limited to the front side of the game board D35 (as seen from the player), but for example, the back side of the game board D35 (as seen from the player) The area where the game ball can roll may include both the game board D35 and the front side of the game board D35 (as viewed from the player). "Left-handed hitting" refers to launching a game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the gaming area D30 (left-handed hitting route ML10), which will be described later. "Right-handed hitting" refers to launching a game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the gaming area D30 (right-handed hitting route MR10), which will be described later. Furthermore, the "left-handed hitting area" refers to the area on the left side of the gaming area D30 when the center of the gaming area is taken as a reference. The "right-handed hitting area" refers to the area on the right side of the gaming area D30 with respect to the center of the gaming area. "Expected average execution time of easy-to-enter ball games per unit time" is based on the assumption that the auxiliary game symbols are constantly changing (for example, there is always a hold on the auxiliary game symbols). In this case, it means the proportion of the opening period of the variable member attached to the starting port per unit time (for example, 5 minutes), but in terms of internal processing, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example, , If a variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called open extension function activation state/non-operation state), and the winning of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member. High or low probability (so-called common pattern high probability lottery state/low probability lottery state), length of fluctuation time of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member (so-called common symbol fluctuation shortening function inoperative state/activation state) ), etc., by any combination of one or more of the following. The term "average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information" is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the fluctuation display period for each fluctuation display of identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, if the configuration is such that the variable display period is determined for each variable display of identification information, and there are multiple types of candidates for the variable display period to be determined (selected), , is the expected value based on the multiple types of variable display periods (the sum of "selection probability x variable display period"), but if there is only one type of candidate variable display period to be selected, that one type. (In other words, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of a loss, a concept limited to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of a win, or only a fluctuation display period with the highest selection probability. In other words, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an indicator to indicate the speed of progress of the game that the player can experience (therefore, it is important to note that the concept is limited to Methods for making the average value different include varying the candidates and/or selection probabilities for the variable display period, or adding an additional variable display period even if the candidates and/or selection probabilities for the variable display period are the same. There are various methods, such as using different period values, but the method is not limited to any one method.) "A first fluctuation period state in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information is the first period, and a second period state in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period. "having at least a variable period state" means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states). For example, the state transitions from "first fluctuation period state" to "second fluctuation period state" to "third fluctuation period state" depending on the number of times the identification information is displayed fluctuating. Including things that can be harvested. In this case, if the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information in each state is configured such that "first fluctuation period state" < "second fluctuation period state" < "third fluctuation period state", It is possible to construct a state transition from a high-speed game progress state → a medium-speed game progress state → a slow game progress state {Of course, a state transition (game progress state) that is the opposite of this may also be constructed, In that case, it is suitable when used in conjunction with a probability-changing gaming state that continues until the next jackpot + electric chew specific gaming state (despite the situation where the next jackpot is certain to occur, the next jackpot cannot be obtained. The longer the situation lasts, the faster the game progresses, so you may be able to get rid of the feeling of fatigue that comes with getting hooked. Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the "first fluctuation period state", the difference between the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of win is " In the "third fluctuation period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second fluctuation period state", the difference between the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of win is smaller than the difference in the "second fluctuation period state". In addition to the fact that the difference is smaller than that in the "second fluctuation period state," the fluctuation display period of the identification information tends to be relatively long, especially when losing, compared to the "first fluctuation period state." In other words, in the "second fluctuation period state", the fluctuation display period of the identification information especially at the time of winning is relatively long compared to other states. Easy {In other words, the short-change loss display period in which the loss is certain and the medium-variation loss change display period that suggests a win are not selected (or are difficult to select), but the reach fluctuation (long change per hit) change display period It is possible to exemplify the feature that only a period is selected (or is easily selected). The "specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game" may be a period from immediately after the execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol changes is made, or the period after the execution of the special game It may be a period from when one or more symbol fluctuations are made after the execution of the special game is completed until the symbol fluctuation is made a predetermined number of times (i.e., the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed. If it is within the range, it means any period within that range, so the above-mentioned "first fluctuation period state" → "second fluctuation period state" → "third fluctuation period state" (If a state transition is possible, the specific period may mean the period of stay in the "first variable period state" and/or the "second variable period state"). "When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold" means, for example, that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called jackpot game) will occur when the hold is used up. The criteria for judgment are not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning/failure lottery)", "fluctuation mode determining random number" for determining the fluctuation mode (or fluctuation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determining random number" for determining the stopping symbol, A random number such as a "winning symbol determination random number" that determines whether to move on to a specific game (for example, a probability variable game) after a special game may be used as a judgment standard, or the content of events derived from these random numbers (win/fail judgment results) may be used as a criterion. , the length of the fluctuation time, the type of stopped symbols, whether or not it is possible to shift to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment criteria. "Suggesting or informing the existence of a reservation" means, for example, when indicating the existence of a reservation, for example, the performance during the suspension expiration (the pattern of the pattern fluctuation of the decorative pattern, or the performance performed in conjunction with it) For example, in the case of notification, the display mode of the hold indicator light (which may be an image on a liquid crystal display device) at the time of the hold occurrence. (In that case, changing the display color, changing the display shape, etc.), changing the sound such as the sound of the hold occurrence, BGM, etc. when the hold occurs, and the lamp for production when the hold occurs. (frame lamp, etc.), or the execution mode of other effects that are being executed at the time of occurrence of the hold (such as the pattern variation of decorative patterns, background effects that are performed in conjunction with it, etc.) For example, changing the

Note that the ninth embodiment is just an example, and the locations and functions of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off flags, the name of the means responsible for processing each step, etc. , but is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be construed as being applied to specific things, and may be combined in any manner. For example, modifications of one embodiment should be understood as modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that combinations of one variation with another variation are also described.

The ninth embodiment is a model (first type, first type multifunction machine) in which two conventional first type Pachinko game machines are mixed together. However, this is not limited to this in any way, and applications to other gaming machines (for example, conventional 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and general pachinko machines) are also within the scope. . Note that the ninth embodiment is just an example, and the locations and functions of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off flags, the name of the means responsible for processing each step, etc. , but is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be construed as being applied to specific things, and may be combined in any manner. For example, modifications of one embodiment should be understood as modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that combinations of one variation with another variation are also described. Further, in the ninth embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table among the various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table, or vice versa. Furthermore, in this example, the term "table" is not limited to that format, but refers to a table in which one or more selection candidates are selected from among multiple selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that this is a corresponding aspect. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modified examples {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol fluctuation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are as follows: This is just an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, between the first main game side and the second main game side, between the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, the time reduction game and the non-probability fluctuation game). It is understood that the magnitude relationships and combinations of numerical values shown in (by condition with time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate, as long as they do not significantly deviate from the spirit of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the probability of winning at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds during the special game is that the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, the size relationship may be changed as appropriate, such as the first main game side < the second main game side, or the first main game side > the second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring the probability fluctuating gaming state to continue until the next jackpot occurs as the number of continuations, should "65535" be set as the number of continuations (configured so that it will continue substantially)? Alternatively, even in the option of an implementation method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variable gaming state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not significantly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. It should be understood that these may be modified as appropriate. Note that the step numbers and codes in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to this example are different from the step numbers and codes in the embodiment of the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, and the same step numbers and codes are used. It should be noted that even if they are used, they are not the same (processing, functions, parts, etc.).

<Ninth embodiment>
Here, before explaining each component, the characteristics (outline) of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be explained. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

Note that step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in each individual embodiment. It indicates a code, means name, etc. (For example, step 2102 in the ninth embodiment is step 2102 in another embodiment, so each is a process that functions independently).

First, the basic structure of the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 140. The pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board D35. These will be explained in order below.

First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it is to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for removably housing the game board D35, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has mechanisms for storing game balls, feeding the game balls to the firing rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, speakers D24 are provided at the upper right and upper left of the game board D35, and sound effects corresponding to the game state and the like are output.

The game board D35 and the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) on the front side of the game machine are attached to the game machine frame so that they are parallel to each other while maintaining a distance of more than 13 mm but not more than 25 mm (in this example, 19 mm). It is being Here, the game board D35 is firmly fixed by a fixing mechanism so that it does not move easily.

In addition, the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) is designed so that the entire gaming area is colorless and transparent and has no irregularities so that the position of the game ball on the game board can be confirmed without obstructing the view of the overall structure of the game board. It is formed.

The ball trays (for example, the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22) are such that the game balls on the ball tray are visible to the player (the number of game balls can be roughly confirmed), and the player can easily check the number of game balls received on the tray. It has a shape that does not obstruct the taking out of the ball (a shape that allows the game ball to be taken out freely).

Next, the game board D35 has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34, and a game ball flows down on the game board D35 (above the game area D30) via a transparent plate D16. You can now check the location of The gaming area D30 is roughly divided into a left-handed game area DL10 and a right-handed game area DR10. The game area D30 includes a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning holes, as well as a left-handed route ML10, a right-handed route MR10, a first main game starting opening A10, and a second main game opening. Starting hole B10, auxiliary game starting hole H10, first big winning hole C10, second big winning hole C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol A display device H20, a center decoration D38, a movable accessory YK, a right general winning hole lamp LP10, a left general winning hole P10, a right general winning hole P20, a sub input button SB and an out port D36 are installed. In the ninth embodiment, the left-handed route ML10 may be referred to as a first downstream route, and the right-handed route MR10 may be referred to as a second downstream route. Each element will be explained in detail below.

Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting port A10 includes a first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game starting port A10, and indicates the entry of the ball when the ball enters the first main game starting port. Generate ball entry information.

Next, the second main game starting opening B10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting opening B10 includes a second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s and a second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game starting port entry ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second main game starting port B10, and indicates the entry of the ball when the ball enters the second main game starting port. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is variable between a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second main game starting port B10 and an open state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second main game starting port B10.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, a first main game starting port A10 and a second main game starting port B10 are provided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the gaming area D30 (left-handed hitting area DL10) While it is easy to be guided to the first main game starting port A10, the game ball flowing down the right side of the gaming area D30 (right-handed area DR10) is configured to be difficult to be guided to the first main game starting port A10. Further, it is configured such that both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 can be guided to the second main game starting port B10.

In the ninth embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the side of the second main game starting port B10, but the invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that the electric accessory is provided on the side of the first main game starting port A10. You may. Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged to overlap, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged to overlap. The second main game starting port B10 may be placed apart from the second main game starting port B10.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 includes an auxiliary game starting port entrance ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting port entry ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10, and generates auxiliary game starting port entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters the auxiliary game starting port H10. do. In addition, the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 becomes an opportunity for a lottery to expand the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10, and the game ball that flows down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. It is configured so that the game ball flowing down is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10.

Next, the left general winning hole P10 includes a left general winning hole entering ball detection device P11s. The left general winning hole entry ball detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the left general winning hole P10, and generates left general winning hole entry ball information indicating the ball entry at the time of ball entry. In addition, by entering the game ball into the left general winning hole P10, a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of game balls will be paid out as prize balls. In addition, game balls flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are likely to enter the left general prize opening P10, and game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are on the left side. It is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the general winning hole P10. That is, when performing left-handed hitting (adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left-handed hitting area DL10 (left-handed hitting route ML10) which is the left side of the gaming area D30) It is configured so that it is easy to enter the ball into the left general winning hole P10.

Next, the right general winning hole P20 includes a right general winning hole entering ball detection device P21s. The right general winning hole entry ball detection device P21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the right general winning hole P20, and generates right general winning hole entry ball information indicating the ball entry at the time of ball entry. Here, the right general winning hole P20 is arranged in the right hitting region DR10, and has both the role of an auxiliary game starting hole of acquiring the auxiliary game random number and the role of a general winning hole of paying out prize balls. There is. In other words, the entry of a game ball into the right general prize winning hole P20 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d attached to the second main game starting port B10. Further, by entering the game balls into the right general winning hole P20, a predetermined number (for example, two balls) of game balls will be paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game balls (for example, 2 balls) that are paid out as prize balls from the right general prize opening P20 when the game ball enters the right general prize opening P20 are , is configured to be smaller than the number of game balls (for example, three balls) that are paid out as prize balls from the left general winning hole P10. In the ninth embodiment, the game ball that has been hit to the right is configured to enter the right general winning hole P20. That is, when performing right-handed hitting (adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right-handed hitting area DR10 (right-handed hitting route MR10) which is the right side of the gaming area D30) It is configured so that it is easy to enter the ball into the right general winning hole P20.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the ball entry openings into which the ball can enter when executing a right-handed ball are, in order from the upstream, "auxiliary game starting opening H10 → right general winning opening P20 → second big winning opening C20" →First big prize opening C10→Second main game starting opening B10→Out opening D36". In addition, since the auxiliary game starting port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has passed through the auxiliary game starting port H10 will further flow down over the gaming area, and the ball entrance located downstream (the above-mentioned right This means that the player can enter the ball into the general winning slot P20, etc.). On the other hand, the game ball that enters the right general winning hole P20 will flow into the back side of the game board surface, and will not enter the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20 after that (to execute right-handed hitting) Then, the game ball that did not enter the right general winning hole P20 can enter the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20).

In addition, when executing left-handed batting in the non-time-shortened gaming state (in the non-time-shortened gaming state, the game is played by left-handed batting), the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). Therefore, it is difficult to open the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, and the game progresses mainly by entering the ball into the first main game starting port A10 as the starting port on the main game side. When executing right-handed hitting in the time-reduced gaming state (in the time-reduced gaming state, the game proceeds with right-handed hitting), the game ball is likely to enter the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20), so the first The second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is easy to open, and the game progresses mainly by entering the ball into the second main game starting port B10 as the starting port on the main game side. In addition, it is easier to enter the first main game starting port A10 when the game ball is fired left-handed in the non-time-reduced game state, and it is easier to fire the game ball by right-handed in the time-reduced game state. In other words, the ease of entering the ball into the second main game starting port B10 is higher if you continue to do so.In other words, the first main game starts if you continue to shoot the game ball with left-handed batting in the non-time saving game state. The ease of entering the ball into the opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10 is more important than the ease of entering the ball into the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening when the game ball is continued to be fired by hitting right in the time reduction gaming state. The ball enters the mouth B10 more easily. Therefore, in this example, the number of prize balls (in this example, 3 balls) when the ball enters the left general winning hole P10, which is easier to enter when executing a left-handed batting than when executing a right-handed batting, is calculated as follows: By designing the ball to be larger than the number of prize balls (in this example, 2 balls) when the ball enters the right general winning hole P20, which is easier to enter when executing a left-handed ball than when executing a left-handed ball, a non-time saving game state is created. The difference in the average number of prize balls paid out when balls enter the prize opening between the case where the game is played by hitting left-handed in the time-reduced game state and the case where the game is played by hitting right-handed in the time-reduced game state, that is, the base It is possible to prevent the difference in the value (the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out for 100 game balls fired in a situation where no special game has been won) from becoming too large.

In addition, the right general winning hole lamp LP10 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal, an LED, etc., and is configured to be turned on when a game ball enters the right general winning hole during execution of a special game. . In addition, although the details will be described later, the difference in the lighting color of the right general prize opening lamp LP10 can indicate whether to shift to a probability-variable gaming state or a non-probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game. It is configured. Incidentally, the right general winning hole lamp LP10 may be provided in the left-handed hitting area DL10 or the right-handed hitting area DR10 on the gaming area D30. Further, it may be provided in an area other than the gaming area D30.

In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route MR10 passes through the right-handed route outlet D50 and flows down to the vicinity of the right general prize opening P20, the first major prize opening C10, the second major prize opening C20, etc. It happens.

Next, on the upper right side of the out port D36, a first big winning hole C10 and a second big winning hole C20 are provided. , is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is in an open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops as a jackpot symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located on the upper right side of D36. As a specific configuration, the first big winning hole C10 includes a first big winning hole winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first big winning hole electric accessory C11d {and a first big winning hole and an electric accessory solenoid C13}. Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the first big winning hole C11s. generate. The first big winning hole electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning hole C10 between a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first big winning hole C10 and an open state in which it is easy for game balls to win. 1 big prize opening electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and variable). In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the shape of the big prize opening is changed into a horizontal rectangular shape and a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player, and a retracted state in which it retracts from the player's side (the so-called A tongue type attacker) or a mode in which the opening on the path where the game ball can roll is used as the big prize opening and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide type attacker) This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the grand prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 has a horizontal rectangular shape that becomes open when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at a jackpot symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located on the upper right side of the opening D36. As a specific configuration, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d {and a second grand prize winning hole C21s. and an electric accessory solenoid C23}. Here, the second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second grand winning opening C20, and the second grand prize opening ball entry information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the second grand prize opening C20. generate. The game ball that enters the second big winning hole C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning hole winning detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d sets the second grand prize opening C20 into a normal state in which a game ball cannot enter a prize or is difficult to enter a prize, and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter a prize. Make it variable. In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the shape of the big prize opening is changed into a horizontal rectangular shape and a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player, and a retracted state in which it retracts from the player's side (the so-called It is also possible to use a tongue type attacker) or a mode in which the opening on the path where the game ball can roll is used as the big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called sliding attacker). This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is connected to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). This is a device that executes the displayed information, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) has a first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g), and a first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g). It includes a symbol retention display section A21h (second main game symbol retention display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h (second main game symbol reservation display section B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lit lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". '' and ``-'' to indicate a loss. It is preferable to display the information using a symbol or the like. In addition, the display of the number of pending items is not limited to four lamps, but can display a maximum of four pending items (for example, if the number of pending items is composed of one lamp, Number 1: On, number 2 on hold: Flashing at low speed, Number on hold 3: Flashing at medium speed, Number 4 on hold: Flashing at high speed.

Incidentally, since the main game symbols do not necessarily have to have a performance role, in the ninth embodiment, the size of the first main game symbol display device A20 is set to an inconspicuous level. However, when adopting a method in which the main game symbols themselves have a dramatic role and do not display decorative symbols, it is necessary to display the main game symbols on a liquid crystal display such as a performance display device SG, which will be described later. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the performance display device SG is a device that displays performance images including decorative symbols that fluctuate and stop in conjunction with the main game symbols. Here, as a specific configuration, the performance display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which a performance including a fluctuating display of decorative symbols and the like is executed. Here, the display area SG10 includes, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 that displays a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol variations imitating a slot machine game, a first reservation display section SG12 that displays main game reservation information, and a first reservation display section SG12 that displays main game reservation information. It has a second hold display section SG13. Although the effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the ninth embodiment, it may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first reservation display section SG12 and the second reservation display section SG13 are each composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that performs display regarding auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display section H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lit lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations suspended (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that have not been executed). In the ninth embodiment, the auxiliary game starting hole H10 and the right general prize winning hole P20 are provided as the ball entrances from which the auxiliary game random numbers can be obtained. In either case, a display regarding the acquired auxiliary game random number will be displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a passage for the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 and/or an area other than the game area D30, and plays the role of effect by blinking or the like.

Next, the movable accessory YK is installed near the effect display device SG, and plays the role of enlivening the game by being driven when performing effects associated with symbol variations. It is preferable that the symbol be configured so that it is conspicuous that it has been driven by moving in the vertical direction, rotationally driving, or lighting up, and also be configured to be easily driven by symbol fluctuations that have a high expectation of a jackpot.

Next, the sub-input button SB is an operating member that is electrically connected to the sub-control board S, and when operated (pressed down), a performance is executed based on the operation. The operation modes of the sub input button SB include single press (operation mode in which the sub input button SB is pressed only once for a short period of time), continuous press (operation mode in which the sub input button SB is pressed multiple times), and long press. (a mode of operation in which the sub-input button SB is held down for a predetermined period). In addition, the operating members that are electrically connected to the sub-control board S and which, when operated (pressed), will execute a performance based on the operation, are not limited to the sub-input buttons SB; , has four operation sections on the left and right, and by operating the operation section, you can select the effect to be executed (notice effect, etc.). It may also be configured to include a lever, etc., by which a physical object is activated, etc.).

Next, the out port D36 is a ball entry port provided below the gaming area D30, and is an entry port into which a game ball that has flowed down without entering any of the winning ports provided in the gaming area D30 enters. If a game ball enters the out port D36, various drawings based on random numbers and prize balls based on the ball entering the ball will not be executed, and the game ball will be ejected outside the gaming machine. Become. In this embodiment, an out port D36 is provided only at the bottom of the game board, into which game balls that have not entered the winning slot enter, but an out port is provided at a predetermined location on the top of the game board. It is also possible. In that case, in order to make it clear that the entrance is not a winning opening, it is desirable to use a sticker and display "OUT" so as not to confuse it with the winning opening.

Although not shown, the size of the game board D35 (game area D30) is set within a range that does not exceed a square frame with a side of 500 mm and includes a circle with a diameter of 300 mm.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, when the accessory does not operate (when the variable winning hole such as the big winning hole C10 is in a closed state), the winning hole (the one that can win the game ball, in other words Then, it is not impossible to win even if there is a physically possible trajectory for the fired game ball, and for example, the number of first main game starting openings A10) (the number of winning openings) is 5. (There is one first main game starting opening A10, three left general winning openings P10, and one right general winning opening P20). The number of winning holes can be set as appropriate, but it is preferably in the range of 5 to 15 from the viewpoint of winning percentage and preventing complication of the game. Here, the entrance of the winning hole refers to the surface through which game balls pass, which is composed of the winning hole and the game nails, etc. that are connected to the winning hole (game nails, etc. that are consecutively arranged in such a way that the game ball cannot pass between them). This refers to the part located farthest from the winning opening. In addition, the size of the entrance of the winning hole when the accessory does not operate (the maximum distance of the entrance of the winning hole parallel to the game board D35, and if it is set by a game nail, the size of the entrance of the winning hole) It is desirable that the size of the entrance of the winning opening of the variable winning device (electric accessory or non-electric accessory) other than the big winning opening (as described above) should be configured so that it does not exceed 13 mm. , preferably not exceeding 55 mm. Further, it is desirable that the entrance size of the grand prize opening (maximum distance parallel to the game board) exceeds 55 mm and does not exceed 135 mm in order to distinguish it from other accessories.

Furthermore, the size of the gate (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10) that triggers the normal symbol display device (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10) (the gate and the game nails connected to the gate, etc.) that are arranged in a continuous manner so that the game ball cannot pass between them. The maximum distance parallel to the game board D35 at the farthest point from the gate (i.e., the actual gate entrance) does not exceed 13 mm. It is desirable to do so.

In the ninth embodiment, there are two big winning holes (the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20), but from the perspective of gambling, the number of big winning holes should not exceed two. It is desirable to configure the Further, as in the ninth embodiment, it is desirable to have a structure in which it is clear that the two grand prize openings are physically clearly separated regardless of whether they are opened or not. Furthermore, as in the ninth embodiment, it is desirable that the game ball be able to pass between the two big winning holes without the two big winning holes being adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. In addition, in the ninth embodiment, two starting ports, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10, are provided, but the number of general winning ports (in the ninth embodiment, the general winning port It is desirable to consider the balance with (4 are provided) and configure the structure so that the number does not exceed three.

In addition, a movable object may be provided in the starting hole, and the movement of the game ball that has already entered the starting hole may be changed by the movable object. In this case, it is desirable for the movable object to be configured so that it always continues a fixed motion (including one that repeats a series of motions) and whose motion cannot be adjusted.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, a large number of game nails etc. are arranged in the game area D30, but although this arrangement causes the game balls to fall irregularly within a certain range, it should not be extremely irregular. is desirable. Specifically, when a game ball collides with an electric or other power source (such as a windmill or other device that changes the direction of the game ball's fall), the game ball moves in a direction different from the direction of fall. Devices that raise game balls (excluding those that raise the ball only slightly and do not cause the ball to fall in a significantly irregular direction), etc. Since there is a possibility that the order of the game balls and the order in which the balls enter the winning hole or the out hole are greatly different, it is desirable not to provide such a device. Note that the game nails and windmills are driven into the game board approximately perpendicularly (approximately ±5 degrees). Needless to say, other structures installed on the game board, such as game nails, have durability to the extent that their shape does not change due to collisions with game balls (for example, the game nails in this example have a Vickers hardness of 150Hv to 230Hv). (made of brass) is ensured.

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 141. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular controls the overall game operation (i.e., the lottery when a ball enters the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10)). A main control board M performs control directly related to the interests of players, and a sub-main control unit SM performs display control related to various performances on the performance display device SG that adds interest to game content. A sub-sub control unit SS that executes a performance display, an error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs to notify the occurrence of an error, and a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a prize ball according to winnings in each prize opening. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 etc. that pays out game balls supplied from a tank KT to an upper ball tray D20, an error release switch KH3a for canceling a predetermined error, and a prize ball payout. A prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout operation by the unit KE10, an error display KH3 that displays the occurrence status of an error related to the payout (for example, a 7-segment display), and a prize ball that controls the payout operation by the payout unit KE10. A payout control board KH, a firing device D42 that fires the game balls (storage balls) in the upper ball tray D20 one ball at a time into the gaming area D30, a firing control board D40 that controls the firing operation of the firing device D42, and a pachinko game machine. A power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine, a power switch Ea that turns on and off the power of the pachinko game machine, etc. are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the gaming side).

In addition, on the main control board M, there are a first main game starting hole A10, a second main game starting hole B10, a left general winning hole P10, a right general winning hole P20, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole. A ball entry state display device J10 capable of displaying the state of entry of game balls into the winning opening, such as C20, is provided, and a 4-digit 8-segment display is installed in a horizontal row. In addition, the ball entering state display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M toward the back side of the gaming machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with a key owned by the gaming hall side. Since it is necessary to open the door unit D18 and check the boards attached to the back side of the door unit D18 (game board), the player is configured not to be able to check it. In addition, examples of the ball entry status displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 include section information based on the total number of outs and a value calculated by the base ratio ((Number of low probability payouts ÷ number of low probability outs) x 100). ) etc. Note that the ROM/RAM area in which the process of step 1550-10 is executed and the ROM/RAM area in which the process in steps 1000-1 to 3500 are executed are configured to be different areas (addresses do not overlap with each other). You may.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment and the operating principle for paying out game balls will be explained. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) KE10m that is driven during payout. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 142, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to a stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters the winning hole in the gaming area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of balls to be paid out, and sends a winning ball signal to the winning ball payout control board KH. do. Alternatively, a request for ball lending is made from the game ball lending device such as the card unit R to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes the payout of game balls. As shown in FIG. 143, as the stepping motor KE10m rotates, the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) rotates, and the game ball rotates. The balls are paid out one by one. Moreover, the paid-out game balls are detected by a payout count sensor KE10s provided continuously downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. It should be noted that the cross section CC is a cross section along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easily visible) as shown in the figure.

Further, the lower part of FIG. 142 is a diagram schematically showing the rotor position confirmation sensor (dispensing motor position sensor) KE10ms and the rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (one example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photosensor that has a pair of measuring sections and detects an object between the measuring sections by emitting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measuring sections are a light projecting section that projects light and a light receiving section that receives light from the light projecting section, and are arranged with the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 in between. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six recesses formed along its circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light projecting section and the light receiving section. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light projecting section and the light receiving section, it is turned on (the state shown in the lower part of FIG. 142).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram in FIG. 144. First, as described above, the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH and the main control board M, various performances are performed on the performance display device SG, such as changing and stopping decorative patterns, and sound is output from the speaker D24. , a sub-control board S (in this example, a sub-main control section SM and a sub-sub control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls execution of lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. The main component is a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stoppage of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. and a sub-sub control unit SS that executes display processing such as variable display, stop display, hold display, preview display, etc. of decorative symbols on the performance display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various calculation processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that specifies the calculation processes of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the game (various data generated during gaming, computer programs read from ROM, etc.), and a backup area (and backup power supply) to retain information in the event of a power outage. ing.

The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection between each board and device will be outlined below. First, the main control board M includes the winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s, second main game starting opening ball entering detection device B11s, auxiliary game starting opening ball entering detection device H11s, 1st big winning hole winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning hole winning detecting device C21s, general winning hole entering ball detection device P11s}, drive solenoid (not shown) (the above-mentioned 1st big winning hole electric accessory solenoid C13, 2 major winning openings electric accessory solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), and other gaming peripherals that are input/output devices essential for the progress of the game (in the figure, the first main gaming peripheral A, the second main gaming peripheral It is electrically connected to the second main game peripheral device B, the first and second main game peripheral device C, and the auxiliary game peripheral device H), and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. . Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control unit SM/sub-sub control unit SS), and controls the prize ball payout based on the progress of the game. It is configured to be able to transmit information (commands) regarding the prize ball payout control board KH, etc., and information (commands) regarding the performance/game progress, etc. to the sub-control board S, respectively.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 144, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, The main control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used as the communication method). Note that communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. In addition, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information (output to the hall computer HC side) via the external relay terminal board G. One-way communication) is possible.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a request for loaning game balls and sends the prize ball payout control board KH to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R (sometimes referred to as a card unit R) that transmits the information. Although not shown, in the ninth embodiment, a control circuit section (launch control board D40) of the firing device is provided in the prize ball putting-out control board KH, and the prize ball putting-out control board KH and the firing device D42. It is also connected to (firing handle, firing motor, ball feeding device, etc.). In the ninth embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided as a separate unit adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Lending control and management control of recording media for lending such as electronic money may be performed in an integrated manner.

Here, when it is detected that the player has directly operated the firing handle D44 (touch detection), the firing device D42 determines the firing intensity (firing position) based on the amount of operation of the firing handle, and It is configured to be able to fire game balls one by one to any desired position, and even when firing game balls continuously, there is a counter and timer to prevent the ball from being fired in excess of 100 balls per minute. etc., so that game balls are fired at regular intervals (for example, 599.9 ms/one ball). In other words, it is configured such that the game balls are always fired at constant intervals (the firing speed does not differ), regardless of the game status such as the probability variable game status or the game status such as whether or not a special game is executed. As a result, the firing skill of the player is appropriately reflected regardless of the state of the game. Specifically, when the player desires to hit right-handed, the player can execute right-handed hitting by operating the firing handle D44 to a position corresponding to the firing strength that allows right-handed hitting. If you desire, you can execute left-handed firing by operating the firing handle D44 to a position corresponding to the firing strength that allows you to execute left-handed firing. Regardless of the state, the game ball is always able to be ejected with the ejection intensity based on the operation of the ejection handle D44.

Note that the firing handle D44 is provided with a firing stop switch (not shown), and is configured so that the player can stop firing the game ball at any timing (can fire one ball at a time). ing. Specifically, even when the player is operating the firing handle D44 (directly operating the firing handle D44 is detected (touch detection)), the game ball can be stopped by operating the firing stop switch. It is possible to stop firing. Here, "direct operation" means playing a game by using a part of the player's body and touching the gaming machine. In addition, in this example, from the viewpoint of gambling performance, the firing motor, firing handle (strength adjustment function) and the control circuit of the launcher are designed respectively. Furthermore, it is preferable that the firing handle D44 not be equipped with a function that causes the firing handle D44 to vibrate, so as not to hinder the adjustment of the firing position by the player.

In addition, the portion of the firing device D42, which is the entire device involved in firing the game balls, that provides kinetic energy to the game balls is constituted by one firing motor. Further, the firing handle D44 is configured so that its firing strength returns to 0 when the player is not directly operating it (so that it is biased toward the reference position by a spring or the like and returns to the reference position when the player releases his/her hand from the firing handle D44). This allows the player's strength adjustment skills to be reflected in the game results.

In this example, the game balls used have a diameter of 11 mm and a mass of 5.4 g or more and 5.7 g or less.

Next, the sub-control board S includes a performance display device SG for displaying decorative patterns etc. as described above, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other performance drive devices (not shown, so-called performance It is connected to the motors, solenoids, etc. of movable accessories for use. In addition, by performing a predetermined operation (long press or press), a sub input button SB that can start or end base value measurement, perform a predetermined effect, start displaying maintenance mode, etc. The sub-control board S is also connected. Moreover, it can be determined that the sub-input button SB has been operated by the detection by the sub-input button detection device SBs. In the ninth embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control board S includes a sub-main control section SM and a sub-sub-control section SS, and the sub-main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect. The lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and the display control (substantive display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. is configured to take place. In the ninth embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (they may be integrated as separate boards). However, by configuring them in an integrated manner, there are advantages such as saving space and reducing the situation where noise gets mixed into wiring, etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, by having the sub-sub control unit SS perform audio control (suitable when a VDP with an integrated audio control circuit is adopted). Moreover, electronic value may be provided as the prize ball without providing a physical prize ball.

Next, the flow path of the game ball used for the game will be explained with reference to the flow path image diagram of the game ball shown in the lower part of the figure. In the gaming machine in the ninth embodiment, the game ball launched into the gaming area D30 is inserted into each ball entrance opening {first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, first big winning opening C10, The ball enters any of the second large winning hole C20, general winning hole P10, and out hole C80}, passes through the ball entering sensor corresponding to each ball entering hole, and is guided into the gaming machine (within the gaming machine frame D). Ru. Here, the game ball that enters the first main game starting port A10 passes through the first main game starting port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. Thereafter, all the game balls guided into the gaming machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged outside the gaming machine. Although not particularly shown in this example, the switch for confirming ball entry {each ball entry opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the first big prize opening C10, the A switch through which the game ball enters the two major winning holes C20 and the general winning hole, which has one or more switches that are different from the switches for detecting the ball entering each ball entering hole. It is assumed that

Next, FIG. 145 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the gaming machine is powered on, the process shown in FIG. 2(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M checks the input port of the RAM clear button, and presses the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E. It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether an operation to clear the contents of the RAM has been intentionally performed by an administrator of the game hall or the like. If Yes in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side in step 1004. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (at the relevant timing). (or a command may be set at that timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process to be described later), and the process moves to step 1015. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1007, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not information indicating that the power has been turned off normally is not stored in the RAM. If Yes in step 1007, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power outage and the content stored in the RAM area). comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the contents of the RAM are not normal (whether the information at the time of power outage is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process moves to step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the result in step 1007 is No, that is, the information indicating that the power was turned off normally is stored in the RAM, or if the result in step 1010 is No, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, The CPUMC of the main control board M acquires various information commands at the time of power outage stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M, and in step 1014, transfers the acquired various information commands to the sub-main control unit SM. (It may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the command may be set at the relevant timing and transmitted in the control command transmission processing described later), and in step 1014-1, the main control The CPUMC of the board M is the return setting of the solenoid {the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10, the big winning port (for example, the first big winning port C10, the second big winning port C20) In order to restore the open or closed state to the state before the power was cut off, it is determined whether the solenoid operating bits are on or not in the order of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, the grand prize opening, and the movable piece, and the solenoid operating bit is turned on. In this case, store the solenoid activation flag in the corresponding address (in order to determine that the second main game start opening/big prize opening/movable piece is open before the power is cut off and open it again), The process moves to step 1015. At step 1015, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power has been turned on normally in the RAM, and proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt approximately every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) {As a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in the figure is executed}, and the process of step 1018 Transition. Note that after step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (eg, random number counter incrementing process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 3(b) based on an interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt approximately every 1.5 ms), in step 1000-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an input process to be described later. Next, in step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number update processes to be described later. Next, in step 1000-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value update type random number update process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1000-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes initial value random number updating processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1000-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a timer subtraction process to be described later. Next, in step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a starting port 2 valid period setting process (processing to set the valid period of the second main game starting port B10), which will be described later. Next, in step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a winning monitoring process to be described later. Next, in step 3000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize ball payout command transmission control process to be described later. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters each winning hole is 4 balls for the first main game starting hole A10, 1 ball for the second main game starting hole B10, and 1 ball for the first main game starting hole C10 and the second big winning hole C10. There are 13 balls in the big winning hole C20, 3 balls in the left general winning hole (sometimes referred to as general winning hole) P10, and 2 balls in the right general winning hole P20. Note that these numbers of prize balls paid out are just examples, and the number of prize balls paid out is different when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 and when the ball enters the second main game starting port B10. Alternatively, the number of prize balls paid out may be different between when the ball enters the first grand prize opening C10 and when the ball enters the second grand prize opening C20. In addition, when a game ball enters the left general winning hole P10, a lottery such as a win/fail lottery is not executed, and a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out (in this example, 3 balls) is awarded to the player. It is configured. In addition, when a game ball enters the right general winning hole P20, a random number on the auxiliary game side is obtained, and a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out (in this example, 2 balls) is given to the player. It is configured. However, the number of prize balls in all the winning holes provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example does not exceed 15 balls for one winning (ball entered), and is constant regardless of the gaming state (unless there is an abnormality). (Excluding cases where it is invalidated due to circumstances or an error has occurred), and is configured so that prize balls will not be paid out except when winning a prize, allowing various gaming conditions to be realized. , the direct result of the game is summarized as ``whether or not the fired game ball enters a predetermined winning slot.''

In addition, in this example, since the specific prize ball payout control process is performed not by the main control board M but by the prize ball payout control board KH, the main control board M can manage the progress of the payout control in real time. If there is a problem due to an unexpected event such as a power outage during the payout of one winning game ball, it may not be possible to pay out the correct number of winning balls. Therefore, in this example, there is an abnormality retry function that once again pays out game balls for the winning prize (for example, when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 and one game ball is paid out) When the power is cut off, the remaining three game balls are put out after the power is restored. Of course, by providing a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to pay out the correct number of prize balls even if such an abnormality occurs. It is not necessary to provide the function.

Next, in step 2000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes ball entry detection processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessory drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process to be described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process to be described later. Next, in step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a big winning opening valid period setting process. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process to be described later. Next, in step 1550-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a ball entry transit time abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state display process. Next, in step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a handle state signal inspection process. Next, in step 1550-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an outlet monitoring process. Next, in step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes LED output processing. Next, in step 1900, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes fraud detection information management processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1950, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes error management processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1550-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes firing control signal output processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes test signal output processing. Next, in step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes solenoid output processing. Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command sending process (sending the commands set in the above-mentioned processes to the sub-main control unit side). Next, in step 3500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes external signal output processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1550-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes ball entry state control processing. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets to permit generation of a timer interrupt, and returns to the process that was being executed immediately before executing the main interrupt process.

Note that the input processing is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor, and setting a flag etc. corresponding to the signal. (For example, the first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s, the second main game starting opening ball entering detection device B11s, the auxiliary game starting opening ball entering detection device H11s, the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening prize detection device C21s, general winning prize detection device, etc.), out ball count switch that detects the entry of balls into the out opening D36, disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, open signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18 etc.), magnetic detection signal 1 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 1), radio wave detection signal, impact detection signal, touch state signal, and magnetic detection signal 2 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 2) is a process that monitors the input. . In this example, for special inputs such as the RAM clear switch, input determination and the like are performed by a process different from the input process.

In addition, various random number update processes are processes that relatively simply update (for example, add a constant) the random numbers used in the lottery that have an extremely low influence on the ball payout, and in this example, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers (For example, auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number) and variation pattern random number (For example, variation mode lottery random number) is updated.

Note that the initial value update type random number update process is a process that updates the random numbers used in the lottery that has a certain degree of influence on the ball output (a process that is different from the various random number update processes described above), and in this example, , random numbers per normal symbol (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random number), normal symbol random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number), special symbol random number (for example, symbol lottery random number), soft random number per special symbol as described below, etc. This is the process for updating.

Note that the initial value random number update process is a process that updates the random number for determining the initial value of the random number that is updated in the initial value update type random number update process used in the lottery that has a certain degree of influence on the ball output described above. In this example, as an example of the random number to be updated, an initial value random number per normal symbol, a normal symbol initial value random number, a special symbol initial value random number, and a soft initial value random number per special symbol can be exemplified. In addition, the initial value random number per normal symbol and the normal symbol initial value random number are random numbers that are updated in the initial value random number update process when configured to have a plurality of auxiliary game content determining random numbers.

In addition, the timer subtraction process is a 2-byte timer (for example, the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C, the second main game starting opening electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, the special game timer MP34t , open time timer, etc.).

In addition, the activation opening 2 valid period setting process is a winning opening in which it is easy to win a prize by operating the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) depending on the operating state of the electric accessory. (For example, the process of setting the validity period of the second main game starting port B10).

In addition, the winning monitoring process is a process of updating the passage counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and requesting the transmission of a command to be sent to the production control board.

Moreover, the big winning hole valid period setting process is a process that saves the result of valid period determination of the big winning hole (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20). In addition, as in the 10th embodiment described later, when configured to have a specific area C22 in the grand prize opening, the configuration is such that the result of determining the validity period of the specific area C22 is saved by the grand prize opening validity period setting process. You may.

In addition, the abnormality detection process is a process that monitors magnetism, monitors disconnections and short circuits, monitors the power supply, monitors radio waves, monitors the open/close status of the glass frame set and the frame of the game board D35, and monitors shocks. .

In addition, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is performed at each switch level in order to detect an abnormality in the ball entry passage time when a game ball enters various ball entry ports (for example, the first main game starting port A10). This process monitors the continuous on time (continuous on time of the ball entry sensor).

In addition, the game status display process includes the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously (the number of rounds executed in a jackpot), the error state, the number of balls pending operation on the normal symbol display device (displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) The current number of auxiliary game pending balls) and the number of activated pending balls of the special symbol display device (the current number of main game pending balls displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20). This is the process of making a display request.

Moreover, the handle state signal inspection process is a process of monitoring the touch state of the firing handle (for example, the firing handle D44).

Further, the outlet monitoring process is a process of monitoring an outlet (for example, the outlet D36) in order to create a security output request.

In addition, the LED output processing refers to the display on the special symbol display device (for example, the display of the first main game symbol on the first main game symbol display device A20, the display of the second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20) , display of the number of active pending balls on the first main game side in the first main game pattern display device A20, display of the number of active pending balls on the second main game side in the second main game pattern display device B20), normal pattern display device display (display of auxiliary symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of the number of operation pending balls on the auxiliary game side in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20), display of error status, display of game status, display of division (e.g. Initialize the display in order to display the number of times the special electric accessories are activated in succession (display the number of rounds in a jackpot). This is a process of sequentially controlling the LED outputs controlled on the main control board M side, such as outputting display data.

Further, the firing control signal output process is a process of outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting the firing of game balls, and the details will be described later.

Further, the test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the gaming machine and outputting it to a corresponding output port.

In addition, solenoid output processing refers to the normal electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) solenoid and the big winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) solenoid. This is the process of outputting output data. In addition, when configured to have a shielding member (upper shielding member C24, lower shielding member C25) in the grand prize opening as in the fourth embodiment described later, the output data of the movable piece solenoid is output in the solenoid output process. Execute.

In addition, in the ball entry state control process, calculation of a base value to be displayed on the ball entry state display device J10, storage of the calculation result, display control of the calculation result, etc. are executed. At this time, if a setting change means described later is provided, the normal prize ball counter value, the normal out ball counter value, the total out ball counter value, the final base value of the previous section, etc. are stored for each setting value. , it is also possible to display it on a ball entering state display device. More specifically, when the power is turned on, the performance of the gaming machine corresponding to the current settings (e.g. jackpot winning probability and the number of winning balls in each winning slot) is read out, and the memory area corresponding to the current setting (e.g. , a normal prize ball counter value, a normal out ball counter value, a total out ball counter value, a final base value of the previous section, etc.) are set. Then, the admission status information is generated and displayed based on the values stored in the respective storage areas. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to appropriately generate and display ball entry state information (for example, base value) for each setting. In addition, regarding the ball entering state information displayed on the ball entering state display device, the display content is configured to be changed by operating a dedicated ball entering state display switching button or by operating a setting change button (for example, If the current setting is 1, when the ball entering state display switch button is operated once, the ball entering state information of setting 2 is displayed, and when it is operated one more time, the ball entering state information of setting 3 is displayed. (displayed) so that the latest information for each setting can be checked. Here, when using the setting change button, in order to prevent the settings from being changed by operating the setting change button, use the above-mentioned configuration using the setting key (for example, turn the power on and turn the setting key to the left). It is preferable that the display contents be changed by operating a setting change button while Note that when the display of the ball entering state information is switched using the ball entering state display switching button or the setting change button, the display may be configured to return to the current setting after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Next, FIG. 147 is a main flowchart showing the flow of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power outage) performed by the main control board M. First, NMI interrupt processing will be explained. As mentioned above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power-off signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power is cut off in the gaming machine, the process shown in FIG. is executed. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, at an NMI interrupt), in step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a timer interrupt is occurring. If Yes in step 1019-1, in step 1019-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether information indicating that the power has been turned on normally is not stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-1, the process in step 1019-1 is performed again. If Yes in step 1019-2, in step 1019-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power has been turned off abnormally in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1019-2, in step 1019-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power is normally turned off in the RAM, and in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M The CPUMC sets power outage information (for example, checksum) based on information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing. Although we have described an example in which the power-off process (Fig. 147) is executed by inputting the power-off signal to the NMI terminal of the CPU, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to determine a power outage by monitoring a specific input port in the main control board side main processing (FIG. 145) or timer interrupt processing (FIG. 146) and perform the power outage processing.

Next, FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process related to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. 146. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process to be described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes a payout control board reception control process to be described later, and moves to the next process (process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 149 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process related to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. 146. First, in step 3105, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not payout is currently being executed. If Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether there is an unpaid prize ball (a prize ball for which the prize ball payout command has not yet been sent to the prize ball payout control board KH side). Determine whether If YES in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a prize ball payout-related error that is inappropriate for paying out prize balls (for example, an error related to a malfunction of the payout motor, an error related to a failure of the top tray, etc.) , out-of-ball error, etc.) is occurring. If Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a prize ball payout command for the number of prize balls to be paid out corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the current payout process is executed (see ). Then, in step 3125, the CPUMC of the main control board M erases the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time, and executes a process of shifting the subsequent information. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and moves to the next process (step 3200, receiving control process for the payout control board). do. Note that even in the case of No in steps 3105, 3110, and 3115, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3200).

《Contents of commands and information sent and received between the main control board/dispensing control board》
Here, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be explained. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the ninth embodiment consists of specific information indicating that it is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 1001 (identification information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 are related to the number of prize balls; for example, 0 (0000B) means 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111A) means 15 prize balls. .

Next, the payout related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M side will be explained. Here, as an example, the payout related information (prize ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) includes a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, and payout motor error information. , prize ball device error information, tray full error, and prize ball payout completion information. The details of each error will be described later, but if the bit corresponding to each error is "0", it means that the error has not occurred, and if it is "1", it means that the error has not occurred. It means that is occurring. Note that bit 0 relates to the completion of the payout of the prize balls, and "0" means that the payout of the prize balls has been completed, and "1" means that the payout of the prize balls has not been completed.

Next, FIG. 151 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process related to the subroutine of step 3200 in FIG. 146. First, in step 3205, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether payout related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that error information (out of bulb error, upper tray full error, other payout-related errors) exists in the received payout-related information. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error, thereby transmitting the error information on the prize ball payout control board KH side to the main control board M side. However, it is managed (centrally managed). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3210, in step 3220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Then, in step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout related information. If Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (prize ball payout command related to the completion of the current payout), and performs the next process (step 3500). processing). Note that even in the case of No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 152 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether a game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passed through) the auxiliary game starting port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits an auxiliary game starting port entry command, which is a command related to the fact that the ball has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10, to the sub-main control unit SM. The control command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1110. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the right general winning hole P20. If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a right general winning hole entry command, which is a command related to the ball entering the right general winning hole P20, to the sub-main control unit SM. The control command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1110. Note that even in the case of No in step 1106, the process moves to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the number of reserved balls is not at the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1110, in step 1112, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the auxiliary game content determining random number (for example, the auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the number of pending balls by setting them in the RAM area of the main control board M, together with information on how many balls are on hold, and performs the next process ( The process moves to step 1200 (processing in step 1200). It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1104 and step 1110, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1200). Here, in the ninth embodiment, the random number on the auxiliary game side can be acquired when the ball enters the auxiliary game starting hole H10 or the right general winning hole P20. In addition, since the auxiliary game starting port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that enters the auxiliary game starting port H10 (passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10) continues to flow down the game board surface, and the auxiliary game starts. While the ball can enter the ball entrance downstream from the opening H10 (right general prize opening P20, etc.), the game ball that enters the right general prize opening P20 flows down to the depths of the game board surface, and after that, it can be played by other players. The structure is such that the ball does not enter the ball entrance. Although the details will be described later, even if the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port H10 (the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10), the prize ball will not be paid out, but the right general winning port P20 When a game ball enters the ball, a prize ball is paid out.

Next, FIG. 153 is a flowchart of ball entry detection processing related to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. 146. First, in step 2150, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game starting opening ball entry detection process to be described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game starting opening ball entry detection process that will be described later. Next, in step 2350, the ball entering determination means executes a first (second) big winning opening ball entering detection process which will be described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a general winning hole entry ball detection process to be described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an ejected ball detection process to be described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes out-entrance ball detection processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize ball determination process to be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 154 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game starting opening ball entry detection process related to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2152, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that if the input from the auxiliary game starting entrance ball entry detection device H11s is equal to or longer than the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball entry detection device H11s When detecting an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time period when it is assumed that a ball has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag. Next, in step 2158, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2200).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2160, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the auxiliary game starting opening ball entering detection device H11s is over the detection end time (at least the corresponding time, the auxiliary game starting opening ball entering detection device If H11s does not detect an input, it is determined whether the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time) when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the auxiliary game starting opening entrance ball detection device H11s. In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2200). Note that even in the case of No in step 2154 or step 2160, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 155 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening ball entry detection process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first main game starting opening ball entry detection device A11s is over the ball entering detection time (at least the corresponding time, the CPUMC of the main control board M When the ball detection device A11s detects an input, it determines whether it is ON for more than the time (time) during which it is assumed that a ball has entered the first main game starting port A10. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start opening detection continuation flag.

Next, in step 2212-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off). Determine whether or not. In addition, the case of being in a non-time saving game state may be the case where the main game time saving flag is off, or the case where the auxiliary game time saving flag is off (when the opening extension function of the electric accessory is not activated). In addition, the time reduction game state may be the case where the main game time reduction flag is on, or the case where the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on (when the opening extension function of the electric accessory is activated). If Yes in step 2212-1, in step 2212-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed (the conditional device activation flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting port entry number counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2222.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2213, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the ball entering number counter MJ10c has been detected for a detection time (at least for the relevant time, the first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s has input If not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been OFF for more than the time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first main game starting opening entrance ball detection device A11s. Next, in step 2214, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start opening long time detection flag, and moves to step 2222. Incidentally, if the answer is No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2, or step 2213, the process also moves to step 2222.

Next, in step 2222, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the second main game start opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game starting opening ball entering determining means MJ11-B determines that the input from the second main game starting opening ball entering detection device B11s is the ball entering detection time (more than the said time, When the second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s detects an input, it determines whether the second main game starting opening B10 is ON for more than the time period when it is assumed that a ball has entered the opening B10. In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the second main game start opening valid period. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, in step 2230, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start opening detection continuation flag.

Next, in step 2231-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed (the conditional device activation flag is off). If YES in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starter entrance ball counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2240. As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the player is in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off), and a special game is not being executed (conditions (device operation flag is off), when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10, 1 is added to the counter value of the number of balls entering the starting port counter MJ12c. It is configured like this.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (if the entry of the game ball into the second main game starting port B10 is detected during the period in which the entry of the ball into the second main game starting port B10 is not valid), in step 2232, the CPUMC of the main control board M It is determined that there is an illegal ball entering the second main game starting port B10, a second main game starting port illegal entering ball command (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process moves to step 2240. Incidentally, if the answer is No in step 2231-1, step 2231-2, or step 2224, the process also moves to step 2240.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2233, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s has been detected for a detection time (at least the corresponding time, the CPUMC of the main control board M If the ball detection device B11s does not detect an input, it is determined whether the game ball has been OFF for more than a time (time) when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the second main game starting entrance ball detection device B11s. In the case of Yes in step 2233, in step 2234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2238, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start opening long time detection flag, and moves to step 2240. Note that even if the answer is No in step 2233, the process moves to step 2240.

Next, in step 2240, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s (second main game starting opening ball entering detection device B11s) detects a fraud detection time (detects it as a normal ball entering ball). It is determined whether or not it has been turned on for a period of time exceeding the time at which it is determined that fraud is being committed. In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game start opening long time detection flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2350). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2240, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2350).

Next, FIG. 156 is a flowchart of the first (second) big winning hole entry ball detection process related to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the first (second) big winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s (second big winning hole winning detection device C21s) is the ball entering detection time (the time As described above, when the ball entry detection device detects an input, it determines whether or not the ball entry detection device has been turned on for a period of time at which it is assumed that a ball has entered the ball entry port. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the first (second) big prize opening valid period. In the case of Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2360, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) big winning opening detection continuation flag, and moves to step 2370.

On the other hand, if No in step 2355 (if the entry of a game ball into the grand prize opening is detected during a period in which entering the ball into the grand prize opening is not valid), in step 2361, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects an unauthorized entry into the grand prize opening. It is determined that there has been a ball entered, the first (second) grand prize opening illegal ball entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process moves to step 2370. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2354, the process moves to step 2320.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2362, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (second big winning opening winning detection device C21s) is detected at the detection time {the relevant time As mentioned above, if the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (second big winning opening winning detection device C21s) does not detect an input, the game ball will It is determined whether the detection device C21s) has been OFF for a period of time at which it is considered that the detection device C21s has completed passing. In the case of Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) big winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2368, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) big winning opening long time detection flag, and moves to step 2370.

Next, in step 2370, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (second big winning opening winning detection device C21s) is the fraud detection time When the winning hole winning detection device C11s (second big winning hole winning detection device C21s) detects an input, the time when it is assumed that an illegal entry into the first big winning hole C10 (second big winning hole C20) is detected. } Determine whether or not it is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) big winning opening long time detection flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2370, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 157 is a flowchart of the general winning hole entry ball detection process related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 153. In addition, the general winning hole P10 (the left general winning hole P10 and the right general winning hole P20 may be collectively referred to as the general winning hole P10) pays out prize balls when a game ball enters. , general winning hole entry ball detection device P11s (9th embodiment) which is a ball entry port that does not affect the progress of the game (does not execute a lottery that affects the progress of the game) and is a sensor that detects the entry of game balls. , a general winning hole entering ball detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the left general winning hole P10, and a general winning hole detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entering of a game ball into the right general winning hole P20. It has two general winning a prize opening ball detecting devices P11s and a ball entering ball detecting device P11s).

First, in step 2402, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning opening ball entering detection device is detected during the ball entering detection time (the general winning opening ball entering detection device detects the input after the specified time). Then, it is determined whether the ON state is longer than the time when it is assumed that a ball has entered the general winning slot. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2410, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2411-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed (the conditional device activation flag is off). If Yes in step 2411-2, in step 2411-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the general ball entry counter MJ13c, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning opening ball entering detection device is within the ball entering detection time (at least the corresponding time, the general winning opening ball entering detection device inputs If not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the general winning hole entry ball detection device). If Yes in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag in step 2414. Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long time detection flag, and moves to step 2420. Incidentally, if the answer is No in step 2404, steps 2411-1, 2411-2, or step 2412, the process also moves to step 2420. As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the player is in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off), and a special game is not being executed (conditions When the device operation flag is off), when a game ball enters the general winning hole P10, 1 is added to the counter value of the general ball entering number counter MJ13c.

Next, in step 2420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning hole ball entering detection device has been detected for a fraud detection time {if the general winning hole ball entering detection device detects an input for a period of It is determined whether or not it is ON for a period of time at which it is considered that an illegal entry of a ball into the mouth has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long time detection flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2500). Note that even in the case of No in step 2420, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart of ejected ball detection processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is equal to or longer than the entry detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input, the total discharge is confirmed). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for a period of time during which it is assumed that a ball has entered the sensor C90s. If YES in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in step 2506. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 by 1, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is detected at the detection end time (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s did not detect any input for more than the relevant time). In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains OFF for more than the time (time at which it is considered that the game ball has passed the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). If Yes in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in step 2512. Next, in step 2514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation long time detection flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2600). Note that even in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 159 is a flowchart of out-of-mouth ball entry detection processing related to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the exit detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out-entrance ball entry detection device C80s is over the ball entry detection time (at least the input ball detection device C80s detects the input). Then, it is determined whether the ON state is longer than the time period when it is assumed that the ball has entered the out port C80. If YES in step 2604, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the outlet detection continuation flag in step 2606, and proceeds to the process of step 2620.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out-entrance ball detection device C80s is detected after the detection end time (the out-input ball detection device C80s does not receive input after the relevant time). If not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains OFF for a period of time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the out entrance ball detection device C80s). If Yes in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the outlet detection continuation flag in step 2612. Next, in step 2615, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the outlet long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process moves to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the outside entrance ball detection device C80s has been detected for a fraud detection time (if the outside entrance ball detection device C80s has been detecting input for a period of time or longer). , the time at which it is considered that an illegal entry into the out port C80 is occurring) or not is determined. If Yes in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the outlet long time detection flag in step 2622, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2700). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2620, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process related to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the first main game start flag is on. If Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of prize balls paid out (in this example, 3) related to the first main game start opening A10 to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. to add. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information to the effect that the prize balls related to the first main game starting port A10 will be paid out (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out), and in step 2712 to move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2702, the process also moves to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the second main game start flag is on. If Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of prize balls paid out (in this example, 3) related to the second main game starting port B10 to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. to add. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information to the effect that the prize balls related to the second main game starting port B10 will be paid out (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out), and in step 2722 to move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2712, the process also moves to step 2722.

Next, in step 2722, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the first (second) big winning opening ball entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) big winning opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the number of prize balls paid out (in this example, 13 ) is added. Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M provides information (for example, information regarding the number of paid out prize balls) to the effect that the prize balls related to the first big winning hole C10 (second big winning hole C20) will be paid out. is temporarily stored, and the process moves to step 2732. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2722, the process also moves to step 2732.

Next, in step 2732, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the general winning hole entry ball flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2734, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (in this example, 10) related to the general winning hole to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information to the effect that the prize balls related to the general winning hole will be paid out (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out), and performs the next process (step 1100). processing). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2732, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1100).

Next, FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M obtains the gaming state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time saving flag), and also selects the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining auxiliary game symbols. The symbols to be stopped are determined based on the acquired gaming state of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the held ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, it is compared to when it is off). (to select winning symbols with high probability) and temporarily store them in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining auxiliary game stop symbols. As shown in the same table, in this example, there are "D0, D1, D2" as the stopping symbols, and the stopping symbols that become winning symbols are "D1, D2", which is caused by each stopping. In non-time reduction games, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode of the electric accessory is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed), and when the stopped symbol is When the pattern is "D2", the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open and closed for 2.0 seconds) (longest opening). In addition, during time reduction games, if the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed), and the symbol is stopped. When the pattern is "D2", the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → closed). In addition, during a non-time reduction game, the stop symbol is likely to become a losing symbol "D0", and during a time reduction game, the stop symbol is likely to become a winning symbol "D1".

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation time to the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H based on the gaming state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time shortening flag). Set a predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off). Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol and updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M. After starting the game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, variable display of the auxiliary game symbols is started on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the auxiliary game symbol variation time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols, and displays the acquired stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols as confirmed on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. do. Then, in step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols are "hits" (in this example, D1 and D2). If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the opening mode based on the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side (for example, in the case of winning symbol "D1", open for 1 second → closed for 1 second) → Open for 1 second → Close for 1 second → Open for 1 second → Closed. In the case of winning symbol "D2", the opening mode is open for 0.2 seconds, closed for 0.8 seconds, and opened for 5 seconds.) is determined, and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening/closing time) of the electric accessory is set in the second main game starting opening electric accessory release timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10, and moves to step 1242. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1202, the process moves to step 1242. In the ninth embodiment, when the main game time saving flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is a predetermined winning symbol (D2), the time for which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is kept open is the longest. It is configured.

Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the second main game starting port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B and determines whether a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory has been reached. Determine. If Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, turns off the electric accessory opening flag, and starts the next process. (Step 1300).

Note that if No in step 1204, the process moves to step 1224, and if No in steps 1206, 1224, 1230, and 1242, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, the process moves to the next step immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, but the process is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process can be performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). is achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determining random numbers, including the auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining the validity of the auxiliary game, the auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number for determining the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol. It may also include an auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number or the like for determining the variation time.

Although it is not shown, in one opening operation of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d (opening operation based on the stoppage of symbols per one auxiliary game), a game is inserted into the second main game starting opening B10. Even when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) enter, the opening operation of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is configured to end, that is, the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on ), when the opening (longest opening) of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is executed, "Open for 0.2 seconds → Close for 0.8 seconds → 4 seconds open → closed" opening time ends, or during the opening period of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are released from the second main game starting port B10. It is configured such that the opening (opening period) of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is completed by the achievement of whichever is earlier. In addition, in the case of a non-time saving game state (auxiliary game time saving flag off), if the opening (longest opening) of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is executed, 0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 2.0 seconds open → closed" opening time ends, or during the opening period of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) enter the second main game starting port B10, whichever comes first, the opening (opening period) of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d ends. ing. In addition, the total time that the normal electric accessory is open at the longest time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on) is 4.2 seconds, and the non In the time-saving game state (auxiliary game time-saving flag off), the total time that the normal electric accessory is open at the longest opening (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") is 2.2 seconds, and any game In each gaming state (time-reduced gaming state (or a non-time saving gaming state) is predetermined.

In addition, in this example, when the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the activation of the normal electric accessory (second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is confirmed and displayed in a winning manner, immediately (for example, It is configured to operate within 500ms, which is shorter than the shortest symbol variation time in a gaming machine, and it is possible to clearly correlate which trigger the electric accessory is activated based on. In addition, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning during the closing operation (in the middle of the operation from opening to closing) of the ordinary electric accessory (second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d), the ordinary electric accessory The drive source (solenoid) is selected so that the object (second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) returns to the inactive state in a short time, and more game balls than necessary are won and the balls are not put out. It is designed not to differ significantly from the design.

Next, FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game starting opening ball entry information has been received from the first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s of the first main game starting opening A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends the first main game starting port entry command, which is a command related to the ball entering the first main game starting port A10, to the sub-main control unit SM. The control command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the number of reserved balls related to the main game (especially on the first main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determining random number, a win/fail lottery random number for determining win/fail, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. We have obtained three random numbers for the variation lottery random numbers. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are successively acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the obtained random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information indicating that the first main game random number has been obtained (hold generation command) to the command sending buffer MT10 for sending to the sub-main control unit SM. set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command sending process in step 1999).

Note that the random number for winning or losing may be composed of one random number, or may be a random number generated from two or more random numbers. The random numbers generated from two or more random numbers include a CPU built-in random number that is updated based on the CPU clock or an external clock, and a soft random number per special symbol (main game symbol) that is updated by timer interrupt processing. The result of calculating (for example, adding) may be used.

Next, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game starting opening ball entry information has been received from the second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s of the second main game starting opening B10. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the number of reserved balls related to the main game (especially on the second main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the ninth embodiment, as the second main game content determining random numbers, three random numbers are acquired, which are a win/fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variable mode lottery random number, similarly to the first main game side. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the win/fail lottery random numbers for the first main game and the win/fail lottery random numbers for the second main game) are set the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (reserves) the obtained random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information indicating that the second main game random number has been obtained (hold generation command) to the command sending buffer MT10 for sending to the sub-main control unit SM. The control command is set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). Note that in the case of No in step 1302 and step 1304, the process moves to step 1312, and in the case of No in step 1312 and step 1314, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1400).

Next, FIG. 163 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M to check whether or not there are any second main game symbols on hold. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400(1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process described below, and executes the next process {the process in steps 1400(1) and (2) }. On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400(2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and executes the next process {steps 1400(1), (2) processing}.

In this way, in the ninth embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the existence of a reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the first main game symbol) (even if the second main game symbol is held first), the system is configured to give priority to the second main game symbol to be used, but is not limited to this (such as holding the second main game symbol based on the order of winnings or playing both main game symbols at the same time). (It may be configured to perform a parallel lottery in which the lottery is drawn in parallel).

Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. 163. In addition, since this process is approximately the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly explained, and the process for the second main game symbol side will be explained below. It is written in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the variation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbols are not in variation, and the main game symbols are on hold. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed variation time (time during which the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed after the main game symbol is displayed) is provided, during the fixed variation time, the variation start condition for the next variation is set. It may be configured so that it does not satisfy.

If Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs the first main game content determining random number ( The second main game content determining random number) is read out and deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and the remaining temporarily stored pending information is shifted (pending extinguishing process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each gaming state, and determines the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, Based on the winning lottery random number), a main game symbol validity lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 165 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game win/fail lottery table (second main game win/fail lottery table). As shown in this example, in the ninth embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the variable probability gaming state is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot in the non-probability varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this in any way.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), and determines the main game symbol success/failure lottery results and the first Stop symbols related to the main game symbols are determined based on the main game content determining random numbers (second main game content determining random numbers) (in particular, symbol lottery random numbers), and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

Here, FIG. 165 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the ninth embodiment, if a jackpot is won, one of the multiple main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B") It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined by referring to the main game symbols is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B, and 10R for 7A and 7B. Furthermore, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are just examples, and are not limited to these {for example, the losing symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, but may be configured to have multiple types of symbols. }.

Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table (second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each gaming state, and The fluctuation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the winning/failure lottery results and the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (in particular, the fluctuation mode lottery random number), and these are stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. , and the process moves to step 1414.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 165 is an example of a lottery table for determining a first main game variation mode (a lottery table for determining a second main game variation mode). As shown in this figure, in the ninth embodiment, the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the main game symbol for a certain random value can be determined based on the winning/failure lottery result of the main game symbol and the state of the main game time shortening flag. It is configured. For example, with respect to a certain random number value, if the winning/failure lottery result of the main game symbol is a win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and if the main game time shortening flag is on (time reduction In the gaming state), the configuration is such that a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is likely to be determined. Note that this example is just an example, and there is no limitation to the type of variation mode (variation time), selection rate, etc. Further, it may be configured such that the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction gaming state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) is relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side When the system is configured such that it is advantageous for the player to execute, the second main game side is likely to be held by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player). Since the purpose is to create a situation in which the game is played, it is particularly effective in cases where it is not possible to distinguish between the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side.

Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues commands related to the main game symbols (stopped symbol information, attribute information of the stopped symbols, variation mode information, etc.) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. A command related to the current gaming state (symbol variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process in step 1999, the sub-main control unit SM side ). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol fluctuation time in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g), in accordance with the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, starts displaying the main game symbols in a variable manner. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuating flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process moves to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1550).

Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbols has been reached. If Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command for sending information to the sub-main control unit SM about the end of symbol variation (symbol finalization display instruction command). It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) Stops the fluctuating display of the main game symbols on the main control board M, and controls the display of the stopped symbols stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as fixed stopped symbols. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuating flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and determines whether or not the stopped symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If YES in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device activation flag in step 1440, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process moves to step 1500.

Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1550). Note that even in the case of No in step 1420, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 166 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 164. First, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change flag is off. If Yes in step 1506, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0 or not. If Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag in step 1516. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag and moves to the next process (the process of step 1550). It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1506, step 1510, or step 1514, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1550). In this way, in this example, the configuration is such that the remaining number of time reductions (the remaining number of symbol variations that will cause the time reduction game state to end due to the number of symbol variations completed after the end of the special game) is transmitted to the sub-control board S. has been done.

Next, FIG. 167 is a flowchart of special game control processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, in steps 1604 and 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) in a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information to start a special game (special game start display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process moves to step 1612.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process moves to step 1612. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that permission for the special game is not granted, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether it is immediately before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, a set opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that continues opening, a pattern that opens and closes multiple times) is set. Next, in step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first big winning hole electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d) of the first big winning hole C10 to win the first big winning hole. The winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole C20) is opened and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big prize opening is open, the process moves to step 1622 without performing the processes in steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a game status command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command sending process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole C20) has a predetermined number of balls (for example, It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (10 balls). If YES in step 1624, the process moves to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and sets the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) for opening the big prize opening. ) has elapsed. If YES in step 1626, the process also moves to step 1628. Note that in the case of No in step 1626, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the first big winning hole electric accessory C11d of the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d of the second big winning hole C20). to close the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20). Next, in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, it is determined whether the final round has ended (for example, whether the counter value of a round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum number of rounds). If Yes in step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag in step 1636. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect of ending the special game (special game end display instruction command) to the command sending buffer MT10 for sending the information to the sub-main control unit SM side. set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command sending process in step 1999). Then, in step 1650, a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997). Note that even in the case of No in step 1634, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

In addition, in this example, the maximum number of winning game balls set in the program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set as 10, and when the maximum number of winning balls is reached, controls to immediately close the big winning hole (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20), and prevents the winning of game balls exceeding the maximum number of winnings, while the ball game (big winning hole) Even if the maximum number of winnings is exceeded due to unforeseen circumstances such as the game ball temporarily stopping between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the winning opening, the winning amount will be exceeded under the specified conditions (within a specified period after closing). Only in this case, any winnings exceeding the maximum number of winnings will be treated as valid winnings.

More specifically, when the first big prize opening C10 opens in the first round of a jackpot, if a predetermined number of prizes (for example, 10 balls) are won in the first big winning hole C10 in the first round, the first big winning hole C10 opens. One round will end, but in the situation where 9 game balls entered the first big winning hole C10 in the first round, the 10th ball entered the first big winning hole C10 and the 11th ball entered the first big winning hole C10. Even if a game ball exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) that ends the first round enters the first grand prize opening C10 due to the ball entering the first round at approximately the same time, It is configured to pay out prize balls with winnings as valid. On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and opening/closing parts (doors, etc.) of the grand prize opening are executed in real time when the closing process is executed to prevent excessive winnings (winnings exceeding the maximum number of prizes). The structure and electrical design are designed to prevent a plurality of game balls from accumulating in or near the opening/closing member immediately before the opening/closing member closes. This is configured to prevent the game performance from deviating from the ball payout design value and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, the maximum opening time set in the program for one unit game (one round execution) is set to be 30 seconds or less throughout one unit game, and the maximum opening time is set before the maximum opening time elapses. When the number of winning game balls in the winning opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the winning opening is controlled to be immediately closed, and after the maximum opening time has elapsed, the winning of game balls is prevented while the ball is Even if a prize is won after the maximum opening time has elapsed due to unforeseen circumstances such as a game ball temporarily stopping between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the grand prize opening, even if a prize is won after the maximum opening time has elapsed, (within a predetermined period), the winnings are treated as valid winnings.

More specifically, the opening mode of the jackpot when executing one round in a jackpot is "15 seconds open → 2 seconds closed →" depending on the type of jackpot and the number of unit games (number of rounds executed). One of several operation patterns can be set, such as ``14.5 seconds open → closed'' and ``29.5 seconds open → closed'', but no matter which operation pattern is used, the big prize opening is The game ball is configured so that the total open time is 30 seconds or less, and when the maximum opening time (29.5 seconds) of the grand prize opening has elapsed in one round, the game ball is released during the closing process of the grand prize opening. Even if a ball enters, the system is configured so that the winning is valid and the prize ball is paid out as long as it is within the valid period (approximately 1000 ms after the closing process of the grand prize opening is completed). On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and opening/closing parts (doors, etc.) of the grand prize opening are closed in real time when the closing process is executed to prevent winnings after the maximum opening time has elapsed. However, the structure and electrical design are designed to prevent a plurality of game balls from accumulating in or near the opening/closing member immediately before the closing operation. This is configured to prevent the game performance from deviating from the ball payout design value and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Next, FIG. 168 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 167. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a probability-variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that will transition to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game, and in this example, " 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B"). In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag, and moves to step 1656. On the other hand, if No in step 1652 (in this example, this is a case where the non-probability variable jackpot symbol, which is the jackpot symbol that will transition to the non-probability variable gaming state after the special game ends, is a stop symbol, and in this example, "4A 4B), the process also moves to step 1656. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) in the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997).

In addition, in this example, the electric support gaming state (the opening time of the winning hole related to the normal electric accessory, the time until opening, etc., the number of openings, etc., and the normal electric accessory is activated) is only based on the end of the jackpot. This is a state in which the probability of the symbol combination that will be displayed is changed to make it easier to win a prize. The state will continue until the main game symbol has fluctuated a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), except when the probability of the special symbol is fluctuating (in the case of a probability fluctuating game state). (until the end of the fluctuation). Furthermore, the number of game balls won in conjunction with winnings in other winning slots is approximately the same as the number of game balls fired (the ball output rate does not exceed 1) or less. The ball output during the state is designed (the arrangement of each prize opening, the operation contents of normal electric accessories, the winning probability of auxiliary game symbols, etc. are designed), and the ball output performance in the electric support game state is the same as the ball output in the jackpot game. It is designed not to be higher than the performance. By configuring in this way, the game related to the main game symbol and the game related to the auxiliary game symbol have a master-slave relationship in the game, and the game does not become unnecessarily complicated.

Next, FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process related to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the conditional device activation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time shortening flag, auxiliary game time shortening flag). Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the conditional device activation flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1600). Note that if the answer is No in step 1552, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 170 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of consecutive times (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). The purpose of this process is to remove the influence of noise by determining whether interrupts are continuously turned on for a predetermined number of interrupts. (The same meaning applies when the phrase "continuously occurs a predetermined number of times" is used.) If Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that unauthorized radio waves have been detected, turns on the unauthorized radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized radio wave sensor and determines whether the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is OFF a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of unauthorized radio waves has been completed, turns off the unauthorized radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1906, the process moves to step 1912.

Next, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized magnetic sensor and determines whether the input from the unauthorized magnetic sensor is ON a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that illegal magnetism has been detected, turns on the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, if No in step 1912, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized magnetic sensor and determines whether the input from the unauthorized magnetic sensor is OFF a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that detection of illegal magnetism has been completed, turns off the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1916, the process moves to step 1922.

Next, in step 1922, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door open sensor and determines whether the input from the door open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of consecutive times. If Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 is opened, turns on the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door open sensor and determines whether the input from the door open sensor is OFF a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1926, in step 1928, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 is opened, turns off the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. Incidentally, even if the answer in step 1926 is No, the process moves to step 1932.

Next, in step 1932, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame open sensor and determines whether the input from the frame open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of consecutive times. If Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine slot D has been opened, turns on the slot open flag, and proceeds to step 1934. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame open sensor and determines whether the input from the frame open sensor is OFF a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine slot D has been opened, turns off the slot open flag, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1950). . Note that even in the case of No in step 1936, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1950).

Next, FIG. 171 is a flowchart of error management processing related to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the error occurrence conditions are satisfied. If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command (command to the sub-control board S side) to the effect that an error has occurred and error type information (control command in step 1990). (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by transmission processing). Next, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the error release condition is satisfied. If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) regarding information that the error has been cleared (control command transmission process in step 1990). (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 3000). Note that even in the case of No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3000).

Next, FIG. 172 is a flowchart of firing control signal output processing related to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates the communication status (BIT0) with the payout control board (sometimes referred to as the prize ball payout control board KH) and the disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality (BIT1). Get the error flag. BIT0 indicating the communication status indicates normality if it is "00000000B" and indicates abnormality if it is "00000001B". In BIT1 indicating disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality, "00000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates abnormality. Next, in step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the logical product of the error flag acquired in step 1550-7-1 and the determination data ("00000011B"). Next, in step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the launch permission signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates a firing permission signal, and "00000000B" indicates an error (abnormality), and "00100000B" indicates normality. Next, in step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1550-8). Here, the output ports are, for example, BIT0 is digit 1-bit data, BIT1 is digit 2-bit data, BIT2 is digit 3-bit data, BIT3 is digit 4-bit data, BIT4 is digit 5-bit data, BIT5 is firing permission signal bit data. , BIT6 is configured as production strobe bit data, and BIT7 is configured as a security bit.

Next, FIG. 173 is a flowchart of external signal output processing related to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 146. First, in step 3502, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the gaming status temporary storage means MB and confirms the status of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and transmits the information to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal board G according to the ninth embodiment will be explained with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). The external relay terminal board G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information regarding prize ball payout, information regarding winning and symbol stopping, and current gaming status (normal gaming status, Terminal for outputting gaming status information (specific gaming status, special gaming status, etc.), error information for outputting various error information detected by an open detection sensor, etc. when the door is open output terminals, etc.) are provided. As described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness, so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the ninth embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as a terminal for outputting payout-related information, which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is multiple types of information. Note that the output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M, for example, jackpot output terminals that output signals during the jackpot (there are multiple jackpots depending on the type of jackpot). ), a door open output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a starting opening winning output terminal that outputs a signal when a winning ball enters the starting opening, a ball shortage in the prize ball tank KT. Game-related information that is important information for the gaming hall operator, such as the terminal for outputting when the ball is out, which outputs a signal while the ball is out, and the terminal for outputting the number of special symbols confirmed, which outputs a signal when the special symbol is confirmed and stopped. This is an output terminal. That is, by using one output terminal as the output terminal for the payout-related information, it is possible to avoid exhaustion of the output terminals for these important game-related information.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. ing. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, to explain the outline of the information transmission system of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment, first, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal A cable harness connects the board G and the hall computer HC. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always electrically connected. It's not that I'm doing it. That is, the electrical signals (binary logic signals whose voltage is Hi level/Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminals of the external relay terminal board G are connected to the relay. After the signal is once replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is on/off) by the section, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to respective input/output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force closes the contact portion G2, thereby establishing electrical continuity between the output terminal and the hall computer HC. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the Hall computer HC are no longer electrically connected. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, by detecting the period of conduction, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal that is substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G. With this configuration, it is possible to physically ensure one-way communication from the main control board M and prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and from the hall computer HC side to the main control board M and the ball payout control board KH. This prevents illegal operations (so-called remote control operations) in which the prize ball payout control board KH is manipulated illegally. In this example, a mechanism using a relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing misbehavior, but the invention is not limited to this. One-way communication is also possible using a photosensor with a light receiving section (for example, light from a light emitting section connected to the main control board M and prize ball payout control board KH is connected to a light receiving section connected to the hall computer HC). I would like to add that it is possible to receive signals by reading them on the computer.

However, since it is configured to be replaced with a physical signal (switch state is on/off), one signal on the external relay terminal board G is sent from the main control board M and prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC. It is difficult to transmit complex information using input/output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using one input/output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the number of special symbols confirmed, It is customary to configure the system so that only information indicating that "one variation of the special symbol has ended" can be transmitted.

Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the ninth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 174. Please note that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification mode, measures to be taken in case of duplication, etc.) are just examples, and can be changed as long as they do not significantly deviate from the concept of this example. I'll keep it.

First, there are other signals; a preliminary signal that always outputs an OFF signal; starts at an arbitrary timing after the power is turned on {for example, the start of execution of main processing on the main control board side (a) in FIG. 145}; This is a signal that always outputs an off signal. Note that this signal is a signal that may or may not be used depending on the developed model (complexity of gameplay).

Next is the signal from the IN/OUT staff; the number of game balls that entered all the ball entry ports (including the out port) arranged on the game area D30 (≒ the number of game balls that were hit into the game area D30) ) is the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s (for example, the value of the total discharge confirmation counter MJ11c-C90, but it may also be the value of the input ball counter MJ10c) This is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds every time the number reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10). It should be noted that if the output periods overlap, the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of one signal currently being output expires.

Next is the signal from the IN/OUT section; the signal that outputs the number of game balls put out by the gaming machine; every time the number of game balls detected by the payout count sensor KE10s reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10). ; After outputting an on signal for 0.2 seconds, an off signal is output for 0.2 seconds. It should be noted that if the output periods overlap, the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of one signal currently being output expires. Furthermore, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be configured to start after a predetermined period of time has passed (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and when waiting for the next output, may be configured to start outputting immediately after the current output period expires (even before the predetermined period described above has elapsed).

Next is the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the glass door of the game machine (a frame body equipped with a transparent plate, for example, glass door D18) is being opened; the door unit opening detection When the sensor D18s changes from off to on (for example, when the door open flag is turned on in step 1924) {*However, after the sensor D18s changes from off to on, it remains on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds). It is also possible to set the output timing to be continuous}; During the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the door open flag is on), it is a signal that always outputs an on signal. →After turning off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) has elapsed}.

Next is the unit monitoring system signal; the signal that outputs that the front frame of the gaming machine (the frame body to which the game board is attached, for example, the front frame unit D14) is being opened is; the front frame unit When the opening detection sensor D14s changes from off to on (for example, when the frame opening flag is turned on in step 1934) {*However, after changing from off to on, it is turned on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) The output timing may be set to consecutive times}; During the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the frame opening flag is on), it is a signal that outputs an always-on signal {*However, After the change from on to off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) has elapsed.

Next is a signal from the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the tray frame of the gaming machine (the frame body with the ball tray attached, ball tray unit D17) is being opened is; the ball tray unit open detection sensor When D20s changes from off to on {*However, after changing from off to on, the output timing may be when it continues to be on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds)}; the detection sensor is on. During the period, it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {*However, after changing from on to off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) has elapsed}.

Here, the above three types of unit monitoring system signals may be the same output signal depending on the configuration between each unit. In that case, it is sufficient to continue outputting the on signal while any of the open detection sensors is on. In addition, the open detection sensor of each unit may be connected to the main control board M, or may be connected to the prize ball payout control board KH side (the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (because bidirectional communication is possible).

Next, it is a symbol fluctuation system signal; the signal that targets all the symbol fluctuations that trigger the opening of the big winning hole (attacker) and outputs the number of symbol fluctuations is; the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol. When the fluctuating display of the game symbols ends (for example, when the fluctuating flag is turned from on to off in step 1424) {*In addition, if the period during which the symbols are fixedly displayed ends after the fluctuating display ends ( Alternatively, the output timing may be set to 0.5 seconds or 0.5 seconds. In addition, it is preferable that the output period is configured to be shorter than the shortest possible period of the variable display period of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Further, the signal may be output for a certain period during the main game symbol fluctuation fixed time.

Next, it is a symbol fluctuation system signal; it targets a part of the symbol fluctuation that triggers the opening of the big winning hole (attacker) (for example, symbol fluctuation on the second main game side), and outputs the number of symbol fluctuations. The signal to be used is; When the fluctuating display of the second main game symbol is completed (for example, when the fluctuating flag is turned from on to off in step 1424 in the second main game symbol display process) {*Please note that the fluctuating display The output timing may be when the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends (or if it starts, or if it is during the period) after the end of the period}; A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.5 seconds. It is. In addition, it is preferable that the output period is configured to be shorter than the shortest possible period of the variable display period of the second main game symbol.

Next, there are jackpot-related signals; signals that output that the jackpot opening (attacker) can be opened during the period (accessories continuous actuation device is in operation); when a special game is started (for example, In step 1606, the accessory continuous actuation device activation flag is turned from off to on, but in step 1432, the conditional device activation flag may be changed from off to on) {*Before the start of the start demo period, During the period, the output timing may be after the end}; During the period when the special game is being executed (for example, during the period when the accessory continuous activation device activation flag or the conditional device activation flag is on), the always-on signal is output. This is the signal to be output.

Next, it is a jackpot-related signal; it is during the period when the big winning hole (attacker) can be opened (the accessory continuous operation device is in operation), and symbol fluctuations that trigger the opening of the big winning hole (attacker) The signal that outputs that the time reduction game is in progress (variable time reduction function in operation) is when a special game is started (for example, when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned from off to on in step 1606). , or when the conditional device operation flag is turned from off to on in step 1432), and when a time-saving game is started (for example, when the main game time-saving flag is turned from off to on in step 1708, and/or In step 1710, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is turned from off to on); during the period when the special game is being executed (for example, during the period when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and/or the conditional device operation flag is on) , and during the period in which the time-saving game is being executed (for example, during the period in which the main game time-saving flag and/or the auxiliary game time-saving flag are on), this is a signal that outputs an always-on signal.

Next, there are other signals; information for uniquely identifying the gaming machine is output {*gaming machine manufacturer identification code (2 bytes), gaming machine model name identification code (64 bytes), main board CPU The unique information (chip code register value = 4 bytes) of Approximately 10 seconds after input); The unique information is divided into 1 frame (1 bit start bit + 8 bit data bits + 1 bit parity bit + 1 bit stop bit) and is transmitted using serial transmission method (start-stop synchronization, 200 bps) until the entire signal is output. Note that it is preferable that the signal format (rated voltage, rated current) be different from other signal types.

Next is the IN/OUT system signal; the signal that outputs the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out from the gaming machine; When detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out is totaled, and each time the total number of prize balls (for example, the value of the prize ball number counter MHc) reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10); every 0.1 seconds. This is a signal that outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds after outputting an on signal for a period of 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of the currently output one signal expires. Furthermore, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after a predetermined period has elapsed (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and when the next output is waiting, may be configured to start outputting immediately after the current output period expires (even before the predetermined period described above has elapsed).

Next, there is a security-related signal; a signal that outputs that a RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine; the power is turned on accompanied by a RAM initialization operation (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002) This is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds from a later arbitrary timing {after a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on}. Note that the output period may be configured to be the same as the output period in the IN/OUT system or the winning detection system.

Next, it is a security system signal; a period other than the period during which the big prize opening (attacker) can be opened (from the activation of the special electric accessory until the elapse of a predetermined period after the activation ends) {for example, the first (second) ) Outputs that a ball entering the big winning hole (an attacker, for example, the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20) is detected during the period when the flag is off during the big winning hole valid period} The signal to be used is; except during the execution period of each round during the special game (including the waiting period and the period between rounds) {for example, the period when the flag is off during the first (second) big prize opening validity period}. When the entering ball sensor of the winning hole detects the entering of the game ball (for example, when the determination is No in step 2305); after outputting the ON signal for 0.2 seconds, the on signal is output for 0.2 seconds. This is a signal that outputs an off signal. If the output periods overlap, the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of the currently output one signal expires.

Next is the security system signal; the signal that outputs that there is a magnet sensor error (the sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism); when the signal from the magnet sensor turns on ( For example, if the illegal magnetism detection flag is turned from off to on in step 1914) {*However, if it turns on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after turning on, the output timing is not met. This is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods are configured so that they cannot overlap.

Next is the security signal; the signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that detects radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave); when the signal from the radio wave sensor turns on (for example, (When the unauthorized radio wave detection flag is turned from off to on in step 1904) {*However, if it turns on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after turning on, the output timing will not be met} ; This is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that, due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods are configured so that they cannot overlap.

Next is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that detects radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave) on the payout control board side (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH). ; When the signal from the radio wave sensor input to the payout control board side is turned on (for example, when information related to a radio wave detection error from the prize ball payout control board KH is confirmed in step 3215) {*However, , if it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after being turned on, the output timing is not satisfied}; This is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods cannot overlap. In addition, a command is sent from the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH) to the main control board (for example, the main control board M) to indicate that the signal from the radio wave sensor has been turned on, The main control board may be configured to output a signal after receiving the command.

Next is the security system signal; illegal ball entry into each winning hole that is the target of prize ball payout (for example, ball entry more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time, ball entry detection sensor remaining ON for more than a predetermined time) , the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during the special game was greater than the predetermined number determined for each execution mode of the special game, the number of balls entered exceeded the design value during a certain ball entry validity period, etc.) The signal that outputs this is: 1. After detecting one ball entering each winning hole with the switch for detecting the ball entering each winning hole, the event in which one ball entering the hole is detected again within the period determined for each winning hole is totaled to a predetermined amount. If it occurs more than the number of times, and 2. When the switch for detecting the ball entering each winning hole continues to detect the ball entering for a predetermined period, and 3. During the execution of a certain special game (e.g. 16 round jackpot), if the number of balls entering the big winning hole detected by the ball entering sensor exceeds the specified number (e.g. 160) throughout the period, When any one of 1 to 3 is satisfied: This is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds. It should be noted that if the output periods overlap, the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of one signal currently being output expires. Further, in the case of 3 above, it is preferable to vary the specified number depending on the execution content of the special game (Example 1: If the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds, the specified number = 100. Example 2: If the big winning opening only performs short openings, 3 above does not apply).

Next is a security signal; it indicates that a RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and that there is a detectable fraudulent act on the gaming machine (e.g., unauthorized winning...big winning opening (attacker)). During the period other than the period when the special electric accessory is activated, a predetermined number (5) or more of balls entering the big prize opening (attacker) are detected, or the normal electric accessory cannot be opened. During the period, a predetermined number (5) or more of balls entering normal electric accessories were detected. Radio wave sensor error: The sensor that detects radio waves has detected an abnormal radio wave, or the sensor is not connected. Board switch error: The proximity sensor installed on the game board detects the approach of an object. Magnet sensor error: A signal that outputs that a sensor that detects the approach of a magnet has detected abnormal magnetism, or that the sensor is not connected, etc. is: 1. Any timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when the determination is Yes in step 1002), and 2. When the fraudulent act (unauthorized prize winning 1, radio wave sensor error) is detected; and 3. When detecting fraudulent activity (board switch error, magnet sensor error), if any of 1 to 3 is met; in case 1, an on signal is output for the first period (30 seconds). In the case of 2 above, the on signal is output for the second period (30 seconds), and in the case of 3 above, the on signal is output for the third period (during the detection of each fraudulent act). It's a signal. In addition, when the output periods overlap, all the output periods are overlapped, and the output of the on signal is maintained until all the output periods expire. Furthermore, the output period may be made different in case 1 and case 2 above.

Next, there are security signals; it indicates that a RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and detectable fraudulent activity on the gaming machine (e.g., abnormal winning error...big winning opening (attacker)) During the period when the normal electric accessory cannot be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), when a ball entering the big prize opening (attacker) is detected, during the period when the normal electric accessory cannot be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated) (excluding periods), a ball entering a normal electric accessory was detected, etc. Magnet sensor error...The sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism, etc. Discharge error: The number of balls detected by the switch for detecting the entry of balls into each entry hole that is subject to prize ball payout, and the switch for confirming ball entry downstream of the switch (especially the one shown in the figure). Although not shown, the game ball is detected by one or more switches through which the game ball enters each ball entry port, which is different from the switch for detecting the ball entering each ball entry port. The signal that outputs that the difference between the number of pitches entered and the number of pitches entered exceeds a predetermined number (100), etc. is being carried out is: 1. Any timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when the determination is Yes in step 1002), and 2. When the fraudulent act (abnormal winning error, magnet sensor error) is detected; and 3. When the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (discharge error) is detected; in the case of 1 and 2 above, the on signal is output for 0.2 seconds, then the off signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and in the case of 3 above. In this case, it is a signal that outputs an on signal until the above-mentioned 1 is satisfied next time. It should be noted that if the output periods overlap (other than the above-mentioned 3), the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of one signal currently being output expires. Further, even during the output period according to 1 and 2 above, the output of the on signal is maintained at the output timing according to 3 above, and during the output period according to 3 above, the output according to 1 and 2 above is maintained. Even when the timing is reached, the output of the on signal is maintained.

Next is the winning detection system signal; the signal that targets all the starting holes related to symbol fluctuations that trigger the opening of the big winning hole (attacker) and outputs the number of times the ball enters each starting hole is; If the switch for detecting the entry of a ball into the first main game starting port detects the first ball entering the first main game starting port, and the second main game starting port (one equipped with an electric accessory, If a switch for detecting a ball entering a ball is detected (for example, if the first main game start flag is turned from off to on in step 2206, Or, in step 2226, when the second main game start flag is changed from off to on); this is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.1 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds. It should be noted that if the output periods overlap, the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of one signal currently being output expires. Further, when an illegal entry of a ball into the second main game starting port (in which an electric accessory is mounted) is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied using the entry of the ball as a trigger.

Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 175 to 186.

First, FIG. 175 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes error control processing upon abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout related information transmission/reception process to be described later with the main control board M. Next, in step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (when starting prize ball payout/starting motor drive), which will be described later. Next, in step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive/at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, in step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) which will be described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a motor error process to be described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of the same figure, the prize ball payout control board KH of the gaming machine in the ninth embodiment is responsible for sending and receiving commands and information with the main control board M side, card unit R side, etc. A transmission/reception control means 3100 that controls the control, an error control means 3200 that executes control of errors related to payout, etc. on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of games in response to the prize ball payout command and the rental ball command. It has a payout control means 3300 that executes a ball payout process. Each means will be explained in detail below.

First, the transmission/reception control means 3100 includes a reception control means 3110 that controls the reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R, and a reception control means 3110 that controls the reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R. and a transmission control means 3120 that controls the control.

Here, the reception control means 3110 further includes a main side reception control means 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, commands) from the main control board M. The main side reception control means 3111 further includes a main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further includes a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 in which error information related to the payout operation to be transmitted to the main control board M side is temporarily stored.

Next, the error control means 3200 includes an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on/off state of an error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality is detected. an error control means 3230 for controlling errors when a dispensing motor operation is detected; an error controlling means 3240 for detecting an error in dispensing motor operation; an error control means 3240 for controlling errors when a dispensing abnormality is detected; A ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 that controls the control, a payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 that controls the error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation is detected. an error control means 3270 for detecting an abnormality in payout required when a payout stop error is detected, and a ball catch error occurrence timer 3200t that manages the error notification period when a ball catch error occurs in the prize ball payout unit KE10; It further includes a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages a period of error notification when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Here, the error control means 3230 upon detection of abnormality in the operation of the dispensing motor further includes an unauthorized dispensing cumulative counter 3231 for cumulatively counting the number of times an abnormality in the dispensing motor operation has been detected. Further, the error control means 3240 at the time of detecting an abnormality in payout further includes an excessive payout cumulative counter 3241 for cumulatively counting the number of paid out excessive prize balls. Further, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further includes a payout interval extension control means 3251 that executes a time extension process for the payout interval related to prize ball payout. Further, the error control means 3260 upon detection of an abnormality in the dispensing motor further includes a retry operation control means 3261 that executes a retry operation (retry operation) for resolving the abnormal operation of the dispensing motor KE10m.

Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout process related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310 includes a payout status flag temporary storage means 3311 for temporarily storing a state related to payout (for example, whether or not a payout is in progress/whether a payout abnormality has occurred). At the time of the payout process, a payout counter 3312 to which the number of game balls to be paid out is set, a step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and a payout motor KE10m driven. When the stator is excited, the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is used to temporarily store the position information of the excited stator, and the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is used to temporarily store the position information of the excited stator, and the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is used to temporarily store the position information of the excited stator. The game machine further includes a ball passing wait timer 3315 for measuring time (time and motor rest time), and a unit payout counter 3317 in which the number of game balls to be paid out by a unit payout operation is set. Here, in the ninth embodiment, the ball passing wait timer 3315 is a decrement type timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0, but is not limited to this, and can be an increment type timer. It is also possible to configure using a timer. Each subroutine will be explained in detail below.

Next, FIG. 176 is a flowchart of error control processing upon abnormality detection, which is related to the subroutine of step 4100 in FIG. 175. First, in step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes error control processing upon detecting an abnormality in the dispensing motor operation, which will be described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes error control processing upon detecting a payout abnormality, which will be described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes error control processing upon detecting a ball path abnormality, which will be described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when an abnormality is detected in the dispensing motor, which will be described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when detecting a payout stop abnormality, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission/reception process in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 177 is a flowchart of the error control process when an abnormality is detected in the dispensing motor operation, which is related to the subroutine of step 4110 in FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of times the abnormality has occurred when an abnormality in the operation of the payout motor, which will be described later, is detected, and to set a flag indicating that an error has occurred when the number of times the abnormality has occurred is greater than or equal to a threshold. is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of game balls by the payout count sensor KE10s in a situation where the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. This is a flag that turns on when this occurs (dispensing motor operation abnormality). If Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, error control means 3230 accesses dispensing state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the dispensing motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the error control means 3230 when detecting an abnormality in the dispensing motor operation increments the counter value of the unauthorized dispensing cumulative counter 3231 by one. Next, in step 4114, the error control unit 3230 refers to the counter value of the unauthorized dispensing cumulative counter 3231, and determines whether the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). do. If Yes in step 4114, in step 4115, the error control means 3230 turns on the dispensing motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4116. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 4111 or step 4114, the process moves to step 4116.

Next, in step 4116, the error control means 3230 upon detecting an abnormality in the dispensing motor operation refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether the dispensing motor operation error flag is on. If Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the error control unit 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage unit 3121, and performs the next process ( The process moves to step 4120 (error control process upon detection of payout abnormality). Note that even in the case of No in step 4116, the process moves to the next process (error control process at the time of detection of payout abnormality in step 4120).

Next, FIG. 178 is a flowchart of the error control process when detecting a dispensing abnormality, which is related to the subroutine of step 4120 in FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to, when a payout abnormality (described later) is detected, count the excessive number of game balls paid out due to the abnormality, and when the count exceeds a threshold, This means turning on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the error control means 3240 upon detection of a payout abnormality refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout abnormality detection flag is set when an excessive payout of game balls is detected exceeding a predetermined number of prize balls based on a command sent from the main control board M side (payout This flag is turned on when there is an abnormality. In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the error control means 3240 at the time of detecting a payout abnormality accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the number of excess payouts temporarily stored in the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310, and stores the excess payout number in the excess payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the error control means 3240 upon detecting an abnormality in payout refers to the counter value of the excessive payout cumulative counter 3241, and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). If Yes in step 4124, in step 4125, the error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4126. It should be noted that if the result in step 4121 or step 4124 is No, the process moves to step 4126 as well. Note that the excessive payout error (state where the excessive payout error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning the power back on, but this example is just an example and is not limited to this. For example, the error may be resolved by pressing an error release switch, by elapse of a predetermined period of time, or the like.

Next, in step 4126, the error control means 3240 upon detecting an abnormality in payout refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excessive payout error flag is on. If Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the error control means 3240 sets an excessive payout error as payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process (step 4140). Error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected). Note that even in the case of No in step 4126, the process moves to the next process (error control process when ball path abnormality is detected in step 4140).

Next, FIG. 179 is a flowchart of error control processing upon detection of ball path abnormality, which is related to the subroutine of step 4140 in FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is that when a ball path abnormality is detected, which will be described later, (1) an abnormality has occurred in which there are no game balls in the prize ball tank KT or prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball out); In addition to investigating whether an abnormality has occurred in which there are a small number of game balls present in the prize ball dispensing unit KE10 (ball shortage), if an abnormality corresponding to the ball outage abnormality or ball shortage abnormality is detected, , turning on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. (2) If an abnormality corresponding to an out-of-ball abnormality or an out-of-ball abnormality is detected, the payout interval for prize ball payout will be extended to increase the waiting time until the out-of-ball abnormality or out-of-ball abnormality is resolved. It is to create. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is set when the execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the prize ball payout control board KH side is completed and the motor drive is operating normally. This is a flag that turns on when it is detected that the predetermined number of payouts is less than the predetermined number of payouts in a situation where it is determined that the number of payouts is less than the predetermined number. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether the conditions for occurrence of a ball outage abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality are satisfied. Here, the conditions for occurrence of the out-of-balls abnormality or the insufficient balls abnormality are not particularly limited, but for example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the detection sensor An example where the condition is that a ball outage abnormality has occurred when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, there are two ball flow paths) An example can be given in which a game ball detection sensor is provided for each of the game balls (existence), and when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, the condition is that a ball shortage abnormality has occurred. If Yes in step 4143, in step 4144, error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. It should be noted that if the answer in step 4141 or step 4143 is No, the process moves to step 4151 as well.

Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether the ball path error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the conditions for eliminating the out-of-ball abnormality or the insufficient ball abnormality are satisfied. Here, the conditions for resolving the out-of-ball abnormality or the out-of-ball abnormality are not particularly limited, and an example is such that when the above-mentioned conditions for occurrence of out-of-ball abnormality or out-of-ball abnormality are not satisfied, the condition is such that the abnormality is resolved. can be mentioned. If Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 controls the excitation timing during normal operation (for example, continuous excitation to perform a predetermined number of payout operations at a speed of 3ms x 8 steps = 1 every 24ms) and the ball A passing waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process moves to the next process (error control process when an abnormality is detected in the dispensing motor at step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 adjusts the excitation timing and ball passage waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively slow compared to the normal operation. The process then proceeds to the next process (step 4170, error control process when an abnormality is detected in the dispensing motor). Note that even in the case of No in step 4151, the process moves to the next process (error control process when an abnormality is detected in the dispensing motor in step 4170). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, but for example, after executing a payout operation for one ball at a speed of 3ms x 8 steps = 1 every 24ms, wait for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). An example can be given in which the excitation timing is changed so that a time is set and, after the waiting time has elapsed, the payout operation is executed once again at a rate of 3 ms x 8 steps = 24 ms. Further, the ball passage waiting time to be changed is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

Next, FIG. 180 is a flowchart of error control processing when an abnormality is detected in the dispensing motor, which is related to the subroutine of step 4170 in FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when an abnormality in the payout motor (described later) is detected, and also to cause the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10) to perform a retry operation. This is to execute switching control processing. First, in step 4171, the error control means 3260 upon detecting an abnormality in the dispensing motor refers to the dispensing state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the dispensing motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the dispensing motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as ball biting. In the case of Yes in step 4171, in step 4172, the error control means 3260 turns off the dispensing motor abnormality detection flag in the dispensing state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4173, the error control means 3260 turns on the dispensing motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 when an abnormality is detected in the dispensing motor. Next, in step 4175, the error control means 3260 when detecting an abnormality in the dispensing motor sets the dispensing motor error in the dispensing related error information temporary storage means 3121 as dispensing related error information. Then, in step 4176, the error control means 3260 when detecting an abnormality in the dispensing motor turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the dispensing state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Note that even if the answer in step 4171 is No, the process moves to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation in a standby state for a predetermined period of time after a motor error (described later) occurs, and providing a waiting time for the motor error to be resolved within the predetermined period.

Next, in step 4177, the error control means 3260 upon detecting an abnormality in the dispensing motor refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether the dispensing motor error flag is on. If Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, retry operation control means 3261 refers to payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the retry operation execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 4178, in step 4179, retry operation control means 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as a step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, the predetermined number of steps during the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example can be given in which the number is set to be the same as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms during the retry operation, which will be described later. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 to 0. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 selects an excitation method for retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, the well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and a 1-step switching speed for retry operation (for example, 6ms). Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passage waiting timer 3315 as the ball passage waiting time/motor stop time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation in progress flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the dispensing state flag temporary storage means 3311, and moves to the next process (step 4190, error control process when detecting dispensing stop abnormality). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 4177 or step 4178, the process moves to the next process (step 4190, error control process when detecting abnormality in dispensing stop required).

Next, FIG. 181 is a flowchart of the error control process when an abnormality in dispensing stop is detected, which is related to the subroutine of step 4190 in FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and also to This is to make it impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, fatal abnormalities related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process include communication abnormalities between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH, communication abnormalities between the card unit R and the prize ball payout control board KH, and Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, an abnormality in which the saucer (upper tray) is full, and the like. First, in step 4191-1, the error control unit 3270 when detecting an abnormality requiring dispensing stops refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 and determines whether the dispensing motor error flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the error control means 3270 when detecting an abnormality in dispensing stop requires setting and starting the error continuation time (for example, 120 seconds) in the ball trapping error occurrence timer 3200t, Proceed to step 4192-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting an abnormality in dispensing stop required refers to the ball trapping error occurrence timer 3200t, and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not. judge. If Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the error control unit 3270 turns off the dispensing motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221, and the process proceeds to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-3, the process also moves to step 4192-1.

Next, in step 4192-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether the switch not passed error detection flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the error control means 3270 when detecting an abnormality in dispensing required dispensing sets and starts the error duration time (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, Proceed to step 4193-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting an abnormality in dispensing required dispensing refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting an abnormality in payout stop requires turning off the switch not passed error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and in step 4193-1 to move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4192-3, the process also moves to step 4193-1.

Next, in step 4193-1, the error control means 3270 upon detecting an abnormality in payout stop determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a has been pressed. If Yes in step 4193-1, in steps 4193-2 to 4193-5, the error control unit 3270 controls the error control means 3270 to set a flag ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, payout operation uncompleted game ball detection flag, payout motor error flag, switch not passed error detection flag) are turned off, and the process moves to step 4194-1. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4193-1, the process moves to step 4194-1.

Next, in step 4194-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detection of a required payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH has been detected. If Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the error control unit 3270 turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. . On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the error control means 3270 turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

Next, in step 4195-1, the error control means 3270 detects an abnormality in the dispensing count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined period of time or more). ) has been detected. If Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the error control means 3270 turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the error control means 3270 turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and in step 4196-3. Move to 1.

Next, in step 4196-1, the error control unit 3270 when detecting a dispensing stop abnormality determines whether or not a tray (upper tray) full abnormality has been detected. If YES in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the error control means 3270 turns on the tray full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 when an abnormality in dispensing stop is detected. Next, in step 4196-3, the error control means 3270 when detecting a dispensing stop abnormality sends a tray full command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detection of an abnormality requiring dispensing stop turns off the tray full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-5, the error control means 3270 when detecting an abnormality in dispensing stop requires transmitting a tray full release command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

Next, in step 4197-1, the error control unit 3270 determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the card unit R is detected. If Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 turns on the CR unit disconnection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and in step 4198-1 Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the error control means 3270 turns off the CR unit disconnection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and in step 4198 -Move to 1.

Next, in step 4198-1, the error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 when detecting an abnormality in the required payout operation, and detects a part of the error related to the stoppage of the payout operation (for example, an excessive payout error, a prize ball device Error, payout motor operation error, game ball detection when payout operation is not completed, payout motor error, switch not passed error) It is determined whether all flags are off.

In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detection of an abnormality requiring payout stop refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the communication error flag, prize ball device error flag, saucer full, etc. It is determined whether all the error flags, including the error flag and the CR unit disconnection error flag, are off. If Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the error control unit 3270 executes the normal dispensing operation in the dispensing control unit 3300 (that is, in step 4198-4, which will be described later), the error control unit 3270 executes the dispensing operation in step 4198-4. (in the case where the payout operation is temporarily stopped), the payout operation is resumed) and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the error control means 3270 forcibly suspends the dispensing operation in the dispensing control means 3300, and then in step 4198-4. The process moves to step 4200 (processing of step 4200).

Next, FIG. 182 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information receiving process (for the main control board) related to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. 175. Here, the first half of the flow is a process of receiving information from the main control board M (and the process of setting the number of prize balls paid out accordingly), and the second half of the flow is a process of transmitting information to the main control board M. Therefore, to explain the first half of the information reception process from the main control board M (and the accompanying process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out), first, in step 4205, the main side reception control means 3111 sets the payout state flag temporary storage means. 3311, it is determined whether the prize ball payout flag is off. Here, the "prize ball dispensing flag" means when the prize ball dispensing process is being executed on the dispensing control side (when the dispensing motor of the dispensing device is in operation, the waiting time for balls to pass, the motor stop time) This is a flag that is turned on when the If Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main side reception control means 3111 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a and determines whether or not a prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side received information temporary storage means 3111a, and calculates the number of prize balls to be paid out this time. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process moves to the next process (step 4225). This completes the process for setting the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball paying out process is executed. Note that even in the case of No in step 4205 and step 4210, the process moves to the next process (step 4225).

Next, to explain the information transmission process to the main control board M, first, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether the payout-related error transmission flag is on or not. Determine. Here, the "dispensing-related error transmission flag" is used when a dispensing-related error such as the one described above (dispensing motor operation error, excessive dispensing error, out of balls error, insufficient balls error, dispensing motor error, dispensing stop error) occurs. This flag is turned on and turned off after the error notification is sent to the main control board M side. If YES in step 4225, error control means 3200 turns off the payout-related error transmission flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4230. Then, in step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and moves to the next process (step 4240). Note that even in the case of No in step 4225, the process moves to the next process (step 4240).

Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the "prize ball payout completion flag" is a flag that is turned on when the payout control means 3300 determines that the prize ball payout has been completed. If Yes in step 4240, in step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information to the main control board M side that the prize ball payout has been completed, and performs the following process {prize ball payout control process of step 4300 (prize ball payout start・When motor drive starts)}. Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 4240, the process moves to the next process {the prize ball payout control process (when the prize ball payout starts and the motor drive starts) in step 4300}. This completes the prize ball payout completion information transmission process.

Next, FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of start of prize ball payout/motor drive start) related to the subroutine of step 4300 in FIG. 175. Here, this process is a process before executing the motor drive process in the next step 4400, and in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side, the number of motor drive steps etc. This is the process of setting. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 182) is on. If Yes in step 4305, in steps 4310 and 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag, and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. do.

Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether the number of prize balls to be paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, three). If Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that a predetermined number of pieces are paid out, and proceeds to step 4332. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize balls set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out. 4332.

Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the scheduled number of pieces to be paid out in the current unit payout operation (that is, the number of pieces scheduled to be paid out in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) to 0. Here, the excitation stator position identification counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position during payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the dispensing control means 3300 selects an excitation method for normal operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, the well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) and a one-step switching speed for normal operation (for example, 3 ms). ). Next, in step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passing waiting timer 3315 as the ball passing waiting time/motor stop time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation execution flag. Here, the retry operation execution flag is a flag that is turned on while the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation is being executed as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the following process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (when motor drive ends/prize At the end of the ball dispensing)).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. If YES in step 4345, the motor has already been driven, so the process moves to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (when motor drive ends/prize ball payout ends)}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the prize ball payout continuation flag refers to the case where the prize ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor has operated for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and when the ball passage waiting time/motor stop time has elapsed ( This is a flag that is turned on (detailed conditions will be described later). In the case of Yes in step 4350, the process moves to the next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive/at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and determines whether the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, whether all pieces scheduled to be paid out by the current unit payout operation have not been paid out). whether or not). In the case of Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, if No in step 4354, the process moves to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is on, the process of setting the number of motor drive steps etc. is executed again without receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. If it is determined that the number of balls scheduled to be put out by the current unit payout operation has not all been put out, an abnormality that causes an out-of-ball error or an out-of-ball error will be detected.

Next, FIG. 184 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive/at the end of prize ball payout) related to the subroutine of step 4400 in FIG. 175. Here, the process is an end process when all the motors scheduled in the previous process (step 4300) are finished driving, or when all the scheduled prize balls are paid out. . Here, a motor drive termination process is executed from step 4402 to step 4419, a game ball detection process is executed from step 4420 to step 4425, and a prize ball payout termination process is executed from step 4430 to step 4462.

First, to explain the motor drive end processing, first, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the prize ball payout flag is on. do. If Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the motor driving flag is on. If Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not, that is, in step 4410. It is determined whether all the steps in the current unit payout operation set in step 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. If Yes in step 4410, in step 4415 the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the retry operation execution flag is on. If Yes in step 4416, in step 4417, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process moves to step 4418. Next, in step 4418, the dispensing control means 3300 maintains the stepping motor in a resting state (in this example, after lowering the excitation output, continues excitation to the current excitation stator position identification counter value (j)). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and proceeds to step 4420. Incidentally, if the result in step 4405 or step 4410 is No, the process also moves to step 4420. This completes the motor drive termination process.

Next, explaining the game ball detection process, first, in step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. If Yes in step 4420, in step 4422 the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 4420, the process moves to step 4430. Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time an entering ball is detected, but the invention is not limited to this, and the entering of a plurality of game balls is detected. In this case, the configuration may be such that the value corresponding to the number of balls entered can be subtracted. This completes the game ball detection process.

Next, the prize ball payout end process will be described. First, in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the motor driving flag is on. If Yes in step 4431 (that is, if the sensor detects game balls equal to the number of game balls related to the payout even though the motor related to the payout has not finished driving), in step 4432, The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag for incomplete payout in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4431, the process moves to step 4435.

Next, in steps 4435 and 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the prize ball payout flag, and turns on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether the count value is less than 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and based on the count value, the number of excess payouts (for example, if the counter value is "-3", the number of excess payouts is "3"). is temporarily stored in the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process (when executing motor drive) in step 4500}. Note that even if the result in step 4441 is No (that is, the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of balls have been paid out normally), the following process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (When executing motor drive)}. In this example, excessive dispensing is detected when the value of the dispensing counter 3312 becomes 0 or less; however, the detection is not limited to this. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed (e.g., a sufficient detection waiting time until the game ball put out by the drive is detected by the payout count sensor KE10s), excessive payout is detected (the value of the payout counter 3312 is less than 0). (i.e., excessive payout refers to an unexpected situation in which game balls are paid out in excess of the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out). This means that this unexpected situation, which is extremely unlikely to occur based on the design, has occurred. This means that either there is a malfunction in one of the dispensing mechanisms, or there is a fraudulent act during the dispensing operation. (This means that there is a high possibility that this was done.)

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passing error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 (in this example, after the end of the payout operation, a predetermined If the game balls corresponding to the number of game balls related to the payout operation are not detected even after the waiting time for passing the balls has elapsed, it is immediately determined that a switch not passing error has occurred. (The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that it is determined that a switch not passing error has occurred if the event occurs multiple times).

Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs while the motor is being driven as described above. If Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 ( When executing motor drive)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4447, in steps 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and turns off the retry operation execution permission flag. It is turned on and the process moves to the next process {step 4500 prize ball payout control process (when executing motor drive)}. Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 4445, the process moves to the next process {the prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) in step 2400}.

Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the prize ball payout process is not being executed), in step 4470, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. Determine. If Yes in step 4470, in step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and performs the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 ( When executing motor drive)}. Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 4470, the process moves to the next process {the prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) in step 4500}.

Next, FIG. 185 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) related to the subroutine of step 4500 in FIG. 175. Here, this process is a process of actually driving the motor based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined number of step counters is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 183), and is a flag that turns on when a predetermined number of step counters is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 183). This is a flag that turns off when all excitations have been executed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage means 3313 in step 4510. Next, in step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (increments by 1) the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on the predetermined excitation method and switching speed. .

Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether an abnormal operation related to the motor operation (step-out phenomenon due to ball biting, etc.) has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence or absence of a detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, in step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether the rotor is not rotating correctly, that is, whether a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. If Yes in step 4555, in step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the dispensing state flag temporary storage means 3311, and moves to the next process (motor error processing in step 4600). Note that even if the answer in step 4530 is No, the process moves to the next process (motor error processing in step 4600), and if the answer is No in step 4555, the error control means 3200 temporarily stores the error flag in step 4565. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off and the process moves to the next process (motor error process in step 4600).

Next, FIG. 186 is a flowchart of motor error processing related to the subroutine of step 4600 in FIG. 175. First, the purpose of this process is to forcibly shift the motor drive to a rest state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 in FIG. 185, it is detected whether or not the motor exists at a predetermined rotational position at a predetermined detection timing, and if the motor does not exist at the predetermined rotational position, step-out etc. It is determined that this has occurred, and this motor position abnormality flag is turned on. If Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, in step 4615, the dispensing control means 3300 turns on the dispensing motor abnormality detection flag in the dispensing state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100). This is because the currently set number of steps is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after clearing the count value, the motor drive will transition to a rest state (step 4410 and step 4415). Note that even in the case of No in step 4605, the process moves to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100).

Next, the control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 193. First, FIG. 187 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. Here, the process shown in FIG. 3(d) is a process executed by the sub-main control unit SM after a reset such as when the gaming machine is powered on. That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing (for example, RAM clearing) based on information received from the main side (main control board M side). When information is received → RAM on the sub-control board S side is initialized; when various information commands are received → performance-related information at the time of power outage is reset to the RAM on the sub-control board S side). Thereafter, the process shifts to a loop process in which the sub-main control unit SM repeatedly executes the repeat process routine (f). Here, when (f) is executed, first, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes an instruction image display control process to be described later, as shown in the process of (f) in the figure. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes pending information management processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative pattern display content determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2800, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative pattern display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes special game-related display control processing to be described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes display command transmission control processing (sending the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive processing routine. do.

As described above, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM employs a configuration in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Furthermore, the process shown in FIG. In the example, processing flow (e) is shown when the terminal is connected to the NMI terminal (NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is connected to the command input port (described above) from the main control board M side. Check the data signal line input port). Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the command sent from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately stores the command sent from the main control board M side. Returns to the process that was being executed.

Next, FIG. 188 is a flowchart of instruction image display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state. If Yes in step 2104, the process moves to step 2108. On the other hand, if No in step 2102 or step 2104, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a left-handed batting instruction counter HSc (measures the ball entering the entrance hole where the ball is likely to enter when hitting right-handed. When the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that left-handed hitting is not being executed in a situation where the game should be played left-handed, and a left-handed hitting instruction image is displayed.) The counter value is cleared to zero, and the process moves to step 2116.

Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received the auxiliary game start opening ball entry command from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the left-handed hitting instruction counter HSc. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the left-handed hitting instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). If Yes in step 2112, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the left-handed batting instruction image for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2115, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the left-handed hitting instruction counter HSc to zero, and proceeds to the process of step 2116. On the other hand, if No in step 2108 or step 2112, the process also moves to step 2116. Here, the lower right of the figure is a display image of an instruction image, and the top row is an image of a left-handed hitting instruction image. The left-handed instruction image is an image displayed on the production display device SG that prompts the player to execute a left-handed strike, and is a game situation in which a left-handed strike should be executed, a special game is not being executed, and the time is not shortened. In the gaming state, when it is determined that the player is hitting right-handed (when three balls enter the auxiliary game starting port H10), a left-handed hitting instruction image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds). In addition, when the ball enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10, 1 is added to the counter value of the left-handed hitting instruction counter HSc, but when the ball enters the right general winning hole P20, the counter value of the left-handed hitting instruction counter HSc increases or decreases. It is configured not to do so.

Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a special game is being executed. If Yes in step 2116, the process moves to step 2122. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2116, in step 2118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state. If Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to a right-handed batting instruction counter MSc (a counter that measures the ball entering the entrance hole where the ball is likely to enter when the ball is batted left-handed; When the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that right-handed hitting is not being executed in a situation where the game should be played right-handed, and a right-handed hitting instruction image is displayed.) The counter value is cleared to zero. Then, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2118, the process moves to step 2122.

Next, in step 2122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received the first main game start opening ball entry command from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2122, in step 2124 CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the right-hand hitting instruction counter MSc. Next, in step 2126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the right-hand hitting instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). If Yes in step 2126, in step 2128, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the right-hand hitting instruction image for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2129, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the right-handed instruction counter MSc to zero, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2400). Note that even in the case of No in step 2122 and step 2126, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400). Here, the lower right of the figure is a display image of the instruction image, and the second row is an image of the right-handed instruction image. The right-handed instruction image is an image displayed on the performance display device SG that prompts the player to execute a right-handed strike, and is a game situation in which a right-handed strike should be executed, such as during execution of a special game or in a time-reduced game state. When it is determined that the player is hitting left-handed (when three balls enter the first main game starting port A10), a right-handed hitting instruction image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds). In addition, the bottom row is an image of the right-handed hitting image during time saving, and since the game is played by right-handed hitting in the time saving gaming state, the right hitting image during time saving will continue to be displayed in the time saving gaming state. (Continues to be displayed even during special games). In addition, the display areas on the performance display device SG for the right-handed hitting image during time saving and the right-handed hitting instruction image are configured so that they do not overlap, and the size of the display area is larger for the right-handed hitting instruction image than for the right-handed hitting image during time saving. is larger (the left-handed hitting instruction image and the right-handed hitting instruction image are displayed in a relatively large display area because they are intended for warning purposes).

In this way, in the ninth embodiment, for example, when the special game is not being executed and the player is hitting right in the non-time saving game state, when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10, the sub control board S The CPUSC is configured to count the number of passes and, when the number of passes reaches a predetermined value (in this example, 3 balls), to display a left-handed batting instruction image (for example, displaying "left-handed batting"). There is. Also, for example, when a special game is not being executed and the ball is being hit right in a non-time saving game state, when the game ball passes through the right general winning hole P20, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will not count the number of passes. First, the player is configured not to display a right-handed batting instruction image (for example, an image that says "right-handed batting"). Also, for example, when playing left-handed during a special game or in a time-reduced game state, when the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S counts the number of times the ball enters. When the number of pitches entered reaches a predetermined value (three balls in this example), a right-handed batting instruction image (for example, an image of "right-handed batting") is displayed. In the ninth embodiment, the left-handed instruction image (for example, the image "left-handed") or the right-handed instruction image (for example, the image "right-handed") may be referred to as a firing instruction effect. With this configuration, if a player mistakenly executes a right-handed batting in a game situation in which a left-handed batting is to be executed (a special game is not being executed and a non-time saving game state), an auxiliary When the game ball that has passed through the game starting port H10 enters the right general winning port P20, the counter value of the right-handed hitting instruction counter MSc increases by 2 due to the firing of one game ball, and even unintentional right-handed hitting. Regardless, it is possible to prevent a warning-related display from being performed at an unintended frequency, such as a left-handed batting instruction image being frequently displayed. In this example, a left-handed batting instruction image can be displayed every time the left-handed batting counter value reaches a multiple of a predetermined value (3 in this example) {when the right-handed batting counter value reaches a predetermined value (3 in this example) ), the right-handed batting instruction image is displayed every time the left-handed batting counter value reaches a predetermined value (in this example, 3). Display the instruction image {Display the right-handed instruction image when the right-handed counter value reaches a predetermined value (3 in this example)}, When the counter value is reached, a new left-handed hitting instruction image (right-handed hitting instruction image) may be configured not to be displayed. Furthermore, although the left-handed batting instruction image (right-handed batting instruction image) is configured to be erased after a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) from the start of display, the present invention is not limited to this. ) is displayed, if it is determined that a left-handed (right-handed) hit has been executed (for example, if it is determined that a left-handed hit has been executed, if the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, etc., and when it is determined that right-handed batting has been executed, the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port H10, etc.) or when the game state shifts, the left-handed batting instruction image (right-handed batting instruction image) may be deleted.

Here, in the situation where the "left-handed batting instruction image" should be displayed, it is also possible that the ball is distributed and fired to both the right side area and the left side area, and the game ball accidentally passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10. It will be done. Therefore, if a prize is won in the first main game starting hole A10 or the left general winning hole P10 arranged on the left side of the gaming area within a predetermined period, in other words, the game is executed by playing left-handed within the predetermined period. If it is possible to determine that, the predetermined value is changed (subtracted) or initialized to extend the period until the left-handed hitting instruction image is notified, or the notification method (notification mode) is changed (e.g. , no audio notification, or change to a small display warning), etc. may be executed. Note that similar processing may be performed when displaying the "right-handed batting instruction image," but in a gaming state where the "right-handed batting instruction image" can be displayed, it is extremely inconvenient for the player to bat left-handed. In some cases, the specifications provide a profit, and in such specifications, when displaying the "right-handed hitting instruction image", the period until notification is extended, or the notification method (notification mode) is changed. It is desirable not to do so.

Next, FIG. 189 is a flowchart of pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a command related to the occurrence of a new reservation (reservation information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) has been received from the main control board M side. Determine. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing pending counter value (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game and a maximum of 4 for the second main game). Add "1". Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the hold information (random value, etc.) sent from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and proceeds to step 2418. .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If YES in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts "1" from the drawing pending counter value in step 2412. Next, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the pending information (random value, etc.) related to the symbol variation from the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and shifts the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2418. Note that even if the answer in step 2410 is No, the process moves to step 2418.

Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M lights up and displays the same number of pending display images as the drawing pending counter value on the effect display device SG, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2700). do.

Next, FIG. 190 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2702, CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2704. Next, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the temporarily stored symbol information (stop symbols and variation modes related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table for determining the content of variation in the decoration. Stopping symbols of the symbols {For example, if the stopping symbols related to the main game symbol are jackpot symbols, it will be a double such as "7, 7, 7", and if it is a losing symbol, it will be "1, 3, 5" etc.} and the variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag and moves to the next process (the process of step 2800). Note that even in the case of No in step 2702, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2800).

Next, FIG. 191 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2802, CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2804. Next, in step 2806, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the flag during symbol fluctuation. Next, in step 2809, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2810. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2802, the process moves to step 2810.

Next, in step 2810, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation flag is on. If Yes in step 2810, in step 2811, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the timer value of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2812, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reaches the timing to start the variation of the decorative pattern based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the variation of decorative patterns on the performance display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board (transmitted to the SS side), and the process moves to step 2832.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2812, in step 2816, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adjusts the decorative pattern based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. It is determined whether the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 2816, in step 2818, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display a stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG (display command transmission control in step 2999). (in the process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process moves to step 2832.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2816, in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a preview image or a It is determined whether the display timing of the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 2824, in step 2826, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the image display related to the preview image and reach image on the production display device SG (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). and is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process moves to step 2832. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2824, the process moves to step 2832.

Next, in step 2832, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, receiving information from the main control board M that the main game symbols are stopped and displayed). ). If Yes in step 2832, in step 2834, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a decorative pattern stop display command (determined display command) in the production display device SG (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets (transmitted to the control unit SS side). Next, in step 2836, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2838, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the flag during symbol fluctuation, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2900). Note that even in the case of No in step 2810 or step 2832, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2900).

Next, FIG. 192 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If YES in step 2904, CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special game flag in step 2912. Next, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a jackpot start display on the performance display device SG (displays as appropriate based on the type of jackpot), and proceeds to step 2920. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2902, the process moves to step 2920.

Next, in step 2920, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds, the number of prizes, and the number of prize balls on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side. Set a command (which may be executed as necessary based on the gameplay, type of jackpot, etc.). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a special game effect display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2926, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the end of the jackpot on the performance display device SG (the display is performed as appropriate based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2929, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the number of balls entered counter NKc (a counter that measures the number of balls entered into the right general winning hole P20 during the special game) to zero. Next, in step 2930, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game flag and moves to the next process (the process of step 2999). Note that even in the case of No in step 2904 or step 2926, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2999).

Next, FIG. 193 is a flowchart of special game effect display control processing related to the subroutine of step 3050 in FIG. 192. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the right general winning hole entry command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S controls the right general winning hole ball entering effect (effect display device when a game ball enters the right general winning hole P20 during execution of a special game). This is an effect displayed on the SG (for example, "+2 GET!") is displayed, and a command is set to add and display a predetermined number (in this example, 2 balls) to the number of prize balls. Here, in the ninth embodiment, since the right general winning hole P20 is arranged upstream of the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20, the first big winning hole P20 is A game ball fired toward C10 and the second grand prize opening C20 (a game ball fired by hitting right) enters the right general prize opening P20 before entering the first major prize opening C10 or the second grand prize opening C20. This means that the ball can enter the field. With this configuration, in addition to the number of prize balls that can be obtained by entering the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20 during the execution of the special game, the ball enters the right general winning hole P20. As a result, more game balls can be acquired, and the number of game balls that can be acquired by executing the special game can be increased.

Next, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the ball entry counter NKc, and the process proceeds to step 3058. Note that even in the case of No in step 3052, the process moves to step 3058. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the counter value of the incoming ball counter NKc has reached a predetermined value (5 balls in this example). If Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the right general winning hole lamp lighting mode determination table (see FIG. 194) and determines the lighting mode based on the stopped jackpot symbol. Then, the right general prize opening lamp LP10 is lit in the determined lighting mode, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2926). Note that even in the case of No in step 3058, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2926). As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when a game ball enters the right general winning hole P20 during the special game, the right general winning hole entry effect is displayed on the effect display device SG (for example, " +2 GET!''), and when a predetermined number of game balls (in this example, 5 balls) enter the right general winning hole P20, the right general winning hole is illuminated in a lighting manner based on the stopped jackpot symbol. It is configured to light up the lamp LP10. In addition, the right general winning hole entry effect that is executed when the game ball enters the right general winning hole P20 is not only displayed on the effect display device SG, but also audible "GET!" from the speaker D24. It may be configured to output "+2 GET!" on the screen and at the same time output "GET!" by voice. Furthermore, the volume of the sound from the speaker D24 may be set in multiple levels so that the level of volume can indicate the degree of expectation for transition to the probability-changing gaming state after the end of the special game (if the volume is high, When the volume is low, there is a higher expectation of transition to the probability-changing gaming state, or when the "GET!" sound that should originally be output is not output (no output itself/output without sound). (e.g., the expectation of transition to a probability-changing gaming state is relatively high).

Next, FIG. 194 is an example of the lamp lighting mode determination table for the right general winning hole. In the figure, the variable probability jackpot symbol stop table is referred to when the stopped jackpot symbol is a variable probability jackpot symbol (in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B) that will transition to the probability variable gaming state. and a non-probability variable jackpot symbol stop table that is referred to when the stopped jackpot symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (in this example, 4A, 4B) that will transition to a non-probability variable gaming state. Ru. The lighting mode of the right general prize opening lamp LP10 has five types of display modes: "white", "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow color", and the probability after the jackpot is over. In descending order of the degree of expectation of transition to a variable gaming state, the colors are "white → blue → green → red → rainbow color." In addition, "Rainbow color" is not selected as the lighting mode when transitioning to the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot, so if the right general prize opening lamp LP10 lights up in rainbow color, after the end of the jackpot The transition to the probability variable gaming state is almost certain. Incidentally, the lighting mode of the right general prize opening lamp LP10 is just an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is increased or the distribution of the numbers is changed. Further, when a predetermined number of game balls or more enter the right general winning hole P20 during a jackpot, the right general winning hole lamp LP10 may be configured to light up at the end timing of the jackpot, or once. The right general winning hole lamp LP10 may be configured to light up multiple times during the jackpot. Furthermore, even if the lighting mode is the same, the expectation of transition to the probability variable gaming state is changed depending on the transition timing of the lighting mode. Specifically, even if the lighting mode is the same, it changes to the "red" mode at a later timing. It may be set so that the expectation of transition to the probability variable gaming state is higher than when the state changes in the "red" manner at the earlier timing (for example, the distribution of the numbers may be set in this way), By configuring this way, even if the aspect does not change at first and remains "white", if it later changes to "red", the expectation level is higher than if the initial change aspect was "red". Therefore, it is possible to continuously create a sense of expectation. Of course, on the contrary, it can be set so that the reliability is higher if the change occurs at an earlier timing, and in this case, it is also possible to have greater expectations for a change at an earlier timing.

<Tenth embodiment>
As a configuration of a pachinko game machine applicable to this example, a configuration having a specific area within the big prize opening will be described in detail below as a tenth embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 195, the structure of the second big winning hole C20 and the first big winning hole C10 in the tenth embodiment will be explained in detail. First, inside the second big prize opening C20, roughly, a distribution winning detection device 2221, a specific area C22, a shielding member 2224a, a specific area entering ball detection device 2224-1, and an ejected ball detection device 2224-2 are provided. Generally, a normal winning detection device 2121 is provided inside the first big winning opening C10. The structure of these big winning holes will be explained below.

First, as shown in FIG. 195, the second big winning hole C20 becomes open when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at a jackpot symbol. This is a winning hole corresponding to the main game, which has a horizontal rectangular shape and is located above the first big winning hole C10 (as viewed from the player). As a specific configuration, the second big prize opening C20 includes a distribution winning detection device 2221 for detecting the entry of game balls, a distribution electric accessory 2222, a specific area C22, and a distribution system for detecting the entry of game balls into the specific area C22. A shielding member 2224a that blocks the entry of a game ball, a specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 for detecting the entry of a game ball into a specific area, and an ejected ball detection device 2224 for detecting an ejected ball. -2 and. Here, the sorting prize detection device 2221 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole C20, and generates the sorting big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the second big winning hole C20. . The sorting electric accessory 2222 changes the second grand prize opening C20 between a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the second major prize opening C20 and an open state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the prize. The specific area C22 is a determining factor of the gaming state after the special game ends depending on whether or not a game ball enters the specific area C22, and when the shielding member 2224a is in the open state (retracted state), the game ball enters the specific area C22. If it becomes possible (or easy) and the shielding member 2224a is in the closed state (advancing state), it is configured so that it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the specific area C22. Further, the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the specific area C22, and generates specific area entry information indicating the ball entry when the ball enters. In addition, the game ball that enters the second big prize opening C20 is configured to pass through either the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the ejected ball detection device 2224-2. The specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1 also serves as a sensor for detecting an ejected ball (it also generates ejected ball entry information when the ball enters). The ejected ball detection device 2224-2 is a sensor that detects a game ball that is ejected after entering the second grand prize opening C20 without entering the specific area C22, and detects the ejected ball entering the ball that indicates that the ball has entered when the ball enters. Generate sphere information. In the ninth embodiment, the shape of the big prize opening is changed between a normal state in which the game ball is in a horizontal rectangular shape and it is impossible or difficult to win a prize, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win a prize (tilted attacker). ), but is not limited to this. In that case, for example, a mode in which the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted from the player side (so-called It is also possible to use a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first big winning hole C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at a jackpot symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located below the two major winning openings C20 (as seen from the player). As a specific configuration, the first big winning hole C10 includes a normal winning detection device 2121 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a normal electric accessory 2122. Here, the normal winning detection device 2121 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and generates normal large winning opening ball entry information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters. The normal electric accessory 2122 changes the first grand prize opening C10 between a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first major prize opening C10 and an open state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the prize. In the ninth embodiment, the shape of the big prize opening is changed between a normal state in which the game ball is in a horizontal rectangular shape and in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win a prize (tilting type attacker). ), but is not limited to this. In that case, for example, the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player, and a retracted state in which it retracts from the player's side (the so-called It is also possible to use a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

In addition, the flow path direction of game balls of the distribution winning detection device 2221, the distribution flow path 132, the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1, the ejected ball detection device 2224-2, the normal winning detection device 2121, and the normal flow path 134. It is desirable that the cross-sectional area of the cross section perpendicular to is such that one game ball can pass through it smoothly, but two game balls cannot (or have difficulty) through it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the situation where a plurality of game balls become clogged in the channel (distribution channel 132, normal channel 134) and cannot flow down.

In addition, since the two big winning holes are almost close to each other, even if either the second big winning hole C20 or the first big winning hole C10 is in an easy-to-enter state during a special game, the player can play the same spot. Since it is only necessary to aim at the ball, the game can be played without changing the launch strength of the game ball. In this case, it is further easier for the player to visually confirm which big winning opening is in the ball entry easy state, so the player can play the game with less discomfort and less burden.

In addition, as will be described later, by placing the second grand prize opening C20, whose entry ability is greatly related to the player's profit, above the first grand prize opening C10, the game ball will be caught in the first major prize opening C10. Even if it is not closed due to an accident such as (if the downward flow of the game ball is blocked in the first grand prize opening C10), the game ball can be allowed to enter if the second grand prize opening C20 is opened. Become. In addition, in this example, since the specific area C22 and the specific area entering ball detecting device 2224-1 (ejected ball detecting device 2224-2) are provided below the distributed winning prize detecting device 2221, the second big winning opening C20 It is more space-saving if it is provided above the first big prize opening C10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the flow state of the game ball that entered the big winning hole (the second big winning hole C20 and the first big winning hole C10) according to the ninth embodiment will be described in detail.

First, the game ball that enters the second big prize opening C20 passes through the distribution winning detection device 2221, flows down the distribution channel 132, and flows down the distribution channel 132, and the specific area ball entering detection device 2224- provided in the specific area C22. 1 or the ejected ball detection device 2224-2. When the shielding member 2224a is in the closed state (advancing state), the game balls flowing down cannot pass through the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1, and all pass through the ejected ball detection device 2224-2. It happens. On the other hand, when the shielding member 2224a is in the open state (retracted state), the game ball flowing down will almost pass through the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1 due to the shape of the distribution channel 132. In addition, when the shielding member 2224a is in the open state (retracted state), it is desirable that all the game balls flowing down pass through the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 (in order not to harm the interests of the player). . Therefore, it is preferable to configure the shape of the distribution channel 132 (especially the shape of the right side surface of the distribution channel) so that the game ball flowing down can easily pass through the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1. As will be described later, in the ninth embodiment, the sum of the numbers of game balls that have passed through the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the ejected ball detection device 2224-2 and the number of game balls that have passed through the distributed winning detection device 2221 It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the ejection of balls depending on whether the number of game balls is equal to the number of game balls.

On the other hand, the game ball that entered the first big prize opening C10 passes through the normal winning detection device 2121, flows down the normal flow path 134, and is discharged. Note that a device for detecting ejected balls is not provided in the first big prize opening C10.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment has a specific area C22 into which a game ball can enter inside the second big prize opening C20. In addition, the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment has a configuration in which when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of a special game, the state shifts to a probability variable gaming machine state after the special game ends (so-called ball probability game machine state). machine).

Next, FIG. 196 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. 146 in the tenth embodiment. After determining the stop symbols of the main game symbols in step 1410-2, in step 1408 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game time saving flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1408 (second), in step 1412-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the fluctuation mode of the main game symbols based on the main game side random number/win/fail lottery results. On the other hand, if No in step 1408 (second), the process moves to step 1411, and the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1411, that is, if the limited frequency counter value is 0, in step 1412-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game Determine the variation mode of the symbol.

Here, FIG. 197 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the tenth embodiment. Among the main game symbols that result in a jackpot, the main game symbols that allow a special game in which a game ball easily enters a specific area to be executed are "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, and 7B", and the specific area C22 The main game symbol in which a special game in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter is executed is "2A".

Next, FIG. 198 is a flowchart of special game control processing in the tenth embodiment. After setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608, or if the special game execution flag is on in step 1610, in step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M: It is determined whether the currently executed round is a distribution game execution round (in this example, 2nd R, 4th R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process to be described later, and moves to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (second), the process moves to step 1612.

Next, FIG. 199 is a flowchart of the distributed game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 198 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the distributed game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (in the distribution game execution round, the second big prize opening C20 is relatively long). It is a jackpot symbol that opens for a time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M selects a long opening pattern (for example, an opening for 15 seconds and a specific An open pattern designed to ensure that the ball enters area C22 is set, and the process moves to step 1860. If No in step 1854, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M selects a short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. - a release pattern (for example, a release pattern of 0.1 seconds and designed to ensure that the ball does not enter the specific area C22), and the process proceeds to step 1860. In addition, in the 10th embodiment, the long open symbols on the first main game side are "5A/7A", the ratio selected at the time of jackpot is "524/1024", and the second main game side The long open symbols on the side are "3B, 5B, 7B", and the ratio of selection at the time of jackpot is "1024/1024", so the second main game side is more likely to win than the jackpot on the first main game side. In the case of a jackpot, there is a higher probability that the second big prize opening C20 will be opened long in the distribution game execution round, that is, the game ball is more likely to enter the specific area C22 at the time of a jackpot.

Next, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and moves to step 1866.

Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether a predetermined number of game balls (10) have entered the second big winning hole C20. . If YES in step 1866, the process moves to step 1870. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1866, in step 1868, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big winning hole C20 has ended. If YES in step 1868, the process moves to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second grand prize opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distributed game execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distributed game. If YES in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in step 1876, and proceeds to step 1878. Note that if the answer in step 1874 is No, the process also moves to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and moves to the next process (the process of step 1634). Note that even in the case of No in step 1868, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game related to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 198 in the tenth embodiment. When this subroutine is executed, in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in step 1682 (second). Next, in steps 1652 and 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the probability change number counter MP51c to a predetermined number of times (in this example, 80 times) and turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency counter MN52c to a predetermined number of times (in this example, 80 times). Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example). is not limited. Note that a value equal to or less than a predetermined number of times A is preferable.) is set, and the process moves to step 1658.

Here, in the tenth embodiment, regardless of whether or not a ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the system is configured to shift to the time reduction game state after the special game ends. In addition, if a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in which the time reduction game state is entered after the special game is the same as the number of fluctuations in which the probability fluctuation game state is entered is the predetermined number of times A. (80 times in this example), and if no game ball enters the specific area during the special game, the number of fluctuations in which the time reduction game state will occur after the special game is different from the predetermined number A (less ), which is a predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example). As a result, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area C22 during a special game where it is easy to enter the specific area C22, a certain degree of advantageous period can be provided, and if the ball does not pass through the specific area C22 It can be expected that this will prevent a decline in interest. In addition, the variation mode of the main game symbol during the time reduction game state is that during the time reduction game state for a predetermined number of times A, the three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2, and limited frequency table 3) is changed. During the time reduction game state a predetermined number of times B, the main game table 3-2 is referred to, and tables with different performance contents are also referred to. In addition, this configuration applies whether the jackpot symbols that triggered the execution of the special game are the same or different (for example, even if the special game is triggered by the same jackpot symbol, the special game cannot be executed. The number of times the ball is saved differs depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22, etc.). Note that this example is just an example, and is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number of changes in the time reduction game may be determined based on the symbols at the time of the jackpot (for example, during a special game If the ball does not enter the specific area C22, the upper limit number of fluctuations in the time-saving game is determined based on the jackpot symbol, etc.).

Next, FIG. 201 is an example of a production content determination table in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, if a game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the game state after the special game is not a probability variable game state, but a non-probability variable game state and a time reduction game state ( 50 fluctuation). If this happens, the content of the performance will be determined by referring to the table. Note that this example is just an example, and the number of variations, content of presentation, manner of variation, table configuration, etc. are not limited thereto.

As described above, according to the tenth embodiment, depending on whether or not a game ball enters a specific area during the special game, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variable game state after executing the special game (specific area In a gaming machine (so-called ball-accuracy type gaming machine) that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state when a ball enters, but does not shift to a probability-variable gaming state when a ball does not enter, the non-performance when the probability-variable gaming state does not change. By making the variation mode (and production) during the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state different from the variation variation (and production) during the probability variation gaming state, an appropriate production is performed according to the player's profit pattern. It is possible to do so. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the distribution game, special effects (effects that incite whether or not the second major prize opening C20 will be opened long, an entry into the specific area C22) The configuration may be such that a production that encourages whether or not the ball is hit or not, a production that notifies that the ball has entered the specific area C22, etc. is executed {although the manner of execution is not particularly limited, for example , when the effect is to notify that the ball has entered the specific area C22, the effect display device SG or the effect display device SG is activated at the timing (preferably immediately after) that the ball has entered the specific area For example, it is possible to configure a presentation device (for example, a so-called movable accessory for presentation, a light guide plate, etc.) provided on the front to perform the notification (for example, a display device SG on the presentation display device SG). Displaying an image drawn as "V", displacing a movable accessory for performance from its initial position to a position where it can be performed, or projecting an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light onto the light guide plate. make it stand out, etc.)}. In addition, when executing the performance to notify that the ball has entered the specific area C22, it is important to note that when a special game is won in a specific gaming state (for example, a probability-changing gaming state), or when a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is executed, ) is won, in a special game in which an opening pattern designed to ensure that the ball enters the specific area C22 is almost certain, an image drawn as "V" is displayed discreetly (for example, In a situation where there is a possibility that a special game will be played in which an opening pattern designed to make it almost certain that the ball will enter the specific area C22 (displayed in a small size), the ball enters the specific area C22 in the special game. (in a situation where the ease of the ball is unknown), if a release pattern designed to make it almost certain that the ball will enter the specific area C22 is then executed, the ball will enter the specific area C22. It is also preferable to perform a performance different from the performance that notifies the user of the situation, and thereby it is possible to perform the performance with priority according to necessity.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big prize opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or equal to one firing interval of the game ball), and a predetermined game that can be opened for a first time period. and a second unit game that can be opened (or opened and closed) again for a second time period longer than the first time period after the time has been closed. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time, in which expectations for probability fluctuation transition are low, is completed, the probability It is possible to create a possibility that the opening operation at the second time when the degree of expectation for fluctuation transition is high will be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game during the special game. In addition, in order to ensure that the ball enters the specific area, it is preferable that the second time is equal to or longer than the one-shot interval of the game ball, and is equal to (half of the maximum number of prizes for the round) x (game ball). It is more preferable that the value is greater than or equal to (one shot interval of the ball), and it is especially preferable that it is greater than or equal to (the upper limit number of winnings in the round) x (one shot interval of the game ball).

As described above, according to the tenth embodiment, depending on whether or not a game ball enters a specific area during the special game, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variable game state after executing the special game (specific area In a gaming machine (so-called ball-accuracy type gaming machine) that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state when a ball enters, but does not shift to a probability-variable gaming state when a ball does not enter, the non-performance when the probability-variable gaming state does not change. By making the variation mode (and production) during the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state different from the variation variation (and production) during the probability variation gaming state, an appropriate production is performed according to the player's profit pattern. It is possible to do so. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the distribution game, special effects (effects that incite whether or not the second major prize opening C20 will be opened long, an entry into the specific area C22) The configuration may be such that a production that encourages whether or not the ball is hit or not, a production that notifies that the ball has entered the specific area C22, etc. is executed {although the manner of execution is not particularly limited, for example , when the effect is to notify that the ball has entered the specific area C22, the effect display device SG or the effect display device SG is activated at the timing (preferably immediately after) that the ball has entered the specific area For example, it is possible to configure a presentation device (for example, a so-called movable accessory for presentation, a light guide plate, etc.) provided on the front to perform the notification (for example, a display device SG on the presentation display device SG). Displaying an image drawn as "V", displacing a movable accessory for performance from its initial position to a position where it can be performed, or projecting an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light onto the light guide plate. make it stand out, etc.)}.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big prize opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit that can be opened for a first time (preferably, an open time during which one or more game balls can enter but is relatively short) and a second unit game that can be opened for the first time, closed for a predetermined time, and then opened (or opened and closed) again for a second time longer than the first time. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time, in which the expectation level of transition to the probability variable game state is low, has ended. , it is possible to create a possibility that the opening operation at the second time, in which the transition to the probability variable gaming state is highly expected, will be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game during the special game. In addition, in order to ensure that the balls enter the specific area C22, it is preferable to configure the second time so that a plurality of game balls can easily enter the second grand prize opening C20. It is more preferable that the maximum number of winnings in the round is equal to or greater than (half of the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (one firing interval of game balls), and it is more than or over (the upper limit of the number of winnings in the round) × (one firing interval of game balls). It is particularly preferred that there be.

In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called ball guarantee machine) that can shift to a probability variable gaming state after the special game ends by entering the specific area C22 during execution of a special game like the tenth embodiment, ( 1) Only one big winning hole is provided, and the normal round (a round in which the ball entering the specific area C22 is invalidated) and the distribution game execution round (the ball entering the specific area C22) is created using the one big winning hole. (2) A big winning hole A and a big winning hole B having a specific area C22 are provided, and a normal round is executed in the big winning hole A, and a big winning hole B is executed. (3) The arrangement is such that the big winning hole A and the big winning hole B having the specific area C22 overlap vertically (the big winning hole B is on top). A normal round is executed in the big winning opening A, a distribution game execution round is executed in the big winning opening B, and the ball entering the specific area C22 can be valid only during the execution of the distribution game execution round. , (4) The grand prize opening A and the grand prize opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged in such a way that they overlap vertically (with the grand prize opening B on top), and the regular round is played in the grand prize opening A. is executed, a distribution game execution round is executed in the big prize opening B, and a game ball can enter the specific area C22 only during the execution of the distribution game execution round (a shielding member is provided, and the shielding If the member is in an open state, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the specific area C22, and if the shielding member is in the closed state, it becomes difficult to enter the specific area C22.

(Example 1 of change from 10th embodiment)
In the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine is exemplified in which the ball enters the specific area C22 during execution of the special game and shifts to the probability variable gaming state after the special game ends. The configuration is not limited to the ten embodiments. Therefore, a configuration having a specific area C22 different from that of the tenth embodiment will be referred to as modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment, and only the changes from the tenth embodiment will be described in detail below.

Note that step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in each individual embodiment. Indicates that it is a code, means name, etc.

First, FIG. 202 is a main flowchart showing a general process flow performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. The number of prize balls for the first main game starting opening A10 is 3 balls, the number of prize balls for the second main game starting opening B10 is 1 ball, and the number of prize balls for the first big winning opening C10 is 15 balls, The number of prize balls for the second major winning hole C20 is 13 balls, and the number of prize balls for the general winning hole is 10 balls. Thus, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the number of prize balls in the second grand prize opening C20 is smaller than the number of prize balls in the first grand prize opening C10.

Next, FIG. 203 shows the first (second) main game symbol display process related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. 163 in modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart. First, the changes from the tenth embodiment are step 1450 (second variation 1), step 1431-1 (second variation 1), and step 1431-2 (second variation 1), that is, step 1411. If the limited frequency counter value is not 0, in step 1450 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process to be described later, and proceeds to step 1413.

In addition, after turning on the conditional device activation flag in step 1440, in step 1431-1 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is a limit frequency jackpot symbol (time reduction after jackpot ends). It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot symbol that enters a limited frequency state after the gaming state ends, and in this example, is 7B). If Yes in step 1431-1 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) in step 1431-2 (second change 1). set, and the process moves to step 1500.

Next, FIG. 204 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process related to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) in FIG. 203 in modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the first stage range (100≧G>21). If Yes in step 1451-1, in step 1451-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 3 and determines the variation mode ( fluctuation time) is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1413). On the other hand, if No in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency counter value G is within the second stage range (G=21) in step 1451-3. do. Incidentally, when the limited frequency counter value is 21, it is the final variation in the time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-3, in step 1451-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming state is a probability fluctuation gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-4, in step 1451-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1 and determines the fluctuation mode related to the main game symbols based on the main game side random number and the win/fail lottery result. (variation time) is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1413). In addition, in the case of No in step 1451-4, the process moves to step 1451-2, and the main game table 3 is referred to to determine the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbols. In this way, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, in the final variation of the time reduction gaming state, when determining the variation mode in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the case of the non-probability variation gaming state, The table referenced in the table is different. In other words, the final symbol variation in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the jackpot depends on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the jackpot related to "7B", which is the limit frequency jackpot symbol. The tables referred to when determining the variation mode are different. In addition, in the case of No in step 1451-3, in step 1451-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 2, and based on the main game side random number and the win/fail lottery result, the The variation mode (variation time) is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1413). In addition, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, when the aforementioned jackpot related to the limited frequency jackpot symbol "7B" ends, the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, and the time saving number counter MP52c 80 times is set. Because of this configuration, if the limited frequency counter value is not within the first stage range, that is, if the limited frequency counter value is a value of 20 or less, it is a non-time saving gaming state and the limited frequency counter value is 0. It becomes a bigger situation. By configuring to determine the variation mode of the main game symbol by referring to the limited frequency table in such a state, when the jackpot related to "7B", which is the limited frequency jackpot symbol, ends, the "symbol The transition will be as follows: time-reduced gaming state for 80 fluctuations → limited frequency state for 20 symbol fluctuations (non-time-reduced gaming state). Note that the configuration is not limited to this, and in the time reduction gaming state, the limited frequency state A (the limited frequency table to be referred to is "limited frequency table A1 → limited frequency table A2 → limited The limited frequency state B (the limited frequency table to be referred to changes to "limited frequency table In other words, the limited frequency state may be configured so that it does not span different gaming states. In addition, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, 80 times is set in the time saving number counter MP52c regardless of whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B". The limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, that is, the limited frequency state is entered after the time reduction gaming state ends. In addition, if the limited frequency counter value is not 0 and the jackpot is hit, it may be considered as a jackpot during a consecutive game and the above-mentioned consecutive game count counter value may be added (if the time reduction gaming state is Even if it has ended, if you win a jackpot in a limited frequency state, it can be considered a consecutive jackpot). However, the present invention is not limited to this, but if the limited frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, and the ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B", the time saving number counter MP52c is 80 times is set and the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, while if the ball does not enter the specific area C22, the time saving number counter MP52c is set to 50 times and the limited frequency counter is set to 70 times. It may be configured so that In addition, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, if the ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B", the time reduction game state after the special game ends. In the final variation, the variation mode of the main game symbols may be determined by referring to a limited frequency table (for example, limited frequency table 3) that is referred to only in the final variation. Note that the contents of the limited frequency table 3 may be configured so that a uniform variation time of 7 seconds is determined regardless of the number of reservations, regardless of whether it is a hit or a loss. In addition, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, if the ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B", the time reduction game state after the special game ends. The limited frequency table to be referred to in the final fluctuation is the limited frequency to be referred to in the final fluctuation in the time-reduction game state after the end of the special game when the ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to "7B". The tables may be configured to be the same, and in such a case, the performance content and performance tendency in the final variation in the time reduction gaming state may be the same.

Here, FIG. 205 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment. The changes from the tenth embodiment are that the combination of main game symbols that result in a jackpot is different and that a limited frequency table is provided. In addition, among the main game symbols that result in a jackpot, the main game symbols that allow a special game to be executed in which the game ball easily enters a specific area are "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B", The main game symbol in which a special game in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the area is executed is "4A". In addition, when the jackpot related to "7B", which is the limit frequency jackpot symbol mentioned above, ends, the game mode shifts to the time reduction game state of 80 symbol variations (the variation time is determined by referring to the main game table 3). When the 80 symbol fluctuations are completed, the system shifts to a limited frequency state of 20 symbol fluctuations (the fluctuation time is determined by referring to the limited frequency table 2). In the case of the limited frequency state in which the limited frequency table 2 is referred to, the fluctuation time of the main game symbols is configured so that a long time exceeding 10 seconds is not selected regardless of the winning/failure lottery result. In addition, in the final variation of the time-reducing gaming state (80th variation after the end of the jackpot) when the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" ends, it is specified during the execution of the "7B". If the ball enters the area C22, the variation mode is determined by referring to the limited frequency table 1, while if the ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the execution of "7B", the main It is configured to determine the fluctuation mode by referring to the game table 3 (the shortest fluctuation time for a loss in the limited frequency table 1 is longer than the shortest fluctuation time for a loss in the main game table 3). . Note that the configuration is such that the limited frequency table 1 or the main game table 3 can be referred to in the final change in the time-reduced gaming state, but when the final change in the time-reduced gaming state is in the probability-changing gaming state and in the non-probability-changing game. In other words, the content of the performance in the final variation may be different depending on whether the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. good. For example, when referring to the limited frequency table 1 that has relatively long symbol fluctuations, the symbol fluctuation may incite whether the probability fluctuation gaming state and time reduction gaming state will end or whether a jackpot will occur. You may also perform a performance.

Next, FIG. 206 is a flowchart of special game control processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 146 in modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment. First, the changes from the tenth embodiment are step 1611 (second change 1), step 1635-1 (second change 1), and step 1635-2 (second change 1), that is, step 1608 sub-steps. After setting the special game start display instruction command to the side, or if the special game execution flag is on in step 1610, in step 1611 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the currently executed It is determined whether the round to be played is a distribution game execution round (a round in which the second big winning hole C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, the 2nd R and the 4th R). If Yes in step 1611 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1850 (second), and if No, the process moves to step 1612.

Further, if it is determined in step 1634 that it is the final round in the special game, in step 1635-1 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the end demonstration execution permission flag (by turning on, the special game end demonstration The flag for starting time) is turned on, and the process moves to step 1635-2 (second change 1). Note that even if the answer in step 1634 is No, the process moves to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Next, in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the end demonstration execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1635-2 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1800 (change 1), and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 207 is a flowchart of the end demonstration time control process related to the subroutine of step 1800 (variation 1) in FIG. 206 in modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment. First, the change from the tenth embodiment is step 1803 (second variation 1). That is, if the end demo execution flag is off in step 1802, in step 1803 (second variation 1), The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a ball has entered the specific area C22 in the special game. If Yes in step 1803 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1806, and if No, the process moves to step 1808. In this way, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the special game end demonstration time, which is the period after the end of the final round of the special game, is the period when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. The time value is configured to differ depending on whether there is a ball or not. Note that the conditions under which the special game end demonstration time differs are not limited to this, and may be varied depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot, for example. Specifically, (1) it differs depending on whether it is a probability-fluctuation gaming state or a non-probability-fluctuation gaming state, (2) it differs depending on whether it is a time-reducing gaming state or a non-time-reducing gaming state. 3) A probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduction gaming state, a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reducing gaming state, a non-probability-variable gaming state and a time-reducing gaming state, a non-probability varying gaming state and a non-time-reducing gaming state, (4) Probability fluctuation gaming state and time reduction gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state, non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time reduction gaming state, non-probability fluctuation gaming state and It may be configured such that some combinations of the non-time saving gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state are different.

In addition, in this example, regarding a special game related to a certain jackpot symbol, (1) a special game when a special game is won in a non-time reduction game state and a ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game; The game end demo time is the first period (10 seconds), (2) the special game end demo time when the special game is won in the non-time reduction game state and the ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game. is the second period (3 seconds), (3) If you win the special game in the time reduction game state and the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the special game end demo time is the second period (3 seconds). (1 second), (4) If you win a special game in the time reduction game state and the ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the special game end demo time is the third period (3 seconds). It may be configured such that "second period < third period < first period". Incidentally, such a configuration is preferably applied to a special game won in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state or a probability variation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state. In addition, as specific examples of effects performed during the special game end demo time, during the first period, there is an effect that notifies the transition to a probability-changing gaming state, and an event where an IC card used for loaning game balls is forgotten. We will carry out a performance to call attention to the game, display a slogan to prevent addiction, and display the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer.In the third period, we will display a transition to a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a time-reducing gaming state. A performance to notify the user and a performance to call attention to forgetting to take out an IC card are executed, and in a second period, a performance to notify that the probability variable gaming state (consecutive game state) will continue is performed. In this way, the performance to be performed may be configured to differ depending on the length of the special game end demonstration time. Also, comparing the length of the special game end demo time depending on the situation, the special game end demo time when the non-probability fluctuating game state is before the start of the special game and the probability fluctuating game state is after the special game ends (first hit). is 10 seconds, the special game end demo time is 3 seconds when the special game is in a non-probability fluctuating game state and a time reduction game state, the probability fluctuating game state is before the special game starts, and the probability is fluctuating after the special game ends. It may be configured such that the time value relationship is such that the special game end demonstration time when the game state is entered (continuation of consecutive games) is 1 second.

Next, FIG. 208 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing in modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment. After turning off the special game in progress in step 2430, in step 2480 (second change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S specifies that the special game end command is a long open command (end demo time information set in step 1810). It is determined whether the command is a command related to the end demo time (10 seconds, which is a long time). If Yes in Step 2480 (Second Variation 1), in Step 2482 (Second Variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends a consecutive winning continuation image (notification that the state will shift to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the special game). For example, a command is set to display for a long time (in this example, 10 seconds) "Congratulations! Still more to come!", and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2900). On the other hand, if No in Step 2480 (Second Variation 1), that is, if the special game end command is a short opening command, then in Step 2484 (Second Variation 1), the consecutive game end image (probability after the special game ends) This is an effect that notifies you that the transition to the variable gaming state will not occur, for example, "See you soon!") is displayed for a short period of time (in this example, 3 seconds), and the next process (step 2900) is set. processing). In addition, the performance mode executed during the special game end demo time is different depending on whether the special game end demo time is long (10 seconds) or short (3 seconds). Performance mode (performance tendency) in the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game when the game end demo time is long (10 seconds), and special performance when the special game end demo time is short (3 seconds) The performance mode (performance tendency) in the time-reduced game state after the end of the game is configured to be the same.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment, a special game end demonstration time is provided after the final round in the special game, and a special game end demonstration time is provided in the special game that is being executed. By configuring the period of the special game end demonstration time to be different depending on whether or not the game ball enters the area C22, it is possible to increase the profit for the player for a long time if the game ball enters the specific area C22. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the specific area C22, it will not be a high profit for the player, so after executing a short time performance, the player will return to the normal game. It is possible to create a gaming machine with a more expressive tone.

In addition, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, a special game start demonstration time may be provided. In addition, at the special game start demo time, it has not been determined whether or not the game ball will enter the specific area C22 in the special game, so depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22, the special game start demo time There will be no difference in the period. However, the special game start demo time may be different depending on the gaming state when the special game is won. For example, if the special game is won in a non-time saving gaming state, the demonstration time for starting the special game is 10 seconds (the player is given a right time). 3 seconds if a special game is won in a non-time-reducing game state (relatively long because the effect that prompts the player to execute a right-handed strike is not executed). It may also be configured so that it takes only a short period of time). In addition, when a special game is played in which an opening pattern designed to ensure that the ball enters the specific area C22 is almost certain, during the special game start demo time, there will be an actual game like "SUPER Lucky!" Alternatively, the intonation may be enhanced by performing a performance that suggests that the probability-changing game state will be entered after the special game ends.

(Example 2 of change from 10th embodiment)
In addition, in the 10th embodiment and the first modification from the 10th embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine is such that when a ball enters the specific area C22 during execution of a special game, the state shifts to a probability variable game state after the special game ends. Although illustrated, such a configuration is not limited to only the configuration of the tenth embodiment and the first modification from the tenth embodiment. Therefore, a configuration having a specific area C22 that is different from the tenth embodiment and the first modification from the tenth embodiment is referred to as a second modification from the tenth embodiment, and only the changes from the tenth embodiment will be detailed below. Describe.

Note that step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in each individual embodiment. Indicates that it is a code, means name, etc.

First, FIG. 209 is a flowchart of the special game control process related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 146 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, the difference from the tenth embodiment is step 1609-1 (second variation 2) and step 3100 (second variation 2), that is, in step 1608, a special game start display command is sent to the sub side. After setting, in step 1609-1 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration execution permission flag, and proceeds to step 3100 (second change 2). On the other hand, also in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process moves to step 3100 (second variation 2). Next, in step 3100 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a start demonstration time control process to be described later, and proceeds to step 1610.

Next, FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the distributed game execution process related to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 209 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, the differences from the tenth embodiment are step 1851-1 (second variation 2), step 1899-1 (second variation 2) to step 1899-7 (second variation 2), that is, step At 1851-1 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the flag is off during the distribution demonstration time. If Yes in step 1851-1 (second change 2), the process moves to step 1852, and if No, the process moves to step 1854. Further, after setting the long opening pattern in step 1856 or after setting the short opening pattern in step 1858, in step 1899-1 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is It is determined whether or not it is the first main game symbol (first main game jackpot symbol). If Yes in step 1899-1 (second change 2), in step 1899-2 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the distribution start demo timer for a long time {step 1899-3 (second change This is a time value that is longer than the time value set in Variation 2), and in this example, it starts by setting 10 seconds} and moves to step 1899-4 (Second Variation 2). On the other hand, if No in step 1899-1 (second change 2), in other words, if the stopped symbol is the second main game symbol (second main game jackpot symbol), step 1899-3 (second change 2) ), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the distribution start demo timer for a short time {a time value that is shorter than the time value set in step 1899-2 (second variation 2), and in this example, 3 seconds} to start, and proceed to step 1899-4 (second change 2). Next, in step 1899-4 (2nd change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command (a command to the sub side, which is a command for the distribution of the special game being executed) related to the determined distribution start demo time information. Set the command related to the time value of the minute demonstration time. Next, in step 1899-5 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution demonstration time flag (the flag that starts the distribution demonstration time when turned on), and steps Transition to 1899-6 (2nd change 2). Note that even in the case of No in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 1899-6 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-6 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the value of the distribution start demo timer is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1899-6 (second change 2), in step 1899-7 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during the distribution demonstration time, and moves to step 1860. . Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1634). In this way, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, the distribution start demo time, which is the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, is larger when the first main game side has a jackpot than the second one. It takes a longer time than when it is a jackpot on the main game side.

Next, FIG. 211 is a configuration diagram of an example of the opening pattern of the big prize opening. The jackpot symbols in the 10th embodiment are 3 types of first main game jackpot symbols "4A, 5A, 7A" and 3 types of second main game jackpot symbols "4B, 5B, 7B", a total of 6 types of jackpots. There are only two opening patterns in one round: "Short open = 500ms open → closed" and "Long open = 30000ms open → closed". In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole C10 or second big winning hole C20) is not limited to this, and the types may be increased, or it may be opened multiple times in one round. It may be an open pattern (for example, "10000ms open→10000ms closed→10000ms open→closed"). Here, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is long opening in all rounds (10R) only for "5B/7B" which is the second main game length opening jackpot. . In addition, the distribution game execution round in which the second grand prize opening C20 is opened is the fourth round, and the first grand prize opening is opened in other rounds. In addition, in all jackpots, the number of rounds executed is four or more rounds, and the arrangement is such that the distribution game execution round is always executed. In this way, there is a short opening round for the first main game length opening jackpot "5A/7A" (2nd R), while "5B/7B" for the second main gaming length opening jackpot has a short opening round (2nd R). The structure is such that there is no round with a short opening, that is, the number of rounds with a short opening is greater in the first main gaming length opening jackpot than in the second main gaming length opening jackpot.

Next, FIG. 212 is a flowchart of the start demonstration time control process related to the subroutine of step 3100 (second variation 2) in FIG. 209 in modification example 2 from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the start demonstration execution flag is off. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a start demonstration time (3 seconds in this example) in the start demonstration time timer and starts. Next, in step 3016, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the stopped jackpot symbols are the second main game jackpot symbols (3B, 5B, and 7B in this example). If Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a second long release command (a special game related to the second main game jackpot symbol is started) as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. command) is set, and the process moves to step 3116. On the other hand, if No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the stopped jackpot symbol is the first main game length open jackpot symbol (in this example, 5A and 7A). do. If Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues the first long opening command (the second big prize opening of the first main game jackpot symbol) as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command related to the start of a special game in which C20 is long open is set, and the process moves to step 3116. On the other hand, if No in step 3110, in other words, if the stopped jackpot symbol is not the first main game long open jackpot symbol, that is, if it is the first main game short open symbol (in this example, 2A) , In step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a first short opening command (the second big prize opening C20 of the first main game jackpot symbol is short-opened) as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command related to the start of the special game) is set, and the process moves to step 3116.

Next, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined starting demonstration time information to the sub side. Next, in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration execution flag, and proceeds to step 3120. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 3102, the process moves to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the start demonstration time timer is 0 or not. If YES in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the starting demonstration execution flag in step 3122. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration execution permission flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game execution flag and moves to the next process (the process of step 1610). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3120, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1610).

Next, FIG. 213 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing in modification example 2 from the tenth embodiment. The changes from the tenth embodiment are step 2403-1 (second variation 2) to step 2403-11 (second variation 2) and step 2350 (second variation 2). After turning off the middle flag, in step 2403-1 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the start demonstration flag (by turning on, the special game start demo time will start). flag) is off. If Yes in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2404. Next, in the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2403-2 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to the start demo display timer and starts the timer. Start. Next, in step 2403-3 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the starting demonstration flag. Next, in step 2350 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start demonstration effect execution process to be described later, and proceeds to step 2403-4 (second change 2). Note that even in the case of No in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2403-4 (second variation 2).

Next, in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the timer value of the start demonstration time timer is 0 or not. If Yes in step 2403-4 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the starting demonstration flag in step 2403-5 (second change 2), and proceeds to step 2412. On the other hand, if No in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2900).

In addition, after setting the command related to the jackpot start display in step 2414, in step 2403-6 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command related to the distribution start demo time information from the main side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in Step 2403-6 (Second Variation 2), in Step 2403-7 (Second Variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S specifies that the distribution start demonstration time is long (in this example, 10 seconds). ). In addition, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, there are two types of time values of the distribution start demonstration time, that is, the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round: a long time and a short time. If Yes in Step 2403-7 (Second Variation 2), in Step 2403-8 (Second Variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board A notification performance (a performance that does not definitively notify the player whether or not the second big prize opening C20 will be long open in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-7 (second change 2), in step 2403-9 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S controls the incoming ball during the short distribution start demo time. An easy notification performance (a performance that definitely notifies the player that the second big prize opening C20 will be open for a long time in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and the process moves to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). In this way, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, the easy ball entry unannounced performance is executed in the distribution game execution round related to the first main game symbol, and the distribution game related to the second main game symbol is executed. In the execution round, an easy-to-enter notification effect is executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make a difference between the easy ball entry not-notifying performance and the easy ball entering notification performance to be performed depending on the game state. For example, in a distribution game execution round related to a long open jackpot (5A/7A) on the first main game side won in a non-time reduction gaming state and a non-probability variable gaming state, an easy-to-enter unannounced effect is executed, In the distribution game execution round related to the long open jackpot (3B, 5B, 7B) on the second main game side won in the time reduction game state and the probability variable game state, the easy-to-enter notification performance is executed. Good too. In addition, the system is configured to be able to execute an on-hold consecutive game performance that notifies the player that there is a pending game that will become a jackpot among the pending games that are currently being executed in the special game, and the on-hold consecutive game performance is executed. Even in the case where the ball entry is not announced, the easy ball entry performance and the easy ball entry notification performance may be displayed so as not to be noticeable to the player.

Next, in step 2403-10 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the special game being executed is a special game related to the second main game length opening jackpot symbol ( The second main game length opening jackpot symbols are 3B, 5B, and 7B). If Yes in step 2403-10 (second change 2), the process moves to step 2416. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2403-10 (second change 2), then in step 2403-11 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command (short open In the case of a jackpot where there is a round, the number of rounds is not reported), and the process moves to step 2426. In this way, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, the second main game long opening jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol in which the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20 becomes long opening in every round. In the case of jackpots related to In a jackpot in which the opening C20 is opened for a short time (or in a jackpot having a round in which the first big winning opening C10 is opened for a short time), the round being executed is not notified at the time of execution of each round. In addition, when not reporting the round being executed, instead of displaying the round notification, an object image (for example, a treasure chest, etc.) corresponding to the number of rounds (actual number of rounds) is displayed in the first big prize opening C10 or the second It may be configured to be additionally displayed each time a round in which the big prize opening C20 is left open for a long time is executed. In addition, the configuration is such that a plurality of object images are displayed at the start of the special game (or immediately after the start of the special game), and an effect is executed to ensure that the number of rounds corresponding to the number of object images is long open. You may. It should be noted that when executing a special game in which all rounds are long open, it is not necessary to execute the effect, or it may be executed, but if it is not executed, the number of rounds currently being executed is configured to be displayed. This is desirable. In addition, in a jackpot in which the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20 is short-opened in any round (or in a jackpot that has a round in which the first big winning hole C10 is short-opened), It may be configured to notify only the number of rounds in which the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20 becomes long open (for example, "1st R = long open, 2nd R = short open, 3rd R = long open"). If the game is open, it will be announced in the 3rd round that it is the second round, etc.). In addition, the performance executed during the execution of the special game is not limited to this, for example, a jackpot is hit in a predetermined round (or a distribution game execution round) after the distribution game execution round during the execution of the special game. If there is a hold that becomes, the configuration may be such that an in-hold consecutive winning effect can be executed to notify that it is certain that a jackpot will be won. In addition, in the case of this configuration, if the on-hold consecutive game effect is executed in a round before the distribution game execution round, the game state after the end of the special game has not been determined (to the specific area C22). (It has not been determined whether the ball will land or not), even though a jackpot has been announced, there is a possibility that the symbol change related to the pending ball that was the target of the notification will result in a loss. It is preferable that the execution timing of the game performance is after the ball enters the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round, or after the distribution game execution round ends. Further, the distribution game execution round may be any round, and for example, the first round may be configured as the distribution game execution round (applicable also to the case where there is one big prize opening). However, even if there are no game balls to be hit (for example, if all the game balls are sold out while the winning symbols are changing), the second round will be held so that there is enough time to lend out additional game balls. It is desirable to set it later.

Next, FIG. 214 is a flowchart of the start demonstration production execution process related to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 2) in FIG. 160 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it receives the second length release command from the main side. If YES in step 2352, the process moves to step 2360. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not to receive the first long release command from the main side. If Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S notifies that the second grand prize opening C20 will be open for a long time in the special game being executed. (Lottery of whether or not) is executed. Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the confirmed effect execution lottery has been won. If YES in step 2358, the process moves to step 2360. Next, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a long-open confirmation notification performance (a performance that notifies that the second big prize opening C20 will be opened for a long time in the special game being executed) as a start demonstration performance. Then, the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2403-4 (second change 2)}. In addition, in the case of No in step 2354 (when the first short open command is received from the main side) or in the case of No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the long open is present as a start demonstration performance. A notification performance (a performance that does not notify whether the second big winning hole C20 will be opened long or short in the special game being executed) is executed, and the next process {the process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)} to move to. In addition, during the special game start demo time where the start demo performance is executed, as well as the distribution start demo time, if the first main game side hits a jackpot (of which a high percentage), it will take 10 seconds, and the second main game side will win for 10 seconds. It may be configured such that the time for a side jackpot (of which a high percentage) is 3 seconds.

By configuring as described above, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, in the special games related to the second main game side, the second major prize opening is created in the distribution game execution round in all special games. C20 is opened for a long time, and in the special game related to the first main game side, a special game is provided in which the second big winning hole C20 is opened for a long time and a special game is opened for a short time in the distribution game execution round, In the special game on the second main game side, at the start demonstration time of the special game, it is announced that the second big prize opening C20 will be open for a long time, while in the special game on the first main game side, the second big prize Even if it is a special game in which the opening C20 is opened for a long time, it is configured such that there are cases where it is notified that the second big winning hole C20 will be opened for a long time at the start demonstration time of the special game, and cases where it is not notified. In a special game on the second main game side in which it is certain that the ball will enter the specific area C22, the player is notified that the second major prize opening C20 will be open for a long time, while the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. In the special game on the first main game side where it is not certain that the second big winning hole C20 will be open for a long time, the player is basically executed with an effect that encourages the player to know whether or not the second big winning hole C20 will be open for a long time, but there are cases where the player is definitely notified. By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that can perform performances corresponding to the ease of entering the ball into the specific area C22.

In addition, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, the easy-to-enter notification performance and the easy-to-enter non-notification performance are configured to be executed at the distribution start demo time, but before the distribution game execution round. It may be executed during the execution of the round to be executed (it may be executed over multiple rounds), or may be executed during the execution of the distribution game execution round.

<<<<Eleventh Embodiment Power cutoff and sensor detection>>>>
Next, as an eleventh embodiment, the relationship with various sensors (sometimes referred to as a detection device, ball entry detection device, etc.) installed inside the gaming machine will be described. In addition, in 11th Embodiment, similarly to 10th Embodiment, it has the 1st big winning hole C10 and the 2nd big winning hole C20 illustrated in FIG. 195. That is, it has a specific area C22 inside the second big winning hole C10. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, a specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1, a discharged ball detection device 2224-2, a total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, and the like are provided as sensors.

<<<Relationship between power outage processing and total ejected game ball counting processing>>>
Next, the timing related to the process of counting the total ejected game balls will be described as a timing that may occur in a situation where power is not supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of a power outage. The counting process of all discharged game balls is based on the flowchart of the discharged ball detection process, which is related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is equal to or longer than the entry detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input, the total discharge is confirmed). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for a period of time during which it is assumed that a ball has entered the sensor C90s. If YES in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in step 2506. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90. In this way, the counting process of the total discharged game balls is performed.

The time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by a program that controls the operation of the gaming machine. For example, in the flowchart of timer interrupt processing in FIG. 146, a power-off occurs at a predetermined period of the interrupt interval T, and the power-off processing is executed at a short interrupt interval, or when the power is turned off at a long interrupt interval. It becomes possible to decide whether to execute the process. Note that the design value of the time from when a power outage occurs until the power outage is detected is determined according to the capacity of the installed capacitor. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. Furthermore, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates significantly from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. The parts expressed as time below are this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range given as an example for comparing time values occurs, it will not deviate from the design value. There will be no. In addition, the same applies to times other than the time from when a power outage occurs to when a power outage is detected, and the various times exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H, etc. applicable to the configuration.

<<Power-off processing and sensor-related action pattern 1>>
FIG. 215 is an example of the operation pattern of the counter counting process regarding the power-off process and the ejected bulb abnormality reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the distributed prize detection device 2221 and the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1, and indicate whether these sensors have detected the passing of the game ball (ON or OFF). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are defined as (g1) to (g6), and as time passes, the timing changes from (g1) to (g6). Although the eleventh embodiment is configured to detect a power outage and execute power off processing at the same interrupt interval, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to use separate interrupts.

Under the situation where game balls are flowing into the second grand prize opening C20, a power outage occurs at the timing (g1). Next, at the timing (g2), the distributed winning detection device 2221 detects the game ball and turns from off to on, and performs the addition process of the counter value regarding the ejected ball abnormality. Next, at the timing (g3), the distribution winning detection device 2221 is turned from on to off. Next, at the timing (g4), the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1 detects a game ball and turns from off to on, and at the same time executes a process of subtracting the counter value related to the ejected ball abnormality. In addition, as mentioned above, after the game balls that have flowed into the second big prize opening C20 pass through the sorting winning detection device 2221, they are transferred between the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1 and the ejected ball detection device 2224-2. When the distribution prize detection device 2221 detects a game ball, it executes the addition process of the counter value related to the ejected ball abnormality, and the ball enters the specific area detection device 2224-1 or the ejected ball detection device When the 2224-2 detects a game ball, it is configured to subtract the counter value related to the ejected ball abnormality, so one game ball enters the second big prize opening C20 and then flows down normally. In this case, the counter value changes in the order of "0→1→0". In the same figure, a case is illustrated in which the game ball that has flowed into the second big prize opening C20 passes through the distribution winning prize detection device 2221 and then passes through the specific area entering ball detection device 2224-1.

Thereafter, at timing (g5), the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1 is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (g6), the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed. In this way, even if a power outage occurs when a game ball flows into the second grand prize opening C20, the game ball can pass through the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the ejected ball detection device 2224-2. Since the power-off processing is configured to be executed later, the power-off processing can be configured to be executed after the counter value addition/subtraction processing related to the ejected bulb abnormality has been successfully executed. A situation where the power-off processing is executed while only adding the counter value related to the ejected ball error, and the game continues while the counter value related to the ejected ball abnormality is not normal (not 0). In other words, the power-off It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an ejected ball abnormality due to the execution timing of the time processing.

Note that the execution timing of the counter value addition/subtraction processing regarding the ejected bulb abnormality is not limited to the configuration illustrated in the figure, and any of the following may be adopted.
(1) Execution timing of counter value addition process regarding ejected ball abnormality: Timing when the distribution winning detection device 2221 turns from off to on, Execution timing of counter value subtraction process regarding ejected ball abnormality: Specific area ball entry detection device Timing when 2224-1 or ejected ball detection device 2224-2 turned from off to on (2) Execution timing of counter value addition processing regarding ejected ball abnormality: timing when distribution prize detection device 2221 turned from off to on, Execution timing of counter value subtraction process related to ejected ball abnormality: Timing when specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or ejected ball detection device 2224-2 turns from on to off (3) Counter value addition process related to ejected ball abnormality Execution timing: Timing when the distribution prize detection device 2221 turns from on to off, Execution timing of the subtraction process of the counter value related to the ejected ball abnormality: When the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1 or the ejected ball detection device 2224-2 Timing of turning off from off to on (4) Execution timing of counter value addition processing regarding ejected ball abnormality: Timing when distribution winning detection device 2221 turns from on to off, execution timing of counter value subtraction processing regarding ejection ball abnormality : Timing when the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or ejected ball detection device 2224-2 turns from on to off <<Operation pattern 2 related to power-off processing and sensor>>
FIG. 216 is an example of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the counting processing of the total discharge confirmation number counter reflected in accordance with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the first main game starting opening ball entry detection device A11s and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, and these sensors indicate whether or not they have detected the passage of the game ball (ON or OFF). . In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are defined as (h1) to (h6), and as time passes, the timing changes from (h1) to (h6). Although the eleventh embodiment is configured to detect a power outage and execute power off processing in the same interrupt process, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform this in separate interrupt processing.

Under the situation where game balls are flowing into the first main game starting port A10, a power outage occurs at the timing (h1). Next, at the timing (h2), the first main game starting opening ball detection device A11s detects a game ball and turns from off to on. Next, at the timing (h3), the first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s is turned from on to off. Next, at the timing (h4), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the game ball and turns from OFF to ON, and at the same time executes the addition process of the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90. As described above, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is a counter for outputting information regarding the total number of discharges (which may be the total number of game balls fired) to the outside of the gaming machine. Thereafter, at the timing (h5), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (h6), the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed. In this way, even if a power outage occurs when game balls flow into the first main game starting port A10, the power outage process is executed after the game balls pass the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. Therefore, it is possible to configure the power-off process to be executed after the addition process of the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is executed normally, and the game ball is placed in the first main game starting port A10. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the total ejection confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 does not perform the addition process even though the ball has entered the ball.

In addition, in the same figure, when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball, the addition process of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is executed. However, as in the configuration illustrated in FIG. , When the ball entry sensors of various ball entry ports, such as the first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s, detect a game ball, an addition process is executed to a predetermined counter value, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball. It may be configured such that when a ball is detected, by executing a subtraction process to the predetermined counter value, it can be determined whether the number of game balls that have entered the game ball matches the number of game balls that have been ejected.

Note that in FIGS. 215 and 216 as well, time values can be compared similarly to the configuration of the eighth embodiment described above. The time from the occurrence of a power outage until the gaming machine detects a power outage is set to T1, and T2 may be set to any of the following.

In FIG. 125,
(1) After all the game balls have flowed inside the sorting electric accessory 2222 (towards the back from the player), the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1 or the ejected ball detection device 2224-2 turns from on to off. (2) After all the game balls have flowed inside the sorting electric accessory 2222 (towards the back from the player), the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the ejected ball detection device 2224-2 is turned off → Time until it turns on (3) After half of the game ball (volume) flows inside the sorting electric accessory 2222 (toward the back from the player), the specific area ball entry detection device 2224-1 or ejected ball detection Time until the device 2224-2 turns from on to off (4) After half of the game ball (volume) has flowed inside the sorting electric accessory 2222 (to the back side from the player), the ball entering specific area detection device Time until 2224-1 or ejected ball detection device 2224-2 turns from off to on Time required for the area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or ejected ball detection device 2224-2 to turn from on to off The time from when the ball enters halfway until the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or the ejected ball detection device 2224-2 turns from off to on may be set as T2.

In FIG. 126,
(1) Time from the timing when the game balls that have flowed into the first main game starting port A10 are no longer visible to the player until the total discharge counter C90 turns from ON to OFF (2) Flowing into the first main game starting port A10 Time from the timing when the played game balls are no longer visible to the player until the total ejection counter C90 turns from OFF to ON (3) Half (of the volume) of the game balls that flowed into the first main game starting port A10 is reached by the player. The time from when the total discharge counter C90 turns from on to off (4) The timing when half (by volume) of the game balls that flowed into the first main game starting port A10 are no longer visible to the player (5) Time from when the total discharge counter C90 turns from off to on (6) The time from when some of the game balls that have flowed into the first main game starting port A10 are no longer visible to the player until the total discharge counter C90 turns from OFF to ON is also referred to as T2. good.

As described above, when T1 and T2 are set, the eleventh embodiment is configured so that T1<T2 holds true, similar to the eighth embodiment.

<<<12th embodiment Stop button operation and reel stop control>>>
Next, a configuration regarding a stop button and reel control applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below as a twelfth embodiment.

In the twelfth embodiment, reel stop control when operating reel stop buttons (here, the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 correspond) will be described. In the operation control of the stepping motor related to reel stop control, as described above, in particular, after transitioning to the "reel deceleration state" which is the reel drive state illustrated in (6) of FIG. 35, the rotation of the reel is stopped. In order to do this, all phases of the stepping motor (for example, four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) are excited (four-phase excitation) to stop the reel. In the twelfth embodiment, the process in which all the phases (for example, the four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) are excited (4-phase excitation) may be referred to as "4-phase excitation process" in the 12th embodiment. be.

In a reel-type gaming machine, the stop button sensor built into each stop button changes from OFF to ON in response to the operation of the stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). Or, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute control to stop the rotating reels based on information indicating that the reels have changed from on to off. Note that the operation of the stop button in the twelfth embodiment refers to a physical operation, and refers to, for example, pressing the left stop button D41 or releasing the left stop button D41 from a pressed state. . Further, the state in which the stop button is not operated may be referred to as a state in which the stop button is not pressed, for example. Furthermore, when the stop button sensor changes from off to on in a situation where the stop button is valid, this may be referred to as acceptance of the stop button operation.

In the twelfth embodiment, the operation of the stop button for stopping the spinning reels and the reel stop control will be mainly explained. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, in order to explain in detail the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the stop control of the reels,
Pattern 1: Execute 4-phase excitation processing after the stop button sensor changes from on to off Pattern 2: Execute 4-phase excitation processing before the stop button sensor changes from on to off . In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the stop control of the reels has these two patterns. Note that, as described above, the four-phase excitation process is control of the step motor that is executed when the reel drive state becomes the reel deceleration state.

The operation of the stop button (including the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43) and the timing at which the stop button sensor changes from off to on and from on to off will be described. The stop button sensor is a sensor built into each stop button, and turns from off to on when the stop button is pressed a predetermined distance from the initial position (position corresponding to the non-operated state). When the stop button sensor changes from off to on, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute the reel rotation stop process according to the flow of FIG. 34. Although details will be described later, the predetermined distance for satisfying the condition for the stop button sensor to change from off to on can be changed as appropriate. For example, the distance may be the maximum distance that the stop button can be pressed, or the distance may be half the maximum distance that the stop button can be pressed.

<<Pattern in which 4-phase excitation processing ends after the stop button sensor is turned off>>
FIG. 217 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. In FIG. 217, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the twelfth embodiment is divided into frames (a1) to (f1) for each focused event. In the twelfth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels is exemplified as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is exemplified as the left stop button D41. is not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43, or the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53. It should be noted that this configuration is not applicable only to the reels and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop in all pressing orders.

In addition, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state until the left reel stops. 2 shows an example of a case where the rotor rotates a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slippage) and then stops. In addition, when the left stop button is rotated the maximum distance according to the design, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then the left The time value until the reel stops (sometimes referred to as the slip time) is set to 190 ms, which is the maximum slip time according to the regulations, so there is some margin so that the maximum value according to the regulations is not exceeded. As an example in this example, the designed maximum slip time is set to 185 ms, and the distance corresponding to 185 ms is set as the designed maximum distance.

(a1) to (f1) in FIG. 217 will be explained in detail. First, in (a1), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed) and the left stop button D41 is at its initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reels are rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed down (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and when it is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b1), the left stop button sensor changes from off to on. Become. Here, the distance that the left stop button D41 is pushed in from the initial position is x. As will be described later, the left stop button D41 is configured to be pushed in by a maximum distance d from the initial position, and it is assumed that the relationship between the pushed distances is 0<x<d. At the timing (b1), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the constant reel speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the rotational speed of the reel remains constant). In addition, when the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, the reel (left reel M51) is stopped regardless of the operation status of the stop button (such as the time it takes until it is pressed). The reel (left reel M51) stops after moving the maximum designed distance from the timing (b1).

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (c1). In (c1), the left stop button sensor maintains the on state, and the reel driving state of the left reel M51 maintains the reel deceleration standby state. Note that the time value from (b1) to (c1) will vary depending on how the player operates the left stop button D41, but in this example, the time value from (b1) to (c1) will vary depending on the manner in which the player operates the left stop button D41. A case is illustrated in which the stop operation is performed on the left stop button D41 in a short time (for example, 5 ms), which is a typical time value for execution.

After that, the left stop button D41 is immediately released from the state of (c1), and slides toward the initial position due to the urging force of the left stop button D41, and the distance x from the initial position (more precisely, At (d1), which is the state returned to the timing when the value became less than x, the left button sensor turns from on to off. Note that (b1) and (d1) both illustrate a state in which the left stop button is located at a distance x from the initial position, but the distance x from the initial position is determined by the on/off state of the stop button sensor. More precisely, the stop button sensor is on at a distance of x or more from the initial position, and is off at a distance of less than x from the initial position. Note that x may be adjusted as appropriate, and the stop button sensor is on when the stop button is in the initial position, and the stop button sensor is on when the stop button is not in the initial position (if it is pressed even slightly). It may be configured so that Note that the time it takes for the left stop button D41 to return to the initial position from the position where it has been pushed the maximum distance d changes depending on the spring constant of the spring that the left stop button D41 has.

Further, in (d1), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 maintains the reel deceleration standby state.

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and in the state (e1) in which the left stop button returns to the initial position, the left stop button sensor remains off, and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position. The reel driving state of the reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. Note that the timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be earlier than the timing when the left stop button returns to the initial position, or may be at a later timing. It could be timing. In addition, to explain in detail about the four-phase excitation of the step motor, when the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (when the symbol scheduled to stop and the passing symbol match), the counter of the reel drive pulse output counter After setting the value to 100 (a value equivalent to approximately 223.5 ms), 4-phase excitation is turned on, so more precisely, the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and then approximately 0 4-phase excitation is turned on after .5ms. After that, the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter is subtracted by the interrupt processing executed while the 4-phase excitation is turned on, and when the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter reaches 0, It is configured to turn off four-phase excitation.

After that, the left stop button remains stopped at the initial position, and the step motor is decelerated by 4-phase excitation for the left reel, and the left reel stops at the position where it has rotated the maximum distance according to the design, and stops midway. The operations of the button D42 and the right stop button D43 become valid (the reception of the stop operation is valid).

In addition, in the same figure, after receiving the operation of the stop button 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button 1 stops (the stop control ends), the operation of the stop buttons other than the stop button 1 stops. The configuration is such that the operation is not valid (stopping operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons are not enabled until the reel corresponding to the one stop button has stopped, thereby driving multiple reels at one timing. By performing control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive load is applied to the step motor. In addition, even in such a configuration, if the user releases the stop button immediately after performing the stop operation of the stop button 1 (when the user releases the stop button immediately after pressing the maximum distance d from the initial position), the stop button The design value for the minimum time required for the sensor to turn from on to off can be shorter than the design value for the time from when the stop button turns from off to on to the completion of four-phase excitation of the step motor. . In other words, even if you leave immediately after performing the stop operation of the first stop button, the reels will rotate the designed maximum distance and stop, in other words, before the stop operations of the other stop buttons become effective. , since the first stop button is configured to be able to return to its initial position, the player can immediately stop the reel on which the other stop operation was performed and then perform the stop operation on the stop button corresponding to the other reel. It is configured so that it can be done.

In addition, when the user leaves the stop button immediately after executing the stop button stop operation in step 1, the time value for the shortest time required for the stop button sensor to turn from on to off after the user leaves the button, and the time value for the time required for the stop button sensor to turn from off to on. Although the time value from 1 to 4-phase excitation of the step motor ends varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. In this example, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range exemplified as a comparison of time values occurs, it is considered as a deviation as a design value. This means that you have not done so.

In addition, in the figure, a configuration is excited in which the reel is pushed in the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately released, and the stop button returns to the initial position before the reel rotates the designed maximum distance and stops. This is not limited to, but it is satisfied that the reel is pushed in by the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately released, and the stop button sensor is turned from on to off before the reel rotates the designed maximum distance and stops. It may be configured as follows.

<<Pattern 1 in which 4-phase excitation processing ends before the stop button sensor turns off>>
FIG. 218 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. In FIG. 218, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the twelfth embodiment is divided into frames (a2) to (f2) for each focused event. In the twelfth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels is exemplified as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is exemplified as the left stop button D41. is not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43, or the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53. It should be noted that this configuration is not applicable only to the reels and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop in all pressing orders.

In addition, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state until the left reel stops. 2 shows an example of a case where the rotor rotates a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slippage) and then stops.

(a2) to (f2) in FIG. 218 will be explained in detail. First, in (a2), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed) and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reels are rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed down (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and when it is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b2), the left stop button sensor changes from off to on. Become. At the timing (b2), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the constant reel speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the rotational speed of the reel remains constant rotation).

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (c2). In (c2), the left stop button sensor maintains the on state, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. Note that the timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be earlier than the timing when the left stop button returns to the initial position, or may be at a later timing. The timing may be sufficient as long as the reels are rotating at (c2).

After that, the left stop button D41 is immediately released in the state of (c2), and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the urging force of the left stop button D41, and returns to the distance y from the initial position. At a certain point (d2), the left reel stops at a position where it has rotated a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slip) after the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state. Note that the distance y only needs to be y<d, and may be y=x.

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and when the left stop button is at a distance less than x from the initial position (e2), the left stop button sensor turns from on to off. . After that, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and at (f2), the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position, and the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 become effective. becomes. Note that the timing at which the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 become effective is not limited to this, but is the timing when the left stop button D41 is turned from on to off (and the left reel is stopped). You can also use it as

In addition, in the same figure, after receiving the operation of the stop button 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button 1 stops (the stop control ends), the operation of the stop buttons other than the stop button 1 stops. The configuration is such that the operation is not valid (stopping operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons do not become effective until the reel corresponding to the one stop button stops, so that multiple reels can be driven at one timing. By performing control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive load is applied to the step motor. In addition, with such a configuration, even if you release the stop button immediately after pressing the stop button in step 1 (i.e. push the maximum distance d from the initial position and release immediately), the reel will still reach its designed maximum. Since the first stop button is configured to return to the initial position after rotating a distance and stopping, the player can stop the other stop buttons if the stop button has returned to the initial position. The game can proceed smoothly.

<<Pattern 2 in which 4-phase excitation processing ends before the stop button sensor turns off>>
FIG. 219 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. In FIG. 219, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the twelfth embodiment is divided into frames (a3) to (f3) for each focused event. In the twelfth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels is exemplified as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is exemplified as the left stop button D41. is not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43, or the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53. It should be noted that this configuration is not applicable only to the reels and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop in all pressing orders.

In addition, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state until the left reel stops. 2 shows an example of a case where the rotor rotates a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slippage) and then stops.

(a3) to (f3) in FIG. 219 will be explained in detail. First, in (a3), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed) and the left stop button D41 is at its initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reels are rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed down (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and when it is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b3), the left stop button sensor changes from off to on. Become. At the timing (b3), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the constant reel speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the rotational speed of the reel remains constant rotation).

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down a distance y from the initial position (c3). By the time (c3), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and at (c3), the left reel M51 comes to a stop. Also, the left stop button sensor remains on. Note that the distance y only needs to be y<d.

Thereafter, the left reel M51 is pushed in, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (d3). In (d3), the left stop button sensor remains on.

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and when the left stop button is at a distance less than x from the initial position (e3), the left stop button sensor turns from on to off. . Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and at (f3), the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position, and the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 become effective. becomes. Note that the timing at which the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 become effective is not limited to this, but is the timing when the left stop button D41 is turned from on to off (and the left reel is stopped). You can also use it as

In addition, in the figure, after receiving the operation of stop button 1, until the reel corresponding to stop button 1 stops (the stop control ends), the operation of stop buttons other than stop button 1 will not work. The configuration is such that the operation is not valid (stopping operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons are not enabled until the reel corresponding to the one stop button has stopped, thereby driving multiple reels at one timing. By performing control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive load is applied to the step motor. In addition, even in such a configuration, even if you release the stop button immediately after pressing the stop button in step 1 (i.e., if you push it the maximum distance d from the initial position and release it immediately), the reel will not work properly due to its design. Since the first stop button is configured to return to the initial position after rotating the maximum distance and stopping, the player can stop the other stop buttons if the stop button returns to the initial position. This allows the game to proceed smoothly.

<<<<13th embodiment Performance display device SH>>>>
The gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be provided with a performance display device SH that displays the operating status of the gaming machine such as the ratio of accessories, and the configuration including the performance display device SH will be described below as a thirteenth embodiment. Explain in detail.

First, a display example of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be illustrated using FIG. 220. The performance display device SH is formed of four digit segments lined up horizontally, the upper two digits (the two digits on the left) are the identification segment SH10, and the lower two digits (the two digits on the right) are the ratio segment SH20. It has become. The identification segment SH10 is configured to display information that allows the currently displayed item to be identified, and the ratio segment SH20 is configured to display numerical information corresponding to the currently displayed item. Further, a dot point SH30 is provided at the lower right of the lower digit (right digit) of the identification segment SH10, and the structure is configured such that the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 can be easily distinguished depending on the presence or absence of the dot point SH30. ing. Note that there is no problem even if the dot point SH30 is not provided.

<<<Installation position>>>
The installation position of the performance display device SH may be configured to be directly attached to the main control board M. In such a case, visibility may be reduced by a sticker or the like stuck to the main board case M40 that covers the main control board M. It is preferable to install it in an unobstructed location.

＜＜＜Displayed items＞＞＞
Examples of items displayed on the performance display device SH include the following items.
(a) = Cumulative advantageous section ratio "Cumulative advantageous section ratio" is the ratio of the cumulative number of games played in advantageous sections to the total number of games played (cumulative number of games); It can be calculated by ``total number of games played ÷ total number of games played x 100 (%)''. As an example, if the game progresses as follows: "Start of gaming machine operation → Normal section A → Advantageous section A → Normal section B → Advantageous section B", "(Number of games played in advantageous section A + Games in advantageous section B It can be calculated as follows: (number of games played in normal section A + number of games played in advantageous section A + number of games played in normal section B + number of games played in advantageous section B) x 100 (%).

Note that "cumulative total" refers to the period from the time the gaming machine starts operating at the gaming parlor until the calculation of the items to be displayed on the latest performance display device SH, from the predetermined measurement start timing to the most recent performance display device SH. It shows the cumulative total from the start of measurement for displaying on the performance display device SH to the execution of the calculations for the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, such as until the calculation of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is performed.

(b) = Continuous accessory ratio during 6000 games "Continuous accessory ratio" is the ratio of the total number of coins paid out when the first type special accessory is activated to the total number of coins paid out. The continuous accessory ratio in between can be calculated by "the number of coins paid out when the first type special accessory is activated during 6000 games ÷ the total number of coins paid out during 6000 games x 100 (%)". As an example, if the number of game medals paid out when the first type special accessory is activated during 6000 games is 6000 pieces, and the number of paid out medals due to other triggers is 8000 pieces, then ``6000 ÷ (6000 + 8000) × 100≒ It is calculated as follows: 42.9 (%). It should be noted that "6000 games" refers to 6000 games before the most recent time when the continuous role object ratio was calculated.

(c) = Accessory ratio between 6000 games The "accessory ratio" is the ratio of the total number of paid out coins paid out by special accessory and normal accessory to the total number of paid out coins, and Accessory ratio" is "(Number of coins paid out when the first type special accessory is activated during 6000 games + Number of coins paid out when the second type special accessory is activated during 6000 games + Payout when normal accessory is activated during 6000 games. It can be calculated as: (number of coins) ÷ 6,000 total number of coins paid out during the game x 100 (%). As an example, the number of game medals paid out when the first type special accessory is activated during 6000 games: 5000 pieces, the number of game medals paid out when the second type special accessory is activated during 6000 games: 3000 pieces, and during 6000 games If the number of coins paid out due to other triggers is 8000, it is calculated as "(5000+3000)÷(5000+3000+8000)×100=50(%)". Note that "6000 games" refers to 6000 games before the most recent timing when the accessory ratio was calculated.

(d) = Cumulative continuous accessory ratio "Cumulative continuous accessory ratio" is calculated by "Cumulative number of coins paid out when type 1 special accessory is activated ÷ Cumulative total number of coins paid out x 100 (%)" can. As an example, if the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the first type special accessory is activated is 600000 pieces, and the number paid out due to other triggers is 800000 pieces, then "600000 ÷ (600000 + 800000) x 100 ≒ 42. 9(%)".

(e) = Cumulative accessory ratio “Cumulative accessory ratio” is “(Cumulative number of coins paid out when type 1 special accessory is activated + Cumulative number of coins paid out when type 2 special accessory is activated + Cumulative total It can be calculated as: (Number of coins paid out when the normal accessory is activated) ÷ Total number of coins paid out x 100 (%). As an example, the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the first type special accessory is activated: 500,000, the cumulative number of game medals paid when the second type special accessory is activated: 300,000, and the cumulative number of game medals paid out by other triggers. If the number of sheets is 800,000, it is calculated as "(500,000+300,000)÷(500,000+300,000+800,000)×100=50(%)".

In addition, "7U" displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed, and "6Y" displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates the continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games. The "7Y" displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the role material ratio among 6000 games is displayed, and the "6A" displayed on the identification segment SH10 " indicates that the cumulative continuous accessory ratio is displayed, and "7A" displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative accessory ratio is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 220, although the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed as (a), the present invention is not limited to this, and the construction may be configured to display the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio as (a). good. Here, the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio is
Cumulative number of coins paid out in the game where the push order navigation (sometimes referred to as instructions) on the main control board M is executed + total number of coins paid out by accessory} ÷ total number of coins paid out x 100 (%)
Which of the cumulative advantageous section ratio and the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio should be displayed on the performance display device SH may be determined as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in a game where the push order navigation was executed, because the stop operation was performed in a push order different from the push order navigation, the number of game medals that would be paid out would be less than the number of paid out symbol combinations that could have won if the stop operation was performed according to the push order navigation. is paid out, the number of coins paid out for the symbol combination that can win if the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is calculated as the number of coins paid out in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. .

<<<Display mode>>>
The display mode on the performance display device SH may be configured as follows.
- The display is switched in the order of "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (a)..." in approximately 5 second increments. Note that there is no problem even if the interval at which the display is switched is changed; for example, the display may be switched every 3 seconds.
・For non-applicable items, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that non-applicable items include, for example, the advantageous section ratio for gaming machines that do not have advantageous sections.
・Ratio display values {advantageous section ratio (%), continuous character ratio (%), character ratio (%), displayed in ratio segment SH20} are displayed with the decimal point rounded down (in the case of 100%, (displayed as “99”)
・If the ratio display values are 70% advantageous section ratio, 60% continuous role object ratio, or 70% or higher role object ratio, the ratio segment SH20 will be displayed blinking. ・If the total number of games played is less than 400 games, The ratio display will display "00" - If the total number of games is less than 6000 games, the identification segment SH10 when displaying the continuous role material ratio between 6000 games and the role material ratio between 6000 games. Blinking display {Includes non-applicable items (for example, in a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous section, there is no advantageous section ratio, so the advantageous section ratio becomes a non-applicable item)}
- If the total number of games played is less than 175,000 games, the identification segment will be displayed blinking when displaying the cumulative advantageous section ratio. In addition, if the total number of games played is less than 17,500 games, the identification segment will be displayed blinking when displaying the cumulative continuous role object ratio and when displaying the cumulative role object ratio (games that do not have continuous role objects) (including when it is a machine). That is, in order to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games played over 175,000 games, and in order to display the cumulative continuous role object ratio and the cumulative role object ratio, it is possible to measure the total number of games played over 17,500 games. It is configured to be possible.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the performance display device SH is configured to display the above-mentioned information (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e). The configuration in which the main control board (CPUMC of main control board M) performs processing such as calculation and display of information related to (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) is detailed below. Describe.

<<<Memory map>>>
First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip C will be described using FIG. 221. The memory map shows an address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of these, the built-in ROMC 110 is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "27FFH", and the register area built in each circuit in the main control chip C is allocated to the space from "2800H" to "28FFH". The space from "F000H" to "F2FFH" is allocated to the built-in RAMC 120, and the space from "FDD0H" to "FDFBH" is allocated to the XCS decoding area (which performs decoding to interpret the given machine language as an internal representation). area) is allocated. By causing the CPU 100 to execute instructions to access these addresses, it is possible to access the corresponding hardware.

The built-in ROMC 110 has a first ROM area that is an area that mainly controls the progress of the game, and a second ROM area that is an area that mainly controls error-related processing that differs from the normal progress of the game. The first ROM area is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "1FFFH", and the second ROM area is allocated to the space from "2000H" to "27FFH". Note that the first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity that exists in the first ROM area and is accessed by the CPUC 100 is the same as that of the data that exists in the second ROM area and is accessed by the CPU 100). (configured so that it is larger than the data capacity accessed from

In addition, the first ROM area is a first control area in which a program code (instruction code set for the CPUC 100) is stored, and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPUC 100 based on this program code) is stored. A first data area where various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored, and various settings used when operating the main control chip C (operation of the random number generation circuit C140) are stored. settings, operation settings for the watchdog timer C222, etc.). Although the figure shows a memory map image in the first ROM area, the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of an unused area are merely examples.

In addition, the second ROM area is a second control area in which a program code (instruction code set for the CPUC 100) is stored, and program data used by the program (read by processing of the CPUC 100 based on this program code) is stored. The second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first control area (in other words, the second data area exists within the second control area and the CPU 100 The program code capacity accessed from the CPU 100 is smaller than the program code capacity existing in the first control area and accessed from the CPU 100), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the program data capacity existing in the second data area and accessed by the CPUC 100 is smaller than the program data capacity existing in the first data area and accessed from the CPUC 100).

On the other hand, the built-in RAMC 120 has a first RAM area that is an area that mainly stores information based on the progress of the game, and a second RAM area that is an area that mainly stores information based on processing that is different from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related items. and a stack area that is used when the program needs to store data internally, and the first RAM area is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F1FFH". A second RAM area is allocated to the space from ``F200H'' to ``F2C9H,'' and a stack area is allocated to the space from ``F2CAH'' to ``F2FFH.'' (However, the number of bytes in each area is just an example. ).

Further, the first RAM area has a first work area which is a work area for temporarily storing information mainly related to the progress of the game, and the second RAM area mainly stores temporarily information related to errors etc. and a checksum area that is a work area for detecting errors in information temporarily stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. Note that the first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area. Further, in this embodiment, only the second RAM area has the checksum area (the first RAM area does not have it), and the checksum area has the checksum area of both the first RAM area and the second RAM area ( It is configured to manage a checksum (the sum of information temporarily stored on both sides). In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when calculating the checksum, the unused area is also included in the calculation, but the calculation is not limited to this, and the area excluding the unused area (the first The checksum may be calculated for the work area and the second work area). In addition, the error detection method is not limited to the checksum check method, but may also use other methods (for example, parity check), in which case the checksum area is This is an area for storing error detection information (for example, parity bits, etc.) required when using the method.

It should be noted that the address of the area where various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored may be any address after the address of the built-in RAM without any problem. Although there is no problem in changing addresses that are unused areas, it is preferable to provide an unused area between (addresses between) the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of a memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 221, the program code that exists in the first control area and is accessed from the CPUC 100 and the program code that exists in the second control area and is accessed from the CPUC 100 are as follows. They are placed separately on the memory map (with non-consecutive addresses) and have an unused area between them, so it is difficult to visually see the placement positions of both program codes on the program source code or dump list. (The same can be said if there is an unused area in between).

Here, regarding the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent programs etc. that have been modified by unauthorized acts from being written, it is preferable to configure the ROM so that there is no unused area (unfilled area). This is suitable (for example, filling unused areas with all 0s, writing used areas to smaller addresses, etc.). In addition, the first control area and the first data area contain unused data (for example, referenced data in gaming machines with different specs) in order to prevent reference to data that would not normally be referenced due to noise or fraudulent activity. It is preferable to configure the system so that it does not include data used only for testing during the development stage, data used only for testing during the development stage, etc. In addition, the first control area, first data area, second control area, second data area, first work area, and second work area are allocated to smaller addresses and are used within the area (within the area). (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area in the range of "0000H" to "0FA7H" are not set as unused areas). It is preferable to do so. In this example, all bits in the unused area are "0", and in areas other than the unused area, one of the bits is "1" (no longer "0"). ing).

In the thirteenth embodiment, in particular, the main control board (CPUMC of the main control board M) executes the arithmetic processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH or the display processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH. When doing so, the configuration is such that the processing is performed in the second ROM/RAM area. The details of the processing performed in the second ROM/RAM area will be described below.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
FIG. 222 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in the thirteenth embodiment (the execution timing of this subroutine is the same as in other embodiments). The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is thereafter executed for a predetermined period of time (T in this example, for example, about 2 ms). The program is configured to be executed periodically with a period of

First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC 100, checking the input port of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process, which will be described later. On the other hand, if YES in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software) in step 1606. Next, in step 1608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the payment button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, and first input sensor. D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (In other words, the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T. ).

Next, in step 1610, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on/off the door switch flag and setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. switching (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU will be in the open state without being affected by noise) ). Next, in step 6100, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs a reel drive control process (a process related to controlling the drive of the reel M50) for all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0 or not. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that even if the answer in step 1612 is No, the process moves to step 1614. Note that if the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of medals error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether flags related to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, etc. are all off). If Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error-undetected command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that no error has been detected) (for example, a register (set within the area), and the process moves to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that an error has been detected) (for example, (set in the register area), and the process moves to step 1622. In step 1620, the configuration is such that information regarding the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the error state (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), or when the error is not detected, the It is not necessary to perform the information setting process (step 1618 may not be necessary). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from a state where the first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as a second error (for example, a paid-out medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPU 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control commands will be sent). Here, the commands sent to the sub-control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (sent when the stop button is operated as the first stop) Commands related to the second reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), Commands related to the third reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the third stop) (sent immediately after operation), commands related to the stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), commands related to stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), winning/return Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever), commands related to RT status (sent when all reels are Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels stop and when the next game starts); High security failure counter value command (sent immediately after operating the start lever), command related to the number of remaining AT games (from when all reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after operating the start lever) (transmitted), commands related to the game section (transmitted from the time all reels stop until the next game starts), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Although not shown, the information related to the error outputted by the external signal includes a door opening error, a loading abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a loading reception sensor retention error, and the like. Note that the door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the input reception sensor retention error occurs when the input reception sensor detects that game medals are retained. It is configured so that an error will occur. Next, in step 1626, the CPU 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, lights up a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and A predetermined segment of the segment is lit (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (updating processing of random numbers managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is not set) Determine.

If Yes in step 1636, then in step 1637 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M calls a count upper limit check process in the second ROM/RAM area as a process in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>>
Although not shown, when the process in the second ROM/RAM area is called, the CPUMC of the main control board M first saves the stack pointer and switches the stack area, and then switches the stack area to the second stack area. Configure settings for using. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the values of the registers used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area to the second stack area. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a process of creating and outputting a signal for external output from the first RAM area and register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area.

Thereafter, as shown in the figure, in step 1637-1 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the counter value of a counter (sometimes referred to as a total number of games counter) related to the total number of games played to date. A count upper limit check is performed as a check process to determine whether or not the counter value of a counter (sometimes referred to as a total payout counter) related to the total number of game medals paid out to date has reached a predetermined upper limit value. Perform processing. The details of the count upper limit check process include, for example, a predetermined number of repetitions at the address of the total payout counter and the address of the total number of games counter set in a predetermined register (referred to as HL register) in the second ROM/RAM area. Check processing is performed based on the data of the count upper limit flag calculated based on the calculation processing of the minutes. Note that the data of the number of repetitions and the count upper limit flag can be stored in, for example, a B register or a C register as an unused area.

Next, in step 1637-2 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the total number of games played to date. As for the details of the counting process of the number of games, for example, the addition value (here, 1), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-3 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the number of advantageous section games to date. The number of games played in an advantageous section is the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous section. As for the details of the process of counting the number of times of advantageous section games, first, among the data stored at the address of the game section flag set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area, a flag indicating that it is an advantageous section is selected. When this bit is "1", for example, the address of the advantageous section game counter is set in the DE register. Thereafter, data addition processing is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-4 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the total number of coins paid out up to now and the number of coins paid out during the 6000 games. Note that the number of coins to be paid out is the total number of coins to be paid out, regardless of the opportunity to pay out game medals. As for the details of the process of counting the number of payout coins, first, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (thirteenth) is not "0", The address of a total payout counter (a counter for the total number of payouts and a counter for the number of payouts during 6000 games) is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the data stored in the payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the process of adding data (in this case, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-5 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the cumulative number of paid out bonus items up to now and the number of paid out bonus items over the 6000 games. As for the details of the process of counting the number of coins to be paid out, first, the data of the accessory operating state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is "0", it is determined that the accessory is in operation. After that, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the data is stored in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. , sets the address of the accessory payout counter (the counter for the total number of accessory items paid out and the counter for the number of accessory items paid out during the 6000 games). Thereafter, the data stored in the accessory payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the process of adding data (in this case, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register. Note that the "accessory objects" in this process include the first type special accessory, the second type special accessory, and the ordinary accessory.

Next, in step 1637-6 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a counting process of the cumulative number of continuous paid out bonuses up to now and the number of consecutive paid out bonuses over the 6000 games. As for the details of the process of counting the number of consecutive paid out tokens, first, data of the RB operation state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is "0", it is determined that the RB is in operation. After that, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the data is stored in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. , sets the address of the continuous accessory payout counter (the counter for the total number of consecutive accessory payouts and the counter for the number of consecutive accessory payouts over 6000 games). Thereafter, the data stored in the continuous accessory payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the process of adding data (in this case, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register. In addition, the "continuous accessory" in this process is the first type special accessory (sometimes referred to as RB).

Next, in step 1637-7 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs ratio calculation processing. Incidentally, the ratio here indicates the following.
(1-1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio: Number of games played in advantageous section ÷ Total number of games played x 100 (%)
(1-2) Cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio: {Number of coins paid out in the game in which the push order navigation (sometimes referred to as instructions) on the main control board M is executed + Number of coins paid out by accessory} ÷ Number of all coins paid out ×100(%)
(2) Cumulative continuous accessory ratio: Cumulative number of coins paid out during operation of type 1 special accessory ÷ Cumulative total number of coins paid x 100 (%)
(3) Cumulative accessory ratio: (Total number of coins paid out while type 1 special accessory is in operation + total number of coins paid out while type 2 special accessory is in operation + cumulative number of coins paid out while normal accessory is in operation Number of coins) ÷ Cumulative total number of paid coins x 100 (%)
(4) Continuous accessory ratio during 6000 games: Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while the first type special accessory is active ÷ Total number of coins paid out during 6000 games × 100 (%)
(5) Accessory ratio for 6000 games: (Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while type 1 special accessory is in operation + Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while type 2 special accessory is active + Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while type 2 special accessory is in operation) Number of coins paid out during 6000 games during operation) ÷ Total number of coins paid out during 6000 games x 100 (%)
The above (1-1) to (5) are the targets of ratio calculation in the thirteenth embodiment. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the advantageous section ratio of (1-1) and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio of (1-2), the ratio calculation process is performed for each game, and in (2) to (5), is configured to perform the ratio calculation process every 400 games, but it may also be configured such that the ratio calculation process is performed for each game in (2) to (5), for example. Note that, as described above, either (1-1) or (1-2) above may be configured to be calculated and displayed in accordance with the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of the subroutine of the ratio calculation process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-7 (thirteenth). First, in step 1637-7-1 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of ratio calculations in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Next, in step 1637-7-2 (thirteenth), the data set in the predetermined register in step 1637-7-1 (thirteenth) (the data here is data regarding the calculation number of the advantageous section ratio). get. Next, a predetermined comparison operation is performed on the data acquired in step 1637-7-3 (thirteenth), and it is determined whether the calculation number is related to the calculation of the advantageous section ratio. If it is determined in step 1637-7-3 (13th) that the calculation number is not related to the advantageous section ratio (determined No), then in step 1637-7-4 (13th), the calculation number is stored in a predetermined register. 400 Set the data (for example, 2 bytes) stored in the game counter, determine whether the data value at this time is "0", and if the data value is "0", in other words Then, if the number of games played at this time is a multiple of 400 games (if determined as Yes), in step 1637-7-5 (13th), the address data of the ratio calculation address table previously stored in the second ROM is is set in the specified register. Thereafter, in step 1637-7-6 (thirteenth), predetermined arithmetic processing for calculating a ratio is performed on the set address data.

Thereafter, in step 1637-7-7 (thirteenth), the data obtained by the arithmetic processing is set in the same register in which the data obtained in step 1637-7-2 (thirteenth) was set. After that, in step 1637-7-8 (13th), it is determined whether the ratio is 100% based on the data obtained by the calculation process, and if the ratio is 100%, step 1637- In Step 7-9 (13th), as described above, the data for displaying the ratio at 99% is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the same register in which the data obtained in Step 1637-7-2 (13th) was set) may be used. ) (because the ratio segment SH20 is 2 digits). Thereafter, in step 1637-7-10 (thirteenth), the obtained ratio data is stored in the HL register and the process proceeds to the next step.

In addition, in the case of Yes in step 1637-7-3 (13th), the process moves to step 1637-7-5 (13th), and in the case of No in step 1637-7-4 (13th), The process moves to step 1637-7-9 (thirteenth), and if No in step 1637-7-8 (thirteenth), the process moves to step 1637-7-10 (thirteenth).

Next, in step 1637-8 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs ratio display processing. FIG. 224 is a flowchart relating to the subroutine of the ratio display processing by the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 1637-8 (thirteenth). First, in step 1637-8-1 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a ratio display number in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. At this time, it is assumed that the data of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, for example. Next, in step 1637-8-2 (thirteenth), it is determined based on the data stored in the D register whether a 1000-digit display request for the performance display device SH has been received. If it is determined that the 1000-digit display request in the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-3 (13th), the performance display device SH It is determined whether a 100-digit display request in the SH is received. If it is determined that the 100-digit display request on the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-4 (13th), the data stored in the D register is acquired and a predetermined Performs calculation processing. Next, in step 1637-8-5 (thirteenth), it is determined based on the data stored in the D register whether a one-digit display request for the performance display device SH has been received. If it is determined that a 1-digit display request has not been received in the performance display device SH, in step 1637-8-6 (13th), a logical AND operation is performed on the data stored in the register in which the ratio display number is set. (For example, an operation such as swapping the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits.)

Next, in step 1637-8-7 (thirteenth), the address of the ratio display segment data table is set in a specific register (eg, HL register). Next, in step 1637-8-8 (thirteenth), predetermined arithmetic processing is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and data obtained by the arithmetic operation is obtained. Next, in step 1637-8-9 (thirteenth), data related to the flashing request flag stored in advance is stored in a predetermined register, and the process moves to the next process.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart in FIG. 222, next, in step 1637-9 (thirteenth), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
Next, in step 1638, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt termination process, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned unrecoverable error processing.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area Modification example 1>>
Next, a modification example in which the calculation processing of information to be displayed on the performance display device SH or the display processing of displaying information on the performance display device SH is performed in the second ROM/RAM area will be described. As a modification example 1 (sometimes referred to as modification example 1 from the thirteenth embodiment) of <<processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> in the thirteenth embodiment, for example, the game progress control process of the main control board M (see FIG. 16 to 18). Hereinafter, a modification of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area will be described.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 14 in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that a detailed explanation of the same processing as in FIG. 18 will be omitted. Further, since the contents of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area (other than the display processing on the performance display device SH) are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment, a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that unlike the thirteenth embodiment in which the processing in the second ROM/RAM area is executed by interrupt processing, in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment, the processing in the second ROM/RAM area regarding the performance display device SH is executed. It is executed in main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side, which is different from interrupt processing).

In FIG. 225, the arithmetic processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH is configured to be executed after the game section transition control processing of step 3500 is performed. Note that the timing for performing arithmetic processing on the information displayed on the performance display device SH is not limited to this timing. As long as it is within the main loop process, for example, it may be before the game section transition control process of step 3500 is performed.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
To explain the flowchart, in step 3500, after the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process, in step 3501, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the process in the second ROM/RAM area. - Call the RAM area count upper limit check process.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>>
Next, in step 3501-1 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a count upper limit check process. Next, in step 3501-2 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game count process. Next, in step 3501-3 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an advantageous section game count process. Next, in step 3501-4 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-5 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a process of counting the number of paid out accessories. Next, in step 3501-6 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous accessory payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-7 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a ratio calculation process. Next, in step 3501-8 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

In this way, in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment, the calculation processing related to the items displayed on the performance display device SH (the calculation of information displayed on the performance display device SH) is the processing in the second ROM/RAM area. processing) is executed as the main loop processing. Furthermore, although details will be described later, display processing on the performance display device SH, which is processing in the second ROM/RAM area, is configured to be executed as an interrupt processing.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
Next, in step 1293, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process and moves on to the next process.

Next, FIG. 226 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in modification example 1 from the thirteenth embodiment. The content of the display processing on the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM/RAM area, is the same as in the thirteenth embodiment, so the details will be omitted.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
Specifically, in step 1636, if the update state of the built-in random number is normal (Yes), in step 1637 (13th) (variation 2), the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the update state in the first ROM/RAM area. As a process, a ratio display process for the second ROM/RAM area is called.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>>
Next, in step 1637-1 (13th) (variation 2), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a ratio display process. Next, in step 1637-2 (13th) (variation 2), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
Next, in step 1638, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt termination processing, and moves on to the next processing.

In this way, in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment, as processing related to the performance display device SH, which is processing in the second ROM/RAM area, arithmetic processing related to items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is performed in the main loop processing. The display processing on the performance display device SH is executed as an interrupt processing.

With this configuration, in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment, the display processing to the performance display device SH that needs to be constantly executed (updated) is executed by interrupt processing, while the constant processing By configuring the calculation processing related to items displayed on the performance display device SH that do not need to be executed (updated) to be executed for each game as main loop processing, the amount of data used can be reduced without executing unnecessary processing. can be reduced.

<<<13th embodiment Test display of performance display device SH>>>
Next, the test display of the performance display device SH will be explained. In the 13th embodiment and the first modification from the 13th embodiment, as for the configuration related to the display on the performance display device SH, whether there are any problems with the segments of the performance display device SH (for example, where the segments are lit) It is configured to have a test display mode for checking whether the lights are evenly lit, etc.). The configuration of the test display mode applicable to the gaming machine of this example will be described in detail below.

The test display mode of the performance display device SH is configured to be executed (displayed) at the following timings.
(1) The display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds. (2) The display starts when the settings change device control process starts (start of settings change mode) and ends within 5 seconds. ) The display starts when the settings confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the settings confirmation mode. (4) The display starts when the gaming machine detects an error in the RAM of the main control board M, Display until resolved

FIG. 227 is an example of a test display on the performance display device SH when the performance display device SH is in the test display mode. First, test display pattern 1 will be explained. Test display pattern 1 exemplifies a case where a test display is executed when the power is turned on. As mentioned above, when the test display is executed after the power is turned on, it is preferable to end the display within 5 seconds from the start of the display. This example shows a case where the test display ends after 5 seconds.

<<Thirteenth embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 1>>
The test display pattern 1 is composed of three display modes: a lighting pattern (a), a lighting pattern (b), and a lights-out pattern (c) (this is the display mode at the end of the test display). The lighting pattern (a) is a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Furthermore, the lighting pattern (b) is also a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit, and the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are executed alternately. As a result, all segments, including the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20, are lit at least once, so that segments that are not lit due to failure can be discovered. Note that the lighting patterns constituting the test display pattern are not limited to (a) and (b), but as a test display, at least the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 ( It is preferable that the lighting pattern is a display mode in which all segments (segments) are lit (it is also possible to use a display mode in which two lighting patterns are combined so that all of the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit).

Further, the test display pattern 1 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are displayed alternately as (a) → (b) → (a)... , the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds. Then, the test display of the performance display device SH ends by displaying the display mode of the lights-out pattern (c) that notifies the end of the test display after 5 seconds from the timing when the power is turned on (0 seconds). It is configured. In test display pattern 1, the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds, so for example, the period from (a) to (b) to (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 1 second. The number of lighting cycles that can be tested in 5 seconds is 5, that is, the number of lighting cycles is an integer, so the test display is configured to end after displaying the display mode of lighting pattern (b) for 0.5 seconds. .

Although the figure shows an example of turning off the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 as shown in (c) when the test display ends, the present invention is not limited to this. First, when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to be displayed in the display pattern described above in FIG. 220 (for example, the display starts from (a) in FIG. 220).

<<13th embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Modified example of test display pattern 1>>
As a configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine of this example, a modification regarding test display will be described in detail below.

It is assumed that the lighting period of each of the lighting patterns (a) and (b) illustrated in FIG. 224 is 1 second. With this setting, the period from (a) to (b) to (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 2 seconds, and when 2 lighting cycles are completed, 4 seconds have passed, and the next lighting cycle (3rd lighting cycle) is 2 seconds. (lighting cycle) cannot be executed to the end. In such a case, execute the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) twice and finish the test display. In other words, the last lighting cycle that can be executed within 5 seconds is The test display may be configured to end when the test display is executed, or after the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) is executed twice, the test display is performed by lighting at (a) for 1 second. In other words, the lighting cycle may be repeatedly executed for a predetermined period of 5 seconds, and the test display may be terminated at the timing when the 5 seconds have elapsed.

<<13th embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 2>>
Next, test display pattern 2 will be explained. Test display pattern 2 is assumed to be executed during the setting confirmation mode or during an error related to an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M. Note that the test display may be configured to be executed during all errors (or some errors) that may occur in the gaming machine according to this example.

The test display pattern 2 is composed of three display modes: a lighting pattern (d), a lighting pattern (e), and a lighting-off pattern (c) (display mode at the end of the test display). The lighting pattern (d) is a display mode in which all the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Furthermore, the lighting pattern (e) is a display mode in which the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are completely turned off. In this way, by alternately executing the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) as the test display pattern, all segments of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once, It is configured to detect segments that are malfunctioning and do not turn on.

Further, the test display pattern 2 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) are lit alternately as (d) → (e) → (d)... , the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.3 seconds. Then, starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered (0 seconds), test display is performed alternately for 0.3 seconds in the order of (d)→(e)→(d), etc. Note that when the setting confirmation mode ends at a predetermined timing (in this case, 3.1 seconds after the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered), the test display also ends. That is, the test display ends at the timing when the test display end condition is met, regardless of the timing of the lighting cycle.

Although the figure shows an example of turning off the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 as shown in (c) when the test display ends, the present invention is not limited to this. First, when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to be displayed in the display pattern described above in FIG. 220 (for example, the display starts from (a) in FIG. 220).

<<13th embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3>>
Next, FIG. 228 shows test display pattern 3. In comparison with test display pattern 1 and test display pattern 2, a test display when the timings at which test displays can be executed overlap will be described as test display pattern 3. Note that the display mode of the lighting patterns in the test display, the lighting period of each lighting pattern, etc. are the same as the test display pattern 1 and the test display pattern 2. FIG. 228 will be described in detail below.

First, to explain the period during which test display pattern 3 is performed, it is similar to test display pattern 1 in that the timing when the power is turned on is used as the starting point (0 seconds). Then, the setting confirmation mode is entered within 5 seconds after the power is turned on (here, the timing is 2.7 seconds after the power is turned on). That is, before the test display that has started to be executed when the power is turned on ends due to the passage of time, the start conditions for a new test display are satisfied with the start of the setting confirmation mode as a trigger. After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (here, 3.1 seconds after the setting confirmation mode starts), the setting confirmation mode ends and the test display appears. The process ends.

In test display pattern 3, since the setting confirmation mode is entered 2.7 seconds after the timing when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation mode does not start at the end timing of the lighting cycle described above. Even in such a case, if the test display starts with the start of the setting confirmation mode, the performance display device SH is configured to light up as a test display from the first timing of the lighting cycle. More specifically,
Light on for 0.5 seconds (a) → Light on for 0.5 seconds (b) → Light on for 0.5 seconds (a) → Light on for 0.5 seconds (b) → Light for 0.5 seconds (a) ) lights up → lights up for 0.2 seconds (b) → lights up for 0.3 seconds (a) due to setting confirmation mode → lights up for 0.3 seconds (b) →... →The test display will be executed as if the test display had ended because the setting confirmation mode has ended.

<<Thirteenth Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Modification 1>>
In test display pattern 3 in this configuration, the period from when the power is turned on until the setting confirmation mode ends is 2.7 seconds + 3.1 seconds = 5.8 seconds. If the test period exceeds the 5 second range, but the settings confirmation mode ends at an early timing, for example, if the test display period related to the settings confirmation mode is 1.5 seconds, the power is turned on. The period from the timing to the end of the setting confirmation mode is 2.7 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 4.2 seconds, which does not exceed the test period of 5 seconds after power-on. In such a situation, the test display will not be executed from the end of the settings confirmation mode until the end of the test display period after the power is turned on (regardless of the end timing of the settings confirmation mode, once the settings confirmation mode ends) Alternatively, the test display after power-on may be configured to end in 0.8 seconds (until 5 seconds have elapsed since power-on), which is the remaining period of the test display period after power-on. The test display may be restarted, or the test display may be restarted after the power is turned on until the test display ends when the power is turned on. Note that when restarting the test display after the power is turned on, for example, the starting point is the timing at which the settings confirmation mode ends (at this time, it is determined that the test display in the settings confirmation mode has ended and the power is turned on again). , the test display period is newly set to 0.8 seconds instead of 5 seconds), and according to the display mode of test display pattern 1, (a) → (b) → (a)... and 0.8 It may be configured to perform a test display for seconds.

<<13th embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Modification 2>>
The configuration in which test displays overlap, which is illustrated as modification 2 of the test display pattern 3 in this configuration, is just an example, and is applicable to all combinations that are repeatedly executed as test displays.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment,
(1) The display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds. (2) The display starts when the settings change device control process starts (start of settings change mode) and ends within 5 seconds. ) The display starts when the settings confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the settings confirmation mode. (4) The display starts when the gaming machine detects an error in the RAM of the main control board M, Although the above-mentioned four test displays, which are displayed until the problem is resolved, are configured to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that only one or more of the test displays described above can be executed. It should be noted that even in such a configuration, any of the configurations related to the test display described above may be applied.

In addition, in the test display of (3) above, the same test display may be executed during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the test display may be executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). (Exit display). Further, the display period of 5 seconds according to (1) and (2) above is just an example, and there is no problem even if the time value is changed.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the lighting pattern in (1) above and the lighting pattern in (3) above are different lighting patterns, but the lighting pattern is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern (lighting time/lighting out time) is the same. You can also use it as

It should be noted that the lighting pattern for the test display may be a pattern other than the one described above, but it should be made so that it can be distinguished from the normal lighting pattern as described above in Figure 220 (so that the administrator can visually check it). It is preferable to configure (different periods for switching the lighting mode, different lighting segments, etc.).

Note that even when the performance display device SH is executing a test display, the configuration is such that calculation processing of items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (calculation processing of information displayed on the performance display device SH) can be executed. Good too. As a specific example of such a configuration, the following configuration may be used. (1) A power outage occurs → (2) Accepts the operation of the final stop reel → (3) Executes power outage processing before executing calculation processing of items displayed on the performance display device SH → (4) Gaming machine The power supply to becomes 0 → (5) Recovery from power-off → (6) Performance display device SH enters test display mode → (7) Calculation of items to be displayed on performance display device SH during test display mode Execute the process → (8) End the test display mode → (9) Display on the performance display device SH the information that is currently displayed on the performance display device SH, corresponding to the latest calculation result. The information displayed on the performance display device SH is the information after the arithmetic processing has been performed, so it may be different from the information before the power outage occurs. In addition, even if a power outage occurs after receiving the final stop reel, if the power outage processing is executed before executing the calculation processing of the items displayed on the performance display device SH, then (3) above or later. follows the same flow.

<<Fourteenth Embodiment Configuration regarding cancellation and automatic settlement>>
As a configuration that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example, a configuration related to a gaming machine that can execute a game process suitable for a business type desired by a manager of a gaming hall will be described in detail below.

As an example of the operating format of a gaming parlor, (1) Quantitative: The progress of the game is stopped when a predetermined number of balls are obtained, and the operation of the gaming machine for the day is ended. (2) One-time exchange: Specific timing (3) Lucky number system: It is possible to continue playing if a specific benefit is given, but if a predetermined benefit is given, the game can be temporarily ended. Possible business formats. As a configuration of a gaming machine that can realize such a business form, a gaming machine that can execute and set cancellation and automatic settlement is suitable.

Furthermore, "stopping" means stopping the progress of the game when a predetermined condition is met, and "automatic settlement" means stopping the progress of the game when a specific condition is met. It is important to carry out the task without doing anything. Furthermore, stopping the progress of the game means that the acceptance of the start lever operation is invalid, or that the bet is invalidated (game medals cannot be inserted due to the blocker being turned off, and acceptance of the bet button operation is invalid). It is.

Here, to give an example of the effect when a certain game ends and then stops, the reels related to a certain game start rotating, then a stop operation is performed, each reel stops, and finally the reels start rotating. The reel driving state of the right reel M53 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (the symbols scheduled to be stopped and the passing symbols match), After setting the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter to 100 (a value corresponding to about 223.5 ms), the four-phase excitation of the step motor is turned on. After that, the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter will be subtracted in the interrupt processing that is executed while the 4-phase excitation is turned on.
(1) If the above-mentioned game is a game in which no game medals are paid out, the cancellation process cannot be executed in a situation where the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter is 90 or more (between 100 and 90). First, if the number is less than 90, a termination process is executed, and if the certain game is a game in which game medals are paid out, after the game medals are paid out (the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter is 0). (2) Regardless of whether or not the certain game is a game in which no game medals are paid out, after the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter reaches 0 ( It may also be configured as described above, in which the termination process is executed (after the payout of game medals is completed). In addition, when configured as in (1) above, there is a possibility that the reel is moving (rotating) until the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter reaches from 100 to 90. , it is possible to configure the system so that the stop processing is not executed, and the stop processing is performed after the reels reach a value below 90, which is when the reels have completely stopped, so that the player can notify the player that the reels have stopped and the game is over. It becomes easier to recognize, and the player can be made to recognize more quickly that he does not need to insert game medals for the next game.

In addition, the payment process related to automatic payment (the payment process that is executed when specific conditions are met) and the payment process that is executed by operating the payment button are configured so that they can be executed as the same process. Alternatively, it may be configured to be executable as separate and different processes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, a configuration related to cancellation and automatic settlement applicable to this example will be described in detail.

First, the predetermined conditions for executing the selectable abort in this example are (1) None, (2) When all target BBs are completed, (3) When BB1 is completed, (4) When BB2 is completed, (5) The configuration allows selection from eight items: (6) difference number of sheets exceeding 1000 sheets, (7) when three or more AT sets are completed, and (8) when a specific AT ends.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for executing automatic payment that can be selected in this example include (1) None, (2) When all target BBs are completed, (3) When BB1 is completed, (4) When BB2 is completed, (5) ) The number of difference sheets exceeds 500 sheets, (6) The number of difference sheets exceeds 1000 sheets, (7) When 3 or more AT sets are completed, (8) When a specific AT ends, (9) When discontinued. There is.

Regarding (5) and (6) above, if the difference in the number of coins exceeds the specified number and the player is in an advantageous state such as during a BB or during an advantageous period, the advantageous state It may be configured such that it is determined that a predetermined condition or a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the process ends. Further, in this example, the difference number of sheets is set to 500 sheets or 1000 sheets, but the configuration may be such that the administrator can set an arbitrary number of sheets. In addition, to count the difference number of sheets, a counter (sometimes referred to as MY counter, difference number counter) capable of counting the maximum number of difference sheets in one advantageous section where the advantageous section is forcibly ended is provided, The counter may be used to count the difference in number of sheets, or a counter dedicated to counting the difference in number of sheets may be used, which is controlled by a main control board M different from the counter. Further, instead of the difference number of sheets exceeding 500 or the difference number of sheets exceeding 1000 sheets, the predetermined condition may be set to the difference number of sheets 500 or more or the difference number of sheets 1000 or more.

In addition, since the MY counter is updated only with the number of bets of 1, for example, if the number of bets of 1 is set to "3", the counter value of the MY counter will be canceled as a result of playing a prescribed game with 3 coins. Although the number of coins obtained has reached 500 coins, the actual number of coins acquired may be less than 500 coins because the game was executed with a bet other than 3 coins before the reaching timing. If the configuration is such that discontinuation is performed based on the counter value of the MY counter, discontinuation may occur even if the actual number of acquired coins is small, as described above. Therefore, by providing a counter related to the difference number of coins that is separate from the MY counter and counting the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for any number of bets, it is possible to ensure consistency between the actual number of coins acquired and the execution of cancellation. . Furthermore, since 2-bet bet games (games other than 3-bet bets) are disadvantageous games for the player by design, the 2-bet bet game may be viewed as some kind of cheating/fraud and be stopped based on the MY counter. .

Regarding (7) above, for example, it is preferable that three or more sets of AT (or ART) continue and the timing is set at the end of the AT and advantageous sections. Furthermore, in the case of having an AT that is not so-called set number management, the condition may be such that the game continues for a predetermined number of games or more.

Further, the specific AT in (8) above may be an AT that is relatively advantageous for the player, such as an AT that has a high possibility of acquiring a predetermined number or more (for example, 500 or more) of game medals. .

In addition, information regarding the predetermined conditions under which cancellation is executed and the specific conditions under which automatic settlement is executed is stored in a specific RAM area (dedicated RAM area), and the specific RAM area is referenced when the power is turned on. Accordingly, the predetermined condition and the specific condition are determined. Note that the dedicated RAM area is configured to be provided in the first ROM/RAM area.

Note that the timing for determining the predetermined condition and the specific condition by referring to a specific RAM area is not limited to only when the power is turned on, but also when the setting change mode ends, or when the termination/automatic payment setting mode is used. , when the setting/reset button M30 is operated, when selecting a decision item during the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode, or it may be configured to be able to be decided at a plurality of timings.

Further, the predetermined condition stored in the specific RAM area and the method of changing the specific condition are configured such that the settings can be changed by operating a stop button or the like during a setting change mode. .

Note that the predetermined conditions and specific conditions illustrated in FIG. 229 are just examples, and the number of types (number of options) may be changed. Further, it may be configured to be determined based on only one item as a condition, or may be configured to be determined based on a plurality of items as a condition.

As a modification example of the predetermined condition or the specific condition, the following configuration may be used.
(1) A predetermined bonus that is satisfied when the predetermined bonus is within the specified bonus (as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device related to the predetermined bonus is determined and the symbol combination related to the condition device is not stopped and displayed) This is suitable when the internal situation is relatively disadvantageous for the player (the expected value of game medals is negative (the number of coins put in is greater than the number of coins paid out), the probability of winning AT is low, etc.) be.
(2) During the execution of the predetermined bonus that is satisfied when the predetermined bonus starts, the player is in a relatively disadvantageous state (the expected value of game medals is negative (the number of inserted medals is higher than the number of paid out medals). This is suitable when the winning probability of AT is low).
(3) Suitable when the probability of winning a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section in a normal section that is satisfied when the normal section shifts to an advantageous section is high (for example, 99/100).

Next, an example of a method for changing the predetermined condition and the specific condition will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 230 to 232.

First, FIG. 230 is an image diagram of each mode transition. When the setting change mode is entered, "Stop/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as shown in (a) in the figure. Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, the options of the predetermined conditions described above are displayed as the "stop setting mode" on the effect display device S40, as shown in (b) in the figure. Note that in (b), since there is no setting for stopping, the predetermined condition is "None", and the cursor also selects "1 None". Note that if the predetermined condition is set to "none", the termination will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, the options for the specific conditions described above are displayed as the "automatic payment setting mode" on the effect display device S40, as shown in (c) in the figure. Note that in (c), automatic payment is not set, so the specific condition is set to "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". Note that if the specific condition is set to "none", automatic payment will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (d) in the figure, "1: Absent" and "2: Present" are set as the "notification setting mode" on the effect display device S40. If "None" is determined as the "notification setting mode", even if the cancellation or automatic payment is made, the effect display device S40 will not issue a notification regarding the cancellation or automatic payment, and the "notification setting mode" will not be executed. If "Yes" is determined as "Yes", the effect display device S40 is configured to issue a notification regarding the cancellation or automatic settlement in the event of cancellation or automatic settlement.

Note that when the mode is changed by operating the right stop button D43, the cursor position may be configured to select "1 None" at the top, or may be configured to select the currently determined predetermined condition or specific It may be configured to select a condition or notification setting mode setting.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" shown in FIG. It will switch as (d) → (a)...

Note that in this example, a configuration in which the right stop button D43 is used as the operating member related to mode transition is illustrated, but this is just an example, and there is no problem in using the left stop button D41 or the middle stop button D42.

Next, FIG. 231 is an image diagram of in-mode item selection. This figure exemplifies the configuration related to the operation when selecting an item within one mode in the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" described above in FIG. 230.

By moving to the setting change mode and operating the right stop button D43 with the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" displayed, the "stop setting mode" will be displayed on the effect display device S40 as shown in (e) in the figure. '', the options for the predetermined conditions described above are displayed (similar to (b) in FIG. 230). Note that in (b), since there is no setting for stopping, the predetermined condition is "None", and the cursor also selects "1 None". Note that if the predetermined condition is set to "none", the termination will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the middle stop button D42, the cursor in the "stop setting mode" moves as shown in (f) in the figure, and "2 When all target BBs are completed" is selected.

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (g) in the figure, the options for the above-mentioned specific conditions are displayed on the effect display device S40 as the "automatic payment setting mode". Note that in (g), automatic payment is not set, so the specific condition is set to "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". Note that if the specific condition is set to "none", automatic payment will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the left stop button D41, the options of the predetermined conditions described above are displayed as the "stop setting mode" on the performance display device S40, as shown in (h) in the figure. That is, each time the right stop button D43 is operated, the mode changes in the order of "stop/automatic payment setting mode" → "stop setting mode" → "automatic payment setting mode" → "notification setting mode" → "stop/automatic payment setting mode". The mode is configured to change to the previous mode by operating the left stop button D41. Furthermore, by operating the middle stop button D42, the cursor in the current mode can be moved (in this example, it is moved one step down). In addition, since the cursor selected "2 When all target BBs are completed" in (f), the cursor also selected "2 When all target BBs are completed" when transitioning to (h). Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cursor may be configured to always select an initial position (such as "1 None") when a new mode transitions.

Note that the method for determining the predetermined condition, specific condition, and settings for the presence or absence of notification in FIGS. 230 and 231 (method for changing the information stored in the specific RAM) is configured as follows. Good too.
(1) The item selected by the cursor at the time of the mode transition is determined (2) The item selected by the cursor continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) (3) The specified operating member (start lever etc.), the cursor will be set to the selected item when staying in each mode. The item selected by the cursor is determined when staying in each mode.(5) To end the settings change mode, turn the setting key switch from on to off, and the item selected by the cursor while staying in each mode is determined.Configured as above You may.

In addition, as in the "termination/automatic payment setting mode" illustrated in FIGS. 230 and 231, settings related to suspension (sometimes referred to as predetermined condition settings or suspension function settings), settings related to automatic payment (specific In a state where it is possible to set conditions (sometimes referred to as setting automatic payment function), it is possible to determine whether the termination function will be enabled or not and whether the automatic payment function will be effective if determined in the current situation. may be configured to be displayed on a display section (for example, the payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M. As an example of the display mode, valid/invalid of the stop function is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270, with “A” indicating valid and “F” indicating invalid, and “A” indicating valid and “F” indicating invalid. It may be configured to display whether the automatic payment function is enabled or disabled in the digit. More specifically, the display mode is as follows.
Stopping function: valid, automatic settlement function: valid, display "AA" on payout number display device D270
Stopping function: valid, automatic settlement function: invalid, display "AF" on payout number display device D270
Stopping function: Disabled, Automatic payment function: Enabled, Display "FA" on payout number display device D270
Stopping function: Disabled, automatic settlement function: Disabled, display "FF" on payout number display device D270

In addition, the above-mentioned display of whether the cancellation function and automatic payment function are enabled or disabled may be configured to be displayed in the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode before the cancellation function and automatic payment function are determined. In such a configuration, for example, in a situation where a value other than "1 None" is selected in the stop setting mode, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "A", and the stop setting mode will be set. In a situation where "1 None" is selected in the payout number display device D270, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "F", and in a situation where a value other than "1 None" is selected in the automatic payment setting mode, the payout number display device D270 will be set to "F". The one's digit of the number display device D270 is "A", and in the situation where "1 None" is selected in the automatic payment setting mode, the one's digit of the payout number display device D270 is "F". Become.

Furthermore, when it is determined whether the cancellation function and the automatic payment function are valid or invalid, the above-mentioned display of whether the cancellation function and the automatic payment function are valid or invalid may be displayed. In this case, for example, if a value other than "1 None" is determined in the discontinuation setting mode, "A" is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the determination. If "1 None" is determined in the cancellation setting mode, "F" will be displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined period of time from the decision, and in the automatic settlement setting mode. If a decision other than "1 None" is made, "A" is displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined period of time after the decision, and "1 None" is decided in the automatic settlement setting mode. In this case, it may be configured such that "F" is displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined period of time after the determination.

Note that the above-mentioned display of validity/invalidity of the cancellation function and the automatic payment function may be configured to be displayed on a display section controlled by the main control board M other than the payout number display device D270. Further, the display mode is just an example, and may be displayed in a display mode that is not used for displaying the number of game medals to be paid out, displaying the push order navigation, displaying credits, etc. as appropriate.

In addition, when displaying the validity/invalidity of the cancellation function and automatic payment function as described above on the display section controlled by the main control board M, the display section controlled by the sub-control board S (for example, The effect display device S40) may also be configured to (at the same time) display an indication of whether the cancellation function and the automatic payment function are valid or invalid. In the case of such a configuration, the display mode on the display unit controlled by the sub-control board S is appropriately displayed in a display mode that makes it easy for the administrator of the game hall to recognize whether the cancellation function and automatic payment function are enabled or disabled. You may.

Next, FIG. 232 shows the effect display device when the event is actually canceled when the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes" and the "stopping setting mode" is set to "3 When BB1 ends" It is a display image diagram in S40.

As shown in the figure, the performance display device S40 displays a message "BB1 ends" which triggered the cancellation, and a display "300 medals acquired" which is the number of game medals obtained in BB1. When the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes", the message "Please call an attendant during suspension" will be displayed. In this way, when the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes", by notifying the player that the game has been discontinued, the player can proceed with the game without being confused. Further, although not shown, even when automatic payment is executed, the effect display device S40 is configured to be able to display information to the effect that automatic payment has been executed.

Note that the configuration of the operating members illustrated in the fourteenth embodiment is merely an example, and any combination of operating members that are controlled by the main control board M may be used.

In addition, as for the cancellation method in the case of suspension, it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the player cannot cancel the cancellation but the administrator can cancel the cancellation.For example, opening the front door DU (using the key to open the front door DU) It may be configured so that it can be canceled by operating the setting/reset button M30 (off → on) or by operating the setting/reset button M30.

Furthermore, when automatic payment is executed, the configuration may be such that the game can be played (game medals can be inserted) as soon as the payment is completed, in the same way as when the player operates the payment switch. , The game may be configured to be playable after the administrator performs an operation, similar to the case of stopping the game.

Note that the conditions for transition to the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" illustrated in FIGS. 230 to 232 are just examples.
(1) Shift to setting confirmation mode (2) Press and hold the setting/reset button M30 (for example, keep it on for 3 seconds) when all reels are stopped (3) Open the front door DU and press the main The transition condition may be an operation of any operating member controlled by the control board M. In addition, when configured as in (2) or (3) above, it is possible to shift to the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode even during operation of the gaming hall, and change settings regarding cancellation and automatic payment.

Further, the information in the specific RAM area described above may be configured to be cleared when a setting change is made, or may be configured not to be cleared.

<Other applicable configurations related to suspension/automatic settlement>
The configuration related to cancellation and automatic settlement that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that one or more configurations detailed below are applicable to all embodiments according to this example.

It may be configured such that the process of termination and automatic settlement is executed after the process related to lighting/extinguishing the advantageous section indicator YH is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to match the lighting or extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH with the game section of the next game.

If the difference in number of coins is equal to or greater than a specified value (for example, 500 coins) and the situation advantageous to the player ends, the difference in number of coins is set to satisfy the predetermined condition or the specific condition. If the discontinuation flag or automatic settlement flag is turned on when the value exceeds the value, and the difference in the number of coins falls below the specified value again before the situation that is advantageous to the player ends (for example, an advantageous section), the discontinuation flag is turned on. Alternatively, the automatic payment flag may be configured to be turned off (cancellation or automatic payment is not executed), or may be left on (cancellation or automatic payment is executed). As a specific example, set one of the following as a predetermined condition: "5. Number of difference sheets is over 500 sheets", "6. Number of difference sheets is over 1000 sheets", "5. Number of difference sheets is 500 sheets or more", "6. Number of difference sheets is 1000 sheets or more" ( Even if a certain game is executed and the difference in the number of coins satisfies a predetermined condition, if a certain game is completed and the specified bonus is being executed (sometimes referred to as a predetermined gaming state) after the completion of the certain game. In some cases, the termination process may not be executed immediately (by turning on the flag), but may be configured to be executed when the predetermined bonus ends.

In the case where the game is configured to stop due to cancellation or automatic settlement, if the replay symbol is displayed as stopped in a game that is canceled or automatic settlement, the cancellation or automatic settlement must be executed before executing the automatic bet related to the replay. It may be configured to execute the automatic bet, or it may be configured to execute the cancellation or automatic settlement after executing the automatic bet.

Even if the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the menu screen or QR code may be displayed by the player operating the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the sub-input button SB. good. With this configuration, even if the game is stopped due to cancellation without being aware that the game will be stopped, the game history can be saved without any problem. Further, in such a configuration, even if a power outage occurs, data related to gaming history may be retained.

From the start of the display of the end screen (bonus end screen, advantageous section end screen, AT end screen, etc.) that informs the player that the advantageous state has ended, without operating any operation member (without proceeding with the game) ) If the standby screen is configured to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and if the end screen is displayed when the game is stopped due to cancellation, the standby screen may not be displayed even after the predetermined time has elapsed. It's okay. Furthermore, if a power failure occurs while the end screen is being displayed, a normal screen (a screen different from the end screen and the standby screen) or a standby screen may be displayed after the power is restored.

If the game is configured to meet the conditions for outputting external signals related to cancellation or automatic settlement when the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, the external signal will be output even if the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement. may be configured to be continuous.

If the game is configured to stop due to cancellation or automatic payment, when the game is stopped, the lamp unit will be lit in red and the back lamp will be turned off, etc., so that the game center manager can easily recognize the stoppage of the game. It may be configured to turn on and off in a lighting mode that is easily distinguishable from when the vehicle is moving (a combination of the lighting mode of the lamp unit and the lighting mode of the back lamp).

The audio data during payment may be the same or different between payment performed by the player operating the payment button and automatic payment.

In a situation where one or more game medals are electronically stored in the credit and one or more game medals are bet,
(1) If automatic settlement is executed, both game medals for credits and bets will be settled, and even if settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, credits and bets will be settled. It may be configured such that any game medals are settled.
(2) If automatic settlement is executed, both game medals for credits and bets will be settled, and if settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the betted game medals will be settled. It may be configured such that only the payment is made.
(3) If automatic settlement is executed, both credits and bets will be settled, and if settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the game medals will be saved in credits. It may be configured such that only game medals are settled.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231, if the conditions for ending the termination/automatic settlement setting mode are met during the setting in the termination/automatic settlement setting mode (when the game starts, a power outage occurs) (e.g.), it may be configured to execute a process to confirm the item that was being selected (selected by the cursor) in the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode.

A mechanical switch that can be physically turned on and off may be provided. For example, a mechanical switch for stopping the game and a mechanical switch for automatic payment may be provided, and in such a case, the predetermined condition and the specific condition may be set in advance for the gaming machine. It is also possible to set the condition as follows. Alternatively, a mechanical switch related to termination or automatic settlement may be provided, and the configuration may be configured such that termination or automatic settlement can be set in the termination/automatic settlement setting mode described above (setting possible via software). In addition, when a mechanical switch is provided, the execution conditions for termination or automatic payment are set when the switch is turned from off to on.

The gaming machine according to this example is configured to display an error on a display section (for example, the payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M when an error is detected (for example, when an input medal retention error is detected). However,
(1) If the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the relevant display section will not display the fact that the game has stopped. (2) If the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the relevant display will not be displayed. (3) When the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, the display section displays the same display format as when the error was detected. It may be configured as follows.

If a predetermined error (e.g., inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of automatic payment processing, the execution of the payment processing is stopped and a predetermined error state is set (notification regarding the predetermined error is made). ). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the payout sensor detects the first payout of game medals after detecting a predetermined error (one game medal is turned on and off by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). It may be configured such that the payout related to the settlement process is stopped immediately after the payout is deemed to have been paid out.

If a predetermined error (for example, an input medal retention error) is detected during the execution of automatic payment processing, the system will set the predetermined error state after completing the payment processing (notification regarding the predetermined error will be executed). ). In addition, if the system is configured in such a way and the game is configured to stop after automatic payment is executed (performing the cancellation process), a predetermined error state can be set after the cancellation process is executed. Even in this state, it is possible to make notification regarding the suspension (notification regarding the suspension of the game).

If a predetermined error (e.g., inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the automatic payment process, the system will set the system to a predetermined error state after completing the payment process (notify the user of the predetermined error). ), and the game is configured to stop after automatic payment is executed (performing termination processing), it may be configured to enter a predetermined error state before executing the termination processing. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly notify that there is an error state.

If a predetermined error (for example, inserted medal retention error) is detected after the reels of a game that is to be discontinued is stopped but before the discontinuation process is executed, the predetermined error will be executed after the discontinuation process is executed. By setting the game to an error state, it is possible to make notification regarding termination (notification regarding game stoppage) even in a predetermined error state.

If a predetermined error (e.g., inserted medal retention error) is detected after the reels of a game that is to be discontinued is stopped and before the discontinuation process is executed, a predetermined error is detected before the discontinuation process is executed. It may be configured to cause an error state. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly notify that there is an error state.

When the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the operation of the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the sub-input button SB, may be disabled.

When the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, it is preferable to configure the blocker to be turned off (game medals cannot pass through).

If a predetermined error (for example, inserted medal retention error) is detected in a situation where a notification related to cancellation or automatic settlement is being executed (for example, notified by the production control device S40), an error will occur. Notification may be performed and an external signal related to the error may be output. In addition, when executing error notification in such a case,
(1) End the notification related to cancellation or automatic payment and execute error notification (the notification may be displayed on the effect display device S40 or may be audible from a speaker)
(1-1) After that, if the error is cleared and the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, the notification regarding cancellation or automatic settlement will be resumed. (1-2) After that, the error is canceled and the game is stopped due to cancellation Or, if the game with automatic payment has been stopped, the notification related to the cancellation or automatic payment will not be restarted. It may be configured as described above, in which the notification related to cancellation or automatic payment and the error notification are notified in different areas (or areas that partially overlap). In addition, in this example, even if the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, it is configured to be able to execute a process for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred.

In the stop/automatic payment setting mode, in other words, even in a situation where any of the screens shown in FIGS. Alternatively, a new screen not shown in FIG. 230 (for example, (e) different from (a) to (d)) may be provided, and the volume or other settings may be changed while the new screen is displayed. The configuration may be such that the amount of light can be adjusted.

When the termination setting is in progress (a situation in which a value other than "1 None" is determined in the termination setting mode), the settings are more effective than when not in the termination setting (a situation in which "1 None" is determined in the termination setting mode). The system may be configured to relatively increase the appearance rate of suggestive effects (effects that suggest the current setting value, and whether or not to execute the effect and the frequency of execution vary depending on the current setting value). By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play while the game is set to be discontinued.

If the predetermined conditions for executing the termination process and the specific conditions for executing the automatic settlement process are set as the same conditions, and if the same conditions are met, after the automatic settlement process is executed. It may be configured to execute a termination process. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is also possible to configure the system so that the stop processing is executed after the last game medal related to the automatic settlement process is paid out (passes the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). good.

If only the cancellation function is enabled (the predetermined conditions for cancellation are set, but the specific conditions for automatic payment are not set), or the predetermined conditions for cancellation and automatic payment processing are not set. In the case where the specific conditions to be executed are set as different conditions and the cancellation process is executed, the configuration may be such that the settlement process can be executed by operating the settlement button during the cancellation.

While the payment processing related to automatic payment is being executed, the payment processing by operating the payment button may not be executed (new payment processing may not be performed by operating the payment button).

Note that the situation where the abort setting is in progress is sometimes referred to as "the abort function is enabled", and the situation where the abort setting is not in progress is sometimes referred to as "the abort function is disabled" or "the abort function is not effective". Further, determining the predetermined condition is sometimes referred to as "satisfying the predetermined condition", and the options for the predetermined condition described above in FIG. 229 etc. are sometimes referred to as "specific condition candidates". may or may not include "1 None". Furthermore, satisfying the determined predetermined condition may be referred to as "meeting the specific condition."

In addition, the predetermined conditions "5. Difference number of coins exceeding 500 coins" and "6. Difference number of coins exceeding 1000 coins" described above in FIG. '', and the predetermined conditions of ``5. Difference number of coins 500 or more'' and ``6. Difference number of coins 1000 or more'' are ``the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number.'' It is sometimes called.

Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 229, in this example, selection candidates for a predetermined condition regarding cancellation (sometimes referred to as specific condition A selection candidates) and selection candidates for a specific condition regarding automatic settlement (specific condition A selection candidates) are selected. Although the selection candidates (sometimes referred to as B selection candidates) are partially overlapped, the selection candidates for predetermined conditions regarding cancellation and the selection candidates for specific conditions regarding automatic payment are
(1) All candidates are different. (2) All candidates are the same. (3) Only some of the candidates are the same. Any of the above may be used. Note that even in the case of configuration as in (2) or (3) above, it is also possible to make the determined (set) predetermined condition and the determined (set) specific condition the same. However, it should be noted that it is also possible to make them different.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned stopping function can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines. As a specific example, as a stopping process, the firing function is stopped (game balls will no longer be fired even if the firing handle D44 is operated), and the entry of game balls into various ball openings is disabled (when the ball enters the winning opening). Examples include processing such as game balls not being paid out even when the ball is pitched, and random numbers not being obtained even when the ball enters the ball entry hole. As an alternative to the difference in number of balls for drum-type gaming machines, the difference number is the cumulative difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out related to winnings (subtracting the number of balls fired from the number of balls paid out related to winnings), or the number of balls paid out related to winnings. The total number of balls paid out is the cumulative number of balls put out.

<Combination of configurations according to this example>
As described above, gaming machines having the configuration according to the present embodiment to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment have been described. The configurations from this example to the sixth embodiment can be configured in combination as appropriate, and below is an example of a gaming machine that is combined across the configurations according to this example to the configurations according to the sixth embodiment. List.

<Combination configuration 1>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
The configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and the << Example of medal addition process using input sensor in third embodiment>> in the third embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations according to Configuration 1>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order navigation is recognized no matter which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the credit cannot be added, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is executed. To provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the game is not being executed.

<Combination configuration 2>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Combination of the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and the configuration according to <<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment The game machine is constructed with the following features.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order navigation is recognized no matter which display device the player looks at. The depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collided with the collision part , it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a situation in which the medals bounce up to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combination configuration 3>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <Configuration 1> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and configuration related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment Drive control of medal payout device>>>> in the fifth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the above.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order navigation is recognized no matter which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which game medals cannot be paid out, and when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, a player who receives game medals can receive the payout of game medals at the same intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. , it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give players a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 4>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
The configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> and the main control board and sub-control during execution of processing related to payment in the sixth embodiment Processing when communication with the board is disconnected A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> in the case where the command and channel are one-to-one.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized no matter which display device the player looks at. In the event that communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process that involves audio output is being executed, the player cannot output audio. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is possible to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 5>
For example, in the third embodiment, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of Medal Addition Process by Insertion Sensor>>> and the <<<<Fourth Embodiment>> in the fourth embodiment. Embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the medal return member >>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, , the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is not completed in time. This makes it possible to prevent the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the game medals are not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is relative to the diameter of the game medals. It is possible to provide a game machine that has a sufficient distance and can prevent a situation in which the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combination configuration 6>
For example, in the third embodiment, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of medal addition process by input sensor>>> and the <<<<Fifth embodiment>> in the fifth embodiment. Embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining configurations related to drive control of medal payout device >>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, , the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the ejection port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be executed in time, and the credit addition process is delayed. This makes it possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even when the game medals are not executed. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number of medals, and which does not give players a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 7>
For example, in the third embodiment, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of medal addition process by input sensor>>> and the <<<Sixth embodiment>> in the sixth embodiment. Form: Processing when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during execution of processing related to payment When the command and channel are one-to-one >>> Constructed by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> The gaming machine is

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, , the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is not completed in time. This makes it possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even when the main control board M is not being executed. A user-friendly gaming machine that allows the player to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the audio output does not end even when communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected. can be provided.

<Combination configuration 8>
For example, the configuration related to <<<<Fourth Embodiment: Medal Returning Member>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and the <<<<Fifth Embodiment: Drive control of medal dispensing device>> in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collided with the collision part This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the game medals bounce back to the medal receiving slot D341, and when the player receiving the payout of game medals receives a predetermined number of game medals, the game medals are paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which game medals can be paid out in a manner that does not give players a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 9>
For example, the configuration related to <<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and the configuration related to <<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> in the sixth embodiment, Processing when communication is cut off between control board and sub-control board When commands and channels are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collided with the collision part This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the medals bounce back to the medal receiving slot D341, and to prevent communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S from being disconnected while processing that involves audio output is being executed. In this case, a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided in which the player can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Combination configuration 10>
For example, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment: Drive control of the medal dispensing device>>>> and in the sixth embodiment, the execution of the process related to <<<Sixth Embodiment: Settlement] Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board in the case where the commands and channels are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out to a player who receives a payout of game medals, the player can receive the payout of game medals from the first medal to the predetermined number at the same intervals. If communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process that involves audio output is being executed, the player can output audio without causing any discomfort to the player. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is possible to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 11>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
The configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and the << Example of medal addition process using input sensor in third embodiment>> in the third embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to Configuration 1>> and the configuration according to <<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized no matter which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the credit cannot be added, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is executed. This prevents the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the game is not executed, and ensures that the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is a sufficient distance relative to the diameter of the game medals. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combination configuration 12>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
The configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and the << Example of medal addition process using input sensor in third embodiment>> in the third embodiment The configuration according to Configuration 1>>, the configuration according to <<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and the <<<<Fifth Embodiment Medal A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations related to the drive control of the payout device >>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order navigation is recognized no matter which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the credit cannot be added, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is executed. This prevents the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the game is not executed, and ensures that the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medals. This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341, and allows the player who receives the game medals to receive the predetermined number of game medals. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give a player a sense of discomfort since game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number of medals when being paid out.

<Combination configuration 13>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
The configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and the << Example of medal addition process by third embodiment: medal addition process by input sensor>> in the third embodiment The configuration according to Configuration 1>>, the configuration according to <<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and the <<<<Fifth Embodiment Medal Configuration related to the drive control of the dispensing device >>>> and the process in the sixth embodiment when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub control board during the execution of processing related to the sixth embodiment Commands A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> in the case of one-to-one channel ratio >>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized no matter which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the credit cannot be added, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is executed. This prevents the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the game is not executed, and ensures that the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is a sufficient distance relative to the diameter of the game medals. This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341, and allows the player who receives the game medals to receive the predetermined number of game medals. When being paid out, game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number of medals, so the player does not feel any discomfort, and the main When the communication between the control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player is able to recognize that no problem has occurred with the gaming machine because the audio output does not end. We can provide friendly gaming machines.

<Combination configuration 14>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration according to <Configuration 3> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << Example of medal addition process by third embodiment medal addition sensor>> in the third embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations according to Configuration 1>>.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant) For example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to In this example, the reel window frame lamp D310 lights up), etc., so that it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation. In this state, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU 100 of the main control board M will determine that it is an error and perform a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turn off the blocker D 100). To prevent game medals from getting into a game machine (swallowing) even though the credit addition process has not been executed because the execution process (such as paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that enables the following.

<Combination configuration 15>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
The configuration according to <Configuration 3> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and the configuration according to <<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment are combined The game machine is constructed with the following features.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant) For example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to In this example, the reel window frame lamp D310 lights up), etc.), it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine will be A user-friendly game machine that has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of can be provided.

<Combination configuration 16>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <Configuration 3> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and configuration related to <<<<Fifth embodiment drive control of medal payout device>>>> in the fifth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the above.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant) For example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to In this example, the reel window frame lamp D310 lights up), etc.), it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation, and the player who receives the payout of game medals will be able to complete the process by To provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give players a sense of discomfort since game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number when medals are paid out.

<Combination configuration 17>
For example, in this example, <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
The configuration according to <Configuration 3> of <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> and the main control board and sub control during execution of the process related to <<<Sixth embodiment payment process> in the sixth embodiment Processing when communication with the board is disconnected A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> in the case where the command and channel are one-to-one.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant) For example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to In this example, the reel window frame lamp D310 lights up), etc., so that it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred with the gaming machine because the audio output does not end. It is possible to provide user-friendly gaming machines.

<Combination configuration 18>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to display end of push order navigation>> and in the third embodiment, <<Example of medal addition process using input sensor in third embodiment>>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations according to <Configuration 1>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different, so that the two display devices It is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to visually confirm the end of the push order navigation at the same time, and the player can visually confirm the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. When the input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU 100 of the main control board M will determine that it is an error. , the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 using the blocker D100) was not completed in time, and even though the credit addition process was not executed, the game medals were It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the game machine from getting into the game machine (swallowing).

<Combination configuration 19>
For example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to display end of push order navigation>> in this example and the configuration related to <<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine is constructed by combining the two.

<Effect>
With this configuration, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices It is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to visually confirm the end of the push order navigation at the same time, and the player can visually confirm the end of the push order navigation on the individual display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player while playing the game. A situation where the depth of the surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is a sufficient distance relative to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that makes it possible to prevent such problems.

<Combination configuration 20>
For example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to display end of push order navigation>> in this example, and the configuration related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment: Drive control of medal payout device>>>> in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine is constructed by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices It is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to visually confirm the push order navigation at the same time, and the player can visually confirm the end of the push order navigation on the individual display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player. When a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player who receives the payout can receive the payout of game medals at the same intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number, which is a user-friendly system that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. We can provide gaming machines.

<Combination configuration 21>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to display end of push order navigation>> and in the sixth embodiment, the main control board and sub Processing at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board When the command and channel are one-to-one >>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices It is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to visually confirm the end of the push order navigation at the same time, and the player can visually confirm the end of the push order navigation on the individual display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. If the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while processing that involves output is being executed, the player will not be able to finish the output of the audio, so the player may have to It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows users to recognize that no problems have occurred.

<Combination configuration 22>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> and in the third embodiment, <<Example of medal addition process using input sensor in third embodiment>>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <Configuration 1>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button can be operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, even if the next reel to be stopped is being pressed due to the stop operation of that reel. Because it is clear, unintended disadvantages to the player, such as not being able to get the maximum number of coins due to a mistake in the pressing order, are less likely to occur, and if the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit is still If an error occurs at this timing even though addition processing is not being performed, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that it is an error and performs a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, by turning off the blocker D100 and using the blocker D100). To prevent game medals from getting into a game machine (swallowing) even though credit addition processing has not been executed because execution processing (such as refunding game medals to a discharge port D240) is not in time. It is possible to provide user-friendly gaming machines.

<Combination configuration 23>
For example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >> in this example, and the configuration related to <<<Fourth embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine is constructed by combining the two.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button can be operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, even if the next reel to be stopped is being pressed due to the stop operation of that reel. Because it is clear, unintended disadvantages to the player, such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to a mistake in the pressing order, are less likely to occur, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is relative to the diameter of the gaming medal. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that has a sufficient distance and can prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341. .

<Combination configuration 24>
For example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example, and the configuration related to <<<<Fifth embodiment drive control of medal payout device>>>> in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine is constructed by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button can be operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, even if the next reel to be stopped is being pressed due to the stop operation of that reel. This makes it difficult for players to experience unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of medals due to mistakes in the order of presses, etc. Since game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give players a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 25>
For example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example, and the main control board and sub-control board during execution of processing related to payment in the sixth embodiment. Processing at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board When the command and channel are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button can be operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, even if the next reel to be stopped is being pressed due to the stop operation of that reel. Because it is clear, unintended disadvantages to the player, such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to a mistake in the pressing order, are less likely to occur, and the main control board M is A user-friendly game that allows the player to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the audio output does not end even when communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected. machine can be provided.

An example of a gaming machine in which the configuration according to this example is combined with the configuration according to the sixth embodiment has been described above, but these are just examples, and the configuration according to the present example to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment can be changed as appropriate. , can be configured in combination.

(summary)
Note that the following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and it goes without saying that these listed concepts can be combined or separated (generated into higher-level concepts), and concepts based on the further structures shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. It's okay.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
It has a band-shaped reel tape (e.g., reel band MO) wrapped around the outer periphery of the reel base (e.g., reel frame MW),
A plurality of types of patterns are arranged on the reel tape along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape,
The types of the symbols include at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol);
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol,
The second symbol is arranged on at least one of the longitudinal ends of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged on each of the longitudinal ends of the reel tape. ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is longer than the outer periphery of a surface of the reel base around which the reel tape is wound.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
The gaming machine body,
a front door (for example, front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable;
In a reel-type gaming machine that includes a reel unit (for example, reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body,
Inside the gaming machine main body,
a pedestal section (for example, pedestal section BU) on which the reel unit is installed;
a main tank member (for example, hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) is provided near the main tank member for evacuating surplus game media stored in the main tank member,
A part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, a slope H64) that descends from the main tank member to the auxiliary tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking part (for example, screw BS),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the slope portion is located vertically below the locking component that is closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
The gaming machine body,
a front door (for example, front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable;
In a reel-type gaming machine that includes a reel unit (for example, reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body,
Inside the gaming machine main body,
a pedestal section (for example, pedestal section BU) on which the reel unit is installed;
a main tank member (for example, hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) is provided near the main tank member for evacuating surplus game media stored in the main tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking part (for example, screw BS),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the locking component that is closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
a plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
a plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40);
A performance display unit capable of displaying a performance (for example, a performance display device S40),
Equipped with operation members (for example, sub input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the performance,
After the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped last. One game can be completed by performing a final stop switch operation, which is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel, and stopping all of the plurality of reels;
When the final stop switch is operated, if a first predetermined period of time elapses without a bet being placed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch is operated, a specific image (for example, , standby screen) can be displayed.
When a predetermined operation member (for example, sub input button SB) is operated after completing one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display section,
If the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time period elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, the production display section is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5) is
a plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
a plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40);
A performance display unit capable of displaying a performance (for example, a performance display device S40),
Equipped with operation members (for example, sub input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the performance,
After the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped last. One game can be completed by performing a final stop switch operation, which is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel, and stopping all of the plurality of reels;
When the final stop switch is operated, if a first predetermined period of time elapses without a bet being placed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch is operated, a specific image (for example, , standby screen) can be displayed.
When a predetermined operation member (for example, sub input button SB) is operated after completing one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display section,
If the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time period elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, the production display section is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time,
When the predetermined image is displayed by operating the predetermined operation member, the predetermined image remains displayed for the second predetermined period of time from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. If a specific operating member (for example, cross key SB2) is operated before the time elapses, the predetermined image remains displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. 2. Even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display section,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly activated before the first predetermined time period elapses without a bet being placed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation. Even if the above operation is performed, if the first predetermined time period elapses without placing a bet from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation, the specific image can be displayed on the performance display section. It is composed of
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a bet is placed before the first predetermined time period elapses without placing a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation. , a game characterized in that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display section even after the first predetermined time has elapsed from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A setting switch (for example, a setting switch) that is electrically connected to the main gaming section and is operated to shift to a setting change mode (for example, a setting change mode) in which a setting value related to the advantage for the player can be changed. key switch),
The main gaming section is configured to be able to execute interrupt processing, which is processing executed at predetermined time intervals,
When a power outage occurs in a predetermined gaming state that is not in the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on in a situation where power is not being supplied to the game machine, power is started to be supplied to the game machine, and the game machine enters the setting change mode. If a power outage occurs after the setting switch is turned off and power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off, the gaming machine is configured to shift to the setting change mode,
When a power outage occurs in a predetermined gaming state that is not in the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on in a situation where power is not being supplied to the gaming machine, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and from the start of the supply of power. The gaming machine is configured not to shift to the setting change mode if a power outage occurs before the predetermined time elapses and power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off. This is a gaming machine with special features.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
a stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) that is provided corresponding to each reel and is operated by the player when stopping the rotation of the reel;
a storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs performance sound,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the output of the performance,
The main gaming department is
A prize lottery means for performing a prize lottery;
and a reel control means for controlling the reels to stop so as to correspond to the prize lottery result by the prize lottery means when the stop switch is operated,
a storage number increasing process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means;
It is possible to execute a payout process for paying out game media,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the reel is configured to be able to award gaming media to the player,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and a specific number of game media are awarded, a stored number increasing process is executed. It is configured to perform the withdrawal process without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is less than or equal to a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is awarded. In this case, the system is configured so that the storage number increase process is executed and the withdrawal process is not executed.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number is When game media of
The main gaming department is
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium provision information can be transmitted to the sub-gaming section,
The sub-gaming club is
Based on the reception of the game medium provision information, the speaker is configured to be able to output a game medium provision sound, which is an effect sound regarding the provision of game media, from a speaker;
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the specific number of game media is awarded, the game media award information is received, a predetermined game media granting sound (for example, a game media granting sound that is output when the credit increases by 1, a game media granting sound that is output when paying out one game medal), It is possible to output
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is less than or equal to a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is awarded. In this case, the predetermined game medium imparting sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium imparting information,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number is If the game media is awarded, the predetermined game media granting sound can be output based on the reception of the game media granting information;
During the execution of the storage number increase process, the time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means reaches A (A is a natural number) until it becomes A+1 and N (N is a natural number, 2≦N M+1 game media from the start of execution of the payout process regarding the M (M is a natural number, 1≦M≦(N-1)) game media during the execution of the payout process that will pay out ) game media. This gaming machine is characterized in that the time values until the start of execution of payout processing regarding the first game media are different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be lit when performing a performance,
A setting value display section (for example, a setting display LED) capable of displaying a setting value,
The game lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77),
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77),
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (for example, element 4 in FIG. 77),
The lighting time pattern is a combination of lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and lights-out time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77),
It has a plurality of lighting colors, a plurality of lighting times, and a plurality of turning-off times,
The lighting patterns include a first lighting pattern that can be implemented when a predetermined abnormality occurs, a second lighting pattern that can be implemented when a set value is displayed on the set value display section, and a set value display that does not occur when a predetermined abnormality occurs. It has at least a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is not displayed in the part,
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured so that the predetermined lighting mode is not included,
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured so that the specific lighting mode is not included.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
A storage means that can electrically store gaming media within a predetermined number of games (for example, in this example, game medals can be electrically stored as credits in the gaming machine);
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game media stored in the storage means and that allows bets on a plurality of game media;
A predetermined lamp (for example, 3-bet lamp D213) that can notify that a specified number of bets, which is the maximum number of bets per game in a predetermined gaming state, has been placed;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) that can notify that the bet switch operation is valid;
and a role determining means that can determine the winning role,
It is configured such that a re-playing role can be determined as a winning role determined by the role determining means,
is in the predetermined gaming state, and the replay combination has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and the sum of the gaming media stored in the storage means and the number of bets is equal to or greater than the specified number; In addition, in a situation where the number of bets is less than the specified number, the specific lamp is configured to light up;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in a situation where the specific lamp is lit, if the number of bets reaches the specified number, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production,
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the program of the main gaming section starts is longer than the time from when the power is cut off until the power supply to the gaming machine ends. It is configured,
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the program of the main gaming section is started is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the program of the sub-gaming section is started. This gaming machine is characterized by being configured as follows.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination may be displayed. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel. , even in a situation where the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to award a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power After the return, the player is configured to be given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel. , even if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of a subsequent stop operation performed by the player at a specific timing as a final stop operation, and a power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off is performed, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to provide a player with a gaming value corresponding to a combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination may be displayed. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the player then performs a specific final stopping operation. After the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a stop operation at the right timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the player then performs a specific final stopping operation. Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation has been performed at the right timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed. There is

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination may be displayed. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed without depending on the input of gaming value,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the gaming value It is configured so that the next game can be executed without depending on the input of

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The lottery state includes at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination may be displayed. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The drawing is stopped, and after the player performs a final stop operation at a specific timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the drawing state is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the player has stopped and subsequently performed a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination may occur due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
It comprises a reel control means for controlling the reels, and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination may be displayed. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the lamp lights up.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
It comprises a reel control means for controlling the reels, and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result,
It is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power After the return, the player is configured to be given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined lamp is turned on after the return.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) is
N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs performance sound,
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination may be displayed. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination,
In a game executed in a specific gaming state, the player performs a stop operation on the N-1th reel at a specific timing, and symbols corresponding to a specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined performance sound (for example, tenpai sound) from the speaker,
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, the predetermined rotation for the N-1th reel is caused even though the player performs a stop operation for the N-1th reel at the specific timing. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to output a predetermined effect sound from a speaker even after symbols other than symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel that has been stopped due to a defect. .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can electrically store gaming values within a predetermined range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and that allows a plurality of gaming values to be bet;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) that can notify that the bet switch operation is valid;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination may be displayed. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has one or more game media stored in the specific symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols are stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed by the player's final stop operation at a specific timing, the specific lamp is not notified that it is valid. It is configured,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has one or more game media stored in the specific symbol combination. Even though the corresponding symbols have been stopped and the player then performs a stop operation at the specific timing as a final stop operation, the specific rotation occurs due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. This gaming machine is characterized in that the game machine is configured such that even after a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed, no notification is given that the specific lamp is valid.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can electrically store gaming values within a predetermined range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and that allows a plurality of gaming values to be bet;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) that can notify that the bet switch operation is valid;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power After the return, the player is configured to be given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has one or more game media stored in the specific symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols are stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed by the player's final stop operation at a specific timing, the specific lamp is not notified that it is valid. It is configured,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has one or more game media stored in the specific symbol combination. Even though the corresponding symbols have been stopped and the player performs the stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the above-mentioned result is caused by the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off. This gaming machine is characterized in that even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed, no notification is given that the specific lamp is valid after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can electrically store gaming values within a predetermined range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and that allows a plurality of gaming values to be bet;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) that can notify that the bet switch operation is valid;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination may be displayed. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has one or more game media stored in the predetermined symbol combination. After each of the corresponding symbols has been stopped, and the player then performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a notification is given that the specific lamp is valid. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a Even though the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination have been stopped and the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined number of symbols on the reels corresponding to the final stop operation is This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the specific lamp is valid even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a rotation failure.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can electrically store gaming values within a predetermined range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and that allows a plurality of gaming values to be bet;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) that can notify that the bet switch operation is valid;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power After the return, the player is configured to be given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has one or more game media stored in the predetermined symbol combination. After each of the corresponding symbols has been stopped, and the player then performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a notification is given that the specific lamp is valid. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a Even though the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination have been stopped and the player then performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, a power-off process is executed based on the detection of a power-off. This game machine is characterized in that even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the above-mentioned symbol combination being displayed, a notification that the specific lamp is valid is issued after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It has at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination may be displayed. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination,
When the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
The game is in a special gaming state and is a newly executed game in a situation where the end conditions of the special gaming state are satisfied by giving the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In a game where the predetermined combination is determined by After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is executed.
The game is in a special gaming state and is a newly executed game in a situation where the end conditions of the special gaming state are satisfied by giving the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In a game where the predetermined combination is determined by Nevertheless, the reel is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the predetermined freezing even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine that

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It has at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
It is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power After the return, the player is configured to be given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination,
When the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
The game is in a special gaming state and is a newly executed game in a situation where the end conditions of the special gaming state are satisfied by giving the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In a game where the predetermined combination is determined by After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is executed.
The game is in a special gaming state and is a newly executed game in a situation where the end conditions of the special gaming state are satisfied by giving the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In a game where the predetermined combination is determined by Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. This gaming machine is characterized by:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. It is configured as follows.
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel. , after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotational failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to provide a player with a gaming value corresponding to.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. It is configured as follows.
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel. , after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to provide a player with a gaming value corresponding to a combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol is stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is not dependent on the input of gaming value. is configured so that it can be executed,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel. After that, the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is input. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the next game cannot be executed regardless of whether the game is played.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol is stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is not dependent on the input of gaming value. is configured so that it can be executed,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the gaming value This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the next game can be executed without depending on the input of the game machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a gaming state, it has at least a special game transferable state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
After the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means until the specific symbol combination is stopped, the system is configured such that the special game transition is possible,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a player's stopping operation other than the final stopping operation. After the special symbol combination is displayed by a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation by the player, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed. ,
In a game that is not in a state where it is possible to move to a special game, and in which the lottery result of a winning combination by the winning lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Each of the reels has been stopped, and then the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, , is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute the predetermined freezing.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a player's stopping operation other than the final stopping operation. After the player performs a final stop operation at a specific timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and a specific final stop operation by the player thereafter Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation has been performed at the right timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed. This is a gaming machine characterized by the fact that

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The lottery state includes at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each game that is stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation Symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and after the player performs a final stop operation at a specific timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the second symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to be able to transition to the lottery state,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The symbols corresponding to the above are each stopped, and then the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation, and due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, symbols other than the specific symbol combination are This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to shift to the second winning combination lottery state after the combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
It is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power After the return, the player is configured to be given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the player then performs a specific final stopping operation. After the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a stop operation at the right timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the player then performs a specific final stopping operation. Even if the stop operation is performed at the right timing, but the specific symbol combination is not displayed because the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off is executed, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. This gaming machine is characterized by being configured as follows.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power After the return, the player is configured to be given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed without depending on the input of gaming value,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the next game can be executed without depending on the input of gaming value after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The lottery state includes at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state,
It is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power After the return, the player is configured to be given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The drawing is stopped, and after the player performs a final stop operation at a specific timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the drawing state is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the player has stopped the game and the player then performs the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation, symbols other than the above-mentioned specific symbol combination are executed due to the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off. This gaming machine is characterized in that even if a combination is displayed, it is possible to shift to the second lottery state after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) is
N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs performance sound,
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means;
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In a game that is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the power After the return, the player is configured to be given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination,
In a game executed in a specific gaming state, the player performs a stop operation on the N-1th reel at a specific timing, and symbols corresponding to a specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined performance sound (for example, tenpai sound) from the speaker,
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, power outage processing based on detection of power outage even though the player performs a stop operation at the specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel. Even if a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel due to the execution of the above, the predetermined performance sound can be output from the speaker after the power is restored. This is a gaming machine that features:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and a reel control means for controlling the reel,
The lottery state includes at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each game that is stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation Symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and after the player performs a final stop operation at a specific timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the second symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to be able to transition to the lottery state,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the player has stopped and subsequently performed a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination may occur due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when predetermined conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stopping process that stops the progress of the game when specific conditions are met when the stopping function is enabled.
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that at least one specific condition candidate from among a plurality of types of specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2) is

It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when predetermined conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stopping process that stops the progress of the game when specific conditions are met when the stopping function is enabled.
It is configured such that at least one specific condition candidate from among a plurality of types of specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific condition candidate is that the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.
The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when predetermined conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stopping process that stops the progress of the game when specific conditions are met when the stopping function is enabled.
It is configured such that at least one specific condition candidate from among a plurality of types of specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition,
The specific condition candidate is that the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period is greater than or equal to a predetermined number;
In a situation where the specific condition is that the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, after a certain game is executed, the specified condition is met. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to execute the termination process when the conditions are satisfied.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when predetermined conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stopping process that stops the progress of the game when specific conditions are met when the stopping function is enabled.
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that determination processing related to a predetermined error can be executed even when the progress of the game is stopped by executing the termination processing.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) is
The stop function is configured to become effective when a predetermined condition A is met.
The system is configured so that the automatic payment function becomes effective when predetermined condition B is met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stopping process that stops the progress of the game when a specific condition A is met when the stopping function is enabled.
When the automatic payment function is enabled, if specific condition B is met, automatic payment processing can be executed.
It is configured such that at least one specific condition A candidate from a plurality of types of specific condition A candidates can be set as the specific condition A,
It is configured such that at least one specific condition B candidate can be set as the specific condition B from among a plurality of types of specific condition B candidates,
At least one of the specific condition A candidate and the specific condition B candidate is the same,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific condition A and the specific condition B are configured so that different conditions can be set.

<Production applicable to both reel-type gaming machines and pachinko gaming machines>
Next, effects applicable to the embodiments of the above-described reel-type gaming machine and Pachinko gaming machine will be explained using mainly the configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine.

<The movable accessory moves before the display indicating the win with the production and decorative patterns>
FIG. 233 is an image diagram of a performance method that indicates a win by operating the movable accessory YK before the win is indicated by the performance and decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device SG.

First, the effect display device SG displays a scene (starting scene of a battle effect) in which a friendly character (sometimes referred to as the main character) and an enemy character are facing each other, which has just evolved into a super reach effect. .

In addition, the first decorative symbol displayed on the upper right of the production display device SG is displayed in a reach state (a state in which it will be a win if one more same number is aligned), and the first decorative symbol displayed on the upper left of the production display device SG is 2 Decorative designs are displayed in a fluctuating state. The second decorative pattern does not temporarily stop and become a ready-to-win pattern until the final result is displayed, and continues to fluctuate. In addition, in the lower left of the effect display device SG, the fluctuation suggestion image (collectively referred to as a pending image, sometimes referred to as a fluctuation rights image, etc.), which is an image corresponding to the expired reservation related to the fluctuation, is displayed with a "○" (white circle)", the pending image is displayed as "● (black circle)" (sometimes referred to as the first pending display), and the first A second hold display indicating the number of hold displays is displayed numerically (here, "3"). Note that the display mode may be configured to be changeable for both the change suggestion image and the pending image. The changing timing may be a hold occurrence timing, a hold extinguishment timing, a predetermined timing during symbol fluctuation, or the like. Further, it may be configured to have a plurality of display modes that can be changed, and the jackpot expectation level of the symbol change corresponding to the changed pending image or the change suggestion image may be different depending on the display mode.

Next, scenes in which both characters attack are displayed in order to encourage which character will win (=an ally character wins and wins).

Next, the movable accessory YK operates on the front side of the performance display device SG and moves to a position where it can be easily seen by the player. In the effect display device SG, effects are displayed along with the movement of the movable accessory YK. At this point, the player can recognize that the player's ally character has won and has won (a performance that allows the player to recognize that he has won is sometimes referred to as a winning recognition performance). Incidentally, the first decorative pattern is still in the reach state. In this way, the movable accessory YK is configured to be able to move in a predetermined movement pattern during the battle performance.

In addition, when the movable role object YK operates on the front side of the performance display device SG as a performance and is located at the stop position, the second decorative pattern is displayed at a position that is visible to the player. (The visibility of the second decorative pattern is not obstructed by the movable accessory when viewed from the front), and the visibility of the first decorative pattern is not obstructed by the movable accessory when viewed from the front by the player. , or may be configured to be hidden.

Note that the display positions and display area sizes of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the figure are just examples. The second decorative pattern may be configured to be displayed in the same size as the ``777'' or may be hidden, or when "777" is displayed as a result of the battle effect, the second decorative pattern is the same as that during the battle effect. On the other hand, the first decorative pattern may be displayed as "777" at a position and/or size different from that during battle production, or only one symbol may display "777". ” may be displayed.

In addition, the display related to the decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state, such as "777" in this example, may indicate a state in which it is permanently stopped, or a state in which it is temporarily stopped (sometimes referred to as oscillating fluctuation). It may also indicate the state.

Next, a scene in which an ally character attacks with a special move is displayed on the effect display device SG. This allows the player to recognize that he/she will win even when the display on the performance display device SG is displayed. Incidentally, at this point, the first decorative pattern is still in the reach state. Displays that allow the player to visually recognize that an event advantageous to the player will occur (or indicate the possibility that an event advantageous to the player will occur), such as a scene in which an ally character attacks with a special move. A display that allows one to recognize that the result is relatively high) is sometimes referred to as a result-indicating display.

Incidentally, events that are advantageous to the player include, in a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot is executed, a small hit is executed, a transition to a time-reduction gaming state, a transition to a probability-variable gaming state, a time-reduction gaming state. In the reel-type gaming machine, the bonus is executed, the bonus is won, the AT starts, the AT transfer right is obtained, etc. , the AT period is extended, and so on.

Next, a scene in which an ally character defeats an enemy character and the ally character wins is displayed on the effect display device SG. At this time, the first decorative pattern becomes "777" and the winning display mode is set. Further, the second decorative pattern also becomes "777", which is a win display mode.

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize the win by the movement of the movable accessory object before the player recognizes the win from the ready-to-reach effect or the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device. This makes it possible to draw more attention to the movable accessory.

Furthermore, by configuring the movable accessory to be able to operate even if the performance display device is out of order, even if the performance display device is out of order, the movable accessory can operate to determine whether it is a win or not. can be made to recognize.

In addition, in the same figure, the series of effects from the scene where the friendly character and the enemy character are facing each other to the scene where the friendly character defeats the enemy character and the friendly character wins is referred to as the battle effect or the first effect. Sometimes.

In this way, in this example, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to be displayable on the effect display device as decorative patterns. Here, the configurations of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below.

<Configuration related to the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern>
Regarding the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern according to this example, the configuration described below (relationship between the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) may be applied.
(1) The display area of the first decorative pattern, which is a decorative pattern that is easy for the player to recognize, is better than the display area of the second decorative pattern, which is used to ensure display (to compensate for the display state of the decorative pattern). Also big,
(2) By setting the display position of the first decorative pattern to a different display position depending on whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, the display position of the first decorative pattern can be varied depending on the presentation mode. It may be configured so that it can be realized. On the other hand, since the second decorative pattern only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, it may be displayed at the same position regardless of whether it is in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode.
(3) By setting the display mode of the first decorative pattern to be different depending on whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, the variety of presentations by the decorative pattern according to the presentation mode can be increased. realizable. For example, in the first production mode, the first decorative pattern is composed of only numerical decorative symbols ("1", "2", ..., "8"), and in the second production mode, the first decorative symbol is composed of numerical decorative symbols and ally characters. A first decorative pattern is constructed by combining the decorative patterns ("1+character image A", "2+character image B", . . . "8+character image H"). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, so regardless of whether it is in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, only the same display mode, for example, numbers The second decorative pattern may be composed of only the decorative pattern.
(4) By configuring the display area of the first decorative pattern to be different depending on the situation, such as whether or not it is in normal reach or not, and whether or not in super reach, the display area of the first decorative pattern can be varied. It can be given gender. On the other hand, since the second decorative pattern only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by preventing the display area of the second decorative pattern from moving. be.
(5) The fluctuation speed of the first decorative pattern can be varied to slow, medium, high, ultra-high, etc. depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, at the start of fluctuation, at a predetermined timing during fluctuation, during a reach effect, etc.) Therefore, it is possible to provide diversity in the presentation of the first decorative pattern. On the other hand, since the second decorative pattern only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, the variation speed of the second decorative pattern should not be varied, or the number of steps to be varied should be smaller than that of the first decorative pattern (for example, , low speed and high speed only) to avoid unnecessary development and design. Also, regarding the direction of variation, the first decorative pattern allows variation not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (capable of variation in multiple directions), while the second decorative pattern , it is preferable to make the fluctuation only from top to bottom. In addition, as for the mode of the direction of variation of the first decorative pattern, all the patterns may fluctuate from top to bottom, or from bottom to top, or the left pattern and the right pattern may fluctuate from top to bottom. The symbols may vary from top to bottom, and the middle symbols may vary from bottom to top. (6) The first decorative pattern may be configured to be able to perform a temporary stop before a fixed stop, and in that case, a special pattern that is a decorative pattern other than numbers (for example, a pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed). By temporarily stopping the "continuation" symbol shown and the "development" symbol indicating the execution of a super reach performance, it is possible to create a relationship between the performance of the first decorative pattern and other performances. On the other hand, since the second decorative pattern only has to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern does not temporarily stop, nor does it temporarily stop the special pattern, thereby eliminating unnecessary development. Preferably, no design is required.
(7) The first decorative pattern overlaps with the display area of other preview effects (for example, the main character, enemy character, etc. in a battle effect). In order to use the area on the performance display device as much as possible to create a powerful performance, such superimposed display is allowed, but for the second decorative pattern, in order to compensate for the display state of the decorative pattern, The display area of the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap with the display area of the other preview effect. In addition, when executing a special notice effect that overlaps (for example, a background notice displayed on the entire screen), the display priority of the second decorative pattern should be set higher than the display priority of the special notice effect. It is preferable to set it high (set so that the second decorative pattern is displayed in front of the special preview effect). (8) The first decorative pattern may be configured so that it is not displayed when the movable accessory is activated as a performance, and in such a case, the movable accessory is moved from the stop position to the initial position. The display may be restarted at the timing when the movable accessory object starts moving, or when the movable accessory object finishes moving from the stop position to the initial position, or when the movable accessory object returns from the stop position to the initial position. The display may be restarted at a predetermined timing after the timing when the movement toward the object starts.

Although not shown, the process before executing the battle performance will be described in detail below.

Symbol variation starts: Variation (for example, scroll variation) between the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol begins, and the first decorative symbol is displayed larger than the second decorative symbol (for example, similar to FIG. 238). (displayed in size)
30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation: The right and left rows of the first decorative symbols are full with the same symbol, and the battle performance begins as a super reach performance (the first decorative design is displayed in a small size on the top right of the performance display device SG). )

Such a configuration is applicable to any of FIGS. 233 to 237.

In addition, when configured in this way, the following configuration may be used.
(1) Before the start of Super Reach, the first decorative pattern is displayed as "number + character", and after the start of Super Reach, the first decorative pattern is displayed as "number". .
(2) The display area of the first decorative symbol before the start of the super reach (display area for one symbol) is larger than the display area of the first decorative symbol after the start of the super reach.
(3) The display area of the first decorative symbol before the start of Super Reach (the range that can be displayed during variable display) may overlap with the reserved image, but the display area of the first decorative symbol after the start of Super Reach is reserved. Don't duplicate images.

(Example of change)
Here, aspects of effects applicable to FIGS. 233 to 237 will be described in detail below.

Furthermore, when the first decorative pattern is not displayed during the super reach performance or when the first decorative pattern is not displayed when the movable accessory YK is operated, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a position that is visible to the player. Thus, the player may be able to recognize that the value is currently changing.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not have a 2nd decorative pattern. When configured in this way, the first decorative pattern is configured to be displayed at a display position of the performance display device SG that is always visible to the player even when there is a movement of the movable accessory YK. is preferable.

In addition, in relation to the performance display and the movement of the movable accessory YK, the display position and size of the first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, first pending display, or second pending display may be adjusted so that the player can see it. The height may be changed, or the first hold display may not be displayed during the super reach effect. More specifically, even when the movable accessory YK moves and stops at the stop position on the front side of the performance display device SG, a first It may be configured to display one or more of a decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, a first pending display, and a second pending display.

Here, the normal reach effect refers to, for example, a decorative pattern reaching its full potential, and then all decorative patterns stop without displaying a series of moving images such as a battle effect. Indicates a pattern in which the symbol is full and then a series of moving images such as a battle effect are displayed.

<The movable accessory moves after the performance shows a win.>
FIG. 234 is an image diagram of an effect method in which a win is also indicated by moving the movable accessory YK after a win is indicated by the effect displayed on the effect display device SG.

First, the effect display device SG displays a scene that has just evolved into a super reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character are facing each other. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern displayed at the upper right of the effect display device SG is displayed in a ready-to-reach state.

Next, scenes in which both characters attack are displayed in order to encourage which character will win (=an ally character wins and wins).

Next, a scene in which an ally character attacks with a special move is displayed on the effect display device SG. The player can recognize from the display on the performance display device SG that his or her ally character has won and has won. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern is still in the reach state.

Next, the movable accessory YK operates on the front side of the performance display device SG and moves to a position where it can be easily seen by the player. In the effect display device SG, effects are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory YK. At this point, the player can recognize that he or she can win by moving the movable accessory YK as well. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern is still in the reach state.

Next, a scene in which an ally character defeats an enemy character and the ally character wins is displayed on the effect display device SG. At this time, the first decorative pattern becomes "777" and the winning display mode is set. Further, the second decorative pattern also becomes "777", which is a win display mode.

With this configuration, after the player is made to recognize a win by the ready-to-win effect displayed on the effect display device, it is also possible to make the player recognize the win by the movement of the movable accessory.

Furthermore, if the movable accessory moves at a timing that the player does not expect, the player will be more surprised than necessary when the movable accessory operates. By notifying the winning party first through the performance display etc. displayed on the performance display device, it is possible to prepare for the movement of the movable body accessory after the winning notification is notified by the performance display etc., and it is necessary to do so. You can avoid any more surprises.

Furthermore, even if the effect display device malfunctions, it is possible to recognize whether or not there is a win by operating the movable accessory.

<After displaying a win in the performance, the movable accessory moves when the first decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (win display mode)>
In FIG. 235, after displaying a win in the performance displayed on the performance display device SG, the win can also be achieved by the movement of the movable accessory when the first decorative pattern becomes the win mode (win display mode). It is an image diagram about the presentation method shown.

First, the effect display device SG displays a scene that has just evolved into a super reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character are facing each other. The first decorative pattern displayed on the upper right of the effect display device SG is displayed in a ready-to-reach state, and the second decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the effect display device SG is displayed in a fluctuating state.

Next, scenes in which both characters attack are displayed in order to encourage which character will win (=an ally character wins and wins).

Next, a scene in which an ally character attacks with a special move is displayed on the effect display device SG. The player can recognize from the display on the performance display device SG that his or her ally character has won and has won. At this time, the first decorative pattern also becomes "777", which is the winning display mode.

Next, the movable accessory YK operates on the front side of the performance display device SG and moves to a position where it can be easily seen by the player. In the effect display device SG, effects are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory YK. At this point, the player can recognize that he or she can win by moving the movable accessory YK as well. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern is displayed as is in the winning mode.

Next, a scene in which an ally character defeats an enemy character and the ally character wins is displayed on the effect display device SG. At this time, the second decorative pattern also becomes "777" and becomes a winning display mode.

In addition, in the same figure, the case where the first decorative pattern is "777" on the upper right of the effect display device is illustrated, but it is not limited to this,
(1) "777" is stopped and displayed while the first decorative pattern is displayed in a large size near the center of the effect display device SG.
(2) Immediately after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as "777" in the upper right corner of the effect display device, "777" is displayed in a large size near the center of the effect display device SG (the display area is changed),
(3) Immediately after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as “777” in the upper right corner of the effect display device, only one “7” is displayed in a large size near the center of the effect display device SG (the display area is changed) ),
(4) After the movement of the movable accessory YK (action as a performance) is completed, "777" is displayed in a large size near the center of the performance display device SG,
It may be configured as described above.

With this configuration, after the player is made to recognize a win by the ready-to-win effect and the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device, it is also possible to make the player recognize the win by the movement of the movable accessory. can.

Furthermore, if the movable accessory moves at a timing that the player does not expect, the player will be more surprised than necessary when the movable accessory operates. By first notifying the player of a win using the effect display etc. displayed on the effect display device, it is possible to prepare for the movement of the movable accessory object after the win is notified by the effect display etc. You can avoid unnecessary surprises.

Furthermore, even if the effect display device malfunctions, it is possible to recognize whether or not there is a win by operating the movable accessory.

In addition, in the figure, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "777" before the movable accessory YK moves, so that the player is made aware of the win. is not limited to this, but by displaying "50 life" as a display representing the enemy character's physical strength, and subtracting the life by the main character attacking the enemy character, and displaying "0 life". , the player may be made aware that the symbol change will be a hit, or the predetermined image on the performance display device SG may become rainbow-colored, which is the display color indicating that a jackpot is certain, so that the player can play the game. The player may be made aware that the symbol change is a win, or by outputting BGM that reminds the player of a win (BGM that can be output in the case of a win but not in the case of a loss). , the player may be made aware that the symbol change is a win.

<Indicates a win by moving the movable accessory and displaying the first decorative pattern in a specific manner (win display mode) before displaying the win in the performance>
In FIG. 236, a win is achieved because the movable accessory YK moves before a win is indicated by the performance displayed on the performance display device SG, and the first decorative pattern is displayed in a specific manner (win display mode). It is an image diagram about the production method showing.

First, the effect display device SG displays a scene that has just evolved into a super reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character are facing each other. Note that the first decorative pattern displayed on the upper right of the effect display device SG is displayed in a ready-to-reach state, and the second decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the effect display device SG is displayed in a fluctuating state.

Next, scenes in which both characters attack are displayed in order to encourage which character will win (=an ally character wins and wins).

Next, the movable accessory YK operates on the front side of the performance display device SG and moves to a position where it can be easily seen by the player. In the effect display device SG, effects are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory YK. At this point, the player can recognize that his ally character has won and has won. Further, the first decorative pattern also becomes "777", which is the winning display mode.

Next, a scene in which an ally character attacks with a special move is displayed on the effect display device SG. The player can also recognize from the display on the performance display device SG that the ally character has won and the game has been won. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern is displayed as is in the winning mode.

Next, a scene in which an ally character defeats an enemy character and the ally character wins is displayed on the effect display device SG. At this time, the second decorative pattern also becomes "777" and becomes a winning display mode.

With this configuration, the movable accessory is operated and the first decorative pattern is displayed in a win display mode before the player is made to recognize a win in the reach effect displayed on the effect display device. This makes it possible to recognize the hit, and it becomes possible to draw more attention to the movable accessory and the first decorative pattern.

Furthermore, even if the effect display device malfunctions, it is possible to recognize whether or not there is a win by operating the movable accessory.

<<Comparison between when multiple types of movable accessories work and when one type of movable accessory works>>
Next, using FIGS. 237 and 238, the difference between the case where multiple types of movable accessory objects move and the case where one type of movable accessory object moves will be explained.

<The win is indicated by the movement of multiple types of movable objects before the win is displayed in the performance.>
FIG. 237 shows a performance that indicates a win by moving multiple types of movable role objects (movable role object YK, movable role object YK2) before a win is indicated by the effect displayed on the effect display device SG. It is an image diagram about the method.

First, the effect display device SG displays a scene that has just evolved into a super reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character are facing each other. Note that the first decorative pattern displayed on the upper right of the effect display device SG is displayed in a ready-to-reach state, and the second decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the effect display device SG is displayed in a fluctuating state.

Next, scenes in which both characters attack are displayed in order to encourage which character will win (=an ally character wins and wins).

Next, the movable accessory YK and the movable accessory YK2 operate on the front side of the performance display device SG and move to a position where the player can easily see them. In the effect display device SG, effects are displayed in conjunction with the movements of the movable accessory YK and the movable accessory YK2. At this point, the player can recognize that his ally character has won and has won. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern is still in the reach state. In this way, in the configuration illustrated in the figure, there are multiple types of movable accessories such as movable accessories YK and movable accessories YK2, and the movable accessories are predetermined in the battle performance. When operating in the operation pattern, both the movable accessory YK and the movable accessory YK2 are configured to be driven. In addition, the motion patterns of the movable accessory include an action pattern in which only one of the movable accessory YK or the movable accessory YK2 is driven, and an action in which both the movable accessory YK and the movable accessory YK2 are driven. It may be configured to have a pattern.

Next, a scene in which an ally character attacks with a special move is displayed on the effect display device SG. This allows the player to recognize that he/she will win even when the display on the performance display device SG is displayed. Incidentally, at this point, the first decorative pattern is still in the reach state.

Next, a scene in which an ally character defeats an enemy character and the ally character wins is displayed on the effect display device SG. At this time, the first decorative pattern becomes "777" and the winning display mode is set. Further, the second decorative pattern also becomes "777", which is a win display mode.

<One movable accessory moves at a timing different from the super reach performance, indicating the occurrence of a performance other than a hit.>
Next, FIG. 238 is an image diagram of an effect method that shows the occurrence of an effect other than a win by moving one type of movable accessory at a predetermined timing. The movable accessory in the figure is a movable accessory YK2, which is different from the above-mentioned movable accessory YK.

First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". Here, the first decorative pattern is made up of characters and number patterns, and the second decoration pattern is made up of only number patterns.

Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol begin to fluctuate, the first pending display decreases by one, the second pending display decreases by one, and the corresponding A pending display for the production of fluctuations is displayed.

Next, after "6" is displayed on the left and right patterns of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern to form a reach, the movable accessory YK2 moves to the front side of the effect display device SG. This makes it easy for players to visually recognize.

Next, a "NEXT" symbol indicating that re-variation (for example, pseudo-continuous variation) is to be executed is displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG. At this time, in the second decorative pattern, a pattern that suggests re-variation (for example, pseudo-continuous variation) is not displayed.

Next, after the "NEXT" symbol is displayed, the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate again (the stopped state of the first decorative symbol before the symbol fluctuates again is also referred to as "temporary stop"). .

At this time, since the number of reservations remains 3 (pieces), it can be seen that one symbol change is made to appear as if the symbol has changed multiple times.

Next, in the symbol variation that was performed again, a reach was formed again with the left and right symbols being "7", and after that, a super reach effect was executed, and since the variation was a loss, the first decorative symbol and the second Both of the 2 decorative symbols are fixed and stopped at reach loss symbols ("717") that are not doubles.

Furthermore, during the super reach effect, the battle effect between the friendly character and the enemy character is displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG, so even if it is the first decorative pattern, only the numerical pattern is displayed in a small size at the top right of the screen. (also referred to as the "display mode during evacuation") to draw players' attention to the battle performance, and after the battle performance is over, a decorative pattern consisting of characters and number symbols will be displayed in the same way as at the beginning of the fluctuation. It is preferable to display it.

As shown in FIG. 237, when multiple types of movable accessories move, it indicates a win, and as shown in FIG. 238, when one type of movable accessory moves, a different effect from a win occurs ( For example, by configuring the system to indicate the occurrence of a pseudo-connection, the development of a super reach performance, the development of a super reach performance, the occurrence of a look-ahead performance, etc.), the player can draw attention to the number of types in which a movable accessory moves. Can be done.

<After the win is displayed in the production, multiple types of movable accessories move to indicate the win>
FIG. 239 shows a production method that indicates a win by moving multiple types of movable accessory objects (movable accessory YK, movable accessory YK2) after a win is indicated by the performance displayed on the performance display device SG. It is an image diagram about.

First, the effect display device SG displays a scene that has just evolved into a super reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character are facing each other. In addition, the first decorative pattern displayed at the top right of the performance display device SG is displayed in a reach state, and all the second decorative patterns displayed at the top left of the performance display device SG are displayed in a fluctuating state. There is.

Next, scenes in which both characters attack are displayed in order to encourage which character will win (=an ally character wins and wins).

Next, a scene in which an ally character attacks with a special move is displayed on the effect display device SG. This allows the player to recognize that he/she has won from the display on the performance display device SG. Incidentally, at this point, the first decorative pattern is still in the reach state.

Next, the movable accessory YK and the movable accessory YK2 operate on the front side of the effect display device SG and move to a position where the player can easily see them. In the effect display device SG, effects are displayed along with the movements of the movable accessory YK and the movable accessory YK2. Even at this point, the player can recognize that his ally character has won and has won. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern is still in the reach state.

Next, a scene in which an ally character defeats an enemy character and the ally character wins is displayed on the effect display device SG. At this time, the first decorative pattern becomes "777" and the winning display mode is set. Further, the second decorative pattern also becomes "777", which is a win display mode.

With this configuration, even if the performance display device malfunctions, it is possible to recognize whether or not there is a win by operating a plurality of types of movable accessory objects.

Note that the performance before the super reach in FIG. 239 may be configured in the same manner as the configuration shown in FIG. 238.

<Differences in the movement patterns of movable objects during hit and movement check>
Next, using FIG. 240, the difference between the movement pattern of the movable accessory YK at the time of winning and the operation check pattern of the movable accessory YK at the time of power-off recovery will be explained.

Note that the configuration detailed below may be applied to any of FIGS. 233 to 244.

In addition, regarding the operation check of the movable accessory YK, it may be configured such that (1) all operation checks are performed when the power is turned off after a power outage occurs, or (2) the operation check is performed on all operations when the power is turned off. However, if the RAM is cleared and the power is restored after that, the operation check may be executed, but if the power is restored without executing the RAM clear, the operation check may not be executed.

First, the hit operation pattern shown in FIG. 240(a) will be explained.

First, a scene in which an enemy character is attacking an ally character in a super reach performance is displayed on the performance display device SG, and the display is used to encourage whether or not it is a hit.

Next, the movable accessory YK operates on the front side of the performance display device SG and moves to a position where it can be easily seen by the player. In the effect display device SG, effects are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory YK. At this point, the player can recognize that he or she will win by moving the movable accessory YK. Note that the first decorative pattern is still displayed in the reach state.

At this time, the movement pattern of the movable accessory YK is as follows: non-operating position → moving to the operating position → stopping for 5 seconds → retreating to the non-operating position. Here, the non-operating position is an initial position before the movable accessory moves according to an operation pattern such as a predetermined operation pattern, or a position when the movable accessory is not operating. In addition, in the same figure, the case where the movable accessory YK performs a simple action such as "move from non-operating position to operating position" is illustrated, but the movable accessory YK is not limited to this. It may be configured to operate in various modes, such as rotating, moving to a plurality of positions, emitting light, etc. as an operation pattern. In addition, the time required for the movable accessory YK to move from the non-operating position (sometimes referred to as the initial position) to the operating position (sometimes referred to as the stop position) is the time required to move from the operating position to the non-operating position. It may be configured so that the time required is shorter than that required for

Next, the effect display device SG displays a scene in which an ally character attacks an enemy character with a special move, so that the player can recognize that he has won. Note that the first decorative pattern displayed on the upper right of the effect display device SG is still displayed in a reach state, and the second decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the effect display device SG is displayed in a fluctuating state.

Next, the operation pattern (operation check pattern) at the time of power-off recovery shown in FIG. 240(b) will be explained.

First, the effect display device SG displayed a scene in which an enemy character is attacking an ally character in a super reach effect, that is, a super reach effect is in progress and the movable role object is stopped at the initial position. Due to the situation, a power outage has occurred, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG.

Next, since the machine has recovered from the power outage, the operation of the movable accessory YK is being checked. In the effect display device SG, the words "screen returning" are displayed in the lower left corner, but the effect display before the power was turned off has not been restored. Furthermore, during the operation check, effects associated with the movements of the movable accessory YK are not displayed.

At this time, the movement pattern of the operation check of the movable accessory YK is as follows: non-operating position → moving to the operating position → stopping for 1 second → retreating to the non-operating position. In addition, the time during which the movable accessory YK moves to the operating position and stops as an operation check may be the same as the time during which the movable accessory YK moves to the operating position and stops as a performance ( For example, both stopped in front of the effect display device for 5 seconds).

Next, although the operation check has been completed, the performance display does not return until the fluctuation is completed, and only the words "Screen Returning" are displayed.

Incidentally, in the effect display device SG, the background screen after power-off recovery may be configured to be different depending on the gaming state after recovery. For example, if it is in a probability fluctuation state, a red background screen + the text "Returning to the screen" is displayed, and if it is in a non-probability fluctuation state and time reduction game state, a blue background screen + the text "Returning to the screen" is displayed, and in the non-probability fluctuation state. In addition, if the game is in a non-time saving gaming state, a gray background screen + characters such as "Returning to the screen" are displayed.

Further, the movable accessory YK is configured so that it does not operate during the fluctuation or does not operate for a predetermined period of time after the operation check upon power-off recovery is completed.

In this way, by differentiating the movement pattern and movement time between the movement pattern of the movable accessory at the time of winning and the movement pattern of the movement check when the power is turned off, it is possible to determine whether the player has won or not. This can be done to avoid misunderstanding whether it is present or not.

Incidentally, when checking the operation, the configuration may be such that the operation of a part of the movable body is not checked. For example, when a movable accessory with a propeller-like rotating body is provided and the movable accessory acts as a performance, the following steps can be taken: "The movable accessory moves from its initial position to the front side of the performance display device → The object stops at the stop position on the front side of the production display device, and the propeller-shaped rotating body starts rotating → After 5 seconds, the propeller-shaped rotating body stops rotating and the movable accessory moves to its initial position. When the movable accessory moves to the front side of the production display device from its initial position, the propeller-shaped rotating body does not rotate and moves after 1 second. It may also be configured such that the accessory moves to its initial position.

Further, the light emitting pattern of the LED mounted on the movable accessory YK may be configured to be different between the light emitting pattern at the time of a hit and the light emitting pattern for operation check at the time of power failure recovery. For example, in the light emission pattern at the time of a win, the LEDs mounted on the movable accessory YK are made to emit light in a predetermined order, but in the light emission pattern for the operation check at the time of power failure recovery, the LEDs mounted on the movable accessory YK are emitted in a predetermined order. It may be configured to emit light all at once, or it may be configured such that the LEDs mounted on the movable accessory YK do not emit light.

<Differences in the movement patterns of movable objects during hit and movement check 2>
Next, the hit operation pattern shown in FIG. 241(a) will be explained. Note that (b) is the same as FIG. 240(b), so the explanation will be omitted.

First, the effect display device SG displays a scene in which an ally character attacks an enemy character with a special move, so that the player can recognize that he has won. Note that the first decorative pattern displayed on the upper right of the effect display device SG is still displayed in a reach state, and the second decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the effect display device SG is displayed in a fluctuating state.

Next, the movable accessory YK operates on the front side of the performance display device SG and moves to a position where it can be easily seen by the player. In the effect display device SG, effects are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory YK. Even at this point, the player can recognize that he or she will win by the movement of the movable accessory YK. Note that the first decorative pattern is still displayed in the reach state.

At this time, the movement pattern of the movable accessory YK is as follows: non-operating position → moving to the operating position → stopping for 5 seconds → retreating to the non-operating position.

Next, a scene in which an ally character defeats an enemy character and the ally character wins is displayed on the effect display device SG. At this time, the first decorative pattern becomes "777" and the winning display mode is set. Further, the second decorative pattern also becomes "777", which is a win display mode.

In this way, by differentiating the movement pattern and movement time between the movement pattern of the movable accessory at the time of winning and the movement pattern of the movement check when the power is turned off, it is possible to determine whether the player has won or not. This can be done to avoid misunderstanding whether it is present or not.

<Checking the operation of a movable accessory when the power is interrupted and the movable accessory is restored while it is in operation>
Next, FIG. 242 is an image diagram showing an operation check of the movable accessory YK when the power is interrupted and the movable accessory YK returns to normal operation.

First, a scene in which an enemy character is attacking an ally character in a super reach performance is displayed on the performance display device SG, and the situation is such that a hit is likely. The first decorative pattern displayed on the upper right of the effect display device SG is displayed in a ready-to-reach state, and the second decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the effect display device SG is displayed in a fluctuating state.

Next, the movable accessory YK operates on the front side of the performance display device SG and moves to a position where it can be easily seen by the player. In the effect display device SG, effects are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory YK. At this point, the player can recognize that he or she will win by moving the movable accessory YK. Note that the first decorative pattern is still displayed in the reach state.

Next, a power outage has occurred. As a result, no display is performed on the performance display device SG, and the movable accessory YK remains in motion.

Next, upon recovery from the power-off, a process is performed to return the movable accessory YK to its initial position. In the effect display device SG, the characters "screen returning" are displayed at the lower left, and the effect display before the power cut has not been restored, and the display continues until the end of the variation.

Next, we have started checking the operation of the movable accessory YK. The operation pattern according to the operation check is as follows: non-operating position→move to operating position→stop for 1 second→evacuate to non-operating position. In the effect display device SG, effects are not displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory YK.

Next, upon completion of the operation check, the movable accessory YK has returned to its initial position. Even if the operation check is completed, the operation according to the operation pattern of the movable accessory YK before the power cutoff will not be performed again or from the middle.

In this way, when a power outage occurs while a movable accessory is in operation, and the power is restored from the power outage, the movable accessory that was in operation must be returned to its initial position, and then the operation should be checked. This allows you to accurately check the operation of movable objects.

(Example of change)
If a power outage occurs while the movable accessory YK is in operation, and the power is restored from the power outage, the operation check of the movable accessory YK will begin, but the movement pattern for the operation check is as follows: Move to the operating position → 1 A configuration may be adopted in which the operation is stopped for a second and then retreated to a non-operating position, and the process of returning to the initial position immediately after power-off recovery is not performed. In this case, when the power is restored from a power outage, the process for moving the movable accessory YK to the operating position is started, but the movable accessory YK does not move immediately, but the control to move the movable accessory YK by checking the operation is performed. However, the movable accessory YK will move to the operating position from the time when the control corresponds to the already operated position.

<Checking the operation of the movable accessory when the power is interrupted and restored while the movable accessory is in operation 2>
Next, FIG. 243 is also an image diagram showing an operation check of the movable accessory YK when the power is interrupted and the movable accessory YK returns to operation.

The difference from FIG. 242 is that first, the effect display device SG displays a scene in which an ally character attacks an enemy character with a special move, and the player can recognize that he has won. This is the point.

Even with this configuration, if a power outage occurs while the movable accessory is in operation, and the power is restored from the power outage, the movable accessory that was in operation will be returned to its initial position, By performing an operation check after that, it is possible to accurately check the operation of the movable accessory.

As a specific example of a case where a power outage occurs during the operation of a movable accessory that can be applied to this example, the following configuration may be used.

<If power outage does not occur>
"Symbol variation starts → Super reach effect starts executing → At the predetermined timing of super reach effect, movable accessory YK starts moving from the initial position → Movable accessory YK moves to the front side of the effect display device SG. Stops at the stop position for 5 seconds → Movable accessory YK starts moving toward the initial position → Movable accessory YK moves to the initial position and ends the operation.
<When power outage occurs>
"Symbol variation starts → Super reach effect starts executing → At the predetermined timing of super reach effect, movable accessory YK starts moving from the initial position → Movable accessory YK moves to the front side of the effect display device SG. Stops for 1 second at the stop position → A power outage occurs and the power outage processing is executed → Recovery from a power outage → Movable accessory YK starts moving toward the initial position → Movable accessory YK moves Starts operation as a check → Movable accessory YK stops for 1 second at the stop position on the front side of production display device SG → Movable accessory YK starts moving toward the initial position → Movable accessory YK starts moving Move to position and complete the operation.”

In addition, if the power is cut off just before the end of the symbol variation (for example, 1 second before the end of the variation), the effect display device will continue to display "Returning to the screen" while the next symbol variation is being executed. may be configured. In other words, if the time from when the power is restored until the end of the symbol variation is longer than a predetermined time, the effect display device will display "Returning to the screen" until the end of the symbol variation, and the symbol will continue to change after the power is restored. If the time until the end is less than a predetermined time, the effect display device may be configured to display "Returning to the screen" until the end of the next symbol variation.

In addition, the operation time of the movable object as a performance, such as the movement of the movable object during the super reach performance mentioned above (the time from starting the movement from the initial position to returning to the initial position and ending the movement) may be configured to take a longer time than the execution time of the operation check. With such a configuration, even if the power is cut off in the middle of symbol fluctuation, it becomes easier to complete the operation check before the next symbol fluctuation starts, and the player It is possible to prevent discomfort.

<Image of production on reel-type gaming machines>
Next, FIG. 244 is an image diagram of the operation of the movable accessory YK in the reel-type gaming machine and the performance by the performance display device. Although the above-mentioned presentation methods related to FIGS. 233 to 243 can be applied to reel-type gaming machines, there are structural differences from pachinko gaming machines, such as reel-type gaming machines not having decorative patterns. Therefore, an example of a reel type gaming machine will be explained.

First, the first game of the continuous performance has just started, and the performance display device SG is displaying a scene in which an ally character and an enemy character are facing each other. Note that a physical strength gauge is displayed above each character, indicating that the player who reduces the opponent's physical strength gauge to 0 wins.

Next, when the second game (the next game after the first game) is started by operating the start lever, a scene in which an ally character attacks is displayed, and the enemy character's physical strength gauge is slightly decreasing. Note that the scene is displayed until the end of the second game. In addition, regarding what kind of effects will be executed in each game (such as who will attack), everything related to the continuous effect will be determined when the first game of the continuous effect starts (when the start lever operation is accepted). The configuration may be such that the game is determined, or the performance related to the game to be executed at the start of each game (when the operation of the start lever is accepted) is determined. Further, the content of the performance may be configured to be different depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Next, when the third game (the next game after the second game) is started by operating the start lever, a scene in which the enemy character attacks is displayed, and the ally character's physical strength gauge is slightly decreasing. Note that the scene is displayed until the end of the third game.

Note that the order of the attack scenes of the friendly character in the second game and the enemy character in the third game may be reversed, or there may be cases in which only one character attacks in both the second game and the third game. . Alternatively, a structure may be adopted in which the degree of expectation of a hit is indicated by providing a strong attack, a medium attack, and a weak attack, and providing a difference in the amount of decrease in the physical strength gauge.

Next, when the fourth game (the next game after the third game) is started by operating the start lever, the movable accessory YK is moving, and the player can recognize that he or she has won. It becomes.

Next, the effect display device SG displays a scene in which an ally character attacks with a special move and the enemy character's physical strength gauge becomes 0, and the player can also see the hit on the effect display device SG. It is now possible to recognize what is happening. In other words, in the above-mentioned Pachinko machine, the player is made aware of a win by stopping the decorative symbols, but in this figure, the player is made aware of the winning by displaying a scene where the enemy character's physical strength gauge reaches 0. It makes you realize that it's a hit.

Next, a scene is displayed in which the friendly character defeats the enemy character and the words "WIN" are displayed, clearly indicating that the player has won.

As described above, although there are structural differences between the Pachinko gaming machine and the reel-type gaming machine, they can be used in the same way in terms of production methods.

In addition, in reel-type gaming machines, the game progresses through player operations (start lever operation, first stop button operation, second stop button operation, third stop button operation), so power outages occur and the power supply is interrupted. Even when the player returns from an interruption, it is possible to configure the system so that the player can return from the performance display based on the timing of the most recent operation by the player.

(Example of changing movable accessories)
In addition, in the embodiments of the pachinko game machine and the reel type game machine described above, the movable accessory YK that is configured so that it cannot be touched by the player is described, but the movable object YK that can be touched by the player is described. There are also accessories (for example, movable accessories for performance provided in the gaming machine frame, ones that move so that the sub-input button SB protrudes upward).

If a movable accessory that can be touched by a player is operated during an operation check upon power recovery, there is a risk that the player may accidentally touch it and be injured.

Therefore, in the operation check at the time of power recovery, movable accessories that can be touched by the player are not operated (operation check is not performed), and movable accessories configured so that the player cannot touch them. It is also possible to use a different control.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not easily cause injuries to players.

Further, the movable accessory (movable accessory YK, movable accessory YK2) may be configured to operate at the timing when the player presses the sub input button SB.

In this case, a button image for prompting the user to press the sub-input button SB during the super reach effect is displayed on the effect display device SG for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), and within the predetermined period (= within the valid period of the sub-input button SB) ), when the sub-input button SB is pressed, the movable accessory objects (movable accessory YK, movable accessory YK2) operate.

With this configuration, the player can feel as if he or she has won by his/her own operation.

In addition, if the sub-input button SB is not pressed within the valid period of the sub-input button SB and the valid period ends, the movable object (movable object YK, movable object The accessory YK2) may be configured to operate.

In addition, in this example, a mode in which the movable accessory YK falls from above the production display device SG is illustrated, but the shape, action pattern, initial position, etc. of the movable accessory YK may be changed as appropriate. There is no problem.

As a modification of the movable accessory, for example, a door member that can be slid laterally is provided on the right side and the left side of the performance display device SG, respectively, and the initial position is such that the door (shutter) appears to be open. It may be arranged such that when the movable accessory is operated, it moves to a position where the door (shutter) appears to be closed (the performance on the performance display device SG becomes invisible). Furthermore, the movable accessory YK may be configured to be provided with a display device (sometimes referred to as a sub-liquid crystal), and in such a configuration, the effects displayed on the above-mentioned effect display device SG may be displayed on the movable accessory YK. It may be configured to be displayed on the display device of the accessory YK.

<Operation timing of movable objects>
Next, FIG. 245 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation timing of the movable accessory and the performance execution period, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. The configuration shown in the figure may be applied to or combined with all the configurations according to this example. Additionally, it should be noted that the present invention is applicable to both pachinko gaming machines and reel-type gaming machines.

In addition, production 1 and production 2 (production execution content) in the figure are defined by dividing productions with different camera work into production 1, production 2, etc. As a specific example, battle In the production, a scene where an ally character and an enemy character are facing each other corresponds to Production 1, a scene where an ally character punches an enemy character corresponds to Production 2, and a production where the ally character punches the enemy character and a movable body role. A performance in which objects move corresponds to performance 3. Note that production 1, production 2, etc. are not limited to the production divided by each scene during the battle production, and for example, production 1 and the first decoration are from the start of fluctuation until the first decorative symbol becomes a reach. The period in which the symbol becomes a reach and the normal reach effect is executed is divided into effect 2, and the scene in which the normal reach effect ends, the super reach effect starts, and the friendly character and enemy character are facing each other becomes effect 3. It's okay.

In addition, in a reel-type gaming machine, the period from the start of reel rotation to the reception of the first stop operation (operation of the stop button) is the first effect, and the period from the reception of the first stop operation (operation of the stop button) to the second effect. The period until a stop operation (operation of a stop button) is received may be divided into different effects for each operation of an operating member controlled by the main control board M, such as a second effect.

In addition, the winning recognition performance is a performance that allows the player to recognize that he or she has won. Examples include a performance in which an ally character's punch hits an enemy character, or a performance in which a movable object is used during a battle performance. Examples include a performance in which a role model moves, a performance in which the background is displayed in rainbow colors, a performance in which a sound is output from a speaker only when there is a win, a performance in which "WIN" is displayed, etc. The winning recognition performance may be the entire performance period of one performance execution content such as performance 1 and performance 2, or may be the entire performance period of one performance execution content such as performance 1 and performance 2. The timing may be a timing that can be executed (timing when a punch from an ally character hits an enemy character, timing when a movable accessory starts operating during execution of a battle performance, etc.).

Positions 1 and 2 of the movable accessory are such that position 2 corresponds to the above-mentioned initial position, and position 1 corresponds to the above-mentioned stop position (the position where it stops for a predetermined time on the front side of the effect display device after operating from the initial position). ).

In addition, in the same figure, it is illustrated that it acts from left to right as time passes.

<Pattern 1A>
The operation details of pattern 1A are as follows:
(1) Start executing effect 1 (2) Start moving to position 1 while executing effect 1 (3) Complete moving to position 1 while executing effect 1 (4) Stay at position 1 for a certain period of time while executing effect 1 (5 ) Movement starts at position 2 while performance 1 is being executed (6) Movement is completed at position 2 while performance 1 is being executed (7) Winning recognition performance is displayed (8) Performance 2 begins to be executed.The operation is as described above.

As shown in (1) to (6), the load on performance control can be reduced by configuring the process from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the end of the movement to be completed with one performance execution content called performance 1. .

In addition, as in (1) to (7), by executing the movement of the movable accessory and the display of the winning recognition performance within the period of one performance execution content, the player can increase the expectation of winning. You can experience the whole process from holding the ball until you are sure you hit it, with no discomfort.

<Pattern 1B>
The operation details of pattern 1B are as follows:
(1) Start executing effect 1 (2) Start moving to position 1 while executing effect 1 (3) Complete moving to position 1 while executing effect 1 (4) Stay at position 1 for a certain period of time while executing effect 1 (5 ) Starts moving to position 2 while performance 1 is being executed (6) Completes moving to position 2 while performance 1 is being executed (7) Starts performing performance 2 (8) Displays winning recognition performance It will work as described above.

As shown in (1) to (6), the load on performance control can be reduced by configuring the process from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the end of the movement to be completed with one performance execution content called performance 1. .

In addition, as shown in (1) to (7), the process from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the completion of the movement is completed in Production 1, and the display of the winning recognition production is executed in Production 2, which is different from Production 1. By configuring this, the player can distinguish and reliably recognize the performance in which the movable accessory moves and the winning recognition performance, and can prevent the player from misperceiving the result of the performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned patterns 1A and 1B, the case where the performance 1 and the performance 2 are executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance 3, the performance 4, etc. may be provided, and the winning recognition performance The execution timing may be changed. As a specific example, in pattern 1A, the process from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the end of the movement may be completed in performance 1, and the winning recognition performance may be executed in performance 3 after performance 2 is executed. good.

<Pattern 2A>
The operation details of pattern 2A are as follows:
(1) Start execution of performance 1 (2) Start moving to position 1 while performance 1 is running (3) Complete movement to position 1 while performance 1 is running (4) Display winning recognition performance (5) Stay at position 1 for a certain period of time Switches from performance 1 to performance 2 while being held. (6) Starts movement to position 2 while performance 2 is being executed. (7) Completes movement to position 2 while performance 2 is being executed. It will work as described above.

As in (2), (3), (6), and (7), the period in which the movable accessory is being driven from position 2 to position 1 or from position 1 to position 2 is one By configuring the performance to be completed according to the performance execution content, the load on performance control can be reduced.

In addition, as in (1) to (5), by configuring the winning recognition effect to be executed during the period from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the completion of the movement, the player can pay attention to the movable accessory. You can visually confirm the winning recognition performance smoothly.

In addition, as in (5), in the case where the process from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the completion of the movement is configured to be executed across two performance execution contents of performance 1 and performance 2, from performance 1 to performance 2. By configuring the movable accessory to stop at the stop position at the switching timing, the player can smoothly switch the performance from performance 1 to performance 2 while paying attention to the movable accessory.

<Pattern 2B>
The operation details of pattern 2B are as follows:
(1) Start executing effect 1 (2) Start moving to position 1 while executing effect 1 (3) Complete moving to position 1 while executing effect 1 (4) Effect 1 after holding position 1 for a certain period of time (5) Starts moving to position 2 during performance 2. (6) Completes movement to position 2 while performance 2 is being executed. (7) Displays winning recognition performance.

As in (2), (3), (6), and (7), the period in which the movable accessory is being driven from position 2 to position 1 or from position 1 to position 2 is one By configuring the performance to be completed according to the performance execution content, the load on performance control can be reduced.

In addition, as in (4), in the case where the process from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the completion of the movement is configured to be executed across two performance execution contents, production 1 and production 2, the process from production 1 to production 2 is performed. By configuring the movable accessory to stop at the stop position at the switching timing, the player can smoothly switch the performance from performance 1 to performance 2 while paying attention to the movable accessory.

In addition, in the above-mentioned patterns 2A and 2B, the case where the performance 1 and the performance 2 are executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance 3, the performance 4, etc. may be provided, and the winning recognition performance The execution timing may be changed. As a specific example, in pattern 2B, the process from the start of the motion of the movable body accessory to the end of the motion is completed in production 1 and production 2, and after performance 2 is executed, the winning recognition production is executed in production 3. You may.

<Pattern 3A>
The operation details of pattern 3A are as follows:
(1) Start executing effect 1 (2) Start moving to position 1 while executing effect 1 (3) Complete moving to position 1 while executing effect 2 (4) Stay at position 1 for a certain period of time while executing effect 2 (5 ) Movement starts at position 2 while performance 2 is being executed (6) Movement is completed at position 2 while performance 3 is being executed (7) Winning recognition performance is displayed (8) Performance 4 begins to be executed.

In addition, as in (6) and (7), by configuring the operation period of the movable accessory and the execution timing of the winning recognition performance to be executed with the same performance execution content, the player can be more likely to win. You can experience the whole process from feeling hopeful until you are sure of winning through a series of productions without feeling out of place.

In addition, as shown in (2), (3), (5), and (6), two performances are performed from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the completion of the movement: performance 1 and performance 2, or performance 2 and performance 3. When configured to perform across different content, the movable accessory is driven at the timing when the performance execution content switches, allowing the player to pay attention to the movable accessory and smoothly switch the performance to a different performance execution content. can be executed.

<Pattern 3B>
The operation details of pattern 3B are as follows:
(1) Start executing effect 1 (2) Start moving to position 1 while executing effect 1 (3) Complete moving to position 1 while executing effect 2 (4) Stay at position 1 for a certain period of time while executing effect 2 (5 ) Start moving to position 2 while performance 2 is being executed (6) Complete movement to position 2 while performance 3 is being executed (7) Start performing performance 4 (8) Display winning recognition performance It will work as described above.

In addition, as in (1) to (7), the process from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the completion of the movement is completed in Production 1, Production 2, and Production 3, and the display of the winning recognition production is executed in Production 4. With this configuration, the player can distinguish and reliably recognize the effect in which the movable accessory moves and the winning recognition effect, and can prevent the player from misperceiving the result of the effect.

In addition, as shown in (2), (3), (5), and (6), two performances are performed from the start of the movement of the movable accessory to the completion of the movement: performance 1 and performance 2, or performance 2 and performance 3. When configured to perform across different content, the movable accessory is driven at the timing when the performance execution content switches, allowing the player to pay attention to the movable accessory and smoothly switch the performance to a different performance execution content. can be executed.

P Reel-type gaming machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Loading reception sensor D20s First loading sensor, D30s Second loading sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch D90 Coin shooter, D100 Blocker D130 Upper panel, D140 Lower panel D150 Decorative lamp unit, D160 Reel window D170 Medal slot, D180 Start lamp D290 Replay lamp, D300 Insertable lamp D200 Credit number display device, D210 Input number indicator light D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game status display device D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (press order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member D341 Medal receiving opening D342 Medal falling surface D343 Medal non-falling surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting/reset button C Main control chip, M50 Reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Minimum game interval timer S Sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Reel backlight S40 Performance display device, SC Sub-control chip E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device, H10s 1st payout sensor H20s 2nd payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disk, H50a Disk rotation axis H60 Game medal outlet, H70 Release biasing means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bet button lamp, S60 Stop button lamp K Reel board , K10 Reel motor K20 Reel sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub-input button KHc High security obstacle counter, YKc-1 Counter for remaining games in advantageous section FZt Freeze execution timer RU Reel unit, BU Pedestal section, H62 Ejection guide section, H64 Inclined surface HS Medal auxiliary tank, BS Screw, DE Full detection electrode M55 First end, M57 Second end, M58 Overlapping part, M59 Cut MW Reel frame, MO Reel band M Main control board MN11ta-A 1st Main game winning/failure lottery table, MN11ta-B Second main game winning/failure lottery table MN11ta-H Auxiliary game winning/failure lottery table, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination Lottery table, MN41ta-H Lottery table for determining auxiliary game symbols MN51ta-A Lottery table for determining first main game variation mode, MN51ta-B Lottery table for determining second main game variation mode MN51ta-H Lottery table for determining auxiliary game variation mode Table, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP22t-B 2nd main game starting opening electric accessory opening timer MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34t Special game Timer MP52c Time saving number counter, MT10 Command sending buffer A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start opening A11s 1st main game start opening ball entry detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st Main game symbol display section, A21h 1st main game symbol reservation display section B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start opening B11s 2nd main game start opening ball entry detection device, B11d 2nd main game start opening electric Accessories B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g Second main game symbol display section B21h Second main game symbol reservation display section C First and second main game common peripheral equipment, C10 First big prize opening C11s First big Winning hole prize detection device, C11d 1st big winning hole electric accessory C20 2nd big winning hole, C21s 2nd big winning hole prize detection device C21d 2nd big winning hole electric accessory, D30 Game area D44 Launch handle D32 Outer rail , D34 Inner rail H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game starting port H11s Auxiliary game starting port entry detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display section, H21h Auxiliary game symbol holding display section S Sub-control board, SM Production display control means (sub-main control board)
SG Effect display device SG10 Display area, SG11 Decorative symbol display area SG12 First hold display area, SG13 Second hold display area KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device, KE10 Payout unit D16 Transparent plate, KR Prize ball rail KT Prize ball tank, KH Prize ball payout control board Ea Power switch, D42 Launch device E Power supply unit, D40 Launch control board DL10 Left-handed hitting area, DR10 Right-handed hitting area ML10 Left-handed hitting route (first downstream route), MR10 Right-handed hitting route (Second downstream route)
D50 Right-handed hitting route outlet NKc Ball entry counter P10 Left general prize opening, P20 Right general winning hole HSc Left-handed hitting instruction counter, MSc Right-handed hitting instruction counter MP51c Probability variable number counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small hit game timer, MP41t -2 Ejection standby timer C22 Specific area (V winning hole), C20-1 Box-shaped member C23 2nd big winning hole outlet, C23s 2nd big winning hole discharge detection device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C22s V winning hole Entering ball detection device SM26c Pre-read performance execution counter SM24t Power-on timer SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Consecutive hits counter SB Sub input button, SBs Sub input button input detection device KH Prize ball payout control board, KE Prize ball payout device 3100 Transmission/reception control means 3110 Reception control means, 3111 Main side reception information temporary storage means 3112 ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means, 3210 Transmission control means 3300 Payout control means, 3310 Payout processing related information temporary storage means 3311a First main game start port Winning counter, 3311b 2nd main game starting opening winning counter 3311c 1st big winning opening winning counter, 3311d 2nd big winning opening winning counter 3311e General winning opening winning counter, 3312 Number of balls held counter 3313 Enclosed game ball number counter, 3400 Firing Control means 3410 Launch control related information temporary storage means, 3500 Initial processing control means at the time of power cut/return from power cut 3510 Temporary storage means for information at power cut 40 Launch control device, 42 Launch device KS Prize ball permission sensors, EU ECO unit 50 Operation unit device, 2121 Normal prize detection device 2122 Normal electric accessory, 2221 Sorting prize detection device 2222 Sorting electric accessory, 2224a Shielding member 2224-1 Specific area ball entry detection device, 2224-2 Ejected ball detection device M40 Main board case, M80 Gate CPUMC Microprocessor, SH Performance display device SH10 Identification segment, SH20 Ratio segment M90 Setting display LED

Equipped with a stop switch with an operation part,
When the operating section of the stop switch is pressed down in a situation where the operating section is at an initial position, the operating section is configured to be able to move from the initial position through a detection position to a maximum push position. ,
When the operation section of the stop switch is released from being pressed while it is at the maximum push-in position, the operation section can move from the maximum push-in position to the detection position and to the initial position. It is configured as follows.
The distance from the detection position to the maximum pushing position is not 0,
The distance from the initial position to the detection position is a distance that exceeds the distance from the detection position to the maximum pushing position,
During the time period from when the operation section of the stop switch is pressed down to the maximum pressing position by the player and when the operation section is released, until the timing at which the operation section moves to the initial position, the reels are It is shorter than the time from the timing when the stop operation of the stop switch is accepted by the player while the reels are rotating (the timing is the timing at which the reels move the maximum distance) to the timing at which the reels stop after the reels have moved the maximum distance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Claims (1)

A production display section that can display production;
Equipped with movable parts for performance,
has a first performance displayed on the performance display section,
While the first performance is being executed, the player is configured to be able to execute a result-suggesting performance that notifies the player that there is a high possibility that an advantageous result will be given;
During execution of the first performance, the movable object for performance may move in a predetermined movement pattern after the result suggestion performance is executed;
When the power is restored from a power outage, the movable parts for performance are configured to operate according to the operation check pattern.
If a power cut occurs while the movable part for performance is operating in the predetermined movement pattern, after the power is restored, the movable part for performance is configured to operate in the movement check pattern, and the movable part for performance is configured to operate in the operation check pattern, A gaming machine characterized in that the operation related to the predetermined operation pattern is not executed even after the operation of the check pattern is completed.

Images